Ly

ie,

SSN

Ss

SAE SOO
SNe

Z

LI
Drs

S

SRR EE
MMOy RK

PRESENTED TO

J. F. GATES CLARKE

BY
ROBERT L. WEBSTER
PULLMAN, WASHINGTON

1950

Mecgeert /9 fe «1908

| M- dehacet fog
a .

ee loe+. cofttaae)
tat Gar Ane a OIE. L
AN im Daferk beg gosta
EEE Sa
abnaf, vee wthed Ow
ees: besfreal Core by a och; —
hie; he had geo tend ye
4 oblaie taoplazuuonk «4 A
llecla 7. a6 es peft
fp mcedt FE, cn tig pw

i
afficars ¥ ke Life Fe

ofru tlogeca ll, NED? Be Ca 14
Ce cateG fieatied, “ay Vx

Alnke of Keo a
Aipublc oe Eovnvece?, a
Eke, Me fark cecctl accads be
ae) sof Vie Lingpoaud :
stp Faden the Coo “ait ES

Ae heek 7 EL
a hey ile Ly, fertoveranse
pothew gual he, (eegerebcle> Das
PT ee ee
qecthace 4° wood ae Le i

parce oes elles haps vomlh

X

ee a prope Lo Ves ee

Te

lo gee’ he Pe Pes
fy Celleheege.

es 1

ya

Atte LS7ee
—

\

« “<6 |

sews

THE WORLD ox MERCATOR'S PROJECTION snewixe tHe ZOOGEOGRAPHICAL REGIONS, ayo tae APPROXIMATE UNDULATIONS or tne OCEAN BED.

Pista saxon

OSE
be ti a = Sts Pa NEE

D arte
pees Or
wo

|
s-—_+—"—_+_ +=

New York: Harper & Brothers

\TE UNDULATIONS or rae OCEAN BED.

al elen I,

7

a Long. East of

100 LO

Stanford's Geographical Hstab* London:

THE GEOGRAPHICAL

DISTRIBUTION OF ANIMALS.

WITH A STUDY OF THE RELATIONS OF LIVING AND EXTINCT
FAUNAS AS ELUCIDATING THE PAST CHANGES
OF THE EARTH’S SURFACE.

By ALFRED RUSSEL WALLACE,

AUTHOR OF THE “MALAY ARCHIPELAGO,” ETC.

IN TWO VOLUMES.

Vor. L

WITH MAPS AND ILLUSTRATIONS.

NEW YORE:
HARPER & BROTHERS, PUBLISHERS,

FRANKLIN SQUARE.

1876.

PREFACE.

THE present work is an attempt to collect and summarize the
existing information on the Distribution of Land Animals;
and to explain the more remarkable and interesting of the
facts, by means of established laws of physical and organic
change.

The main idea, which is here worked out in some detail for
the whole earth, was stated sixteen years ago in the concluding
pages of a paper on the “Zoological Geography of the Malay
Archipelago,” which appeared in the Journal of Proceedings of
the Linnean Society for 1860; and again, in a paper read before
the Royal Geographical Society in 1863, it was briefly sum-
marized in the following passage :—

“My object has been to show the important bearing of
researches into the natural history of every part of the world,
upon the study of its past history. An accurate knowledge of
any groups of birds or of insects and of their geographical dis-
tribution, may enable us to map out the islands and continents
of a former epoch,—the amount of difference that exists be-
tween the animals of adjacent districts being closely related
to preceding geological changes. By the collection of such
minute facts, alone, can we hope to fill up a great gap in the

vi PREFACE.

past history of the earth as revealed by geology, and obtain
some indications of the existence of those ancient lands which
now lie buried beneath the ocean, and have left us nothing but
these living records of their former existence.”

The detailed study of several groups of the birds and insects
collected by myselt in the East, brought prominently before me
some of the curious problems of Geographical Distribution ;
but I should hardly have ventured to treat the whole subject,
had it not been for the kind encouragement of Mr. Darwin and
Professor Newton, who, about six years ago, both suggested that
I should undertake the task. I accordingly set to work; but
goon became discouraged by the great dearth of materials in
many groups, the absence of general systematic works, and the
excessive confusion that pervaded the classification. Neither
was it easy to decide on any satisfactory method of treating
the subject. ‘ During the next two years, however, several im-
portant catalogues and systematic treatises appeared, which
induced me to resume my work; and during the last three years
it has occupied a large portion of my time.

After much consideration, and some abortive trials, an outline
plan of the book was matured; and as this is, so far as I am
aware, quite novel, it will be well to give a few of the reasons
for adopting it.

Most of the previous writings on Geographical Distribution
appeared to me to be unsatisfactory, because they drew their
conclusions from a more or less extensive selection of facts; and
did not clearly separate groups of facts of unequal value, or
those relating to groups of animals of unequal rank. As an
example of what is‘meant, I may refer to Mr. Andrew Murray’s
large and valuable work on the Geographical Distribution of
Mammalia, in which an immense number of coloured maps are

.

A

PREFACE. Vii

used to illustrate the distribution of various groups of animals,
These maps are not confined to groups of any fixed rank, but
are devoted to a selection of groups of various grades. Some
show the range of single species of a genus—as the lion, the
tiger, the puma, and a species of fox; others are devoted to
sections of genera,—as the true wolves ; others to genera,—as the
hyenas, and the bears; others to portions of families,—as the
flying squirrels, and the oxen with the bisons; others to families,
—as the Mustelidz, and the Hystricide; and others to groups
of families or to orders,—as the Insectivora, and the opossums
with the kangaroos. But in no one grade are all the groups
treated alike. Many genera are wholly unnoticed, while several
families are only treated in combination with others, or are
represented by some of the more important genera.

In making these observations I by no means intend to
criticise Mr. Murray’s book, but merely to illustrate by an
example, the method which has been hitherto employed, and
which seems to me not well adapted to enable us to establish
the foundations of the science of distribution on a secure basis.
To do this, uniformity of treatment appeared to me essential,
both as a matter of principle, and to avoid all imputation of a
partial selection of facts, which may be made to prove anything.
I determined, therefore, to take in succession every well-estab-
lished family of terrestrial vertebrates, and to give an account of
the distribution of all its component genera, as far as materials
were available. Species, as such, are systematically disregarded,
—firstly, because they are so numerous as to be unmanageable ;
and, secondly, because they represent the most recent modifica-
tions of form, due to a variety of often unknown causes, and
are therefore not so clearly connected with geographical changes
as are the natural groups of species termed genera ; which may
be considered to represent the average and more permanent

viii PREFACE.

distribution of an organic type, and to be more clearly influenced
by the various known or inferred changes in the organic and
physical environment. °

This systematic review of the distribution of families and
genera, now forms the last part of my book—Geographical
Zoology; but it was nearly the first written, and the copious
materials collected for it enabled me to determine the zoo-
geographical divisions of the earth (regions and sub-regions) to
be adopted. I next drew up tables of the families and genera
found in each region and sub-region ; and this afforded a basis
for the geographical treatment of the subject—Zoological Geo-
eraphy—the most novel, and perhaps the most useful and
generally interesting part of my work. While this was in progress
I found it necessary to make a careful summary of the distribu-
tion of extinct Mammalia. This was a difficult task, owing
to the great uncertainty that prevails as to the affinities of many
of the fossils, and my want of practical acquaintance with
Paleontology ; but having carefully examined and combined
the works of the best authors, I have given what I believe is
the first connected sketch of the relation of extinct Mammalia
to the distribution of living groups, and have arrived at some
very interesting and suggestive results.

It will be observed that man is altogether omitted from
the series of the animal kingdom as here given, and some ex-
planation of this omission may perhaps be required. If the
genus Homo had been here treated like all other genera, nothing
more than the bare statement—“ universally distributed ”—
could have been given;—and this would inevitably have pro-
voked the criticism that it convéyed no information. If, on the
other hand, I had given an outline of the distribution of the
varieties or races of man, I should have departed from the plan
of my work for no sufficient reason. Anthropology is a science

/ PREFACE, ix

by itself; and it seems better to omit it altogether from a
zoological work, than to treat it in a necessarily superficial
manner.

The best method of illustrating a work of this kind was a
matter requiring much consideration. To have had a separate
coloured or shaded map for each family would have made
the work too costly, as the terrestrial vertebrates alone
would have required more than three hundred maps. I had
also doubts about the value of this mode of illustration, as it
seemed rather to attract attention to details than to favour the
development of general views. J determined therefore to adopt
a plan, suggested in conversation by Professor Newton; and to
have one general map, showing the regions and sub-regions,
which could be referred to by means of a series of numbers.
These references I give in the form of diagrammatic headings
to each family; and, when the map has become familiar,
these will, I believe, convey at a glance a body of important
information.

Taking advantage of the recent extension of our knowledge
of the depths of the great oceans, I determined to give upon this
map a summary of our knowledge of the contours of the ocean
bed, by means of tints of colour increasing in intensity with
the depth. Such amap, when it can be made generally accurate,
will be of the greatest service in forming an estimate of the
more probable changes of sea and land during the Tertiary
period ; and it is on the effeets of such changes that any satis-
factory explanation of the facts of distribution must to a great
extent depend.

Other important factors in determining the actual distribution
of animals are, the zones of altitude above the sea level, and the
strongly contrasted character of the surface as regards vege-
tation—a primary condition for the support of animal life. I

x PREFACE.

therefore designed a series of six maps of the regions, drawn on
a uniform scale, on which the belts of altitude are shown by
contour-shading, while the forests, pastures, deserts, and peren-
nial snows, are exhibited by means of appropriate tints of colour.

These maps will, I trust, facilitate the study of geographical
distribution as a science, by showing, in some cases, an adequate
cause in the nature of the terrestrial surface for the actual dis-
tribution of certain groups of animals. As it is hoped they will
be constantly referred to, double folding has been avoided, and
they are consequently rather small; but Mr. Stanford, and his
able assistant in the map department, Mr. Bolton, have taken
great care in working out the details from the latest observations;
and this, combined with the clearness and the beauty of their
execution, will I trust render them both interesting and in-
structive.

In order to make the book more intelligible to those readers
who have no special knowledge of systematic zoology, and to
whom most of the names with which its pages are often crowded
must necessarily be unmeaning, I give a series of twenty plates,
each one illustrating at once the physical aspect and the special
zoological character of some well-marked division of a region.
Great care has been taken to associate in the pictures, such species
only as do actually occur together in nature ; so that each plate
represents a scene which is, at all events, not an impossible one.
The species figured all belong to groups which are either pecu-
liar to, or very characteristic of, the region whose zoology they
illustrate ; and it is hoped that these pictures will of themselves
serve to convey a notion of the varied types of the higher
animals in their true geographical relations. The artist, Mr. J.
B. Zwecker, to whose talent as a zoological draughtsman and
great knowledge both of animal and vegetable forms we are
indebted for this set of drawings, died a few weeks after he

PREFACE. x1

had put the final touches to the proofs. He is known to many
readers by his vigorous illustrations of the works of Sir Samuel
Baker, Livingstone, and many other travellers—but these, his
last series of plates, were, at my special request, executed with
a care, delicacy, and artistic finish, which his other designs
seldom exhibit. It must, however, be remembered, that the
figures of animals here given are not intended to show specific
or generic characters for the information of the scientific zoolo-
gist, but merely to give as accurate an idea as possible, of some
of the more remarkable and more restricted types of beast and
bird, amid the characteristic scenery of their native country ;—
and in carrying out this object there are probably few artists
who would have succeeded better than Mr. Zwecker has
done.

The general arrangement of the separate parts of which the
work is composed, has been, to some extent, determined by
the illustrations and maps, which all more immediately belong
to Part III. It was at first intended to place this part last, but
as this arrangement would have brought all the illustrations
into the second volume, its place was changed,—perhaps in
other respects for the better, as it naturally follows Part II.
Yet for persons not well acquainted with zoology, it will per-
haps be advisable to read the more important articles of Part
IV. (and especially the observations at the end of each order)
after Part IL, thus making Part III. the conclusion of the
work,

Part IV. is, in fact, a book of reference, in which the distri-
bution of all the families and most of the genera of the higher
animals, is given in systematic order. Part III. is treated
somewhat more popularly; and, although it is necessarily
crowded with scientific rames (without which the inferences

xii PREFACE,

and conclusions would have nothing solid to rest on), these may
be omitted by the non-scientific reader, or merely noted as a
certain number or proportion of peculiar generic types. Many
English equivalents to family and generic names are, however,
given; and, assisted by these, it is believed that any reader
capable of understanding Lyell’s “ Principles,” or Darwin’s
“Origin,” will have no difficulty in following the main argu-
ments and appreciating the chief conclusions arrived at in the
present work.

To those who are more interested in facts than in theories,
the book will serve as a kind of dictionary of the geography
and affinities of animals. By means of the copious Index, the
native country, the systematic position, and the numerical
extent of every important and well established genus of land-
animal may be at once discovered ;—information now scattered
through hundreds of volumes.

In the difficult matters of synonymy, and the orthography of
generic names, I have been guided rather by general utility
than by any fixed rules. When I have taken a whole family
group from a modern author of repute, I have generally followed
his nomenclature throughout. In other cases, I use the names
which are to be found in a majority of modern authors, rather
than follow the strict rule of priority in adopting some newly
discovered appellation of early date. In orthography I have
adopted all such modern emendations as seem coming into
general use, and which do not lead to inconvenience ; but where
the alteration is such as to completely change the pronunciation
and appearance of a well-known word, I have not adopted it.
I have also thought it best to preserve the initial letter of well-
known and old-established names, for convenience of reference
to the Indices of established works. As an example I may refer
to Enicurus,—a name which has been in use nearly half a

PREFACE, xill

century, and which is to be found under the letter H, in Jerdon’s
Birds of India, Blyth’s Catalogue, Bonaparte’s Conspectus, and
the Proceedings of the Zoological Suciety of London down to
1865. Classicists now write Henicwrus as the correct form ;
but this seems to me one of those cases in which orthographical
accuracy should give way to priority, and still more to con-
venience. .

In combining and arranging so much detail from such varied
sources, many errors and omissions must doubtless have occurred.
Owing to my residence at a distance from the scientific libraries
of the metropolis, I was placed at a great disadvantage ; and I
could hardly have completed the work at all, had I not been
permitted to have a large number of volumes at once, from the
library of the Zoological Society of London, and to keep them
for months together ;—a privilege for which I return my best
thanks to Mr. Sclater the Secretary, and to the Council.

Should my book meet with the approval of working natu-
ralists, I venture to appeal to them, to assist me in rendering
any future editions more complete, by sending me (to the care of
my publishers) notes of any important omissions, or corrections
of any misstatements of fact; as well as copies of any of their
papers or essays, and especially of any lists, catalogues, and
monographs, containing information on the classification or
distribution of living or extinct animals.

To the many friends who have given me information or
agsistance I beg to tender my sincere thanks. Especially am I
indebted to Professor Newton, who not only read through much
of my rough MSS., but was so good as to make numerous cor-
rections and critical notes. These were of great value to me, as
they often contained or suggested important additional matter,
or pointed out systematic and orthographical inaccuracies.

xiv PREFACE.

Professor Flower was so good as to read over my chapters on
extinct animals, and to point out several errors into which I had
fallen.

Dr. Giinther gave me much valuable information on the
classification of reptiles, marking on my lists the best established
and most natural genera, and referring me to reliable sources of
information.

I am also greatly indebted to the following gentlemen for
detailed information on special subjects :—

To Sir Victor Brooke, for a MS. arrangement of the genera
of Bovide, with the details of their distribution:

To Mr. Dresser, for lists of the characteristic birds of Northern
and Arctic Europe:

To Dr. Hooker, for information on the colours and odours of
New Zealand plants :

To Mr. Kirby, for a list of the butterflies of Chili:

To Professor Mivart, for a classification of the Batrachia, and
an early proof of his article on “Apes” in the Encyclopedia
Britannica :

To Mr. Salvin, for correcting my list of the birds of the
Galapagos, and for other assistance :

To Mr. Sharpe, for MS. lists of the birds of Madagascar
and the Cape Verd Islands:

To Canon Tristram, for a detailed arrangement of the difficult
family of the warblers,—Sylviide :

To Viscount Walden, for notes on the systematic arrangement
of the Pycnonotid and Timaliide, and for an early proof of
his list of the birds of the Philippine Islands.

I also have to thank many naturalists, both in this coun-
try and abroad, who have sent me copies of their papers;
and I trust they will continue to favour me in the same
manner.

PREFACE. XV

An author may easily be mistaken in estimating his own
work. I am well aware that this first outline of a great
subject is, in parts, very meagre and sketchy; and, though
perhaps overburthened with some kinds of detail, yet leaves
many points most inadequately treated. It is therefore with
some hesitation that I venture to express the hope that I have
made some approach to the standard of excellence I have aimed
at ;—which was, that my book should bear a similar relation to
the eleventh and twelfth chapters of the “ Origin of Species,” as
Mr. Darwin’s “ Animals and Plants under Domestication ” does’
to the first chapter of that work. Should it be judged worthy
of such a rank, my long, and often wearisome labours, will be
well repaid.

Marcu, 1876.

‘
1
>
o +
{
; .
{
i
+
i ’ = 4 a .
hy :
* ; { et ;
\
t " t :
ij CMPD. TAs Parte babel
~ ‘
; ‘
- baie ‘ ie - b a
* a Ye ot ; { ;
pe, da ur : oo) ’
r \ < : ao '
i 7 hoe Bs 1 i '
DP) a VET? : 7 {
4 :
. . '
. x
‘
:
(
7
7 <
‘
.
‘ ee © A
i
; .
’
‘
- .
'
r - .
= .
» ai i
ul
:
d i
J
: a
{
ms x"
‘

rot

%

\

CONTENTS OF THE FIRST VOLUME.

PART YT

THE PRINCIPLES AND GENERAL PHENOMENA OF DISTRIBUTION.

CHAPTER 1.

INTRODUCTORY.

CHAPTER II.

THE MEANS OF DISPERSAL AND THE MIGRATIONS OF ANIMALS,

Means of Dispersal of Mammalia (p. 10)—Climate as a Limit to the Range of

Mammals (p. 11)—Valleys and Rivers as Barriers to Mammals (p. 12)—Arms
of the Sea as Barriers to Mammals (p. 13)—Ice-floes and drift-wood as aiding
the Dispersal of Mammals (p. 14)—Means of Dispersal of Birds (p. 15)—Dis-
persal of Birds by Winds (p. 16)—Barriers to the Dispersal of Birds (p. 17)—
The Phenomena of Migration (p. 18)—Migrations of Birds (p. 19)—General
remarks on Migration (p. 25)—Means of Dispersal of Reptiles and Amphibia
(p. 28)—Means of Dispersal of Fishes (p. 29)—Means of Dispersal of Mollusca
(p. 30)— Means of Dispersal of Insects and the Barriers which limit their
Range (p. 32) : : 5 . S é 2 - : - 10—34

CHAPTER III.

DISTRIBUTION AS AFFECTED BY THE CONDITIONS AND CHANGES OF THE EARTH’S
SURFACE.

Land and Water (p. 35)—Continental Areas (p. 36)—Recent Changes in the Con-

tinental Areas (p. 38)—The Glacial Epoch as affecting the Distribution of
Animals (p. 40)—Changes of Vegetation as affecting the Distribution of Ani-
mals (p. 43)—Organic Changes as affecting Distribution (p. 44) - 385—49
Vou. I.—2 ,

XVili CONTENTS OF THE FIRST VOLUME.

CHAPTER IV.
ON ZOOLOGICAL REGIONS.

Principles upon which Zoological Regions should be formed (p. 53)—Which class
of Animals is of most importance in determining Zoological Regions (p. 56)— «
Various Zoological Regions proposed since 1857 (p. 58)—Discussion of proposed
Regions (p. 61)—Reasons for adopting the Six Regions first proposed by Mr.
Sclater (p. 63)—Objections to the system of Circumpolar Zones (p. 67)—Does
the Arctic Fauna characterise an independent Region (p.68)—Palzarctic Region
(p. 71)—Ethiopian Region (p. 73)—Oriental Region (p. 75)—Australian Re-
gion (p. 77)—Neotropical Region (p.78)—Nearctic Region (p. 79)—Observations
on the series of Sub-regions (p. 80) . “ ; 5 : 2 . 50—82

CHAPTER V.
CLASSIFICATION AS AFFECTING THE STUDY OF GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION.

Classification of the Mammalia (p. 85)—Classification of Birds (p. 92)—Classifica-
tion of Reptiles (p. 98)—Classification of Amphibia (p. 100)—Classification of
Fishes (p. 101)—Classification of Insects (p. 102)—Classification of Mollusca
(p. 104) , : : 3 . 4 : A : : . 83—104

PART IL

ON THE DISTRIBUTION OF EXTINCT ANIMALS.

CHAPTER VI.
THE EXTINCT MAMMALIA OF THE OLD WORLD.

Historic and Post-pliocene Period (p. 110)—Pliocene Period (p. 112)—General
Conclusions as to the Pliocene and Post-pliocene Faunas of Europe (p. 113)—
Miocene Period (p. 114)—Extinct Animals of Greece (p. 115)—Miocene Fauna
of Central and Western Europe (p. 117)—Upper Miocene Deposits of India
(p. 121)—General Observations on the Miocene Faunas of Europe and Asia
(p. 123)—Eocene Period (p. 124)—-General Considerations on the Extinct
Mammalian Fauna of Europe (p. 126). F A A A . 107—128

CONTENTS OF THE FIRST VOLUME. ' xin

CHAPTER VII.
EXTINCT MAMMALIA OF THE NEW WORLD.

North America—Post-pliocene Period (p. 129)—Remarks on the Post-pliocene
_ Fauna of North America (p. 130)—Tertiary Period (p. 132)—Trimates (p. 32)
Insectivora (p. 133)—Carnivora (p. 134)—Ungulata (p. 135)—Proboscidea
(p.138)—Tillodontia (p.139)—Rodentia (p.140)—General Relations of the Ex-
tinct Tertiary Mammalia of North America and Europe (p.140)— South Ame-
rica (p. 143) —Fauna of the Brazilian Caves (p. 143)— Pliocene Period of Tem-
perate South America (p. 146)—Pliocene Mammalia of the Antilles (p. 148)-—
Eocene Fauna of South America (p. 148)—General Remarks on the Extinct
Mammalian Fauna of the Old and New Worlds (p. 148)—The Birth-place and
Migrations of some Mammalian Families and Genera (p. 153) . 129—156

CHAPTER VIII.

VARIOUS EXTINCT ANIMALS ;—AND ON THE ANTIQUITY OF THE GENERA OF
INSECTS AND LAND-MOLLUSCA,

Extinct Mammalia of Australia (p. 157)—Mammalian Remains of the Secondary
Formations (p. 159)—Extinct Birds (p. 160)—Palearctic Region and North
India (p. 161)—North America (p. 163)—South America, Madagascar, New
Zealand (p. 164)—Extinct Tertiary Reptiles (p. 165)—Antiquity of the Genera
of Insects (p. 166)—Antiquity of the Genera of Land and Fresh-water Shells
(p. 168) : : : p : : - . : : . 157—170

PART Ut

ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY: A REVIEW OF THE CHIEF FORMS OF LIFE
IN THE SEVERAL REGIONS AND SUB-REGIONS, WITH THE INDICA-
TIONS THEY AFFORD OF GEOGRAPHICAL MUTATIONS.

CHAPTER IX.

THE ORDER OF SUCCESSION OF THE REGIONS.—COSMOPOLITAN GROUPS OF
ANIMALS.—TABLES OF DISTRIBUTION.

Order of succession of the Regions (p. 173)—Cosmopolitan Groups (p. 175)—
Tables of Distributions of Families and Genera (p. 177) : . 173—179

XX

CONTENTS OF THE FIRST VOLUME.

CHAPTER X.

THE PALHARCTIC REGION.

Zoological Characteristics of the Palearctic Region (p. 181)—Summary of Pale-

arctic Vertebrata (p. 186)—Insects (p. 187)—Land-shells (p. 190)—The Pale-
arctic Sub-regions (p. 196)—Central and Northern Europe (p. 191)—North
European Islands (p. 197)—Mediterranean Sub-region (p. 199)—The Mediter-
ranean and Atlantic Islands (p. 206) —The Siberian Sub-region, or Northern
Asia (p. 216)—Japan and North China, or the Manchurian Sub-region (p. 220)
—Birds (p. 223)—Insects (p. 227)—-Remarks on the General Character of the
Fauna of Japan (p.°230)—General Conclusions as to the Fauna of the Pale-
arctic Region (p. 231)—Table I. Families of Animals inhabiting the Pale-
arctic Region (p. 234)—Table II. List of the Genera of Terrestrial Mammalia
and Birds of the Palearctic Region (p. 239) - : - . 181—250

CHAPTER XI.

THE ETHIOPIAN REGION.

Zoological Characteristics of the Ethiopian Region (p. 252)—Summary of Ethio-

pian Vertebrates (p. 255)—The Ethiopian Sub-regions (p. 258)—The East
African Sub-region, or Central and East Africa (p. 258)—The West African
Sub-region (p. 262)—Islands of the West African Sub-region (p. 265)—South
African Sub-region (p. 266)—Atlantic Islands of the Ethiopian Region ;—St.
Helena (p. 269)—Tristan d’Acunha (p. 271)—Madagascar and the Mascarene
Islands, or the Malagasy Sub-region (p. 272)—The Mascarene Islands (p. 280)
—Extinct Fauna of the Mascarene Islands and Madagascar (p. 282)—General
Remarks on the Insect Fauna of Madagascar (p. 284)—On the probable Past
History of the Ethiopian Region (p. 285)—Table I. Families of Animals
inhabiting the Ethiopian Region (p. 294)—Table II. List of Genera of Ter-
restrial Mammalia and Birds of the Ethiopian Region (p. 300) . 251—313

CHAPTER XII.

THE ORIENTAL REGION,

Zoological Characteristics of the Oriental Region (p. 315)—Summary of Oriental

Vertebrata (p. 318)—The Oriental Sub-regions (p. 321)—Hindostan, or Indian
Sub-region (p, 321)—Range of the Genera of Mammalia which inhabit the Sub-
region of Hindostan (p. 322)—Oriental, Palearctic, and Ethiopian Genera of
Birds in Central India (p. 224)—Sub-region of Ceylon and South India
(p. 8326)—The Past History of Ceylonand South India, as indicated by its Fauna
(p. 328)—Himalayan or Indo-Chinese Sub-region (p. 329)—Islands of the

CONTENTS OF THE FIRST VOLUME. at

Indo-Chinese Sub-region (p. 333)—Indo-Malaya, or the Malayan Sub-region
(p. 834)—Malayan Insects (p. 341)—The Zoological Relations of the several
Islands of the Indo-Malay Sub-region (p. 345)—Philippine Islands (p. 345)—
Java (p. 349)—Malacca, Sumatra, and Borneo (p. 353)— Probable recent Geo-
graphical Changes in the Indo-Malay Islands (p. 357)—Probable Origin of the
Malayan Fauna (p. 359)—Concluding Remarks on the Oriental Region (p. 362)
—Table I. Families of Animals inhabiting the Oriental Region (p. 365)—
Table II. Genera of Terrestrial Mammalia and Birds in the Oriental Re-
gion (p. 371) : : : . : : . . 5 - 3814—386

CHAPTER XIII.
THE AUSTRALIAN REGION.

General Zoological Characteristics of the Australian Region (p. 390)—Summary
of the Australian Vertebrata (p. 397)—Supposed Land-connection between
Australia and South America (p. 398)—Insects (p. 403)—Land-shells (p. 407)
—Australian Sub-regions (p. 408)—Austro-Malayan Sub-region (p. 409)—
Papua, or the New Guinea Group (p. 409)—The Moluccas (p. 417)—Insects—
Peculiarities of the Moluccan Fauna (p. 420)—Timor Group (p. 422)—
Celebes Group (p. 426)—Origin of the Fauna of Celebes (p. 436)— Australia
and Tasmania, or the Australian Sub-region (p. 438)—The Pacific Islands, or
Polynesian Sub-region (p. 442)—Fiji, Tonga, and Samoa Islands (p. 443)—
Society and Marquesas Islands (p. 443)—Ladrone and Caroline Islands (p. 444)
—New Caledonia and the New Hebrides (p. 444)—Sandwich Islands (p. 445)
—Reptiles of the Polynesian Sub-region (p. 448)—New Zealand Sub-region
(p. 449)—Islets of the New Zealand Sub-region (p. 453)—Reptiles, Amphibia,
and Fresh-water Fishes (p. 456)—Insects (p. 457)—The Ancient Fauna of New
Zealand (p. 459)—The Origin of the New Zealand Fauna (p. 459)—Causes of
the Poverty of Insect-life in New Zealand : its Influence on the Character of
the Flora (p. 462)—Concluding Remarks on the Early History of the Austra-
lian Region (p. 464)—Table I. Families of Animals inhabiting the Australian
Region (p. 468)—Table II. Genera of Terrestrial Mammalia and Birds of the
Australian Region (p. 473) : : 5 : : 4 - 3887—485

Index to Vol. I. ; , : , j 5 4 A 4 489— 503

«

»
.

ae
‘

“

/ e

.

ee i

ae 5

mera

a
y =.
ve
el
a
4
‘
SS ae
‘
‘ =
=! 7
‘
ron
re

» > —_ ee all
4 wer nae
: eo Z
Ses
a iz /
7 eens
Vee !
= — fy
“— / t
——
_ .
= n
*
‘ ae - ae 1 ' » PI 7 = « a4
me ae P '= Js,
vs *~ “~
4 } : ; oe | x \ -
“ ~ i 4
mm - i
. J m
7 LZ .
= = nee *
- 7 ei F
~ i? > ¢ & . =~)
i == > ly, ies
1 = ~ 7 = .
e ~ od A re » . ft 7 .
7 i = ‘
In “4 = > ae 7
7 + - . ine
oe ai a
- > = : Be m4
y ai * a ie
i. f3 id S i, = rn
a, - ;
> 4 } Ss om
= = a al 1 “ 7 _
- ae ~ are 7 7 nd me
~ + _ Ss an e
e ' - .
> * oo - = oe
“ - a - » ‘
’ i ie
. \y — +
wae 4 : oof "
rae gl » BE
= aes BE eas
von . i
. = ee = os A 2
eS a = - * sf a a » 4
n “i a5) ee 7
7 = _~ = a a
ny ~ : - az +
a ort a 2 ~ in -
> 5 ar wt = ta SS ee
- ay hd ae = - ’ x a von -
‘ es _ ae de oe a a
: “ -
1 ee

[i

MAPS AND ILLUSTRATIONS IN VOL. I.

fe
IO oo P wo PH HS

oo

Oo DP aD HT PF HW bw

Map of the World, showing the Zoo-Geographical Regions and the
contour of the Ocean-bed : 3 ‘ ‘ é . Frontispiece
To face page
Map of the Palearctic Region . : : : : : = 18)
Plate I. The Alps of Central Europe with Characteristic Animals 195
Plate II. Cimetennite Mammalia of Western Tartary . 218
Plate III. Characteristic Animals of North China 226
Map of the Ethiopian Region 251
Plate IV. Characteristic Animals of East Africa 261
Plate V. Scene in West Africa with Characteristic Animals . 264
Plate Vi. Scene in Madagascar with Characteristic Animals 278
Map of the Oriental Region 315
Plate WII. Scene in Nepaul with Characteristic Animals . 331
Plate VIII. A Forest in Borneo with Characteristic Mammalia . 337
Plate IX. A Malacca Forest with some of its Peculiar Birds 340
Map of the Australian Region 387
Plate |X. Scene in New Guinea with Characteristic Animals . 415
Plate XJ. The Characteristic Mammalia of Tasmania 439

Plate XII. The Plains of New South Wales with Characteristic Ani-
mals . 442
Plate XIII. Scene in New Zealand with some of its Remarkable Birds 455

THE

GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION
OF ANIMALS.

PART I.

THE PRINCIPLES AND GENERAL PHENOMENA
OF DISTRIBUTION.

J

CHAPTER I.
INTRODUCTORY.

Ir is a fact within the experience of most persons, that the
various species of animals are not uniformly dispersed over the
surface of the country. If we have a tolerable acquaintance
with any district, be it a parish, a county, or a larger extent of
territory, we soon become aware that each well-marked portion
of it has some peculiarities in its animal productions. If we
want: to find certain birds or certain insects, we have not only to
choose the right season but to go to the right place. If we
travel beyond our district in various directions we shall almost
certainly meet with something new to us; some species which
we were accustomed to see almost daily will disappear, others
which we have never seen before will make their appearance.
If we go very far, so as to be able to measure our journey by
degrees of latitude and longitude and to perceive important
changes of climate and vegetation, the differences in the forms of
animal life will become greater ; till at length we shall come to a
country where almost everything will be new, all the familiar
creatures of our own district being replaced by others more or
less differing from them.

If we have been observant during our several journeys, and
have combined and compared the facts we have collected, it will
become apparent that the change we have witnessed has been
of two distinct kinds. In our own and immediately surround-
ing districts, particular species appeared and disappeared because

+ DISTRIBUTION OF ANIMALS. [PART I,

the soil, the aspect, or the vegetation, was adapted to them or
the reverse. The marshes, the heaths, the woods and forests,
the chalky downs, the rocky mountains, had each their peculiar
inhabitants, which reappeared again and again as we came to
tracts of country suitable for them. But as we got further away
we began to find that localities very similar to those we had
left behind were inhabited by a somewhat different set of species;
and this diflerence increased with distance, notwithstanding
that almost identical external conditions might be often met
with. The first class of changes is that of stations ; the second
that of habitats. The one is a local, the other a geographical
phenomenon. The whole area over which a particular animal
is found may consist of any number of stations, but rarely of
more than one habitat. Stations, however, are often so extensive
as to include the entire range of many species. Such are the
great seas and oceans, the Siberian or the Amazonian forests,
the North African deserts, the Andean or the Himalayan
highlands.

There is yet another difference in the nature of the change
we have been considering. The new animals which we meet
with as we travel in any direction from our starting point, are
some of them very much like those we have left behind us,
and can be at once referred to familiar types; while others ,
are altogether unlike anything we have seen at home. When
we reach the Alps we find another kind of squirrel, in South-
ern Italy a distinct mole, in Southern Europe fresh warblers
and unfamiliar buntings. We meet also with totally new
forms ; as the glutton and the snowy owl in Northern, the genet
and the hoopoe in Southern, and the saiga antelope and
collared pratincole in Eastern Europe. The first series are
examples of what are termed representative species, the second
of distinct groups or types of animals. The one represents a
comparatively recent modification, and an origin in or near the
locality where it occurs; the other is a result of very ancient
changes both organic and inorganic, and is connected with some
of the most curious and difficult of the problems we shall have

to discuss.
Cy

my 7 |

CHAP. 1.] INTRODUCTORY. 5

Having thus defined our subject, let us glance at the opinions
that have generally prevailed as to the nature and causes of
the phenomena presented by the geographical distribution of
animals.

It was long thought, and is still a popular notion, that the
manner in which the various kinds of animals are dispersed
over the globe is almost wholly due to diyersities of climate and
of vegetation. There is indeed much to favour this belief. The
arctic regions are strongly characterised by their white bears
and foxes, their reindeer, ermine, and walruses, their white
ptarmigan, owls, and falcons; the temperate zone has its foxes
and wolves, its rabbits, sheep, beavers, and marmots, its sparrows
and its song birds ; while tropical regions alone produce apes and
elephants, parrots and peacocks, and a thousand strange quadru-
peds and brilliant birds which are found nowhere in the cooler
regions. So the camel, the gazelle and the ostrich live in the
desert; the bison on the prairie; the tapir, the deer, and the
jaguar in forests. Mountains and marshes, plains and rocky
precipices, have each their animal inhabitants; and it might well
be thought, in the absence of accurate inquiry, that these and
other differences would sufficiently explain why most of the
regions and countries into which the earth is popularly divided
should have certain animals peculiar to them and should want
others which are elsewhere abundant.

A more detailed and accurate knowledge of the productions of
different portions of the earth soon showed that this explanation
was quite insufficient; for it was found that countries exceed-
ingly similar in climate and all physical features may yet have
very distinct animal populations. The equatorial parts of Africa
and South America, for example, are very similar in climate
and are both covered with luxuriant forests, yet their animal life
is widely different; elephants, apes, leopards, guinea-fowls
and touracos in the one, are replaced by tapirs, prehensile-
tailed monkeys, jaguars, curassows and toucans in the other.
Again, parts of South Africa and Australia are wonderfully
similar in their soil and climate; yet one has lions, antelopes,
zebras and giraffes ; the other only kangaroos, wombats, phalan-

a

6 DISTRIBUTION OF ANIMALS, [PART I,

gers and mice. In like manner parts of North America and
Europe are very similar in all essentials of soil climate and
vegetation, yet the former has racoons, opossums, and humming-
birds; while the latter possesses moles, hedgehogs and true fly-
catchers. Equally striking are the facts presented by the
distribution of many large and important groups of animals.
Marsupials (opossums, phalangers &c.) are found from temperate
Van Diemen’s land to the tropical islands of New Guinea and
Celebes, and in America from Chili to Virginia. No: crows
exist in South America, while they inhabit every other part of
the world, not excepting Australia. Antelopes are found only
in Africa and Asia; the sloths only in South America ; the true
lemurs are confined to Madagascar, and the birds-of-paradise to
New Guinea. :

If we examine more closely the distribution of animals in
any extensive region, we find that different, though closely allied
species, are often found on the opposite sides of any considerable
barrier to their migration. Thus, on the two sides of the Andes
and Rocky Mountains in America, almost all the mammala, birds,
and insects are of distinct species. To a less extent, the Alps
and Pyrenees form a similar barrier, and even great rivers and
river plains, as those of the Amazon and Ganges, separate more
or less distinct groups of animals. Arms of the sea are still
more effective, if they are permanent; a circumstance in some
measure Indicated by their depth. Thus islands far away from
land almost always have very peculiar animals found nowhere
else; as is strikingly the case in Madagascar and New Zealand,
and toa less degree in the West India islands. But shallow
straits, hike the English Channel or the Straits of Malacca, are
not found to have the same effect, the animals being nearly or
quite identical on their opposite shores. A change of climate or
a change of vegetation may form an equally effective barrier to
migration. Many tropical and polar animals are pretty accu-
rately limited by certain isothermal lines; and the limits of the
creat forests in most parts of the world strictly determine the
ranges of many species. :

Naturalists have now arrived at the conclusion, that by some

CHAP, I. ] INTRODUCTORY. 7

slow process of development or transmutation, all animals have
been produced from those which preceded them; and the old
notion that every species was specially created as they now
exist, at a particular time and in a particular spot, is abandoned
as opposed to many striking facts, and unsupported by any
evidence. This modification of animal forms took place very
slowly, so that the historical period of three or four thousand
years has hardly produced any perceptible change in a single
species. Even the time since the last glacial epoch, which on
the very lowest estimate must be from 50,000 to 100,000 years,
has only served to modify a few of the higher animals into very
slightly different species. The changes of the forms of animals
appear to have accompanied, and perhaps to have depended
on, changes of physical geography, of climate, or of vegetation ;
since it is evident that an animal which is well adapted to one
condition of things will require to be slightly changed in con-
stitution or habits, and therefore generally in form, structure, or
colour, in order to be equally well adapted to a changed
condition of surrounding circumstances. Animals multiply so
rapidly, that we may consider them as continually trying to
extend their range; and thus any new land raised above the
sea by geological causes becomes immediately peopled by a
crowd of competing inhabitants, the strongest and best adapted
of which alone succeed in maintaining their position.

If we keep in view these facts—that the minor features of the
earth’s surface are everywhere slowly changing ; that the forms,
and structure, and habits of all living things are also slowly
changing ; while the great features of the earth, the continents,
and oceans, and loftiest mountain ranges, only change after very
long intervals and with extreme slowness; we must see that
the present distribution of animals upon the several parts of
the earth’s surface is the final product of all these wonderful
revolutions in organic and inorganic nature. The greatest and
most radical differences in the productions of any part of the
globe must be dependent on isolation by the most effectual
and most permanent barriers. That ocean which has remained
broadest and deepest from the most remote geological epochs

8 DISTRIBUTION OF ANIMALS. {PART I.

will separate countries the productions of which most widely
and radically differ; while the most recently-depressed seas,
or the last-formed mountain ranges, will separate countries
the productions of which are almost or quite identical, It
will be evident, therefore, that the study of the distribution
of animals and plants may add greatly to our knowledge
of the past history of our globe. It may reveal to us, in a
manner which no other evidence can, which are the oldest
and most permanent features of the earth’s surface, and which
the newest. It may indicate the existence of islands or conti-
nents now sunk beneath the ocean, and which have left no
record of their existence save the animal and vegetable pro-
ductions which have migrated to adjacent lands. It thus
becomes an important adjunct to geology, which can rarely do
more than determine what lands have been raised above the
waters, under what conditions and at what period; but can
seldom ascertain anything of the position or extent of those
which have sunk beneath it. Our present study may often
enable us, not only to say where lands must have recently
disappeared, but also to form some judgment as to their ex-
tent, and the time that has elapsed since their submersion.

Having thus briefly sketched the nature and objects of the
subject we have to study, it will be necessary—before entering
on a detailed examination of the zoological features of the
different parts of the earth, and of the distribution of the orders,
families, and genera of animals—to examine certain preliminary
facts and principles essential for our guidance. We must first
inquire what are the powers of multiplication and dispersal of
the various groups of animals, and the nature of the barriers
that most effectually limit their range. We have then to
consider the effects of changes in physical geography and in
climate; to examine the nature and extent of such changes as
have been known to occur ; to determine what others are possible
or probable; and to ascertain the various modes in which such
changes affect the structure, the distribution, or the very exist-
ence of animals.

CHAP. I.] INTRODUCTORY. 9

“Two subjects of a different nature must next engage our
attention. We have to deal with two vast masses of facts,
each involving countless details, and requiring subdivision and
grouping to be capable of intelligible treatment. All the con-
tinents and their chief subdivisions, and all the more important
islands of the globe, have to be compared as regards their vari-
ous animal forms. To do this effectively we require a natural
division of the earth especially adapted to our purpose; and we
shall have to discuss at some length the reasons for the particular
system adopted —a discussion which must to some extent
anticipate and summarize the conclusions of the whole work.
We have also to deal with many hundreds of families and many
thousands of genera of animals, and here too a true and natural
classification is of great importance. We must therefore give a
connected view of the classification adopted in the various
classes of animals dealt with.

And lastly, as the existing distribution of animals is the
result and outcome of all preceding changes of the earth and of
its inhabitants, we require as much knowledge as we can get of
the animals of each country during: past geological epochs, in
order to interpret the facts we shall accumulate. We shall,
therefore, enter upon a somewhat detailed sketch of the various
forms of extinct animals that have lived upon the earth during
the Tertiary period; discuss their migrations at various epochs,
the changes of physical geography that they imply, and the
extent to which they enable us to determine the birthplace
of certain families and genera.

The preliminary studies above enumerated will, it is believed,
enable us to see the bearing of many facts in the distribution of
animals that would otherwise be insoluble problems; and, what
is hardly less valuable, will teach us to estimate the compara-
tive importance of the various groups of animals, and to avoid
the common error of cutting the gordian knot of each difficulty
by vast hypothetical changes in existing continents and oceans

—probably the most permanent features of our globe.
Vou. L—3

CHAPTER II.
THE MEANS OF DISPERSAL AND THE MIGRATIONS OF ANIMALS.

ALL animals are capable of multiplying so rapidly, that if a
single pair were placed in a continent with abundance of food
and no enemies, they might fully stock it in a very short time.
Thus, a bird which produces ten pairs of young during its life-
time (and this is far below the fertility of many birds) will, if
we take its life at five years, increase to a hundred millions in
about forty years, a number sufficient to stock a large country.
Many fishes and insects are capable of multiplying several
thousandfold each year, so that in a few years they would reach
billions and trillions. Even large and slow breeding mammals,
which have only one at a birth but continue to breed from eight
to ten successive years, may increase from a single pair to ten
millions in less than forty years. |
But as animals rarely have an unoccupied country to breed
in, and as the food in any one district is strictly limited, their
natural tendency is to roam in every direction in search of fresh
pastures, or new hunting grounds. In doing so, however, they
meet with many obstacles. Rocks and mountains have to be
climbed, rivers or marshes to be crossed, deserts or forests to be
traversed ; while narrow straits or wider arms of the sea separate
islands from the main land or continents from each other. We
have now to inquire what facilities the different classes of
animals have for overcoming these obstacles, and what kind of
barriers are most effectual in checking their progress.
Means of Dispersal of Mammalia.—Many of the largest mam-

malia are able to roam over whole continents and are hardly

CHAP, II.] DISPERSAL AND MIGRATION. Bi

stopped by any physical obstacles. The elephant is almost
equally at home on plains and mountains, and it even climbs to
the highest summit of Adam’s Peak in Ceylon, which is so steep
and rocky as to be very difficult of ascent for man. It traverses
rivers with great ease and forces its way through the densest
jungle. There seems therefore to be no limit to its powers of
wandering, but the necessity of procuring food and its capacity
of enduring changes of climate. The tiger is another animal with
vreat powers of dispersal. It crosses rivers and sometimes even
swims over narrow straits of the sea, and it can endure the
severe cold of North China and Tartary as well as the heats of
the plains of Bengal. The rhinoceros, the lion, and many of the
ruminants have equal powers of dispersal ; so that wherever there
is land and sufficient food, there are no limits to their possible
range. Other groups of animals are more limited in their migra-
tions. The apes, lemurs, and many monkeys are so strictly
adapted to an arboreal life that they can never roam far beyond
the limits of the forest vegetation. The same may be said of
the squirrels, the opossums, the arboreal cats, and the sloths, with
many other groups of less importance. Deserts or open country
are equally essential to the existence of others. The camel, the
hare, the zebra, the giraffe and many of the antelopes could not
exist in a forest country any more than could the jerboas or the
prairie marmots. ;

There are other animals which are confined to mountains, and
could not extend their range into lowlands or forests. The goats
and the sheep are the most striking group of this kind, inhabit-
ing many of the highest mountains of the globe; of which the
European ibex and mouflon are striking examples. Rivers are
equally necessary to the existence of others, as the beaver, otter,
water-vole and capybara; and to such animals high mountain-
ranges or deserts must form an absolutely impassable barrier.

Climate as a Limit to the Range of Mammals.—Climate appears
to limit the range of many animals, though there is some reason
to believe that in many cases it is not the climate itself so much
as the change of vegetation consequent on climate which produces
the effect. The quadrumana appear to be limited by climate,

12 DISTRIBUTION OF ANIMALS. [PART I.

since they inhabit almost all the tropical regions but do not
range more than about 10° beyond the southern and 12° beyond
the northern tropic, while the great bulk of the species are
found only within an equatorial belt about 30° wide. But as
these animals are almost exclusively fruit-eaters, their distribu-
tion depends as much on vegetation as on temperature ; and this
is strikingly shown by the fact that the Semnopithecus schista-
ceus inhabits the Himalayan mountains to a height of 11,000
feet, where it has been seen leaping among fir-trees loaded with
snow-wreaths! Some northern animals are bounded by the
isothermal of 32°. Such are the polar bear and the walrus,
which cannot live in a state of nature far beyond the limits of
the frozen ocean ; but as they live in confinement in temperate
countries, their range is probably limited by other conditions
than temperature.

We must not therefore be too hasty in concluding, that animals
which we now see confined to a very hot or a very cold climate
are incapable of living in any other. The tiger was once con-
sidered a purely tropical animal, but it inhabits permanently the
cold plains of Manchuria and the Amoor, a country of an almost
arctic winter climate. Few animals seem to us more truly in-
habitants of hot countries than the elephants and rhinoceroses ;
yet in Post-tertiary times they roamed over the whole of the
northern continents to within the arctic circle ; and we know that
the climate was then as cold as it is now, from their entire bodies
being preserved in ice. Some change must recently have
occurred either in the climate, soil, or vegetation of Northern
Asia which led to the extinction of these forerunners of existing
tropical species; and we must always bear in mind that similar
changes may have acted upon other speciés which we now find
restricted within narrow limits, but which may once have roamed
over a wide and varied territory.

Valleys and Rivers as Barriers to Mammals.—To animals which
thrive best in dry and hilly regions, a broad level and marshy
valley must often prove an effectual barrier. The difference of
vegetation and of insect life, together with an unhealthy atmos-
phere, no doubt often checks migration if it is attempted. Thus

CHAP. II.] DISPERSAL AND MIGRATION, 13

many animals are restricted to the slopes of the Himalayas
or to the mountains of Central India, the flat valley of the
Ganges forming a limit to their range. In other cases, however,
it is the river rather than the valley which is the barrier. In
the great Amazonian plains many species of monkeys, birds, and
even insects are found up to the river banks on one side but do
not cross to the other. Thus in the lower part of the Rio Negro
two monkeys, the Jacchus bicolor and the Brachiurus couxiou, are
found on the north bank of the river but never on the south,
where a red-whiskered Pethecia is alone found. Higher up Afeles
paniscus extends to the north bank of the river while Lagothrix
humboldtit comes down to the south bank; the former being a
native of Guiana, the latter of Ecuador. The range of the birds
of the genus Psophia or trumpeters, is also limited by the rivers
Amazon, Madeira, Rio Negro and some others; so that in these
cases we are able to define the limits of distribution with an
unusual degree of accuracy, and there is little doubt the same
barriers also limit a large number of other species.

Arms of the Sea as Barriers to Mammals—vVery few mammals
can swim over any considerable extent of sea, although many can
swim well for short distances. The jaguar traverses the widest
streams in South America, and the bear and bison cross the
Mississippi; and there can be no doubt that they could swim over
equal widths of salt water, and if accidentally carried out to sea
might sometimes succeed in reaching islands many miles distant.
Contrary to the common notion pigs can swim remarkably well.
Sir Charles Lyell tells us in his “Principles of Geology” that
during the floods in Scotland in 1829, some pigs only six months
old that were carried out to sea, swam five miles and got on
shore again. He also states, on the authority of the late Edward
Forbes, that a pig jumped overboard to escape from a terrier in
the Grecian Archipelago, and swam safely to shore many miles
distant. These facts render it probable that wild pigs, from
their greater strength and activity, might under favourable cir-
cumstances cross arms of the sea twenty or thirty miles wide;
and there are facts in the distribution of this tribe of animals
which seem to indicate that they have sometimes done so. Deer

14 DISTRIBUTION OF ANIMALS. [PART I.

take boldly to the water and can swim considerable distances,
but we have no evidence to show how long they could live at
sea or how many miles they could traverse. Squirrels, rats, and
lemmings often migrate from northern countries in bands of
thousands and hundreds of thousands, and pass over rivers, lakes
and even arms of the sea, but they generally perish in the salt-
water. Admitting, however, the powers of most mammals to
swim considerable distances, we have no reason to believe that
any of them could traverse without help straits of upwards of
twenty miles in width, while in most cases a channel of half
that distance would prove an effectual barrier.

Tce-floes and Driftwood as Arding the Dispersal of Mammals.—
In the arctic regions icebergs originate in glaciers which de-
scend into the sea, and often bear masses of gravel, earth, and
even some vegetation on their surfaces ; and extensive level ice-
fields break away and float southwards. These might often
carry with them such arctic quadrupeds as frequent the ice, or
even on rare occasions true land-animals, which might some-
times be stranded on distant continents or islands. But a more
effectual because a more wide-spread agent, is to be found in
the uprooted trees and rafts of driftwood often floated down
great rivers and carried out to sea. Such rafts or islands are
sometimes seen drifting a hundred miles from the mouth of the
Ganges with living trees erect upon them; and the Amazon, the
Orinoco, Mississippi, Congo, and most great rivers produce
similar rafts. Spix and Martius declare that they saw at differ-
ent times on the Amazon, monkeys, tiger-cats, and squirrels,
being thus carried down the stream. On the Parana, pumas,
squirrels, and many other quadrupeds have been seen on these
rafts; and Admiral W. H. Smyth informed Sir C. Lyell that
among the Philippine islands after a hurricane, he met with
floating masses of wood with trees growing upon them, so that
they were at first mistaken for islands till it was found that they
were rapidly drifting along. Here therefore, we have ample
means for carrying all the smaller and especially the arboreal
mammals out to sea; and although in most cases they would
perish there, yet in some favourable instances strong winds or

CHAP, II.] DISPERSAL AND MIGRATION, 15

unusual tidal currents might carry them safely to shores per-
haps several hundred miles from their native country. The fact
of green trees so often having been seen erect on these rafts is
most important ; for they would act as a sail by which the raft
might be propelled in one direction for several days in succession,
and thus at last reach a shore to which a current alone would
never have carried it.

There are two groups of mammals which have quite excep-
tional means of dispersal—the bats which fly, and the cetacea,
seals, &e., which swim. The former are capable of traversing
considerable spaces of sea, simce two North American species
either regularly or occasionally visit the Bermudas, a distance
of 600 miles from the mainland. The oceanic mammals (whales
and porpoises) seem to have no barrier but temperature; the
polar species being unable to cross the equator, while the tropical
forms are equally unfitted for the cold polar waters. The shore-
feeding manatees, however, can only live where they find food ;
and a long expanse of rocky coast would probably be as com-
plete a barrier to them as a few hundred miles of open ocean.
The amphibious seals and walruses seem many of them to be
capable of making long sea journeys, some of the species being
found on islands a thousand miles apart, but none of the arctic
are identical with the antartic species.

The otters with one exception are freshwater animals, and we
have no reason to believe they could or would traverse any great
distances of salt water. In fact, they would be less liable to
dispersal across arms of the sea than purely terrestrial species,
since their powers of swimming would enable them to regain
the shore if accidentally carried out to sea by a sudden flood.

Means of Dispersal of Birds—It would seem at first sight that
no barriers could limit the range of birds, and that they ought
to be the most ubiquitous of living things, and little fitted there-
fore to throw any light on the laws or causes of the geographical
distribution of animals. This, however, is far from being the
case; many groups of birds are almost as strictly limited by
barriers as the mammalia; and from their larger numbers and
the avidity with which they have been collected, they furnish

16 DISTRIBUTION OF ANIMALS. [PART 1,

materials of the greatest value for our present study. The
different groups of birds offer remarkable contrasts in the extent
of their range, some being the most cosmopolite of the higher
animals, while others are absolutely confined to single spots on
the earth’s surface. The petrels (Procellariidew) and the gulls
(Laride) are among the greatest wanderers; but most of the
species are confined to one or other of the great oceans, or to the
arctic or antarctic seas, a few only being found with scarcely
any variation over almost the whole globe. The sandpipers and
plovers wander along the shores as far as do the petrels over the
ocean. Great numbers of them breed in the arctic regions and
migrate as far as India and Australia, or down to Chili and
Brazil; the species of the old and new worlds, however, being
generally distinct. In striking contrast to these wide ranges
we find many of the smaller perching birds, with some of the
parrots and pigeons, confined to small islands of a few square
miles in extent, or to single valleys or mountains on the main-
land.

Dispersal of Birds by Winds——Those groups of birds which
possess no powers of flight, such as the ostrich, cassowary, and
apteryx, are in exactly the same position as mammalia as regards
their means of dispersal, or are perhaps even inferior to them ;
since, although they are able to cross rivers by swimming, it is
doubtful if they could remain so long in the water as most land
quadrupeds. A very large number of short-winged birds, such
as toucans, pittas, and wrens, are perhaps worse off; for they can
fly very few miles at a time, and on falling into the water would
soon be drowned. It is only the strong-flying species that can
venture to cross any great width of sea; and even these rarely do
so unless compelled by necessity to migrate in search of food, or
to a more genial climate. Small and weak birds are, however,
often carried accidentally across great widths of ocean by violent
gales. This is well exemplified by the large numbers of
stragglers from North America, which annually reach the
Bermudas. No less than sixty-nine species of American birds
have occurred in Europe, most of them in Britain and Heligo-
land. They consist chiefly of migratory birds which in autumn

CHAP. II.] BIRDS. 17

return along the eastern coasts of the United States, and often
fly from point to point across bays and inlets. They are then
liable to be blown out to sea by storms, which are prevalent at
this season; and it is almost always at this time of year that
their occurrence has been noted on the- shores of Europe. It
may, however, be doubted whether this is not an altogether
modern phenomenon, dependent on the number of vessels con-
stantly on the Atlantic which afford resting-places to the wan-
derers; as it is hardly conceivable that such birds as titlarks,
cuckoos, wrens, warblers, and rails, could remain on the wing
without food or rest, the time requisite to pass over 2,000 miles
of ocean. It is somewhat remarkable that no European birds
reach the American coast but a few which pass by way of
Iceland and Greenland; whereas a considerable number do
reach the Azores, fully half way across; so that their absence
can hardly be due to the prevailing winds being westerly. The
case of the Azores is, however, an argument for the unassisted
passage of birds for that distance ; since two of the finches are
peculiar ‘species, but closely allied to European forms, so that
their progenitors must, probably, have reached the islands before
the Atlantic was a commercial highway.

Larrvers to the Dispersal of Birds—-We have seen that, as a
rule, wide oceans are an almost absolute barrier to the passage of
most birds from one continent to another; but much narrower
seas and straits are also very effectual barriers where the habits
of the birds are such as to preserve them from being carried
away by storms. All birds which frequent thickets and forests,
and which feed near or on the ground, are secure from such
accidents; and they are also restricted in their range by the
extent of the forests they inhabit. In South America a large
number of the birds have their ranges determined by the ex-
tent of the forest country, while others are equally limited to the
open plains. Such species are also bounded by mountain ranges
whenever these rise above the woody region. Great rivers, such
as the Amazon, also limit the range of many birds, even when
there would seem to be no difficulty in their crossing them, The
supply of food, and the kind of vegetation, soil, and climate

18 DISPERSAL AND MIGRATION, [parr 1.

4

best suited to a bird’s habits, are probably the causes which mark
out the exact limits of the range of each species ; to which must
be added the prevalence of enemies of either the parent birds,
the eggs, or the young. In the Malay Archipelago pigeons abound
most where monkeys do not occur; and in South America the
same birds are comparatively scarce in the forest plains where
monkeys are very abundant, while they are plentiful on the open
plains and campos, and on the mountain plateaux, where these
nest-hunting quadrupeds are rarely found. Some birds are
confined to swamps, others to mountains ; some can only live on
rocky streams, others on deserts or grassy plains.

The Phenomena of Migration—The term “ migration” is often
applied to the periodical or irregular movements of all animals ;
but it may be questioned whether there are any regular mi-
grants but birds and fishes. The annual or periodical movements
of mammalia are of a different class. Monkeys ascend the
Himalayas in summer to a height of 10,000 to 12,000 feet, and
descend again in winter. Wolves everywhere descend from the
mountains to the lowlands in severe weather. In dry seasons
great herds of antelopes move southwards towards the Cape of
Good Hope. The well-known lemmings, in severe winters, at
long intervals, move down from the mountains of Scandinavia in
immense numbers, crossing lakes and rivers, eating their way
through haystacks, and surmounting every obstacle till they
reach the sea, whence very few return. The alpine hare, the
arctic fox, and many other animals, exhibit similar phenomena
on a smaller scale; and generally it may be said, that whenever
a favourable succession of seasons has led to a great multipli-
cation of any species, it must on the pressure of hunger seek
food in fresh localities. For such movements as these we have
no special term. The summer and winter movements best
correspond to true migration, but they are always on a small
scale, and of limited extent; the other movements are rather
temporary incursions than true migrations.

The annual movements of many fishes are more strictly
analogous to the migration of birds, since they take place
in large bodies and often to considerable distances, and are

o@

CHAP, 11. ] BIRDS. 19

immediately connected with the process of reproduction. Some,
as the salmon, enter rivers; others, as the herring and mackerel,
approach the coast in the breeding season; but the exact course
of their migrations is unknown, and owing to our complete
ignorance of the area each species occupies in the ocean, and the
absence of such barriers and of such physical diversities as occur
on the land, they are of far less interest and less connected with
our present study than the movements of birds, to which we
shall now confine ourselves.

Migrations of birds.—In all the temperate parts of the globe
there are a considerable number of birds which reside only a
part of-the year, regularly arriving and leaving at tolerably fixed
epochs. In our own country many northern birds visit us in
winter, such as the fieldfare, redwing, snow-bunting, turnstone,
and numerous ducks and waders; with a few, like the black red-
start, and (according to Rev. C. A. Johns) some of the woodcocks
from the south. In the summer a host of birds appear—the
cuckoo, the swifts and swallows, and numerous warblers, being
the most familiar,—which stay to build their nests and rear their
young, and then leave us again. These are true migrants; but
a number of other birds visit us occasionally, like the waxwing,
the oriole, and the bee-eater, and can only be classed as
stragglers, which, perhaps from too rapid multiplication one year
and want of food the next, are driven to extend their ordinary
range of migration to an unusual degree. We will now endeavour
to sketch the chief phenomena of migration in different
countries.

Hurope.—It is well ascertained that most of the birds that
spend their spring and summer in the temperate parts of Europe
pass the winter in North Africa and Western Asia. The winter
visitants, on the other hand, pass the summer in the extreme
north of Europe and Asia, many of them having been found to
breed in Lapland. The arrival of migratory birds from the
south is very constant as to date, seldom varying more than a
week or two, without any regard to the weather at the time;
but the departure is less constant, and more dependent on the
weather. Thus the swallow always comes to us about the middle

20 DISPERSAL AND MIGRATION. [PART 1,

of April, however cold it may be, while its departure may take
place from the end of September to late in October, and is said by
Forster to occur on the first N. or N.E. wind after the 20th of
September.

Almost all the migratory birds of Europe go southward to
the Mediterranean, move along its coasts east or west, and cross
over in three places only ; either from the south of Spain, in the
neighbourhood of Gibraltar, from Sicily over Malta, or to the
east by Greece and Cyprus. They are thus always in sight of
land. The passage of most small birds (and many of the larger
ones too) takes place at night; and they only cross the Mediter-
ranean when the wind is steady from near the east or west,
and when there is moonlight.

It is a curious fact, but one that seems to be well authenti- -
cated, that the males often leave before the females, and both
before the young birds, which in considerable numbers migrate
later and alone. These latter, however, seldom go so far as the
old ones; and numbers of young birds do not cross the Mediter-
ranean, but stay in the south of Europe. The same rule apples
to the northward migration; the young birds stopping short
of the extreme arctic regions, to which the old birds migrate.!
When old and young go together, however, the old birds take
the lead. In the south of Europe few of the migratory birds
stay to breed, but pass on to more temperate zones; thus, in the
south of France, out of 350 species only 60 breed there. The
same species is often sedentary in one part of Europe and migra-
tory in another; thus, the chaffinch is a constant resident in
England, Germany, and the middle of France; but a migrant in
the south of France and in Holland: the rook visits the south
of France in winter only: the Falco tinnunculus is both a
resident and a migrant in the south ot France, according to
M. Marcel de Serres, there being two regular passages every
year, while a certain number always remain.

1 Marcel de Serres states this as a general fact for wading and swimming
birds. He says that the old birds arrive in the extreme north almost alone,
the young remaining on the shores of the Baltic, or on the lakes of Austria,

Hungary, and Russia. See his prize essay, Des Causes des Migrations, &e.
2nd ed., Paris, 1845, p. 121.

CHAP. II.] - BIRDS. 21

We see, then, that migration is governed by certain intelligible
laws; and that it varies in many of its details, even in the same
species, according to changed conditions. It may be looked
upon as an exaggeration of a habit common to all locomotive
animals, of moving about in search of food. This habit is greatly
restricted in quadrupeds by their inability to cross the sea or
even to pass through the highly-cultivated valleys of such
countries as Europe; but the power of flight in birds enables
them to cross every kind of country, and even moderate widths
of sea; and as they mostly travel at night and high in the air,
their movements are difficult to observe, and are supposed to be
more mysterious than they perhaps are. In the tropics birds
move about to different districts according as certain fruits
become ripe, certain insects abundant, or as flooded tracts dry
up. On the borders of the tropics and the temperate zone
extends a belt of country of a more or less arid character, and
liable to be parched at the summer solstice. In winter and
early spring its northern margin is verdant, but it soon becomes
burnt up, and most of its birds necessarily migrate to the more
fertile regions to the north of them. They thus follow the spring
or summer as it advances from the south towards the pole, feeding
on the young flower buds, the abundance of juicy larve, and on
the ripening fruits; and as soon as these become scarce they
retrace their steps homewards to pass the winter. Others whose
home is nearer the pole are driven south by cold, hunger, and
darkness, to more hospitable climes, returning northward in the
early summer. As a typical example of a migratory bird, let us
take the nightingale. During the winter this bird inhabits
almost all North Africa, Asia Minor, and the Jordan Valley.
Early in April it passes into Europe by the three routes already
mentioned, and spreads over France, Britain, Denmark, and the
south of Sweden, which it reaches by the beginning of May. It
does not enter Brittany, the Channel Islands, or the western part
of England, never visiting Wales, except the extreme south of
Glamorganshire, and rarely extending farther north than York-
shire. It spreads over Central Europe, through Austria and
Hungary to Southern Russia and the warmer parts of Siberia,

22 DISPERSAL AND MIGRATION. [PART I.

but it nevertheless breeds in the Jordan Valley, so that in
some places it is only the surplus population that migrates.
In August and September, all who can return to their winter
quarters.

Migrations of this type probably date back from at least the
period when there was continuous land along the route passed
over; and it is a suggestive fact that this land connection is
known to have existed in recent geological times. Britain was
connected with the Continent during, and probably before, the
glacial epoch; and Gibraltar, as well as Sicily and Malta, were
also recently united with Africa, as is proved by the fossil
elephants and other large mammalia found in their caverns, by
the comparatively shallow water still existing in this part of the
Mediterranean while the remainder is of oceanic profundity,
and by the large amount of identity in the species of land animals
still inhabiting the opposite shores of the Mediterranean. The
submersion of these two tracts of land (which were perhaps of
considerable extent) would be a slow process, and from year to
year the change might be hardly perceptible. It is easy to see
how the migration that had once taken place over continuous
land would be kept up, first over lagoons and marshes, then over
a narrow channel, and subsequently over a considerable sea,
no one generation of birds ever perceiving any difference in the
route.

There is, however, no doubt that the sea-passage is now very
dangerous to many birds. Quails cross in immense flocks, and
great numbers are drowned at sea whenever the weather is un-
favourable. Some individuals always stay through the winter
in the south of Europe, and a few even in England and Ireland ;
and were the sea to become a little wider the migration would
cease, and the quail, like some other birds, would remain
divided between south Europe and north Africa. Aquatic
birds are observed to follow the routes of great rivers and
lakes, and the shores of the sea. One great body reaches
central Europe by way of the Danube from the shores of the
Black Sea; another ascends the Rhone Valley from the Gulf
of Lyons.

CHAP. Il.] - BIRDS. 23

India and China.—In the peninsula of India and in China
great numbers of northern birds arrive during September and
October, and leave from March to May. Among the smaller
birds are wagtails, pipits, larks, stonechats, warblers, thrushes,
buntings, shrikes, starlings, hoopoes, and quails. Some species
of cranes and storks, many ducks, and great numbers of Scolo-
pacide also visit India in winter; and to prey upon these
come a band of rapacious birds—the peregrine falcon, the hobby,
kestrel, common sparrowhawk, harrier, and the short-eared owl.
These birds are almost all natives of Europe and Western Asia;
they spread over all northern and central India, mingling with
the sedentary birds of the oriental fauna, and give to the orni-
thology of Hindostan at this season quite a European aspect.
The peculiar species of the higher Himalayas do not as a rule
descend to the plains in winter, but merely come lower down the
mountains; and in southern India and Ceylon comparatively
few of these migratory birds appear.

In China the migratory birds follow generally the coast line,
coming southwards in winter from eastern Siberia and northern
Japan ; while a few purely tropical forms travel northwards in
summer to Japan, and on the mainland as far as the valley of
the Amoor.

North America.—The migrations of birds in North America
have been carefully studied by resident naturalists, and present
some interesting features. The birds of the eastern parts of
North America are pre-eminently migratory, a much smaller pro-
portion being permanent residents than in corresponding latitudes
in Europe. Thus, in Massachusetts there are only about 30 species
of birds which are resident all the year, while the regular
summer visitors are 106. Comparing with this our own country,
though considerably further north, the proportions are reversed ;
there being 140 residents and 63 summer visitors. This differ-
ence is clearly due to the much greater length and severity of
the winter, and the greater heat of summer, in America than
with us. The number of permanent residents increases pretty
regularly as we go southward ; but the number of birds at any
locality during the breeding season seems to increase as we go

24 DISPERSAL AND MIGRATION, [PART I.

northward as far as Canada, where, according to Mr. Allen, more
species breed than in the warm Southern States. Even in the
extreme north, beyond the limit of forests, there are no less than
60 species which breed; in Canada about 160; while in
Carolina there are only 135, and in Louisiana, 130. The extent
of the migration varies greatly, some species only going a few
degrees north and south, while others migrate annually from
the tropics to the extreme north of the continent; and every
gradation occurs between these extremes. Among those which
migrate furthest are the species of Dendreca, and other Ameri-
can flycatching warblers (Mniotiltide), many of which breed
on the shores of Hudson’s Bay, and spend the winter in Mexico
or the West Indian islands.

The great migratory movement of American birds is almost
wholly confined to the east coast; the birds of the high central
plains and of California being for the most part sedentary, or
only migrating for short distances. All the species which reach
South America, and most of those which winter in Mexico
and Guatemala, are exclusively eastern species; though a few
Rocky Mountain birds range southward along the plateaux of
Mexico and Guatemala, but probably not as regular annual
migrants.

In America as in Europe birds appear in spring with great
regularity, while the time of the autumnal return is less con-
stant. More curious is the fact, also observed in both hemi-
spheres, that they do not all return by the same route followed in
going northwards, some species being constant visitors to certain
localities in spring but not in autumn, others in autumn but not
in spring.

Some interesting cases have been observed in America of a
gradual alteration in the extent of the migration of certain birds.
A Mexican swallow (Hirundo lunifrons) first appeared in Ohio
in 1815. Year by year it increased the extent of its range till
by 1845 it had reached Maine and Canada; and it is now quoted
by American writers as extending its annual migrations to
Hudson’s Bay. An American wren (Tvroglodytes ludovicianus)
is another bird which has spread considerably northwards since

CHAP. II.] BIRDS. 25

the time of the ornithologist Wilson ; and the rice-bird, or “ Bob-
o’-link,” of the Americans, continually widens its range as rice
and wheat are more extensively cultivated. This bird winters
in Cuba and other West Indian Islands, and probably also in
Mexico. In April it enters the Southern States and passes
northward, till in June it reaches Canada and extends west to
the Saskatchewan River in 54° north latitude.

South Temperate America.—The migratory birds of this part
of the world have been observed by Mr. Hudson at Buenos
Ayres. As in Europe and North America, there are winter and
summer visitors, from Patagonia and the tropics respectively.
Species of Pyrocephalus, Milvulus, swallows, and a humming-
bird, are among the most regular of the summer visitors. They
are all insectivorous birds, From Patagonia species of Zan-
optera, Cinelodes, and Centrites, come in winter, with two gulls,
two geese, and six snipes and plovers. Five species of swallows
appear at Buenos Ayres in spring, some staying to breed, others
passing on to more temperate regions farther south. As a rule
the birds which come late and leave early are the most regular.
Some are very irregular in their movements, the Molothrus bona-
riensis, for example, sometimes leaves early in autumn, some-
times remains all the winter. Some resident birds also move in
winter to districts where they are never seen in summer.

General Remarks on Migration.—The preceding summary of
the main facts of migration (which might have been almost in-
definitely extended, owing to the great mass of detailed infor-
mation that exists on the subject) appears to accord with the
view already suggested, that the “instinct” of migration has
arisen from the habit of wandering in search of food common to
all animals, but greatly exaggerated in the case of birds by their
powers of flight and by the necessity for procuring a large
amount of soft insect food for their unfledged young. Migra-
tion in its simple form may be best studied in North America,
where it takes place over a continuous land surface with a con-
siderable change of climate from south to north. We have here
(as probably in Europe and elsewhere) every grade of migration,

from species which merely shift the northern and southern
Vou. I.—4

26 DISPERSAL AND MIGRATION. [PART 1,

limits of their range a few hundred miles, so that in the central
parts of the area the species is a permanent resident, to others
- which move completely over 1,000 miles of latitude, so that in
all the intervening districts they are only known as birds of
passage. Now, just as the rice-bird and the Mexican swallow
have extended their migrations, owing to favourable conditions
induced by human agency ; so we may presume that large num-
bers of species would extend their range where favourable con-
ditions arose through natural causes. If we go back only as
far as the height of the glacial epoch, there is reason to believe
that all North America, as far south as about 40° north latitude,
was covered with an almost continuous and perennial ice-sheet.
At this time the migratory birds would extend up to this barrier
(which would probably terminate in the midst of luxuriant
vegetation, just as the glaciers of Switzerland now often termi-
nate amid forests and corn-fields), and as the cold decreased and
the ice retired almost imperceptibly year by year, would follow
it up farther and farther according as the peculiarities of vegeta-
tion and insect-food were more or less suited to their several
constitutions. It is an ascertained fact that many individual
birds return year after year to build their nests in the same
spot. This shows a strong local attachment, and is, in fact,
the faculty or feeling on which: their very existence probably
depends. For were they to wander at random each year, they
would almost certainly not meet with places so well suited to
them, and might even get into districts where they or their
young would inevitably perish. It is also a curious fact that in
so many cases the old birds migrate first, leaving the young ones
behind, who follow some short time later, but do not go so far as
their parents. This is very strongly opposed to the notion of
an imperative instinct. The old birds have been before, the
young have not; and it is only when the old ones have all or
nearly all gone that the young go too, probably following some
of the latest stragglers. They wander, however, almost at ran-
dom, and the majority are destroyed before the next spring.
This is proved by the fact that the birds which return in spring
are as a rule not more numerous than those which came the

CHAP, I. ] BIRDS. 27

preceding spring, whereas those which went away in autumn
were two or three times as numerous. Those young birds that
do get back, however, have learnt by experience, and the next
year they take care to go with the old ones. The most striking
fact in favour of the “instinct” of migration is the “ agitation,”
or excitement, of confined birds at the time when their wild
companions are migrating. It seems probable, however, that
this is what may be called a social excitement, due to the
anxious cries of the migrating birds; a view supported by the
fact stated by Marcel de Serres, that the black swan of Australia,
when domesticated in Europe, sometimes joins wild swans in
their northward migration. We must remember too that migra-
tion at the proper time is in many cases absolutely essential to
the existence of the species; and it is therefore not improbable
that some strong social emotion should have been gradually
developed in the race, by the circumstance that all who for
want of such emotion did not join their fellows inevitably
perished.

The mode by which a passage originally overland has been
converted into one over the sea offers no insuperable difficulties,
as has already been pointed out. The long flights of some birds
without apparently stopping on the way is thought to be inex-
plicable, as well as their finding their nesting-place of the
previous year from a distance of many hundreds or even a
thousand miles. But the observant powers of animals are very
great; and birds flying high in the air may be guided by the
physical features of the country spread out beneath them in a
way that would be impracticable to purely terrestrial animals.

It is assumed by some writers that the breeding-place of a
species is to be considered as its true home rather than that to
which it retires in winter; but this can hardly be accepted as a
rule of universal application. A bird can only breed success-
fully where it can find sufficient food for its young; and.the
reason probably why so many of the smaller birds leave the
warm southern regions to breed in temperate or even cold lati-
tudes, is because caterpillars and other soft insect larve are
there abundant at the proper time, while in their winter home the

28 DISPERSAL AND MIGRATION. [PART I,

larvee have all changed into winged insects. But this favourable
breeding district will change its position with change of climate ;
and as the last great change has been one of increased warmth
in allthe temperate zones, it is probable that many of the migratory
birds are comparatively recent visitors. Other changes may
however have taken place, affecting the vegetation and conse-
quently the insects of a district ; and we have seldom the means
of determining in any particular case in what direction the last
extension of range occurred. For the purposes of the study of
geographical distribution therefore, we must, except in special
cases, consider the true range of a species to comprise all-the
area which it occupies regularly for any part of the year, while
all those districts which it only visits at more or less distant
intervals, apparently driven by storms or by hunger, and where
it never regularly or permanently settles, should not be included
as forming part of its area of distribution.

Means of Dispersal of Reptiles and Amphibia—If we leave
out of consideration the true marine groups—the turtles and sea-
snakes—reptiles are scarcely more fitted for traversing seas and
oceans than are mammalia. We accordingly find that in those
oceanic islands which possess no indigenous mammals, land rep-
tiles are also generally wanting. The several groups of these ani-
mals, however, differ considerably both in their means of dispersal
and in their power of resisting adverse conditions. Snakes are
most dependent on climate, becoming very scarce in temperate
and cold climates and entirely ceasing at 62° north latitude, and
they do not ascend very lofty mountains, ceasing at 6,000 feet
elevation in the Alps. Some inhabit deserts, others swamps and
marshes,. while many are adapted for a life in forests. They
swim rivers easily, but apparently have no means of passing
the sea, since they are very rarely found on oceanic islands.
Lizards are also essentially tropical, but they go somewhat
farther north than snakes, and ascend higher on the mountains,
reaching 10,000 feet in the Alps. They possess too some
unknown means (probably in the egg-state) of passing over the
ocean, since they are found to inhabit many islands where there
are neither mammalia nor snakes.

CHAP. Il. ] REPTILES AND FISHES. 29

The amphibia are much less sensitive to cold than are true
reptiles, and they accordingly extend much farther north, frogs
being found within the arctic circle. Their semi-aquatic life
also gives them facilities for dispersal, and their eggs are no doubt
sometimes carried by aquatic birds from one pond or stream to
another. Salt water is fatal to them as well as to their eggs, and
hence it arises that they are seldom found in those oceanic
islands from which mammalia are absent. Deserts and oceans
would probably form the most effectual barriers to their dis-
persal; whereas both snakes and lizards abound in deserts, and
have some means of occasionally passing the ocean which frogs
and salamanders do not seem to possess,

Means of Dispersal of Fishes—The fact that the same species
of freshwater fish often inhabit distinct river systems, proves
that they have some means of dispersal over land. The many
authentic accounts of fish falling from the atmosphere, indicate
one of the means by which they may be transferred from one
river basin to another, viz., by hurricanes and whirlwinds, which
often carry up considerable quantities of water and with it fishes
of small size. In voleanic countries, also, the fishes of subter-
ranean streams may sometimes be thrown up by volcanic explo-
sions, as Humboldt relates happened in South America. Another
mode by which fishes may be distributed is by their eggs being
occasionally carried away by aquatic birds; and it is stated by
Gmelin that geese and ducks during their migrations feed on the
eggs of fish, and that some of these pass through their bodies
with their vitality unimpaired.’ Even water-beetles flying from
one pond to another might occasionally carry with them some of
the smaller eggs of fishes. But itis probable that fresh-water fish
are also enabled to migrate by changes of level causing streams
to alter their course and carry their waters into adjacent basins.
On plateaux the sources of distinct river systems often approach
each other, and the same thing occurs with lateral tributaries
on the lowlands near their mouths. Such changes, although
small in extent, and occurring only at long intervals, would

* Quoted in Lyell’s Principles of Geology (11th ed. vol. ii. p. 374), from
Amen. Acad. Essay 75.

30 DISPERSAL AND MIGRATION. [PART 1,

act very powerfully in modifying the distribution of fresh-water
fish.

Sea fish would seem at first sight to have almost unlimited
means of dispersal, but this is far from being the case. Tempera-
ture forms a complete barrier to a large number of species, cold
water being essential to many, while others can only dwell in
the warmth of the tropics. Deep water is another barrier to
large numbers of species which are adapted to shores and
shallows; and thus the Atlantic is quite as impassable a gulf
to most fishes as it is to birds. Many sea fishes migrate to a
limited extent for the purpose of depositing their spawn in
favourable situations. The herring, an inhabitant of the deep
sea, comes in shoals to our coast in the breeding season; while
the salmon quits the northeru seas and enters our rivers, mount-
ing upwards to the clear cold water near their sources to deposit
its eggs. Keeping in mind the essential fact that changes of
temperature and of depth are the main barriers to the dispersal
of fish, we shall find little difficulty in tracing the causes that
have determined their distribution.

Means of Dispersal of Mollusca—The marine, fresh-water, and
land mollusca are three groups whose powers of dispersal and
consequent distribution are very different, and must be separately
considered. The Pteropoda, the Janthina, and other groups of
floating molluses, drift about in mid-ocean, and their dispersal
is probably limited chiefly by temperature, but perhaps also by
the presence of enemies or the scarcity of proper food. The
univalve and bivalve mollusca, of which the whelk and the
cockle may be taken as types, move so slowly in their adult
state, that we should expect them to have an exceedingly limited
distribution; but the young of all these are free swimming
embryos, and they thus have a powerful means of dispersal, and
are carried by tides and currents so as ultimately to spread over
every shore and shoal that offers conditions favourable for their
development. The fresh water molluscs, which one might at
first suppose could not range beyond their own river-basin, are
yet very widely distributed in common with almost all other
fresh water productions ; and Mr. Darwin has shown that this is

CHAP, II.] LAND-SHELLS AND INSECTS. 31
due to the fact, that ponds and marshes are constantly frequented
by wading and swimming birds which are pre-eminently wan-
derers, and which frequently carry away with them the seeds of
plants, and the eggs of molluscs and aquatic insects. Fresh
water molluscs just hatched were found to attach themselves to
a duck’s foot suspended in an aquarium ; and they would thus be
easily carried from one lake or river to another, and by the help
of different species of aquatic birds, might soon spread all over
the globe. Even a water-beetle has been caught with a small
living shell (Ancylus) attached to it; and these fly long distances
and are lable to be blown out to sea, one having been caught on
board the Beagle when forty-five miles from land. Although
fresh water molluscs and their eggs must frequently be carried
out to sea, yet this cannot lead to their dispersal, since salt
water is almost immediately fatal to them ; and we are therefore
forced to conclude that the apparently insignificant and uncer-
tain means of dispersal above alluded to are really what have
led to their wide distribution. The true land-shells offer a still
more difficult case, for they are exceedingly sensitive to the
influence of salt water; they are not likely to be carried by
aquatic birds, and yet they are more or less abundant all over
the globe, inhabiting the most remote oceanic islands, It has
been found, however, that land-shells have the power of lying
dormant a long time. Some have lived two years and a half
shut up in pill boxes ; and one Egyptian desert snail came to life
after having been glued down to a tablet in the British Museum
for four years !

We are indebted to Mr. Darwin for experiments on the power
, of land shells to resist sea water, and he found that when they
had formed a membranous diaphragm over the mouth of the
shell they survived many days’ immersion (in one case fourteen
days) ; and another experimenter, quoted by Mr. Darwin, found that
out of one hundred land shells immersed for a fortnight in the sea,
twenty-seven recovered. It is therefore quite possible for them to
be carried in the chinks of drift wood for many hundred miles
across the sea, and this is probably one of the most effectual
modes of their dispersal. Very young shells would also some-

32 DISPERSAL AND MIGRATION, [PART I.

times attach themselves to the feet of birds walking or resting
on the ground, and as many of the waders often go far inland,
this may have been one of the methods of distributing species
of land shells ; for it must always be remembered that nature can
afford to wait, and that if but once in a thousand years a single
bird should convey two or three minute snails to a distant island,
this is all that is required for us to find that island well stocked
with a great and varied population of land shells.

Means of Dispersal of Insects and the Barriers which Limit
their Range—Winged insects, as a whole, have perhaps more
varied means of dispersal over the globe than any cther highly
organised animals. Many of them can fly immense distances,
and the more delicate ones are liable to be carried by storms
and hurricanes over a wide expanse of ocean. They are often
met with far out at sea. Hawk-moths frequently fly on board
ships as they approach the shores of tropical countries, and they
have sometimes been captured more than 250 miles from the
nearest land. Dragon-flies came on board the Adventure frigate
when fifty miles off the coast of South America. A southerly
wind brought flies in myriads to Admiral Smyth’s ship in the
Mediterranean when he was 100 miles distant from the coast of
Africa. A large Indian beetle (Chrysochroa ocellata) was quite
recently caught alive in the Bay of Bengal by Captain Payne of
the barque William Mansoon, 273 miles from the nearest land.
Darwin caught a locust 370 miles from land; and in 1844
swarms of locusts several miles in extent, and as thick as the
flakes in a heavy snowstorm, visited Madeira. These must have
come with perfect safety more than 300 miles; and as they con-
tinued flying over the island for along time, they could evidently
have travelled to a much greater distance, Numbers of living
beetles belonging to seven genera, some aquatic and some terres-
trial, were caught by Mr. Darwin in the open sea, seventeen
miles from the coast of South America, and they did not seem
injured by the salt water. Almost all the accidental causes that
lead to the dispersal of the higher animals would be still more
favourable for insects. Floating trees could carry hundreds of
insects for one bird or mammal; and so many of the larvae, eggs,

CHAP, II. ] DISPERSAL AND MIGRATION. 33

and pup of insects have their abode in solid timber, that they
might survive being floated immense distances. Great numbers
of tropical insects have been captured in the London docks,
where they have been brought in foreign timber ; and some have
emerged from furniture after remaining torpid for many years.
Most insects have the power of existing weeks or months with-
out food, and some are very tenacious of life. Many beetles
will survive immersion for hours in strong spirit ; and water a
few degrees below the boiling point will not always kill them.
We can therefore easily understand how, in the course of ages
insects may become dispersed by means which would be quite
inadequate in the case of the higher animals. The drift-wood and
tropical fruits that reach Ireland and the Orkneys; the double
cocoa-nuts that cross the Indian ocean from the Seychelle Islands
to the coast of Sumatra; the winds that carry volcanic dust and
ashes for thousands of miles ; the hurricanes that travel in their
revolving course over wide oceans; all indicate means by which
a few insects may, at rare intervals be carried to remote regions,
and become the progenitors of a group of allied forms.

But the dispersal of msects requires to be looked at from
another point of view. ‘They are, of all animals, perhaps the
most wonderfully adapted for special conditions ; and are so often
fitted to fill one place in nature and one only, that the barriers
against their permanent displacement are almost as numerous
and as effective as their means of dispersal. Hundreds of species
of lepidoptera, for example, can subsist in the larva state only on
one species of plant; so that even if the perfect insects were
carried to a new country, the continuance of the race would de-
pend upon the same or a closely allied plant being abundant
there. Other insects require succulent vegetable food all the
year round, and are therefore confined to tropical regions ;
some can live only in deserts, others in forests; some are de-
pendent on water-plants, some on mountain-vegetation. Many
are so intimately connected with other insects during some
part of their existence that they could not live without them ;
such are the parasitical hymenoptera and diptera, and those
mimicking species whose welfare depends upon their being

34 DISTRIBUTION OF ANIMALS. [PART I:

mistaken for something else. Then again, insects have enemies
in every stage of their existence—the egg, the larva, the pupa,
and the perfect form; and the abundance of any one of these
enemies may render their survival impossible in a country other-
wise well suited to them. Ever bearing in mind these two
opposing classes of facts, we shall not be surprised at the
enormous range of some groups of insects, and at the extreme
localization of others; and shall be able to give a rational account
of many phenomena of distribution that would otherwise seem
quite unintelligible.

CHAPTER III.

DISTRIBUTION AS AFFECTED BY THE CONDITIONS AND CIIANGES OF
THE EARTH’S SURFACE.

THE distribution of animals over the earth’s surface, 1s evidently
dependent in great measure upon those grand and important
characteristics of our globe, the study of which is termed physical
geography. The proportion of land and water; the outlines and
distribution of continents; the depth of seas and oceans; the
position of. islands ; the height, direction, and continuity of moun-
tain chains ; the position and extent of deserts, lakes, and forests ;
the direction and velocity of ocean currents, as well as of prevalent
winds and hurricanes; and lastly, the distribution of heat and
cold, of rain, snow, and ice, both in their means and in their
extremes, have all to be considered when we endeavour to
account for the often unequal and unsymmetrical manner in
which animals are dispersed over the globe. But even this
knowledge is insufficient unless we inquire further as to the
evidence of permanence possessed by each of these features, in
order that we may give due weight to the various causes that
have led to the existing facts of animal distribution.

Land and Water—The well-known fact that nearly three-
fourths of the surface of the earth is occupied by water, and but
a little more than one-fourth by land, is important as indicating
the vast extent of ocean by which many of the continents and
islands are separated from each other. But there is another fact

36 DISTRIBUTION OF ANIMALS. [PART I.

which greatly increases its importance, namely, that the mean
height of the land is very smal! compared with the mean depth
of the sea. It has been estimated by Humboldt that the mean
height of all the land surface does not exceed a thousand feet,
owing to the comparative narrowness of mountain ranges and the
great extent of alluvial plains and valleys; the ocean bed, on the
contrary, not only descends deeper than the tops of the highest
mountains rise above its surface, but these profound depths are
broad sunken plains, while the shallows correspond to the moun-
tain ranges, so that its mean depth is, as nearly as can be esti-
mated, twelve thousand feet.!. Hence, as the area of water is three
times that of the land, the total cubical contents of the land,
above the sea level, would be only j, that of the waters which
are below that level.. The important result follows, that whereas
it is scarcely possible that in past times the amount of land surface
should ever greatly have exceeded that which now exists, it is
just possible that all the land may have been at some time
submerged ; and therefore in the highest degree probable that
among the continual changes of land and sea that have been
always going on, the amount of land surface has often been
much less than it is now. For the same reason it is probable
that there have been times when large masses of land have been
more isolated from the rest than they are at present; just as
South America would be if North America were submerged, or
as Australia would become if the Malay Archipelago were to
sink beneath the ocean. It is also very important to bear in
mind the fact insisted on by Sir Charles Lyell, that the shallow
parts of the ocean are almost always in the vicinity of land; and
that an amount of elevation that would make little difference to
the bed of the ocean, would raise up extensive tracts of dry land
in the vicinity of existing continents. It is almost certain,
therefore, that changes in the distribution of land and sea
must have taken place more frequently by additions to, or

1 This estimate has been made for me by Mr. Stanford from the materials
used in delineating the contours of the ocean-bed on our general map. It
embodies the result of all the soundings of the Challenger, Tuscarora, and
other vessels. obtainable up to August, 1875.

CHAP. I11.] CONDITIONS AFFECTING DISTRIBUTION. 37

modifications of pre-existing land, than by the upheaval of
entirely new continents in mid-ocean. These two principles
will throw light upon two constantly recurring groups of facts
in the distribution of animals,—the restriction of peculiar forms
to areas not at present isolated—and on the other hand, the
occurrence of allied forms in lands situated on opposite shores
of the great oceans.

Continental Areas.—Although the dry land of the earth’s
surface is distributed with so much irregularity, that there is
more than twice as much north of the equator as there is south
of it, and about twice as much in the Asiatic as in the American
hemisphere; and, what is still more extraordinary, that on a
hemisphere of which a point in St. George’s Channel between
England and Ireland is the centre, the land is nearly equal in
extent to the water, while in the opposite hemisphere it is in
the proportion of only one-eighth,—yet the whole of the land is
almost continuous. It consists essentially of only three masses:
the American, the Asia-African, and the Australian. The two
former are only separated by thirty-six miles of shallow sea
at Behring’s Straits, so that it is possible to go from Cape Horn
to Singapore or the Cape of Good Hope without ever being
out of sight of land; and owing to the intervention of the
numerous islands of the Malay Archipelago the journey might
be continued under the same conditions as far as Melbourne and
Hobart Town. This curious fact, of the almost perfect continuity
of all the great masses of land notwithstanding their extremely
irregular shape and distribution, is no doubt dependent on the
circumstances just alluded to; that the great depth of the oceans
and the slowness of the process of upheaval, has almost always
produced the new lands either close to, or actually connected
with pre-existing lands; and this has necessarily led to a much
greater uniformity in the distribution of organic forms, than
would have prevailed had the continents been more completely
isolated from each other.

The isthmuses which connect Africa with Asia, and North
with South America, are, however, so small and insignificant
compared with the vast extent of the countries they unite that

38 DISTRIBUTION OF ANIMALS. [PART I.

we can hardly consider them to form more than a nominal
connection. The Isthmus of Suez indeed, being itself a desert,
and connecting districts which for a great distance are more or
less desert also, does not effect any real union between the luxu-
riant forest-clad regions of intertropical Asia and Africa. The
Isthmus of Panama is a more effectual line of union, since it is
hilly, well watered, and covered with luxuriant vegetation ; and
we accordingly find that the main features of South American
zoology are continued into Central America and Mexico. In
Asia a great transverse barrier exists, dividing that continent
into a northern and southern portion; and as the lowlands occur
on the south and the highlands on the north of the great moun-
tain range, which is situated not far beyond the tropic, an abrupt
change of climate is produced ; so that a belt of about a hundred
miles wide, is all that intervenes between a luxuriant tropical
region and an almost arctic waste. Between the northern part
of Asia, and Europe, there is no barrier of importance ; and it is
impossible to separate these regions as regards the main features
of animal life. Africa, like Asia, has a great transverse barrier,
but it is a desert instead of a mountain chain; and it is found
that this desert is a more effectual barrier to the diffusion of
animals than the Mediterranean Sea; partly because it coincides
with the natural division of a tropical from a temperate climate,
but also on account of recent geological changes which we shall
presently allude to. It results then from this outline sketch of
the earth’s surface, that the primary divisions of the geographer
correspond approximately with those of the zoologist. Some
large portion of each of the popular divisions forms the nucleus
of a zoological region; but the boundaries are so changed that
the geographer would hardly recognise them: it has, therefore,
been found necessary to give them those distinct names which
will be fully explained in our next chapter.

Recent Changes in the Continental Areas.—The important fact
has been now ascertained, that a considerable portion of the
Sahara south of Algeria and Morocco was under water at a very
recent epoch. Over much of this area sea-shells, identical with
those now living in the Mediterranean, are abundantly scattered,

cHAP, 11.] CONDITIONS AFFECTING DISTRIBUTION. 39

not only in depressions below the level of the sea but up to a
height of 900 feet above it. Borings for water made by the
French government have shown, that these shells occur twenty
feet deep in the sand; and the occurrence of abundance of salt,
sometimes even forming considerable hills, is an additional proof
of the disappearance of a large body of salt water. The common
cockle is one of the most abundant of the shells found; and the
Rev. H. B. Tristram discovered a new fish, in a salt lake nearly
300 miles inland, but which has since been found to inhabit the
Gulf of Guinea. Connected with this proof of recent elevation
in the Sahara, we have most interesting indications of subsidence
in the area of the Mediterranean, which were perhaps contem-
poraneous. Sicily and Malta are connected with Africa by a .
submerged bank from 300 to 1,200 feet below the surface ; while
the depth of the Mediterranean, both to the east and west, is
enormous, in some parts more than 13,000 feet; and another
submerged bank with a depth of 1,000 feet occurs at the straits
of Gibraltar. In caves in Sicily, remains of the living African
elephant have been found by Baron Anca ; and in other caves Dr.
Falconer discovered remains of the Elephas antiquus and of two
species of Hippopotamus. In Malta, three species of elephant
have been discovered by Captain Spratt; a large one closely allied
to H#. antiquus and two smaller ones not exceeding five feet high
when adult. These facts clearly indicate, that when North
Africa was separated by a broad arm of the sea from the rest ot
the continent, it was probably connected with Europe; and this
explains why zoologists find themselves obliged to place it along
with Europe in the same zoological region.

Besides this change in the level of the Sahara and the Medi-
terranean basin, Europe has undergone many fluctuations in its
physical geography in very recent times. In Wales, abundance
of sea-shells of living species have been found at an elevation
of 1,300 feet; and in Sardinia there is proof of an elevation
of 300 feet since the human epoch; and these are only samples
of many such changes of level. But these changes, though very
important locally and as connected with geological problems,
need not be further noticed here; as they were not of a

40 DISTRIBUTION OF ANIMALS. [PART I.

nature to affect the larger features of the earth’s surface or to
determine the boundaries of great zoological regions.

The only other other recent change of great importance which
can be adduced to illustrate our present subject, is that which
has taken place between North and South America. The living
marine shells of the opposite coasts of the isthmus of Panama,
as well as the corals and fishes, are generally of distinct species,
but some are identical and many are closely allied; the West
Indian fossil shells and corals of the Miocene period, however,
are found to be largely identical with those of the Pacific coast.
The fishes of the Atlantic and Pacific shores of America are
as a rule very distinct; but Dr. Giinther has recently shown
that a considerable number of species inhabiting the seas on
opposite sides of the isthmus are absolutely identical. These
facts certainly indicate, that during the Miocene epoch a broad
channel separated North and South America; and it seems pro-
bable that a series of elevations and subsidences have taken
place uniting and separating them at different epochs ; the most
recent submersion having lasted but a short time, and thus,
while allowing the passage of abundance of locomotive fishes,
not admitting of much change in the comparatively stationary
mollusca.

The Glacial Epoch as affecting the Distribution of Animals.—
The remarkable refrigeration of climate in the northern hemi-
sphere within the epoch, of existing species, to which the term
Glacial epoch is applied, together with the changes of level that
accompanied and perhaps assisted to produce it, has been one of
the chief agents in determining many of the details of the exist-
ing distribution of animals in temperate zones. A comparison
of the effects produced by existing glaciers with certain super-
ficial phenomena in the temperate parts of Europe and North
America, renders it certain that between the Newer Pliocene and
the Recent epochs, a large portion of the northern hemisphere
must have been covered with a sheet of ice several thousand
feet thick, like that which now envelopes the interior of Green-
land. Much further south the mountains were covered with
perpetual snow, and sent glaciers down every valley ; and all the

CHAP. 111.] CONDITIONS AFFECTING DISTRIBUTION, 41

great valleys on the southern side of the Alps poured down
streams of ice which stretched far out into the plains of North-
ern Italy, and have left their débris in the form of huge
mountainous moraines, in some cases more than a thousand feet
high. In Canada and New Hampshire the marks of moving ice
are found on the tops of mountains from 3,000 to 5,000 feet
high ; and the whole surface of the country around and to the
north of the great lakes is scored by glaciers. Wherever the
land was submerged during a part of this cold period, a deposit
called boulder-clay, or glacial-drift has been formed. This is a
mass of sand, clay, or gravel, full of angular or rounded stones
of all sizes, up to huge blocks as large as a cottage; and especi-
ally characterized by these stones being distributed confusedly
through it, the largest being as often near the top as near the
bottom, and never sorted into layers of different sizes as in
materials carried by water. Such deposits are known to. be
formed by glaciers and icebergs; when deposited on the land by
glaciers they form moraines, when carried into water and thus
spread with more regularity over a wider area they form drift.
This drift is rarely found except where there is other evidence of
ice-action, and never south of the 40th parallel of latitude, to
which in the northern hemisphere signs of ice-action extend.
In the southern hemisphere, in Patagonia and in New Zealand,
exactly similar phenomena occur.

A very interesting confirmation of the reality of this cold
epoch is derived from the study of fossil remains. Both the —
plants and animals of the Miocene period indicate that the
climate of Central Europe was decidedly warmer or more equa-
ble than it is now; since the flora closely resembled that of the
Southern United States, with a likeness also to that of Eastern
Asia and Australia. Many of the shells were of tropical genera ;
and there were numbers of large mammalia allied to the
elephant, rhinoceros, and tapir. At the same time, or perhaps
somewhat earlier, a temperate climate extended into the arctic
regions, and allowed a magnificent vegetation of shrubs and
forest trees, some of them evergreen, to flourish within twelve

degrees of the Pole. In the Pliocene period we find ourselves
Vou. I.—5

42 DISTRIBUTION OF ANIMALS. [PART

among forms implying a climate very little different from the
present; and our own Crag formation furnishes evidence of a
gradual refrigeration of climate; since its three divisions, the
Coralline, Red, and Norwich Crags, show a decreasing number
of southern, and an increasing number of northern species, as we
approach the Glacial epoch. Still later than these we have the
shells of the drift, almost all of which are northern and many
of them arctic species. Among the mammalia indicative of
cold, are the mammoth and the reindeer. In gravels and cave-
deposits of Post-Plocene date we find the same two animals,
which soon disappear as the climate approached its present con-
dition; and Professor Forbes has given a list of fifty shells
which inhabited the British seas before the Glacial epoch and
inhabit it still, but are all wanting in the glacial deposits. The
whole of these are found in the Newer Pliocene strata of Sicily
and the south of Europe, where they escaped destruction during
the glacial winter.

There are also certain facts in the distribution of plants, which
are so well explained by the Glacial epoch that they may be said
to give an additional confirmation to it. All over the northern
hemisphere within the glaciated districts, the summits of lofty
mountains produce plants identical with those of the polar
regions. In the celebrated case of the White Mountains in New
Hampshire, United States (latitude 45°), all the plants on the
summit are arctic species, none of which exist in the lowlands
for near a thousand miles further north. It has also been re-
marked that the plants of each mountain are more especially
related to those of the countries directly north of ‘it. Thus,
those of the Pyrenees and of Scotland are Scandinavian, and
those of the White Mountains are all species found in Labrador.
Now, remembering that we have evidence of an exceedingly
mild and uniform climate in the arctic regions during the
Miocene period and a gradual refrigeration from that time, it is
evident that with each degree of change more and more hardy
plants would be successively driven southwards ; till at last the
plains of the temperate zone would be inhabited by plants, which
were once confined to alpine heights or to the arctic regions.

CHAP, 11.] CONDITIONS AFFECTING DISTRIBUTION. 43

As the icy mantle gradually melted off the face of the earth
these plants would occupy the newly exposed soil, and would
thus necessarily travel in two directions, back towards the arctic
circle and up towards the alpine peaks. The facts are thus
exactly explained by a cause which independent evidence has
proved to be a real one, and every such explanation is an addi-
tional proof of the reality of the cause. But this explanation im-
plies, that in cases where the Glacial epoch cannot have so acted
alpine plants should not be northern plants ; and a striking proof
of this is to be found on the Peak of Teneriffe, a mountain
12,000 feet high. In the uppermost 4,500 feet of this mountain
above the limit of trees, Von Buch found only eleven species of
plants, eight of which were peculiar; but the whole were allied
to those found at lower elevations. On the Alps or Pyrenees at
this elevation, there would be a rich flora comprising hundreds
of arctic plants; and the absence of anything corresponding to
them in this case, in which their ingress was cut off by the sea,
is exactly what the theory leads us to expect.

Changes of Vegetation as affecting the Distribution of Animals.
—As so many animals are dependent on vegetation, its changes
immediately affect their distribution. A remarkable example of
this is afforded by the pre-historic condition of Denmark, as
interpreted by means of the peat-bogs and kitchen-middens.
This country is now celebrated for its beech-trees; oaks and pines
being scarce ; and it is known to have had the same vegetation in
the time of the Romans. In the peat-bogs, however, are found
deposits of oak trees; and deeper still pines alone occur. Now
the kitchen-middens tell us much of the natural history of
Denmark in the early Stone period ; and a curious confirmation
of the fact that Denmark like Norway was then chiefly covered
with pine forests is obtained by the discovery, that the Caper-
cailzie was then abundant, a bird which feeds almost exclusively
on the young shoots and seeds of pines and allied plants. The
cause of this change in the vegetation is unknown; but from the
known fact that when forests are destroyed trees, of a different
kind usually occupy the ground, we may suppose that some such
change as a temporary submergence might cause an entirely

44 DISTRIBUTION OF ANIMALS. [PART I.

different vegetation and a considerably modified fauna to occupy
the country.
Organic Changes as affecting Distribution—We have now briefly
touched on some of the direct effects of changes in physical
geography, climate, and vegetation, on the distribution of ani-
mals; but the indirect effects of such changes are probably of
quite equal, if not of greater importance. Every change
becomes the centre of an ever-widening circle of effects. The
different members of the organic world are so bound together by
complex relations, that any one change generally involves
numerous other changes, often of the most unexpected kind.
We know comparatively little of the way in which one animal
or plant is bound up with others, but we know enough to assure
us that groups the most apparently disconnected are often
dependent on each other. We know, for example, that the
introduction of goats into St. Helena utterly destroyed a whole
flora of forest trees; and with them all the insects, mollusca, and
perhaps birds directly or indirectly dependent on them. Swine,
which ran wild in Mauritius, exterminated the Dodo. The same
animals are known to be the greatest enemies of venomous
serpents. Cattle will, in many districts, wholly prevent the
growth of trees; and with the trees the numerous insects depen-
dent on those ‘trees, and the birds which fed upon the insects,
must disappear, as well as the small mammalia which feed on
the fruits, seeds, leaves, or roots. Insects again have the most
wonderful influence on the range of mammalia. In Paraguay a
certain species of fly abounds which destroys new-born cattle
and horses ; and thus neither of these animals have run wild in
that country, although they abound both north and south of it.
This inevitably leads to a great difference in the vegetation of
Paraguay, and through that to a difference in its insects, birds,
reptiles, and wild mammalia. On what causes the existence of
the fly depends we do not know, but it is not improbable that some
comparatively slight changes in the temperature or humidity of
the air at a particular season, or the introduction of some enemy
might lead to its extinction or banishment. The whole face of
the country would then soon be changed: new species would

CHAP. 11.] CONDITIONS AFFECTING DISTRIBUTION. 45

come in, while many others would be unable to live there; and
the immediate cause of this great alteration would probably be
quite imperceptible to us, even if we could watch it in progress
year by year. So, in South Africa, the celebrated Tsetse fly
inhabits certain districts having well defined limits; and where
it abounds no horses, dogs, or cattle can live. Yet asses,
zebras, and antelopes are unaffected by it. So long as this fly
continues to exist, there is a living barrier to the entrance of
certain animals, quite as effectual as a lofty mountain range
or a wide arm of the sea. The complex relations of one form
of life with others is nowhere better illustrated than in Mr.
Darwin’s celebrated case of the cats and clover, as given in his
Crigin of Species, 6th ed., p. 57. He has observed that both
wild heartsease and red-clover are fertilized in this country by
humble-bees only, so that the production of seed depends on
the visits of these insects. A gentleman who has specially
studied humble-bees finds that they are largely kept down by
field-mice, which destroy their combs and nests. Field-mice
in their turn are kept down by cats ; and probably also by owls ;
so that these carnivorous animals are really the agents in ren-
dering possible the continued existence of red-clover and wild
heartsease. For if they were absent, the field-mice having no
enemies, would multiply to such an extent as to destroy all the
humble-bees; and these two plants would then produce no
seed and soon become extinct.

Mr. Darwin has also shown that one species often exterminates
another closely allied to it, when the two are brought into
contact. One species of swallow and thrush are known to
have increased at the expense of allied species. Rats, carried
all over the world by commerce, are continually extirpating
other species of rats. The imported hive-bee is, in Australia,
rapidly exterminating a native stingless bee. Any slight change,
therefore, of physical geography or of climate, which allows
allied species hitherto inhabiting distinct areas to come into
contact, will often lead to the extermination of one of them; and
this extermination will be effected by no external force, by no
actual enemy, but merely because the one is slightly better

46 DISTRIBUTION OF ANIMALS. [PART I,

adapted to live, to increase, and to maintain itself under adverse
circumstances, than the other.

Now if we consider carefully the few suggestive facts here
referred to (and many others of like import are to be found in
Mr. Darwin’s various works), we shall be led to conclude that
the several species, genera, families, and orders, both of animals
and vegetables which inhabit any extensive region, are bound
together by a series of complex relations; so that the increase,
diminution, or extermination of any one, may set in motion a
series of actions and reactions more or less affecting a large
portion of the whole, and requiring perhaps centuries of fluctua-
tion before the balance is restored. The range of any species
or group in such a region, will in many cases (perhaps in most)
be determined, not by physical barriers, but by the competition
of other organisms. Where barriers have existed from a remote
epoch, they will at first have kept back certain animals from
coming in contact with each other; but when the assemblage
of organisms on the two sides of the barrier have, after many
ages, come to form a balanced organic whole, the destruction of
the barrier may lead to a very partial intermingling of the
peculiar forms of the two regions. Each will have become
moditied in special ways adapted to the organic and physical
conditions of the country, and will form a living barrier to the
entrance of animals less perfectly adapted to those conditions.
Thus while the abolition of ancient barriers will always lead
to much intermixture of forms, much extermination and wide-
spread alteration in some families of animals; other important
groups will be unable materially to alter their range; or they
may make temporary incursions into the new territory, and be
ultimately driven back to very near their ancient limits.

In order to make this somewhat difficult subject more intelli-
gible, it may be well to consider the probable effects of certain
hypothetical conditions of the earth’s surface :—

1. If the dry land of the globe had been from the first
continuous, and nowhere divided up by such boundaries as lofty
mountain ranges, wide deserts, or arms of the sea, it seems
probable that none of the larger groups (as orders, tribes, or

CHAP. 111.] CONDITIONS AFFECTING DISTRIBUTION. 47

Jamities,) would have a limited range; but, as is to some extent
the case in tropical America east of the Andes, every such
group would be represented over the whole area, ky countless
minute modifications of form adapted to local conditions.

2. One great physical barrier would, however, even then
- exist ; the hot equatorial zone would divide the faunas and floras
of the colder regions of the northern and southern hemispheres
from any chance of intermixture. This one barrier would be
more effectual than it is now, since there would be no lofty
mountain ranges to serve as a bridge for the partial interchange
of northern and southern forms.

3. If such a condition of the earth as here supposed con-
tinued for very long periods, we may conceive that the action
and reaction of the various organisms on each other, combined
with the influence of very slowly changing physical conditions,
would result in an almost perfect organic balance, which would
be manifested by a great stability in the average numbers, the
local gange, and the peculiar characteristics of every species.

4, Under such a condition of things it is not improbable that
the total number of clearly differentiated specific forms might be
much greater than it is now, though the number of generic and
family types might perhaps be less ; for dominant species would
have had ample time to spread into every locality where they
could exist, and would then become everywhere modified into
forms best suited to the permanent local conditions.

5. Now let us consider what would be the probable effect of
the introduction of a barrier, cutting off a portion of this homo-
geneous and well-balanced world. Suppose, for instance, that a
subsidence took place, cutting off by a wide arm of the seaa
large and tolerably varied island. The first and most obvious
result would be that the individuals of a number of species
would be divided into two.portions, while others, the limits of
whose range agreed approximately with the line of subsidence,
would exist in unimpaired numbers on the new island or on the
main land. But the species whose numbers were diminished
and whose original area was also absolutely diminished by the
portion now under the sea, would not be able to hold their

48 DISTRIBUTION OF ANIMALS. [PART I.

ground against the rival forms whose numbers were intact.
Some would probably diminish and rapidly die out; others
which produced favourable varieties, might be so modified by
natural selection as to maintain their existence under a different
form; and such changes would take place in varying modes on
the two sides of the new strait.

6. But the progress of these changes would necessarily affect
the other species in contact with them. New places would be
opened in the economy of nature which many would struggle to
obtain; and modification would go on in ever-widening circle
and very long periods of time might be required to bring the
whole again into a state of equilibrium.

7. A new set of factors would in the meantime have come
into play. The sinking of land and the influx of a large body
of water could hardly take place without producing important
climatal changes. The temperature, the winds, the rains, might
all be affected, and more or less changed in duration and amount.
This would lead to a quite distinct movement in the organic
world. Vegetation would certainly be considerably affected, and
through this the insect tribes. We have seen how closely the
life of the higher animals is often bound up with that of insects ;
and thus a set of changes might arise that would modify the
numerical proportions, and even the forms and habits of a great
number of species, would completely exterminate some, and raise
others from a subordinate to a dominant position. And all these
changes would occur differently on opposite sides of the strait,
since the insular climate could not fail to differ considerably
from that of the continent.

8. But the two sets of changes, as above indicated, produced
by different modes of action of the same primary cause, would
act and react on each other; and thus lead to such a far-spread-
ing disturbance of the organic equilibrium as ultimately perhaps
to affect in one way or another, every form of life upon the
earth.

This hypothetical case is useful as enabling us better to realize
how wide-spreading might be the effects of one of the simplest
changes of physical geography, upon a compact mass of mutually

CHAP. 11.] CONDITIONS AFFECTING DISTRIBUTION. 49

adapted organisms. In the actual state of things, the physical
changes that occur and have occurred through all geological epochs
aré larger and more varied. Almost every mile of land surface
has been again and again depressed beneath the ocean ; most of
the great mountain chains have either originated or greatly
increased in height during the Tertiary period; marvellous
alterations of climate and vegetation have taken place over half
the land-surface of the earth; and all these vast changes have
influenced a globe so cut up by seas and oceans, by deserts
and snow-clad mountains, that in many of its more isolated
lahd-masses ancient forms of life have been preserved, which,
in the more extensive and more varied continents have long
given way to higher types. How complex then must have been
the actions and reactions such a state of things would bring
about ; and how impossible must it be for us to guess, in most
cases, at the exact nature of the forces that limit the range of
some species and cause others to be rare or to become extinct !
All that we can in general hope to do is, to trace out, more or
less hypothetically, some of the larger changes in physical
geography that have occurred during the ages immediately pre-
ceeding our own, and to estimate the effect they will probably
have produced on animal distribution. We may then, by the
aid of such knowledge as to past organic mutations as the geo-
logical record supplies us with, be able to determine the probable
birthplace and subsequent migrations of the more important
genera and families; and thus obtain some conception of that
grand series of co-ordinated changes in the earth and its in-
habitants, whose final result is seen in the forms and the geo-
graphical distribution of existing animals.

CHAPTER IV. :
ON ZOOLOGICAL REGIONS.

To the older school of Naturalists the native country of an animal
was of little importance, except in as far as climates differed.
Animals were supposed to be specially adapted to live in certain
zones or under certain physical conditions, and it was hardly
recognised that apart from these conditions there was any
influence in locality which could materially affect them. It
was believed that, while the animals of tropical, temperate, and
arctic climates, essentially differed; those of the tropics were
essentially alike all over the world. A group of animals was
said to inhabit the “Indies;” and important differences of
structure were often overlooked from the idea, that creatures
equally adapted to live in hot countries and with certain
general resemblances, would naturally be related to each other.
Thus the Toucans and Hornbills, the Humming-Birds and Sun-
Birds, and even the Tapirs and the Elephants, came to be
popularly associated as slightly modified varieties of tropical
forms of life; while to naturalists, who were acquainted with
the essential differences of structure, it was a never-failing
source of surprise, that under climates and conditions so
apparently identical, such strangely divergent forms should
be produced.

To the modern naturalist, on the other hand, the native
country (or “habitat” as it is technically termed) of an animal

CHAP. IV.] ZOOLOGICAL REGIONS. 51

or a group of animals, is a matter of the first importance; and,
as regards the general history of life upon the globe, may be
considered to be one of its essential characters. The structure,
affinities, and habits of a species, now form only a part of its
natural history. We require also to know its exact range at
the present day and in prehistoric times, and to have some
knowledge of its geological age, the place of its earliest appear-
ance on the globe, and of the various extinct forms most nearly
allied to it. To those who accept the theory of development as .
worked out by Mr. Darwin, and the views as to the general
permanence and immense antiquity of the great continents and
oceans so ably developed by Sir Charles Lyell, it ceases to be a
matter of surprise that the tropics of Africa, Asia, and America
should differ in their productions, but rather that they should
have anything incommon. Their similarity, not their diversity,
is the fact that most frequently puzzles us.

The more accurate knowledge we have of late years obtained
of the productions of many remote regions, combined with the
greater approaches that have been made to a natural classifica-
tion of the higher animals, has shown, that every continent* or
well-marked division of a continent, every archipelago and
even every island, presents problems of more or less complexity
to the student of the geographical distribution of animals. If
we take up the subject from the zoological side, and study any
family, order, or even extensive genus, we are almost sure to
‘meet with some anumalies either in the present or past distri-
bution of the various forms. Let us adduce a few examples of
these problems.

Deer have a wonderfully wide range, over the whole of Europe,
Asia, and North and South America; yet in Africa south of
the great desert there are none. Bears range over the whole of
Europe, Asia, and North America, and true pigs of the genus
Sus, over all Europe and Asia and as far as New Guinea; yet
both bears and pigs, like deer, are absent from Tropical and
South Africa.

Again, the West Indian islands possess very few Mammaiia,
all of small size and allied to those of America, except one

52 DISTRIBUTION OF ANIMALS. [PART 1.

genus; and that belongs to an Order, “ Insectivora,” entirely
absent from South America, and to a family, “Centetidz,” all
the other species of which inhabit Madagascar only. And as
if to add force to this singular correspondence we have one
Madagascar species of a beautiful day-flying Moth, Urania, all
the other species of which inhabit tropical America. These
insects are gorgeously arrayed in green and gold, and are quite
unlike any other Lepidoptera upon the globe.

The island of Ceylon generally agrees in its productions with
the Southern part of India; yet it has several birds which are
allied to Malayan and not to Indian groups, and a fine butterfly
of the genus Hestia, as well as several genera of beetles, which
are purely Malayan.

Various important groups of animals are distributed in a
way not easy to explain. The anthropoid apes in West Africa
and Borneo; the tapirs in Malaya and South America; the
camel tribe in the deserts of Asia and the Andes; the trogons
in South America and Tropical Asia, with one species in Africa;
the marsupials in Australia and America, are examples.

The cases here adduced (and they might be greatly multiplied)
are merely to show the kind of problems with which the
naturalist now has to deal; and in order to do so he requires
some system of geographical arrangement, which shall serve
the double purpose of affording a convenient subdivision of his
subject, and at the same time of giving expression to the main
results at which he has arrived. Hence the recent discussions*
on “Zoological Regions,” or, what are the most natural
primary divisions of the earth as regards its forms of animal
life.

The divisions in use till quite recently were of two kinds ;
either those ready made by geographers, more especially the
quarters or continents of the globe; or those determined by
climate and marked out by certain parallels of latitude or by
isothermal lines. Either of these methods was better than
none at all; but from the various considerations explained in
the preceding chapters, it will be evident, that such divisions
must have often been very unnatural, and have disguised many

CHAP. IV. | ZOOLOGICAL REGIONS. 53

of the most important and interesting phenomena which a
study of the distribution of animals presents to us.

The merit of initiating a more natural system, that of determin-
ing zoological regions, not by any arbitrary or @ priori considera-
tion but by studying the actual ranges of the more important
groups of animals, is due to Mr. Sclater, who, in 1857, established
six primary zoological regions from a detailed examination of
the distribution of the chief genera and families of Birds.
Before stating what these regions are, what objections have
been made to them, what other divisions have been since
proposed, and what are those which we shall adopt in this
work, it will be well.to consider the general principles which
should guide us in the choice between rival systems.

Principles on which Zoological Regions should be formed.—
It will be evident in the first place that nothing like a per-
fect zoological division of the earth is possible. The causes
that have led to the present distribution of animal life are so
varied, their action and reaction have been so complex, that
anomalies and irregularities are sure to exist which will mar the
symmetry of any rigid system. On two main points every sys-
tem yet proposed, or that probably can be proposed, is open to
objection; they are,—I1stly, that the several regions are not of
equal rank ;—2ndly, that they are not equally applicable to all
classes of animals. As to the first objection, it will be found
impossible to form any three or more regions, each of which differs
from the rest in an equal degree or in the same manner. One
will surpass all others in the possession of peculiar families ;
another will have many characteristic genera; while a third will
be mainly distinguished by negative characters. There will also
be found many intermediate districts, which possess some of the
characteristics of two well-marked regions, with a few special
features of their own, or perhaps with none; and it will be a
difficult question to decide in all cases which region should
possess this doubtful territory, or whether it should be formed
into a primary region itself. Again, two regions which have
now well-marked points of difference, may be shown to have been
much more alike at a comparatively recent geological epoch ;

54 DISTRIBUTION OF ANIMALS. [PART I.

and this, it may be said, proves their fundamental unity and
that they ought to form but one primary region. To obviate
some of these difficulties a binary or dichotomous division is
sometimes proposed; that portion of the earth which differs
most from the rest being cut off as a region equal in rank
to all that remains, which is subjected again and again to
the same process.

To decide these various points it seems advisable that con-
venience, intelligibility, and custom, should largely guide us.
The first essential is, a broadly marked and easily remembered
set of regions; which correspond, as nearly as truth to nature
will allow, with the distribution of the most important groups
of animals. What these groups are we shall presently explain.
In determining the number, extent, and boundaries of these
regions, we must be guided by a variety of indications, since
the application of fixed rules is impossible. They should evi-
dently be of a moderate number, corresponding as far as
practicable with the great natural divisions of the globe marked
out by nature, and which have always been recognized by’
geographers. There should be some approximation to equality
of size, since there is reason to believe that a tolerably extensive
area has been an essential condition for the development of
most animal forms; and it is found that, other things being
equal, the numbers, variety and importance of the forms of
animal and vegetable life, do bear some approximate relation
to extent of area. Although the possession of peculiar families
or genera is the main character of a primary zoological region,
yet the negative character of the absence of certain families
or genera is of equal importance, when this absence does not
manifestly depend on unsuitability to the support of the group,
and especially when there is now no physical barrier preventing
their entrance. This will become evident when we consider that
the importance of the possession of a group by one region de-
pends on its absence from the adjoining regions; and if there is
now no barrier to its entrance, we may be sure that there has
once been one; and that the possession of the area by a distinct
and well balanced set of organisms, which must have been slowly

CHAP. IV. | ZOOLOGICAL REGIONS. 55

developed and adjusted, is the living barrier that now keeps out
intruders. —

When it is ascertained that the chief differences which
now obtain between two areas did not exist in Miocene or
Pliocene times, the fact is one of great interest, and enables us
to speculate with some degree of probability as to the causes that
have brought about the present state of things; but it is not a
reason for uniting these two areas into one region. Our object
is to represent as nearly as possible the main features of the
distribution of existing animals, not those of any or all past
geological epochs. Should we ever obtain sufficient information
as to the geography and biology of the earth at past epochs, we
might indeed. determine approximately what were the Pliocene
or Miocene or Eocene zoological regions; but any attempt to
exhibit all these in combination with those of our own period,
must lead to confusion.

The binary or dichotomous system, although it brings out
the fundamental differences of the respective regions, is an
inconvenient one in its application, and rather increases than
obviates the difficulty as to equality or inequality of regions;
for although a, b, c, and d, may be areas of unequal zoological
rank, a being the most important, and d the least, yet this
inequality will probably be still greater if we first divide
them into a, on one side, and b, ¢, and d, on the other,
and then, by another division, make 0, an area of the second,
and ¢, and d, of the third rank only.

Coming to the second objection, the often incompatible
distribution of different groups of animals, affords ground for
opposition to any proposed scheme of zoological regions. There
is first the radical difference between land and sea animals;
the most complete barriers to the dispersal of the one, sometimes
offering the greatest facilities for the emigration of the other,
and vice versa. A large number of ‘marine animals, however,
frequent shallow water only ; and these, keeping near the coasts,
will agree generally in their distribution with those inhabiting
the land. But among land animals themselves there are very
great differences of distribution, due to certain specialities

56 : DISTRIBUTION OF ANIMALS. [PART I.

in their organization or mode of life. These act mainly in
two ways,—Istly, by affecting the facilities with which they
can be dispersed, either voluntarily or involuntarily ;—2ndly,
by the conditions which enable them to multiply and establish
themselves in certain areas and not in others. When both
these means of diffusion are at a maximum, the dispersal of
a group becomes universal, and ceases to have much interest
for us. This is the case with certain groups of fungi and
lichens, as well as with some of the lower animals; and in
a less degree, as has been shown by Mr. Darwin, with many
fresh-water plants and animals. At the other extreme we may
place certain arboreal vertebrata such as sloths and lemurs,
which have no means of passing such barriers as narrow
straits or moderately high mountains, and whose survival in
any new country they might reach, would be dependent on the
presence of suitable forests and the absence of dangerous enemies.
Almost equally, or perhaps even more restricted, are the means
of permanent diffusion of terrestrial molluscs; since these are
without any but very rare and accidental means of being safely
transported across the sea; their individual powers of locomo-
tion are highly restricted; they are especially subject to the
attacks of enemies; and they often depend not only on a
peculiar vegetation, but on the geological character of the coun-
try, their abundance being almost in direct proportion to the
presence of some form of calcareous rocks. Between these
extremes we find animals possessed of an infinite gradation of
powers to disperse and to maintain themselves ; and it will evi-
dently be impossible that the limits which best define the
distribution of one group, should be equally true for all others.

Which class of Animals is of most importance in determining
Zoological Regions—To decide this question we have to con-
sider which groups of animals are best adapted to exhibit,
by their existing distribution, the past changes and present
physical condition of the earth’s surface; and at the same
time, by the abundance of their remains in the various tertiary
formations will best enable us to trace out the more recent
of the series of changes, both of the earth’s surface and

CHAP. IV. ] ZOOLOGICAL REGIONS. 57

of its inhabitants, by which the present state of things has
been brought about. For this purpose we require a group
which shall be dependent for its means of dispersal on the dis-
tribution of land and water, and on the presence or absence
of lofty mountains, desert plains or plateaux, and great forests ;
since these are the chief physical features of the earth’s surface
whose modifications at successive periods we wish to discover.
It is also essential that they should not be subject to dispersal
by many accidental causes; as this would inevitably in time
tend to obliterate the effect of natural barriers, and produce a
scattered distribution, the causes of which we could only guess at.
Again, it is necessary that they should be so highly organized as
not to be absolutely dependent on other groups of animals, and
with so much power of adaptation as to be able to exist in one
form or another over the whole globe. And lastly, it is highly
important that the whole group should be pretty well known,
and that a fairly natural classification, especially of its minor
divisions such as families and genera, should have been arrived
at; the reason for which last proviso is explained in our next
chapter, on classification.

Now in every one of these points the mammalia are preemi-
nent; and they possess the additional advantage of being the
most highly developed class of organized beings, and that to
which we ourselves belong. We should therefore construct our
typical or standard Zoological Regions in the first place, from a
consideration of the distribution of mammalia, only bringing to
our aid the distribution of other groups to determine doubtful
points. Regions so established will be most closely im accord-
ance with those long-enduring features of physical geography,
on which the distribution of all forms of life fundamentally
depend; and all discrepancies in the distribution of other
classes of animals must be capable of being explained, either
by their exceptional means of dispersion or by special condi-
tions affecting their perpetuation and increase in each locality.

If these considerations are well founded, the objections of
those who study insects or molluscs, for example,—that our
regions are not true for their departments of nature—cannot be

Vou. 1L—6

58 DISTRIBUTION OF ANIMALS. [PART I.

maintained. For they will find, that a careful consideration of
the exceptional means of dispersal and conditions of existence of
each group, will explain most of the divergences from the normal
distribution of higher animals.

We shall thus be led to an intelligent comprehension of the
phenomena of distribution in all groups, which would not be
the case if every specialist formed regions for his own particular
study. In many cases we should find that no satisfactory
division of the earth could be made to correspond with the dis-
tribution even of an entire class; but we should have the cole-
opterist and the lepidopterist each with his own Geography. Aud
even this would probably not suffice, for it is very doubtful if
the detailed distribution of the Longicornes, so closely dependent
on woody vegetation, could be made to agree with that of the
Staphylinide or the Carabide which abound in many of the
most barren regions, or with that of the Scarabeide, largely de-
pendent on the presence of herbivorous mammalia. And when
each of these enquirers had settled a division of the earth into
“yxegions ” which exhibited with tolerable accuracy the pheno-
mena of distribution of his own group, we should have gained
nothing whatever but a very complex mode of exhibiting
the bare facts of distribution. We should then have to begin
to work out the causes of the divergence of one group from
another in this respect ; but as each worker would refer to his
own set of regions as the type, the whole subject would become
involved in inextricable confusion. These considerations seem
to make it imperative that one set of “regions” should be
established as typical for Zoology; and it is hoped the reasons
here advanced will satisfy most naturalists that these regions
can be best determined, in the first place, by a study of the dis-
tribution of the mammalia, supplemented in doubtful cases by
that of the other vertebrates. We will now proceed to a discus-
sion of what these regions are.

Various Zoological Regions proposed since 1857.—It has already
been pointed out that a very large number of birds are limited
by the same kind of barriers as mammalia; it will therefore
not be surprising that a system of regions formed to suit the

CHAP. IV.] ZOOLOGICAL REGIONS. 59

one, should very nearly represent the distribution of the other.
Mr. Sclater’s regions are as follows :—

1. The Palearctic Region ; including Europe, Temperate Asia,
and N. Africa to the Atlas mountains.

2. The Ethiopian Region; Africa south of the Atlas, Mada-
gascar, and the Mascarene Islands, with Southern Arabia.

3. The Indian Region; including India south of the Hima-
layas, to South China, and to Borneo and Java.

4. The Australian Region ; including Celebes and Lombock,
eastward to Australia and the Pacific Islands.

5. The Nearctic Region; including Greenland, and N.
America, to Northern Mexico.

6. The Neotropical Region; including South America, the
Antilles, and Southern Mexico.

This division of the earth received great support from Dr.
Giinther, who, in the Proceedings of the Zoological Society for
1858, showed that the geographical distribution of Reptiles
agreed with it very closely, the principal difference being that
the reptiles of Japan have a more Indian character than the
birds, this being especially the case with the snakes. In the
volume for 1868 of the same work, Professor Huxley discusses
at considerable length the primary and secondary zoological
divisions of the earth. He gives reasons for thinking that the
most radical primary division, both as regards birds and mam-
mals, is into a Northern and Southern hemisphere (Arctogzea
and Notogea), the former, however, embracing all Africa, while
the latter includes only Australasia and the Neotropical or
Austro-Columbian region. Mr. Sclater had grouped his regions
primarily into Palseogeea and Neogea, the Old and New
Worlds of geographers; a division which strikingly accords
with the distribution of the passerine birds, but not so well
with that of mammala or reptiles. Professor Huxley points
out that the Nearctic, Palearctic, Indian, and Ethiopian
regions of Mr. Sclater have a much greater resemblance to
each other than any one of them has to Australia or to South
America ; and he further suggests that New Zealand alone has
peculiarities which might entitle it to rank as a primary region

60 DISTRIBUTION OF ANIMALS. [PART I.

along with Australasia and South America; and that a Circum-
polar Province might be conveniently recognised as of equal
rank with the Palearctic and Nearctic provinces.

In 1866, Mr. Andrew Murray published a large and copiously
illustrated volume on the Geographical Distribution of Mam-
mals, in which he maintains that the great and primary
mammalian regions are only four: Ist. The Palearctic region
of Mr. Sclater, extended to include the Sahara and Nubia ;
2nd. the Indo-African region, including the Indian and Ethiopian
regions of Mr. Sclater; 3rd. the Australian region (unaltered) ;
4th. the American region, including both North and South
America. These are the regions as described by Mr. Murray,
but his coloured map of “ Great Mammalian Regions” shows
all Arctic America to a little south of the Isothermal of 32°
Fahr. as forming with Europe and North Asia one great region.

At the meeting of the British Association at Exeter in 1869,
Mr. W. T. Blanford read a paper on the Fauna of British India,
in which he maintained that a large portion of the peninsula
of India had derived its Fauna mainly from Africa; and that the
term “Indian region” of Mr. Sclater was misleading, because
India proper, if it belongs to it at all, is the least typical portion
of it. He therefore proposes to call it the “ Malayan region,”
because in the Malay countries it is most highly developed.
Ceylon and the mountain ranges of Southern India have marked
Malay affinities.

In 1871 Mr. E. Blyth published in Nature “A suggested new
Division of the Earth into Zoological Regions,’ in which he
indicates seven primary divisions or regions, subdivided into
twenty-six sub-regions. The seven regions are defined as
follows: 1. The Boreal region; including the whole of the
Palearctic and Nearctic regions of Mr. Sclater along with the
West Indies, Central America, the whole chain of the Andes,
with Chili and Patagonia. 2. The Columbian region; consisting
of the remaining part of South America. 3. The Ethiopian
region; comprising besides that region of Mr. Sclater, the valley
of the Jordan, Arabia, and the desert country towards India, °
with all the plains and table lands of India and the northern

CHAP. IV.] ZOOLOGICAL REGIONS. 61

half of Ceylon. 4. The Lemurian region; consisting of Mada-
gascar and its adjacent islands. 5, The Austral-Asian region ;
which is the Indian region of Mr. Sclater without the portion
taken to be added to the Ethiopian region. 6. The Melanesian
region; which is the Australian region of Mr. Sclater without
New Zealand and the Pacific Islands, which form 7. the
Polynesian region. Mr. Blyth thinks this is “a true classifi-
cation of zoological regions as regards mammalia and birds.”

In an elaborate paper on the birds of Eastern North America,
their distribution and migrations (Bulletin of Museum of Com-
parative Zoology, Cambridge, Massachusetts, Vol. 2), Mr. J. A.
Allen proposes a division of the earth in accordance with what
he terms, “the law of circumpolar distribution of life in zones,”
as follows: 1. Arctic realm. 2. North temperate realm. 3.
American tropical realm. 4. Indo-African tropical realm.
5. South American tropical realm. 6. African temperate realm.
7. Antarctic realm. 8. Australian realm. Some of these are
subdivided into regions; (2) consisting of the American and
the Europxo-Asiatic regions; (4) into the African and Indian
regions ; (8) into the tropical Australian region, and one com-
prising the southern part of Australia and New Zealand. The
other realms each form a single region.

Discussion of proposed Regions.—Before proceeding to define
the regions adopted in this work, it may be as well to make
a few remarks on some of the preceding classifications, and
to give the reasons which seem to render it advisable to adopt
very few of the suggested improvements on Mr. Sclater’s
original proposal. Mr. Blyth’s scheme is one of the least
natural, and also the most inconvenient. There can be little
use in the knowledge that a group of animals is found in the
Boreal Region, if their habitat might still be either Patagonia,
the West Indies, or Japan; and it is difficult to see on what
principle the Madagascar group of islands is made of equal
rank with this enormous region, seeing that its forms of life
have marked African affinities. Neither does it seem advisable
to adopt the Polynesian Region, or that comprising New Zealand
alone (as hinted at by Professor Huxley and since adopted by

62 DISTRIBUTION OF ANIMALS. [PART 1.

Mr. Sclater in his Lectures on Geographical Distribution at the
Zoological Gardens in May 1874), because it is absolutely with-
out indigenous mammalia and very poor in all forms of life,
and therefore by no means prominent or important enough to
form a primary region of the earth.

It may be as well here to notice what appears to be a serious
objection to making New Zealand, or any similar isolated
district, one of the great zoological regions, comparable to South
America, Australia, or Ethiopia ; which is, that its claim to that
distinction rests on grounds which are liable to fail. It is
because New Zealand, in addition to its negative merits, possesses
three families of birds (Apterygide living, Dinornithide and
Palapterygide extinct), and a peculiar lizard-like reptile,
Hatteria, which has to be classed in a distinct order, Rhyncho-
cephalina, that the rank of a Region is claimed for it. But
supposing, what is not at all improbable, that other Rhyncho-
cephalina should be discovered in the interior of Australia or
in New Guinea, and that Apterygide or Palapterygide should
be found to have inhabited Australia in Post-Pliocene times,
(as Dinornithide have already been proved to have done) the
clams of New Zealand would entirely fail, and it would be
universally acknowledged to be a part of the great Australian
region. No such reversal can take place in the case of the
other regions ; because they rest, not upon one or two, but upon a
large number of peculiarities, of such a nature that there is no
room upon the globe for discoveries that can seriously modify
them. Even if one or two peculiar types, like Apterygide or
Hatteria, should permanently remain characteristic of New Zea-
land alone, we can account for these by the extreme isolation of
the country, and the absence of enemies, which have enabled
these defenceless birds and reptiles to continue their existence ;
just. as the isolation and protection of the caverns of Carniola
have enabled the Proteus to survive in Europe. But supposing
that the Proteus was the sole representative of an order of
Batrachia, and that two or three other equally curious and
isolated forms occurred with it, no one would propose that these
caverns or the district containing them, should form one of the

CHAP. IV. ] ZOOLOGICAL REGIONS. 63

primary divisions of the earth. Neither can much stress be
laid on the negative characteristics of New Zealand, since they
are found to an almost equal extent in every oceanic island.

Again, it is both inconvenient and misleading to pick out
certain tracts from the midst of one region or sub-region and to
place them in another, on account of certain isolated affinities
which may often be accounted for by local peculiarities. Even
if the resemblance of the fauna of Chili and Patagonia to that
of the Palearctic and Nearctic regions was much greater than it
is, this mode of dealing with it would be objectionable ; but it
is still more so, when we find that these countries have a
strongly marked South American character, and that the north-
ern affinities are altogether exceptional. The Rodentia, which
comprise a large portion of the mammalia of these countries,
are wholly South American in type, and the birds are almost all
allied to forms characteristic of tropical America.

For analogous reasons the Ethiopian must not be made to
include any part of India or Ceylon ; for although the Fauna of
Central India has some African affinities, these do not prepon-
derate; and it will not be difficult to show that to follow Mr.
Andrew Murray in uniting bodily the Ethiopian and Indian
regions of Mr. Sclater, is both unnatural and inconvenient. The
resemblances between them are of the same character as those
which would unite them both with the Palearctic and Nearctic
regions ; and although it may be admitted, that, as Professor
Huxley maintains, this group forms one of the great primary
divisions of the globe, it is far too extensive and too hetero-
geneous to subserve the practical uses for which we require a
division of the world into zoological regions.

Reasons for adopting the six Regions first proposed by Mr. Sclater.
—So that we do not violate any clear affinities or produce any
glaring irregularities, it is a positive, and by no means an un-
important, advantage to have our named regions approximately
equal in size, and with easily defined, and therefore easily re-
membered, boundaries. All elaborate definitions of interpene-
trating frontiers, as well as regions extending over three-fourths
of the land surface of the globe, and including places which are

64 DISTRIBUTION OF ANIMALS. [PART I.

the antipodes of each other, would be most inconvenient, even
if there were not such difference of opinion about them. There
can be little doubt, for example, that the most radical zoological
division of the earth is made by separating the Australian re-
gion from the rest; but although it is something useful and
definite to know that a group of animals is peculiar to Australia,
it is exceedingly vague and unsatisfactory to say of any other
group merely that it is extra-Australian. Neither can it be said
that, from any point of view, these two divisions are of equal
importance. The next great natural division that can be made
is the separation of the Neotropical Region of Mr. Sclater from
the rest of the world. We thus have three primary divisions,
which Professor Huxley seems inclined to consider as of
tolerably equal zoological importance. But a consideration of
all the facts, zoological and paleeontological, indicates, that the
great northern division (Arctogeea) is fully as much more impor-
tant than either Australia or South America, as its four compo-
nent parts are less important ; and if so, convenience requires
us to adopt the smaller rather than the larger divisions.

This question, of comparative importance or equivalence of
value, is very difficult to determine. It may be considered from
the point of view of speciality or isolation, or from that of
richness and variety of animal forms. In isolation and speciality,
determined by what they want as well as what they possess, the
Australian and Neotropical regions are undoubtedly each com-
parable with the rest of the earth (Arctogea). But in richness
and variety of forms, they are both very much inferior, and are
much more nearly comparable with the separate regions which
compose it. Taking the families of mammalia as established by
the best authors, and leaving out the Cetacea and the Bats,
which are almost universally distributed, and about whose
classification there is much uncertainty, the number of families
represented in each of Mr. Sclater’s regions is as follows :

I. Palearctic region has 31 families of terrestrial mammalia.

II. Ethiopian _,, 3. 20 ” 9 ”
IIJ. Indian ” ” 31 ” ” ”»
IV. Australian _,, » 14 ” ” ”
V. Neotropical ,, 332 20 3 ” ”

VI. Nearctic re seus a 5

CHAP. IV. ] ZOOLOGICAL REGIONS. 65

We see, then, that even the exceedingly rich and isolated Neo-
tropical region is less rich and diversified in its forms of mam-
malian life than the very much smaller area of the Indian region,
or the temperate Palearctic, and very much less so than the
Ethiopian region ; while even the comparatively poor Nearctic
region, is nearly equal to it in the number of its family types. If
these were united they would possess fifty-five families, a number
very disproportionate to those of the remaining two. Another
consideration is, that although the absence of certain forms of
life makes a region more isolated, it does not make it zoologically
more important ; for we have only to suppose some five or six
families, now common to both, to become extinct either in the
Ethiopian or the Indian regions, and they would become as
strongly differentiated from all other regions as South America,
while still remaining as rich in family types. In birds exactly the
same phenomenon recurs, the family types being less numerous in
South America than in either of the other tropical regions of the
earth, but a larger proportion of them are restricted to it. It will
be shown further on, that the Ethiopian and Indian, (or, as I pro-
pose to call it in this work, Oriental) regions, are sufficiently differ-
entiated by very important groups of animals peculiar to each ;
and that, on strict zoological principles they are entitled to
rank as regions of equal value with the Neotropical and Aus-
tralian. It is perhaps less clear whether the Palearctic should
be separated from the Oriental region, with which it has un-
doubtedly much in common ; but there are many and powerful
reasons for keeping it distinct. There is an unmistakably different
facies in the animal forms of the two regions; and although no
families of mammalia or birds, and not many genera, are wholly
confined to the Palearctic region, a very considerable number
of both have their metropolis in it, and are very richly represented.
The distinction between the characteristic forms of life in tropical
and cold countries is, on the whole, very strongly marked in the
northern hemisphere ; and to refuse to recognise this in a sub-
division of the earth which is established for the very purpose of
expressing such contrasts more clearly and concisely than by
ordinary geographical terminology, would be both illogical and

66 DISTRIBUTION OF ANIMALS. [PART I.

inconvenient. The one question then remains, whether the
Nearctic region should be kept separate, or whether it should
form part of the Palearctic or of the Neotropical regions. Pro-
fessor Huxley and Mr. Blyth advocate the former course ; Mr.
Andrew Murray (for mammalia) and Professor Newton (for birds)
think the latter would be more natural. No doubt much is to
be said for both views, but both cannot be right; and it will be
shown in the latter part of this chapter that the Nearctic region
is, on the whole, fully as well defined’as the Palzearctic, by posi-
tive characters which differentiate it from both the adjacent
regions. More evidence in the same direction will be found in
the Second Part of this work, in which the extinct faunas of the
several regions are discussed.

A confirmation of the general views here set forth, as to the
distinctness and approximate equivalence of the six regions, is
to be found in the fact, that if any two or more of them are com-
bined they themselves become divisions of the next lower rank,
or “ sub-regions ;””—and these will be very much more important,
both zoologically and geographically, than the subdivisions of
the remaining regions. It is admitted then that these six regions
are by no means of precisely equal rank, and that some of them
are far more isolated and better characterized than others; but
it is maintained that, looked at from every point of view, they
are more equal in rank than any others that can be formed ;
while in geographical equality, compactness of area, and facility
of definition, they are beyond all comparison better than any
others that have yet been proposed for the purpose of facilitat-
ing the study of geographical distribution. They may be ar-
ranged and grouped as follows, so as to exhibit their various
relations and affinities.

Regions.

Neogiea } ee cel ... Austral zone......... Notogzea.
TIC See. cnce B l
Panmarcric ... ( Boreal zone ......... = ale
Paleogeea PE TAN ++... ' Paleotropical zone a
= ORIENTAL ........ \icct ae lu
AUSTRALIAN ... Austral zone......... Notogzea.

The above table shows the regions placed in the order followed
in the Fourth Part of this work, and the reasons for which are

CHAP. IV.] ZOOLOGICAL REGIONS. 67

explained in Chapter IX. As a matter of convenience, and for
other reasons adduced in the same chapter, the detailed exposi-
tion of the geographical distribution of the animals of the several
regions in Part III. commences with the Palearctic and termin-
ates with the Nearctic region.

Objections to the system of Circumpolar Zones.—Myr. Allen’s
system of “realms” founded on climatic zones (given at
p- 61), having recently appeared in an ornithological work
of considerable detail and research, calls for a few remarks.
The author continually refers to the “law of the distribution of
life in circumpolar zones,’ as if it were one generally accepted
and that admits of no dispute. But this supposed “law ” only
applies to the smallest details of distribution—to the range and
increasing or decreasing numbers of species as we pass from
north to south, or the reverse ; while it has little bearing on the
great features of zoological geography—the limitation of groups
of genera and families to certain areas. It is analogous to
the “law of adaptation” in the organisation of animals, by
which members of various groups are suited for an aerial, an
aquatic, a desert, or an arboreal life ; are herbivorous, carnivorous,
or insectivorous; are fitted to live underground, or in fresh
waters, or on polar ice. It was once thought that these adaptive
peculiarities were suitable foundations for a classification,—that
whales were fishes, and bats birds; and even to this day there
are naturalists who cannot recognise the essential diversity
of structure in such groups as swifts and swallows, sun-birds and
humming-birds, under the superficial disguise caused by adap-
tation to a similar mode of life. The application of Mr. Allen’s
principle leads to equally erroneous results, as may be well seen
by considering his separation of “the southern third of Aus-
tralia” to unite it with New Zealand as one of his secondary
zoological divisions. If there is one country in the world whose
fauna is strictly homogeneous, that country is Australia; while
New Guinea on the one hand, and New Zealand on the other,
are as sharply differentiated from Australia as any adjacent parts
of the same primary zoological division can possibly be. Yet
the “law of cirewmpolar distribution” leads to the division of

68 DISTRIBUTION OF ANIMALS. [PART I.

Australia by an arbitrary east and west line, and a union of the
northern two-thirds with New Guinea, the southern third with
New Zealand. Hardly less unnatural is the supposed equiva-
lence of South Africa (the African temperate realm) to all
tropical Africa and Asia, including Madagascar (the Indo-
African tropical realm). South Africa has, it is true, some
striking peculiarities; but they are absolutely unimportant as
compared with the great and radical differences between tropical
Africa and tropical Asia. On these examples we may fairly
rest our rejection of Mr. Allen’s scheme.

We must however say a few words on the zoo-geographical
nomenclature proposed in the same paper, which seems also
very objectionable. The following terms are proposed: realm,
region, province, district, fauna and flora ; the first being the
highest, the last the lowest and smallest sub-division. Con-
sidering that most of these terms have been used in very different
senses already, and that no means of settling their equivalence
in different parts of the globe has been even suggested, such a
complex system must lead to endless confusion. Until the
whole subject is far better known and its first principles agreed
upon, the-simpler and the fewer the terms employed the better ;
and as “region” was employed for the primary divisions by
Mr. Sclater, eighteen years ago, and again by Mr. Andrew
Murray, in his Geographical Distribution of Mammals; nothing
but obscurity can result from each writer using some new, and
doubtfully better, term. For the sub-divisions of the regions
no advantage is gained by the use of a distinct term—“ pro-
vince ”—which has been used (by Swainson) for the primary
divisions, and which does not itself tell you what rank it holds ;
whereas the term “sub-region” speaks for itself as being un-
mistakably next in subordination to region, and this clearness of
meaning gives it the preference over any independent term.
As to minor named sub-divisions, they seem at present uncalled
for; and till the greater divisions are themselves generally
agreed on, it seems better to adopt no technical names for what
must, for a long time to come, be indeterminate.

Does the Arctic Fauna characterize an independent Region.—

CHAP. IV. ] ZOOLOGICAL REGIONS. 69

The proposal to consider the Arctic regions as constituting one of
the primary zoological divisions of the globe, has been advocated
by many naturalists. Professor Huxley seems to consider it
advisable, and Mr. Allen unhesitatingly adopts it, as well as an
“antarctic” region to balance it in the southern hemisphere.
The reason ae an “ Arctic Region ” finds no place in this work
may therefore be here stated.

No species or group of animals can properly be classed as
“arctic,” which does not exclusively inhabit or greatly prepon-
derate in arctic lands. For the purpose of establishing the
need of an “ arctic ” zoological region, we should consider chiefly
such groups as are circumpolar as well as arctic; because, if
they are confined to, or greatly preponderate in, either the
eastern or western hemispheres, they can be at once allocated to
the Nearctic or Palearctic regions, and can therefore afford no
Justification for establishing a new primary division of the
globe.

Thus restricted, only three genera of land mammalia are truly
arctic: Gulo, Myodes, and Rangifer. Two species of widely
dispersed genera are also exclusively arctic, Ursus maritimus
and Vulpes lagopus.

Exclusively arctic birds are not much more numerous. Of
land birds there are only three genera (each consisting of but a
single species), Pinicola, Nyctea, and Surnia. Lagopus is cir-
cumpolar, but the genus has too wide an extension in the
temperate zone to be considered arctic. Among aquatic birds
we have the genus of ducks, Somateria ; three genera of Uriide,
Uria, Catarractes, and Mergulus ; and the small family Alcide,
consisting of the genera Alea and Fratercula. Our total then
is, three genera of mammalia, three of land, and six of aquatic
birds, including one peculiar family.

In the southern hemisphere there is only the iat genus
Aptenodytes that can be classed as antarctic ; and even that is
more properly south temperate.

In dealing with this arctic fauna we have two courses open
to us; we must either group them with the other species and
genera which are common to the two northern regions, or we

70 DISTRIBUTION OF ANIMALS. [PART I.

must: form a separate primary region for them. As a matter of
convenience the former plan seems the best; and it is that
which is in accordance with our treatment of other intermediate
tracts which contain special forms of life. The great desert
zone, extending from the Atlantic shores of the Sahara across
Arabia to Central Asia, is a connecting link between the Pale-
arctic, Ethiopian, and Oriental regions, and contains a number
of “ desert” forms wholly or almost wholly restricted to it ; but
the attempt to define it as a separate region would introduce
difficulty and confusion. Neither to the “desert” nor to the
“arctic” regions could any defined limits, either geographical
or zoological, be placed; and the attempt to determine what
species or genera should be allotted to them would prove an
insoluble problem. The reason perhaps is, that both are essen-
tially unstable, to a much greater extent than those great masses
of land with more or less defined barriers, which constitute our
six regions. The Arctic Zone has been, within a recent geologi-
cal period, both vastly more extensive and vastly less extensive
than it is at present. Ata not distant epoch it extended over
half of Europe and of North America. At an earlier date it
appears to have vanished altogether; since a luxuriant vegeta-
tion of tall deciduous trees and broad-leaved evergreens
flourished within ten degrees of the Pole! The great deserts
have not improbably been equally fluctuating; hence neither
the one nor the other can present that marked individuality
in their forms of life, which seems to have arisen only when
extensive tracts of land have retained some considerable sta-
bility both of surface and climatal conditions, during periods
sufficient for the development and co-adaptation of their several
assemblages of plants and animals.

We must also consider that there is no geographical difficulty
in dividing the Arctic Zone between the two. northern regions.
The only debateable lands, Greenland and Iceland, are generally
admitted to belong respectively to America and Europe.
Neither is there any zoological difficulty ; for the land mam-
malia and birds are on the whole wonderfully restricted to their
respective regions even in high latitudes ; and the aquatic forms

CHAP. IV. ] ZOOLOGICAL REGIONS. 7i

are, for our present purpose, of much less importance. As a
primary division the “Arctic region” would be out of all pro-
portion to the other six, whether as regards its few peculiar
types or the limited number of forms and species actually in-
habiting it; but it comes in well as a connecting link between
two regions, where the peculiar forms of both are specially modi-
fied; and is in this respect quite analogous to the great desert
zone above referred to.

I now proceed to characterize briefly the six regions adopted
in the present work, together with the sub-regions into which
they may be most conveniently and naturally divided, as shown
in our general map.

Palearctic Region—This very extensive region comprises all
temperate Europe and Asia, from Iceland to Behring’s Straits and
from the Azores to Japan. Its southern boundary is some-
what indefinite, but it seems advisable to comprise in it all
the extra-tropical part of the Sahara and Arabia, and all
Persia, Cabul, and Beloochistan to the Indus. It comes down
to a little below the upper limit of forests in the Himalayas,
and includes the larger northern half of China, not quite so
far down the coast as Amoy. It has been said that this
region differs from the Oriental by negative characters only ; a
host of tropical families and genera being absent, while there is
little or nothing but peculiar species to characterize it abso-
lutely. This however is not true. The Palearctic region is well
characterized by possessing 5 families of vertebrata peculiar
to it, as well as 35 peculiar genera of mammalia, and 57
of birds, constituting about one-third of the total number it
possesses. These are amply sufficient to characterize a region
positively ; but we must also consider the absence of many im-
portant groups of the Oriental, Ethiopian, and Nearctic regions ;
and we shall then find, that taking positive and negative
characters together, and making some allowance for the neces-
sary poverty of a temperate as compared with tropical regions,
the Palearctic is almost as strongly marked and well defined as
any other.

Sub-divisions of the Palearctic Region.—These are by no means

+]
bo

DISTRIBUTION OF ANIMALS. [PART I.

so clearly indicated as in some of the other regions, and they are
adopted more for convenience than because they are very natural
or strongly marked.

The first, or European sub-region, comprises Central and
Northern Europe as far South as the Pyrenees, the Maritime
and Dinaric Alps, the Balkan mountains, the Black Sea, and the
Caucasus. On the east the Caspian sea and the Ural mountains
seem the most obvious limit; but it is doubtful if they form the
actual boundary, which is perhaps better marked by the valley
of the Irtish, where a pre-glacial sea almost certainly connected
the Aral and Caspian seas with the Arctic ocean, and formed
an effective barrier which must still, to some extent, influence
the distribution of animals.

The next, or Mediterranean sub-region, comprises South
Europe, North Africa with the extra-tropical portion of the
Sahara, and Egypt to about the first or second cataracts ; and
eastward through Asia Minor, Persia, and Cabul, to the deserts
of the Indus.

The third, or Siberian sub-region, consists of all north and
central Asia north of Herat, as far as the eastern limits of the
great desert plateau of Mongolia, and southward to about the
upper limit of trees on the Himalayas.

The fourth, or Manchurian sub-region, consists of Japan and
North China with the lower valley of the Amoor; and it should
probably be extended westward in a narrow strip along the
Himalayas, embracing about 1,000 or 2,000 feet of vertical
distance below the upper limit of trees, till it meets an eastern
extension of the Mediterranean sub-region a little beyond Simla.
These extensions are necessary to avoid passing from the Oriental
region, which is essentially tropical, directly to the Siberian sub-
region, which has an extreme northern character; whereas the
Mediterranean and Manchurian sub-regions are more temperate
in climate. It will be found that between the upper limit of
most of the typical Oriental groups and the Thibetan or Siberian
fauna, there is a zone in which many forms occur common to
temperate China. This is especially the case among the phea-
sants and finches.

CHAP. IV. ] ZOOLOGICAL REGIONS. 73

Ethiopian Region—The limits of this region have been indi-
cated by the definition of the Palearctic region. Besides Africa
south of the tropic of Cancer, and its islands, it comprises the
southern half of Arabia.

This region has been said to be identical in the main charac-
ters of its mammalian fauna with the Oriental region, and has
therefore been united with it by Mr. A. Murray. Most impor-
tant differences have however been overlooked, as the following
summary of the peculiarities of the Ethiopian region will, I
think, show.

It possesses 22 peculiar families of vertebrates; 90 peculiar
genera of mammalia, being two-thirds of its whole number ;
and 179 peculiar genera of birds, being three-fifths of all it
possesses. It is further characterized by the absence of several
families and genera which range over the whole northern
hemisphere, details of which will be found in the chapter
treating of the region. There are, it is true, many points
of resemblance, not to be wondered at between two tropical
regions in the same hemisphere, and which have evidently been
at one time more nearly connected, both by intervening lands
and by a different condition of the lands that even now connect
them. But these resemblances only render the differences more
remarkable ; since they show that there has been an ancient and
long-continued separation of the two regions, developing a dis-
tinct fauna in each, and establishing marked specialities which
the temporary intercommunication and immigration has not
sufficed to remove. The entire absence of such wide-spread
groups as bears and deer, from a country many parts of which
are well adapted to them, and in close proximity to regions
where they abound, would alone mark out the Ethiopian region
as one of the primary divisions of the earth, even if it possessed
a less number than it actually does of peculiar family and
generic groups.

Sub-divisions of the Ethiopian Region.—The African conti-
nent south of the tropic of Cancer is more homogeneous in its
prominent and superficial zoological features than most of the

other regions, but there are nevertheless important and deep-
Vou. I.—7

74 DISTRIBUTION OF ANIMALS. [PART I.

seated local peculiarities. Two portions can be marked off as
possessing many peculiar forms; the luxuriant forest district
of equatorial West Africa, and the southern extremity or Cape
district. The remaining portion has no well-marked divisions,
and a large proportion of its animal forms range over it from
Nubia and Abyssinia, to Senegal on the one side and to the
Zambesi on the other; this forms our first or East-African
sub-region.

The second, or West African sub-region extends along the
coast from Senegal to Angola, and inland to the sources of the
Shary and the Congo.

The third, or South African sub-region, comprises the Cape
Colony and Natal, and is roughly limited by a line from Delagoa
Bay to Walvish Bay.

The fourth, or Malagasy sub-region, consists of Madagascar and
the adjacent islands, from Rodriguez to the Seychelles ; and this
differs so remarkably from the continent that it has been pro-
posed to form a distinct primary region for its reception. — Its
productions are indeed highly interesting; since it possesses
3 families, and 2 sub-families of mammals peculiar to itself,
while almost all its genera are peculiar. Of these a few
show Oriental or Ethiopian affinities, but the remainder are
quite isolated. Turning to other classes of animals, we find
that the birds are almost as remarkable; but, as might be
expected, a larger number of genera are common to surround-
ing countries. More than 30 genera are altogether peculiar,
and some of these are so isolated as to require to be classed
in separate families or sub-families. The African affinity is how-
ever here more strongly shown by the considerable number (13)
of peculiar Ethiopian genera which in Madagascar have repre-
sentative species. There can be no doubt therefore about Mada-
gascar being more nearly related to the Ethiopian than to any
other region; but its peculiarities are so great, that, were it not
for its small size and the limited extent of its fauna, its claim to
rank as a separate region might not seem unreasonable. It is
true that it is not poorer in mammals than Australia; but that
country is far more isolated, and cannot be so decidedly and

CHAP. IV. ] ZOOLOGICAL REGIONS. 75

naturally associated with any other region as Madagascar can
be with the Ethiopian. It is therefore the better and more
natural course to keep it as a sub-region; the peculiarities it
exhibits being of exactly the same kind as those presented by
the Antilles, by New Zealand, and even by Celebes and Ceylon,
but in.a much greater degree.

Oriental Region—On account of the numerous objections
that have been made to naming a region from the least charac-
teristic portion of it, and not thinking “ Malayan,” proposed by
Mr. Blanford, a good term, (as it has a very circumscribed and
definite meaning, and especially because the “ Malay” archi-
pelago is half of it in the Australian region,) I propose to use
the word “ Oriental” instead of “ Indian,” as being geographically
applicable to the whole of the countries included in the region
and to very few beyond it; as being euphonious, and as being
free from all confusion with terms already used in zoological
geography. I trust therefore that it may meet with general
acceptance.

This small, compact, but rich and varied region, consists of
all India and China from the limits of the Palearctic region ;
all the Malay peninsula and islands as far east as Java and
Baly, Borneo and the Philippine Islands; and Formosa. It is
positively characterized by possessing 12 peculiar families of
vertebrata ; by 55 genera of land mammalia, and 165 genera
of land birds, altogether confined to it; these peculiar genera
forming in each case about one half of the total number it
possesses.

Sub-divisions of the Oriental region—First we have the
Indian sub-region, consisting of Central India from the foot of
the Himalayas in the west, and south of the Ganges to the
east, as far as a line drawn from Goa curving south and up to
the Kistna river; this is the portion which has most affinity
with Africa.

The second, or Ceylonese sub-region, consists of the southern
extremity of India with Ceylon; this is a mountainous forest
region, and possesses several peculiar forms as well as some
Malayan types not found in the first sub-region.

76 DISTRIBUTION OF ANIMALS. [PART I.

Next we have the Indo-Chinese sub-region, comprising South
China and Burmah, extending westward along the Himalayan
range to an altitude of about 9,000 or 10,000 feet, and south-
ward to Tavoy or Tenasserim.

The last is the Indo-Malayan sub-region, comprising the
Peninsula of Malacca and the Malay Islands to Baly, Borneo,
and the Philippines.

On account of the absence from the first sub-region of many of
the forms most characteristic of the other three, and the number
of families and genera of mammalia and birds which occur in it
and also in Africa, it has been thought by some naturalists that
this part of India has at least an equal claim to be classed as a
part of the Ethiopian region. This question will be found fully
discussed in Chapter XII. devoted to the Oriental region, where
it is shown that the African affinity is far less than has been
represented, and that in all its essential features Central India is
wholly Oriental in its fauna.

Before leaving this region a few words may be said about
Lemuria, a name proposed by Mr. Sclater for the site of a sup-
posed submerged continent extending from Madagascar to Ceylon
and Sumatra, in which the Lemuroid type of animals was devel-
oped. This is undoubtedly a legitimate and highly probable sup-
position, and it is an example of the way in which a study of the
geographical distribution of animals may enable us to reconstruct
the geography of a bygone age. But we must not, as Mr. Blyth
proposed, make this hypothetical land one of our actual Zoo-
logical regions. It represents what was probably a primary
Zoological region in some past geological epoch; but what that
epoch was and what were the limits of the region in question, we
are quite unable to say. If we are to suppose that it comprised
the whole area now inhabited by Lemuroid animals, we must
make it extend from West Africa to Burmah, South China, and
Celebes; an area which it possibly did once occupy, but which
cannot be formed into a modern Zoological region without vio-
lating much more important affinities. If, on the other hand,
we leave out all those areas which undoubtedly belong to other
regions, we reduce Lemuria to Madagascar and its adjacent

CHAP. IV. ] ZOOLOGICAL REGIONS. hy)

islands, which, for reasons already stated, it is not advisable to
treat as a primary Zoological region. The theory of this ancient
continent and the light it may throw on existing anomalies of
distribution, will be more fully considered in the geographical
part of this work.

Australian Region.—Mr. Sclater’s original name seems pre-
ferable to Professor Huxley’s, “ Austral-Asian;” the incon-
venience of which alteration is sufficiently shown by the fact
that Mr. Blyth proposed to use the very same term as an
appropriate substitute for the “Indian region” of Mr. Sclater.
Australia is the great central mass of the region; it is by far the
richest in varied and highly remarkable forms of life; and it
therefore seems in every way fitted to give a name to the region
of which it is the essential element. ‘The limits of this region
in the Pacific are somewhat obscure, but as so many of the
Pacific Islands are extremely poor zoologically, this is not of
great importance.

Sub-divisions of the Australian Region.—The first sub-region
is the Austro-Malayan, including the islands from Celebes and
Lombock on the west to the Solomon Islands on the east. The
Australian sub-region comes next, consisting of Australia and
Tasmania. The third, or Polynesian sub-region, will consist
of all the tropical Pacific Islands, and is characterized by
several peculiar genera of birds which are all allied to Australian
types. The fourth, consists of New Zealand with Auckland,
Chatham, and Norfolk Islands, and must be called the New
Zealand sub-region.

The extreme peculiarities of New Zealand, due no doubt to
its great isolation and to its being the remains of a more
extensive land, have induced several naturalists to suggest that
it ought justly to form a Zoological region by itself. But the
inconveniences of such a procedure have been already pointed
out; and when we look at its birds as a whole (they being the
only class sufficiently well represented to found any conclusion
upon) we find that the majority of them belong to Australian
genera, and where the genera are peculiar they are most nearly
related to Australian types. The preservation in these islands

78 DISTRIBUTION OF ANIMALS. [PART I.

of a single representative of a unique order of reptiles, is, as
before remarked, of the same character as the preservation of
the Proteus in the caverns of Carniola ; and can give the locality
where it happens to have survived no claim to form a primary
Zoological region, unless supported by a tolerably varied and
distinctly characterized fauna, such as never exists in a very
restricted and insular area.

Neotropical Reyion—My. Sclater’s original name for this
region is preserved, because change of nomenclature is always
an evil; and neither Professor Huxley’s suggested alteration
“ Austro-Columbia,’ nor Mr. Sclater’s new term “ Dendrogzea,”
appear to be improvements. The region is essentially a tropical
one, and the extra-tropical portion of it is not important
enough to make the name inappropriate. That proposed by
Professor Huxley is not free from the same kind of criticism,
since it would imply that the region was exclusively South
American, whereas a considerable tract of North America
belongs to it. This region includes South America, the
Antilles and tropical North America; and it possesses more
peculiar families of vertebrates and genera of birds and mam-
malia than any other region,

Subdivisions of the Neotropical Region.—The great central
mass of South America, from the shores of Venezuela to Paraguay
and Eastern Peru, constitutes the chief division, and may be
termed the Brazilian sub-region. It is on the whole a forest
country; its most remarkable forms are highly developed
arboreal types; and it exhibits all the characteristics of this rich
and varied continent in their highest development.

The second, or Chilian sub-region, consists of the open plains,
pampas, and mountains of the southern extremity of the con-
tinent; and we must include in it the west side of the Andes as
far as the limits of the forest near Payta, and the whole of the
high Andean plateaus as far as 4° of south latitude; which
makes it coincide with the range of the Camelide and Chin-
chillide.

The third, or Mexican sub-region, consists of Central America
and Southern Mexico, but it has no distinguishing character-

CHAP. IV.] ZOOLOGICAL REGIONS. 79

istics except the absence of some of the more highly specialized
Neotropical groups. It is, however, a convenient division as
comprising the portion of the North American continent which
belongs zoologically to South America.

The fourth, or Antillean sub-region, consists of the West
India islands (except Trinidad and Tobago, which are detached
portions of the continent and must be grouped in the first sub-
region) ; and these reproduce, in a much less marked degree,
the phenomena presented by Madagascar. Terrestrial mammals
are almost entirely wanting, but the larger islands possess three
genera which are altogether peculiar to them. The birds are
of South American forms, but comprise many peculiar genera.
Terrestrial molluscs are more abundant and varied than in any
part of the globe of equal extent; and if these alone were
considered, the Antilles would constitute an important Zoological
region.

Nearctic Region —This region comprises all temperate North
America and Greenland. The arctic lands and islands beyond
the limit of trees form a transitional territory to the Palearctic
region, but even here there are some characteristic species.
The southern limit between this region and the Neotropical is a
little uncertain ; but it may be drawn at about the Rio Grande
del Norte on the east coast, and a little north of Mazatlan on
the west; while on the central plateau it descends much farther
south, and should perhaps include all the open highlands of
Mexico and Guatemala. This would coincide with the range of
several characteristic Nearctic genera.

Distinction of the Nearctic from the Palcarctic Region.—The
Nearctic region possesses twelve peculiar families of vertebrates
or one-tenth of its whole number. It has also twenty-four
peculiar genera of mammalia and fifty-two of birds, in each
case nearly one-third of all it possesses. This proportion is very
nearly the same as in the Palearctic region, while the number of
peculiar families of vertebrata is very much greater. It has been
already seen that both Mr. Blyth and Professor Huxley are
disposed to unite this region with the Palearctic, while Pro-
fessor Newton, in his article on birds in the new edition of the

80 DISTRIBUTION OF ANIMALS. [PART I.

Encyclopedia Britannica, thinks that as regards that class it
can hardly claim to be more than a sub-region of the Neotropical.
These views are mutually destructive, but it will be shown in
the proper place, that on independent grounds the Nearctic
region can very properly be maintained.

Subdivisions of the Nearctic Region—The sub-regions here
depend on the great physical features of the country, and have
been in some eases accurately defined by American naturalists.
First we have the Californian sub-region, consisting of Cali-
fornia and Oregon—a narrow tract between the Sierra Nevada
and the Pacific, but characterized by a number of peculiar
species and by several genera found nowhere else in the region.

The second, or Rocky Mountain sub-region, consists of this
great mountain range with its plateaus, and the central plains
and prairies to about 100° west longitude, but including New
Mexico and Texas in the South.

The third and most important sub-region, which may be
termed the Alleghanian, extends eastward to the Atlantic, in-
cluding the Mississippi Valley, the Alleghany Mountains, and
the Eastern United States. This is an old forest district, and
contains most of the characteristic animal types of the region.

The fourth, or Canadian sub-region, comprises all the northern
part of the continent from the great lakes to the Arctic ocean ;
a land of pine-forests and barren wastes, characterized by Arctic
types and the absence of many of the genera which distin-
guish the more southern portions of the region.

Observations on the series of Sub-regions.—The twenty-four sub-
regions here adopted were arrived at by a carefut consideration
of the distribution of the more important genera, and of the
materials, both zoological and geographical, available for their
determination; and it was not till they were almost finally
decided on, that they were found to be equal in number through-
out all the regions—four in each. As this uniformity is of great
advantage in tabular and diagrammatic presentations of the
distribution of the several families, I decided not to disturb
it unless very strong reasons should appear for adopting a greater
or less number in any particular case. Such however have not

CHAP. IV.] ZOOLOGICAL REGIONS. 81

arisen ; and it is hoped that these divisions will prove as satis-
factory and useful to naturalists in general as they have been to
the author. Of course, in a detailed study of any region much
more minute sub-division may be required; but even in that
case it is believed that the sub-regions here adopted, will be
found, with slight modifications, permanently available for ex-
hibiting general results.

I give here a table showing the proportionate richness and
speciality of each region as determined by its families of verte-
brates and genera of mammalia and birds ; and also a general
table of the regions and sub-regions, arranged in the order that
seems best to show their mutual relations.

CoMPARATIVE RICHNESS OF THE Six REGIONS.

VERTEBRATA. MAMMALIA. Brrps.
R iB een eas ren | Ake
ere eee | eneray ee ea esl Gecerad nae Vase
| ewe a

| Palearctic...) 136 3 100 35 35 || 174 Di 33
Ethiopian Feel lee 22 140 90 64 | 294 179 60
Oriental......| 164 12 118 55 46 || 340 165 48
| Australian...) 141 30 Yb 44 61 || 298 | 189 64
Neotropical. 168 44 130 103 79 683 576 86
Nearctic .....| 122 12 74 vA 32 169 52 31

TABLE OF REGIONS AND SUB-REGIONS.

Regions. Sub-regions. | Remarks.
I, Palearctic...| 1. North Europe. | ae
2. Mediterranean (or S. Eu.) Transition to Ethiopian.
| 3. Siberia. _ Transition to Nearctic.
| 4. Manchuria (or Japan) Transition to Oriental.
II. Ethiopian ... 1, East Africa. | Transition to Palzearctic.
| 2. West Africa.
3. South Africa.
4. Madagascar.
|

82

DISTRIBUTION OF ANIMALS.

[PART. I.

TABLE OF REGIONS AND SUB-REGIONS—continued.

j{TT.

LV:

V.

Wa.

Regions.

Sub-regions.

Remarks,

Oriental.....-

Australian...

Neotropical.

Nearctic.....

mwhr

Pep pwr

Bw bor

. Hindostan (or Central Ind.)
. Ceylon.

Indo-China (or Himalayas)

. Indo-Malaya.

. Austro-Malaya.
. Australia.

Polynesia.
New Zealand.

. Chili (or S. Temp. Am.)
. Brazil.
. Mexico (or Trop. N. Am.)

Antilles.

. California.

. Rocky Mountains.

. Alleghanies (or East U. S.)
. Canada.

Transition to Ethiopian.

Transition to Palzarctic.
Transition to Australian.

Transition to Oriental.

Transition to Neotropical.
Transition to Australian.

Transition to Nearctic.

Transition to Neotropical. |

Transition to Palxarctie.

CHAPTER V.

CLASSIFICATION AS AFFECTING THE STUDY OF GEOGRAPHICAL
DISTRIBUTION.

A LITTLE consideration will convince us, that no inquiry into
the causes and laws which determine the geographical distribn-
tion of animals or plants can lead to satisfactory results, unless
we have a tolerably accurate knowledge of the affinities of the
several species, genera, and families to each other; in other
words, we require a natural classification to work upon. Let us,
for example, take three animals—a, 6, and c—which have a
general external resemblance to each other, and are usually
considered to be really allied; and let us suppose that a and 0
inhabit the same or adjacent districts, while ¢ is found far away
on the other side of the globe, with no animals at all resembling
it in any of the intervening countries. We should here have a
difficult problem to solve; for we should have to show that the
general laws by which we account for the main features of
distribution, will explain this exceptional case. But now, sup-
pose some comparative anatomist takes these animals in hand,
and finds that the resemblance of ¢ to a and 0 is only superficial,
while their internal structure exhibits marked and important
differences; and that ¢ really belongs to another group of
animals, d, which inhabits the very region in which ¢ was
found—and we should no longer have anything to explain.
This is no imaginary case. Up to a very few years ago a
curious Mexican animal, Bassaris astuta, was almost always
classed in the civet family (Viverride), a group entirely con-

84 DISTRIBUTION OF ANIMALS. [PARY I.

fined to Africa and Asia; but it has now been conclusively
shown by Professor Flower that its real affinities are with the
racoons (Procyonide), a group confined to North and South
America. In another case, however, an equally careful exami-
nation shows, that an animal peculiar to the Himalayas (dlurus
fulgens) has its nearest ally in the Cercoleptes of South America.
Here, therefore, the geographical difficulty really exists, and any
satisfactory theory of the causes that have led to the existing
distribution of living things, must be able to account, more or
less definitely, for this and other anomalies. From these cases
it will be evident, that if any class or order of animals is very
imperfectly known and its classification altogether artificial, it is
useless to attempt to account for the anomalies its distribution
may present ; since those anomalies may be, to a great extent,
due to false notions as to the affinities of its component species.

According to the laws and causes of distribution discussed in
the preceding chapters, we should find limited and defined
distribution to be the rule, universal or indefinite distribution to
be the exception, in every natural group corresponding to what
are usually regarded as families and genera; and so much is
this the case in nature, that when we find a group of this
nominal rank scattered as it were at random over the earth, we
have a strong presumption that it is not natural; but is, to a
considerable extent, a haphazard collection of species. Of course
this reasoning will only apply, in cases where there are no
unusual means of dispersal, nor any exceptional causes which
might determine a scattered distribution.

From the considerations now adduced it becomes evident, that
it is of the first importance for the success of our inquiry to
secure a natural classification of animals, especially as regards
the families and genera. The higher groups, such as classes and
orders, are of less importance for our purpose; because they are
almost always widely and often universally distributed, except
those which are so small as to be evidently the nearly extinct
representatives of a once more extensive series of forms. We
now proceed to explain the classification to be adopted, as low
down as the series of families. To these, equivalent English

CHAP. V.] CLASSIFICATION. 85

names are given wherever they exist, in order that readers pos-
sessing no technical knowledge, may form some conception of
the meaning of the term “ family ” in zoology.

The primary divisions of the animal kingdom according to
two eminent modern authorities are as follows :

HUXtey. CarRuS AND GERSTAEKER.
Classification of Animals (1869). Handbuch der Zoologie (1868).
1. Protozoa }
2. Infusoria §
3. Coelenterata

4, Annuloida

1. Protozoa.

2. Coelenterata.
3. Echinodermata.

4, Vermes.
Sy ROS | 5, Arthropoda.
6. Molluscoida 6. Molluscoida.
7. Mollusca 7. Mollusca.

8. Vertebrata &. Vertebrata.

For reasons already stated it is only with the fifth, seventh,
and eighth of these groups that the present work proposes to
deal; and even with the fifth and seventh only partially and in
the most general way.

The classes of the vertebrata, according to both the authors
above quoted, are: 1. Mammalia. 2. Aves. 3. Reptilia. 4.
Amphibia. 5. Pisces, in which order they will be taken here.

The sub-classes and orders of mammalia are as follows :

MAMMALIA.
HUXLEY (1869), FLowrErR (1870). Carus (1868).
: 1, Primates,
1. Primates... AP Papi
2. Chiroptera 2, Chiroptera.
3. Insectivora ... 3. Insectivora.
: § 6. Carnivora.
4, Carnivora... © 2 7) Pinnipedia.
Monodelphia... 5. Cetacea 12. Natantia.
6. Sirenia dacs
§ 10, Artiodactyla.
7. Ungulata ) 11. Perissodactyla.
8. Proboscidea ... 9. Proboscidea.
9. Hyracoidea ... 8. Lamnungia.
10. Rodentia 4, Rodentia.
1]. Edentata 13. Bruta.
Didelphia ...... 12. Marsupialia ... 14. Marsupialia.
Ornithodelphia 13. Monotremata 15. Monotremata.

86 DISTRIBUTION OF ANIMALS. [PART I,

The above series of orders is arranged according to Professor
Flower’s Osteology of Mammalia, and they will follow in this
succession throughout my work. Professor Huxley arranges
the same orders in a different series.

In determining the manner in which the several orders shall
be subdivided into families, I have been guided in my choice of
classifications mainly by the degree of attention the author ap-
pears to have paid to the group, and his known ability as a
systematic zoologist ; and in a less degree by considerations of
convenience as regards the special purposes of geographical dis-
tribution. In many cases it is a matter of great doubt whether
a certain group should form several distinct families or be united
into one or two; but one method may bring out the peculiarities
of distribution much better than the other, and this is, in our
case, a sufficient reason for adopting it.

For the Primates I follow, with some modifications, the
classification of Mr. St. George Mivart given in his article
“ Apes” in the new edition of the Zncyclopedia Britannica, and
in his paper in the Proceedings of the Zoological Society of London,
1865, p. 547. It is as follows:

Order—PRIMATES, divided into two Sub-orders :
I, Anthropoidea.
If. Lemuroidea.

Sub-order—ANTHROPOIDEA.

Fan.
Hominid ... .... Man.
1, Simiide ....... .... Anthropoid Apes.
RMIT see ta: =... 2. Semnopithecidee ... Old-world Monkeys.
3. Cynopithecidee ... Baboons and Macaques.
Gann ie Cebidee ........... American Monkeys.
paar 3 5. Hapalide ... .... Marmosets.
Sub-order-- LemUROIDEA.
Fam.
Grlemuride .... 4... 22.2) 28 Wuemure:
(eomlarsiid s.. ... feito. Mlarsiens:
8. Chiromyide see | cons | |epkl suena) PNO-Oved:

Omitting man (for reasons stated in the preface) the three
first families are considered by Professor Mivart to be sub-
families of Simiide; but as the geographical distribution of
the Old World apes is especially interesting, it is thought

CHAP. V.] CLASSIFICATION. 87

better to treat them as families, a rank which is claimed for the
anthropoid apes by many naturalists.

As no good systematic work on the genera and species of bats
has been yet published, I adopt the five families as generally
used in this country, with the genera as given in the papers of
Dr. J. E. Gray and Mr. Tomes. A monograph by Dr. Peters
has long been promised, and his outline arrangement was
published in 1865, but this will perhaps be materially altered
when the work appears.

Order—CHIROPTERA.

Fam.
Frugivora ee bas ... 9. Pteropide ... Fruit-eating Bats.
Istiophora 10. Phyllostomidze ... Leaf-nosed Bats.
Insectivora 11. Rhinolophide ... Horse-shoe Bats.
Gymnorhini { 12. Vespertilionide ... True Bats.
13. Noctilionide ... Dog-headed Bats.

The genera of Chiroptera are in a state of great confusion, the
names used by different authors being often not at all compar-
able, so that the few details given of the distribution of the
bats are not trustworthy. We have therefore made little use
of this order in the theoretical part of the work.

The osteology of the Insectivora has been very carefully
worked out by Professor Mivart in the Jownral of Anatomy
and Physiology (Vol. i1., p. 880), and I follow his classification
as given there, and in the Proceedings of the Zoological Society
(1871).

Order—INSECTIVORA.

Fam.

14. Galeopithecidze fe ee st Flying Lemurs.
15, Macroscelididze ste oie cad Elephant Shrews.
16. Tupatide ~ .... ee ae si Squirrel Shrews.
17. Erinaceide ... ae : see Hedgehogs.

18. Centetide ... Ena Ace ss Tenrecs.

19. Potamogalidee SR as ae Otter Shrew.

20. Chrysochloridze aie ais a Golden Moles.
21. Talpidee eee seis ae Sar Moles.

22. Soricidee oe es ao ae Shrews.

The next order, Carnivora, has been studied in detail by
Professor Flower ; and I adopt the classification given by him in
the Proceedings of the Zoological Society, 1869, p. 4.

*

88 DISTRIBUTION OF ANIMALS. [PART I.

Order—CARNIVORA.

Fam.
23. Felide ... ... Cats, Lion, &c.
| 24. Cryptoproctide ... Cryptoprocta.
fEluroidea , 25. Viverridee ... Civets.
ee Protelidee ... Aard-wolf.
set pedi: 27. Hyzenidee ... Hyeenas.
wsstpecla) Cynoidea 28. Canide ... ... Dogs, Foxes, &c.
29. Mustelidee ... Weasels.
Aectuiden is Procyonidee ... Racoons.
: 31. lurid... ... Pandas.
32. Urside ... ... Bears.
33. Otariide ... .... Eared Seals.
Pinnipedia 34, Trichechide ... Walrus.
35. Phocide.... ... Seals.

The Cetacea is one of those orders the classification of which
is very unsettled. The animals comprising it are so huge, and
there is so much difficulty in preserving them, that only a very
few species are known with anything like completeness. A con-
siderable number of genera and species have been described or
indicated ; but as many of these are founded on imperfect speci-
mens of perhaps a single individual, it is not to be wondered at
that those few naturalists who occupy themselves with the study
of these large animals, cannot agree as to the proper mode of group-
ing them into natural families. They are, however, of but little
importance to us, as almost all the species inhabit the ocean, and
of only a few of them can it be said that anything is accurately
known of their distribution. I therefore consider it best to follow
Professor Carus, who makes a smaller number of families ; but
I give also the arrangement of Dr. Gray in his British Museum
catalogue of whales and seals, as modified subsequently in
the Proceedings of Zoological Society, 1870, p. 772. The Zeu-—
glodontide, a family of extinct tertiary whales, are classed by
Professors Owen and Carus between Cetacea and Sirenia, while
Professor Huxley considers them to have been carnivorous and
allied to the seals.

CHAP. V. | CLASSIFICATION. 89
Order—CETACEA.
Fam, (CARUus). Fam. (GRAY).
Sub-order I.— § Balenide 36. Baleenide.
Mystaceti. ( Balwnopteridee . 37. Baleenopteride.
Catodontide ... . 38. Catodontide.
. Hyperoodontide.
Hyperoodontide ... 39. [Eblodontid
Sub-order I.—) vi onodontide .-» 40. (Part of Delphinide.)
Ceonuacatt- Platanistidee.
Iniade.
Delphinide.
Delphinide ...

Orcadee.
Belugide.
Pontoporiade.

Extinct family Zeuglodontide.

Order—SIRENTA.

one | eistin

The order Sirenia, comprising the sea-cows, consists of a single

family :
Family 42. Manatide.

The extensive order Ungulata comprises the three orders
Pachydermata, Solidungula, and Ruminantia of the older natu-

ralists.

The following classification is that now generally

adopted, the only difference of opinion being as to whether
some of the groups should be classed as families or sub-families,

a matter of little importance for our purpose:

Order—UNGULATA.

Fam.

Perissodactyla or ! i Tote
ee ocds Uneulates " 45. Rhinocerotidee ...
- . £46. Hippopotamid
Suina va SuIdee ose
: Tylopoda 48. Camelidee
Artiodactyla or eee eee
Even-toed Ungulates Tragulina 49, Tragulide
50. Cervidee ... os
Pecora | 51. Camelopardid
52. Bovidee

Vou. I.—8

Horses.

Tapirs.

Rhinoceros.

Hippopotamus,

Swine.

Camels.

Chevrotains.

Deer.

Giraffes.

Cattle, Sheep,
Antelopes, &c.

90 DISTRIBUTION OF ANIMALS. [PART I.

The two next orders consist of but a single family each, viz. :

Order Fam.
PROBOSCIDEA _... 53. Elephantide ... ... Elephants.
HYRACOIDEA ... 54, Hyracidee .. «ee Rock-rabbits.

We now come to the Rodentia, a very extensive and difficult
order, in which there is still much difference of opinion as to
the details of classification, although the main outlines are pretty
well settled. The foundations of a true classification of this
order were laid by Mr. G. R. Waterhouse more than thirty years
ago, and succeeding authors have done little more than follow
his arrangement with unimportant modifications. Professor
Lilljeborg, of Upsala, has however made a special study of this
group of animals, and has given an original and detailed classifi-
cation of all the genera. (Systematisk Ofversigt af de Gnagande
Déggdjuren, Glires. Upsala, 1866.) I follow this arrangement
with a few slight modifications suggested by other naturalists,
and which make it better adapted for the purposes of this work.

Order—RODENTIA.

Fam.
55. Muridee opeit ieee GhUate,
56. Spalacide ... ... Mole-rats,
57. Dipodidee ... ... Jerboas.
Maina 58. Myoxidee in) @acdepe Gtmuce:
[oti 59. Saccomyide ... ... Pouched Rats.
GO. Castoride ... ... Beavers.
Gin nlicidentats 61. Sciuridze dee jee) QUirrels:
P 62. Haploodontide ... Sewellels.
63. Chinchillide ... ..... Chinchillas.
64. Octodontide ... ...Octodons.
Hystricina ) 65. Echimyide ... ... Spiny Rats.
(Waterhouse) ) 66. Cercolabide ... ... Tree Porcupines.
67. Hystricide ... ... Porcupines.
68. Caviidee woe ce Cavaes:
sis : Leporina 69. Lagomyide .... ... Pikas.
Duplicidentati { Ewe tettionis) | 70. Leporidee vos eos Hares.

The Edentata have been classified by Mr. Turner, in the
Proceedings of the Zoological Society (1851, p. 205), by Dr.
Gray in the British Museum Catalogue, and by Professor Carus
in his Handbuch. The former takes a middle course between

CHAP. V.] CLASSIFICATION. 91

the numerous families of Dr. Gray, seven in number, and the
two families to which Professor Carus restricts the existing
species. I therefore follow Mr. Turner.

Order—EDENTATA.

Fam.
Bradypoda ... 71. Bradypodide ... Sloth.
72. Manidide ... ... Scaly Ant-eaters.
3. Dasypodide ... Armadillos,

7
Entomophaga 4 74’ Orycteropodide... Ant-bears.

75. Myrmecophagide Ant-eaters.

The Marsupials have been well classified and described by
Mr. Waterliouse in the first volume of his Natural Mistory of
Mammalia, and his arrangement is here followed. The sub-
orders adopted by Professor Carus are also given.

Order—MARSUPIALIA.

Fam.

76. Didelphide ... ... Opossums.

. 77. Dasyuride ... ... Native Cats.
Rapacia (Wagner) 78. Mereobide .... Native Ant-eater.
79. Peramelide... ... Bandicoots.
Poephaga (Owen) ... 80, Macropodide ... Kangaroos.
Carpophaga (Owen) ... 81. Phalangistide ... Phalangers.
Rhizophaga (Owen) ... 82. Phascolomyide ... Wombats.

Order—MONOTREMATA.

The last order, the Monotremata, consist of two families, which
Professor Carus combines into one, but which it seems more
natural to keep separate.

Fam.
83. Ornithorhynchide ... ... «. .... Duckbill.
84. Echidnide esebrteeots Gres! hoes SaChIOnas

92 DISTRIBUTION OF ANIMALS. [PART L.

BIRDS.

Birds are perhaps the most difficult to classify of all the
divisions of the vertebrata. The species and genera are
exceedingly numerous, and there is such a great uniformity
in general structure and even in the details of external form,
that it is exceedingly difficult to find characters by which orders
and families can be characterised. For a long time the system
of Vigors and Swainson was followed; but this wholly ignored
anatomical characters and in many cases plainly violated well-
marked affinities. Characters derived from the form of the
sternum, the scutellation of the tarsi, and the arrangement of
the feathers, have all assisted in determining natural groups.
More recently Professor Huxley has applied the variations of the
bony palate to the general arrangement of birds ; and still more
recently Professor Garrod has studied certain leg-muscles for
the same purpose. The condition of the young as regards
plumage, and even the form, texture, and coloration of the egg,
have also been applied to solve doubtful cases of affinity; yet
the problem is not settled, and it will probably remain for
another generation of ornithologists to determine with any
approach to accuracy what are the most natural divisions of the
class into orders and families. In a work like the present it is
evidently not advisable to adopt all the recent classifications ;
since experience has shown that no arrangement in which one
set of characters is mainly relied on, long holds its ground.
Such modifications of the old system as seem to be well
established will be adopted; but the older groups will be ad-
hered to in cases where the most recent classifications are open
to doubt, or seem inconvenient as separating families, which,
owing to their similarity in general structure, form and habits
are best kept together for the purposes of geographical dis-
tribution.

The old plan of putting the birds of prey at the head of the
class, is now almost wholly given up; both because they are not

CHAP. V.] CLASSIFICATION. 93

the most highly organised, but only one of the most specialised
forms of birds, and because their affinities are not with the
Passeres, but rather with the cormorants and some other of the
aquatic groups. The Passeres therefore are placed first; and the
series of families is begun by the thrushes, which are certainly
the most typical and generally well-organised form of birds.
Instead of the Scansores and Fissirostres of the older authors, the
order Picarize, which includes them both, is adopted, but with
some reluctance; as the former are,*generally speaking, well marked
and strongly contrasted groups, although certain families have
been shown to be intermediate. In the Picariz are included the
goat-suckers, swifts, and humming-birds, sometimes separated
as a distinct order, Macrochires. The parrots and the pigeons
form each a separate order. The old groups of Gralle and
Anseres are preserved, as more convenient than breaking them
up into widely separated parts; for though the latter plan may
in some cases more strictly represent their affinities, its details
are not yet established, nor is it much used by ornithologists.
In accordance with these views the following is the series of
orders and families of birds adopted in this work :

Class—A VES.

Orders.

‘la Serene aa the great mass of the smaller birds—Crows,
: a Finches, Flycatchers, Creepers, Honeysuckers, &c., &c.
ae Including Woodpeckers, Cuckoos, Toucans, Kingfishers,

Swifts, &e., &.

3. Psittaci ... Parrots only.

4, Columbe ... Pigeons and the Dodo.

5. Galline ... Grouse, Pheasants, Curassows, Mound-builders, &c.
6. Opisthocomi The Hoazin only.

7. Accipitres ... Eagles, Owls, and Vultures.

8. Gralla ... Herons, Plovers, Rails, &e.

9. Anseres ... Gulls, Ducks, Divers, &c
10. Struthiones... Ostrich, Cassowary, Apteryx, &e.

The Passeres consist of fifty families, which may be arranged
and grouped in series as follows. It must however be remem-
bered that the first family in each series is not always that
which is most allied to the last family of the preceding series.
All extensive natural groups consist of divergent or branching

alliances, which renders it impossible to arrange the whole in
one continuous series.

94

. Liotrichide ....
. Phyllornithide ... wile 508 Green Bulbuls.

ee
TIATUBRWNHODMDNANR WHR

DISTRIBUTION OF ANIMALS. «| fipAprer

A;—TyYPiIcAL oR TURDOID PASSERES.

. Turdide se “e - Thrushes.
Sylviidee ae 200 Abe Warblers.

. Timaliidee a — see Babblers.

. Panuride vee see Oe Reedlings.
Cinclidze Ane ae on Dippers.

. Troglodytide ... “Be oes Wrens.

. Chameidee a5 oh fos

. Certhiidee sie sas oe Creepers.

. Sittidee He wa oe Nuthatches.

. Paridee eae ia os Tits.

bias sie Hill-tits.

. Pycnonotide ... se oe Bulbuls.
. Oriolidze ae = et Orioles.
. Campephagide ... ee oe Caterpillar-shrikes,
. Dicruridze Use a ee Drougos.
. Muscicapide ... sae aa Flycatchers.
+18. Pachycephalidee sie at Thick-heads,
19. Laniidee seis ad ae Shrikes.
20. Corvidee ae nee as Crows.
21, Paradiseide ... ie ode Paradise-birds.
22. Meliphagide ... a ahs Honey-suckers.
23. Nectarineide ... ae as Sun-birds.
B.—TANAGROID PASSERES.
24. Diczidee ae ae Be Flower-peckers.
25. Drepanididee aa ae
26. Ceerebidee ® =e see Sugar-birds.
27. Mniotiltide ... San See Wood-warblers.
28. Vireonidie ane eee a Greenlets.
29. Ampelidze Bes sea sti Waxwings.
30. Hirundinide ... Bh ee Swallows.
31. Icteridz ode eh ss Hangnests.
32. Tanagridee Rae one ae Tanagers.
33. Fringillide ... se se Finches.

34.
35.
36.
37.
38.

39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44,
45.

C.—StTuRNOID PASSERES.

Ploceidze ae se Ate Weaver-birds.
Sturnide on ane cae Starlings.
Artamidee mee one sais Swallow-shrikes,
Alaudidee ate eA ae Larks.
Motacillide ... set ne Wagtails.
D.—Formicaroip PASsERES.
Tyrannide ee She BoA Tyrants.
Pipridee mc Son a Manakins.
Cotingidee aes si vee Chatterers.
Phytotomide ... aes ast Plant-cutters.
Eurylemide ... se sof Broad-bills.
Dendrocolaptide ase sae American Creepers.
Formicariide ... aoe ase Ant-thrushes.

CHAP. V.] CLASSIFICATION. 95

D.—FormicaRroip PassEREsS—continued.
46. Pteroptochide ...

47. Pittidee ae
48. Paictidee

Pittas.

E.—ANOMALOUS PASSERES.

49. Menuridze

Lyre-birds.
50. Atrichidee

Scrub-birds.

The preceding arrangement is a modification of that proposed
by myself in the Js (1874, p. 406). The principal altera-
tions are adding the families Panuride and Sittide in series
A, commencing series B with Diceide; bringing Vireonide
next to the allied American family Mniotiltide; and placing
Motacillide in series C next to Alaudide. At the suggestion of
Professor Newton I place Menuridz and Atrichidz apart from
the other Passeres, as they both possess striking peculiarities of
anatomical structure. .

The heterogeneous families constituting the order Picarize may
be conveniently arranged as follows :

51. Picidee Woodpeckers.

52. Yungide .. Wrynecks.

53. Indicatoridze Honey-guides.
Sub-order— 54. Megalemidee Barbets.

Scansores. 55. Rhamphastidee Toucans.

56. Musophagidee Plantain-eaters.

57. Coliidee Colies

58. Cuculidee Cuckoos.
Intermediate ... 59. Leptosomidze The Leptosoma.

60. Bucconide ... Puff-birds.

61. Galbulide ... Jacamars.

62. Coraciidze Rollers.

63. Meropidze Bee-eaters.

64. Todidee ry Todies.

65. Momotide ... Motmots.

66. Trogonide ... Trogons.
Sub-order— 67. Alcedinide ... Kingfishers.
Fissirostres. 68. Bucerotide ... Hornbills.

69. Upupidee Hoopoes.

70. Irrisoridze Promerops.

71. Podargide ... Frog-mouths.

72. Steatornithidee The Guacharo.

73. Caprimulgide Goatsuckers.

74. Cypselidee Swifts.

75. Trochilide ... Humming-birds.

96 DISTRIBUTION OF ANIMALS. [PART 1.

The Psittaci or parrot tribe are still in a very unsettled state
of classification; that recently proposed by Professor Garrod
differing widely from the arrangement adopted in Dr. Finsch’s
monograph of the order. Taking advantage of the researches
of these and other authors, the following families are adopted as
the most convenient in the present state of our knowledge:

76. Cacatuide ... ... The Cockatoos.

77. Platycercide ... The Broad-tailed Paroquets of Australia.

78. Paleornithide ... The Oriental Parrots and Paroquets.

79. Trichoglosside .... The Brush-tongued Paroquets and Lories.
80. Conuride ... .... The Macaws and their allies.

81. Psittacide ... ... The African and South American Parrots.
82. Nestoride ... ... The Nestors of New Zealand.

83. Stringopidee ... The Owl-parrots of New Zealand.

The Columb, or pigeons, are also in a very unsatisfactory
state as regards a natural classification. The families, sub-
families, and genera proposed by various authors are very
numerous, and often quite irreconcilable. I therefore adopt
only two families; and generally follow Mr. G. R. Gray’s hand-
list for the genera, except where trustworthy authorities exist
for a different arrangement. The families are:

84. Columbide ... Pigeons and Doves.
85. Didide ae ... The extinct Dodo and allies.

The Galline, or game-birds, may be divided into seven
families : .

Fam. Sub-fam.

86. Pteroclide ... ae aA ... Sand-grouse.

87. Tetraonide ... ne Sra ... Partridges and Grouse.
Pavonine ... ... Peafowl.
Lophophorinze ... Tragopans, &c.
Phasianine ... .... Pheasants.

88. Phasianidz ...\ Euplocamine ... Fire-backed Pheasants, &c,
Galline ... ... Jungle-fowl.
Meleagrine ... 2. ( Turkeys.
Numidine ... ... Guinea-fowl.

89. Turnicidee ee mes ae .... Hemipodes.

90. Megapodiide ... ass Bie ... Mound-makers.
Cracinze ... Curassows.

91. Cracidee ...4 Penelopine ... +. Guans,
Oreophasinze .... Mountain-pheasant.-

92, Tinamidee an ae ee .... Tinamous.

CHAP. V. | CLASSIFICATION. oF

3

The Opisthocomi consist of one family containing a single
species, the “‘ Hoazin” of Guiana.

Family 93. Opisthocomide.

The Accipitres, or birds of prey, which were long considered
to be the highest and most perfect order of birds, are now ,
properly placed lower down in the series, their affinities being
more with the aquatic than with the perching birds. The
following is the arrangement adopted by Mr. Sharpe in his
recently published British Museum catalogue of diurnal birds
of prey :—

Sub-orders. Fam. Sub-families. 1
: Vulturine .. Vultures
f 1. Wi a ¢ Cf eee .
Sida Sarcorhamphine = ‘Turkey-buzzards.

Falcones “95. Serpentariide ... Polyborniz ... Caracaras.
| | Accipitrine ... Hawks.

96. Falconide -. ( Buteonine po Buzzards.
| Aquiline ... eo Hagles.
Falconinze ... Falcons.

Pandiones...97. Pandionidee are ae ... Fishing-eagles.
Striges ...98. Strigidee Ene es ang si Ovvls,

The Grallz or Grallatores are in a very unsettled state. The
following series of families is in accordance with the views of
some of the best modern ornithologists :

99. Rallide ... ae a3 - Rails, &.

100. Scolopacidee ales va Sandpipers and Snipes
101. Chionididee Sheath-bills.

102. Thinocoridee Quail-snipes.

103. Parride ... Jacanas.

104. Glareolidee Pratincoles.

105. Charadriidee Plovers.

106. Otidide ... Bustards.

107. Gruide Cranes.

108. Cariamide Cariamas.

109, Aramide... Guaraunas.

110, Psophiide Trumpeters.

111. Eurypyyidee Sun-bitterns.

112. Rhinocheetidee Kagus.

113. Ardeide ... Herons. °

114, Plataleidze Spoonbills and Ibis.
115. Ciconiide Storks,

. Palamedeidee ;
. Pheenicopteride ...

Screamers.
Flamingoes,

98

DISTRIBUTION OF ANIMALS.

[PART 1.

The Anseres or Natatores are almost equally unsettled. The
flamingoes are usually placed in this order, but their habits best
assort with those of the waders.

Fam.
Anatidee
Laridz

118.
119.
120.
121.
122.
123.
124.
125.

Colymbid,
Podicipid
Alcidee

Procellariidee
Pelecanide ...
Spheniscidee

oe
CE eve

Duck and Geese.
Gulls.

Petrels.
Pelicans.
Penguins.
Divers.

Grebes.

Auks.

The last order of birds is the Struthiones or Ratitee, considered

by many naturalists to form a distinct sub-class.

It consists of

comparatively few species, either living or recently extinct.

126.
127.
128.
129.
130.
131.

Living |

Extinct

Fam.
Struthionide
Casuariide ..
Apterygide ...
Dinornithide
Palapterygidee
Epyornithide

REPTILES.

Ostriches.
Cassowaries.
Apteryx.
Dinornis.
Palapteryx.
Aipyornis.

In reptiles I follow the classification of Dr. Giinther as given
in the Philosophical Transactions, vol. clvii., p. 625. He divides
the class into five orders as follows :—

Sub-classes.

I. Squamata ...

II. Loricata

III. Cataphracta

1
2
3.
4
5

Orders.
. Ophidia
. Lacertilia
Rhyncocephalina
. Crocodilia
. Chelonia

Serpents.
Lizards.

The Hatteria.
Crocodiles.
Tortoises.

In the arrangement of the families comprised in each of these
orders I also follow the arrangement of Dr. Giinther and Dr.
J. E. Gray, as given in the British Museum Catalogue, or as
modified by the former gentleman who has kindly given me
much personal information.

CHAP, V.]

CLASSIFICATION,

99

The Ophidia, or Snakes, form the first order and are classified
as follows :—

OONDOP WNW

Innocuous Snakes ¢ 10.

20.

Venomous Colubrine ) 21.
SHENES og) Sua) PEE

Viperine Snakes... | aie

25

Fam.

. Typhlopide

. Tortricide ...
. Xenopeltide
. Uropeltide

. Calamaride

. Oligodontide.
. Colubride ...
. Homalopside
. Psammophide ...

Rachiodontide.

. Dendrophide
. Dryiophide
. Dipsaside ...
. Scytalidee.

. Lycodontide :
. Amblycephalidee
. Pythonide Si8
. Erycidea ats
. Acrochordide ...

Elapide ... ...

Dendraspidide.
Atractaspidide.

. Hydrophide

Crotalide ...
Viperidee

Burrowing Snakes.

Dwarf ground-snakes.

Colubrine Snakes.
Fresh-water Snakes.

Desert-snakes.

Tree-snakes.
Whip-snakes.

Nocturnal tree-snakes.

Fanged ground-snakes.

Blunt-heads.
Pythons.
Sand-snakes.
Wart-snakes.

Cobras, &e.

Sea-snakes.

Pit-vipers.
True vipers

The second order, Lacertilia, are arranged as follows :—

26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40,
41.
42.
43.

Fam.
Trogonophide ...
Chirotide
Amphisbeenide
Lepidosternide
Varanidee
Helodermide.
Teidee
Lacertide
Zonuride
Chalcidee.
Anadiade.
Chirocolide.
Iphisade.
Cercosauride.
Chamesauride.
Gymnopthalmide
Pygopodidee
Aprasiade.

Amphisbenians.

Water Lizards.

Teguexins

Land Lizards

Gape-eyed Scinks.

Two-legged Lizards.

100 DISTRIBUTION OF ANIMALS. [PART 1.

Fam.

44, Lialide.

45, Scincide ais aes Bs Scinks.

46. Ophiomoride ... ae ie Snake-lizards.
47. Sepide ... eh ton ee Sand-lizards.
48. Acontiade.

49. Geckotidee on st sis Geckoes.

50. Iguanide ie Bad ore Iguanas.

51. Agamide fas ant an Fringed Lizards.
52. Chameleonide ... Rat ee Chameleons.

The third order, Rhyncocephalina consists of a single family :—
53. Rhyncocephalide ... ... The Hatteria of New Zealand.

The fourth order, Crocodilia or Loricata, consists of three
families :—

54, Gavialide mee zie eae Gavials.
55. Crocodilide ... ee ate Crocodiles.
56. Alligatoride ... sas ies Alligators.

The fifth order, Chelonia, consists of four families :—

57. Testudinide ... as Land and fresh-water Tortoises.
58. Chelydide .... ae Fresh-water Turtles.
59. Trionychide ... ane Soft Turtles.
60. Cheloniide ... Nee Sea Turtles.
AMPHIPBIA.

In the Amphibia I follow the classification of Professor
Mivart, as given for a large part of the order in the Proceedings
of the Zoological Society for 1869. For the remainder I follow
Dr. Strauch, Dr. Giinther, and a MSS. arrangement kindly
furnished me by Professor Mivart.

The class is first divided into three groups or orders, and then
into families as follows :—

CHAP, V.]

> Ori Go bo

CLASSIFICATION. 191

Order IL—PSEUDOPHIDIA.

Fam.

. Ceciliadee

Cecilia.

Order I.--BATRACHIA URODELA.

. Sirenide

. Proteide ...
. Amphiumide

. Menopomide

. Salamandride

Siren.

Proteus.

Amphiuma.

Giant Salamanders.
Salamanders and Newts.

Order III. BATRACHIA ANOURA.

Fam. Fam.
. Rhinophrynide 16. Pelodryade ...
. Phryniscidee Vio dtylids, “.:- ...9, -Lree Krogs:
. Hylapleside ... mong 18. Polypedatide ...
. Bufonide... é 19. Ranide BoA Gy ee
. Xenorhinide ... 2). Discoglosside ... Eo ,
. Engystomide ... Di Pipidse 2c. ss. ars
. Bombinatoridee 22. Dactylethride ... Toads.
. Plectromantide {ng
. Alytide ...

FISHES.

These are arranged according to the classification of Dr.
Giinther, whose great work “The British Museum Catalogue of
Fishes,” has furnished almost all the material for our account
of the distribution of the class.

In that work all existing fishes are arranged in six sub-classes

and thirteen orders.

A study of the extraordinary Ceratodus

from Australia has induced Dr. Giinther to unite three of his
sub-classes ; but as his catalogue will long remain a handbook
for every student of fishes, it seems better to follow the arrange-
ment there given, indicating his later views by bracketing

together the groups he now thinks should be united.

102 DISTRIBUTION OF ANIMALS, [PART I,

Sub-class. Order. E £ Remarks.
1. Acanthopterygii ...| 47 |Gasterosteide to Notacanthi.
| 2, Do. Pharyncognathi) 5 |Pomacentride to Chromide.
meleostai 3. Acanthini ...| 6 |Gadopside to Pleuronectide.
ec CPCORIED <=). Ax) Bhysostomi .| 29 |Siluride to Pegaside.
£ | 5. Lophobranchii 2 |Solenostomide and Syngnathide.
S 6. Plectognathi 2 |Sclerodermi and Gymnodontes.
4 |Dipnoi ... 7. Sirenoidei 1 |Sirenoidei.
el Gancider 8. Holostei 3 |Amiide to Lepidosteide.
ane Na 9. Chondrostei. 2 |Accipenseride and Polydontide.
Chondropte- | 10. Holocephala ... 1 |Chimeride.
rygii 11. Plagiostomata 15 |Carchariide to Myliobatide.
Cyclostomata 12. Marsipobranchii ...) 2 |Petromyzontide and Myxinide.
Leptocardii 13. Cirrhostomi ... 1 |Cirrhostomi.
Total... 116 families.
INSECTS.

The families and genera of insects are so immensely numerous,
probably exceeding fifty-fold those of all other land animals,
that for this cause alone it would be impossible to enter fully
into their distribution. It is also quite unnecessary, because
many of the groups are so liable to be transported by accidental
causes, that they afford no useful information for our subject ;
while others are so obscure and uninteresting that they have
been very partially collected and studied, and are for this
reason equally ineligible. I have therefore selected a few of
the largest and most conspicuous families, which have been so
assiduously coliected in every part of the globe, and so carefully
studied at home, as to afford valuable materials for com-
parison with the vertebrate groups, when we have made due
allowance for the dependence of many insects on peculiar forms
of vegetation, and the facility with which many of. them are
transported either in the egg, larva, or perfect state, by winds,
currents, and other less known means.

I confine myself then, almost exclusively, to the sixteen
families of Diurnal Lepidoptera or butterflies, and to six of the
most extensive, conspicuous, and popular families of Coleoptera.

CHAP. V.] CLASSIFICATION. 103

The number of species of Butterflies is about the same as that
of Birds, while the six families of Coleoptera selected, comprise
more than twenty thousand species, far exceeding the number of
all other vertebrates. These families have all been recently cata-
logued, so that we have very complete information as to their
arrangement and distribution.

LEPIDOPTERA DIURNA, OR BUTTERFLIES.

Fam. Fam.

1. Danaide. 9. Libythzide.

2. Satyride. 10. Nemeobiide.

3. Elymniide. 11. Eurygonide.

4, Morphide. 12. Erycinide.

5. Brassolide. 13. Lyceenide.

6. Acreide. 14. Pieride.

7. Heliconide. 15. Papilionide.

8. Nymphalide. 16. Hesperide.

COLEOPTERA, OR BEETLES.
Fam. Fam.

1, Cicindelide ... Tiger-beetles. 4, Cetoniide ... Rose-chafers,
2. Carabide ... Ground-beetles. 5. Buprestide ... Metallic Beetles.
3, Lucanide ... Stag-beetles. 6. Longicornia ... Long-horned Beetles.

The above families comprise the extensive series of ground
beetles (Carabidze) containing about 9,000 species, and the Longi-
corns, which are nearly as numerous and surpass them in variety
of form and colour as well as in beauty. The Cetoniide and
Buprestidz are among the largest and most brilliant of beetles ;
the Lucanidz are pre-eminent for remarkable form, and the
Cicindelide for elegance; and all the families are especial
favourites with entomologists, so that the whole earth has been
ransacked to procure fresh species.

Results deduced from a study of these will, therefore, fairly
represent the phenomena of distribution of Coleoptera, and,
as they are very varied in their habits, perhaps of insects in
general.

104 DISTRIBUTION OF ANIMALS. [PART I.

MOLLUSCA.

The Mollusca are usually divided into five classes as
follows :—

Classes.
I. Cephalopoda ... ... Cuttle-fish.
II. Gasteropoda ... ... Snails and aquatic Univalves.

III. Pteropoda ... «+. Oceanic Snails.
IV. Brachiopoda ... .... Symmetrical Bivalves.
V. Conchifera .... .... Unsymmetrical Bivalves.

The Gasteropoda and Conchifera alone contain land and
freshwater forms, and to these we shall chiefly confine our
illustrations of the geographical distribution of the Mollusca.
The classification followed is that of Dr. Pfeiffer for the
Operculata and Dr. Von Martens for the Helicide. The
families chiefly referred to are :—

Class II.—GASTEROPODA.
Order 2.—Pulmonifera.

Fam.
. Helicide.
Limacide.
Oncidiade.
Limneide.
. Auriculide.
. Aciculide.
Diplommatinide.
. Cyclostomide.
. Helicinide.

In-operculata

WOMB Ap whe

Operculata .

“X=

PA al:

ON THE DISTRIBUTION OF EXTINCT ANIMALS.

Vote -—9

a | a y

. baw a .
= ps
fa v
\¢ f :
; - :
j } 4 :
ft
f sil
2 *
. ;
|
; |
.
.
; q
; /
_ ; ‘
4 :
:
:

CHAPTER VI.

THE EXTINCT MAMMALIA OF THE OLD WORLD.

ALTHOUGH it may seem somewhat out of place to begin the
systematic treatment of our subject with extinct rather than
with living animals, it is necessary to do so in order that we
may see the meaning and trace the causes of the existing dis-
tribution of animal forms. It is true, that the animals found
fossil in a country are very generally allied to those which still
inhabit it; but this is by no means universally the case. If it
were, the attempt to elucidate our subject by Paleontology
would be hopeless, since the past would show us the same
puzzling diversities of faunas and floras that now exist. We
find however very numerous exceptions to this rule, and it is
these exceptions which tell us of the past migrations of whole
groups of animals. We are thus enabled to determine what
portion of the existing races of animals in a country are de-
scendants of its ancient fauna, and which are comparatively
modern immigrants; and combining these movements of the
forms of life with known or probable changes in the distribution
of land and sea, we shall sometimes be able to trace approxi-
mately the long series of changes which have resulted in the
actual state of things. To gain this knowledge is our object in
studying the “ Geographical Distribution of Animals,” and our
plan of study must be determined, mainly, by the facilities it
affords us for attaining this object. In discussing the countless
details of distribution we shall meet with in our survey of the
zoological regions, we shall often find it useful to refer to the
evidence we possess of the range of the group in question in

108 DISTRIBUTION OF EXTINCT ANIMALS. [PART Il.

past times ; and when we attempt to generalise the phenomena
on a large scale, with the details fresh in our memory, we shall
find a reference to the extinct faunas of various epochs to be
absolutely necessary.

The degree of our knowledge of the Paleontology of various
parts of the world is so unequal, that it will not be advisable to
treat the subject under each of our six regions. Yet some sub-
division must be made, and it seems best to consider separately
the extinct animals of the Old and of the New Worlds. Those of
Europe and Asia are intimately connected, and throw light on
the past changes which have led to the establishment of the
three great continental Old World regions, with their various
subdivisions. The wonderful extinct fauna recently discovered
in North America, with what was previously known from South
temperate America, not only elucidates the past history of the
whole continent, but also gives indications of the mutual rela-
tions of the eastern and western hemispheres.

The materials to be dealt with are enormous; and it will be
necessary to confine ourselves to a general summary, with fuller
details on those points which directly bear upon our special
subject. The objects of most interest to the pure zoologist and
to the geologist—those strange forms which are farthest removed
from any now living—are of least interest to us, since we aim
at tracing the local origin or birthplace of existing genera and
families; and for this purpose animals whose affinities with
living forms are altogether doubtful, are of no value whatever.

The great mass of the vertebrate fossils of the tertiary period
consist of mammalia, and this is precisely the class which is of
most value in the determination of zoological regions. The
animals of the secondary period, though of the highest interest
to the zoologist are of little importance to us; both because of
their very uncertain affinities for any existing groups, and also
because we can form no adequate notion of the distribution of
land and sea in those remote epochs. Our great object is to
trace back, step by step, the varying distribution of the chief
forms of life; and to deduce, wherever possible, the physical
changes which must have accompanied or caused such changes.

CHAP. VI. ] MAMMALIA OF THE OLD WORLD. 109

The natural division of our subject therefore is into geological
periods. We first go back to the Post-Pliocene period, which
includes that of the caves and gravels of Europe containing flint
implements, and extends back to the deposit of the glacial drift
in the concluding phase of the glacial epoch. Next we have
the Pliocene period, divided into its later portion (the Newer
Pliocene) which includes the Glacial epoch of the northern
hemisphere ; and its earlier portion (the Older Pliocene), repre-
sentéd by the red and coralline crag of England, and deposits of
similar age in the continent. During this earlier epoch the
climate was not very dissimilar from that which now prevails;
but we next get evidence of a still earlier period, the Miocene,
when a warmer climate prevailed in Europe, and the whole
fauna and flora were very different. This is perhaps the most
interesting portion of the tertiary deposits, and furnishes us
with the most valuable materials for our present study.
Further back still we have the Eocene period, with apparently
an almost tropical climate in Europe; and here we find a clue
to some of the most puzzling facts in the distribution of living
animals. Our knowledge of this epoch is however very im-
perfect; and we wait for discoveries that will elucidate some
of the mystery that still hangs over the origin and migrations
of many important families. Beyond this there is a great chasm
in the geological record as regards land animals; and we have to
go so far back into the past, that when we again meet with mam-
malia, birds, and land-reptiles, they appear under such archaic
forms that they cease to have any local or geographical signi-
ficance, and we can only refer them to wide-spread classes
and orders. For the purpose of elucidating geographical distri-
bution, therefore, it is, in the present state of our knowledge,
unnecessary to go back beyond the tertiary period of geology.

The remains of Mammalia being so much more numerous and
important than those of other classes, we shall at first confine
ourselves almost exclusively to these. What is known of the
birds, reptiles, and fishes of the tertiary epoch will be best
indicated by a brief connected sketch of their fossils in all parts
of the globe, which we shall give in a subsequent chapter.

110 DISTRIBUTION OF EXTINCT ANIMALS. ~_ [Part w.

Historic Period—In tracing back the history of the organic
world we find, even within the limits of the historical period,
that some animals have become extinct, while the distribution of
others has been materially changed. The Rytina of the North
Pacific, the dodo of Mauritius, and the great auk of the North
Atlantic coasts, have been exterminated almost in our own
times. The kitchen-middens of Denmark contain remains of
the capercailzie, the Bos primigenius, and the beaver. The first
still abounds farther north, the second is extinct, and the third
is becoming soin Europe. The great Irish elk, a huge-antlered
deer, probably existed almost down to historic times.

Pleistocene or Post-Pliocene Period.—We first meet with proofs
of important changes in the character of the European fauna, in
studying the remains found in the caverns of England and France,
which have recently been so well explored. These cave-remains
are probably all subsequent to the Glacial epoch, and they all
come within the period of man’s occupation of the country. Yet
we find clear proofs of two distinct kinds of change in the
forms of animal life. First we have a change clearly trace-
able to a difference of climate. We find such arctic forms as
the rein-deer, the musk-sheep, the glutton, and the lemming,
with the mammoth and the woolly rhinoceros of the Siberian
ice-cliffs, inhabiting this country and even the south of France.
This is held to be good proof that a sub-arctic climate pre-
vailed over all Central Europe ; and this climate, together with
the continental condition of Britain, will sufficiently explain
such a southward range of what are now arctic forms.

But together with this change we have another that seems at
first sight to be in an exactly opposite direction. We meet
with numerous animals which now only inhabit Africa, or South
Europe, or the warmer parts of Asia. Such are, large felines—
some closely related to the lion (Felis spelwa), others of alto-
gether extinct type (Machairodus) and forming the extreme de-
velopment of the feline race ;—hyznas ; horses of two or more
species; and a hippopotamus. If we go a little further back, to
the remains furnished by the gravels and brick-earths, we still
find the same association of forms. The reindeer, the glutton,

CHAP. VI.] MAMMALIA OF THE OLD WORLD. 111

the musk-sheep, and the woolly rhinoceros, are associated with
several other species of rhinoceros and elephant; with nume-
rous civets, now abundant only in warm countries; and with
antelopes of several species. We also meet here with a great
extension of range of forms now limited to small areas. The
Saiga antelope of Eastern Europe occurs in France, where wild
sheep and goats and the chamois were then found, together with
several species of deer, of bear, and of hyzna. <A few extinct
genera even come down to this late period, such as the great
sabre-toothed tiger, Machairodus ; Galeotherium, a form of Viver-
ride; Palwospalax, allied to the mole; and Trogontherium, a
gigantic form of beaver.

We find then, that even at so early a stage of our inquiries we
meet with a problem in distribution by no means easy to solve.
How are we to explain the banishment from Europe in so short
a space of time (geologically speaking) of so many forms of life
now characteristic of warmer countries, and this too during a
period when the climate of Central Europe was itself becoming
warmer? Such a change must almost certainly have been due
to changes of physical geography, which we shall be better able
to understand when we have examined the preceding Pliocene
period. We may here notice, however, that so far as we yet
know, this great recent change in the character of the fauna is
confined to the western part of the Palearctic region. In caves
in the Altai Mountains examined by Prof. Brandt, a great col-
lection of fossil bones was discovered. These comprised the
Siberian rhinoceros and mammoth, and the cave hyena; but all
the others, more than thirty distinct species, are now living in
or near the same regions. We may perhaps impute this dif-
ference to the fact that the migration of Southern types into
this part of Siberia was prevented by the great mountain and
desert barrier of the Central Asiatic plateau ; whereas in Europe
there was at this time a land connection with Africa. Post-
pliocene deposits and caverns in Algeria have yielded remains
resembling the more southern European types of the Post-
pliocene period, but without any admixture of Arctic forms;
showing, as we might expect, that the glacial cold did not

112 DISTRIBUTION OF EXTINCT ANIMALS. [PART II.

extend so far south. We have here remains of Equus, Bos,
Antilope, Hippopotamus, Elephas, Rhinoceros, Ursus, Canis,
and Hyena, together with Phacocherus, an African type of
swine which has not occurred in the European deposits.

It is perhaps to the earlier portion of this period that the
Merycotherium of the Siberian drift belongs. This was an
animal related to the living camel, thus supporting the view that
the Camelide are essentially denizens of the extra-tropical zone.

PLIOCENE PERIOD.

Primates—wWe here first meet with evidence of the existence
of monkeys in Central Europe. Species of Macacus have left
remains not only in the Newer Pliocene of the Val d’Arno in
Italy, but in beds of the same age at Grays in Essex ; while
Semnopithecus and Cercopithecus, genera now confined to the
Oriental and Ethiopian regions’ respectively, have been found in
the Pliocene deposits of the South of France and Italy.

Carnivora.—Most of the genera which occurred in the Post
Pliocene are found here also, and many of the same species. Few
new forms appear, except Hycnarctos, a large bear with characters
approaching the hyenas, and Pristiphoca, a new form of seal,
both from the Older Pliocene of France; and Galecynus, a fox-
like animal intermediate between Canis and Viverra, from the
Pliocene of GEninghen in Switzerland.

Cetacea.—Species of Balena, Physeter, and Delphinus occur in
the Older Pliocene of England and France, and with these the
remains of many extinct forms, Balenodon and Hoplocetus
(Balenide) ; Belemnoziphius and Choneziphius (Hyperoodontide),
and Halitherium, an extinct form of the next order—Sirenia,
now confined to the tropics, although the recently extinct Rytina
of the N. W. Pacific shows that it is also adapted for tem-
perate climates.

Ungulata.—The Pliocene deposits are not very rich in this
order. The horses (Zquide) are represented by the genus Hquus ;
and here we first meet with Hipparion, in which small lateral
toes appear. Both genera occur in British deposits of this age.

CHAP: ¥1.]] MAMMALIA OF THE OLD WORLD. 113

A more interesting fact for us is the occurrence of the genus
Tapirus in the Newer Pliocene of France and in the older beds
of both France and England, since this genus is now isolated
in the remotest parts of the eastern and western tropics. The
genera Rhinoceros, Hippopotamus, and Sus, occur here as in the
preceding epoch.

We next come to the deer genus (Cervus), which appears to
have been at its maximum in this period, no less than eight
species occurring in the Norwich Crag, and Forest-beds. Among
the Bovide, the antelopes, ox, and bison, are the only forms repre-
sented here, as in the Post-Plocene period. Passing on to the
Proboscidea, we find three species of elephants and two of Mas-
todon preserved in European beds of this period, all distinct from
those of Post-Plocene times.

Rodentia—In this order we find representatives of many
living European forms; as Cricetus (hamster), Arvicola (vole),
Castor (beaver), Arctomys (marmot), Hystrix (porcupine),
Lepus (hare), and Lagomys (pika); and a few that are extinct,
the most important being Chalicomys, allied to the beaver ;
and Issiodromys, said to come nearest to the remarkable
Pedetes of South Africa, both found in the Pliocene formations
of France.

General Conclusions as to Pliocene and Post-Pliocene Faunas of
Europe.—This compietes the series of fossil forms of the Pliocene
deposits of Europe. They show us that the presence of numer-
ous large carnivora and ungulates (now almost wholly tropical) in
the Post-Pliocene period, was due to no exceptional or temporary
cause, but was the result of a natural succession from similar
races which had inhabited the same countries for long preceding
ages. In order to understand the vast periods of time covered
by the Phocene and Post-Pliocene formations, the works of Sir
Charles Lyell must be studied. We shall then come to see, that
the present condition of the fauna of Europe is wholly new and
exceptional. For a long succession of ages, various forms of
monkeys, hyeenas, lions, horses, hipparions, tapirs, rhinoceroses,
hippopotami, elephants, mastodons, deer, and antelopes, together

114 DISTRIBUTION OF EXTINCT ANIMALS. [PART II,

with almost all the forms now living, produced a rich and varied
fauna such as we now see only in the open country of tropical
Africa. During all this period we have no reason to believe that
the climate or other physical conditions of Europe were more
favourable to the existence of these animals than now. We must
look upon them, therefore, as true indigenes of the country, and
their comparatively recent extinction or banishment as a remark-
able phenomenon for which there must have been some adequate
cause. What this cause was we can only conjecture; but it
seems most probable that it was due to the combined action of
the Glacial period, and the subsidence of large areas of land once
connecting Europe with Africa. The existence, in the small
island of Malta, of no less than three extinct species of elephant
(two of very small stature), of a gigantic dormouse, an extinct
hippopotamus, and other mammalia, together with the occurrence
of remains of hippopotamus in the caves of Gibraltar, indicate
very clearly that during the Pliocene epoch, and perhaps during
a considerable part of the Post-Pliocene, a connection existed
between South Europe and North Africa in at least these two
localities. At the same time we have every reason to believe
that Britain was united to the Continent, what is now the German
Ocean constituting a great river-valley. During the height of
the Glacial epoch, these large animals would probably retire into
this Mediterranean land and into North Africa, making annual
migrations northwards during the summer. But as the connect-
ing land sank and became narrower and narrower, the migrating
herds would diminish, and at last cease altogether; and when the
glacial cold had passed away would be altogether prevented from
returning to their former haunts.

MIOCENE PERIOD.

We now come to a period which was wonderfully rich in all
forms of life, and of which the geological record is exceptionally
complete. Various lacustrine, estuarine, and other deposits in
Europe, North India, and North America, have furnished such a

CHAP. VI. ] MAMMALIA OF THE OLD WORLD. 115

vast number of remains of extinct mammalia, as to solve many
zoological problems, and to throw great light on the early distri-
bution and centres of dispersal of various groups of animals. In
order to show the bearing of these remains on our special sub-
ject, we will first give an account of the extinct fauna of Greece,
of the Upper Miocene period; since this, being nearest to Africa
and Asia, best exhibits the relations of the old European fauna
to those countries. We shall then pass to the Miocene fauna of
France and Central Europe; and conclude with the remarkable
Siwalik and other Indian extinct faunas, which throw an addi-
tional light on the early history of the animal life of the great
old-world continents.

Extinct Animals of Greece.

These are from the Upper Miocene deposits at Pikermi, near
Athens, and were collected by M. Gaudry a few years ago.
They comprise ten living and eighteen extinct genera of mam-
malia, with a few birds and reptiles.

Primates—These are represented by Mesopithecus, a genus
believed to be intermediate between the two Indian genera of
monkeys, Semnopithecus and Macacus.

Carnivora.—These were abundant. Of Felis there were four
species, ranging from the size of a cat to that of a jaguar, a large
hyena, and a large weasel (Mustela). Besides these there were
the huge Machairodus, larger than any existing lion or tiger, and
with enormously developed canine teeth; Hyewnictis and Lycena,
extinct forms of Hyenide ; Thalassictis=Ictitherium, an extinct
genus of Viverrids but with resemblances to the hyzenas, repre-
sented by three species, some of which were larger than any
existing Viverride ; Promephytis, an extinct form of Mustelide,
having resemblances to the European marten, to the otters, and
to the S. African Zorilla ; and lastly, Simocyon, an extraordinary
carnivore of the size of a small panther, but having the canines
of a cat, the molars of a dog, and the jaws shaped like those of
a bear.

Ungulata.—These are numerous and very interesting. The
Equide are represented by the three-toed Hipparion, which con-

116 DISTRIBUTION OF EXTINCT ANIMALS. [PART II.

tinued to exist till the Older Pliocene period. There are three
large species of Rhinuceros, as well as a species of the extinct
genus Leptodon of smaller size. Remains of a very large wild
boar (Sus) were found. Very interesting is the occurrence of a
species of giraffe (Camelopardalis) as tall as the African species
but more slender; and also an extinct genus Helladotheriwm, not
quite so tall as the giraffe but much more robust, and showing
some approach to the Antilopidé in its dentition. Antelopes
were abundant, ranging from the size of the gazelle to that o
the largest living species. Three or four seem referable to living
genera, but the majority are of extinct types, and are classed
in the genera Palwotragus, Paleoryx, Tragocerus, and Paleoreas ;
while Dremotherium is an ancient generalized form of Cervide
or deer.

Proboscidea.—These are represented by two species of Masto-
don, and two of Dinotherium, an extraordinary extinct form
supposed to be, to some extent, intermediate between’ the
elephants and the aquatic manatees (Sirenia.)

Rodentia—This order is represented by a species of Hystria,
larger than living porcupines.

Edentata.—This order, now almost confined to South America,
was represented in the Miocene period by several European
species. Ancylotherium and Macrotherium, belonging to an extinct
family but remotely allied to the African ant-bear (Orycteropus),
occur in Greece.

Sirds.—Species of Phasianus and Gallus were found; the
latter especially interesting as being now confined to India.

feptiles—These are few and unimportant, consisting of a
tortoise (Zestudo) and a large lizard allied to Varanus.

Summary of the Miocene Fauna of Greece—Although we can-
not consider that the preceding enumeration gives us by any
means a complete view of the actual inhabitants of this part
of Europe during the later portion of the Miocene period, we
yet obtain some important information. The resemblance that
appeared in the Phocene fauna of Europe, to that of the open
country of tropical Africa, is now still more remarkable. We

CHAP. VI. ] MAMMALIA OF THE OLD WORLD. 117

not only find great felines, surpassing in size and destructive
power the lions and leopards of Africa, with hyznas of a size
and in a variety not to be equalled now, but also huge rhino-
ceroses and elephants, two forms of giraffes, and a host of
antelopes, which, from the sample here obtained, were probably
quite as numerous and varied as they now are in Africa,
Joined with this abundance of antelopes we have the absence
of deer, which probably indicates that the country was open
and somewhat of a desert character, since there were ‘deer in
other parts of Europe at this epoch. The occurrence of but a
single species of monkey is also favourable to this view, since
a well-wooded country would most likely have supplied many
forms of these animals.

Miocene Fauna of Central and Western Europe.

We have now to consider the Miocene fauna of Europe
generally, of which we have very full information from nu-
merous deposits of this age in France, Switzerland, Italy,
Germany, and Hungary.

Primates.—Three distinct forms of monkeys have been found
in Europe—in the South of France, in Switzerland, and Wurtem-
berg ; one was very like Colobus or Semnopithecus ; the others—
Pliopithecus and Dryopithecus—were of higher type, and _be-
longed to the anthropomorphous apes, being nearest to the genus
Hylobutes or gibbons. Both have occurred in the South of France.
The Dryopithecus was a very large animal (equal to the gorilla),
and M. Lartet considers that in the character of its dentition it
approached nearer to man than any of the existing anthropoid
apes. ;

Insectivora.—These small animals are represented by numerous
remains belonging to four families and a dozen genera. Of
Erinaceus (hedgehog) several species are found in the Upper
Miocene; and in the Lower Miocene of Auvergne two extinct
genera of the same family—Amphechinus and Tetracus—have
been discovered. Several species of T'alpa (mole) occur in the
Upper Miocene of France, while the extinct Dinylus is from Ger-
many, and Paleospalax from the Lower Miocene of the Isle of

118 DISTRIBUTION OF EXTINCT ANIMALS. [PART II.

Wight. The Malayan family Tupaiide or squirrel-shrews, is
believed to be represented by Oxygomphus, a fossil discovered in
South Germany (Wiesenau) by H. von Meyer. The Soricide or
shrews, are represented by several extinct genera—Plesiosorex,
Mysarachne and Galeospalas: ; as well as by Amphisorex and Myo-
gale still living. Echinogale, a genus of Centetide now confined
to Madagascar, is said to occur in the Lower Miocene of Auvergne,
a most interesting determination, if correct, as it would form a
transition to the Solenodon of the Antilles belonging to the same
family ; but I am informed by Prof. Flower that the affinities of
the animals described under this name are very doubtful.

Carnivora.—Besides Felis and Machairodus, which extend back
to the Upper Miocene, there are two other genera of Felide,
Pseudelurus in the Upper Miocene of France, and Hywnodon,
which occurs in the Upper and Lower Miocene of France, named
from some resemblance in its teeth to the hyenas, and considered
by some Paleontologists to form a distinct family, Hyzenodontide.
The Viverride, or civets, were very numerous, consisting of the
living genus Viverra, and three extinct forms—Thalassictis=
Ictitheriwm, as large as a panther, and Soricictis, a smaller form,
occurring both in France and Hungary. Of Hyenide, there was
the living genus Hyena, and the extinct Hyenictis, which has
occurred in Hungary as well as in Greece. The Canide, or
wolf and fox family, were represented by Pseudocyon, near to
Canis; Hemicyon, intermediate between dogs and gluttons;
and Amphicyon, of which several species occur in the Upper
and Lower Miocene of France, some of them larger than a
tiger. The Mustelide, or weasels, were represented by five
genera, the existing genera Lutra (otter) and Mustela (weasel) ;
Potamotheriwm, an extinct form of otter; ZTaxodon, allied to the
badger and otter; Palwomephitis in Germany, and the Prome-
phytis (already noticed) in Greece. The bears were represented
only by Hycnarctos, which has been noticed as occurring m.
the Pliocene, and first appears in the Upper Miocene of France.
Seals are represented by a form resembling the Antarctic
Otaria, remains of which occur in the Upper Miocene of
France.

CHAP. VI.] MAMMALIA OF THE OLD WORLD. 119

Cetacea (whales).—These occur frequently in the Miocene de-
posits, four living, and five extinct genera having been described ;
but these marine forms are not of much importance for our
purpose.

Sirenia (sea-cows).—These are represented by two extinct
genera, Halithertwm and Trachytherium. Several species of the
former have been discovered, but the latter has occurred in
France only, and its affinities are doubtful.

Ungulata.—Horses are represented by Hipparion and Anchi-
therium, the latter occurring in both Upper and Lower Miocene
and Eocene; while Hipparion, which is more nearly allied to
living horses, first appears in the Upper Miocene and continues
in the Pliocene.

Hippotherium, in the Upper Miocene of the Vienna basin,
forms a transition to Paloplotherium, an Eocene genus of Tapi-
ride or Paleotheride. Tapirs, allied to living forms, occur in
both Upper and Lower Miocene. Rhinoceroses are still found
in the Upper Miocene, and here first appear the four-toed horn-
less rhinoceros, Acerothervwm. The Suide (swine) are rather
numerous. Sus (wild boar) continued as far back as the Upper
Miocene; but now there first appear a number of extinct forms
which have been named Hyotherium, Palwocherus, Cheromorus,
all of a small or moderate size ; Hyopotamus, nearly as large as a
tapir; and Anthracotherium, nearly the size of a hippopotamus
and, according to Dr. Leidy, the type of a distinct family.
Listriodon, from the Upper Miocene of the Vienna basin, is
sometimes classed with the tapirs.

We now come to a well-marked new family of Artiodactyle
or even-toed Ungulata, the Anoplotheriide, which consisted of
more slender long-tailed animals, allied to the swine but with
indications of a transition towards the camels. The only genera
that appear in the Miocene formation are, Chalicotheriwm, nearly
as large as a rhinoceros, of which three species have been found
in Germany and France; and Synephodus, known only from its
teeth, which differ somewhat from those of the Anoplotherium
which appears earlier in the Eocene formation. Another extinct
family, Amphimericide or Xiphodontide, is represented by two

120 DISTRIBUTION OF EXTINCT ANIMALS. [PART Il.
genera, Cainotherium and Microtherium, in the Miocene of
France. They were of very small size, and are supposed to be
intermediate between the Suide and Tragulide.

The Camelopardalide, or giraffes, were represented in Europe
in Miocene times by the gigantic Helladotherium, which has
been found in the south of France, and in Hungary, as well as
in Greece. The chevrotains (Tragulide) are represented by
the extinct genus Hyomoschus.

The Cervide do not seem to have appeared in Europe before
the Upper Miocene epoch, when they were represented by
Dorcatherium and Amphimoschus, allied to Moschus, and also by
true Cervus, as well as by small allied forms, Dremotherium,
Amphitragalus (in the Lower Miocene), Micromeryx, Paleomeryz,
and Dicrocerus.

The Bovide, or hollow-horned ruminants, were not well
represented in Central Europe in Miocene times. There were
no sheep, goats, or oxen, and only a few antelopes of the genus
Tragocerus, and one allied to Hippotragus; and these all lived
in the Upper Miocene period, as did the more numerous
forms of Greece.

Proboscidea.—The true elephants do not extend back to the
Miocene period, but they are represented by the Mastodons,
which had less complex teeth. These first appear in the Upper
Miocene of Europe, five species being known from France,
Germany, Switzerland, and Greece. Dinotherium, already
noticed as occurring in Greece, extended also to Germany and
France, where remains of three species have been found.

ftodentia—A_ considerable number of generic forms of this
order have been obtained from the Miocene strata. The prin-
cipal genera are Cricetodon, allied to the hamsters, numerous in
both the Upper and Lower Miocene period of France; Myoxus
(the dormice) in France, and an allied genus, Brachymys, in Ger-
many. The beavers were represented by the still living genus
Castor, and the extinct Stencofiber in France. The squirrels by
the existing Scuirus and Spermophilus; and by extinct forms,
Lithomys and Aulacodon, in Germany, the latter resembling the
African genus Aulacodes. The hares, by Lagomys and an

CHAP. VI.] MAMMALIA OF THE OLD WORLD. 121

extinct form Titanomys. Besides these, remains referred to the
South American genera, Cavia (cavy) and Dasyprocta (agouti),
have been found, the former in the Upper Miocene of Switzer-
land, the latter in the Lower Miocene of Auvergne. Palaeomys,
allied tothe West Indian Capromys, has been found in the same
deposits ; as well as Theridomys, said by Gervais to be allied to
Anomalurus and Echimys, the former now living in W. Africa,
the latter in 8. America.

Edentata——These are only represented by the Macrotherium
and Ancylothervum of the Grecian deposits, the former occurring
also in France and Germany in Upper Miocene strata.

Marsupials—These consist of numerous species related to
the opossums (Didelphys), but separated by Gervais under the
name Peratherium. They occur in both Upper and Lower
Miocene beds.

Upper Miocene Deposits of the Siwalik Hills and other Localities
in N.W. India.

These remarkable fresh-water deposits form a range of hills
at the foot of the Himalayas, a little south of Simla. They
were investigated for many years by Sir P. Cautley and Dr.
Falconer, and add greatly to our knowledge of the early fauna
of the Old World continent.

Primates.—Remains of the genera Semnopithecus and Macacus
were found, with other forms of intermediate character; and
some teeth indicated animals allied to the orang-utan of Borneo,
and of similar size.

Carnivora.—These consisted of species of Felis and Machai-
rodus of large size; Hyena, Canis, Mellivora, and an allied genus
Ursitaxus ; Ursus, in the deposits of the Nerbudda valley (of
Pliocene age) ; Hywnarctos as large as the cave bear ; Amphicyon
of the size of a polar bear (in the deposits of the Indus
valley, west of Cashmere) ; Zwtra, and an extinct allied genus
Enhydrion.

Ungulata.— These are very numerous, and constitute the most
important feature of this ancient fauna. Horses are represented
by a species of Hgwus from the Siwalik Hills and the Irawaddy

Vou. I1L—10

122 DISTRIBUTION OF EXTINCT ANIMALS. [PART II.

deposits in Burmah, and by two others from the Pliocene of the
Nerbudda Valley ; while Hippotheriwm—a slender, antelope-like
animal, found in the Siwalik Hills and in Europe—is supposed
to form a transition from the Equide to the Tapiride. These
latter are found in the Upper Indus deposits, where there is a
species of Tapirus, and one of an extinct genus Antelotherium.
Of Khinoceros, five extinct species have been found—in the
Siwalik Hills, in Perim Island, and one at an elevation of 16,000
feet in the deserts of Thibet. Hippopotamus occurs in the Plio-
cene of the Nerbudda, and is represented in the older Miocene
deposits by Hexaprotodon, of which three species have been
found in various parts of India. Another remarkable genus,
Merycopotamus, connects Hippopotamus with Anthracotherium,
one of the extinct European forms allied to the swine. These
last are represented by several large species of Sws, and by the
extinct European genus Chwrotheriwm.

The extinct Anoplotheride are represented by a species of
the European genus Chalicotheriwm, larger than a horse.

An extinct camel, larger than the living species, was found
in the Siwalik Hills.

Three species of deer (Cervus) have been found in the
Siwaliks, and one in the Nerbudda deposits.

A large and a small species of giraffe (Camelopardalis) were
found in the Siwalik Hills and at Perim Island.

The Bovidee are represented by numerous species of Bos, and
by the extinct genera Hemibos and Amphibos. There are also
three species of antelopes, one of which is allied to the African
Alcephalus.

We now come to an extraordinary group of extinct animals,
probably forming a new family intermediate between the
antelope and the giraffe. The Stvatherium was an enormous
four-horned ruminant, larger than a rhinoceros. It had a short
trunk like a tapir, the lower horns on the forehead were simple,
the upper pair palmated. The Bramatherium, an allied form
from Perim Island, showed somewhat more affinity for the
giraffe.

Proboscidea.—No less than seven species of elephants and four

CHAP. VI. ] MAMMALIA OF THE OLD WORLD. 123

of mastodons ranged over India, their remains being found in all
the deposits from the Siwalik Hills to Burmah. A large Dino-
thertum has also been found at Perim Island.

Reptiles—-Many remains of birds were found, but these have
not been determined. Reptiles were numerous and interesting,
the most remarkable being the huge tortoise, Colossochelys, whose
shell was twelve feet long and head and neck eight feet more.
Other small tortoises of the genera Testudo, Emys, Trionyx
and Hmydida were found, the Hmys being a living species.
There were three extinct and one living species of crocodile,
and one of them was larger than any now living. The only
other reptile of importance was a large lizard of the genus
Varanus.

General Observations on the Miocene faunas of Europe and
Asia.— Comparing the three faunas of approximately the same
period, and allowing for the necessarily imperfect record of
each, we find a wonderful similarity of general type over the
enormous area between France on the west and the Irawaddy
river in Burmah on the east. We may even extend our com-
parison to Northern China, where remains of Hyena, Tapir,
Rhinoceros, Chalicotherium, and Elephas, have been recently
found, closely resembling those from the Miocene or Pliocene
deposits of Europe or India, and showing that the Palearctic
region had then the same great extent from west to east
that it has now. Of about forty genera comprised in the
Indian Miocene fauna, no less than twenty-seven inhabited
Central and Western Europe during the same epoch. The Indian
Miocene fossils are much what we should expect as the fore-
runners of the existing fauna, the giraffes and hippopotami
being the only additions from the present Ethiopian fauna.
The numerous forms of the restricted bovine type, show that
these probably originated in India; while the monkeys appear
to be altogether of Oriental types.

In Europe, however, we meet with a totally different assem-
blage of animals from those that form the existing fauna. We
find apes and monkeys, many large Felide, numerous civets

124 DISTRIBUTION OF EXTINCT ANIMALS. [PART II.

and hyenas, tapirs, rhinoceros, hippopotamus, elephants, giraffes,
and antelopes, such as now characterise the tropics of Africa
and Asia. Along with these we meet with less familiar types,
showing relations with the Centetide of Madagascar, the
Tupaiide of the Malay Islands, the Capromys, of the West Indies,
and the Echimys of South America. And besides all these
living types we have a host of extinct forms,—ten or twelve
genera allied to swine; nine genera of tapir-like animals ; four
of horses; nine of wolves; with many distinct forms of the
long-extinct families of Anoplotheride, Xiphodontide, and the
edentate Macrotheride. It is almost certain that during the
Miocene period Europe was not only far richer than it is now
in the higher forms of life, but not improbably richer than any
part of the globe now is, not excepting tropical Africa and
tropical Asia.

EocENE PERIOD.

The deposits of Eocene age are less numerous, and spread
over a far more limited area, than those of the Miocene period,
and only restricted portions of them furnish any remains of
land animals. Our knowledge of the Eocene mammalian fauna
is therefore very imperfect and will not occupy us long, as
most of the new types it furnishes are of more interest to the
zoologist than to the student of distribution. Some of the
Eocene mammalia of Europe are, however, of interest in com-
parison with those of North America of the same age; while
others show that ancestral types of groups now confined to
Australia or to South America, then inhabited Europe.

Primates——The only undoubted Eocene examples of this
order, are the Cwnopithecus lemuroides from the Jura, which has
points of resemblance to the South American marmosets and
howlers, and also to the Lemuride ; and a cranium recently dis-
covered in the Department of Lot (S.W. France), undoubtedly
belonging to the Lemuridz, and which most resembles that of
the West African “ Potto” (Perodicticus). This discovery has
led to another, for if is now believed that remains formerly

CHAP. VI.] MAMMALIA OF THE OLD WORLD. 195

referred to the Anoplotheride (Adapis and Aphelotherium
from the Upper Eocene of Paris) were also Lemurs. Some
remains from the Lower Eocene of Suffolk were at first supposed
to be allied to Macacus, but were subsequently referred to the
Ungulate, Hyracotherium. There is still, however, some doubt
as to its true affinities.

Chiroptera—In the Upper Eocene of Paris remains of bats
have been found, so closely resembling living forms as to be
referred to the genus Vespertzlio.

Carnivora.—The only feline remains, are those of Hyanodon
in the Upper Eocene of Hampshire, and Péerodon, an allied form
from beds of the same age in France; with lurogale, found
in the South of France in deposits of phosphate of lime of
uncertain age, but probably belonging to this period. Viverride
(civets) are represented by two genera, Tylodon, the size of a
glutton from the Upper Eocene, and Palawonyctis, allied to
Viverra, from the Middle Eocene of France. The Canide
(wolves and foxes) appear to have been the most ancient ot
the existing types of Carnivora, five genera being represented
by Eocene remains. Of these, Galethylax and Cyotherium were
small, and with the existing genus Canis are found in the Upper
Eocene of France. Arctocyon, about the size of a wolf, is
a very ancient and generalised form of carnivore which can
not be placed in any existing family. It is found in the Lowe
Eocene of France, and is thus the oldest known member of
the Carnivora.

Ungulata.—These are more numerous. Equide (horses) are
represented by the Miocene Anchitherium in the Lower, and by a
more ancient form, Anchilophus, in the Middle Eocene of France.
Tapiride and Paleotheridz were very numerous. Palaotherium
and the allied genus Paloplotherium, were abundant in France and
England in Upper Eocene times. They somewhat resembled
the tapir, with affinities for the horse and rhinoceros. A new
genus, Cadurcotherium, allied to the rhinoceros and equally
large, has been found in the same deposits of phosphate of lime
as the lemur and 4lurogale. In the Middle Eocene of both
England and France are found Lophiodon allied to the tapir,

126 DISTRIBUTION OF EXTINCT ANIMALS. [PART II.

but in some of the species reaching a larger size; Propalcothe-
rium and Pachynolophus of smaller size and having affinities
for the other genera named; and Plagiolophus, a small, slender
animal which Professor Huxley thinks may have been a direct
ancestor of the horse. In the Lower Eocene we meet with
Coryphodon, much larger than the tapir, and armed with large
canine teeth ; Pliolophus, a generalised type, allied to the tapir
and horse; and Hyracotherium, a small animal from the Lower
Eocene of England, remotely allied to the tapir.

Among the Artiodactyla, or even-toed ungulates, the swine
are represented by several extinct genera, of moderate or small
size—Acotherium, Cheropotamus, Cebocharus and Dichobune, all
from the Upper and the last also from the Middle Eocene of
France ; but Hutelodon, from the phosphate of line deposits is
large. The Dichobune was the most generalised type, pre-
senting the characters of many of the other genera combined,
and was believed by Dr. Falconer to approach the musk-deer.
The Cainotherium of the Miocene also occurs here, and an allied
genus Plesiomeryx from the same deposits as Huteledon.

The Eocene Anoplotheridz were numerous. The Anoplothe-
rium was a two-toed, long-tailed Pachyderm, ranging from the
size of a hog to that of an ass; the allied Hurytheriwm was
four-toed; and there are one or two others of doubtful affinity.
All are from the Upper Eocene of France and England. .

Rodentia.—Remains referred to the genera Myoxus (dormouse)
and Sciwrus (squirrel) have been found in the Upper Eocene
of France; as well as Plesiarctomys, ani extinct genus between
the marmots and squirrels. The Miocene Theridomys is also
found here.

Marsupials.—The Didelphys (opossum) of Cuvier, now referred
to an extinct genus Peratheriwm, is found in the Upper Eocene
of France and England.

General Considerations on the Extinct Mammalian Fauna of
Europe.—It is a curious fact that no family, and hardly a genus,
of European mammalia occurs in the Pliocene deposits, without
extending back also into those of Miocene age. There are, how-

CHAP. VI. ] MAMMALIA OF THE OLD WORLD. 127

ever, a few groups which seem to be late developments or recent
importations into the Palearctic region, as they occur only in
Post-Pliocene deposits. The most important of these are the
badger, glutton, elk, reindeer, chamois, goat, and sheep, which
only occur in caves and other deposits of Post-Pliocene age.
Camels only occur in the Post-Plocene of Siberia (Merycotherium),
although a true Camelus of large size appears to have inhabited
some part of Central Asia in the Upper Miocene period, being
found in the Siwalik beds. The only exclusively Pliocene
genera in Europe are Ursus, Equus, Hippopotamus, Bos, Elephas,
Arvicola, Trogontherium, Arctomys, Hystrix and Lepus; but of
these Equus, Hippopotamus, Bos, and Hlephas are found in the
Miocene deposits of India. Owing, no doubt, in part to the
superior productiveness of the various Miocene beds, large
numbers of groups appear to have their origin or earliest appear-
ance here. Such are Insectivora, Felide, Hyznide, Mustelide,
Ursus, Equide, Tapirws, Rhinocerotide, Hippopotamide, An-
thracotheridé (extinct), Sus, Camelopardide, Tragulide, Cervide,
Bovide, Elephantide, and Edentata.

Groups which go back to the Eocene period, are, Primates
allied to South American monkeys, as well as some of the
Lemuride ; bats of the living genus Vespertilio ; Hyzenodon-
tide, an ancestral form of Carnivore; Viverride ; Canide (to the
Upper Eocene), and the ancestral Arctocyonide to the Lower
Eocene; Hycenarctos, an ancestral type of bears and hyzenas;
Anchitheride, ancestral horses, to the Middle Eocene; Palo-
theridz, comprising numerous generalised forms, ancestors of the
rhinoceros, horse, and tapir; Suidee, with numerous generalised
forms, to the Middle Eocene ; Anoplotheride and Xiphodontide,
ancestral families of even-toed Ungulates, connecting the rumi-
nants with the swine; and lastly, several groups of Rodents,
and a Marsupial, in the Upper Eocene. We thus find all
the great types of Mammalia well developed in the earliest
portion of the tertiary period; and the occurrence of Quadru-
mana, of the highly specialized bats (Vespertilio), of various
forms of Carnivora, and of Ungulates, clearly differentiated into
the odd and even-toed series, associated with such lower forms as

128 DISTRIBUTION OF EXTINCT ANIMALS. [PART II

Lemurs and Marsupials—proves, that we have here hardly made
an approach towards the epoch when the mammalian type itself
began to diverge into its various modifications. Some of the
Carnivora and Ungulates do, indeed, exhibit a less specialised
structure than later forms; yet so far back as the Upper
Miocene the most specialised of all carnivora, the great sabre-
toothed Machairodus, makes its appearance.

The Miocene is, for our special study, the most valuable and
instructive of the Tertiary periods, both on account of its
superior richness, and because we here meet with many types
now confined to separate regions. Such facts as the occurrence
in Europe during this period of hippopotami, tapirs, giraffes,
Tragulide, Edentata, and Marsupials—will assist us in solving
many of the problems we shall meet with in reviewing the
actual distribution of living forms of those groups. Still more
light will, however, be thrown on the subject by the fossil forms
of the American continent, which we will now proceed to
examine.

CHAPTER VII.
EXTINCT MAMMALIA OF THE NEW WORLD.

THE discoveries of very rich deposits of mammalian remains in
various parts of the United States have thrown great light on
the relations of the faunas of very distant regions. North
America now makes a near approach to Europe in the number
and variety of its extinct mammalia, and in no part of the world
have such perfect specimens been discovered. In what are called
the “Mauvaises terres” of Nebraska (the dried-up mud of an
ancient lake), thousands of entire crania and some almost entire
skeletons of ancient animals have been found, their teeth abso-
lutely perfect, and altogether more resembling the preparations
of the anatomist, than time-worn fossils such as we are accus-
tomed to see in the museums of Europe. Other deposits have
been discovered in Oregon, California, Virginia, South Carolina,
Texas, and Utah, ranging over all the Tertiary epochs, from
Post-Pliocene to Eocene, and furnishing a remarkable picture
of the numerous strange mammalia which inhabited the ancient
North American continent.

NortH AMERICA—PoOST-PLIOCENE PERIOD.

Insectivora.—The only indications of this order yet discovered,
consists of a single tooth of some insectivorous animal found
in Hlinois, but which cannot be referred to any known group.

Carnivora.—These are fairly represented. ‘Two species of
Felis as large as a lion; the equally large extinct T'rueczfelis,
found only in Texas ; four species of Canis, some of them larger

130 DISTRIBUTION OF EXTINCT ANIMALS. [PART II.

than wolves ; two species of Galera, a genus now confined to the
Neotropical region; two bears, and an extinct genus, Arctodus ;
an extinct species of racoon (Procyon), and an allied extinct
genus, Myxophagus—show, that at a very recent period North
America was better supplhed with Carnivora than it is now.
Remains of the walrus (Z'richechus) have also been found as far
south as Virginia.

Cetacea—Three species of dolphins belonging to existing
genera, have been found in the Eastern States ; and two species
of Manatus, or sea-cow, in Florida and South Carolina.

Ungulata —Six extinct horses (Zguus), and one Hipparion ;
the living South American tapir, and a larger extinct species; a
Dicotyles, or peccary, and an allied genus, Platygonus ; a species
of the South American llamas (Awchenia), and one of a kind of
camel, Procamelus ; two extinct bisons ; a sheep, and two musk-
sheep (Ovibos) ; with three living and one extinct deer (Cervus),
show an important increase in its Herbivora.

Proboscidea.—T wo elephants and two mastodons, added to this
remarkable assemblage of large vegetable-feeding quadrupeds.

fiodentia.—These consist mainly of genera and species still
living in North America; the only important exceptions being a
species of the South American capybara (Hydrocherus) in South
Carolina; and Praotherium, an extinct form of hare, found in a
bone cave in Pennsylvania.

Hdentata.—Here we meet with a wonderful assemblage, of six
species belonging to four extinct genera, mostly of gigantic size.
A species of Megatherium, three of Megalonyx, and one of
Mylodon—huge terrestrial sloths as large as the rhinoceros
or even as the largest elephants—ranged over the Southern
States to Pennsylvania, the latter (Mylodon) going as far as the
great lakes and Oregon. Another form, EHvreptodon, has been
found in the Mississippi Valley.

Marsupialia.—tThe living American genus of opossums, Didel-
phys, has been found in deposits of this age in South Carolina.

Remarks on the Post-Pliocene fauna of North America.—The
assemblage of animals proved, by these remains, to have

CHAP, VII. ] MAMMALIA OF THE NEW WORLD. 131

inhabited North America at a comparatively recent epoch, is
most remarkable. In Europe, we found a striking change
in the fauna at the same period; but that consisted almost
wholly in the presence of animals now inhabiting countries
immediately to the north or south. Here we have the appear-
ance .of two new assemblages of animals, the one now con-
fined to the Old World—horses, camels, and elephants; the
other exclusively of South American type—llamas, tapirs,
capybaras, Galera, and gigantic Edentata. The age of the
various deposits in which these remains are found is somewhat
uncertain, and probably extends over a considerable period of
time, inclusive of the Glacial epoch, and perhaps both anterior
and subsequent to it. We have here, as in Europe, the presence
and apparent co-existence in the same area, of Arctic and
Southern forms—the walrus and the manatee—the musk-
sheep and the gigantic sloths. Unfortunately, as we shall see,
the immediately preceding Pliocene deposits of North America
are rather poor in organic remains; yet it can hardly be owing
to the imperfection of the record of this period, that not one of
the South American types above numerated occurs there, while
a considerable number of Old World forms are represented.
Neither in the preceding wonderfully rich Miocene or Eocene
periods, does any one of these forms ovcur ; or, with the exception
of Morotherium, from Pliocene deposits west of the Rocky
Mountains, any apparent ancestor of them! We have here
unmistakable evidence of an extensive immigration from South
into North America, not very long before the beginning of the
Glacial epoch. It was an immigration of types altogether new
to the country, which spread over all the southern and central
portions of it, and established themselves sufficiently to leave
abundance of remains in the few detached localities where they
have been discovered. How such large yet defenceless animals
as tapirs and great terrestrial sloths, could have made their way
into a country abounding in large felines equal in size and
destructiveness to the lion and the tiger, with numerous wolves
and bears of the largest size, is a great mystery. But it is
nevertheless certain that they did so ; and the fact that no such

132 DISTRIBUTION OF EXTINCT ANIMALS. [PART II.

migration had occurred for countless preceding ages, proves that
some great barrier to the entrance of terrestrial mammalia
which had previously existed, must for a time have been re-
moved. We must defer further discussion of this subject till
we have examined the relations of the existing faunas of North
and South America.

TERTIARY PERIOD.

When we get to remains of the Tertiary age, especially those
of the Miocene and Eocene epochs, we meet with so many
interesting and connected types, and such curious relations with
living forms in Europe, that it will be clearer to trace the
history of each order and family throughout the Tertiary period,
instead of considering each of the subdivisions of that period
separately,

It will be well however first to note the few American Post-
Pliocene or living genera that are found in the Pliocene beds.
These consist of several species of Canis, from the size of a fox
to that of a large wolf; a Felis as large as a tiger; an Otter
(Lutra); several species of Hipparion ; a peccary (Dicotyles) ;
a deer (Cervus); several species of Procamelus ; a mastodon ;
an elephant ; and a beaver (Castor). It thus appears that out
of nearly forty genera found in the Post-Pliocene deposits, only
ten are found in the preceding Pliocene period. About twelve
additional genera, however, appear there, as we shall see in
going over the various orders.

Primates—Among the vast number of extinct mammalia
discovered in the Tertiary deposits of North America, no
example of this order had been recognized up to 1872, when
the discovery of more perfect remains showed, that a number
of small animals of obscure affinities from the Lower Eocene
of Wyoming, were really allied to the lemurs and perhaps
also to the marmosets, the lowest form of American monkeys,
but having a larger number of teeth than either. A number of
other remains of small animals from the same formation, pre-
viously supposed to be allied to the Ungulata, are now shown to

CHAP, VII. ] MAMMALIA OF THE NEW WORLD 133

belong to the Primates; so that no less than twelve genera of these
animals are recognized by Mr. Marsh, who classes them in two
families—Limnotheridz, comprising the genera Limnotherium,
(which had larger canine teeth), Thinolestes, Telmatolestes, Mesa-
codon, Bathrodon, and Antiacodon of Marsh, with Notharctos,
Hipposyus, Microsyops, and Paleacodon previously described by
Leidy ;—and Lemuravide, consisting of the genera Lemuravus
(Marsh) and Hyopsodus (Leidy). The animals of the latter
family were most allied to existing lemurs, but were a more
generalized form, Lemuravus having forty-four teeth, the greatest
number known in the order. These numerous forms ranged from
the size of a small squirrel to that of a racoon. It is especially
interesting to find these peculiar lemuroid forms in America,
just when a lemur has been discovered of about the same age
in Europe; and as the American forms are said to show an
affinity with the South American marmosets, while the European
animal is most allied to a West African group, we have
evidently not yet got back far enough to find the primeval
or ancestral type from which all the Primates sprang.

About the same time, in the succeeding Miocene formation,
true monkeys were discovered. Mr. Marsh describes Laopithe-
cus as an animal nearly the size of the largest South American
monkeys, and allied both to the Cebide and the Eocene Limno-
theride. Mr. Cope has described Menotherium from the Mio-
cene of Colorado, as a lemuroid animal, the size of a cat, and
perhaps allied to Limnothertwm. More Miocene remains will,
no doubt, be discovered, by which we shall be enabled to trace
the origin of some of the existing forms of South American
monkeys; and perhaps help to decide the question (now in dis-
pute among anatomists) whether the lemurs are really Primates,
or form an altogether distinct and isolated order of mammalia.

Insectivora.—This order is represented by comparatively few
forms in the tertiary beds, and these are all very different from
existing types. In the Upper Miocene of Dakota are found
remains indicating two extinct genera, Lepictis and Ictops. In
the Miocene of Colorado, Professor Cope has recently discovered
four new genera, Jsacis ; allied to the preceding, but as largeas a

134 DISTRIBUTION OF EXTINCT ANIMALS. [PART II.

Mephitis or skunk ; Herpetotherium, near the moles ; Eimbasis,
more allied to the shrews ; and Dommina, of uncertain affinities.
Two others have been found in the Eocene of Wyoming ; Amomys;
having some resemblance to hedgehogs and to the Eastern Tupaia;
and Washakius, of doubtful affinities.

Far back in the Triassic coal of North Carolina has been found
the jaw of a small mammal (Dromothertwm), the teeth of which
somewhat resemble those of the Australian Myrmecobius, and
may belong either to the Insectivora or Marsupials ; if indeed, at
that early period these orders were differentiated.

Carnivora.—The most ancient forms of this order are some
remains found in the Middle Eocene of Wyoming, and others
recently described by Professor Cope (1875) from the Eocene of
New Mexico, of perhaps earlier date. The former consist of three
genera, Patriofelis, Vintacyon, and Sinopa,—animals of large size
but which cannot be classed in any existing family; and two
others, Mesonyx and Synoplotherium, believed by Mr. Cope to be
allied to Hyenodon. The latter consist of four genera,— Oxyena,
consisting of several species, some as large as a jaguar, was
allied to Hyenodon and Pterodon ; Pachyena, allied to the last ;
Prototomus, allied to Amphicyon and the Viverride; and Lim-
nocyon, a civet-like carnivore with resemblances to the Canide.

In the Miocene formations we find the Feline type well deve-
loped. The wonderful Machairodus, which in Europe lived down
to Post-Pliocene times, is found in the Upper Miocene of Dakota;
and perfect crania have been discovered, showing that the chin
was lengthened downwards to receive and protect the enormous
canines, Dznyctis was allied both to Machairodus and to the
weasels. Three new genera have been lately described by Professor
Cope from the Miocene of Colorado— Bunelurus, with characters
of both cats and weasels ; Daptophilus, allied to Dinyctis ; and
Hoplophoneus, more allied to Machairodus. The Canide are re-
presented by Amphicyon, which occurs in deposits of the same
age in Europe; and by Canis, four species of which genus are
recorded by Professor Cope from the Miocene of Colorado, and it
also occurs in the Pliocene. The Hyanodon is represented by
three species in the Miocene of Dakota and Colorado. It occurs

CHAP. VII. ] MAMMALIA OF THE NEW WORLD. 135

also in the European Miocene and Upper Eocene formations, and
constitutes a distinct family Hyenodontide, allied, according to
Dr. Leidy, to wolves, cats, hyzenas and weasels. The Urside
are represented by only one species of an extinct genus, Leptar-
chus, from the Pliocene of Nebraska. From the Pliocene of
Colorado, Prof. Cope has recently described Yomarctos, as a
“short-faced type of dog;’ as well as species of Cans and
Martes.

Ungulata—The animals belonging to this order being usually
of large size and accustomed to feed and travel in herds, are
liable to wholesale destruction by floods, bogs, precipices, drought
or hunger. It is for these reasons, probably, that their remains
are almost always more numerous than those of other orders of
mammalia. In America they are especially abundant; and the
number of new and intermediate types about whose position
there is much difference of opinion among Paleontologists, ren-
ders it very difficult to give a connected summary of them with
any approach to systematic accuracy.

Beginning with the Perissodactyla, or odd-toed ungulates, we
find the Equine animals remarkably numerous and interesting.
The true horses of the genus Zqguus, so abundant in the Post-
Pliocene formations, are represented in the Pliocene by several
ancestral forms. The most nearly allied to Lguus is Pliohippus,
consisting of animals about the size of an ass, with the lateral
toes not externally developed, but with some differences of denti-
tion. Next come Protohippus and Hipparion, in which the
lateral toes are developed but are small and functionless. Then
we have theallied genera, Anchippus, Merychippus, and Hyohip-
pus, related to the European Hippotherium, which were all still
smaller animals, Protohippus being only 24 feet high. In the
older deposits we come to a series of forms, still unmistakably
equine, but with three or more toes used for locomotion and with
numerous differentiations in form, proportions, and dentition.
These constitute the family Anchitheride. In the Miocene we
have the genera Anchitheriwm (found also in the European
Miocene), Miohippus and Mesohippus, all with three toes on each
foot, and about the size of a sheep orlarge goat. Inthe Eocene of

136 DISTRIBUTION OF EXTINCT ANIMALS. [Parr It.

Utah and Wyoming, we get a step further back, several species
having been discovered about the size of a fox with four toes in
front and three behind. These form the genus Orohippus, and
are the oldest ancestral horse known. Prof. Marsh points out the
remarkably perfect series of forms in America, which, beginning
with this minute ancient type, is gradually modified by gaining
increased size, increased speed by concentration of the limb-bones,
elongation of the head and neck, the canine teeth decreased in
size, the molars becoming longer and being coated with cement—
till we at last come to animals hardly distinguishable, specifically,
from the living horse.

Allied to these, area series of forms showing a transition to the
tapirs, and to the Paleotheriwm of the European Eocene. In the
Pliocene we have Parahippus ; in the Miocene Lophiodon, found
in the same formation and in the Eocene of Europe, and allied
to the tapir; and in the Eocene, Palwosyops, as large as a rhino-
ceros, which had large canines and was allied to the tapir and
Paleotherium ; Limnohyus, forming the type of a family Limno-
hyide, which included the last genus and some others mentioned
further on; and Hyrachyus, allied to Lophiodon, and to Hyracodon
an extinct form of rhinoceros. Besides these we have Lophiothe-
rium (also from the Eocene of Europe); Diplacodon allied to
Limnohyus, but with affinities to modern Perissodactyla and nearly
as large as a rhinoceros ; and Colonoceras, also belonging to the
Limnohyide, an animal which was the size of a sheep, and had
divergent protuberances or horns on its nose. A remarkable
genus, Lathmodon, lately described by Professor Cope, and of
which five species have been found in the Eocene of New Mexico
and Wyoming, is believed to form the type of a new family, —
having some affinity to Palwosyops and to the extinct Bronto-
theridze. It had large canine tusks but no horns.

The Rhinocerotidee are represented in America by the genus
Rhinoceros in the Pliocene and Miocene, and by Aceratherium
and Hyracodon in the Miocene. Both the latter were hornless,
and Hyracodon was allied to the Eocene Hyrachyus, one of the
Lophiodontide. In the Eocene and Miocene deposits of Utah,
and Oregon, several remarkable extinct rhinoceroses have been

CHAP. VII. ] MAMMALIA OF THE NEW WORLD. 137

recently discovered, forming the genus Diceratheriwm. These had
a pair of nasal horns placed side by side on the snout, not behind
each other as in existing two-horned rhinoceroses, the rest of
their skeleton resembling the hornless Aceratherium. They were
of rather small size.

Next to these extinct rhinoceroses come the Brontotheride,
an extraordinary family of large mammala, some of which
exceeded in bulk the largest living rhinoceros. They had four
toes to the front and three to the hind feet, with a pair of large
divergent horns on the front of the head, in both sexes. Professor
Marsh and Dr. Leidy have described four genera, Brontotheriwm,
Titanotherium, Megacerops, and Anisacodon, distinguished by
peculiarities of dentition. Though most nearly allied to the
rhinoceroses, they show some affinity for the gigantic Dino-
cerata of the Eocene to be noticed further on. Professor Cope
has since described another genus, Symborodon, from the Mio-
cene of Colorado, with no less than seven species, one nearly
the size of an elephant. He thinks they had a short tapir-hke
proboscis. The species differ greatly in the form of the cranium
and development of the horn-bearing processes.

We commence the Artiodactyla, or even-toed Ungulates, with
the hog tribe. These are represented by species of peccaries,
(Dicotyles) from the Pliocene of Nebraska and Oregon ; and by
an allied form 7Thinohyus, very like Dicotyles, but having an
additional premolar tooth and a much smaller brain-cavity.
From the Miocene are three allied genera, Manohyus, Lepto-
cherus, and Percherus. Professor Cope, however, thinks Lepto-
‘cherus may be Lemuroid, and allied to Menotherium. The
Anthracotherid, a family which connects the Hippopotamide
and Ruminants, and which occurs in the Miocene of Europe
and India, are represented in America by the genus Hyopotamus
from the Miocene of Dakota, and Elotheriwm from the Miocene of
Oregon and the Eocene of Wyoming; the latter genus being some-
times classed with the preceding family, and lately placed by
Professor Marsh, in the new order, Tillodontia. Professor Cope
has since described three other genera from the Eocene of New

Vom Et

138 DISTRIBUTION OF EXTINCT ANIMALS. [PART II.

Mexico: Meniscotherium, having resemblances to Palwosyops,
Hyopotamus, and the Limnotheride ; Phenacodus, the size of a
hog, of doubtful position, but perhaps near Hlotheriwm ; and
Achenodon, as large as a cow, but more hog-lke than the pre-
ceding. Another new genus from the Miocene of Colorado—
Pelonax—is said by Professor Cope to come between Hlotherium
and Hippopotamus.

The Camelide are very abundant, and form one of the most
striking features of the ancient fauna of America. Procamelus,
Homocamelus, and Megalomeryx, are extinct genera found in the
Pliocene formation ; the first very closely allied to the Old
World camel, the last smaller and more sheep-like. In the
Miocene two other genera occur, Pebrotherium and Protomeryzx,
the former allied to both the camel and the Hama.

Deer are represented by a single species of Cervus in the
Pliocene, while two extinct genera, Leptomeryx and Merycodus,
are found in the Miocene deposits, the latter indicating a tran-
sition between camels and deer. Two other genera, Hypisodus
and Hypertragulus, of very small size, are said by Professor
Cope to be allied te the Tragulide and to Leptomeryz.

The Bovide, or hollow-horned ruminants, are only represented
in the Newer Pliocene by a single species of an extinct genus,
Casoryx, said to be intermediate between antelopes and deer.

We now come to an exclusively American family, the Oreo-
dontidce, which consisted of small animals termed by Dr. Leidy,
“ruminating hogs,” and which had some general structural
resemblances to deer and camels. They abounded in North
America during the Pliocene, and especially during the Miocene
epoch, no less than six genera and twenty species having been
discovered. Merychus contains the Pliocene forms; while
Oreodon, Eporeodon, Merychocherus, Leptauchenia, and Agrio-
cherus are Miocene. The last genus extends back into the
Eocene period, and shows affinity to the European Anoplothe-
ridee of the same epoch.

Proboscidea.—The FElephantide are only represented in
America by one species of Mastodon and one of Hlephas, in
the Newer Pliocene deposits. In the Older Pliocene, Miocene,

CHAP. Vil. } MAMMALIA OF THE NEW WORLD. , 133

and Upper Eocene, no remains of this order have been found ;
and in 1869, Dr. Leidy remarked on the small average size of
the extinct North American mammalia, which were almost all
smaller than their living analogues. Since then, however, won-
derful discoveries have been made in deposits of Middle Eocene
age in Wyoming and Colorado, of a group of huge animals not
only rivalling the elephants in size, but of so remarkable and
peculiar a structure as to require the formation of a new order of
mammals—Dinocerata—for their reception.

This order consists of animals with generalised Ungulate and
Proboscidean affinities. The lower jaw resembles that of the
hippopotamus ; they had five toes on the anterior feet and four on
the posterior ; three pairs of horns, the first pair on the top of the
head, large and perhaps palmated, the second pair above the eyes,
while the third and smallest stood out sideways on the snout.
They had enormous upper canines, of which the roots entered
the middle horn cores, no upper incisors, and small molars.
Professor Marsh believes that they had no trunk. The remains
discovered indicate four genera, Dinoceras (3 sp.), Tinoceras
(2 sp.), Uintatherium (1 sp.), and Hobasileus (2 sp.). Many other
names have been given to fragments of these animals, and even
those here given may not be all distinct.

Another new order, Tillodontia, recently established by Pro-
fessor Marsh, is perhaps yet more remarkable in a zoological
point of view, since it combines the characters of Carnivora,
Ungulata, and Rodents. These animals have been formed into
two families, Tillotheride and Stylinodontide; and three genera,
Tillotherium, Anchippodus, and Stylinodontia. All are from the
Eocene of Wyoming and New Jersey. Perhaps to these must be
added Elotherium from the Miocene of Dakota, the other forms
being all Eocene. They were mostly animals of small size,
between that of the capybara and tapir. The skull resembled in
form that of a bear; the molar teeth were of Ungulate type, and
the incisors like those of a Rodent; but the skeleton was more
that of the Urside, the feet being plantigrade. Professor Cope
has since described three new genera from the Eocene of
New Mexico, Ectoganus, Calamodon, and Esthonyr, comprising

140 DISTRIBUTION OF EXTINCT ANIMALS. [PART II.

seven species allied to Tullotheriwm and Anchippodus, and having
also relations, as Professor Cope believes, with the South American
Toxodontide:

Rodentia»—This order is represented in the Pliocene by a
beaver, a porcupine, and an American mouse (fesperomys), all
extinct species of living genera, the Hystriz being an Old World
type; and Professor Cope has recently described Panolax, a
new genus of hares from the Pliocene of New Mexico. The
Miocene deposits have furnished an extinct genus allied to the
hares—Paleolagus; one of the squirrel family—Jschyromys ;
a small extinct form of beaver—Palcocastor ; and an extinct
mouse—Humys. The Eocene strata of Wyoming have lately
furnished two extinct forms of squirrel, Paramys and Sciwravus ;
and another of the Muridz (or mouse family), J/ysops.

Cetacea.—Numerous remains of dolphins and whales, be-
longing to no less than twelve genera, mostly extinct, have been
found in the Miocene deposits of the Atlantic and Gulf States,
from New Jersey to South Carolina and Louisiana; while seven
genera of the extinct family, Zeuglodontide, have been found in
Miocene and Eocene beds of the same districts. ‘Some remains -
associated with these are doubtfully referred to the Seal family
(Phocidz) among the Carnivora.

Edentata.—Till quite recently no remains of this order have
occurred in any North American deposits below the Post-Plio-
cene; but in 1874 Prof. Marsh described some remains allied to
Megalonyx and Mylodon, from the Pliocene beds of California
and Idaho, and forming a new genus, Morotherium. As these
remains have only occurred to the west of the Rocky Mountains,
and in Pliocene deposits whose exact age is not ascertained, they
hardly affect the remarkable absence of this group from the
whole of the exceedingly rich Tertiary deposits in all other parts
of North America.

General Relations of the extinct Tertiary Mammalia of North
America and Europe-—Having now given a sketch of the ex-
tinct Mammalia which inhabited Europe and North America
during the Tertiary period, we are enabled by comparing them,

CHAP. VII. ] MAMMALIA OF THE NEW WORLD. 141

to ascertain their relations to each other, and to see how far
they elucidate the problem of the birth-place and subsequent
migrations of the several families and genera. We have already
pointed out the remarkable features of the Quaternary (or Post-
Pliocene) fauna of North America, and now proceed to discuss
that of the various Tertiary periods, which is closely connected
with the extinct fauna of Europe.

The Tertiary Mammalia of North America at present de-
scribed belong to from eighty to one hundred genera, while
those of Europe are nearly double that number; yet only
eighteen genera are common to the two faunas, and of these
eight are living and belong chiefly to the Pliocene period.
Taking first, the genera which in America do not go back beyond
the Pliocene period (ten in number), we find that eight of them
in Europe go back to the Upper Miocene. These are Felis,
Pseudelurus, Hipparion, Cervus, Mastodon, Elephas (in India),
Castor and Hystrix; while another, Canis, goes back to the
Upper Eocene and the tenth, Zquus, confined to the newer
Pliocene or perhaps to the Post-Pliocene in America, extends
back to the older Pliocene in Europe. Of the seven European
genera which are confined to the Miocene period in America,
three, Hywnodon, Anchitherium, and Lophiodon go back to the
Eocene in Europe; three others, Machairodus, Rhinoceros, and
Acevatherium, are also of Miocene age in Europe; Amphicyon goes
back to the Lower Miocene of Europe. Lophiotherium belongs
to the Eocene of both countries.

If we turn now to families instead of genera, we find that the
same general rule prevails. Mustelidz (weasels), Urside (bears),
true Equide (horses), and Bovide (oxen &c.), go no further back
in America than the Pliocene, while they all go back to the
Miocene in Europe. Suidz (swine) and Anoplotheride (extinct)
are found in the American Miocene and in the European Eocene.
Anchitheride (extinct) reach the Upper Eocene in America,
while in Europe they range through Upper, Middle, and Lower
Eocene. Cervide (deer) alone are Miocene in both countries.
There remain two families in which America has the _pre-
eminence. Camelidz (camels) were wonderfully developed in

142 DISTRIBUTION OF EXTINCT ANIMALS. [PART II.

the American Pliocene and Miocene periods, abounding in
genera and species ; whereas in Europe the group only exists in
the Post-Pliocene or Lower Pliocene, with one Upper Miocene
species of Camelus in N. India. The Anthracotheridz (extinct),
found only in the Upper Miocene of France and India, reach
even the Lower Eocene in America.

These facts may be due, in part, toa want of strict co-ordina-
tion between the Tertiary deposits of Europe and North America,
—in part to the imperfection of the record in the latter country.
Yet it does not seem probable that they are altogether due to
these causes, because the Miocene beds, which are by far the
best known in America as in Europe, exhibit deficiencies of the
same kind as the less known Eocene deposits. The fossil fauna
of both countries is so rich, that we can hardly impute great and
well marked differences to imperfect knowledge; yet we find
such important families as the Civets, Hyzenas, Giraffes, and
Hippopotami absent from America, with the Weasels, and Ante-
lopes almost so ; while America possesses almost all the Camelide,
two peculiar orders, Dinocerata and Tillodontia, and four remark-
ably peculiar families, Limnotheride, Lemuravidee, Oreodontidee
and Brontotheride. If then the facts at present known represent
approximately the real time-relations of the groups in question
on the two continents, they render it probable that weasels, bears,
true horses, swine, oxen, sheep and antelopes, originated on the
Old World continent, and were transmitted to America during
some part of the Miocene period; while camels originated in the
New World, and somewhere about the same time passed over to
Europe. Of the extinct families common to the two hemi-
spheres, the Anthracotheride alone seem to have had an
American origin. Of the genera common to the two countries,
almost all seem to have bad a European origin, the only genera
of equal date being the two rhinoceroses and three Anchi-
theride ; but if the Brontotheride are allied to the Rhinocerotide,
these latter may have originated in America, although now an
exclusively Old World type. These conclusions are not im-
probable when we consider the much greater size of the Old
World continents, extending far into the tropics and probably

CHAP. VII. ] MAMMALIA OF THE NEW WORLD. 143

always more or less united to the tropical areas; while the
evidence of the extinct mammalia themselves shows, that South
America has been for the most part isolated from the northern
continent, and did not take part in the development of its
characteristic Tertiary fauna.

Before speculating further on this subject, it will be well to
lay before our readers a summary of South American palxon-
tology, after which we shall be in a better position to draw
correct inferences from the whole body of the evidence.

SoutH AMERICA.

Unfortunately, our knowledge of the interesting fossil fauna
of this continent, is almost wholly confined to the Post-Phocene
and Pliocene periods. A few remains have been discovered in
deposits believed to be of Eocene age, but nothing whatever
representing the vast intervening period, so rich in peculiar
forms of animal life both in North America and Europe.

Fauna of the Brazilian caves—What we know of the Post-
Pliocene period is chiefly due to the long-continued researches
of Dr. Lund in the caves of Central Brazil, mostly situated in
a district near the head waters of the San Francisco river
in the Province of Minas Geraes. The caves are formed in
limestone rocks, and are so numerous that Dr. Lund visited
thousands, but only sixty contained bones in any quantity.
These caves have a floor of reddish earth, often crowded with
bones. In one experiment, half a cubic foot of this earth
contained jaws of 400 opossums, 2,000 mice, besides remains
of bats, porcupines and small birds. In another trial, the
whole of the earth in a cavern was carried out for examin-
ation, amounting to 6,552 firkins; and, from a calculation
made by measured samples, it was estimated to contain
nearly seven millions of jaw-bones of cavies, opossums, por-
cupines, and mice, besides small birds, lizards, and frogs. This
immense accumulation is believed to have been formed from
the bodies of animals brought into the cavern by owls; and,
as these are unsocial birds, the quantity found implies an

144 DISTRIBUTION OF EXTINCT ANIMALS. [PART II.

immense lapse of time, probably some thousands of years.
More than 100 species of Mammalia, in all, were obtained
in these caves. Some were living species or closely allied
to such; but the majority were extinct, and a considerable
number, about one-fourth, belonged to extinct genera, or
genera not now inhabiting South America. Stone implements
and human remains were found in several of the caves with
extinct animals. The following enumeration of these remains
is from the corrected list of M. Gervais.

Primates.—Extinct species of Cebus, Callithrix, and Jacchus—
South American genera of monkeys; with an extinct genus,
Protopithecus—an animal of large size but belonging to the
American family Cebide.

Chiroptera.—Species belonging to the South American Phyllos-
tomidz, and to two South American genera of other families.

Carnivora.—Five species of Felis, some allied to living ani-
mals, others extinct ; a species of the widespread extinct genus
Machairodus ; and a small species referred to Cynalurus, the
genus containing the hunting leopard now found only in Africa
and India. Canidg are represented by Canis and Icticyon (a
living Brazilian species of the latter genus), and the extinct
genus Speothos. Mustelidee are represented by extinct species
of the South American genera Mephitis and (ralictis. Procy-
onide, by a species of Nasua. Urside, by Arctotherium, a
genus closely resembling, if not identical with, that containing
the “spectacled bear” of Chili.

Ungulata.— Equus, Tapirus, Dicotyles, Auchenia, Cervus, Lep-
totheriwm, and Antilope, are the cave-genera of this order.
Equus and Antelope are particularly interesting, as representing
groups forming no part of existing South American zoology ;
while the presence also of Leptotheriwm, an extinct genus of
antelopes, shows that the group was fairly represented in South
America at this comparatively recent period.

Proboscidea.—A species of Mastodon, found also in the Pliocene
of La Plata, represents this order.

Rodentia.—These abound. Dasyprocta, Calogenys, Cavia,
Kerodon, all living genera of Caviide, are represented by

CHAP. VII. ] MAMMALIA OF THE NEW WORLD. 145

extinct species. Cercolabes, the ‘tree porcupine’ (Cercolabide)
has two species, one as large as a peceary; Myopotamus, Loncheres,
Carterodon, are existing genera of spiny rats (Echimyide) ;
and there are two extinct genera of the same family, Loncho-
phorus and Phyllomys. Lagostomus (Chinchillide), the visca-
cha of the Pampas, is represented by an extinct species.
There is also an extinct species of Lepus ; several species of
Hesperomys and Oxymycterus ; and a large Arvicola, a genus not
living in South America.

Edentata—These, which constitute the great feature of the
existing South American fauna, were still more abundant and
varied in the Cave period, and it is remarkable that most of
them are extinct genera. The armadillos are alone represented
by living forms, Dasypus, and Xenurus ; Eurydon and Hetero-
don, are extinct genera of the same family, as well as Chlamydo-
thervum—huge armadillos the size of a tapir or rhinoceros, and
Pachytherium, which was nearly as large. The ant-eaters are
represented only by Glossotherium, an extinct form allied to
Myrmecophaga and Manis. The sloths were more numerous,
being represented by the extinct genera Coelodon, Sphenodon
and Ochotherium, the last of large size. The huge terrestrial
sloths—Megatheride, also abounded; there being species of
Megatherium and Megalonyz, as well as the allied Scelidotherium,
supposed to have some affinity for the African Orycteropus.

Marsupials—No new forms of these appear, but numerous
species of Didelphys, all closely allied to opossums still living
in South America.

The preceding sketch of the wonderful cave fauna of Central
Brazil, is sufficient to show that it represents, in the main, a
period of great antiquity. Not only are almost the whole of
the species extinct, but there are twenty extinct genera, and three
others not now inhabitants of South America. The fact that so
few remains of the living animals of the country are found in
these caves, indicates that some change of physical conditions
has occurred since they were the receptacles of so many of the
larger animals; and the presence of many extinct genera ot

146 DISTRIBUTION OF EXTINCT ANIMALS. [PART II.

large size, especially among the Edentata and American families
of Rodents, are additional proofs of a very high antiquity.
Yet many of these cave animals are closely allied to those
which are found in North America in the Post-Pliocene deposits
only, so that we have no reason to suppose the cave-fauna to
be of much earlier date. But the great amount of organic
change it implies, must give us an enlarged idea of the vast
periods of time, as measured by years, which are included in
this, the most recent of all geological epochs.

Pliocene Period of Temperate South America.—We have now
to consider the numerous remains of extinct animals found in
various deposits in the Pampas, and in Patagonia, and a few in
Bolivia. The age of these is uncertain; but as they are very
similar to the cave-fauna, though containing a somewhat larger
proportion of extinct genera and some very remarkable new
forms, they cannot be very much older, and are perhaps best
referred at present to the newer portion of the Plocene
formation.

Carnivora—The genus Machairodus or sabre-toothed tigers,
represents the Felide. There are several species of wolves
(Canis); a weasel (Mustela); two bears of the Brazilian cave-
genus Arctotherium; and the extinct European genus Hyenarctos.

Ungulata.—There are two species of Hquus, found in the
Pampas, Chili, and Bolivia; two of Maerauchenia, an extra-
ordinary extinct group allied to the tapir and Palawotheriuwm, but
with the long neck, and general size of a camel. A second
species found on the highlands of Bolivia is much smaller.

A more recent discovery, in Patagonia, is the almost perfect
series of teeth of a large animal named Homalodontotherium; and
which is believed by Professor Flower, who has described it, to
have been allied to Rhinoceros, and still more to the Miocene
Hyracodon from North America; and also to present some
resemblances to Macrauchenia, and though much more remotely,
to the curious genus WVesodon mentioned further on.

The Artiodactyla, or even-toed Ungulates, are represented by a
species of Dicotyles, or peccary, found in the deposits of the

CHAP. VII. ] MAMMALIA OF THE NEW WORLD. 147
Pampas; by Auchenia, or Mama, of which three extinct species
inhabited Bolivia, in which country two allied but extinct
genera, Paleolama and Camelotherium, have also been found.
Three species of deer (Cervus), from the Pampas deposits, com-
plete the list of Pliocene Ungulates.

Proboscidea.—The eave species of Mastodon is found also in
the Pampas deposits, and another in the Andes of Chili and
’ Bolivia.

Rodents——These are not so numerous as in the caves. There
are species of the existing genera, Kerodon and Cavia (Caviide) ;
Lagostomus (Chinchillide); Ctenomys (Octodontide); Lepus
(hare); Hesperomys and Oxymiycterus (Muridee) ; Arvicola, a
genus not living in South America; and an extinct genus, Car-
diodus. There is also a remarkable extinct form, Z'ypotherium,
larger than the capybara, and having affinities to Edentates and
Ungulates. Three species have been found in the Pampas deposits.

Edentata.—These are as abundant and remarkable as in the
cave deposits. Scelidotherium, Megatherium, Megalonyx, Glosso-
therium and Dasypus, have already been noticed as from the
Brazilian caves. We have here, in addition, the huge Mylodon
allied to the Megatherium, and the allied genera—Gnathopsis
and Lestodon. We then come to the huge extinct armadillos,
Glyptodon and Schistopleurum, the former consisting of numerous
species, some of which were as large as an elephant. Another
genus, Hutatus, is allied to the living three-banded armadillos ;
and a species of the existing genus Huphractus has been found
in Bolivia.

Toxodontide.—There remain a number of huge animals
rivalling the Megatherium in size, and forming the genera
Toxodon and Nesodon, but whose position is doubtful. Several
species have been found in the deposits of the Pampas and
Patagonia. They are allied at once to Ungulates, Rodents, Eden-
tates, and the aquatic Sirenia, in so puzzling a manner that it is
impossible to determine to what order they belong, or whether
they require a new order to be formed for their reception. Some
are believed to date back to the Miocene period, and they
indicate what strange forms may still be discovered, should any

148 , DISTRIBUTION QF EXTINCT ANIMALS. [PART lI.

productive deposits be found in South America of middle Ter-
tiary age.

Pliocene Mammalia of the Antilles——These may be noticed
here, as they are of special interest, proving the connection of
the larger West Indian Islands with the Continent some time in
the later Tertiary period. They consist of remains of two large
animals belonging to the South American Chinchillidze, found in
cave deposits in the island of Anguilla, and forming two new
genera, Amblyrhiza and Loxomylus ; and remain allied to Mega-
lonyx from Cuba, which have been named Megalocnus and —
Myomorphus.

Eocene fauna of South America —The few remains yet dis-
covered in the Tertiary deposits of the Pampas which are believed
to be of Eocene age, are exceedingly interesting, because they
show us another change in the scenery of the great drama of
life; there being apparently a considerable resemblance, at this
epoch, between South America and Europe. They consist of a
large extinct feline animal, Hutemnodus; of Palwotherium and
Anoplotherium, the well-known extinct Ungulates of the Euro-
pean Tertiaries, and which have never been found in North
America; and of three genera of Rodents,—Theridromys, allied
to Hchimys, and found also in the Eocene and Miocene of France ;
Megamys, allied to the living Capromys of the Antilles, and
also to Palewomys, an extinct form of the French Miocene; and
a very large animal referred to Arvicola, a genus found also in
the Pliocene deposits of South America, and abundant in the
northern hemisphere. No Edentates have been found.

The resemblances of this fauna to that of Europe rather than
to any part of America, are so strong, that they can hardly be
accidental. We greatly want, however, more information on this
point, as well as some corresponding evidences as to the condition
of West and South Africa about the same epoch, before we can
venture to speculate on their bearing as regards the early mi-
grations of organic forms.

General Remarks on the Extinct Mammalian Fauna of the Old

CHAP, VII.] MAMMALIA OF THE NEW WORLD. 149

and New Worlds—Leaving the more special applications of
paleontological evidence to be made after discussing the relations
of the existing fauna of the several regions, we propose here to
indicate briefly, some of the more general deductions from the
evidence which has now been laid before our readers.

The first, and perhaps the most startling fact brought out by
our systematic review, is the very recent and almost universal
change that has taken place in the character of the fauna, over
all the areas we have been considering; a change which seems
to be altogether unprecedented in the past history of the same
countries as revealed by the geological record. In Europe, in
North America, and in South America, we have evidence that a
very similar change occurred about the same time. In all three
we find, in the most recent deposits—cave-earths, peat-bogs, and
eraveis—the remains of a whole series of large animals, which
have since become wholly extinct or only survive in far-distant
lands. In Europe, the great Irish elk, the Machairodus and
cave-lion, the rhinoceros, hippopotamus, and elephant ;—in North
America, equally large felines, horses and tapirs larger than any
now living, a llama as large as a camel, great mastodons and
elephants, and abundance of huge megatheroid animals of almost
equal size ;—in South America these same megatheroids in greater
variety, numerous huge armadillos, a mastodon, large horses and
tapirs, large porcupines, two forms of antelope, numerous bears and
felines, including a Machairodus, and a large monkey,—have all be-
come extinct since the deposition of the most recent of the fossil-
bearing strata. This is certainly not a great while ago, geologi-
cally ; and it is almost certain that this great organic revolution,
implying physical changes of such vast proportions that they
must have been due to causes of adequate intensity and propor-
tionate range, has taken place since man lived on the earth.
This is proved to have been the case in Europe, and is supported
by much evidence both as regards North and South America.

It is clear that so complete and sudden a change in the higher
forms of life, does not represent the normal state of things.
Species and genera have not, at all times, become so rapidly
extinct. The time occupied by the “ Recent period,” that is the

150 DISTRIBUTION OF EXTINCT ANIMALS. [PART II.

time since these changes took place is, geologically, minute.
The time of the whole of the Post-Pliocene period, as measured
by the amount of physical and general organic change known to
have taken place, is exceedingly small when compared with the
duration of the Plocene period, and still smaller, probably, as
compared with the Miocene. Yet during these two periods we
meet with no such break in the continuity of the forms of life, no
such radical change in the character of the fauna (though the
number of specific and generic changes may be as great) as we
find in passing from the Post-Phocene to recent times. For
example, in Central Europe numerous hyzenas, rhinoceroses, and
antelopes, with the great Machairodus, continued from Miocene
all through Phocene into Post-Pliocene times; while hippo-
potami and elephants continued to live through a good part of
the Pliocene and Post-Pliocene periods,—and then all suddenly
became extinct or left the country. In North America there has
been more movement of the fauna in all the periods; but we
have similar great felines, horses, mastodons, and elephants, in
the Pliocene and Post-Pliocene periods, while Rhinoceros is com-
mon to the Miocene and Pliocene, and camels range continuously
from Miocene, through Pliocene, to Post-Plocene times ;—when
all alike became extinct. Even in South America the evidence is,
as far as it goes, allthe same way. We find Machairodus, Equus,
Mastodon, Megatherium, Scelidotherium, Megalonyx, and numerous
gigantic armadillos, alike in the caves and in the stratified
tertiary deposits of the Pampas ;— yet all have since passed away.

It is clear, therefore, that we are now in an altogether
exceptional period of the earth’s history. We live in a zoologi-
cally impoverished world, from which all the hugest, and fiercest,
and strangest forms have recently disappeared ; and it is, no
doubt, a much better world for us now they have gone. Yet it
is surely a marvellous fact, and one that has hardly been suffi-
ciently dwelt upon, this sudden dying out of so many large
mainmalia, not in one place only but over half the land surface
of the globe. We cannot but believe that there must have been
some physical cause for this great change; and it must have
been a cause capable of acting almost simultaneously over large

‘CHAP, VII. ] MAMMALIA OF THE NEW WORLD. 151

portions of the earth’s surface, and one which, as far as the
Tertiary period at least is concerned, was of an exceptional cha-
racter. Such a cause exists in the great and recent physical change
known as “the Glacial epoch.” We have proof in both Europe
and North America, that just about the time these large animals
were disappearing, all the northern parts of these continents
were wrapped in a mantle of ice; and we have every reason to
believe that the presence of this large quantity of ice (known to
have been thousands of feet if not some miles in thickness) must
have acted in various ways to have produced alterations of
level of the ocean as well as vast local floods, which would have
combined with the excessive cold to destroy animal life. There
is great difference of opinion among geologists and physicists as
to the extent, nature, and duration of the Glacial epoch. Some
believe it to have prevailed alternately in the northern and
southern hemispheres ; others that it was simultaneous in both.
Some think there was a succession of cold periods, each lasting
many thousands of years, but with intercalated warm periods of
equal duration ; others deny that there is any evidence of such
changes, and maintain that the Glacial epoch was one continuous
period of arctic conditions in the temperate zones, with some
fluctuations perhaps but with no regular alternations of warm
periods. Some believe in a huge ice-cap covering the whole
northern hemisphere from the pole to near 50° north latitude
in the eastern, and 40° in the western hemisphere ; while others
impute the observed effects either to glaciers from local centres,
or to floating icebergs of vast size passing over the surface during
a period of submersion.

Without venturing to decide which of these various theories
will be ultimately proved to be correct, we may state, that
there is an increasing belief among geologists in the long dura-
tion of this ice-period, and the vast extent and great thick-
ness attained by the ice-sheet. One of the most recent, and
not the least able, of the writers on this question (Mr. Belt) shows
strong reasons for adopting the view that the ice-period was
simultaneous in both hemispheres ; and he calculates that the
vast amount of water abstracted from the ocean ard locked up

152 DISTRIBUTION OF EXTINCT ANIMALS. [PART Il,

in mountains of ice around the two poles, would lower the general
level of the ocean about 2,000 feet. This would be equivalent
toa general elevation of the land to the same amount, and would
thus tend to intensify the cold; and this elevation may enable
us to understand the recent discoveries of signs of glacial
action at moderate elevations in Central America and Brazil, far
within the tropics. At the same time, the weight of ice piled up
in the north would cause the land surface to sink there, perhaps
unequally, according to the varying nature of the interior crust
of the earth ; and since the weight has been removed land would
rise again, still somewhat irregularly ; and thus the phenomena
of raised beds of arctic shells in temperate latitudes, are ex-
plained.

Now, it is evident, that the phenomena we have been con-
sidering—of the recent changes of the mammalian fauna in
Europe, North America, South Temperate America, and the
highlands of Brazil—are such as might be explained by the most
extreme views as to the extent and vastness of the ice-sheet,
and especially as to its simultaneous occurrence in the northern
and southern hemispheres ; and where two such completely in-
dependent sets of facts are found to combine harmoniously, and
supplement each other on a particular hypothesis, the evidence
in favour of that hypothesis is greatly strengthened. An ob-
jection that will occur to zoologists, may here be noticed. If
the Glacial epoch extended over so much of the temperate and
even parts of the tropical zone, and led to the extinction of so
many forms of life even within the tropics, how is it that so
much of the purely tropical fauna of South America has main-
tained itself, and that there are still such a vast number of
forms, both of mammalia, birds, reptiles, and insects, that seem
organized for an exclusive existence in tropical forests? Now
Mr. Belt’s theory, of the subsidence of the ocean to the extent of
about 2,000 feet, supplies an answer to this objection; for we
should thus have a tract of lowland of an average width of
some hundreds of miles, added to the whole east coast of Central
and South America. This tract would, no doubt, become covered

with forests as it was slowly formed, would enjoy a perfectly

CHAP. VII.] MAMMALIA OF THE NEW WORLD. 153

tropical climate, and would thus afford an ample area for the
continued existence and development of the typical South
American fauna; even had glaciers descended in places so low
as what is now the level of the sea, which, however, there is no
reason to believe they ever did. It is probable too, that this
low tract, which all round the Gulf of Mexico would be of con-
siderable width, offered that passage for intermigration between
North and South America, which led to the sudden appearance
in the former country in Post-Plocene times, of the huge Mega-
‘theroids from the latter; a migration which took place in op-
posite directions as we shall presently show.

The birth-place and migrations of some mammalian families
and genera—We have now to consider a few of those cases
in which the evidence already at our command, is sufficiently
definite and complete, to enable us to pronounce with some con-
fidence as to the last movements of several important groups of
mamualia.

Primates—The occurrence in North America of numerous
forms of Lemuroidea, forming two extinct families, which are
believed by American paleontologists to present generalized
features of both Lemuride and Hapalide, while in Europe only
Lemurine forms allied to those of Africa have occurred in
deposits of the same age (Eocene), renders it possible that the
Primates may have originated in America, and sent one branch
to South America to form the Hapalide and Cebide, and
another to the Old World, giving rise to the lemurs and true
apes. But the fact that apes of a high degree of organization
occur in the European Miocene, while in the Eocene, a monkey
believed to have relations to the Lemuroids and Cebide has also
been discovered, make it more probable that the ancestral forms
of this order originated inthe Old World at a still earlier period.
The absence of any early tertiary remains from the tropical parts
of the two hemispheres, renders it impossible to arrive at any
definite conclusions as to the origin of groups which were, no
doubt, always best developed in tropical regions.

Carnivora.—This is a very ancient and wide-spread group, the
families and genera of which had an extensive range in very

Vou. 1.—12

154 DISTRIBUTION OF EXTINCT ANIMALS. [Part nm.

early times. The true bears (Ursus) are almost the only
important genus that seems to have recently migrated. In
Europe it dates back to the Older Pliocene, while in North
America it is Post-Plocene only. Bears, therefore, seem to
have passed into America from the Palearctic region in the latter
part of the Pliocene period. They probably came in on the
north-west, and passed down the Andes into South America,
where one isolated species still exists.

Ungulata.—Horses are very interesting. In Europe they date
back under various forms to the Miocene period, and true Zquus’
to the Older Pliocene. In North America they are chiefly
Pliocene, true Zguus being Post-Pliocene, with perhaps one or
two species Newer Pliocene ; but numerous ancestral forms date
back to the Miocene and Eocene, giving a more perfect “ pedi-
gree of the horse” than the European forms, and going back to a
more primitive type—Orohippus. In South America, Zqguus is
the only genus, and is Post-Plocene or at most Newer Pliocene.
While, therefore, the ancient progenitors of the Equide were
common to North America and Europe, in Miocene and even
Eocene times, true horses appear to have arisen in the Palearctic
region, to have passed into North America in the latter part of
the Pliocene period, and thence to have spread over all suitabie
districts in South America. They were not, however, able to
maintain themselves permanently in their new territory, and all
became extinct; while in their birth-place, the Old World, they
continue to exist under several varied forms.

True tapirs are an Old World group. They go back to the
Lower Miocene in Europe, while in both North and South
America they are exclusively Post-Pliocene. They occur in
France down to the Newer Pliocene, and must, about that
time, have entered America. The land connection by which
this and so many other animals passed between the Old and
New Worlds in late Tertiary times, was almost certainly in the
North Pacific, south of Behring’s Straits, where, as will be seen
by our general map, there is a large expanse of shallow water,
which a moderate elevation would convert into dry land, ina
sufficiently temperate latitude.

CHAP. VII. ] MAMMALIA OF THE NEW WORLD. 155

The peccary (Dicotyles), now a characteristic South American
genus, is a recent immigrant from North America, where it
appears to have been developed from ancestral forms of swine
dating back to the Miocene period.

Antelopes are an Old World type, but a few of them appear to
have entered North, and reached South America in late Pliocene
times. Camels, strange to say, are a special North American type,
since they abounded in that continent under various ancient
forms in the Miocene period. Towards the end of that period
they appear to have entered eastern Asia, and developed into the
Siberian Merycotherium and the North Indian Camelus, while
in the Pliocene age the ancestral llamas entered South
America.

Cervide are a wide-spread northern type in their generalized
form, but true deer (Cervus) are Palearctic. They abounded in
Europe in Miocene times, but only appear in North and South
America in the later Pliocene and Post-Pliocene periods.

True oxen (Lovinw) seem to be an Oriental type (Miocene),
while they appear in Europe only late in the Pliocene period,
and in America are confined to the Post-Pliocene.

Elephants (Llephantide) are an Old World type, abounding
in the Miocene period in Europe and India, and first appearing
in America in Post-Pliocene or later Pliocene times. Ancestral
forms, doubtfully Proboscidean (Dinocerata), existed in North
~ America in the Eocene period, but these became extinct without
leaving any direct descendants, unless the Brontotheride and
rhinoceroses may be so considered.

Marsupials are almost certainly a recent introduction into
South and North America from Asia. They existed in Europe
in Eocene and Miocene times, and presumably over a consider-
able part of the Old World; but no trace of them appears in
North or South America before the Post-Pliocene period.

Edentata.—These offer a most curious and difficult problem.
In South America they abound, and were so much more nu-
merous and varied in the Post-Pliocene and Pliocene, that we
may be sure they lived also in the preceding Miocene period. A
few living Edentates are scattered over Africa and Asia, and

156 DISTRIBUTION OF EXTINCT ANIMALS, [PART Il.

they flourished in Europe during the Miocene age—animals as
large (insome species) as a rhinoceros, and most allied to living
African forms, In North America no trace of Edentata has been
found earlier than the Post-Plocene period, or perhaps the Newer
Pliocene on the west coast. Neither is there any trace of them
in South America in the Eocene formations; but this may well
be owing to our very imperfect knowledge of the forms of
that epoch. ‘Their absence from North America is, however,
probably real; and we have to account for their presence in the
Old World and in South America. Their antiquity is no doubt
very great, and the point of divergence of the Old World and
South American groups, may take us back to early Eocene, or
even to Pre-EKocene times. The distribution of land and sea may
then have been very different from what it is now; and to those
who would create a continent to account for the migrations of
a beetle, nothing would seem more probable than that a South
Atlantic continent, then united parts of what are now Africa
and South America. There is, however, so much evidence for
the general permanence of what are now the great continents
and deep oceans, that Professor Huxley’s supposition of a con-
siderable extension of land round the borders of the North Pacific
Ocean in Mesozoic times, best indicates the probable area in
which the Edentate type originated, and thence spread over much
of the Old World and South America. But while in the latter
country it flourished and increased with little check, in the
other great continents it was soon overcome by the competition
of higher forms, only leaving a few small-sized representatives
in Africa and Asia,

CHAPTER VIIL

VARIOUS EXTINCT ANIMALS ;—AND ON THE ANTIQUITY OF THE
GENERA OF INSECTS AND LAND MOLLUSCA.

EXTINCT MAMMALIA OF AUSTRALIA.

THESE have all been obtained from caves and late Tertiary or
Post-Tertiary deposits, and consist of a large number of extinct
forms, some of gigantic size, but all marsupials and allied to the
existing fauna. There are numerous forms of kangaroos, some
larger than any living species ; and among these are two genera,
Protemnodon and Sthenurus, which Professor Garrod has lately
shown to have been allied, not to any Australian forms, but to
the Dendrolagi or tree-kangaroos of New Guinea. We have
also remains of Thylacinus and Dasywrus, which now only exist
in Tasmania ; and extinct species of Hypsiprymnus and Phasco-
lomys, the latter as large as a tapir. Among the more remarkable
extinct genera are Diprotodon, a huge thick-limbed animal
allied to the kangaroos, but nearly as large as an elephant;
Nototherium, having characters of Macropus and Phascolarctos
combined, and as large as a rhinoceros; and Thylacoleo, a pha-
langer-like marsupial nearly as large as a lion, and supposed by
Professor Owen to have been of carnivorous habits, though this
opinion is not held by other naturalists.

Here then we find the same phenomena as in the other coun-
tries we have already discussed,—the very recent disappearance
of a large number of peculiar forms, many of them far surpassing
in size any that continue to exist. It hardly seems probable
that in this case their disappearance can have been due te the
direct effects of the Glacial epoch, since no very extensive glacia-

158 EXTINCT ANIMALS OF AUSTRALIA. [PART II.

tion could have occurred in a country like Australia; but if the
ocean sank 2,000 feet, the great eastern mountain range might
have given rise to local glaciers. It is, however, almost certain
that during late Tertiary times Australia must have been much
more extensive than it is now. This is necessary to allow of the
development of its peculiar and extensive fauna, especially as we
see that that fauna comprised animals rivalling in bulk those of
the great continents. It is further indicated by the relations
with New Guinea, already alluded to, and by the general character
of the various faunas which compose the Australian region, de-
tails of which will be found in the succeeding part of this work.
The lowering of the ocean during the Glacial period would be
favourable to the still further development of the fauna of such
a country ; and it is to the unfavourable conditions produced by
its subsequent rising—equivalent to a depression of the land to
the amount of two thousand feet—that we must impute the
extinction of so many remarkable groups of animals. It is not
improbable, that the disappearance of the ice and the consequent
(apparent) subsidence of the land, might have been rapid as
compared with the rate at which large animals can become
modified to meet new conditions. Extensive tracts of fertile
land might have been submerged, and the consequent crowding
of large numbers of species and individuals on limited areas
would have led to a struggle for existence in which the less
adapted and less easily modifiable, not the physically weaker,
would succumb.

There is, however, another cause for the extinction of large
rather than small animals whenever an important change of
conditions occurs, which has been suggested to me by a corre-
spondent,! but which has not, I believe, been adduced by Mr.
Darwin or by any other writer on the subject. It is dependent
on the fact, that large animals as compared with small ones are
almost invariably slow breeders, and as they also necessarily
exist in much smaller numbers in a given area, they offer far
less materials for favourable variations than do smaller animals.
In such an extreme case as that of the rabbit and elephant, the

1 Mr. John Hickman of Desborough.

CHAP. VIII. ] MESOZOIC MAMMALIA, 159

young born each year in the world are probably as some millions
to one; and it is very easily conceivable that in a thousand
years the former might, under pressure of rapidly changing con-
ditions, become modified into a distinct species, while the latter,
not offermg enough favourable variations to effect a suitable
adaptation, would become extinct. We must also remember
the extreme specialization of many of the large animals that
have become extinct—a specialization which would necessarily
render modification in any new direction difficult, since the in-
herited tendency of variation would probably be to increase the
specialization in the same directions which had heretofore been
beneficial. If to these two causes we add the difficulty of
obtaining sufficient food for such large animals, and perhaps the
injurious effects of changes of climate, we shall not find it diffi-
cult to understand how such a vast physical revolution as the
Glacial epoch, with its attendant phenomena of elevations and
subsidences, icy winds, and sudden floods by the bursting of lake
harriers, might have led to the total extinction of a vast number
of the most bulky forms of mammalia, while the less bulky
were able to survive, either by greater hardiness of constitution
or by becoming more or less modified. The result is apparent in
the comparatively small or moderate size of the species consti-
tuting the temperate fauna, in all parts of the globe.

It is much to be regretted that no mammalian remains of earlier
date have been found in Australia, as we should then see if it is
really the case that marsupials have always formed its highest
type of mammalian life. At present its fossil fauna is chiefly
interesting to the zoologist, but throws little light on the past
relations of this isolated country with other parts of the globe.

MAMMALIAN REMAINS IN THE SECONDARY FORMATIONS.

In the oldest Tertiary beds of Europe and North America, we
have (even with our present imperfect record) a rich and varied
mammalian fauna. As compared with our living or recent highly
specialized forms, it may be said to consist of generalised types ;
but as compared with any primeval mammalian type, it must be
pronounced highly specialized. Not only are such diversified

160 DISTRIBUTION OF EXTINCT ANIMALS. [PART II.

groups as Carnivora, Perrissodactyle and Artiodactyle Ungulates,
Primates, Chiroptera, Rodents, and Marsupials already well
marked, but in many of these there is a differentiation into
numerous families and genera of diverse character. It is impossi-
ble therefore to doubt, that many peculiar forms of mammalia
must have lived long anterior to the Eocene period ; but there
is unfortunately a great gap in the record between the Eocene
and Cretaceous beds, and these latter being for the most part
marine continue the gap as regards mammals over an enormous
lapse of time. Yet far beyond both these chasms in the Upper
Oolitic strata, remains of small mammalia have been found ;
again, in the Stonesfield slate, a member of the Lower Oolite,
other forms appear. Then comes the marine Lias formation
with another huge gap; but beyond this again in the Upper
Trias, the oldest of the secondary formations, mammalian teeth
have been discovered in both England and Germany, and these
are, as nearly as can be ascertained, of the same age as the
Dromatherium already noticed, from North America. They
have been named Microlestes, and show some resemblance to
those of the West Australian Myrmecobius. In the Oolitic
strata numerous small jawbones have been found, which have
served to characterise eight genera, all of which are believed to
have been Marsupials, and in some of,them a resemblance can be
traced to some of the smaller living Australian species. These,
however, are mere indications of the number of mammalia that
must have lived in the secondary period, so long thought to be
exclusively “the age of reptiles;” and the fact that the few yet
found are at all comparable with such specialised forms as still
exist, must convince us, that we shall have to seek far beyond
even the earliest of these remains, for the first appearance of the
mammalian type of vertebrata.

Extinct BIRpDs.

Compared with those of mammalia, the remains of birds are
exceedingly scarce in Europe and America ; and from the wander-
ing habits of so many of this class, they are of much less value

CHAP, VIII. ] BIRDS. 161

as indications of past changes in physical geography. A large
proportion of the remains belong to aquatic or wading types,
and as these have now often a world-wide range, the occurrence
of extinct forms can have little bearing on our present inquiry.
There are, however, a few interesting cases of extinct land-birds
belonging to groups now quite strangers to the country in which
they are found; and others scarcely less interesting, in which
groups now peculiar to certain areas are shown to have been
preceded by allied species or genera of gigantic size.

Palearctic Region and N. India.—In the caves and other
Post-Pliocene deposits of these countries, the remains of birds
almost all belong to genera now inhabiting the same districts.
Almost the only exceptions are, the great auk and the
capercailzie, already mentioned as being found in the Danish
mounds; the latter bird, with Zetrao albus, in Italian caverns;
and aspecies of pheasant (Phasianus) said to have occurred in
the Post-Plocene of France, considerably west of the existing
range of the genus in a wild state.

In the preceding Pliocene deposits, but few remains have
been found, and all of existing genera but one, a gallinaceous
bird (Gallus bravardi) allied to the domestic fowl and peacock.

The Miocene beds of France and Central Europe have pro-
duced many more remains of birds, but these, too, are mostly of
existing European genera, though there are some notable excep-
tions. Along with forms undistinguishable from crows (Corvus),
shrikes (Lanius), wagtails (Motacilla), and woodpeckers (Picus),
are found remains allied to the Oriental edible-nest swift (Co/-
localia) and Trogon; a parrot resembling the African genus
Psittacus; an extinct form Necrornis, perhaps allied to the
plantain-eaters (Musophaga) ; Homalophus, doubtfully allied to
woodpeckers, and Limnatornis to the hoopoes. The gallina-
ceous birds are represented by three species of pheasants, some
very close to the domesticated species ; Palaoperdix allied to the
partridges ; and Paleortyx, small birds allied to the American
genus Ortyx, but with larger wings. There are also species of
Pterocles allied to living birds, and a small pigeon. There are
numerous living genera of Accipitres; such as eagle (Aquila),

162 DISTRIBUTION OF EXTINCT ANIMALS. [PART If.

kite (filvus), eagle-owl (Bubo), and screech-owl (Strix) ; with
the African secretary-bird (Serpentarius), and some extinct forms,
as Palwocercus, Paleohierix and Palcetus.

Aquatic and wading birds were abundant, including numerous
rails, bustards; herons, sandpipers, gulls, divers, and pelicans.
There were also many ducks, some allied to the genus Dendro-
cygna ; the Oriental genus of storks, Leptoptilus ; lbidipodia, a
remarkable form allied to Jbis and Ciconia ; Elornis, near
Limosa; Pelagornis, a large bird allied to gannets and pelicans ;
Hydrornis, allied to the ducks and petrels ; Dolichopterus, allied
to plovers. Perhaps the most interesting of these extinct birds
are, however, the flamingoes, represented by forms hardly distin-
guishable from living species, and by one extinct genus Pale-
lodus, which had very long toes, and probably walked on aquatic
plants like the tropical jacanas.

The Miocene beds of North India have furnished few birds ;
the only one of geographical interest being an extinct species
of ostrich, not very different from that now inhabiting Arabia.

On the whole, the birds of Europe at this period were very
like those now living, with the addition of a few tropical forms.
These latter were, however, perhaps more numerous and import-
ant than they appear to be, as they belong to inland and forest-
haunting types, which would not be so frequently preserved as
the marsh and lake-dwelling species. Taking this into con-
sideration, the assemblage of Miocene birds accords well with
what we know of the mammalian fauna. We have the same
indications of a luxuriant vegetation and subtropical climate,
and the same appearance of Oriental and especially of African
. types. Zvrogon is perhaps the most interesting of all the forms
yet discovered, since it furnishes us with a central point whence
the living trogons of Asia, Africa, and South America might
have diverged.

In the Eocene we find ourselves almost wholly among extinct
forms of birds. The earliest known Passerine bird is here
met with, in Protornis, somewhat similar to a lark, found in
the Lower Eocene of Switzerland ; while another Passerine form,
Palegithalus, and one allied to the nuthatch (Sita), have been

CHAP, VIII. ] BIRDS. : 163

discovered in the Upper Eocene of Paris. Picarie of equal anti-
quity are found. Cryptornis, from the Paris Eocene, and Hail-
cyornis from the Lower Eocene of the Isle of Sheppey, were
both allied to kingfishers; while a form allied to Centropus a
genus of cuckoos, or, as Milne-Edwards thinks, to the Madagas-
car Leptosomus, has been found in the Upper Eocene of France.
Several Accipitres of somewhat doubtful affinities have been
found in the same country; while Lithornis, from the Lower
Eocene of the Isle of Sheppey, was a small vulturine bird sup-
posed to be allied to the American group, Cathartes. Among
the waders, some extinct forms of plovers have been found, and a
genus (Agnopterus), allied to the flamingoes; while there are
many swimming birds, such as pelicans, divers, and several
extinct types of doubtful affinities. Most intersting of all is a
portion of a cranium discovered in the Lower Eocene of Shep-
pey, and lately pronounced by Professor Owen to belong to a
large Struthious bird, allied to the New Zealand Dinornis and
also perhaps to the ostrich. Another gigantic bird is the Gas-
tornis, from the Lower Eocene of Paris, which was as large as an
ostrich, but which is believed to have been a generalised type,
allied to wading and swimming birds as well as to the Struthiones.

Beyond this epoch we have no remains of birds in European
strata till we come to the wonderful Archaeopteryx from the
Upper Oolite of Bavaria; a bird of a totally new type, with a
bony tail, longer than the body, each vertebra of which carried
a pair of diverging feathers.

North America—A number of bird-remains have lately been
found in the rich Tertiary and Cretaceous deposits of the United
States; but here, too, comparatively few are terrestrial forms.
No Passerine bird has yet been found. The Picarize are repre-
sented by Uintornis, an extinct form allied to woodpeckers, from
the Eocene of Wyoming. Species of turkey (Meleagris) occur
in the Post-Pliocene and as far back as the Miocene strata,
showing that this interesting type is a true denizen of temperate
North America. The other birds are, Accipitres; waders and
aquatics of existing genera; and a number of extinct forms of
the two latter orders—such as, Aletornis an Eocene wader;

164 DISTRIBUTION OF EXTINCT ANIMALS, [PART Il.

Paleotringa, allied to the sandpipers, and 7Zelmatobius to the
rails, both Cretaceous; with Graculavus, allied to Graculus ;
Laornis allied to the swans; Hesperornis a gigantic diver; and
Icthyornis a very low form, with biconcave vertebra, such as are
only found in fishes and some reptiles—also from Cretaceous
deposits.

South America—tThe caverns of Brazil produced thirty-four
species of birds, most of them referable to Brazilian genera, and
many to still existing species. The most interesting were two
species of American ostrich (hea), one larger than either of
the living species; a large turkey-buzzard (Cathartes) ; a new
species of the very isolated South American genus Opisthocomus ;
and a Cariama, or allied new genus.

Madagascar and the Mascarene Islands—We have here only
evidence of birds that have become extinct in the historical
period or very little earlier. First we have a group of birds in-
capable of flight, allied to pigeons, but forming a separate family,
Didide ; and which, so far as we yet know, inhabited Mauritius,
Rodriguez, and probably Bourbon. <Aphanapteryx, an extinct
genus of rails, inhabited Mauritius; and another genus, (Zrythro-
machus), Rodriguez. A large parrot, said by Prof. Milne Edwards
to be allied to Ara and Microglossus, also inhabited Mauritius ;
and another allied to Hclectus, the island of Rodriguez. None
of these have been found in Madagascar; but a gigantic Struthious
bird, “pyornis, forming a peculiar family distinct both from
the ostriches of Africa and the Dinornis of New Zealand
inhabited that island; and there is reason to believe that
this may have lived less than 200 years ago.

New Zealand—A number of extinct Struthious birds, form-
ing two families, Dinornithidw and Palapterygide, have been
found in New Zealand. Some were of gigantic size. They seem
allied both to the living Apteryx of New Zealand and the emu
of Australia. They are quite recent, and some of them have
probably lived within the last few centuries. Remains of
Dinornis have also been found in a Post-Pliocene deposit in
Queensland, N. E. Australia '—a very important discovery, as it

1 Trans. Zool. Soc. of London, vol. viii. p. 381.

CHAP. VIII. ] TERTIARY REPTILES. 165

gives support to the theory of a great eastward extension of
Australia in Tertiary times,

_ Extinct Tertiary REPTILEs.

These will not occupy us long, as no very great number are
known, and most of them belong to a few principal forms of
comparatively little geographical interest.

Tortoises are perhaps the most abundant of the Tertiary
reptiles. They are numerous in the Eocene and Miocene
formations both in Europe and North America, The genera
Emys and Trionyz abound in both countries, as well as in the
Miocene of India. Land tortoises occur in the’ Eocene of North
America and in the Miocene of Europe and India, where the
huge Colossochelys, twelve feet long, has been found. In the
Pliocene deposits of Switzerland the living American genus
Chelydra has been met with. These facts,:together with the
occurrence of a living species in the Miocene of India, show
that this order of reptiles is of great antiquity, and that most
of the genera once had a wider range than now.

Crocodiles, allied to the three forms now characteristic of
India, Africa, and America, have been found in the Eocene of
our own country, and several species of Crocodilus have occurred
in beds of the same age in North America.

Lizards are very ancient, many small terrestrial forms
occurring in all the Tertiary deposits. A species of the genus
Chamceleo is recorded from the Eocene of North America, to-
gether with several extinct genera.

Snakes were well developed in the Eocene period, where
remains of several have been found which must have been from
twelve to twenty feet long. An extinct species of true viper has
occurred in the Miocene of France, and one of the Pythonide
in the Miocene brown coal of Germany.

Batrachia occur but sparingly in a fossil state in the Ter-
tiary deposits. The most remarkable is the large Salamander
(Andreas) from the Upper Miocene of Switzerland, which

166 DISTRIBUTION OF EXTINCT ANIMALS. (PART II.

is allied to the Menopoma living in North America. Species
of frog (Rana), and Paleophryus an extinct genus of toads,
have been found in the Miocene deposits of Germany and
Switzerland.

Fresh water fish are almost unknown in the Tertiary
deposits of Europe, although most of the families and some
genera of living marine fish are represented from the Eocene
downwards. .

ANTIQUITY OF THE GENERA OF INSECTS.

Fossil insects are far too rarely found, to aid us in our determi-
nation of difficult questions of geographical distribution ; but in
discussing these questions it will be important to know, whether
we are to look upon the existing generic forms of insects as of
great or small antiquity, compared with the higher vertebrates ;
and to decide this question the materials at our command are
ample.

The conditions requisite for the preservation of insects In a
fossil state are no doubt very local and peculiar ; the result being,
that it is only at long intervals in the geological record that we
meet with remains of insects in a recognisable condition. None
appear to have been found in the Pliocene formation ; but in the
Upper Miocene of CEninghen in Switzerland, associated with the
wonderfully rich fossil flora, are found immense quantities of
insects. Prof. Heer examined more than 5,000 specimens be-
longing to over 800 species, and many have been found in other
localities in Switzerland; so that more than 1,300 species of
Miocene insects have now been determined. Most of the orders
are represented, but the beetles (Coleoptera) are far the most
abundant. Almost all belong to existing genera, and the majority
of these genera now inhabit Europe, only three or four being
exclusively Indian, African, or American.

In the Lower Miocene of Croatia there is another rich de-
posit of insects, somewhat more tropical in character, comprising
large white-ants- and dragon-flies differently marked from any

CHAP, VIL] ANTIQUITY OF INSECTS. 167

now inhabiting Europe. A butterfly is also well preserved, with
all the markings of the wings ; and it seems to be a Junonia, a
tropical genus, though it may be a Vanessa, which is European,
but the fossil most resembles Indian species of Junonia.

The Eocene formations seem to have produced no in-
sect remains; but they occur again in the Upper Cretaceous
at Aix-la-Chapelle, where two butterflies have been found,
Cyllo sepulta and Satyrites Reynesii, both belonging to the Saty-
ride, and the former to a genus now spread over Africa, India,
and Australia.

A little earlier, in the Wealden formation of our own country,
numerous insects have been found, principally dragon flies (Libel-
lula, Eshna) ; aquatic Hemiptera (Velia Hydrometra) ; crickets
cockroaches, and cicadas, of familiar types.

Further back in the Upper Oolite of Bavaria—which produced
the wonderful long-tailed bird, Archwopteryx—insects of all orders
have been found, including a moth referred to the existing genus
Sphine.

In the Lower Oolite of Oxfordshire many fossil beetles have
been found whose affinities are shown by their names :— Bupres-
tidium, Curculionidium, Blapsidiwm, Melolonthidium, and Prio-
nidium ; a wing of a butterfly has also been found, allied to the
Brassolidze now confined to tropical America, and named Pale-
ontina oolitica.

Still more remote are the insects of the Lias of Gloucester-
shire, yet they too can be referred to well-known family types—
Carabide, Melolonthide, Telephoride, Elateride, and Curculio-
nid, among beetles; Gryllide and Blattidze among Orthoptera ;
with Libellula, Agrion, Ashna, Ephemera, and some extinct
genera. When we consider that almost the only vertebrata of
this period were huge Saurian repliles like the Jcthyosaurus,
Plesiosaurus, and Dinosaurus, with the flying Pterodactyles ;
and that the great mass of our existing genera, and even fami-
lies, of fish and reptiles had almost certainly not come into exist-
ence, we see at once that: types of insect-form are, proportionately,
far more ancient. At this remote epoch we find the chief family
types (the genera of the time of Linneus) perfectly differentiated

168 DISTRIBUTION OF EXTINCT ANIMALS. [PART II,

and recognisable. It is only when we go further back still, into
the Palzozoic formations, that the insect forms begin to show that
generalization of type which renders it impossible to classify
them in any existing groups. Yet even in the coal formation of
Nova Scotia and Durham, the fossil insects are said by competent
entomologists to be “ allied to Hphemera,” “near Blatta,’ “near
Phasmide ;” and in deposits of the same age at Saarbriick near
Tréves, a well-preserved wing of a grasshopper or locust has been
found, as well as a beetle referred to the Scarabeide. More
remarkable, however, is the recent discovery in the carboniferous
shales of Belgium, of the clearly-defined wing of a large moth
(Breyeria borinensis), closely resembling some of the Saturnudee ;
so that we have now all the chief orders of Insects—including
' those supposed to be the most highly developed and the most
recent—well represented at this very remote epoch. Even the
oldest insects, from the Devonian rocks of North America, can
mostly be classed as Neuroptera or Myriapoda, but appear to
form new families.

We may consider it, therefore, as proved, that many of the
larger and more important genera of insects date back to the
beginning of the Tertiary period, or perhaps beyond it; but the
family types are far older, and must have been differentiated very
early in the Secondary period, while some of them perhaps go
back to Paleozoic times. The great comparative antiquity of
the genera is however the important fact for us, and we shall
have occasion often to refer to it, in endeavouring to ascertain
the true bearing of the facts of insect distribution, as elucidating
or invalidating the conclusions arrived at from a study of the
distribution of the higher animals,

ANTIQUITY OF THE GENERA OF LAND AND FRESH-WATER
SHELLS.

The remains of land and fresh-water shells are not much more
frequent than those of insects. Like them, too, their forms are
very stable, continuing unchanged through several geological

CHAP, VIII. ] ANTIQUITY OF LAND .SHELLS. 169

periods. Inthe Pliocene and Miocene formations, most of the
shells are very similar to living species, and some are quite iden-
tical. In the Eocene we meet with ordinary forms of the genera
Feliz, Clausilia, Pupa, Bulimus, Glandina, Cyclostoma, Megalos-
toma, Planorbis, Paludina and Limnea, some resembling Euro-
pean species, others more like tropical forms. A British Eocene
species of Helix is still living in Texas ; and in the South of France
are found species of the Brazilian sub-genera Megaspira and
Anastoma. In the secondary formation no true land shells have
been found, but fresh water shells are tolerably abundant, and
almost all are still of living forms. In the Wealden (Lower
Cretaceous) and Purbeck (Upper Oolite) are found Unio, Melania,
Paludina, Planorbis, and Limnea ; while the last named genus
occurs even in the Lias.

The notion that land shells were really not in existence during
the secondary period is, however, proved to be erroneous by the
startling discovery, in the Paleozoic coal measures of Nova Scotia,
of two species of Helicide, both of living genera—Pupa vetusta,
and Zonites priscus. They have been found in the hollow trunk
of a Sigillaria, and in great quantities in a bed full of Stigmarian
rootlets. The most minute examination detects no important
differences of form or of microscopic structure, between these
shells and living species of the same genera! These mollusca were
the contemporaries of Labyrinthodonts and strange Ganoid fishes,
which formed almost the whole vertebrate fauna. This unex-
pected discovery renders it almost certain, that numbers of other
existing genera, of which we have found no traces, lived with
these two through the whole secondary period; and we are thus
obliged to assume as a probability, that any particular genus has
lived through a long succession of geological ages. In esti-
mating the importance of any peculiarities or anomalies in the
geographical distribution of land shells as compared with the
higher vertebrates, we shall, therefore, have to keep this possible,
and even probable high antiquity, constantly in mind.

We have now concluded our sketch of Tertiary Palaeontology
as a preparation for the intelligent study of the Geographical
Vou. L—138

170 DISTRIBUTION OF EXTINCT ANIMALS. [PART Il.

Distribution of Land Animals; and however imperfectly the task
has been performed, the reader will at all events have been con-
vinced that some such preliminary investigation is an essential
and most important part of our work. So much of paleontology
is at present tentative and conjectural, that in combining the
information derived from numerous writers, many errors of detail
must have been made. The main conclusions have, however, been
drawn from as large a basis of facts as possible; and although
fresh discoveries may show that our views as to the past history
of some of the less important genera or families are erroneous,
they can hardly invalidate our results to any important degree,
either as regards the intercommunications between separate
regions in the various geological epochs, or as to the centres
from which some of the more important groups have been dis-
persed.

PART ILI:

ZOOLOGICAL GHOGRAPHY:

A REVIEW OF THE CHIEF FORMS OF ANIMAL LIFE IN THE
SEVERAL REGIONS AND SUB-REGIONS, WITH THE INDICA-
TIONS THEY AFFORD OF GEOGRAPHICAL MUTATIONS.

CHAPTER IX.

THE ORDER OF SUCCESSION OF THE REGIONS.—COSMOPOLITAN
GROUPS OF ANIMALS.—TABLES OF DISTRIBUTION.

HAVING discussed, in our First Part, such general and preliminary
matters as are necessary to a proper comprehension of our
subject ; and having made ourselves acquainted, in our Second
Part, with the most important results of Paleontology, we now
come to our more immediate subject, which we propose to treat
first under its geographical aspect. Taking each of our six
regions in succession, we shall point out in some detail the chief
zoological features they present, as influenced by climate, vege-
tation, and other physical features. We shall then treat each
of the sub-regions by itself, as well as such of the islands or
other sub-divisions as present features of special interest ; en-
deavouring to ascertain their true relations to each other, and the
more important changes of physical geography that seem neces-
sary to account for their present zoological condition.

Order of Succession of the Regions We may here explain
the reason for taking the several regions in a different succession
from that in which they appear in the tabular or diagrammatic
headings to each family, in the Fourth, and concluding part of
this work. It will have been seen, by our examination of extinct
animals (and it will be made still clearer during our study of
the several regions) that all the chief types of animal life appear
to have originated in the great north temperate or northern
continents ; while the southern continents—now represented by

174 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART Ill.

South America, Australia, and South Africa with Madagascar—
have been more or less completely isolated, during long periods,
both from the northern continent and from each other. These
latter countries have, however, been subject to more or less im-
migration from the north during rare epochs of approximation
to, or partial union with it. In the northern, more extensive, and
probably more ancient land, the process of development has
been more rapid, and has resulted in more varied and higher
types; while the southern lands, for the most part, seem to have
produced numerous diverging modifications of the lower grades
of organization, the original types of which they derived either
from the north, or from some of the ancient continents in Meso-
zoic or Paleozoic times. Hence those curious resemblances in
the fauna of South America, Australia, and, to a less extent,
Madagascar, which have led to a somewhat general belief that
these distant countries must at one time or other have been
united ; a belief which, after a careful examination of all the
facts, does not seem to the author of this work to be well
founded. On the other hand, there is the most satisfactory
evidence that each southern region has been more or less
closely united (during the tertiary or later secondary epoch)
with the great northern continents, leading to numerous resem-
blances and affinities in their productions.

In endeavouring to present at a glance in the most convenient
manner, the distribution of the families in the several regions
and sub-regions, it was necessary to arrange them, so that those
whose relations to each other were closest should stand side by
side; the first and last being those between which the relations
were least numerous and least important. Influenced by the
usual opinions as to the relations between Australia and South
America, the series was at first begun with the Nearctic, and
terminated with the Australian and Neotropical regions ; and it
was not till the whole of the vertebrate families had been gone
through, and their distribution carefully studied, that these last
two regions were seen to be really wider apart than any others
of the series. It was therefore decided to alter the arrangement,
beginning with the Neotropical, and ending with the Australian

CHAP. Ix.] ORDER OF SUCCESSION OF THE REGIONS. 175

regions ; and a careful inspection of the diagrams themselves,
taken in their entirety, will, it is believed, show that this is
the most natural plan, and most truly exhibits the relations of
the several regions.

In the portion of our work now commencing, we are not,
however, by any means bound to begin at either end of this
series. Each region is studied by itself, but reference will often
have to be made to all the other regions; and wherever we
begin, we must occasionally refer to facts which will be given
further on. As, however, the great northern continents form
the central mass from which the southern regions, as it were,
diverge, and as the Palearctic region is both more extensive and
much better known than any other, it undoubtedly forms the
most convenient starting-point for our proposed survey of
the zoological history of the earth. We thus pass from the
better known to the less known—from Europe to Africa and
tropical Asia, and thence to Australia, completing the series of
regions of the Eastern Hemisphere. Beginning again with the
Neotropical region, we pass to the Nearctic, which has such
striking relations with the preceding and with the Palearctic
region, that it can only be properly understood by constant
reference to both. We thus keep separate the Eastern and West-
ern hemispheres, which form, from our point of view, the
most radical and most suggestive division of terrestrial faunas ;
and as'we are able to make this also the dividing point of our
two volumes, reference to the work will be thereby facilitated.

Cosmopolitan Growps.— Before proceeding to sketch the zoo-
logical features of the several Regions it will be well to notice
those family groups which belong to the earth as a whole, and
which are so widely and universally distributed over it that it
will be unnecessary, in some cases, to do more than refer to
them under the separate geographical divisions.

The only absolutely cosmopolitan families of Mammalia are
those which are aerial or marine; and this is one of the striking
proofs that their distribution has been effected by natural causes,
and that the permanence of barriers is one of the chief

176 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

agencies in the limitation of their range. Even among the
aerial bats, however, only one family—the Vespertilionide—is
truly cosmopolitan, the others having a more or less restricted
range. Neither are the Cetacea necessarily cosmopolitan, most of
the families being restricted either to warm or to cold seas ; but
one family, the dolphins (Delphinidse), is truly so. This order
however will not require further notice, as, being exclusively
marine the groups do not enter into any of our terrestrial
regions. The only other family of mammals that may be con-
sidered to be cosmopolitan, is the Muride (rats and mice); yet
these are not entirely so, since none are known to be truly
indigenous in any part of the Australian region except Australia
itself.

In the class of Birds, a number of families are cosmopolites,
if we reckon as such all which are found in each region and
sub-region ; but several of these are so abundant in some parts,
while they are so sparingly represented in others, that they
cannot fairly be considered so. We shall confine that term
therefore, to such as, there is reason to believe, inhabit every
important sub-division of each region. Such are, among the
Passerine birds the crows (Corvidee), and swallows (Hirundi-
nidz) ; among the Picariz the kingfishers (Alcedinide); among
other Land birds the pigeons (Columbide), grouse and partridges
(Tetraonidee), hawks (Falconide), and owls (Strigide) ; among
the Waders the rails (Rallidee), snipes (Scolopacidee), plovers
(Charadriade), and herons (Ardeide); and among the Swimmers
the ducks (Anatide), gulls (Laride), petrels (Procellariide),
pelicans (Pelecanidze), and grebes (Podicipide).

In the class of Reptiles there are few absolutely cosmopolitan
families, owing to the scarcity of members of this group in some
insular sub-regions, such as New Zealand and the Pacific Islands.
Those which are most nearly so are the Colubridz among snakes.
and the Scincide among lizards.

There is no cosmopolitan family of Amphibia, the true frogs
(Ranidze) being the most widely distributed.

Neither is any family of Freshwater Fishes cosmopolitan,
the Siluride, which have the widest range, being confined

CHAP. IX. ] TABLES OF DISTRIBUTION. 177

to warm regions, and becoming very scarce in the temperate
zones.

Among the Diurnal and Crepuscular Lepidoptera (butterflies
and sphinges) the following families are cosmopolitan :—Satyride,
Nymphalide, Zygsenide, Pieride, Papilionide, Hesperide,
Lyceenide, and Sphingide.

Of the Coleoptera almost all, except some of the small and
obscure families, are cosmopolitan.

Of the terrestrial Mollusca, the Helicide clans are true cos-
mopolites.

Tables of Distribution of Families and Genera.—Having been
obliged to construct numerous tables of the distribution of the
various groups for the purposes of the descriptive part of the
work, I have thought it well to append the most important of
them, in a convenient form, to the chapter on each region ; as
much information will thereby be given, which can only be
obtained from existing works at the cost of great labour. All
these tables are drawn up on a uniform plan, the same generic
and family names being used in each; and all are arranged in
the same systematic order, so as to be readily comparable
with each other. This, although it seems a simple and natural
thing to do, has involved a very great amount of labour, because
hardly two authors use the same names or follow the same
arrangement. Hence comparison between them is impossible, till
all their work has been picked to pieces, their synonymy un-
ravelled, their differences accounted for, and the materials recast ;
and this has to be done, not for two or three authors only, but
for the majority of those whose works have been consulted on
the zoology of any part of the globe.

Except in the two higher orders—Mammalia and Birds—
materials do not exist for complete tables of the genera brought
down to the present time. We have given therefore, first, a
complete table of all the families of Vertebrata and Diurnal
Lepidoptera found in each region, showing the sub-regions in
which they occur, and their range beyond the limits of the
region. Families which are wholly peculiar to the region, or

178 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

very characteristic and almost exclusively confined to it, are in
italics, The number prefixed to each family corresponds to
that of the series of families in the Fourth Part of this work,
so that if further information is required it can be readily
referred to without consulting the index. Names inclosed in
parentheses—( . . . ) thus—indicate families which only just
enter a region from an adjacent one, to which they properly
belong. The eye is thus directed to the more, and the less im-
portant families ; and a considerable amount of information as
to the general Ronee of the zoology of the region, is conveyed
in the easiest manner.

The tables of genera of Mammalia and Birds, are arranged on
a somewhat different plan. Each genus is given under its
Family and Order, and they follow in the same succession in all
the tables. The number of species of each genus, inhabiting
the region, is given as nearly as can be ascertained ; but in many
cases this can only be a general approximation. The distribution
of the genera within the region, is then given with some detail ;
and, lastly, the range of the genus beyond the region is given
in general terms, the words “ Oriental,” “ Ethiopian,” &c., being
used for brevity, to indicate that the genus occurs over a con-
siderable part of such regions. Genera which are restricted to
the region (or which are very characteristic of it though just
transgressing its limits) are given in italics ; while those which
only just enter the region from another to which they really
belong, are enclosed in parentheses—( ... ) thus. The genera
are here numbered consecutively, in order that the number of
genera in each family or each order, in the region, may be readily
ascertained (by one process of subtraction), and thus compari-
sons made with other regions or with any other area. As the
tables of birds would be swelled to an inconvenient length by
the insertion in each region of all the genera of Waders and
Aquatics, most of which have a very wide range and would
have to be repeated in several or all the regions, these have
been omitted; but a list has been given of such of the genera
as are peculiar to, or highly characteristic of each region.

As, this is the first time that any such extensive tables of

CHAP. IX. ] TABLES OF DISTRIBUTION. 179

distribution have been constructed for the whole of the Mam-
malia and Birds, they must necessarily contain many errors of
detail ; but with all their imperfections it is believed they will
prove very useful to naturalists, to teachers, and to all who take
an intelligent interest in the wider problems of geography and
natural history.

CHAPTER X.
THE PALAARCTIC REGION.

THIS region is of immense extent, comprising all the temperate
portions of the great eastern continents. It thus extends from
the Azores and Canary Islands on the west to Japan on the
east, a distance not far short of half the circumference of the
elobe. Yet so great is the zoological unity of this vast tract,
that the majority of the genera of animals in countries so far
removed as Great Britain and Northern Japan are identical.
Throughout its northern half the animal productions of the
Palearctic region are very uniform, except that the vast elevated
desert-regions of Central Asia possess some characteristic forms ;
but in its southern portion, we find a warm district at each ex-
tremity with somewhat contrasted features. On the west we have
the rich and luxuriant Mediterranean sub-region, possessing many
peculiar forms of life, as well as a few which are more especially
characteristic of the Ethiopian region. On the east we have the
fertile plains of Northern China and the rich and varied islands
of Japan, possessing a very distinct set of peculiar forms, with
others belonging to the Oriental region, into which this part of
the Palearctic region merges gradually as we approach the
Tropic of Cancer. Thus, the countries roughly indicated by the
names—Northern Europe, the Mediterranean district, Central
and Northern Asia, and China with Japan—have each well-
marked minor characteristics which entitle them to the rank of
sub-regions. Their boundaries are often indefinable ; and those
here adopted have been fixed upon to some extent by considera-

ai,
PALHEARCTIC REGION f

Scale Linch=1l000 miles

EXPLANATION
‘Terrestrial Contours
From Sea. level to 1,000 feet White
. 1000 feet to 2.500 E

—~ 2500 5000, SSee
$000 , . 10000 SRE
10000 . .20,000 , ‘tesa
Above 20,000 feet te

The Marine Contour of L000 feet
is shewn by a dotted line

Pasture lands shewn thus
Forest

Desert : Ee

| The boundaries and reference numbers
| of the Sub-regions are shewn in Red

10 20 a a 7S

50 Long. of Greenwich 60

Stanford's Geographical Estab! London.
Vor ik: aw x
New York Harper & Brot} ers.

CHAP. X.] THE PALZZARCTIC REGION. 181

tions of convenience, dependent on custom and on the more or
less perfect knowledge we possess of some of the intervening
countries.

Zoological Characteristics of the Palearctic Region.—The Pal-
arctic region has representatives of thirty-five families of
mammalia, fifty-five of birds, twenty-five of reptiles, nine of
amphibia, and thirteen of freshwater fishes. Comparing it with
the only other wholly temperate region, the Nearctic, we find a
much greater variety of types of mammalia and birds. This
may be due in part to its greater area, but more, probably,
to its southern boundary being conterminous for an enormous
distance with two tropical regions, the Ethiopean and Oriental ;
whereas the Nearctic has a comparatively short southern bound-
ary conterminous with the Neotropical region only. This is so
very important a difference, that it is rather a matter of surprise
that the two north temperate regions should not be more unequal
in the number of their higher vertebrate forms, than they
actually are.

It is also to the interblending of the Palearctic with the two
adjacent tropical regions, that we must attribute its possession
of so few peculiar family groups. These are only three; two
of reptiles, Zrogonophide and Ophiomoride, and one of fishes,
Comephoride. The number of peculiar genera is, however, con-
siderable, as the following enumeration will show.

Mammalia—The monkey of Gibraltar and North Africa, and
an allied species found in Japan, are now considered to belong
to the extensive eastern genus Macacus. The former, however,
is peculiar in the entire absence of the tail, and has by many
naturalists, been held to form a distinct genus, Znwus, confined
to the Palzearctic region.

Of bats there are one or two genera (Barbastellus, Plecotus)
which seem to be mainly or wholly Palearctic, but the classifi-
cation of these animals is in such an unsettled state that the
distribution of the genera is of little importance.

In the next order, Insectivora, we have almost the entire
family of the Moles confined to the region. Zalpa just enters
Northern India ; and Urotrichus is common to Japan and North-

182 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

Western America, but the remaining genera, six in number, are
all exclusively Palearctic.

Among Carnivora we have Nyctereutes, the curious racoon-dog
of Japan and North-Eastern Asia ; Lutronectes, an otter peculiar
to Japan; and the badger (JMeles), which ranges over the whole
’ region, and just enters the Oriental region as far as Hongkong ;
Ailuropus, a curious form of the Himalayan panda, inhabiting
the high mountains of Eastern Thibet ; and Pelagius, a genus of
seals, ranging from the shores of Madeira to the Black Sea.

The Ungulata, or hoofed animals, are«still more productive of
forms peculiar to this region. First we have the Camels, whose
native home is the desert region of Central and Western Asia and
Northern Africa, and which, even in their domesticated condition,
are confined almost wholly within the limits of the Palzearctic
region. Of Deer we have six peculiar genera, Dama and Capreolus
found in Europe, with Llaphodus, Lophotragus, Hydropotes, and
Moschus, confined to Northern China and Mongolia. The great
family Bovidee—comprising the oxen, sheep, goats and antelopes
—furnishes no less than seven peculiar Palearctic genera.
These are Poephagus, the yak of Thibet; Addaz, a well-known
antelope of Northern Africa and Syria; Procapra, Pantho-
lops and Budoreas, antelopine genera peculiar to Thibet and
Mongolia; with Rupicapra (the chamois), and the extraordinary
large-nosed antelope Saiga, confined to Europe and Western Asia.
Besides these we have Capra (the wild sheep and goats), all the
numerous species of which, except two, are exclusively Palearctic.

Coming to the Rodents, we have again many peculiar forms.
Of Muridze (the mouse and rat tribe), we have six peculiar
genera, the more important being Cricetus, Rhombomys Smin-
thus, and Myospalax. Of Spalacide (mole-rats) both the Pale-
arctic genera, Ellobius and Spalaz, are peculiar. Ctenodactylus,
a genus of the South American family Octodontide, is found
only in North Africa. To these we may add Myoxus (the
dormice) and Lagomys (the pikas or tail-less hares) as essentially
Palearctic, since but one species of each genus is found be-
yond the limits of the region.

Birds.—It appears to have been the opinion of many natural-

CHAP. X. ] THE PALAZARCTIC REGION. 183

ists that the Palzarctic region could not be well characterised by
its peculiar genera of birds. In Mr. Sclater’s celebrated paper
already referred to, he remarks, “It cannot be denied that the
ornithology of the Palearctic region is more easily characterised
by what it has not than by what it has,” and this has been quite
recently quoted by Mz. Allen, in his essay on the distribution
of North American birds, as if it represented our present know-
ledge of the subject. But, thanks to the labours of Dr.
Jerdon, Mr. Swinhoe, Pére David and others, we have now
learnt that a large number of birds included in the Indian
list, are either mere winter emigrants from Central Asia, or only
inhabit the higher ranges of the Himalayas, and thus really
belong to the Palearctic region. The result is, that a host of
genera are now seen to be either exclusively or characteristically
Palearctic, and we have no further difficulty in giving positive
ornithological characters to the region. In the tables appended
to this chapter, all these truly Palearctic genera will be found
printed in ¢alics, with an indication of their distribution, which
will sometimes be found more fully given under the respective
families in the fourth part of this work. Referring to this table
for details we shall here summarise the results.

Of the Sylviidz or warblers, no less than fourteen genera are
either exclusively or characteristically Palearctic, of which
Locustella, Sylvia, Curruca and Erithacus are good examples.
Of the oriental family Timaliide, the genus Pterorhinus is Pale-
arctic. Of Panuride, or reedlings, there are four peculiar genera
(comprising almost the whole family); of Certhiide, or creepers,
one—Tichodroma—which extends southward to the Abyssinian
highlands. Of Paride, or tits, one—<Acredula ; of Corvide, or
crows, four— Pica (containing our magpie) being a good example; of
Fringillide, or finches and buntings, twelve,among which Acanthis,
Pyrrhula and Emberiza are good illustrations ; of Alaudide, or
larks, there are two peculiar genera. Leaving the Passeres we next
come to peculiar forms among the gallinaceous birds : Syrrhaptes
among the Pteroclide or sand grouse; four genera of Tetraonide or
grouse and partridges, and five of Phasianide or pheasants, com-
prising some of the most magnificent birds in the world. Lastly

184 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

among the far-wandering aquatic birds we have no less than five
genera which are more especially Paleearctic,—Ortygometra, the
corn-crake, and Otis, the great bustard, being typical examples.
We may add to these, several genera almost confined to this
region, such as Garrulus (jays), Fringilla (true finches), Vunax
(wrynecks) and some others ; so that in proportion to its total
generic forms a very large number are found to be peculiar or
characteristic.

This view, of the high degree of speciality of the Palearctic
region, will no doubt be objected to by some naturalists, on the
ground that many of the genera reckoned as exclusively
Palearctic are not so, but extend more or less into other regions.
It is well, therefore, to consider what principles should guide us
in a matter of this kind, especially as we shall have to apply
the same rules to each of the other regions. We may remark
first, that the limits of the regions themselves are, when not
formed by the ocean, somewhat arbitrary, depending on the
average distribution of a number of characteristic forms; and
that shght local peculiarities of soil, elevation, or climate, may
cause the species of one region to penetrate more or less deeply
into another. The land boundary between two regions will be,
not a defined line but a neutral territory of greater or less
width, within which the forms of both regions will intermingle ;
and this neutral territory itself will merge imperceptibly into
both regions. So long therefore as a species or genus does not
permanently reside considerably beyond the possible limits of
this neutral territory, we should not claim it as an inhabitant
of the adjacent region. A consideration of perhaps more im-
portance arises, from the varying extent of the range of a genus,
over the area occupied by the region. Some genera are repre-
sented by single species existing only in a very limited area;
others by numerous species which occupy, entirely or very
nearly, the whole extent of the region ; and there is every inter-
mediate grade between these extremes. Now, the small local-
ised genera, are always reckoned as among the best examples
of types peculiar to a region ; while the more wide-spread groups
are often denied that character if they extend a little beyond

CHAP. X. | THE PALAARCTIC REGION. 185

the supposed regional limits, or send one or two, out of a large
number of species, into adjacent regions; yet there is some
reason to believe that the latter are really more important as
characterising a zoological region than the former. In the case
of a single isolated species or genus we have a dying-out group ;
and we have so many cases of discontinuous species of such
groups (of which Uvotrichus in Japan and British Columbia,
Eupetes in Sumatra and New Guinea are examples), that it is
quite as probable as not, that any such isolated species has only
become peculiar to the region by the recent extinction of an
allied form or forms in some other region. On the other hand,
a genus consisting of numerous species ranging over an entire
region or the greater part of one, is a dominant group, which
has most hkely been for some time extending its range, and
whose origin dates back to a remote period. The slight exten-
sion of such a group beyond the limits of the region to which
it mainly belongs, is probably a recent phenomenon, and in that
case cannot be held in any degree to detract from its value as
one of the peculiar forms of that region.

The most numerous examples of this class, are those birds of
the temperate regions which in winter migrate, either wholly or
partially, into adjacent warmer countries. This migration most
likely began subsequent to the Miocene period, during that
gradual refrigeration of the temperate zones which culminated
in the glacial epoch, and which still continues in a mitigated
form. Most of the genera, and many even of the species of
birds which migrate southwards in winter, have therefore, most
likely, always been inhabitants of our present Palearctic and
Nearctic regions ; permanent residents during warm epochs, but
only able now to maintain their existence by migration in
winter. Such groups belong truly to the temperate zones, and
the test of this is the fact of their not having any, or very few,
representatives, which are permanent residents in the adjacent
tropical regions. When there are such representative species, we
do not claim them as peculiar to the Northern regions, Bearing
in mind these various considerations, it will be found that we have
been very moderate in our estimate of the number of genera

Vout. L—14

186 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

that may fairly be considered as exclusively or characteristically
Palearctic.

Reptiles and Amphibia.—The Palearctic region possesses, in
proportion to its limited reptilian fauna, a full proportion of
peculiar types. We have for instance two genera of snakes,
Rhinecht and Halys; seven of lizards, Trigonophis, Psammo-
dromus, Hyalosaurus, Scincus, Ophiomorus, Megalochilus, and
Phrynocephalus ; eight of tailed batrachians, Proteus, Salaman-
dra, Seiranota, Chioglossa, Hynobius, Onychodactylus, Geotriton,
and Steboldia ; and eight of tail-less batrachians, Bombinator,
Pelobates, Didocus, Alytes, Pelodytes, Discoglossus, Laprissa, and
Latonia. The distribution of these and other Palearctic genera
will be found in our second vo]. chap. xix.

Freshwater Fish—About twenty genera of freshwater fishes
are wholly confined to this region, and constitute a feature which
ought not to be overlooked in estimating its claim to the rank
of a separate primary division of the earth. They belong to the
following families :—Percide (three genera), Acerina, Percarina,
Aspro; Comephoridze (one genus), Comephorus, found only in
Lake Baikal; Salmonide (three genera), Brachymystax, Lucio-
trutta, and Plecoglossus ; Cyprinodontide (one genus), TZellia,
found only in Alpine pools on the Atlas Mountains ; Cyprinidz
(thirteen genera), Cyprinus, Carassus, Paraphoxinus, Tinea,
Achilognathus, Rhodeus, Chondrostoma, Pseudoperilampus, Oche-
tebius, Aspius, Alburnus, Misqurnus, and Nemachilus.

Summary of Palearctic Vertebrata—Summarising these de-
tails, we find that the Palearctic region possesses thirty-five
peculiar genera of mammalia, fifty-seven of birds, nine of
reptiles, sixteen of amphibia, and twenty-one of freshwater
fishes; or a total of 138 peculiar generic types of vertebrata.
Of these, 87 are mammalia and land-birds out of a total
of 274 genera of these groups; or rather less than one-third
peculiar, a number which will serve usefully to compare with
the results obtained in other regions.

In our chapter on Zoological Regions we have already pointed
out the main features which distinguish the Palearctic from the
Oriental and Ethiopian regions. The details now given will

CHAP. X.] THE PALZARCTIC REGION. 187

strengthen our view of their radical distinctness, by showing to
how considerable an extent the former is inhabited by peculiar,
and often very remarkable generic types.

Insects : Lepidoptera.—The Diurnal Lepidoptera, or butterflies,
are not very abundant in species, their number being probably
somewhat over 500,and these belong to not more than fifty genera.
But no less than fifteen of these genera are wholly confined to
the region. Nine of the families are represented, as follows :—
1. Danaide ; having only a single species in South Europe.
2. Satyride ; well represented, there being more than 100 species
in Europe, and three peculiar genera. 3. Nymphalidae ; rather
poorly represented, Europe having only about sixty species, but
there is one peculiar genus. 4. Libytheide ; avery small family,
represented by a single species occurring in South Europe.
5. Nemeobiide ; a rather small family, also having only one
species in Europe, but which constitutes a peculiar genera.
6. Lycenide ; an extensive family, fairly represented, having
about eighty European species ; there are two peculiar genera
in the Palearctic region. 7. Pieride ; rather poorly represented
with thirty-two European species; two of the genera are, how-
ever, peculiar. 8. Papilionide ; very poorly represented in
Europe with only twelve species, but there are many more in
Siberia and Japan. No less than five of the small number of
genera in this family are wholly confined to the region, a
fact of much importance, and which to a great extent redeems
the character of the Palearctic region as regard this order of
insects. Their names are Mesapia, Hypermnestra, Doritis,
Sericinus, and Thais ; and besides these we have Parnassius—
the “ Apollo” butterflies—highly characteristic, and only found
elsewhere in the mountains of the Nearctic region. 9. Hes-
peride ; poorly represented with about thirty European species,
and one peculiar genus.

Four families of Sphingina occur in the Palearctic region,
and there are several peculiar genera.

In the Zygenide there are two exclusiyely European genera,
and the extensive genus Zygena is itself mainly Palearctic.
The small family Stygiide has two out of its three genera

188 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART LI.

confined to the Palzarctic region. In the geriide the genus
geria is mainly Palearctic. The Sphingide havea wider
general range, and none of the larger genera are peculiar to any
one region.

Coleoptera.—The Palearctic region is the richest portion of
the globe in the great family of Carabide, or predacious ground-
beetles, about 50 of the genera being confined to it, while many
others, including the magnificent genus Carabus, have here their
highest development. While several of the smaller genera are
confined to the eastern or western sub-regions, most of the larger
ones extend over the whole area, and give it an unmistakable
aspect ; while in passing from east to west or vice-versd, allied
species and genera replace each other with considerable regu-
larity, except in the extreme south-east, where, in China and
Japan, some Oriental forms appear, as do a few Ethiopian types
in the south-west.

Cicindelide, or tiger-beetles, are but poorly represented by
about 70 species of the genus Cicindela, and a single Tetracha
in South Europe.

Lucanide, or stag-beetles, are also poor, there being represen-
tatives of 8 genera. One of these, Msalus (a single species),
is peculiar to South Europe, and two others, Cladognathus and
Cyclopthalmus, are only represented in Japan, China, and Thibet.

Cetoniide, or rose-chafers, are represented by 13 genera,
two of which are peculiar to South Europe (TZropinota and
Heterocnemis), while Stalagmosoma, ranging from Persia to
Nubia, and the fine Dicranocephalus inhabiting North China,
Corea, and Nipal, may also be considered to belong to it. The
genera Trichius, Gnorimus, and Osmoderma are confined to the
two north temperate regions. ,

Buprestide, or metallic beetles, are rather abundant in the
warmer parts of the region, 27 genera being represented, nine
of which are peculiar. By far the larger portion of these are
confined to the Mediterranean sub-region. A considerable
number also inhabit Japan and China.

The Longicorns, or long-horned beetles, are represented by
no less than 196 genera, 51 of which are peculiar. They are

CHAP. X.] THE PALAARCTIC REGION. 189

much more abundant in the southern than the northern half
of the region. Several Oriental genera extend to Japan and
North China, and a few Ethiopian genera to North Africa.
Thirteen genera are confined to the two north temperate regions.
Several large genera, such as Dorcadion (154 species), Phytacia
(85 species), Pogonochwrus (22 species), Agapanthia (22 species),
and Vesperus (7 species), are altogether peculiar to the Pale-
arctic region; and with a preponderance of Leptura, Grammop-
tera, Stenocorus, and several others, strongly characterise it as
distinct from the Nearctic and Oriental regions.

The other families which are well developed in the Palearctic
regions, are, the Staphylinide or rove-beetles, Silphide or
burying-beetles, Histeridze or mimic-beetles, Nitidulide, Apho-
diide, Copride (especially in South Europe), Geotrupide or
dung - beetles, Melolonthide or chafers, Elateride or click-
beetles, the various families of Malacoderms and Heteromera,
especially Pimeliide in the Mediterranean sub-region, Curculion-
ide or weevils, the Phytophaga or leaf-eaters, and Cocinellide
or lady-birds.

The number of species of Coleoptera in the western part of
the Palearctic region is about 15,000, and there are probably
not more than 2,000 to add to this number from Siberia.
Japan, and North China; but were these countries as well
explored as Europe, we may expect that they would add at
least 5,000 to the number above given, raising the Palearctic
Coleopterous fauna to 20,000 species. As the total number of
species at present known to exist in collections is estimated (and
perhaps somewhat over-estimated) at 70,000 species, we may
be sure that were the whole earth as thoroughly investigated
as Europe, the number would be at least doubled, since we
cannot suppose that Europe, with the Mediterranean basin, can
contain more than one-fifth of the whole of the Coleoptera of
the globe.

Of the other orders of insects we here say nothing, because in
their case much more than in that of the Coleoptera and Lepi-
doptera, is the disproportion enormous between our knowledge of
the European fauna and that of almost al) the rest of the globe.

130 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART IIL.

They are, therefore, at present of comparatively little use for
purposes of geographical distribution, even were it advisable
to enter into the subject in a work which will, perhaps, be too
much overburdened with details only of interest to specialists.

Land Shells—These are very numerous in the warmer parts
of the region, but comparatively scarce towards the North.
South Europe alone possesses over 600 species, whereas there are
only 200 in all Northern Europe and Asia. The total number
of species in the whole region is probably about 1,250, of which
the great majority are Helicide; the Operculated families being
very poorly represented. Several small genera or sub-genera
are peculiar to the region, as Testacella (West Europe and
Canaries); Lewcochroa (Mediterranean district); Aczeula (Europe);
Craspedopoma (Atlantic Islands) ; Leonia (Algeria and Spain) ;
Pomatias (Europe and Canaries) ; Cecina (Mongolia). The largest
genera are Helix and Clausilia, which together comprise more
than half the species; Pupa, very numerous; Bulimus and
Achatina in moderate numbers, and all the rest small.
Helix is the only genus which contains large and handsome
species ; Bulimus and Achatina, so magnificent in tropical coun-
tries, being here represented by small and obscure forms only.
Daudebardia is confined to Central and South Europe and New
Zealand ; Glandina is chiefly South American ; Hyalina is only
American and European; Buliminus ranges over all the world
except America ; and the other European genera of Helicide are
widely distributed. Of the Operculata, Cyclotus, Cyclophorus,
and Pupina extend from the Oriental region into Japan and
North China ; Zudoriais found in Algeria and the West Indies ;
Hydrocena is widely scattered, and occurs in South Europe and
Japan. The genera of freshwater shells are all widely dis-
tributed.

THE PALAARCTIC SUB-REGIONS.

The four sub-regions which are here adopted, have been
fixed upon as those which are, in the present state of our know-
ledge, at once the most natural and the only practicable ones.

CHAP. X. | THE PALZZARCTIC REGION. 191

No doubt all of them could be advantageously again sub-
divided, in a detailed study of the geographical distribution of
species, But in a general work, which aims at treating all parts
of the world with equal fulness, and which therefore is confined
almost wholly to the distribution of families and genera, such
further subdivision would be out of place. It is even difficult,
in some of the classes of animals, to find peculiar or even
characteristic genera for the present sub-regions ; but they all
have well marked climatic and physical differences, and this
leads to an assemblage of species and of groups which are suffi-
ciently distinctive.

I. Central and Northern Europe.

This sub-region, which may perhaps be termed the “ European,”
is zoologically and botanically the best known on the globe. It
can be pretty accurately defined, as bounded on the south by
the Pyrenees, the Alps, the Balkans, the Black Sea, and the
Caucasus range; and by the Ural Mountains, or perhaps more
correctly the valley of the Irtish and Caspian Sea, on the east ;
while Ireland and Iceland are its furthest outhers in the west.
To the north, it merges so gradually into the Arctic zone that
no demarcation is possible. The great extent to which this
sub-region is interpenetrated by the sea, and the prevalence
of westerly winds bringing warmth and moisture from an ocean
influenced by the gulf-stream, give it a climate for the most
part genial, and free from extremes of heat and cold. It
is thus broadly distinguished from Siberia and Northern
Asia generally, where a more extreme and rigorous climate
prevails.

The whole of this sub-region is well watered, being pene-
trated by rivers in every direction; and it consists mainly of
plains and undulating country of moderate elevation, the chief
mountain ranges being those of Scandinavia in the north-west,
and the extensive alpine system of Central Europe. But these
are both of moderate height, and a very small portion of their
surface is occupied either by permanent snow-fields, or by
barren uplands inimical to vegetable and animal life. It is, in

192 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

fact, to these, and the numerous lesser mountains and hills
which everywhere diversify the surface of Europe, that the
variety and abundance of its animal life is greatly due. They
afford the perennial supplies to rivers, and furnish in their
valleys and ever varying slopes, stations suited to every form
of existence. A considerable area of Central Europe is oc-
cupied by uplands of moderate elevation, a comparatively
small portion being flat and marshy plains.

Most of the northern and much of the central portions of
Europe are covered with vast forests of coniferous trees; and
these, occupying as they do those tracts where the winter is
most severe, supply food and shelter to many animals who could
not otherwise maintain their existence. It is probable that
the original condition of the greater part, if not the whole, of
temperate Europe, except the flat marshes of the river valleys
and the sandy downs of the coast, was that of woodland and
forest, mostly of deciduous trees, but with a plentiful admixture
of such hardy evergreens as holly, ivy, privet, and yew. A
sufficient proportion of these primeval woods, and of artificial
plantations which have replaced them, fortunately remain, to
preserve for us most of the interesting forms of life, which
were developed before man had so greatly modified the surface
of the earth, and so nearly exterminated many of its original
tenants. Almost exactly in proportion to the amount of
woodland that still remains in any part of Europe, do we
find (other things being equal) the abundance and variety
of wild animals; a pretty clear indication that the original
condition of the country was essentially that of a forest, a
condition which only now exists in the thinly inhabited regions
of the north.

Although the sub-region we are considering is, for its extent
and latitude, richly peopled with animal life, the number of
genera altogether peculiar to it is not great. There are, however,
several which are very characteristic, and many species, both
of the smaller mammalia and of birds, are wholly restricted
to it.

Mammalia.—The genera wholly confined to this sub-region are

CHAP. X.] THE PALAARCTIC REGION. 193

only two. Myogale, the desman, is a curious long-snouted
Insectivorous animal somewhat resembling the water-rat in its
habits. There are two species, one found only on the banks of
streams in the French Pyrenees, the other on the great rivers of
Southern Russia. The other peculiar genus, Rupicapra (the
chamois of the Alps), is found on all the high mountains of
Central Europe. Almost peculiar are Spalax (the mole-rat)
found only in Eastern Europe and Western Siberia; and Saga,
an extraordinary large-nosed antelope which has a nearly
similar distribution. Highly characteristic forms, which inhabit
nearly every part of the sub-region, are, Zalpa (the mole),
Erinaceus, (the hedgehog), Sorex (the shrew), M€eles (the badger),
Ursus (the bear), Canis (the wolf and fox), Mustela (the weasel),
Lutra (the otter), Arvicola (the vole), Myoxus (the dormouse),
and Lepus (the hare and rabbit) ; while Bos (the wild bull) was,
until exterminated by man, no doubt equally characteristic.
Other genera inhabiting the sub-region will be found in the list
given at the end of this chapter.

Birds.—It is difficult to name the birds that are most charac-
teristic of this sub-region, because so many of the most familiar
and abundant are emigrants from the south, and belong to
groups that have a different range. There is perhaps not a
single genus wholly confined to it, and very few that have not
equal claims to be placed elsewhere. Among the more charac-
teristic we may name TZwrdus (the thrushes), Sylvia (the war-
blers), Panurus (the reedling) Parus (the tits), Anthus (the
pipits), Motacilla (the wagtails), which are perhaps more abun-
dant here than in any other part of the world, Hmberiza (the
buntings), Plectrophanes (the snow buntings), Passer (the house
sparrows), Loxia (the crossbills), Zinota (the linnets), Pica (the
magpies), Zetrao (grouse), Lagopus (ptarmigan) and many others.

I am indebted to Mr. H. E. Dresser, who is personally ac-
quainted with the ornithology of much of the North of Europe,
for some valuable notes on the northern range of many Euro-
pean birds. Those which are characteristic of the extreme
Arctic zone, extending beyond 70° north latitude, and toler-
ably abundant, are two falcons (Falco gyrfalco and F. peregrinus) ;

194 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

the rough-legged buzzard (Archibuteo lagopus); the snowy owl
(Nyctea scandiaca); the raven (Corvus corax); three buntings
(Emberiza scheniculus, Plectrophanes nivalis and P. calearata) ; a
lark (Otocorys alpestris) ; several pipits, the most northern being
Anthus cervinus; a wagtail (Budytes cinereocapilla); a dipper
(Cinclus melanogaster); a warbler (Cyanecula suecica); the
wheatear (Saxicola ananthe); and two ptarmigans (Lagopus
albus and L. salicetus). Most of these birds are, of course, only
summer visitors to the Arctic regions, the only species noted as
a permanent resident in Kast Finmark (north of latitude 70°)
being the snow-bunting (Plectrophanes nivalis).

The birds that are characteristic of the zone of pine forests,
or from about 61° to 70° north latitude, are very numerous, and
it will be sufficient to note the genera and the number of
species (where more than one) to give an idea of the ornitho-
_ logy of this part of Europe. The birds of prey are, Falco (three
species), Astur (two species), Butco, Pandion, Surnia, Bubo,
Syrnium, Asio, Nyctala. The chief Passerine birds are, Corvus
(two species), Pica, Garrulus (two species), Nucifraga, Bomby-
cilla, Hirundo (two species), Muscicapa (two species), Lanius,
Sturnus, Passer (two species), Pyrrhula, Carpodacus, Loxia (two
species), Pinicola, Fringilla (eight species), Emberiza (five
species), Alauda, Anthus, Turdus (five species), Rutecilla, Pratin-
cola, Accentor, Sylvia (four species), Hypolais, Regulus, Phylloscopus
(two species), Acrocephalus, Troglodytes, and Parus (six species).
Woodpeckers are abundant, Picus (four species), Gecinus, and
Yunx. The kingfisher (Alcedo), goatsucker (Caprimulgus), and
swift (Cypselus) are also common. The wood-pigeon (Colwmba)
is plentiful. The gallinaceous birds are three grouse, Tetrao (two
species) and Bonasa, and the common quail (Coteurniz).

The remaining genera and species of temperate or north-
European birds, do not usually range beyond the region of
deciduous trees, roughly indicated by the parallel of 60° north
latitude.

Plate I.—TIllustrating the Zoology of Central Europe—
Before considering the distribution of the other classes of
vertebrata, it will be convenient to introduce our first illustra-

PAT:

il
i} iH
i

a a

| | it wy) a
\\\ me
il ss

LL HOM
ue

eae

en ess

ROPE, WITH CHARACTERISTIC ANIMALS.

j

THE ALPS OF CENTRAL EU

CHAP. X.] THE PAL ARCTIC REGION. 195

tion, which represents a scene in the Alps of Central Europe,
with figures of some of the most characteristic Mammalia
and Birds of this sub-region. On the left is the badger
(Meles Taxus) one of the weasel family, and belonging to a
genus which is strictly Palearctic. It abounds in Central and
Northern Europe and also extends into North Asia, but is repre-
sented by another species in Thibet and by a third in Japan.
The elegantly-formed creatures on the right are chamois (Rupi-
capra tragus), almost the only European antelopes, and wholly
confined to the higher mountains, from the Pyrenees to the
Carpathians and the Caucasus. The chamois is the only
species of the genus, and is thus perhaps the most characteristic
European mammal. The bird on the left, above the badgers, is
the Alpine chough, (fregilus pyrrhocorax). It is found in the
high mountains from the Alps to the Himalayas, and is allied
to the Cornish chough, which is still found on our south-
western coasts, and which ranges to Abyssinia and North
China. The Alpine chough differs in having a shorter bill of
an orange colour, and vermilion red feet as in the other
species. In the foreground are a pair of ruffs (Machetes pugnaz)
belonging to the Scolopacide or snipe family, and most nearly
allied to the genus 7ringa or sandpiper. This bird is remark-
able for the fine collar of plumes which adorns the males in the
breeding season, when they are excessively pugnacious. It is
the only species of its genus, and ranges over all Europe and
much of Northern Asia, migrating in the winter to the plains of
India, and even down the east coast of Africa as far as the
Cape of Good Hope; but it only breeds in the Palearctic
region, over the greater part of which it ranges.

Reptiles and Amphibia.—There are no genera of reptiles
peculiar to this sub-region. Both snakes and lizards are compara-
tively scarce, there being about fourteen species of the former
and twelve of the latter. Our common snake (TZ’ropidonotus
natriz) extends into Sweden and North Russia, but the viper
(Viperus berus) goes further north, as far as Archangel (64° N.),
and in Scandinavia (67° N.), and is the most Arctic of all known

196 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

snakes. Of the lizards, Lacerta stirpiwm (the sand lizard) has
the most northerly range, extending into Poland and Northern
Russia; and Anguis fragilis (the blind or slow-worm). has almost
an equal range.

Amphibia, being more adapted to a northern climate, have
acquired a more special development, and thus several forms
are peculiar to the North European sub-region. Most remarkable
is Proteus, a singular eel-like aquatic creature with small legs,
found only in the subterranean lakes in Carniola and Carinthia ;
Alytes, a curious toad, the male of which carries about the eggs
till they are hatched, found only in Central Europe from
France to the east of Hungary; and Pelodytes, a frog found only
in France. Frogs and toads are very abundant all over Europe, the
common frog (Rana temporaria) extending to the extreme north.
The newts (7'riton) are also very abundant and widely spreaa,
though not ranging so far north as the frogs. The genera Bom-
binator (a toad-like frog), and Hyla (the tree frog) are also com-
mon in Central Europe.

Freshwater Fish.—Two genera of the perch family (Percidee) are
peculiar to this sub-region,—FPercarina, a fish found only in the
river Dniester, and Aspro, confined to the rivers of Central
Europe. Of the very characteristic forms are, Gasterosteus
(stickle-back), which alone forms a peculiar family—Gasteros-
teide ; Perca, Acerina and Lucioperca, genera of the perch family ;
Silurus, a large fish found in the rivers of Cenrtal Europe, of
the family Siluride; Hsox (the pike), of the family Esocide ,
Cyprinus (carp), Gobio (gudgeon), ZLeuciscus (roach, chub, dace,
&e.), Tinca (tench), Abramus (bream), Alburnus (bleak), Cobitis
(loach), all genera of the family Cyprinide.

Insects—Lepidoptera.—No genera of butterflies are actually
confined to this sub-region, but many are characteristic of it.
Parnassius, Aporia, Leucophasia, Colias, Melitea, Argynnis,
Vanessa, Limenitis, and Chionobas, are all very abundant and
widespread, and give a feature to the entomology of most of the
countries included in it.

Coleoptera.—This sub-region is very rich in Carabide; the
genera Elaphrus, Nebria, Carabus, Cychrus, Pterostichus, Amara,

CHAP. X.] THE PALAARCTIC REGION. 197

Trechus and Peryphus being especially characteristic. Staphy-
linide abound. Among Lamellicorns the genus Aphodius is
most characteristic. Buprestide are scarce ; Elateride more
abundant. Among Malacoderms Zelephorus and Malachius are
characteristic. Curculionide abound: Otiorhyuchus, Omias,
Erirhinus, Bagous, Rhynchites and Ceutorhynchus being very
characteristic genera. Of Longicorns Callidiwm, Dorcadion,
Pogonocherus, Pachyta and Leptura are perhaps the best re-
presentatives. Donacia, Crioceris, Chrysomela, and Altica, are
typical Phytophaga; while Coccinella is the best representa-
tive of the Securipalpes.

North European Islands.—The British Islands are known to
have been recently connected with the Continent, and their
animal productions are so uniformly identical with continental
species as to require no special note. The only general fact of
importance is, that the number of species in all groups is much
less than in continental districts of equal extent, and that this
number is still farther diminished in Ireland, This may be
accounted for by the smaller area and less varied surface of the
latter island; and it may also be partly due to the great extent
of low land, so that a very small depression would reduce it
to the condition of a cluster of small islands capable of sup-
porting a very limited amount of animal life. Yet further, if
after such a submergence had destroyed much of the higher
forms of hfe in Great Britain and Ireland, both were elevated so
as to again form part of the Continent, a migration would com-
mence by which they would be stocked afresh ; but this migra-
tion would be a work of time, and it is to be expected that
many species would never reach Ireland or would find its exces-
sively moist climate unsuited to them.

Some few British species differ slightly from their continental
allies, and are considered by many naturalists to be distinct.
This is the case with the red grouse (Lagopus scoticus) among
birds ; and a few of the smaller Passeres have also been found
to vary somewhat from the allied forms on the Continent, show-
ing that the comparatively short interval since the glacial period,
and the slightly different physical conditions dependent on

198 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

insularity, have sufficed to commence the work of specific
modification. There are also a few small land-shells and several
insects not yet found elsewhere than in Britain ; and even one
of the smaller Mammalia—a shrew (Sorex rusticus). These facts
are all readily explained by the former union of these islands
with the Continent, and the alternate depressions and elevations
which are proved by geological evidence to have occurred, by
which they have been more than once separated and united
again in recent times. For the evidence of this elevation and
depression, the reader may consult Sir Charles Lyell’s Antiquity
of Man.

Iceland is the only other island of importance belonging to
this sub-region, and it contrasts strongly with Great Britain,
both in its Arctic climate and oceanic position. It is situated
just south of the Arctic circle and considerably nearer Green-
land than Europe, yet its productions are almost wholly European.
The only indigenous land mammalia are the Arctic fox (Canis
lagopus), and the polar bear as an occasional visitant, with a
mouse (Mus islandicus), said to be of a peculiar species. Four
species of seals visit its shores. The birds are more interesting.
According to Professor Newton, ninety-five species have been
observed ; but many of these are mere stragglers. There are
twenty-three land, and seventy-two aquatic birds and waders.
Four or five are peculiar species, though very closely related to
others inhabiting Scandinavia or Greenland. Only two or
three species are more nearly related to Greenland birds than to
those of Northern Europe, so that the Palearctic character of
the fauna is unmistakable. The foliowing lists, compiled from
a paper by Professor Newton, may be interesting as showing
more exactly the character of Icelandic ornithology.

1. Peculiar species. —T7vroglodytes borealis (closely allied
to the common wren, found also in the Faroe Islands); Falco
islandicus (closely allied to F. gyrfalco); Lagopus islandorum
(closely allied to LZ. rupestris of Greenland).

2. European species resident in Iceland—Kmberiza nivalis,
Corvus corax, Halicetus albicilla, Rallus aquaticus, Hematopus
ostralegus, Cygnus ferus, Mergus (two species), Phalacocorax (two

CHAP. X.] THE PALZARCTIC REGION, 199

species), Sula bassana, Larus (two species), Stercorarius catar-
ractes, Puffinus anglorum, Mergulus alle, Uria (three species),
Alca torda.

3. American species resident in Iceland—Clangula islandica,
Histrionicus torquatus,

4, Annual visitants from Europe—T7wrdus iliacus, Ruticilla
tithys, Saxicola cenanthe, Motacilla alba, Anthus pratensis, Linota
linaria, Chelidon urbica, Hirundo rustica, Falco cwsalon, Surnia
nyctea, Otus brachyotus, Charadrius pluvialis, Aigialites hiaticula,
Strepsilas interpres, Phalaropus fulicarius, Totanus calidris,
Limosa (species), Tringa (three species), Calidris arenaria,
Gallinago media, Numenius pheopus, Ardea cinerea, Anser (two
species), Bernicla (two species), Anas (four species), Fuligula
marila, Harelda glacialis, Somateria mollissima, Hdemia nigra,
Sterna macrura, Rissa tridactyla, Larus luecopterus, Stercorarius
(two species), Fratercula artica, Colymbus (two species), Podi-
ceps cornutus.

5. Annual visitant from Greenland.—Falco candicans.

6.—Former resident, now extinct.—Alca impennis (the
great auk).

LT—Mediterranean Sub-region.

This is by far the richest portion of the Palearctic region,
for although of moderate extent much of it enjoys a climate in
which the rigours of winter are almost unknown. It includes
all the countries south of the Pyrenees, Alps, Balkans, and
Caucasus mountains; all the southern shores of the Mediter-
ranean to the Atlas range, and even beyond it to include the
extra-tropical portion of the Sahara; and in the Nile valley
as far as the second cataract. Further east it includes the
northern half of Arabia and the whole of Persia, as well as
Beluchistan, and perhaps Affghanistan up to the banks of the
Indus. This extensive district is almost wholly a region of
mountains and elevated plateaus. On the west, Spain is
mainly a table-land of more than 2000 feet elevation, deeply
penetrated by extensive valleys and rising into lofty moun-
tain chains. Italy, Corsica, Sardinia, and Sicily, are all. very

200 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART II.

mountainous, and much of their surface considerably elevated.
Further east we have all European Turkey and Greece, a
mountain region with a comparatively small extent of level
plain. In Asia the whole country, from Smyrna through
Armenia and Persia to the further borders of Affghanistan, is a
vast mountainous plateau, almost all above 2000, and extensive
districts above 5000 feet in elevation. The only large tract of
low-land is the valley of the Euphrates. There is also some
low-land south of the Caucasus, and in Syria the valley of the
Jordan. In North Africa the valley of the Nile and the coast
plains of Tripoli and Algiers are almost the only exceptions to
the more or less mountainous and plateau-like character of the
country. Much of this extensive area is now bare and arid,
and often even of a desert character; a fact no doubt due, in
great part, to the destruction of aboriginal forests. This loss
is rendered permanent by the absence of irrigation, and, it is
also thought, by the abundance of camels and goats, animals
which are exceedingly injurious to woody vegetation, and are
able to keep down the natural growth of forests. Mr. Marsh
whose valuable work Man and Nature gives much information
on this subject) believes that even large portions of the African
and Asiatic deserts would become covered with woods, and the
climate thereby greatly improved, were they protected from
these destructive domestic animals, which are probably not
indigenous to the country. Spain, in proportion to its extent,
is very barren; Italy and European Turkey are more woody and
luxuriant ; but it is perhaps in Asia Minor, on the range of the
Taurus, along the shores of the Black Sea, and to the south of
the Caucasus range, that this sub-region attains its maximum of
luxuriance in vegetation and in animal life. From the Caspian
eastward extends a region of arid plains and barren deserts,
diversified by a few more fertile valleys, in which the charac-
teristic flora and fauna of this portion of the Palearctic region
abounds. Further east we come to the forests of the Hindoo
Koosh, which probably form the limit of the sub-region.
Beyond these we enter on the Siberian sub-region to the north,
and on the outlying portion of the Oriental region on the south,

CHAP. X.] THE PALZZARCTIC REGION. 201

In addition to the territories now indicated as forming part
of the Mediterranean sub-region, we must add the group of
Canary Islands off the west coast of Africa which seem to be
an extension of the Atlas mountains, and the oceanic groups of
Madeira and the Azores; the latter about 1,000 miles from the
continent of Europe, yet still unmistakably allied to it both in
their vegetable and animal productions. The peculiarities of the
faunas of these islands will be subsequently referred to.

It seems at first sight very extraordinary, that so large and
wide a sea as the Mediterranean should not separate distinct
faunas, and this is the more remarkable when we find how very
deep the Mediterranean is, and therefore how ancient we may
well suppose it to be. Its eastern portion reaches a depth of
2,100 fathoms or 12,600 feet, while its western basin is about
1,600 fathoms or 9,600 feet in greatest depth, and a considerable
area of both basins is more than 1,000 fathoms deep. But a
further examination shows, that a comparatively shallow sea or
submerged bank incloses Malta and Sicily, and that on the
opposite coast a similar bank stretches out from the coast of
Tripoli leaving a rarrow channel the greatest depth of which is
240 fathoms. Here therefore is a broad plateau, which an
elevation of about 1,500 feet would convert into a wide extent
of land connecting Italy with Africa; while the same elevation
would also connect Morocco with Spain, leaving two extensive
lakes to represent what is now the Mediterranean Sea, and afford-
ing free communication for land animals between Europe and
North Africa. That such a state of things existed at a com-
paratively recent period, is almost certain; not only because a
considerable number of identical species of mammalia inhabit the
opposite shores of the Mediterranean, but also because numerous
remains of three species of elephants have been found in caves
in Malta,—now a small rocky island in which it would be im-
possible for such animals to live even if they could reach it.
Remains of hippopotami are also found at Gibraltar, and many
other animals of African types in Greece ; all indicating means
of communication between South Europe and North Africa which
no longer exist. (See Chapter VI. pp. 113—115.)

Vou. L—15

202 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

Mammalia.—There are a few groups of Palearctic Mammalia
that are peculiar to this sub-region. Such are, Dama, the
fallow deer, which is now found only in South Europe and North
Africa; Psammomys, a peculiar genus of Muride, found only in
Egypt and Palestine; while Ctenodactylus, a rat-like animal
classed in the South American family Octodontide, inhabits
Tripoli. Among characteristic genera not found in other sub-
regions, are, Dysopes, a bat of the family Noctilionide; Macros-
celides, the elephant shrew, in North Africa; Genetta, the
civet, in South Europe; Herpestes, the ichneumon, in North
Africa and (?) Spain; Hyena, in South Europe ; Gazella, Oryx,
Alcephalus, and Addaa, genera of antelopes in North Africa
and Palestine ; Hyrax, in Syria: and Hystrix, the porcupine,
in South Europe. Besides these, the camel and the horse
were perhaps once indigenous in the eastern parts of the sub-
region ; and a wild sheep (Ovis musmon) still inhabits Sardinia,
Corsica, and the mountains of the south-east of Spain. The
presence of the large feline animals—such as the lion, the
leopard, the serval, and the hunting leopard—in North Africa,
together with several other quadrupeds not found in Europe,
have been thought by some naturalists to prove, that this dis-
trict should not form part of the Palearctic region. No doubt
several Ethiopian groups and species have entered it from the
south, but the bulk of its Mammalia still remains Palearctic,
although several of the species have Asiatic rather than Euro-
pean affinities. The Macacus innwus is allied to an Asiatic
rather than an African group of monkeys, and thus denotes an
Oriental affinity. Ethiopian affinity is apparently shown by the
three genera of antelopes, by Herpestes, and by Macroscelides ; but
our examination of the Miocene fauna has shown that these were
probably derived from Europe originally, and do not form any
part of the truly indigenous or ancient Ethiopian fauna. Against
these, however, we have the occurrence in North Africa of
such purely Palearctic and non-Ethiopian genera as Ursus, Meles,
Putorius, Sus, Cervus, Dama, Capra, Alactaga ; together with
actual European or West Asiatic species of Canis, Genetta, Felis,
Putorius, Lutra, many bats, Sorex, Crocidura, Crossopus, Hystrix,

CHAP. X.] THE PALZZARCTIC REGION. 203
Dipus, Lepus,and Mus. It is admitted that, as regards every
other group of animals, North Africa is Palearctic, and the
above enumeration shows that even in Mammalia, the inter-
mixture of what are now true Ethiopian types is altogether
insignificant. It must be remembered, also, that the lion
inhabited Greece even in historic times, while large carnivora
were contemporary with man all over Central Europe.

Birds—So many of the European birds migrate over large
portions of the region, and so many others have a wide perma-
nent range, that we cannot expect to find more than a few
genera, consisting of one or two species, each, confined to a sub-
region; and such appear to be, Lusciniola and Pyrophthalma,
genera of Sylviide. But many are characteristic of this, as
compared with other Palearctic sub-regions; such as, Bradyp-
tetus, Aedon, Dromolwa, and Cercomela, among Sylviide; Crate-
ropus and Malacocercus, among Timaliide; Telophonus among
Laniide; Certhilauda and Mirafra among larks; Pastor among
starlings; Upupa, the hoopoe; Halycon and Ceryle among
kinefishers; Zurniz and Caccalbis among Galline, and the
pheasant as an indigenous bird ; together with Gyps, Vultur and
Neophron, genera of vultures. In addition to these, almost all
our summer migrants spend their winter in some part of this
favoured land, mostly in North Africa, together with many
species of Central Europe that rarely or never visit us. It
follows, that a large proportion of all the birds of Europe and
Western Asia are to be found in this sub-region, as will be seen
by referring to the list of the genera of the region. Palestine
is one of the remote portions of this region which has been
well explored by Canon Tristram, and it may be interesting to
give his summary of the range of the birds. We must bear
in mind that the great depression of the Dead Sea has a tropical
climate, which accounts for the presence here only, of such a
tropical form as the sun-bird (Wectarinea osea).

The total number of the birds of Palestine is 322, and of
these no less than 260 are European, at once settling the question
of the general affinities of the fauna. Of the remainder eleven
belong to North and East Asia, four to the Red Sea, and thirty-

204 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

one to East Africa, while twenty-seven are peculiar to Palestine.
It is evident therefore that an unusual number of East African
birds have extended their range to this congenial district, but
most of these are desert species and hardly true Ethiopians,
and do not much interfere with the general Palearctic character
of the whole assemblage. As an illustration of how wide-spread
are many of the Palearctic forms, we may add, that seventy-
nine species of land birds and fifty-five of water birds, are com-
mon to Palestine and Britain. The Oriental and Ethiopian
genera Pycnonotus and Nectarinea are found here, while Bessornis
and Dromolea are characteristically Ethiopian. Almost all the
other genera are Palearctic.

Persia is another remote region generally associated with the
idea of Oriental and almost tropical forms, but which yet undoubt-
edly belongs to the Palearctic region. Mr. Blanford’s recent
collections in this country, with other interesting information, is
summarised in Mr. Elwes’s paper on the “ Geographical Distri-
bution of Asiatic Birds” (Proc. Zool. Soc. 1873, p. 647). No less
than 127 species are found also in Europe, and thirty-seven
others belong to European genera; seven are allied to birds of
Central Asia or Siberia, and fifteen to those of North-East Africa,
while only three are purely of Indian affinities. This shows a
preponderance of nearly nine-tenths of Palearctic forms, which
is fully as much as can be expected in any country near the
limits of a great region.

Reptiles and Amphibia.—The climatal conditions being here
more favourable to these groups, and the genera being often of
limited range, we find some peculiar, and several very interesting
forms. hinechis,a genus of Colubrine snakes, is found only in
South ‘Europe; Z'rogonophis, one of the Amphisbzenians—
curious snake-like lizards—is known only from North Africa;
Psammosaurus, belonging to the water lizards (Varanidee) is
found in North Africa and North-West India; Psammodromus,
a genus of Lacertide, is peculiar to South Europe ; Hyalosaurus,
belonging to the family Zonuridz, is a lizard of especial in-
terest, as it inhabits North Africa while its nearest ally is the
Ophisaurus or “glass snake” of North America; the family of

CHAP. X.] THE PALZZARCTIC REGION. 205

the scinks is represented by Sczncus found in North Africa and
Arabia. Besides these Seps, a genus of sand lizards (Sepidze) and
Agama, a genus of Agamide, are abundant and characteristic.

Of Amphibia we have Sezranota, a genus of salamanders
found only in Italy and Dalmatia; Chzoglossa, in Portugal, and
Geotriton, in Italy, belonging to the same family, are equally
peculiar to the sub-region.

Freshwater Fish—One of the most interesting is Tellia, a
genus of Cyprinodontide found only in alpine pools in the
Atlas mountains. Paraphoxinius, found in South-East Europe,
and Chondrostoma, in Europe and Western Asia, genera of Cypri-
mide, seem almost peculiar to this sub-region.

Insects—Lepidoptera—Two genera of butterflies, Thais and
Doritis, are wholly confined to this sub-region, the former
ranging over all Southern Europe, the latter confined to Eastern
Europe and Asia Minor. Anthocharis and Zegris are very cha-
racteristic of it, the latter only extending into South Russia,
while Danais, Charaxes, and Libythea are tropical genera un-
known in other parts of Europe.

Coleoptera.—This sub-region is very rich in many groups of
Coleoptera, of which a few only can be noticed here. Among
Carabide it possesses Procerus and Procrustes, almost exclusively,
while Brachinus, Cymindis, Lebia, Graphipterus, Scarites, Chle-
nius, Calathus, and many others, are abundant and characteristic.
Among Lamellicorns—Copride, Glaphyridw, Melolonthide, and
Cetoniide abound. Buprestide are plentiful, the genera Julodis,
Acmeodera, Buprestis, and Sphenoptera being characteristic.
Among Malacoderms—Cebrionide, Lampyride, and Malachiide
abound. The Tenebrioid Heteromera are very varied and abun-
dant, and give a character to the sub-region. The Mylabride,
Cantharide, and CEdemeride are also characteristic. Of the
immense number of Curculionide—TZhylacites, Brachycerus,
Livus, and Acalles may be mentioned as among the most pro-
minent. Of Longicorns there are few genera especially cha-
racteristic, but perhaps Prinobius, Purpuricenus, Hesperophanes,
and Parmena are most so. Of the remaining families, we may
mention Clythride, Hispide, and Cassidide as being abundant.

206 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

The Mediterranean and Atlantic Islands.—The various islands
of the Mediterranean are interesting to the student of geo-
graphical distribution as affording a few examples of local species
of very restricted range, but as a rule they present us with
exactly the same forms as those of the adjacent mainland.!
Their peculiarities do not, therefore, properly come within the
scope of this work. The islands of the Atlantic Ocean belong-
ing to this sub-region are, from their isolated position and the
various problems they suggest, of much more interest, and their
natural history has been carefully studied. We shall therefore
give a short account of their peculiar features.

Of the three groups of Atlantic islands belonging to this sub-
region, the Canaries are nearest to the Continent, some of the
islands being only about fifty miles from the coast of Africa.
They are, however, separated from the mainland by a very deep
channel (more than 5,000 feet), as shown on our general map.
The islands extend over a length of 300 miles ; they are very
mountainous and wholly volcanic, and the celebrated peak of
Teneriffe rises to a height of more than 12,000 feet. The small
Madeira group is about 400 miles from the coast of Morocco
and 600 from the southern extremity of Portugal; and there is
a depth of more than 12,000 feet between it and the continent.
The Azores are nearly 1,000 miles west of Lisbon. They are
quite alone in mid-Atlantic, the most westerly islands being
nearer Newfoundland than Europe, and are surrounded by ocean
depths of from 12,000 to 18,000 feet. It will be convenient to
take these islands first in order.

Azores.—Considering the remoteness of this group from every
other land, it is surprising to find as many as fifty-three species
of birds inhabiting or visiting the Azores; and still more to

1 Malta is interesting as forming a resting-piace for migratory birds, while
crossing the Mediterranean. It has only eight land and three aquatic birds
which are permanent residents ; yet no less than 278 species have been
recorded by Mr. E. A. Wright as visiting or passing over it, comprising a
large proportion of the European migratory birds. The following are the
permanent residents : Cerchneis tinnunculus, Strix flammea, Passer salicicola,
Emberiza miliaria, Corvus monedula, Monticola cyanea, Sylvia conspicillata,
Columba livia, Puffinus cinereus, P. anglorum, Thalassidroma pelagica.

CHAP. X.] THE PALAARCTIC REGION. 207

find that they are of Palzarctic genera and, with one exception,
all of species found either in Europe, North Africa, Madeira,
or the Canaries. The exception is a bullfinch peculiar to the
islands, but closely allied to a European species. Of land birds
there are twenty-two, belonging to twenty-one genera, all Euro-
pean. These genera are Cerchneis, Buteo, Asio, Strix, Turdus,
Oriolus, Erithacus, Sylvia, Regulus, Saxicola, Motacilla, Plec-
trophanes, Fringilla, Pyrrhula, Serinus, Sturnus, Picus,
Upupa, Columba, Caccabis, and Coturnix. Besides the bull-
finch (Pyrrhula) other species show slight differences from their
European allies, but not such as to render them more than
varieties. The only truly indigenous mammal is a bat of a
European species. Nine butterflies inhabit the Azores; eight
of them are European species, one North American. Of beetles
212 have been collected, of which no less than 175 are Euro-
pean species; of the remainder, nineteen are found in the
Canaries or Madeira, three in South America, while fourteen
are peculiar to the islands.

Now these facts (for which we are indebted to Mr. Godman’s
Natural History of the Azores) are both unexpected and exceed-
ingly instructive. In most other cases of remote Oceanic
islands, a much larger proportion of the fauna is endemic, or
consists of peculiar species and often of peculiar genera; as is
well shown by the case of the Galapagos and Juan Fernandez,
both much nearer to a continent and both containing peculiar
genera and species of birds. Now we know that the cause and
meaning of this difference is, that in the one case the original
immigration is very remote and has never or very rarely been
repeated, so that under the unchecked influence of new condi-
tions of life the species have become modified ; in the other
case, either the original immigration has been recent, or if remote
~ has been so frequently repeated that the new comers have kept
up the purity of the stock, and have not allowed time for the
new conditions to produce the effect we are sure they would in
time produce if not counteracted. For Mr. Godman tells us
that many of the birds are modified—instancing the gold-crested
wren, blackcap, and rock dove—and he adds, that the modifica-

208 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

tion all tends in one direction—to produce a more sombre
plumage, a greater strength of feet and legs, and a more robust
bill. We further find, that four of the land-birds, including the
oriole, snow-bunting, and hoopoe, are not resident birds, but
straggle accidentally to the islands by stress of weather; and
we are told that every year some fresh birds are seen after
violent storms. Add to this the fact, that the number of
species diminishes in the group as we go from east to west, and
that the islands are subject to fierce and frequent storms
blowing trom every point of the compass,—and we have all the
facts requisite to enable us to understand how this remote
archipelago has become stocked with animal life without ever
probably being much nearer to Europe than it is now. For
the islands are all volcanic, the only stratified rock that occurs
being believed to be of Miocene date.

Madeira and the Canaries.—Coming next to Madeira, we find
the number of genera of land birds has increased to twenty-eight,
of which seventeen are identical with those of the Azores. Some
of the commonest European birds—swallows, larks, sparrows,
linnets, goldfinches, ravens, and partridges, are among the addi-
tions. A gold-crested warbler, Regulus Maderensis, and a pigeon,
Columba Trocaz, are peculiar to Madeira.

In the Canaries we find that the birds have again very much
increased, there being more than fifty genera of land birds; but
the additions are wholly European in character, and almost all
common European species. We find a few more peculiar spe-
cies (five), while some others, including the wild canary, are
common to all the Atlantic Islands or to the Canaries and
Madeira. Here, too, the only indigenous mammalia are two
European species of bats.

Land Shells.—The land shells of Madeira offer us an instruc-
tive contrast to the birds of the Atlantic Islands. About fifty-
six species have been found in Madeira, and forty-two in the small
adjacent island of Porto Santo, but only twelve are common to
both, and all or almost all are distinct from their nearest allies
in Europe and North Africa. Great numbers of fossil shells
are also found in deposits of the Newer Pliocene period; and

CHAP. X. ] THE PALAARCTIC REGION. 209

although these comprise many fresh species, the two faunas and
that of the continent still remain almost as distinct from each
other as before. It has been already stated (p. 31) that the
means by which land mollusca have been carried across arms
of the sea are unknown, although several modes may be
suggested; but it is evidently a rare event, requiring some
concurrence of favourable conditions not always present. The
diversity and specialization of the forms of these animals is,
therefore, easily explained by the fact, that, once introduced
they have been left to multiply under the influence of a variety
of local conditions, which inevitably lead, in the course of ages,
to the formation of new varieties and uew species.

Coleoptera.—The beetles of Madeira and the Canaries have
been so carefully collected and examined by Mr. T. V. Wollaston,
and those of the Azores described and compared by Mr. Crotch,
and they illustrate so many curious points in geographical dis-
tribution, that it is necessary to give some account of them. No
less than 1,480 species of beetles have been obtained from the
Canaries and Madeira, only 360 of which are European, the
remainder being peculiar to the islands. The Canaries are
inhabited by a little over 1,000 species, Madeira by about 700,
while 240 are common to both ; but it is believed that many of
these have been introduced by man. In the Azores, 212 species
have been obtained, of which 175 are European ; showing, as in
the birds, a closer resemblance to the European fauna than in
the other islands which, although nearer to the continent, offer
more shelter and are situated in a less tempestuous zone. Of
the non-European species in the Azores, 19 are found also in
the other groups of islands, 14 are peculiar, while 3 are American.
Of the European species, 132 are found also in the other Atlantic
islands, while 43 have reached the Azores only. This is inter-
esting as showing to how great an extent the same insects
reach all the islands, notwithstanding the difference of latitude
and position ; and it becomes of great theoretical importance,
when we find how many extensive families and genera are alto-
gether absent.

The Madeira group has been more thoroughly explored than

210 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART Ill.

any other, and its comparatively remote situation, combined with
its luxuriant vegetation, have been favourable to the develop-
ment and increase of the peculiar forms which characterize all
the Atlantic islands in a more or less marked degree. A con-
sideration of some of its peculiarities will, therefore, best serve
to show the bearing of the facts presented by the insect fauna of
the Atlantic islands, on the general laws of distribution. The
711 species of beetles now known from the Madeira group,
belong to 236 genera; and no less than 44 of these genera are
not European but are peculiar to the Atlantic islands. Most of
them are, however, closely allied to European genera, of which
they are evidently modifications. A most curious general feature
presented by the Madeiran beetles, is the total absence of many
whole families and large genera abundant in South Europe.
Such are the Cicindelide, or tiger beetles ; the Melolonthide, or
chafers; the Cetoniide, or rose-chafers; the Eumolpide and
Galerucide, large families of Phytophagous, or leaf-eating beetles;
and also the extensive groups of Elateride and Buprestide,
which are each represented by but one minute species. Of
extensive genera abundant in South Europe, but wholly absent
in Madeira, are Carabus, Rhizotrogus, Lampyris, and other
genera of Malacoderms; Otiorhynchus, Brachycerus, and 20
other genera of Curculionide, comprising more than 300 South
European and North African species; Pimelia, Tentyra, Blaps,
and 18 other genera of Heteromera, comprising about 550 species
in South Enrope and North Africa; and Timarcha, containing
44 South European and North African species.

Another most remarkable feature of the Madeiran Coleoptera
is the unusual prevalence of apterous or wingless insects. This
is especially the case with groups which are confined to the
Atlantic islands, many of which consist wholly of wingless
species; but it also affects the others, no less than twenty-two
genera which are usually or sometimes winged in Europe, having
only wingless species in Madeira; and even the same species
which is winged in Europe becomes, in at least three cases,
wingless in Madeira, without any other perceptible change having
taken place. But there is another most curious fact noticed by

CHAP. X. ] THE PALZZARCTIC REGION. 211

Mr. Wollaston; that those species which possess wings in
Madeira, often have them rather larger than their allies in
Europe. These two facts were connected by Mr. Darwin, who
suggested that flying insects are much more exposed to be
blown out to sea and lost, than those which do not fly (and Mr.
Wollaston had himself supposed that the “stormy atmosphere’
of Madeira had something to do with the matter); so that the
most frequent fliers would be continually weeded out, while the
more sluggish individuals, who either could not or would not
fly, remained to continue the race ; and this process going on from
generation to generation, would, on the well-ascertained princi-
ples of selection and abortion by disuse, in time lead to the
entire loss of wings by those insects to whom wings were not a
necessity. But those whose wings were essential to their exist-
ence would be acted upon in another way. All these must fly
to obtain their food or provide for their offspring, and those that
flew best would be best able to battle with the storms, and keep
themselves safe, and thus those with the longest and most
powerful wings would be preserved. If however all the indi-
viduals of the species were too weak on the wing to resist the
storms, they would soon become extinct.

Now this explanation of the facts is not only simple and
probable in itself, but it also serves to explain in a remarkable
manner some of the peculiarities and deficiencies of the Madeiran
insect fauna, in harmony with the view (supported by the distri-
bution of the birds and land shells, and in particular by the
immigrant birds and insects of the Azores) that all the insects
have been derived from the continent or from other islands, by

1 A remarkable confirmation of this theory, is furnished in the Report to
the Royal Society of the naturalist to the Kerguelen Island, “ Transit Expe-
dition”—the Rev. A. E. Eaton. Insects were assiduously collected, and it
was found that almost all were either completely apterous, or had greatly
abbreviated wings. The only moth found, several flies, and numerous beetles,
were alike incapable of flight. As this island is subject to violent, and
almost perpetual gales, even in the finest season, the meaning of the extra-

ordinary loss of wings in almost all the insects, can, in this case, hardly be
misunderstood.

212 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

immigration across the ocean, in various ways and during a long
period. These deficiencies are, on the other hand, quite incon-
sistent with the theory (still held by some entomologists) that
a land communication is absolutely necessary to account for
the origin of the Madeiran fauna.

First, then, we can understand how the tiger-beetles (Cicinde-
lide) are absent; since they are insects which have a short weak
flight, but yet to whom flight is necessary. If a few had been
blown over to Madeira, they would soon have become exter-
minated. The same thing applies to the Melolonthide, Ceto-
niide, Eumolpide, and Galerucidee,—all flower and foliage-
haunting insects, yet bulky and of comparatively feeble powers
of flight. Again, all the large genera abundant in South Europe,
which have been mentioned above as absent from Madeira, are
wholly apterous (or without wings), and thus their absence is a
most significant fact ; for it proves that in the case of all insects
of moderate size, flight was essential to their reaching the island,
which could not have been the case had there been a land con-
nection. There are, however, one or two curious exceptions to
the absence of these wholly apterous European genera in Madeira,
and as in each case the reason of their being exceptions can
be pointed out, they are eminently exceptions that prove the
rule. Two of the apterous species common to Europe and
Madeira are found always in ants’ nests; and as ants, when
winged, fly in great swarms and are carried by the wind to
great distances, they may have conveyed the minute eggs of
these very small beetles. Two European species of Slaps
occur in Madeira, but these are house beetles, and are admitted
to have been introduced by man. There are also three species
of Meloe, of which two are European and one _ peculiar.
These are large, sluggish, wingless insects, but they have a
most extraordinary and exceptional metamorphosis, the larvae
in the first state being minute active insects parasitic on bees,
and thus easily conveyed across the ocean. This case is most
sugvestive, as it accounts for what would be otherwise a difficult
anomaly. Another case, not quite so easily explained, is that
of the genus Acalles, which is very abundant in all the Atlantic

CHAP. X.] THE PALAARCTIC REGION. 213

islands and also occurs in South Europe, but is always apterous.
It is however closely allied to another genus, Cryptorhynchus,
which is apterous in some species, winged in others. We may
therefore well suppose that the ancestors of Acalles were once in
the same condition, and that some of the winged forms reached
Madeira, the genus having since become wholly apterous.

We may look at this curious subject in another way. The
Coleoptera of Madeira may be divided into those which are
found also in Europe or the other islands, and those which are
peculiar to it. On the theory of introduction by accidental
immigration across the sea, the latter must be the more ancient,
since they have had time to become modified ; while the former
are comparatively recent, and their introduction may be supposed
to be now going on. The peculiar influence of Madeira in
aborting the wings should. therefore, have acted on the ancient
and changed forms much more powerfully than on the recent
and unchanged forms. On carefully comparing the two sets of
insects (omitting those which have almost certainly been
introduced by man) we find, that out of 263 species which
have a wide range, only 14 are apterous ; while the other class,
, consisting of 393 species, has no less than 178 apterous; or
about 5 per cent in the one case, and 45 per cent in the other.!
On the theory of a land connection as the main agent in intro-
ducing the fauna, both groups must have been introduced at or
about the same time, and why one set should have lost thei
wings and the other not, is quite inexplicable.

Taking all these singular facts, in connection with the total
absence of all truly indigenous terrestrial mammalia and reptiles
from these islands—even from the extensive group of the Cana-
ries so comparatively near to the continent, we are forced to
reject the theory of a land connection as quite untenable; and
this view becomes almost demonstrated by the case of the
Azores, which being so much further off, and surrounded by
such a vast expanse of deep ocean, could only have been con-

1 The facts on which these statements rest, will be found more fully
detailed in the Author’s Presidential Address to the Entomological Society
of London for the year 1871.

214 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

nected with Europe at a far remoter epoch, and ought therefore
to exhibit te us a fauna composed almost entirely of peculiar
forms both of birds and insects. Yet, so far from this being the
case, the facts are exactly the reverse. Far more of the birds
and insects are identical with those of Europe than in the
other islands, and this difference is clearly traced to the more
tempestuous atmosphere, which is shown to be even now
annually bringing fresh immigrants (both birds and insects) to
its shores. We here see nature actually at work; and if the
case of Madeira rendered her mode of action probable, that of
the Azores may be said to demonstrate it.

Mr. Wollaston has objected to this view that “storms and
hurricanes ” are somewhat rare in the latitude of Madeira and
the Canaries; but this little affects the question, since the time
allowed for such operations is so ample. If but one very
violent storm happened in a century, and ten such storms
recurred before a single species of insect was introduced into
Madeira, that would be more than sufficient to people it, as we
now find it, with a varied fauna. But he also adds the import-
ant information that the ordinary winds blow almost uninter-
ruptedly from the north-east, so that there would be always a
chance of a little stronger wind than usual bringing insect, or
larva, or egg, attached to leaves or twigs. Neither Mr. Wollaston,
Mr. Crotch, Mr. A. Murray, nor any other naturalist who
upholds the land-connection theory, has attempted to account
for the fact of the absence of so many extensive groups of
insects that ought to be present, as well as of all small
mammalia and reptiles.

Cape Verd Islands—There is yet another group of Atlantic
islands which is very little known, and which is usually con-
sidered to be altogether African—the Cape Verd Islands, situated
between 300 and 400 miles west of Senegal, and a little to the
south of the termination of the Sahara. The evidence that we
possess as to the productions of these islands, shows that, like
the preceding groups, they are truly oceanic, and have probably
derived their fauna from the desert and the Canaries to the
north-east of them rather than from the fertile and more truly

CHAP. :X.]] THE PALZARCTIC REGION. 215

Ethiopian districts of Senegal and Gambia to the east. There is
a mingling of the two faunas, but the preponderance seems to
be undoubtedly with the Palearctic rather than with the
Ethiopian. I owe to Mr. R. B. Sharpe of the British Museum,
a MS. list of the birds of these islands, twenty-three species in
all. Of these eight are of wide distribution and may be ne-
glected. Seven are undoubted Palearctic species, viz. :—Milvus
ictinus, Sylvia atricapilla, S. conspicillata, Corvus corone, Passer
salicarius, Certhilauda desertorum, Columba livia. Three are
peculiar species, but of Paleearctic genera and affinities, viz. :—
Calamoherpe brevipennis, Ammomanes cinctura, and Passer jago-
ensis. Against this we have to set two West African species,
Estrilda cinerea and Numida meleagris, both of which were
probably introduced by man; and three which are of Ethiopian
genera and affinities, viz.:—Halcyon erythrorhyncha, closely
allied to H. semicerulea of Arabia and North-east Africa, and
therefore almost Paleearctic; Accipiter melanoleucus; and Pyrrhu-
lauda nagriceps, an Ethiopian form; but the same species occurs
in the Canaries.

The Coleoptera of these islands have been also collected by
Mr. Wollaston, and he finds that they have generally the same
European character as those of the Canaries and Madeira, several
of the peculiar Atlantic genera, such as Acalles and Hegeter,
occurring, while others are represented by new but closely allied
genera. Out of 275 species 91 were found also in the Canaries
and 81 in the Madeiran group; a wonderful amount of similarity
when we consider the distance and isolation of these islands
and their great diversity of climate and vegetation.

This connection of the four groups of Atlantic islands now
referred to, receives further support from the occurrence of land-
shells of the subgenus Leptaxis in all the groups, as well as in
Majorca ; and by another subgenus, Hemicycla, being common to
the Canaries and Cape Verd islands. Combining these several
classes of facts, we seem justified in extending the Mediterranean
sub-region to include the Cape Verd Islands.

216 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PARI LII.

ITI—The Siberian Sub-region, or Northern Asia.

This large and comparatively little-known subdivision of the
Palearctic region, extends from the Caspian Sea to Kamschatka
and Behring’s Straits, a distance of about 4,000 miles; and
from the shores of the Arctic Ocean to the high Himalayas of
Sikhim in North Latitude 29°, on the same parallel as Delhi.
To the east of the Caspian Sea and the Ural Mountains is a great
extent of lowland which is continued round the northern coast,
becoming narrower as it approaches the East Cape. Beyond
this, in a general E.N.E. direction, rise hills and uplands, soon
becoming lofty mountains, which extend in an unbroken line
from the Hindu Koosh, through the Thian Shan, Altai and
Yablonoi Mountains. to the Stanovoi range in the north-eastern
extremity of Asia. South of this region is a great central basin,
which is almost wholly desert; beyond which again is the vast
plateau of Thibet, with the Kuenlun, Karakorum, and Hima-
layan snow-capped ranges, forming the most extensive elevated
district on the globe.

The superficial aspects of this vast territory, as determined by
its vegetable covering, are very striking and well contrasted. A
broad tract on the northern coast, varying from 150 to 300 and
even 500 miles wide, is occupied by the Tundras or barrens,
where nothing grows but mosses and the dwarfest Arctic plants,
and where the ground is permanently frozen to a great depth.
This tract has its greatest southern extension between the rivers
Obi and Yenesi, where it reaches the parallel of 60° north lati-
tude. Next to this comes a vast extent of northern forests,
mostly of conifers in the more northern and lofty situations,
while deciduous trees preponderate in the southern portions and
in the more sheltered valleys. The greatest extension of this
forest region is north of Lake Baikal, where it is more than
1,200 miles wide. ‘These forests extend along the mountain
ranges to join those of the Hindu Koosh. South of the forests
the remainder of the sub-region consists of open pasture-lands
and vast intervening deserts, of which the Gobi, and those of
Turkestan between the Aral and Balkash lakes, are the most

CHAP. X.] THE PALZARCTIC REGION. 217

extensive. The former is nearly 1,000 miles long, with a width
of from 200 to 350 miles, and is almost as complete a desert as
the Sahara.

With very few exceptions, this vast territory is exposed to
an extreme climate, inimical to animal life. All the lower parts
being situated to the north, have an excessively cold winter, so
that the limit of constantly frozen ground descends below the
parallel of 60° north latitude. To the south, the land is greatly
elevated, and the climate extremely dry. In summer the heat
is excessive, while the winter is almost as severe as further
north. The whole country, too, is subject to violent storms, both
in summer and winter; and the rich vegetation that clothes the
steppes in spring, is soon parched up and replaced by dusty
plains. Under these adverse influences we cannot expect
animal life to be so abundant as in those sub-regions subject to
more favourable physical conditions ; yet the country is so ex-
tensive and so varied, that it does actually, as we shall see, possess
a very considerable and interesting fauna.

Mammalia.—F¥our genera seem to be absolutely confined to
this sub-region, Nectogale, a peculiar form of the mole family
(Talpidee) ; Poephagus, the yak, or hairy bison of Thibet ; with
Procapra and Pantholops, Thibetan antelopes. Some others
more especially belong here, although they just enter Europe, as
Saiga, the Tartarian antelope ; Sminthus, a desert rat; and
Ellobius, a burrowing mole-rat; while Myospalaz, a curious
rodent allied to the voles, is found only in the Altai mountains
and North China ; and Moschus, the musk-deer, is almost confined
to this sub-region. Among the characteristic animals of the
extreme north, are Mustela, and Martes, including the ermine
and sable; Gwlo, the glutton; Tarandus, the reindeer; JJyodes,
the lemming; with the lynx, arctic fox, and polar bear; and
here, in the Post-pliocene epoch, ranged the hairy rhinoceros
and Siberian mammoth, whose entire bodies still remain preserved
in the ice-cliffs near the mouths of the great rivers, Farther
south, species of wild cat, bear, wolf, deer, and pika (Lagomys)
abound; while in the mountains we find wild goats and sheep
of several species, and in the plains and deserts wild harses

Vou: L—16

218 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

and asses, gazelles, two species of antelopes, flying squirrels
(Pteromys), ground squirrels (Zamias), marmots, of the genus
Spermophilus, with camels and dromedaries, probably natives
of the south-western part of this sub-region. The most
abundant and conspicuous of the mammalia are the great
herds of reindeer in the north, the wolves of the steppes, with
the wild horses, goats, sheep, and antelopes of the plateaus and
mountains.

Among the curiosities of this sub-region we must notice the
seal, found in the inland and freshwater lake Baikal, at an eleva-
tion of about 2,000 feet above the sea. It is a species of Callo-
cephalus, closely allied to, if not identical with, one inhabiting
northern seas as well as the Caspian and Lake Aral. This
would indicate that almost all northern Asia was depressed
beneath the sea very recently; and Mr. Belt’s view, of the ice
during the glacial epoch having dammed up the rivers and con-
verted much of Siberia into a vast freshwater or brackish lake,
perhaps offers the best solution of the difficulty.

Plate II.—Characteristic Mammalia of Western Tartary.—
Several of the most remarkable animals of the Palearctic region
inhabit Western Tartary, and are common to the European and
Siberian sub-regions. We therefore choose this district for one
of our illustrative plates. The large animals in the centre are the
remarkable saiga antelopes (Saiga Tartarica), distinguished from
all others by a large and fleshy proboscis-like nose, which gives
them a singular appearance. They differ so much from all other
antelopes that they have been formed into a distinct family by
some naturalists, but are here referred to the great family Bovide.
They inhabit the open plains from Poland to the Irtish River
On the left is the mole-rat, or sand-rat (Spalax murinus). This
animal burrows under ground like a mole, feeding on bulbous
roots. It inhabits the same country as the saiga, but extends
farther south in Europe. On the right is a still more curious
animal, the desman (Myogale Muscovitica), a long-snouted
water-mole. This creature is fifteen inches long, including the
tail; it burrows in the banks of streams, feeding on insects,

1 Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society, 1874, p. 494.

OMISTYALOVUY HO

AO VITIVNNVN

ALSO M

NU

“RUVAINVAL

CHAP. X.] THE PALZARCTIC REGION. 219

worms, and leeches ; it swims well, and remains long under
water, raising the tip of the snout, where the nostrils are
situated, to the surface when it wants to breathe. It is thus
well concealed; and this may be one use of the development
of the long snout, as well as serving to follow worms into
their holes in the soft earth. This species is confined to the
rivers Volga and Don in Southern Russia, and the only other
species known inhabits some of the valleys on the north side
of the Pyrenees. In the distance are wolves, a characteristic
feature of these wastes.

Birds—But few genera of birds are absolutely restricted to
this sub-region. Podoces, a curious form of starling, is the most
decidedly so ; Mycerobas and Pyrrhospiza are genera of finches
confined to Thibet and the snowy Himalayas ; Lewcosticte, another
genus of finches, is confined to the eastern half of the sub-
region and North America; Tetraogallus, a large kind of
partridge, ranges west to the Caucasus; Syrrhaptes, a form of
sand-grouse, and Lerwa (snow-partridge), are almost confined
here, only extending into the next sub-region ; as do Grandala,
and Calliope, genera of warblers, Uragus, a finch allied to the
North American cardinals, and Crossoptilon, a remarkable group
of pheasants.

Almost all the genera of central and northern Europe are
found here, and give quite a European character to the ornitho-
logy, though a considerable number of the species are different.
There are a few Oriental forms, such as Abrornis and Larvivora
(warblers) ; with Ceriornis and Ithaginis, genera of pheasants,
which reach the snow-line in the Himalayas and thus just enter
this sub-region, but as they do not penetrate farther north, they
hardly serve to modify the exclusively Palearctic character of
its ornithology.

According to Middendorf, the extreme northern Asiatic birds
are the Alpine ptarmigan (Lagopus mutus); the snow-bunting
(Plectrophanes nivalis); the raven, the gyrfalcon and the snowy-
owl. Those which are characteristic of the barren “ tundras,”
but which do not range so far north as the preceding are,—the
willow-grouse (Lagopus albus); the Lapland-bunting (Plectrophanes

220 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

lapponica) ; the shore-lark (Ctocorys alpestris) ; the sand-martin
(Cotyle riparia), and the sea-eagle (Haliwetus albicilla).

Those which are more characteristic of the northern forests,
and which do not pass beyond them, are—the linnet ; two cross-
bills (Loxia Leucoptera and L. Curvirostra) ; the pine grosbeak
(Pinicola enucleator) ; the waxwing; the common magpie; the
common swallow ; the peregrine falcon ; the rough-legged buzzard ;
and three species of owls.

Fully one-half of the land-birds of Siberia are identical with
those of Europe, the remainder being mostly representative
species peculiar to Northern Asia, with a few stragglers and
immigrants from China and Japan or the Himalayas. A much
larger proportion of the wading and aquatic families are Euro-
pean or Arctic, these groups having always a wider range than
land birds.

Reptiles and Amphibia.—From the nature of the country and
climate these are comparatively few, but in the more temperate
districts snakes and lizards seem to be not uncommon. Halys,
a genus of Crotaline snakes, and Phrynocephalus, lizards of the
family Agamide, are characteristic of these parts. Simotes, a
snake of the family Oligodontide, reaches an elevation of 16,000
feet in the Himalayas, and therefore enters this sub-region.

Insects —Mesapia and Hypermnestra, genera of Papilionide,
are butterflies peculiar to this sub-region ; and Parnassius is as
characteristic as it is of our European mountains. Carabide
are also abundant, as will be seen by referring to the Chapter
on the Distribution of Insects in the succeeding part of this
work. The insects, on the whole, have a strictly European
character, although a large proportion of the species are pecu-
liar, and several new genera appear.

I1V.—Japan and North China, or the Manchurian Sub-region.

This is an interesting and very productive district, correspond-
ing in the east to the Mediterranean sub-region in the west, or
rather perhaps to all western temperate Europe. Its limits are
not very well defined, but it probably includes all Japan;
the Corea and Manchuria to the Amour river and to the lower

CHAP X.] THE PALAZARCTIC REGION. 221

slopes of the Khingan and Peling mountains ; and China to
the Nanlin mountains south of the Yang-tse-kiang. On the
coast of China the dividing line between it and the Oriental
region seems to be somewhere about Foo-chow, but as there is
here no natural barrier, a great intermingling of northern and
southern forms takes place.

Japan is volcanic and mountainous, with a fine climate and a
most luxuriant and varied vegetation. Manchuria is hilly, with
a high range of mountains on the coast, and some desert tracts
in the interior, but fairly wooded in many parts. Much of
northern China is a vast alluvial plain, backed by hills and
mountains with belts of forest, above which are the dry and
barren uplands of Mongolia. We have a tolerable knowledge
of China, of Japan, and of the Amoor valley, but very little of
Corea and Manchuria. The recent researches of Pére David in
Moupin, in east Thibet, said to be between 31° and 32° north
latitude, show, that the fauna of the Oriental region here advances
northward along the flanks of the Yun-ling mountains (a
continuation of the Himalayas); since he found at different
altitudes representatives of the Indo-Chinese, Manchurian, and
Siberian faunas. On the higher slopes of the Himalayas, there
must be a narrow strip from about 8,000 to 11,000 feet elevation
intervening between the tropical fauna of the Indo-Chinese sub-
region and the almost arctic fauna of Thibet ; and the animals
of this zone will for the most part belong to the fauna of
temperate China and Manchuria, except in the extreme west
towards Cashmere, where the Mediterranean fauna will in like
manner intervene. On a map of sufficiently large scale, there-
fore, it would be necessary to extend our present sub-region
westward along the Himalayas, in a narrow strip just below
the upper limits of forests. It is evident that the large number
of Fringillide, Corvide, Troglodytide, and Paride, often of south
Palearctic forms, that abound in the higher Himalayas, are some-
what out of place as members of the Oriental fauna, and are
equally so in that of Thibet and Siberia; but they form a
natural portion of that of North China an the one side, or of
South Europe on the other.

222 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PARY IIL.

Mammalia—tThis sub-region contains a number of peculiar
and very interesting forms, most of which have been recently
discovered by Pére David in North and West China and East
Thibet. The following are the peculiar genera :—Rhinopithecus,
a sub-genus of monkeys, here classed under Semnopitheous ;
Anurosorez, Scaptochirus, Uropsilus and Scaptonyx, new forms of
Talpidee or moles; luwropus (lurid) ; Nyctereutes (Canide) ;
Lutronectes (Mustelidee) ; Cricetulus (Muridee) ; Hydropotes, Mos-
chus, and Elaphodus (Cervidee). The Rhinopithecus appears to
be a permanent inhabitant of the highest forests of Moupin,
in a cold climate. It has a very thick fur, as has also a new
species of Macacus found in the same district. North China and
East Thibet seem to be very rich in Insectivora. Scaptochirus is
like a mole; Uvropsilus between the Japanese Uvotrichus and
Sorex; Scaptonyx between Urotrichus and Talpa. Mluropus
seems to be the most remarkable mammal discovered by Pere
David. It is allied to the singular panda (4lurus fulgens) of
Nepal, but is as large as a bear, the body wholly white, with
the feet, ears, and tip of the tail black. It inhabits the highest
forests, and is therefore a true Palearctic animal, as most likely
is the Mlurus. Nyctereutes, a curious racoon-like dog, ranges
from Canton to North China, the Amoor and Japan, and there-
fore seems to come best in this sub-region; Hydropotes and
Lophotragus are small hornless deer confined to North China ;
Hlaphodus, from East Thibet, is another peculiar form of deer;
while the musk deer (J/oschus) is confined to this sub-region and
the last. Besides the above, the following Palearctic genera
were found by Pere David in this sub-region: Macacus ; five
genera or sub-genera of bats (Vespertilio, Vesperus, Vesperugo,
Ehinolophus, and Murina) ; Erinaceus, Nectogale, Talpa, Croci-
dura and Sorex, among Insectivora; Mustela, Putorius, Martes,
Lutra, Viverra, Meles, 4lurus, Ursus, Felis, and Canis, among
Carnivora; Hystriz, Arctomys, Myospalax, Spermophilus, Ger-
billus, Dipus, Lagomys, Lepus, Sciurus, Pteromys, Arvicola, and
Mus, among Rodentia; Budorcas, Nemorhedus, Antilope, Ovis,
Moschus, Cervulus and Cervus among Ruminants; and the wide-
spread Sus or wild boar. The following Oriental genera are also

CHAP. X. ] THE PALMARCTIC REGION. 223

included in Pere David’s list, but no doubt occur only in the
lowlands and warm valleys, and can hardly be considered to
belong to the Palearctic region: Paguma, Helictis, Arctonyx,
Rhizomys, Manis. The Rhizomys from Moupin is a peculiar
species of this tropical genus, but all the others inhabit Southern
China.

A few additional forms occur in Japan: Uvotrichus, a peculiar
Mole, which is found also in north-west America; Enhydra, the
sea otter of California; and the dormouse (Myovus). Japan also
possesses peculiar species of Macacus, Talpa, Meles, Canis, and
Scturopterus.

It will be seen that this sub-region is remarkably rich
in Insectivora, of which it possesses ten genera; and that
it has also several peculiar forms of Carnivora, Rodentia, and
Ruminants.

Birds—To give an accurate idea of the ornithology of this
sub-region is very difficult, both on account of its extreme rich-
ness and the impossibility of defining the limits between it and
the Oriental region. A considerable number of genera which
are well developed in the high Himalayas, and some which are
peculiar to that district, have hitherto always been classed as
Indian, and therefore Oriental groups ; but they more properly
belong to this sub-region. Many of them frequent the highest
forests, or descend into the Himalayan temperate zone only in
winter ; and others are so intimately connected with Palearctic
species, that they can only be considered as stragglers into the
border land of the Oriental region. On these principles we
consider the following genera to be confined to this sub-region :—

Grandala, Nemura (Sylviide) ; Pterorhinus (Timaliide) ;
Cholornis, Conostoma, Heteromorpha (Panuride); Cyanoptila
(Muscicapidee); Hophona (Fringillide) ; Dendrotreron (Colum-
bide) ; Lophophorus, Tetraophasis, Crossoptilon, Pucrasia, Thau-
malea, and Ithaginis (Phasianide). This may be called the
sub-region of Pheasants; for the above six genera, comprising
sixteen species of the most magnificent birds in the world, are
all confined to the temperate or cold mountainous regions of
the Himalayas, Thibet, and China; and in addition we have

224 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY.

[PART III.

most of the species of tragopan (Ceriornis), and some of the
true pheasants (Phasianus).

Phe most abundant and characteristic of the smaller birds are
warblers, tits, and finches, of Palearctic types ; but there are
also a considerable number of Oriental forms which penetrate
far into the country, and mingling with the northern birds
give a character to the Ornithology of this sub-region very
different from that of the Mediterranean district at the western
end of the region. Leaving out alarge number of wide-ranging
croups, this mixture of types may be best exhibited by giving
lists of the more striking Palearctic and Oriental genera which
are here found intermingled.

PALAARCTIC GENERA.

SYLVIID&. Corvip&. ALAUDID&.
Erithacus. Fregilus. Otocorys.
Ruticilla. Nucifraga. Picip&.
Locustella. Pica. Picoides.
Cyanecula, Cyanopica. Picus.
Sylvia. Garrulus. Hyopicus.
Potamodus. AMPELID&. Dryocopus.
Reguloides. Ampelis. YUNGID&.
Regulus. FRINGILLID&. Yunx.
Accentor, Fringilla. PTEROCLID.

CincLID&. Chrysomitris. Syrrhaptes.
Cinclus. Chlorospiza. TETRAONID.

TROGLODYTIDE, Passer. Tetrao.
Troglodytide. Coccothraustes. Tetraogallus.

CERTHIIDA, Pyrrhula. Lerwa.
Certhia. Carpodacus. Lagopus.
Sitta, Uragus. VULTURID.
Tichodroma. Loxia. Gypaetus.

PaRID&. Linota. Vultur.
Parus. Emberiza. FALCONID.
Lophophanes. STURNID. Archibuteo.
Acredula. Sturnus.

ORIENTAL GENERA.

SYLVIIDA. SyLvip®—(continued). TIMALIIDA.
Suya. Abrornis. Alcippe.
Calliope. Copsychus Timalia,
Larvivora. TURDID#. Pterocyclus,
Tribura. Oreocincla. Garrulax.
Horites. Trochalopteron.

CHAP. X. ] THE PALAARCTIC REGION.

225

ORIENTAL GENERA—continued.

TIMALIIDE—(continued). MuscicaPiIp&. Picip&.
Pomatorhinus. Xanthopygia. Vivia.
Suthora. Niltava. Yungipicus.

PANURIDA, Tchitrea. Gecinus.
Paradoxornis.
Corvip#. CoRActID-A.
C1 NCLID#. Urocissa. Eurystomus.
Enicurus.
Myiophonus. NECTARINEIDA. ALCEDINIDA.
Kthopyga. Halcyon.
TROGLODYTIDZ. Gervi
Pneepyga. Moraci.uip&. eryaee
; Nemoricola.
LiotricHID&. Upupip.
Liothrix. Dic#ID&. Upupa.
. if
Mf ne _Zosterops. PsITracip&.
teruthius. FRINGILLIDA. Palzornis.
PYcNONOTID. M
: az elop hus. CoLUMBID&.
Microscelis. Pyrgilauda. esr
Pycnonotus. é
5 PLoceip#®. Tantheenas.
Hypsipetes. : é
Munia. Macropygia.
CAMPEPHAGID&.
Pericrocotus. STURNIDA. PHASIANIDA.
D Acridotheres. Phasianus.
IGE aye Sturnia. Ceriornis.
Dicrurus.
Chibia. PITTIDs. STRIGIDA.
Buchanga. Pitta. Scops.

In the above lists there are rather more Oriental than Pale-
arctic genera; but it must be remembered that most of the
former are summer migrants only, or stragglers just entering the
sub-region ; whereas the great majority of the latter are per-
manent residents, and a large proportion of them range over the
greater part of the Manchurian district. Many of those in the
Oriental column should perhaps be omitted, as we have no exact
determination of their range, and the limits of the regions are
very uncertain. It must be remembered, too, that the Palearctic
genera of Sylviidee, Paridz, and Fringillide, are often represented
by numerous species, whereas the corresponding Oriental genera
have for the most part only single species ; and we shall then
find that, except towards the borders of the Oriental region the
Palearctic element is strongly predominant. Four of the more
especially Oriental groups are confined to Japan, the southern

226 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

extremity of which should perhaps come in the Oriental region.
The great richness of this sub-region compared with that of
Siberia is well shown by the fact, that a list of all the known
land-birds of East Siberia, including Dahuria and the compara-
tively fertile Amoor Valley, contains only 190 species ; whereas
Pére David’s catalogue of the birds of Northern China with
adjacent parts of East Thibet and Mongolia (a very much
smaller area) contains for the same families 366 species. Of the
Siberian birds more than 50 per cent. are European species, while
those of the Manchurian sub-region comprise about half that
proportion of land-birds which are identical with those of
Europe.

Japan is no doubt very imperfectly known, as only 134 land-
birds are recorded from it. Of these twenty-two are peculiar
species, a number that would probably be diminished were the
Corea to be explored. Of the genera, only nine are Indo-
Malayan, while forty-three are Palearctic.

Plate III—Scene on the Borders of North-West China and
Mongolia with Characteristic Mammalia and Birds. — The
mountainous districts of Northern China, with the adjacent
portions of Thibet and Mongolia, are the head-quarters of the
pheasant tribe, many of the most beautiful and remarkable
species being found there only. In the north-western provinces
of China and the southern parts of Mongolia may be found the
species figured. That in the foreground is the superb golden
pheasant (Thaumalea picta), a bird that can hardly be surpassed
for splendour of plumage by any denizen of the tropics. The
large bird perched above is the eared pheasant (Crossoptilon
auriium), a species of comparatively sober plumage but of
remarkable and elegant form. In the middle distance is Pallas’s
sand grouse (Syrrhaptes paradoxus), a curious bird, whose native
country seems to be the high plains of Northern Asia, but which
often abounds near Pekin, and in 1863 astonished European
ornithologists by appearing in considerable numbers in Central
and Western Europe, in every part of Great Britain, and even -
in Ireland.

The quadruped figured is the curious racoon dog (Vyctereutes

CHARACTERISTIC ANIMALS OF NORTH CHINA.

‘e

>

i
1

.
_
‘
>
a ‘es BK
- fo +p
.
le oe
=
: .

‘
he :
i
=
>
~
‘
Ore
t
x

-

CHAP. X.] THE PALAZARCTIC REGION. 227

procyonoides), an animal confined to North China, Japan, and
the Amoor Valley, and having no close allies in any other part
of the globe. In the distance are some deer, a group of animals
very abundant and varied in this part of the Palearctic region.

Reptiles and Amphibia.—Reptiles are scarce in North China,
only four or five species of snakes, a lizard and one of the Geck-
otidee occurring in the country round Pekin. The genus Halys
is the most characteristic form of snake, while Callophis, an
oriental genus, extends to Japan. Among lizards, Plestiodon,
Maybouya, Tachydromus, and Gecko reach Japan, the two latter
being very characteristic of the Oriental region.

Amphibia are more abundant and interesting; Hynobius,
Onychodactylus, and Sieboldtia (Salamandride) being peculiar
to it, while most of the European genera are also represented.

Fresh-water Fish—Of these there are a few peculiar genera ;
as Plecoglossus (Salmonide) from Japan; Achilognathus, Pseu-
doperilampus, Ochetobius, and Opsariichthys (Cyprinids); and
there are many other Chinese Cyprinide belonging to the border
jand of the Palearctic and Oriental regions.

Insects—The butterflies of this sub-region exhibit the same
mixture of tropical and temperate forms as the birds. Most of
the common European genera are represented, and there are
species of Parnassivs in Japan and the Amoor. Jsodema, a
peculiar genus of Nymphalidz is found near Ningpo, just within
our limits ; and Sericinus, one of the most beautiful genera of
Papilionidee is peculiar to North China, where four species occur,
thus balancing the Zhais and Doritis of Europe. The genus
Zephyrus (Lyceenidee) is well represented by six species in Japan
and the Amoor, against two in Europe. Papilio paris and
P. bianor, magnificent insects of wholly tropical appearance,
abound near Pekin, and allied forms inhabit Japan and the
Amoor, as well as P. demetrius and P. alcinous belonging to
the “ Protenor” group of the Himalayas. Other tropical genera
occurring in Japan, the Amoor, or North China are, Debis,
Neope, Mycalesis, Ypthimia (Satyride); Thawmantis (Mor-
phide), at Shanghae ; Zuripus, Neptis, Athyma (Nymphalide) ;
Terias (Pieride) ; and the above-mentioned Papilionide.

228 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART IIL,

Coleoptera.—The beetles of Japan decidedly exhibit a mixture
of tropical forms with others truly Palearctic, and it has been
with some naturalists a-matter of doubt whether the southern and
best known portion of the islands should not be joined to the
Oriental region. An important addition to our knowledge of
the insects of this country has recently been made by Mr. George
Lewis, and a portion of his collections have been described by
various entomologists in the Transactions of the Entomological
Society of London. As the question is one of considerable in-
terest we shall give a summary of the results fairly deducible
from what is now known of the entomology of Japan; and it
must be remembered that almost all our collections come from
the southern districts, in what is almost a sub-tropical climate ;
so that if we find a considerable proportion of Paleearctic forms,
we may be pretty sure that the preponderance will be much
greater a little further north.

Of Carabide Mr. Bates enumerates 244 species belonging to
84 genera, and by comparing these with the Coleoptera of a
tract of about equal extent in western Europe, he concludes that
there is little similarity, and that the cases of affinity to the forms
of eastern tropical Asia preponderate. By comparing his genera
with the distributions as given in Gemminger and Harold’s .
Catalogue, a somewhat different result is arrived at. Leaving
out the generic types altogether peculiar to Japan, and also those
genera of such world-wide distribution that they afford no clear
indications for our purpose, it appears that no less than twenty-
two genera, containing seventy-four of the Japanese species, are
either exclusively Palearctic, Paleearctic and Nearctic, or highly
characteristic of the Palearctic region ; then come thirteen genera
containing eighty-seven of the species which have a very wide
distribution, but are also Palearctic: we next have seventeen
genera containing twenty-four of the Japanese species which are
decidedly Oriental and tropical. Here then the fair comparison
is between the twenty-two genera and seventy-four species whose
affinities are clearly Palzearctic or at least north temperate, and
seventeen genera with twenty-four species which are Asiatic
and tropical; and this seems to prove that, although South

CUAP. X.] THE PALAARCTIC REGION. 229

Japan (like North China) has a considerable infusion of tropical
forms, there is a preponderating substratum of Palearctic forms,
which clearly indicate the true position of the islands in zoolo-
gical geography. There are also a few cases of what may be
called eccentric distribution; which show that Japan, like many
other island-groups, has served as a kind of refuge in which
dying-out forms continue to maintain themselves. These, which
are worthy of notice, are as follows: Orthotrichus (1 sp.) has
the only other species in Egypt; TZrechichus (1 sp.) has two
other species, of which one inhabits Madeira, the other the
Southern United States ; Perileptus (1 sp.) has two other species,
of which one inhabits Bourbon, the other West Europe; and
lastly, Crepidogaster (1 sp.) has the other known species in
South Africa. These cases diminish the value of the indications
afforded by some of the Japanese forms, whose only allies are
single species in various remote parts of the Oriental region.

The Staphylinide have been described by Dr. Sharp, and his
list exhibits a great preponderance of north temperate, or cosmo-
politan forms, with a few which are decidedly tropical. The
Pselaphidee and Scydmenide, also described by Dr. Sharp,
exhibit, according to that gentleman, “ even a greater resemblance
to those of North America than to those of Europe,” but he says
nothing of any tropical affinities. The water-beetles are all
either Palearctic or of wide distribution.

The Lucanidee (Gemm. and Har. Cat., 1868) exhibit an inter-
mingling of Palearctic and Oriental yenera.

The Cetoniide (Gemm. and Har. Cat. 1869) show, for North
China and Japan, three Oriental to two Palearctic genera.

The Buprestidz collected by Mr. Lewis have been described
by Mr. Edward Saunders in the Journal of the Linnean Society,
vol. xi. p. 509. The collection consisted of thirty-six species
belonging to fourteen genera. No less than thirteen of these
are known also from India and the Malay Islands; nine from
Europe; seven from Africa; six from America, and four from
China. In six of the genera the Japanese species are said to be
allied to those of the Oriental region ; while in three they are
allied to European forms, and in two to American. Considering

230 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

the southern latitude and warm climate in which these insects
were mostly collected, and the proximity to Formosa and the
Malay Islands compared with the enormous distance from
Europe, this shows as much Palearctic affinity as can be
expected. In the Palearctic region the group is only plentiful
in the southern parts of Europe, which is cut off by the cold
plateau of Thibet from all direct communication with Japan;
while in the Oriental region it everywhere abounds and is, in
fact, one of the most conspicuous and dominant families of
Coleoptera.

The Longicorns collected by Mr. Lewis have been described
by Mr. Bates in the Annals of Natural History for 1873. The
number of species now known from Japan is 107, belonging to
sixty-four genera. The most important genera are Leptura,
Clytanthus, Monohammus, Praonetha, Exocentrus, Glenea, and
Oberea. There are twenty-one tropical genera, and seven
peculiar to Japan, leaving thirty-six either Palearctic or of very
wide range. A number of the genera are Oriental and Malayan,
and many characteristic European genera seem to be absent ;
but it is certain that not half the Japanese Longicorns are yet
known, and many of these gaps will doubtless be filled up when
the more northern islands are explored.

The Phytophaga, described by Mr. Baly, appear to have a
considerable preponderance of tropical Oriental forms.

A considerable collection of Hymenoptera formed by Mr.
Lewis have been described by Mr. Frederick Smith ; and exhibit
the interesting result, that while the bees and wasps are decidedly
of tropical and Oriental forms, the Tenthredinide and Ichneu-
monide are as decidedly Palearctic, “the general aspect of the
collection being that of a European one, only a single exotic
form being found among them.”

Remarks on the General Character of the Fauna of Japan —
From a general view of the phenomena of distribution we feel
justified in placing Japan in the Palwarctic region ; although
some tropical groups, especially of reptiles and insects, have
largely occupied its southern portions ; and these same groups
have in many cases spread into Northern China, beyond the

CHAP. X.] THE PALAZARCTIC REGION | 231

usual dividing line of the Palearctic and Oriental regions. The
causes of such a phenomenon are not difficult to conceive. Even
now, that portion of the Palearctic region between Western
Asia and Japan is, for the most part, a bleak and inhospitable
region, abounding in desert plateaus, and with a rigorous climate
even in its most favoured districts, and can, therefore, support
but a scanty population of snakes, and of such groups of
insects as require flowers, forests, or a considerable period of
warm summer weather; and it is precisely these which are
represented in Japan and North China by tropical forms. We
must also consider, that during the Glacial epoch this whole
region would have become still less productive, and that, as the
southern limit of the ice retired northward, it would be followed
up by many tropical forms along with such as had been driven
south by its advance, and had survived to return to their
northern homes.

It is also evident that Japan has a more equable and probably
moister climate than the opposite shores of China, and has also
a very different geological character, being rocky and broken,
often volcanic, and supporting a rich, varied, and peculiar vege-
tation. It would thus be well adapted to support all the more
hardy denizens of the tropics which might at various times
reach it, while it might not be so well adapted for the more
boreal forms from Mongoha or Siberia. The fact that a mixture
of such forms occurs there, is then, little to be wondered at, but
we may rather marvel that they are not more predominant, and
that even in the extreme south, the most abundant forms of
mammal, bird, and insect, are modifications of familiar Palearctic
types. The fact clearly indicates that the former land con-
nections of Japan with the continent have been in a northerly
rather than in a southerly direction, and that the tropical immi-
grants have had difficulties to contend with, and have found the
land already fairly stocked with northern aborigines in almost
every class and order of animals.

General Conclusions as to the Fauna of the Palearctic Re-
gion.—From the account that has now been given of the fauna

232 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III,

of the Palearctic region, it is evident that it owes many of its
deficiencies and some of its peculiarities to the influence of the
Glacial epoch, combined with those important changes of physi-
cal geography which accompanied or preceded it. The elevation of
the old Sarahan sea and the complete formation of the Mediterra-
nean, are the most important of these changes in the western
portion of the region. In the centre, a wide arm of the Arctic
Ocean extended southward from the Gulf of Obi to the Aral and
the Caspian, dividing northern Europe and Asia. At this time
our European and Siberian sub-regions were probably more
distinct than they are now, their complete fusion having been
effected since the Glacial epoch. As we know that the Himalayas
have greatly increased in altitude during the Tertiary period, it is
not impossible that during the Miocene and Pliocene epochs the
vast plateau of Central Asia was much less elevated and less
completely cut off from the influence of rain-bearing winds. It
might then have been far more fertile, and have supported a rich
and varied animal population, a few relics of which we see in
the Thibetan antelopes, yaks, and wild horses. The influence
of yet earlier changes of physical geography, and the relations of
the Palearctic to the tropical regions immediately south of it,
will be better understood when we have examined and discussed
the faunas of the Ethiopian and Oriental regions.

CHAP. X. } THE PALAZARCTIC REGION. 233

TABLES OF DISTRIBUTION.

In constructing these tables showing the distribution of vari-
ous Classes of animals in the Palearctic region, the following
sources of information have been chiefly relied on, in addition
to the general treatises, monographs, and catalogues used in
compiling the fourth part of this work.

Mammatlia.—Lord Clement’s Mammalia and Reptiles of
Europe ; Siebold’s Fauna Japonica; Pere David's List of
Mammalia of North China and Thibet ; Swinhoe’s Chinese
Mammalia ; Radde’s List of Mammalia of South-Eastern Siberia ;
Canon ‘Tristram’s, Lists for Sahara and Palestine; Papers by
Professor Milne-Edwards, Mr. Blanford, Mr. Sclater, and the
local lists given by Mr. A. Murray in the Appendix to his
Geographical Distribution of Mammalia.

Birds.—Blasius’ List of Birds of Europe; Godman, On
Birds of Azores, Madeira, and Canaries; Middendorf, for
Siberia; Pére David and Mr. Swinhoe, for China and Mongolia ;
Homeyer, for East Siberia; Mr. Blanford, for Persia and the
high Himalayas; Mr. Elwes’s paper on the Distribution of
Asiatic Birds; Canon Tristram, for the Sahara and Palestine;
Professor Newton, for Iceland and Greenland; Mr. Dresser,
for Scandinavia; and numerous papers and notes in the Ibis ;
Journal fiir Ornithologie; Annals and Mag. of Nat. History ; and
Proceedings of the Zoological Society.

Reptiles and Amphibia.—Schreiber’s European Herpetology.

Vou. L—17

234 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART Ih.

TABLE I.
FAMILIES OF ANIMALS INHABITING THE PALAARCTIC REGION.

EXPLANATION.
Names in italics show families peculiar to the region.
Names inclosed thus (...... ) barely enter the region, and are not considered properly

to belong to it.
Numbers are not consecutive, but correspond to those in Part IV.

Sub-regions.
Order and Family. g | 5 = | Ss = Range beyond the Region,
else] e| 2
alze\3 | 3
MAMMALIA.
PRIMATES.
3. Cynopithecide — — | Ethiopian, Oriental
CHIROPTERA.
9. (Pteropide) ... — | Tropics of E. Hemisphere
11. Rhinolophide | — | — | — | — | Warmer parts of E. Hemis.
12. Vespertilionide — | — | — | — | Cosmopolite
13. Noctilionide... — Tropical regions
INSECTIVORA.
15. Macroscelidide — Ethiopian
17. Erinaceide ... | — | — | — | — | Oriental, S. Africa
21. Talpide... ... | — | =| — | — | Nearctic, Oriental
22. Soricide... ... | — | — | — | — | Cosmopolite, excl. Australia and S. America
CARNIVORA. \
23. Felide ... ... | — | —|— | — | All regions but Australian
25. Viverride ... — Ethiopian, Oriental
27. Hyxnide 2 —- Ethiopian, Oriental
28. Canide ... ... | — | — | — | — | All regions but Australian
29. Mustelide ... | — | — | — | — | All regions but Australian
31. Hluride — | Oriental
32. Urside ... ... | — | — | — | — | Nearctic, Oriental, Andes
33. Otariidz... ... — N. and S. temperate zones
34. Trichechide ... | — - | Arctic regions
35. Phocide .. | —|—|—|— | N. and S. temperate zones
CETACEA.
SO LO41, Seer meses | Oceanic
SIRENIA.
42. Manatide ... | — = Tropics, from Brazil to N. Australia
UNGULATA.
43. Equide ... ... = |= | Ethiopian
47, Suide ... ... | —|— |— | — | Cosmopolite, excl. Nearctic reg. and Australia
48. Camelide ... | —|— | Andes
50. Cervide... ... | —|— | —|— | Allregions but Ethiopian and Australian
52. Bovide ... ... | —|—|— | — | All regions but Neotropical and Australian

CHAP. X. |

Order and Family.

Europe.

HYRACOIDAE.
54. (Hyracide)

RODENTIA,

55. Muride ...

56. Spalacide

57. Dipodide

58. Myoxide

60. Castoride

61. Sciuride... ...
64. Octodontide ...
67. Hystricide
69. Lagomyide
70. Leporidee

BIRDS.

PASSERES.

. Turdide...
. Sylviide...
. Timaliide
. Panuride
. Cinclidee

- Troglodytide. 2

. Sittide ...
. Paride ...

. Pycnonotide ral

1
2
3
4
5
6
8. Certhiide
9
10
13
14

. Oriolide... ...
17. Muscicapide ...
19. Laniide ...

20. Corvide... ...
23. (Nectariniide)
24. (Dicxide)
29. Ampelide

30. Hirundinide... | -

33. Fringillide
35. Sturnide
37. Alaudide

38. Motacillide ...

47. (Pittide)

PICARIA.

51. Picide

52. Yungide

58. Cuculide

62. Coraciide

63. Meropide

67. Alcedinide
69. Upupide =
73. Caprimulgide
74. Cypselide

THE PALAARCTIC REGION. 235

Sub-regions.

Mediter
ranean

)

Japan.

Range beyond the Region.

Ethiopian family

Almost Cosmopolite
Ethiopian, Oriental
Ethiopian, Nearctic

| Ethiopian

| Nearctic

| All regions but Australian
Abyssinia, Neotropical
Ethiopian, Oriental
Nearctic

All regions but Australian

Cosmopolite

Cosmopolite

Ethiopian, Oriental, Australian
Nearctic, Oriental

Oriental

American, Oriental

Oriental, Nearctic

|Nearctic, Oriental, Australian, Madagascar
Nearctic, Oriental, Australian [?]
Oriental, Ethiopian

| Ethiopian, Oriental, Australian
Eastern Hemisphere

| Eastern Hemisphere and N. America
Cosmopolite

Ethiopian, Oriental, Australian
Ethiopian, Oriental, Australian
Nearctic

_Cosmopolite
| All regions but Australian
Eastern Hemisphere

All regions but Neotropical

| Cosmopolite

Oriental, Australian, Ethiopian

— | All regions but Australian

— |N. W. India, N. E. Africa, S. Africa

| — | Almost Cosmopolite

— | Ethiopian, Oriental, Australian

Ethiopian, Oriental, Australian

— | Cosmopolite

Ethiopian, Oriental

Cosmopolite
Almost Cosmopolite

236

ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY.

Order and Family.

Europe.

Sub-regions.

Mediter-

ranean.

Siberia.

Japan.

Range beyond the Region.

CoLUMB&.

84.

Columbide ...

GALLINA.

86.
87.
88.
89.

Pteroclide ...
Tetraonide ...
Phasianide ...
Turnicide

ACCIPITRES.

Ons
96.
Me
98.

Vulturide ...
Falconide ...
Pandionide...
Strigidee

GRALLA.

99.
100.
104.
105.
106.
107.
113.
114.
115.
TG

Rallide
Scolopacide...
Glareolide ...
Charadriide...
Otididee
Gruide
Ardeidze ;
Plataleide ...
Ciconiide
Phenicopteride

ANSERES.

118.
119.
120.
121.
123.
124,
125.

Anatide
Laride ..
Procellariide
Pelecanide ...
Colymbide ...
Podicipidee
Alcide ...

REPTILIA.
OPHIDIA,.

. Typhlopide...
. Calamariide...
. Oligodontide
. Colubride ...
. Homalopside
. Psammophidee
. Krycide:.. ...
. Elapide... ...
. Crotalide

. Viperidee

Cosmopolite

Ethiopian, Indian

Nearctic, Ethiopian, Oriental
Oriental, Ethiopian, Nearctic
Ethiopian, Oriental, Australian

All regions but Australian

Cosmopolite
Cosmopolite
Cosmopolite

Cosmopolite
Cosmopolite

Ethiopian, Oriental, Australian

Cosmopolite

Ethiopian, Oriental, Australian

[PART Ill.

Eastern Hemisphere, and N. America

Cosmopolite

Almost Cosmopolite
Nearly Cosmopolite
Neotropical, Ethiopian, Indian

Cosmopolite
Cosmopolite
Cosmopolite
Cosmopolite

Arctic and N. Temperate

Cosmopolite

N. Temperate zone

All regions but Nearctic

All other regions

Oriental and Neotropical
Almost Cosmopolite

Oriental, and all other regions
Ethiopian and Oriental
Oriental and Ethiopian
Australian and all other regions
Nearctic, Neotropical, Oriental
| Ethiopian, Oriental

CHAP. X.] THE PALZARCTIC REGION 237

mM
=]
os
4
o
a3
°
i=]
D

Order and Family. Range beyond the Region.

ranean,

Europe

Mediter
| Siberia.

Japan

LACERTILIA.

26. Trogonophide

28. Amphisbenide

30. Varanidee

33. Lacertide

34. Zonuride =

41. Gymnopthal-
MICE oe cen

45. Scincide *

46. Ophiomoride ...

47, Sepide ...

49. Geckotide

51. Agamide ...

52. Chameleonide

CHELONIA.

57. Testudinide ...
59. Trionychide ...
60. Cheloniide

AMPHIBIA.
UrRoDELA.

3. Proteide

5. Menopomide...
6. Salamandride

ANOURA.

10. Bufenide :
13. Bombinatoride
15. Alytide ...
Weeklylidee: ... 7.
18. Polypedatide
19. Ranide ... ,
20. Discoglosside

FISHES (FRESH-
WATER).
ACANTHOPTERYGII.
1. Gasterosteide
3. Percide ...
12. Scienide ;
26. Comephoride...
37. Atherinide

PHYSOSTOMI.
59. Siluride...

Ethiopian, Neotropical
Oriental, Ethiopian, Australian
| All continents but American
America, Africa, N. India

Ethiopian, Australian, Neotropical

— Almost Cosmopolite

|

Ethiopian

Almost Cosmopolite

All continents but America
Ethiopian, Oriental

All continents but Australia
Ethiopian, Oriental, Nearctic
Marine

Nearctic
| Nearctic
Nearctic to Andes of Bogota

All continents but Australia
Neotropical, New Zealand
All regions but Oriental

All regions but Ethiopian
All the regions

Almost Cosmopolite

All regions but Nearctic

Nearctic
All regions but Australian
All regions but Australian

N. America and Australia

All warm regions

| |

65. Salmonide .... | — | — — Nearctic, New Zealand

70. Esocide... ... | — | — Nearctic

files Ummbrides segs. |) ——= Nearctic

73. Cyprinodontide | — | |All regions but Australia

75. Cyprinide ... | — | — | — | — | Ailregionsbut Australian and “Neotropical

238 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY, [PART Ill.

Sub-regions.
Order and Family. 2 [S32 | 3 ul Range beyond the Region,
eS |sS]| & | a
=i Ose fo} a
BH |ee|a}]”
GANOIDEI. ;
96. Accipenseride |'— | — | — Nearctic
97. Polydontide ... — | Nearctic
INSECTS. _LEPI-
DOPTERA (PART).
DvRINI (BUTTER-
FLIES).
1. Danaide 3) =) = — | All tropical regions
2. Satyride ... | — | — | — | — |Cosmopolite
8. Nymphalide... | — | — | — | — | Cosmopolite
9. Libytheide ... | — | — | All continents but Australia
10. Nemeobeide.. | — | Absent from Nearctic region and Australia
13. Lycenide ... | — | — | — | — | Cosmopolite
14. Pieride ... ... | — | — | — | — | Cosmopolite
15. Papilionide ... | — | — | — | — | Cosmopolite
16. Hesperide ... | — | — ll Cosmopolite
SPHINGIDEA.
17. Zygenide ... | — | — | — | — |Cosmopolite
21. Stygiide ..- | — | — | — | — | Neotropical
22. Aigeriide ... | — | — | — | — | Absent only from Australia
23. Sphingide ... | — | — | — | — | Cosmopolite

CoLEopTERA.—Of about 80 families into which the Coleoptera are divided, all the
more important are cosmopolite, or nearly so. It would therefore unnecessarily occupy
space to give tables of the whole for each region.

LAND SHELLS.—The more important families being cosmopolite, and the smaller
ones being somewhat uncertain in their limits, the reader is referred to the account of
the families and genera under each region, and to the chapter on Mollusca in the con-
cluding part of this work, for such information as can be given of their distribution.

CHAP. X.] THE PALZARCTIC REGION. 239

TABLE Hl.

LIST OF THE GENERA OF TERRESTIAL MAMMALIA AND BIRDS
INHABITING THE PALAZARCTIC REGION.

EXPLANATION.

Names in ztalics show genera peculiar to the region.

Names inclosed thus (...) show genera which just enter the region, but are not considered
properly to belong to it.

Genera which undoubtedly belong to the region are numbered consecutively.

MAMMALIA.
Order, coe aud 33 Range within the Region. Range beyond the Region.
: ee
mR
PRIMATES.
SEMNOPITHECID.
(Semnopithecus 1 | Eastern Thibet) Oriental genus
CYNOPITHECID.
1. Macacus ... ...| 4 | Gibraltar, N. Africa, E. Thibet| Oriental
to Japan
CHIROPTERA.
PTEROPID.
(Pteropus ...| 2 | Egypt, Japan) Tropics of the E. Hemis.
(Xantharpyia ... | 1 |N. Africa, Palestine) Oriental, Austro-Malayan
RHINOLOPHID.
2. Rhinolphus_ ...| 9 |Temperate & Southern parts of Warmer parts E. Hemi-
Region sphere
(Asellia .| 1 | Egypt) Ethiopian, Java
(Rhinopoma ...| 1 | Egypt, Palestine) [?] India
(Nycteris... 1 | Egypt) Nubia, Himalaya
VESPERTILIONIDE.
3. Vesperugo 1 | Siberia, Amoorland [2]
4. Otonycteris ob 1 | Egypt 2
5. Vespertilio ... | 35 | The whole region Cosmopolite
(Kerivoula... 1 | N. China) Oriental, S. Africa
6. Miniopteris 1 |S. Europe, N. Africa, Japan S. Afric. Malaya, Austral.
7. Plecotus ... ...| 1 |S. Europe Himalayas
8. Barbastellus .. 2 | Mid. and S. Europe, Palestine | Darjeeling, Timor
NOocTILIONIDZ.
9 Molossus ... ...| 2 |S, Europe, N. Africa Ethiop., Neotrop., Aus-
tralian
{NSECTIVORA.
ERINACEID&.

10. Erinaceus ...! 4 |The wholeregion; excl. Japan | Oriental, Africa.

240

Order,
Genus.

TALPIDA.
11. Talpa

12. Scaptochirus ii

13. Anurosorex
14. Scaptonyx

15. Myogale ...
16. Nectogale ...
17. Urotrichus
18. Uropsilus...

SorIcipz.
19. Sorex

20. Crocidura...

CARNIVORA.

FELIDA.
21. Felis...

22. Lyncus

VIVERRIDS.

(Viverra ...
23. Genetta ...
(Herpestes

HYANID&.
24. Hyena

CANIDE.

25. Canis ae
26. Nyctereutes

MUSTELIDA.

27. Martes
28. Putorius ...
29. Mustela ...

30. Vison

316 Gulos-
32. Lutra

33. Lutronectes
34. Enhydris
35, Meles

JELURID.

36. Alurus ..
37. dluropus

URsID&.

38. Thalassarctos ...

39. Ursus

Family, and

No. of
Species.

eel a Se ea

12

a

—

ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART Il],
Range within the Region. Range beyond the Region.

The whole region N. India

N. China

N. China

N. China

S. E. Russia, Pyrenees

Thibet

Japan N. W. America

KE. Thibet

The whole region Absent from Australia &
S. America

W. Europe to N. China 2

The whole region ; excl. extreme All regions but Austral.

North

S. Europe to Arctic sea America N of 66° N. Lat.

N. China) Oriental and Ethiopian

S. Europe & N. Africa, Palestine) Ethiopian

N. Africa, Spain [?], Palestine) | Oriental and Ethiopian

N. Africa and 8. W. Asia Ethiopian, India

The whole region All reg. but Austral. [?]

Japan, Amoorland, N China

N. Europe and Asia, E. Thibet |Oriental, Nearctic

W. Europe to N. E. Asia

The whole region Nearctic, Ethiop., Hima-
layas, Peru

Europe and Siberia N. America, N. India,
China

The Arctic regions Arctic America

The whole region Oriental

Japan

N. Asiaand Japan California

Cen. Europe, Palestine, N.China,} China to Hongkong

Japan

S. E. Thibet Nepal

E. Thibet

Arctic regions Arctic America

The whole region Oriental, Nearctie, Chili

a ee

CHAP. X.]

THE PALZZARCTIC REGION. 241
one ae a 28 Range within the Region. Range beyond the Region
5 Z Ps
og =
OTARIID.
40. Callorhinus 1 | Kamschatka andBehring’s Straits
41. Zalophus— 1 | Japan California
42. Eumetopias 1 | Japan, Behring’s Straits California
TRICHECHID&.
43, Trichechus 1 | Polar Seas Arctic America
PHOCIDA.
44, Callocephalus... | 3 | NorthSea, Caspian, Lake Baikal Greenland
45. Pagomys .. 2 | North Sea, Japan N. Pacific
46. Pagophilus 2 | Northern Seas N. Pacific
47. Phoca 2 | Northern Seas N. Pacific
48. Halicherus 1 | North Sea and Baltic Greenland
49. Pelagius ... 2 | Madeira to Black Sea
50. Cystophora 2 |N. Atlantic N. Atlantic
SIRENIA. : Tropics & Behring’sStrts.
CETACEA. ... ; Oceanic
UNGULATA.
EQuips.
51. Equus 4 (Cent. & and W. Asia & N. Africa} Ethiopian
SuIDz.
52. Sus ... 2 | The whole region Oriental, Austro- Malayan
CAMELID&.
53. Camelus ... 2 | Deserts of Cent. and W. Asia and
«N. Africa
CERVID&.
54. Alces 1 | North Europe and Asia N. America
55. Tarandus 1 | Arctic Europe and Asia Arctic America
56. Cervus 8 | The whole region All regions but Austral.
57. Dama .. 1 | Mediterranean district
58. Hlaphodus 1 |N. W. China
59. Lophotragus 1 | N. China
60. Capreolus 2 | Temp. Europe and W. Asia and
N. China
61. Moschus ... 1 |Amoor R., N. China, to Hima-
layds
62. Hydropotes 1 | N. China
Bovip2.
63. ( Bos 1 | Europe, (not wild) Oriental
64. 4 Bison 1 | Poland and Caucasus Nearctic
65. ( Poephagus 1 | Thibet
66. Addax 1 | N. Africa to Syria
67. Oryx eas 1 |N. Africa to Syria Ethiopian deserts
68. ( Gazella ... 12 | N. Africa to Persia, and Beloo-|S. Africa, India
chistan
69. ( Procapra 2 |W. Thibet and Mongolia

242

ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY.

Order, Family, and
Genus.

70. | Saiga ...
71. | Pantholops
(Alcephalus

72. Budorcas
73. Rupicapra

74. Nemorhedus

75. Capra

HYRACOIDEA
HYRACIDA.
(Hyrax

RODENTIA.
Murip&.

. Mus ..

. Cricetus ...
. Cricetulus
. Meriones

. Rhombomys

. Psammomys
. Sminthus

. Arvicola ...

. Cuniculus

. Myodes

. Myospalax

SPALACIDA.
87. Ellobius ...
88. Spalax

DIpoDIDa&.
89. Dipus

MyoxIp&.
90. Myoxus ...

CASTORIDA.
91. Castor

ScIURIDA.

92. Sciurus

92a. Tamias ...
~ 93. Sciuropterus
94. Pteromys...

95. Spermophilus ne

96. Arctomys...

OcTODONTID A.

97. Ctenodactylus ...

HystTrIcipD&,
98. Hystrix

No. of
Species.

TROD Hee

~
4
on

=
WHE Mw mweo

aa

vee 1215

> ow Re rFOO

2

[PART III.

Range within the Region.

E. Europe and W. Asia

W. Thibet

Syria)

E. Himalayas to E. Thibet

Pyrenees to Caucasus

E.. Himalayas to E. China and
Japan

Spain to Thibet and N.E. Africa

Syria)

The whole region

The whole region

N. China

W. and Central Asia to N. China,
N. Africa

E. Europe, Cent. Asia, N. Africa

Egypt and Palestine

East Europe, Siberia

The whole region

N.E. Europe, Siberia

North of region
Altai Mountains and N. China

S. Russia and S. W. Siberia
Hungary and Greece to W. Asia,
Palestine

S. E. Europe and N. Africa to
N, China

Temperate parts of whole region

Temperate zone, from France to
Amoorland

The whole region

All Northern Asia

Finland to Siberia and Japan

Japan and W. China

E. Europe to N. China and
Kamschatka

Alps to E. Thibet and Kam-
schatka

N. Africa

S. Europe, Palestine, N. China

Range beyond the Region.

Ethiopian genus.

Oriental to
Formosa

Nilgherries, RockyMtns.

Sumatra,

Ethiopian genus

E. Hemisphere
Ethiopian, Indian.
Himalayas, Nearctic

Arctic America
Nearctic

Africa, India

Ethiopian

N. America

All regions but Austral.
N. America

Oriental, Nearctic
Oriental

Nearctic

Nearctic

Ethiopian, Oriental

CHAP. X.]

THE PALAZARCTIC REGION. 243

Order, Family, and
Genus.

LAGOMYIDA.
99. Lagomys

LEPORIDA.
100. Lepus

PASSERES.
TURDIDA.
1. Turdus

2. Oreocincla

3. Monticola

Calliope
Erithacus
Grandala

23.

(Bessornis
SYLVUD.
4. Cisticola — ...
5. ( Acrocephalus...
6. | Dumeticola

7. | Potamodus

8. | Lusciniola

9, | Locustella
10. | Bradyptetus ...
11. \ Calamodus
12. { Phylloscopus...
13. | Hypolais
14, | Abrornis
15. | Reguloides
16. \ Regulus
TP (OFAC a oer
18. | Pyrophthalma
19. ) Melizophilus ...
20. ae wb
21. | Curruca
22. ( Luscinia

| Cyanecula

18

oo

mM cw bo co bo ~_ Ob by bo He bo bo v=) m& oo bo “Te

Range within the Region. Range beyond the Region.

Volga to E. Thibet and Kam- | Nearctic
schatka

The whole region All regions but Austral.

BIRDS.

The whole region (excluding | Almost cosmopolite
Spitzbergen)

N.E. Asia and Japan, straggler | Oriental and Australian
to Europe

S. Europe, N. Africa, Palestine, | Oriental and S. African
N. China

Palestine) Tropical and S, Africa

S. W. Europe, N. Africa, Japan | Ethiop., Orient., Austral.
W. Europe to Japan Orient., Ethiop., Austral.
Nepaul, Lake Baikal, E. Thibet,
high
W. and 8. Europe, N. Africa,
E. Thibet
S. Europe
W. Europe and N. Africa to | India, winter migrants (?)
Japan
S. Europe and Palestine E. and 8S, Africa
Europe, N. Africa, Palestine
The whole region (excluding | Oriental
western islands)
Europe, N. Africa, Palestine, | China, Moluccas, India,

China Africa
Cashmere, E. Thibet Oriental region
Europe and China N. India, Formosa

The whole region (excluding | N. and Central America
Iceland, &c.)
S. Europe, W. Asia, N. Africa | E. and S. Africa
E. Europe and Palestine
W. and 8, Europe, Sardinia
Madeira to W. India, N. Africa |N.E. Africa, Ceylon mi-
grants (?)
Madeira to India, N. Africa E. Africa, India, mi-
grants
W. Europe, N. Africa, Persia
Europe and N. Africa to Kam-| Abyssinia and India
schatka migrants
N. Asia, Himalayas, China Centl. India (? migrant)
Atlantic Islands to Japan
High Himalayas and EK, Thibet

244

ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY.

Order, ‘Family, and
Genus.

27. \ Ruticilla
28. ) Larvivora
29. Dromolza
30. Saxicola—
31. Cercomela
32. Pratincola
33. Accentor ...

TIMALIID&.
34, Pterorhinus

(Malacocercus ...

(Crateropus
(Trochalopteron

(Ianthocincla —

PANURID.

(Paradoxornis
Conostoma
Suthora ...

35.
36.

37.
38.

Panurus ...

89. Cholorivis...

CINCLID&.
40. Cinclus

(Myiophonus ...

TROGLODYTID&.
41. Troglodytes
(Pnoepyga

CERTHIID&.

42. Certhia
43. Tichodroma

SITTIDA.
44, Sitta

PARIDA,
45, Parus

46. Lophophanes ...

47. Acredula ...
48. Agithalus

LIOTRICHIDA.
(Proparus...

Heteromorpha..

wonroc

mem bo

20

loner)

Range within the Region.

[PART III.

Range beyond the Region.

Eu. to Japan, N. Afr., Himalayas
E. Thibet, Amoor, Japan

S. Europe, N. Africa, Palestine
The whole region

Palestine (a desert genus)

W. Europe, N. Africa to India
W. Europe to Japan; high

Himalayas

Thibet and N. W. China
Palestine)

N. Africa, Persia)

E. Thibet)

E. Thibet)

Himalayas and E. Thibet)
High Himalayas and E. Thibet
E. Thibet

W. Europe to W. Siberia

Nepaul and E. Thibet, from
10,000 feet altitude

E. Thibet

The whole region (Atlantic Is-
lands excluded)

Turkestan, Thian-Shan Moun-
tains, 6,000 feet

Iceland and Britain to Japan

E. Thibet)

W. Europe to N. China
S. Europe to N. China

W. Europe to Himalayas and
Japan

W. Europe to. Kamschatka, N.
Africa

Europe and high Himalayas

W. Europe to N. China and
Kamschatka

S. E. Europe

Moupin, in E. Thibet)

Abyssinia, India
Oriental

Ethiopian

EK. and 8. Africa, India
N.E. Africa, N. W. India
Ethiopian to Oriental
Himalayas (?) in winter

Oriental genus
Ethiopian genus
Oriental genus
Oriental genus

(?) Oriental genus

Himalayas, China, For-
mosa

American highlands

Oriental genus

Neotropical and Neare~
tic, Himalayas
Oriental genus

Himalayas, Nearctic
Abyssinia, Nepaul, high

India, Nearctic

Nearctic, Oriental, Ethi-
opian
Nearctic

Ethiopian

Oriental genus and fam.

CHAP. X.]

THE PALZZARCTIC REGION.

enue ce eye ate BS | Range within the Region.
enus. ce
Ae
PYCNONOTIDS.
49. Microscelis 1 | Japan
50. Pyenonotus 2 | Palestine, N. China, Japan
ORIOLIDA,
51. Oriolus 2 |S. Europe, China
MUSCICAPIDE.
52. Muscicapa 2 | W. and Central Europe
53. Butalis 2 | W. Europe to Japan and China
54. Erythrosterna...| 3 | Central Europe to N. China and
Japan
(Xanthopygia... | 1 | Japan)
(Eumyias— 1 | E. Thibet)
(Cyanoptila 1 | Japan and Amoor)
(Siphia 1 | Moupin, E. Thibet)
#50; Tehitrea!... 2 | N. China and Japan
LANIIDA.
56. Lanius 11 | The whole region (excl. Atlantic
Islands)
(Telephonus 1 | N. Africa)
CoRVID.
57. Garrulus ... 7 | W. Europe, N. Africa, to Japan
58. Perisoreus 1 | N. Europe and Siberia
(Urocissa ... 2 | Cashinere, Japan)
59. Nucifraga 3 |W. Europe to Japan, and Hima-
layas
60. Pica... 5 | W. Europe to China and Japan
61. Cyanopica 2 |Spain, N. E. Asia and Japan
62. Corvus 12 | The whole region
63. Hregilus ... 3 |W. Europe to N. China, Hima-
layas
NECTARINIID&.
(Arachnecthra 1 | Palestine)
Dicaipz.
(Zosterops 1 | Amoor and Japan)
AMPELIDA.
64. Ampelis ... 2 | Northern half of region
HIRUNDINIDA.
65. Hirundo ... 2 | The whole region
66. Cotyle 2 | The whole region (excl. Atlan. Is.)
67. Chelidon ... 3 | The whole region
FRINGILLIDE.
68. Fringilla ... 6 | The whole region

245

Range beyond the Region.

Oriental genus
Oriental and Ethiopian

Ethiopian and Oriental

Ethiopian.

E. and S. Africa, Mo-
luceas

Oriental & Madagascar

Oriental genus
Oriental genus
Oriental genus
Oriental genus
Ethiopian and Oriental

Nearctic, Ethiopian,
Oriental
Ethiopian genus

Himalayas, Formosa
N. America

Oriental genus
Himalayan pine forests

S. China and Formosa
migrants [?]

Cosmopolite(excl.S. Am. )

Abyssinian mountains

Oriental genus
Ethiop., Orien., Austral.
North America

Cosmopolite
Nearctic, Ethiop., Orien.
Oriental

Atrica

246

Order, Family, and
Genus.

en

82.

92.
93.
94.

. Acanthis

. Procarduelis ...
. Chrysowitris...
. Dryospiza

. Metoponia

. Chlorospiza ...
» Passer ts
. Montifringilla
. Fringillauda...

. Coccothraustes

. Mycerobas

Eophona...

. Pyrrhula

(Crithagra
Carpodacus

. Erythrospiza ...

. Uragus ...

. Loxia

MO Pinieolaeee ©e2
. Propyrrhula ...
. Pyrrhospiza .
. Linota

. Leucosticte ...
Emberizine

Euspiza
Emberiza
Fringillaria...
Plectrophanes

STURNIDA.

95.
96.
97.

98.

Pastor
Sturnia ...
Sturnus ...

(Amydrus
Podoces ...

ALAUDIDA.

99.

100.
101.

102.

103.
104.

Otocorys

Alauda
Galerita ...

Calandrella

Melanocorypha
Pallasia ..
(Certhilauda ...
(Alaemon

ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY.

No, of
Species.

[eN)

Hm bore

_
OHHH oho > Dr co bb eS) et He CO Orr

bo
bh oF

wrre

SS el

Range within the Region.

[PART ll.

Rang2 beyond the Region.

Europe and N. Africa to Central
Asia

High Himalayas and E. Thibet

W. Europe to Japan

Atlantic Islands to Palestine, N.
Africa

N. E. Europe to W. Himalayas

W. Europe, N. Africa to Japan

The whole region

Europe to Cashmere and Siberia

N. W. Himalayas to E. Thibet,
high

W. Europe, High Himalayas to
Japan

Central Asia & High Himalayas

K. Thibet, China, and Japan

Azores to Japan, High Himalayas

Palestine)

Cent. Eu. to Japan, High Hima-
layas

N. Africa to Afghanistan and
Turkestan

Turkestan & E. Thibet to Japan

Europe, High Himalayas to Japan

N. Europe, Siberia

High Himalayas

Snowy Himalayas

The whole region

Turkestan to Kamschatka

E. Europe to Japan
Europe to Japan

S. Europe, N. Africa
Northern half of region

East Europe, Central Asia

Amoor, Japan, N. China

The whole region (excl. Atlantic
Islands)

Palestine)

Cen. Asia, Turkestan, Yarkand

N. and S. America

China, E. Africa
Ethiopian, Oriental

N. America

China

Alaska

Ethiopian genus

India & China, N. Amer.

N. America
N. America
Darjeeling in winter

N. America
N. W. America

N. America

N. India, China
African genus
N. America

India
Oriental
India, China

N. E. African genus

N. Europe to Japan, N. Africa,|India,N.America, Andes

Arabia

The whole region (excl. Iceland)

Central Europe to N. China, N.
Africa

Central Europe to N. China, N
Africa

S. Eu. N. Africa, N. & Cen. Asia

Mongolia

N. Africa)

N. Africa, Arabia)

India, Africa
India, Central Africa

India
N. W. India

S. African genus
Ethiopian genus

CHAP. X.]

Order, Family, and
Genus.

THE PALAARCTIC REGION.

Range within the Region

105. Ammomanes...

MOorACcILLID.
106. Motacilla
107. Budytes
108. Calobates
PITTIDZ.
(Pitta

PICARLA.
Picips#.

109. Picoides...
110. Picus

111. Hypopicus

(Yungipicus ..

112.
113.

Dryocopus
Gecinus ...

YUNGIDA.
114. Yunx

CUCULID&.
115. Cuculus...

116. Coccystes

CoORACIID.
117. Coracias...

(Eurystomus .. ;

MEROPID&,
118. Merops ...

ALCEDINID.

(Halcyon
119. Alcedo ...
120. Ceryle

Uprurpip#.
LZ Upupa, -..

CAPRIMULGIDA.

122, Caprimulgus...

CYPSELID.

123. Cypselus
124, Chetura...

bo em oO

mt pet

bo bp 0

247

Range beyoad the Region.

S. Europe, N. Africa, to Cash-| Africa, India

mere

The whole region
Europe to China
Atlantic Is., W. Europe, to China

Japan)

N. and Cen. Europe to Thibet &
E, Asia

The whole region (excl. Atlantic
Islands)

N. China

N. China)

N. & Cen. Europe to N. China

W. Europe to Thibet, Amoor &
Japan

W. Europe to N. W.
Thibet and Japan

India,

The whole region (excl, Atlantic
Islands)
S. Europe and N. Africa

Cent. Europe to Cent. Asia
Amoor in summer)

S. Europe to Cashmere, N. Africa

W. Asia, N. China, Japan)
Europe, N. China
S. E. Europe, Japan

S. Europe, N. China

Europe to Japan

The whole region (excl. Iceland)
N. China, Dauria

Oriental, Ethiopian
Oriental, Moluccas
Malaisia, Madagascar

Oriental & Austral. genus

North America

India, China, N. and. S8.
America

Himalayas

Oriental genus

Neotropical
Oriental

N. E. Africa, S$. Africa

Ethiop. Oriental Austral.

Ethiopian and Oriental

Ethiopian, Oriental
Oriental & Austral. genus

Ethiopian and Oriental

Ethiop., Orien., Austral.

Africa, India, America
Ethiop. & Oriental genus
Ethiopian and Oriental

Ethiopian, America
Africa, India

248

Order, Family, and
Genus.

COLUMB.
CoLUMBID&.

125. Columba
26 see Lnrbin ee

(Alszecomus fi

GALLIN &.
PYEROCLIDA.

127. Pterocles
128. Syrrhaptes

TETRAONIDA.

129.
130.
131.
132.
133.

Perdix ...
Coturnix
Lerwa
Caccabis ...

134.
135.

136.,
137.

Tetrao
Bonasa ...
Lagopus...

PHASIANID&.

138.
139.

140.
141.
142.
143.
144,
145.

Ceriornis
Pucrasia—
Phasianus

Tthaginis

TURNICIDA
146s urnixaesee

ACCIPITRES.
VULTURIDA.

147. Vultur ...
148. Gyps

149. Otogyps
150. Neophron

FALCONIDS.

151. Circus
152. Astur
153. Accipiter
154. Buteo

Francolinus ...

Tetraogallus ...

Crossoptilon ...
Lophophorus ...

Tetraophasis ...

Thaumalea ...

ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY.

No. of
bo bp or) Species.

eee > ores re

Co

—
NwWowWwrrH

bo

He bo On

Range within the Region.

The whole region
W. Europe to Japan
KE. Thibet)

S. Europe, N. Africa, to W. India
Central Asia, N. China

Borders of Mediterranean

Europe to Mongolia

Central and S. Europe to Japan

Snowy Himalayas to E. Thibet

Cen. Europe and N. Africa to N.
W. Himalayas

Caucasus to E, Thibet and Altai!

Mountains
Europe and N. Asia
Europe and N. Asia
Iceland, W. Europe to Japan

Thibet, Mongolia, N. China

Cashmere to E. Thibet (highest
woods)

E. Thibet

N. W. Himalayas (high)

N. W. Himalayas to N. W. China

Western Asia to Japan

E. Thibet to Amoor, N. China

Nepaul to E. Thibet (high)

Spain and N. Africa, N. China

Spain and N. Africa to N. China
S. Europe, Palestine, Cen. Asia
S. Europe, N. Africa

Atlantic Isds. to Palestine

Europe to Japan
Europe to N. China
Europe to Japan
Europe to Japan

[PART III.

Range beyond the Region.

Africa, Asia, America
Ethiopian and Oriental
Oriental genus

Ethiopian genus

Ethiopian, Oriental
Ethiop., Orien., Austral.

Abyssinia, Arabia

N. America
N. America
N. America, Greenland

E. Thibet (?)
Himalayas to W. China
| Himalayas

W. Himalayas, Formosa
West China

Ethiop., Orien., Austral.

E. Africa, India
8. Africa, India
Africa, India

Almost Cosmopolite
Almost Cosmopolite
Almost Cosmopolite
Cosmopolite (excl. Aus-

tralia)

CHAP. X.]

Order, Family, and

Genus.

155:
156.
157.
158.
159.

160.

161.
162.

163.
164.

165.
166.

Archibuteo
Gypaetus
Aquila ...
Nisaetus...
Circaetus

Halixetus

Milvus ...
Elanus ....

Pernis
Falco

Hierofaleo
Cerchneis

PANDIONID&.

167.

Pandion—

STRIGID.

168.
169.
170.

yale
172.
173.
174,
175.
176.
177.

Surnia
Nyctea ...
Athene ...
(Ninox

Glaucidium ...

Bubo
Scops
Syrnium...
Otus
Nyctala .
Strix

THE PALAARCTIC REGION.

Mt bo oe et

ie)

be

Leelee SRE OM

No. of
Species.

Range within the Region.

N. Europe to Japan

S. Europe, N. Africa

Europe to Japan

EK. Europe, N. Africa, W. Asia

EK. and 8. Europe, N. Africa, W.
Asia

Iceland and S. Europe to Japan

Europe to Japan, N. Africa
N. Africa, N. China to Amoor

Europe to Jepan
The whole region

| The whole region
Atlantic Islands to Japan

Europe to Japan

N. Europe and Siberia
Arctic regions

Central and S. Europe to Japan
N. China and Japan)
Europe to N. China
Europe to N. China

S. Europe to Japan
Europe to Japan
Europe to Japan

N. Europe to E. Siberia
Europe and N, Africa

249

Range beyond the Region.

N. America

Abyssinia, Himalayas
Nearctic, Ethiop., Orien.
India, Australia

Africa, India

Cosmopolite (excl, Neo-
tropical region)

The Old World & Austral.

Cosmopolite (excl. East
U.S.)

‘Ethiopian and Oriental

Cosmopolite (excl. Pacific
Islands)

N. America

Cosmop. (excl. Oceania)

Cosmopolite

North America

Arctic America .
Ethiop.,Orien., Austral.
Oriental genus

America

Africa, India, America
African, Orien., Austral.
African, Oriental, Amer.
Almost Cosmopolite

N. America

All warm & temp. regions

Peculiar or very characteristic Genera of Wading and Swimming Birds.

GRALLA.
RALLIDA.

Ortygonetra

ScoLOPACID,

Ibidorhyncha ..

Terekia ...
Helodromas
Machetes...

Eurinorhynchus

GLAREOLID&.

Pluvianus

CHARADRIIDA.

Vanellus

Vou. L—18

a et et et

Europe, N. E. Africa

Cashmere & Cen. Asia, N. China
N. E. Europe and Siberia

E. and N. Europe, N. India

N. and Cen. Europe, Cen. Asia

| N.E. Asia

N. Africa, Spain

Europe to the Punjaub

Himalayan Valleys
India, Australia(migrant)

India in winter
Bengal

S. America

250

ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY.

[PART III.

Order, Family, and
Genus.

OTIDID#.
Otis..

ANSERES.
ANATIDA.
Bucephala
Histrionicus ...
Harelda ...
Somateria

(édemia...

LARIDS,
RISA Meets ose

COLYMBIDZ.
Colymbus

ALCIDZ.

Alea
Fratercula
Uria ane
Mergulus

Co OO Ht et OOo eR

moo Oo bh

———_——_

Range within the Region.

W. Europe to Mongolia, N. Africa

N. China to Amoor

Iceland, N. Eurupe, and Asia
Iceland, N. Siberia

North of whole region

North of whole region

North of whole region

North coasts of whole region

North of whole region

North coasts of whole region
North coasts of whole region
North coasts of whole region
Iceland and Arctic coasts

Range beyond the Region.

N. America
N. America
N. America
Arctic America
N. America
N. America

N. America

N. America

N. America
N. America
N. America
Arctic America

REGION

Deri OsPairAwN

~
4

is

Seale | inch=1000 miles

10

oO

10

20

20

= Te ea

10 +

Ascension I.
=

Dd —<$—

EXPLANATION
Terrestrial Contours

Marine Contour of 1000 feet

White

od
z
=
sSseass
SSSss
S4Hoss
NaASSs
as ba SS Vi}
2 re
>
Ty a
mY =
a S)
iS ies oe
3sssss
ZSsgs a
AINISS ,
~
%
2)
o

The

ts she

m by a dotted line

Desert
The boundari.

ve maunbers

and reter

CAPE TOWN?

10

Greenwich

Meridian of O

10

20

30

Stanfords Geographical Estab‘ London

New York: Harper & Brothers.

CHAPTER XI.
THE ETHIOPIAN REGION.

THIS is one of the best defined of the great zoological regions,
consisting of tropical and South Africa, to which must be added
tropical Arabia, Madagascar, and a few other islands, all popu-
larly known as African. Some naturalists would extend the
region northwards to the Atlas Mountains and include the whole
of the Sahara; but the animal life of the northern part of that
great desert seems more akin to the Palearctic fauna of North
Africa. The Sahara is really a debatable land which has been
peopled from both regions; and until we know more of the natural
history of the great plateaus which rise like islands in the waste
of sand, it will be safer to make the provisional boundary line at
or near the tropic, thus giving the northern half to the Palearctic,
the southern to the Ethiopian region. The same line may be
continued across Arabia.

With our present imperfect knowledge of the interior of
Africa, only three great continental sub-regions can be well de-
fined. The open pasture lands of interior tropical Africa are
wonderfully uniform in their productions; a great number of
species ranging from Senegal to Abyssinia and thence to the
Zambesi, while almost all the commoner African genera extend
over the whole of this area. Almost all this extensive tract of
country is a moderately elevated plateau, with a hot and dry
climate, and characterised by a grassy vegetation interspersed
with patches of forest. This forms our first or East African
sub-region. The whole of the west coast from the south side of
the Gambia River to about 10° or 12° south latitude, is a very

252 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

different kind of country ; being almost wholly dense forests
where not cleared by man, and having the hot moist uniform
climate, and perennial luxuriance of vegetation, which charac-
terise the great equatorial belt of forest all round the globe. This
forest country extends to an unknown distance inland, but it was
found, with its features well marked, by Dr. Schweinfurth directly
he crossed the south-western watershed of the Nile; and far to
the south we find it again unmistakably indicated, in the exces-
sively moist forest country about the head waters of the Congo,
where the heroic Livingstone met his death. In this forest
district many of the more remarkable African types are alone
found, and its productions occasionally present us with curious
similarities to those of the far removed South American or
Malayan forests. This is our second or West African sub-
region.

Extra-tropical South Africa possesses features of its own, quite
distinct from those of both the preceding regions (although it has
also much in common with the first). Its vegetation is known
to be one of the richest, most peculiar, and most remarkable on
the globe ; and in its zoology it has a speciality, similar in kind
but less in degree, which renders it both natural and convenient
to separate it as our third, or South African sub-region. Its
limits are not very clearly ascertained, but it is probably bounded
by the Kalahari desert on the north-west, and by the Limpopo
Valley, or the mountain range beyond, on the north-east, although
some of its peculiar forms extend to Mozambique. There
remains the great Island of Madagascar, one of the most isolated
and most interesting on the globe, as regards its animal produc-
tions ; and to this must be added, the smaller islands of Bourbon,
Mauritius and Rodriguez, the Seychelles and the Comoro Islands,
forming together the Mascarene Islands,—the whole constituting
our fourth sub-region.

Zoological Characteristics of the Ethiopian Region—We have
now to consider briefly, what are the peculiarities and charac-
teristics of the Ethiopian Region as a whole,—those which give
it its distinctive features and broadly separate it from the other
primary zoological regions.

CHAP. XI.] THE ETHIOPIAN REGION. 253

Mammalia—tThis region has 9 peculiar families of mammalia.
Chiromyide (containing the aye-aye) ; Potamogalide and Chry-
sochloride (Insectivora); Cryptoproctids and Protelidee (Carni-
vora); Hippopotamide and Camelopardalide (Ungulata); and
Orycteropodide (Edentata). Besides these it possesses 7 pecu-
liar genera of apes, Z’roglodytes, Colobus, Myiopithecus Cerco-
pithecus, Cercocebus, Theropithecus, and Cynocephalus; 2 sub-
families of lemurs containing 6 genera, confined to Madagascar,
with 3 genera of two other sub-families confined to the con-
tinent; of Insectivora a family, Centetide, with 5 genera,
peculiar to Madagascar, and the genera Petrodromus and Rhyn-
chocyon belonging to the Macroscelidide, or elephant-shrews,
restricted to the continent ; numerous peculiar genera or sub-
genera of civets; Lycaon and Megalotis, remarkable genera of
Canide ; Jctonyx, the zorilla, a genus allied to the weasels ;
15 peculiar genera of Muride ; Pectinator, a genus of the South
American family Octodontide; and 2 genera of the South
American Echimyidée or spiny rats. Of abundant and charac-
teristic groups it possesses Macroscelides, Felis, Hyena, Hyracx,
Rhinoceros, and Elephas, as well as several species of zebra and
a great variety of antelopes.

The great speciality indicated by these numerous peculiar
families and genera, is still farther increased by the absence
of certain groups dominant in the Old-World continent,
an absence which we can only account for by the persistence,
through long epochs, of barriers isolating the greater part of Africa
from the rest of the world. These groups are, Urside, the bears ;
Talpide the moles; Camelide, the camels; Cervide, the deer ;
Caprine, the goats and sheep; and the genera Bos (wild ox); and
Sus (wild boar). Combining these striking deficiencies, with
the no less striking peculiarities above enumerated, it seems
hardly possible to have a region more sharply divided from
the rest of the globe than this is, by ils whole assemblage of
mammalia,

Lirds.—In birds the Ethiopian region is by no means so
strikingly peculiar, many of these having been able to pass the
ancient barriers which so long limited the range of mammalia.

254 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

It is, however, sufficiently rich, possessing 54 families of land
birds, besides a few genera whose position is not well ascertained,
and which may constitute distinct families. Of these 6 are
peculiar, Musophagidee (the plantain eaters); Coliide (the colies) ;
Leptosomide, allied to the cuckoos; Irrisoridx, allied to the
hoopoes ; and Serpentaride, allied to the hawks. Only one
Passerine family is peculiar—Paictide, while most of the other
tropical regions possess several; but Huryceros and Buphaga,
here classed with the Sturnide, ought, perhaps, to form two
more. It has, however, many peculiar genera, especially among the
fruit-thrushes, Pycndénotide ; flycatchers, Muscicapide ; shrikes,
Lanide ; crows, Corvide ; starlings, Sturnide ; and weaver-birds,
Ploceide; the latter family being very characteristic of the region.
It is also rich in barbets, Megaleemide (7 peculiar genera) ;
cuckoos, Cuculide; rollers, Coraciide ; bee-eaters, Meropide ;
hornbills, Bucerotide ; and goat-suckers, Caprimulgide. It is
poor in parrots and rather so in pigeons; but it abounds in
Pterocles and Francolinus, genera of Galline, and possesses 4
genera of the peculiar group of the guinea-fowls, forming part of
the pheasant family. It abounds in vultures, eagles, and other
birds of prey, among which is the anomalous genus Serpentarius,
the secretary-bird, constituting a distinct family. Many of the
most remarkable forms are confined to Madagascar and the
adjacent islands, and will be noticed in our account of that sub-
region.

Reptiles—Of the reptiles there are 4 peculiar Ethiopian
families ;—3 of snakes, Rachiodontidee, Dendraspidee, and Atrac-
taspidze and 1 of lizards, Chameesauride.

Psammophidee (desert snakes) are abundant, as are Lycodontide
(fanged ground-snakes), and Viperide (vipers). The following
genera of snakes are peculiar or highly characteristic :—Lepto-
rhynchus, Rhamnophis, Herpetethiops and Grayia (Colubride) ;
Hopsidrophis and Bucephalus (Dendrophide) ; Langalia (Dryo-
phid) ; Pythonodipsas (Dipsadide) ; Boedon, Lycophidion, Holu-
ropholis, Simocephalus and Lamprophis (Lycodontide) ; Hortulia
and Sanzinia (Pythonidee); Cyrptophis, Elapsoidea and Pecilo-
phis (Elapidee) ; and Atheris (Viperide). The following genera

CHAP. XI.] THE ETHIOPIAN REGION. 255

of lizards are the most characteristic :—Monotrophis (Lepidos-
ternidee) ; Cordylus, Pseudocordylus, Platysaurus, Cordylosaurus,
Pleurostichus, Saurophis and Zonurus (Zonuride) ; Sphenops,
Scelotes, Sphenocephalus and Sepsina (Sepide) ; Pachydactylus
(Geckotide) ; Agama (Agamidz) ; and Chameleon (Chameleonide).
Of tortoises, Cynyxis, Pyxis and Chersina (Testudinide), and
Cycloderma (Trionychidz) are the most characteristic.

Amphibia —Of the 9 families of amphibia there is only
1 peculiar, the Dactylethride, a group of toads; but the
Alytidee, a family of frogs, are abundant.

Fresh-water Fish—Of the 14 families of fresh-water fishes
3 are peculiar: Mormyride and Gymnarchide, small groups
not far removed from the pikes ; and Polypteride, a small group
of ganoid fishes allied to the gar-pikes (Lepidosteide) of North
America.

Summary of Ethiopian Vertebrates—Combining the results
here indicated and set forth in greater detail in the tables of
distribution, we find that the Ethiopian region possesses ex-
amples of 44 families of mammalia, 72 of birds, 35 of reptiles,
9 of amphibia, and 15 of fresh-water fishes. It has 23 (or
perhaps 25) families of Vertebrata altogether peculiar to it out
of a total of 175 families, or almost exactly one-eighth of the
whole. Out of 142 genera of mammalia found within the
region, 90 are peculiar to it; a proportion not much short of
two-thirds. Of land birds there are 294 genera, of which
179 are peculiar; giving a proportion of a little less than
three-fifths.

Compared with the Oriental region this shows a con-
siderably larger amount of speciality under all the heads;
but the superiority is mainly due to the wonderful and iso-
lated fauna of Madagascar, to which the Oriental region has
nothing comparable. Without this the regions would be nearly
equal.

Insects: Lepidoptera —11 out of the 16 families of butter-
flies have representatives in Africa, but none are peculiar.
Acreidz is one of the most characteristic families, and there

256 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

are many interesting forms of Nymphalid, Lycznide, and
Papilionide. The peculiar or characteristic forms are A mauris
(Danaide); Gnophodes, Leptoneura, Bicyclus, Heteropsis and
Canyra (Satyride); Acrea (Acreide); Lachnoptera, . Precis,
Salamis, Crenis, Godartia, Amphidema, Pseudacrea, Catuna,
Euryphene, Romaleosoma, Hamanuwmida, Aterica, Harma,
Meneris, Charaxes, and Philognoma (Nymphalidae); Pentila,
Liptena, Durbania, Zeritis, Capys, Phytala, Epitola, Hewitsonia
and Deloneura (Lycenide); Pseudopontia, Idmais, Teracolus,
Callosune (Pieride); Abantis, Ceratrichia and Caprona (Hes-
peride). The total number of species known is about 750;
which is very poor for an extensive tropical region, but this
is not to be wondered at when the nature of much of the
country is considered. It is also, no doubt, partly due to our
comparative ignorance of the great equatorial forest district,
which is the only part likely to be very productive in this
order of insects.

Coleoptera.—In our first’ representative family, Cicindelidée
or tiger-beetles, the Ethiopian region is rather rich, having 13
genera, 11 of which are peculiar to it; and among these are
such remarkable forms as Manticora, Myrmecoptera and Dromica ;
with Megacephala, a genus only found elsewhere in Australia
and South America.

In Carabidee or carnivorous ground beetles, there are
about 75 peculiar genera. Among the most characteristic
are Anthia, Polyrhina, Graphipterus and Pirezia, which are
almost all pecuhar; while Orthogonius, Hexagonia, Macrochilus,
Thyreopterus, Eudema, and <Abacetus are common to this and
the Oriental region ; and Hypolithus to the Neotropical.

Out of 27 genera of Buprestidze, or metallic beetles, only 6 are
peculiar to the region, one of the most remarkable being Poly-
bothrus, confined to Madagascar. Sternocera and Chrysochroa are
characteristic of this region and the Oriental ; it has Ju/odis in
common with the Mediterranean sub-region, ana belionota
with the Malayan.

The region is not rich in Lucanide, or stag-beetles, possessing
only 10 genera, 7 of which are peculiar, but most of them con-

CHAP, XI.]} THE ETHIOPIAN REGION. 257

sist of single species. The other three genera, Cladognathus,
Nigidius, and Figulus, are the most characteristic, though all
have a tolerably wide range in the Old World.

In the elegant Cetoniidee, or rose-chafers, this region stands
preeminent, possessing 76 genera, 64 of which are peculiar to
it. The others are chiefly Oriental, except Oxythrwa which is
European, and Stethodesma which is Neotropical. Preeminent
in size and beauty is Goliathus, comprising perhaps the most
bulky of all highly-coloured beetles. Other large and char-
acteristic genera are Ceratorhina, Ischnostoma, Anochilia,
Diplognatha, Agenius, and many others of less extent.

In the enormous tribe of Longicorns, or long-horned beetles,
the Ethiopian is not so rich as the other three tropical regions ;
but this may be, in great part, owing to its more productive
districts having never been explored by any competent entomo-
logists. It nevertheless possesses 262 genera, 216 of which are
peculiar, the others being mostly groups of very wide range.
Out of sucha large number it is difficult to select a few as most
characteristic, but some of the peculiarities of distribution as
regards other regions may be named. Among Prionide, Tithoes
is a characteristic Ethiopian genus. A few species of the
American genera Parandra and Mallodon occur here, while the
North Temperate genus Prionus is only found in Madagascar.
Among Cerambycidee, Promeces is the most characteristic. The
American genera Oeme and Cyrtomerus occur; while Homalach-
nus and Philagathes are Malayan, and Leptocera occurs only in
Madagascar, Ceylon, Austro-Malaya, and Australia. The Lamiide
are very fine; Sternotomis, Tragocephala, Ceroplesis, Phryneta,
Volumnia, and Nitocris, being very abundant and characteristic.
Most of the non-peculiar genera of this family are Oriental,
but Spalacopsis and Acanthoderes are American, while Tetraglenes
and Schenionta have been found only in East and South Africa
and in Malaya.

Terrestrial Mollusca—In the extensive family of the Helicide
or snails, 13 genera are represented, only one of which,
Columna, is peculiar. This region is however the metropolis of
Achatina, some of the species being the largest land-shells

258 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

known. Buliminus, Stenogyra, and Pupa are characteristic
genera. Bulimus is absent, though one species inhabits St.
Helena. The operculated shells are not very well represented,
the great family of Cyclostomide having here only nine genera,
with but one peculiar, Lithidion, found in Madagascar, Socotra,
and Arabia. None of the genera appear to be well represented
throughout the region, and they are almost or quite absent from
West Africa.

According to Woodward’s Manual (1868) West Africa has
about 200 species of land-shells, South Africa about 100,
Madagascar nearly 100, Mauritius about 50. All the islands
have their peculiar species; and are, in proportion to their
extent, much richer than the continent ; as is usually the case-

THE ETHIOPIAN SUB-REGIONS.

" It has been already explained that these are to some extent
provisional; yet it is believed that they represent generally the
primary natural divisions of the region, however they may be
subdivided when our knowledge of their productions becomes
more accurate.

I. The Eust African Sub-region, ov Central and East Africa.

This division includes all the open country of tropical Africa
south of the Sahara, as well as an undefined southern margin of
that great desert. With the exception of a narrow strip along
the east coast and the valleys of the Niger and Nile, it is a vast
elevated plateau from 1,000 to 4,000 feet high, hilly rather than
mountainous, except the lofty table land of Abyssinia, with
mountains rising to 16,000 feet and extending south to the
equator, where it terminates in the peaks of Kenia and Kili-
mandjaro, 18,000 and 20,000 feet high. The northern portion
of this sub-region is a belt about 300 miles wide between the
Sahara on the north and the great equatorial forest on the south,
extending from Cape Verd, the extreme western point of Africa,
across the northern bend of the Niger and Lake Tchad to the
mountains of Abyssinia. The greater part of this tract has a

—

CHAP. XI.] THE ETHIOPIAN REGION. 259

moderate elevation. The eastern portion reaches from about the
second cataract of the Nile, or perhaps from about the parallel
of 20° N. Latitude, down to about 20° S. Latitude, and from the
east coast to where the great forest region commences, or to Lake
Tanganyika and about the meridian of 28° to 30° E. Longitude.
The greater part of this tract is a lofty plateau.

The surface of all this sub-region is generally open, covered
with a vegetation of high grasses or thorny shrubs, with scat-
tered trees and isolated patches of forest in favourable situations.
The only parts where extensive continuous forests occur, are on
the eastern and western slopes of the great Abyssinian plateau,
and on the Mozambique coast from Zanzibar to Sofala. The
whole of this great district has one general zoological character.
Many species range from Senegal to Abyssinia, others from
Abyssinia to the Zambesi, and a few, as Mungos fasciatus and
Phacocherus cethiopicus, range over the entire sub-region. Fenne-
cus, Ictonyx, and several genera of antelopes, characterise every
part of it, as do many genera of birds. Coracias nevia, Cory-
thornis cyanostigma, Tockus nasutus, T. erythrorhynchus, Parus
leucopterus, Buphaga africana, Vidua paradisea, are examples
of species, which are found in the Gambia, Abyssinia and South
East Africa, but not in the West African sub-region ; and con-
sidering how very little is known of the natural history
of the country immediately south of the Sahara, it may
well be supposed that these are only a small portion of the
species really common to the whole area in question, and which
prove its fundamental unity.

Although this sub-region is so extensive and so generally
uniform in physical features, it is by far the least peculiar part
of Africa. It possesses, of course, all those wide-spread Ethiopian
types which inhabit every part of the region, but it has hardly
any special features of its own. The few genera which are
peculiar to it have generally a limited range, and for the most
part belong, either to the isolated mountain-plateau of Abyssinia
which is almost as much Palearctic as Ethiopian, or to the woody
districts of Mozambique where the fauna has more of a West
or South African character.

260 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

Mammalia.—The only forms of Mammalia peculiar to this
sub-region are Zheropithecus, one of the Cynopithecide confined
to Abyssinia; Petrodromus and Rhynchocyon, belonging to the
insectivorous Macroscelidide, have only been found in Mozam-
bique; the Antelopine genus Neotragus, from Abyssinia south-
ward; Saccostomus and Pelomys genera of Muride inhabiting
Mozambique ; Heterocephalus from Abyssinia, and Heliophobius
from Mozambique, belonging to the Spalacide; and Pectinator
from Abyssinia, belonging to the Octodontide. Cynocephalus,
Rhinoceros, Camelopardalis, and antelopes of the genera Oryz,
Cervicapra, Kobus, Nanotragus, Cephalophus, Hippotragus, Alce-
phalus, and Catoblepas, are characteristic; as well as Felis,
Hyena, and numerous civets and ichneumons.

Birds.—Peculiar forms of birds are hardly to be found here;
we only meet with two—Hypocolius, a genus of shrikes in Abys-
sinia ; and Baleniceps, the great boat-billed heron of the Upper
Nile. Yet throughout the country birds are abundant, and most
of the typical Ethiopian forms are well represented.

Reptiles—Of reptiles, the only peculiar forms recorded are
Xenocalamus, a genus of snakes, belonging to the Calamariide ;
and Pythonodipsas, one of the Dipsadide, both from the Zambesi ;
and among lizards, Pisturus, one of the Geckotide, from Abys-
sinia.

Amphibia and Fishes.—There are no peculiar forms of amphibia
or of fresh-water fishes.

Insects.—Insects are almost equally unproductive of peculiar
forms. Among butterflies we have Abantis, one of the Hesperide,
from Mozambique ; and in Coleoptera, 2 genera of Cicindelide,
8 of Carabidee, 1 or 2 of Cetoniide, and about half-a-dozen of
Longicorns: a mere nothing, as we shall see, compared with the
hosts of peculiar genera that characterise each of the other sub-
regions. Neither do land-shells appear to present any peculiar
forms.

The fact that so very few special types characterise the exten-
sive area now under consideration is very noteworthy. It justifies
us in uniting this large and widespread tract of country as
forming essentially but one sub-division of the great Ethiopian

PLATE IV.

ff.
‘ Wi
Sey ee

CHARACTERISTIC ANIMALS OF EAST AFRICA,

CHAP. XI. ] THE ETHIOPIAN REGION. 261

region, and it suggests some curious speculations as to the former
history of that region, a subject which must be deferred to the
latter part of this chapter. In none of the other great tropical
regions does it occur, that the largest portion of their area,
although swarming with life, yet possesses hardly any distinctive
features except the absence of numerous types characteristic of
the other sub-regions.

Plate IV.—Illustrating the Zoology of East Africa.—Al\though
this sub-region has so little speciality, it is that which abounds
most in large animals, and is, perhaps, the best representative of
Africa as regards zoology. Some of the most distinctive of African
animals range over the whole of it, and as, from recent explora-
tions, many parts of this wide area have been made known to the
reading public, we devote one of our plates to illustrate the
especially African forms of life that here abound. The antelopes
represented are the koodoo (T’ragelaphus strepsiceros) one of the
handsomest of the family, which ranges over all the highlands
of Africa from Abyssinia to the southern districts. To the left
is the aardvark, or earth pig, of North Eastern Africa (Orycteropus
athiopicus) which, to the north of the equator in East Africa, ”
represents the allied species of the Cape of Good Hope. These
Edentata are probably remnants of the ancient fauna of Africa,
when it was completely isolated from the northern continents
and few of the higher types had been introduced. The large
bird in the foreground is the secretary-bird, or serpent-killer
(Serpentarius reptilivorus), which has affinities both for the birds-
of-prey and the waders. It is common over almost all the open
country of Africa, destroying and féeding on the most venomous
serpents. The bird on the wing is the red-billed promerops
rrisor erythrorhynchus), a handsome bird with glossy plumage
and coral-red bill. It is allied to the hoopoes, and feeds on
insects which it hunts for among the branches of trees. This
species also ranges over a large part of east and central Africa to
near the Cape of Good Hope. Other species are found in the
west; and the genus, which forms a distinct family, [vrisoride, is
one of the best marked Ethiopian types of birds. In the distance
is a rhinoceros, now one of the characteristic features of African

262 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

zoology, though there is reason to believe that it is a compara-
tively recent intruder into the country.

IT. The West-African Sub-region.

This may be defined as the equatorial-forest sub-region, since it
comprises all that portion of Africa, from the west coast inland,
over which the great equatorial forests prevail more or less unin-
terruptedly. These commence to the south of the Gambia River,
and extend eastwards in a line roughly parallel to the southern
margin of the great desert, as far as the sources of the upper
Nile and the mountains forming the western boundary of the
basin of the great lakes ; and southward to that high but marshy
forest-country in which Livingstone was travelling at the time
of his death. Its southern limits are undetermined, but are pro-
bably somewhere about the parallel of 11° S. Latitude.t

This extensive and luxuriant district has only been explored
zoologically in the neighbourhood of the West coast. Much, no
doubt, remains to be done in the interior, yet its main features
are sufficiently well known, and most of its characteristic types
of animal life have, no doubt, been discovered,

Mammalia—sSeveral very important groups of mammals are
peculiar to this sub-region. Most prominent are the great
anthropoid apes—the gorilla and the chimpanzee—forming the
genus T'roglodytes ; and monkeys of the genera Myiopithecus
and Cercocebus. Two remarkable forms of lemurs, Perodicticus
and Arctocebus, are also peculiar to West Africa. Among the
Insectivora is Potamogale, a semi-aquatic animal, forming a
distinct family; and three peculiar genera of civets (Viverride)
have been described. Hyomoschus, a small, deer-like animal,
belongs to the Tragulide, or chevrotains, a family otherwise

1 Dr. Schweinfurth has accurately determined the limits of the sub-region
at the point where he crossed the watershed between the Nile tributaries and
those of the Shari, in 43° N. Lat. and 283° E. Long. He describes a sudden
change in the character of the vegetation, which to the southward of this
point assumes a West-African character. Here also the chimpanzee and
grey parrot first appear, and certain species of plants only known elsewhere
in Western Africa.

CHAP, XI. ] THE ETHIOPIAN REGION. 263

confined to the Oriental region; and in the squirrel family is a
curious genus, Anomalurus, which resembles the flying squirrels
of other parts of the world, without being directly allied to them.

Birds.—In this class we find a larger proportionate number
of peculiar forms. Hypergerus and Alethe, belonging to the
Timaliide, or babblers, are perhaps allied to Malayan groups;
Parinia, a peculiar form of tit, is found only in Prince’s Island ;
Izonotus is an abundant and characteristic form of Pycnonotide;
Fraseria, Hypodes, Cuphopterus, and Chaunonotus, are peculiar
genera of shrikes ; Picathartes is one of the many strange forms
of the crow family ; Cinnyricinelus is a peculiar genus of sun-
birds ; Pholidornis is supposed to belong to the Oriental Diceide,
or flower-peckers; Waldenia is a recently-described new form
of swallow; Ligurnus, a finch, Spermospiga, a weaver bird, and
Onychognathus a starling, are also peculiar West African genera.
Coming to the Picarize we have Verreauxia, a peculiar wood-
pecker; three peculiar genera of barbets (Megalemide) ;
the typical plantain-eaters (Musophaga); Myioceyx, a peculiar
genus of kingfishers; while Berenicornis is a genus of crested
hornbills, only found elsewhere in Malaya. The grey parrots,
of the genus Psittacus, are confined to this sub-region, as are
two peculiar genera of partridges, and three of guinea-
fowl. We have also here a species of Pitta, one of the Ori-
ental family of ground-thrushes; and the Oriental paroquets,
Paleornis, are found here as well as in Abyssinia and the
Mascarene Islands.

We thus find, both in the Mammalia and birds of West Africa,
a special Oriental or even Malayan element not present in the
other parts of tropical Africa, although appearing again in
Madagascar. In the Mammalia it is represented by the anthro-
poid apes; by Colobus allied to Semnopithecus, and by Cercocebus
allied to Macacus ; and especially by a form of the Malayan
family of chevrotains (Tragulide). The Malayan genus of otters,
Aonyzx, is also said to occur in West and South Africa. In
birds we have special Oriental and Malayan affinities in Alethe,
Pholidornis, Berenicornis, Pitta, and Palwornis; while the
Oriental genus Z'reron has a wide range in Africa. We shall

264 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART m1.

endeavour to ascertain the meaning of this special relation at
a subsequent stage of our inquiries.

Plate V—River Scene in West Africa, with Characteristic
Animals.—Our artist has here well represented the luxuriance
and beauty of a tropical forest; and the whole scene is
such as might be witnessed on the banks of one of the
rivers of equatorial West Africa. On the right we see a
red river-hog (Potamocherus penicillatus), one of the hand-
somest of the swine family, and highly characteristic of the
West African sub-region. In a tree overhead is the potto
(Perodicticus potto), one of the curious forms of lemur con-
fined to West Africa. On the left is the remarkable Pota-
mogale velox, first discovered by Du Chaillu—an Insectivorous
animal, with the form and habits of an otter. On the other
side of the river are seen a pair of gorillas (7roglodytes gorilla),
the largest of the anthropoid apes.

The bird on the wing is the Whydah finch (Vidua paradisea),
remarkable for the enormous plumes with which the tail of the
male bird is decorated during the breeding season. The crested
bird overhead is one of the beautiful green touracos (Z'uracus
macrorhynchus), belonging to the Musophagide, or plantain-eaters,
a family wholly African, and most abundant in the western
sub-region.

- Reptiles—tIn this class we find a large number of peculiar
forms ; 13 genera of snakes, 3 of lizards, and 2 of tortoises being
confined to the sub-region. The snakes are Pariaspis, Elapops,
and Prosymna (Calamariidee), Rhamnophis, Herpetethiops, and
Grayia (Colubride), Neusterophis and Limnophis (Homalopside),
Simocephalus and Holurophis (Lycodontide) ; Pelophilus (Pytho-
nid); Hlapsoidea (Elapidee); and <Atheris (Viperide). The
lizards are Dalophia (Lepidosternidx) ; Ofosawrus (Scincide) ;
Psilodactylus (Geckotide). The tortoises, Cinyxis (Testudinide)
and Tetrathyra (Trionichide).

Amphibia.—Of Amphibia, there are 2 peculiar genera of tree-
frogs, Hylambatis and Hemimantis, belonging to the Polype-
datidze.

ANDOS

NI

“STVWINV OLISIVALOVUVHO HLIM SVOTYAV LSA

OH

INN

lp A See Be ie eee

CHAP. XI.] THE ETHIOPIAN REGION. 265

Here, too, we find some interesting relations with the Oriental
region on the one side, and the Neotropical on the other. The
snakes of the family Homalopside have a wide range, in America,
Europe, and all over the Oriental region, but are confined to
West Africa in the Ethiopian region. Dryiophis (Dryiophide)
and Dipsadoboa (Dipsadidz) on the other hand, are genera of
tropical America which occur also in West Africa. The family
of lizards, Acontiade, are found in West and South Africa,
Ceylon, and the Moluccas. The family of toads, Engystomide,
in West and South Africa and the whole Oriental region; while
the Phryniscidz inhabit tropical Africa and Java.

Insects—We have here a large number of peculiar genera.
There are 10 of butterflies, Lachnoptera, Amphidema, and Catuna
belonging to the Nymphalide, while four others are Lycenide.
The genus Huxanthe is common to West Africa and Madagascar.

Of Coleoptera there are 55 peculiar genera; 20 are Carabide,
2 Lucanide, 12 Cetoniide, 3 Prionide, 16 Cerambycide, and
34 Lamiide. Besides these there are 4 or 5 genera confined to
West Africa and Madagascar.

Land Shells—West Africa is very rich in land shells, but it
does not appear to possess any well-marked genera, although
several of the smaller groups or sub-genera are confined to it.
Helicide of the genera Nanina, Buliminus and Achatina are
abundant and characteristic.

Islands of the West African Sub-region.—The islands in the
Gulf of Guinea are, Fernando Po, very near the main land, with
Prince's Island and St. Thomas, considerably further away to the
south-west. Fernando Po was once thought to be a remarkable
instance of an island possessing a very peculiar fauna, although
close to the main land and not divided from it by a deep sea.
This, however, was due to our having obtained considerable
collections from Fernando Po, while the opposite coast was
almost unknown. One after another the species supposed to be
peculiar have been found on the continent, till it becomes prob-
able, that, as in the case of other islands similarly situated, it
contains no peculiar species whatever. The presence of nume-

rous mammalia, among which are baboons, lemurs, Hyrax, and
Vou. I.—19

266 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

Anomalurus, shows that this island has probably once been united
to the continent.

Prince’s Island, situated about 100 miles from the coast, has
no mammals, but between 30 and 40 species of birds. Of these
7 are peculiar species,viz., Zosterops ficedulina, Cuphopterus dohrna
(a peculiar genus of Sylvide), Symplectes princeps, Crithagra
rufilata, Columba chlorophea, Peristera principalis, and Stria
thomensis.

In the Island of St. Thomas, situated on the equator about 150
miles from the coast, there are 6 peculiar species out of 30 known
birds, viz., Scops leucopsis, Zosterops lugubris, Turdus olivaceo-
fuscus, Oriolus crassirostris, Symplectes sancti-thome and Aplopelia
simplex ; also Strix thomensis in common with Prince’s Island.
The remainder are all found on the adjacent coasts. It is re-
markable that in Prince’s Island there are no birds of prey, any
that appear being driven off by the parrots (Psittacus erithacus)
that abound there; whereas in St. Thomas and Fernando Po
they are plentiful.

ITI, South-African Sub-reqion.

This is the most peculiar and interesting part of Africa, but
owing to the absence of existing barriers its limits cannot be
well defined. The typical portion of it hardly contains more
than the narrow strip of territory limited by the mountain range
which forms the boundary of the Cape Colony and Natal, while
in a wider sense it may be extended to include Mozambique. It
may perhaps be best characterised as bounded by the Kalahari
desert and the Limpopo river. It is in the more limited district
of the extreme south, that the wonderful Cape flora alone exists.
Here are more genera and species, and more peculiar types of
plants congregated together, than in any other part of the globe
of equal extent. There are indications of a somewhat similar
richness and specialization in the zoology of this country; but
animals are so much less closely dependent on soil and climate,
that much of the original peculiarity has been obliterated, by
long continued interchange of species with so vast an area as

CHAP. XI.] THE ETHIOPIAN REGION. 267

that of Africa south of the equator. The extreme peculiarity
and isolation of the flora must not, however, be lost sight of, if
we would correctly interpret the phenomena afforded by the dis-
tribution of animal life on the African continent.

Mammalia.—A much larger number of peculiar forms of mam-
mals are found here than in any of the other sub-regions,
although it is far less in extent than either of the three divi-
sions of the continent. Among Insectivora we have the
Chrysochloridz, or golden moles, consisting of two genera confined
to South Africa; while the Macroscelidide, or elephant shrews,
are also characteristically South African, although ranging as far as
Mozambique and the Zambezi, with one outlying species in North
Africa. The Viverridé are represented by three peculiar genera,
Ariela, Cynictis, and Suricata. The Carnivora present some
remarkable forms: Proteles, forming a distinct family allied to
the hyzenas and weasels; and two curious forms of Canidée
Megalotis (the long-eared fox) and Lycaon (the hyzna-dog), the
latter found also in parts of East Africa. Hydrogale is a
peculiar form of Mustelide ; Pelea one of the antelopes; Den-
dromys, Malacothriz, and Mystromys are peculiar genera of the
mouse family (Muride) ; Bathyerges one of the mole-rats (Spa-
lacide) ; Pedetes, the Cape-hare, a remarkable form of jerboa ; and
Petromys, one of the spiny-rats (Echimyide). The remarkable
Orycteropus, or earth-pig, has one species in South and one in
North East Africa. We have thus eighteen genera of mammalia
almost or quite peculiar to South Africa.

Birds—These do not present so many peculiar forms, yet
some are very remarkable. Chatops is an isolated genus of
thrushes (Turdide). Loptilus, one of the fruit-thrushes (Pyeno-
notidz). Pogonocichla, one of the fly-catchers; Uvolestes, a
shrike; Promerops, a sun-bird; Phileterus and Chera, weaver-
birds ; and three peculiar genera of larks—Spizocorys, Heterocorys,
and Tephrocorys, complete the list of peculiar types of Passeres.
A wood-pecker, Geocolaptes, is nearly allied to a South American
genus. The Cape-dove, @na, is confined to South and East Africa
and Madagascar; and Thalassornis is a peculiar form of duck.
Several genera are also confined to West and South Africa ;—

268 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART Ill.

as Phyllastrephus (Pycnonotide), Smithornis (Muscicapide),
Corvinella (Laniide) ; Barbatula and Xylobucco (Megalemide) ;
Ceuthmochares, also in Madagascar, (Cuculide) ; Typanistria
(Columbide). Other remarkable forms, though widely spread
over Africa, appear to have their metropolis here, as Coliws and
Indicator. Others seem to be confined to South Africa and
Abyssinia, as the curious Buphaga (Sturnide); and Apalo-
derma (Trogonide). Macherhamphus (Falconidze) is found only
in South-West Africa, Madagascar, and the Malay Peninsula.
Reptiles—There are 4 peculiar genera of snakes,—7yphline,
belonging to the blind burrowing snakes, Typhlopide ; Lampro-
phis (Lycodontid); Cyrtophis and Pecilophis (Elapide), a
family which is chiefly Oriental and Australian. Of Lizards
there are 10 peculiar genera ; Monotrophis (Lepidosternide), but
with an allied form in Angola; Cordylus, Pseudocordylus, Platy-
saurus, Cordylosaurus, Pleurostichus, and Sawrophis, all peculiar
genera of Zonuride ; Chamesawra, forming the peculiar family
Chameesauride ; Colopus and Rhopitropus (Geckotide).
Amphibia.—Of Amphibia there are 4 peculiar genera:
Schismaderma (Bufonidee) ; Brachymerus (Engystomide) ; Phiry-
nobatrachus and Stenorhynchus (Ranidee). These last are allied
to Oriental genera, and the only other Engystomide are Oriental
and Neotropical.
Fresh-water Fish —Of fresh-water fishes there is 1 genus—Ab-
rostomus—belonging to the carp family, peculiar to South Africa.
Insects—South Africa is excessively rich in insects, and the
number of peculiar types surpasses that of any other part of the
region. We can only here summarize the results.
Lepidoptera—Of butterflies there are 7 peculiar genera; 2
belonging to the Satyride, 1 to Acreide, 3 to Lycenide,
and 1 to Hesperide. Zeritis (Lycenidz) is also characteristic
of this sub-region, although 1 species occurs in West Africa.
Coleoptera.—These are very remarkable. In the family of
Cicindelide, or tiger-beetles, we have the extraordinary Manticora
and Platychile, forming a sub-family, whose nearest allies are in
North America ; as well as Ophryodera and Dromica, the latter
an extensive genus, which ranges as far north as Mozambique

CHAP. XI.] THE ETHIOPIAN REGION. 269

and Lake Ngami. Another genus of this family, Jansenia, is
common to South Africa and South India.

In the large family of Carabide, or ground-beetles, there are
17 peculiar South African genera, the most important being
Crepidogaster, Hytrichopus, Arsinoé, and Piezia. Three others—
Eunostus, Glyphodactyla, and Megalonychus—are common to
South Africa and Madagascar only. There is also a genus in
common with Java, and one with Australia.

Of Lucanide, or stag-beetles, there are 3 peculiar genera; of
Cetoniide, or rose-chafers, 14; and of Buprestide, 2.

In the great family of Longicorns there are no less than 67
peculiar genera—an immense number when we consider that the
generally open character of the country, is such as is not usually
well suited to this group of insects. They consist of 5 peculiar
genera of Prionide, 25 of Cerambycide, and 37 of Lamiide.

Summary of South-African Zoology.—Summarizing these re-
sults, we find that South Africa possesses 18 peculiar genera of °
Mammalia, 12 of Birds, 18 of Reptiles, 1 of Fishes, 7 of Butter-
flies, and 107 of the six typical families of Coleoptera. Besides
this large amount of speciality it contains many other groups,
which extend either to West Africa, to Abyssinia, or to Mada-
gascar only, a number of which are no doubt to be referred as
originating here. We also find many cases of direct affinity with
the Oriental region, and especially with the Malay districts, and
others with Australia; and there are also less marked indica-
tions of a relation to America.

Atlantic Islands of the Ethiopian Region. St. Helena—The
position of St. Helena, about 1,000 miles west of Africa and 16°
south of the equator, renders it difficult to place it in either of
the sub-regions ; and its scanty fauna has a general rather than
any special resemblance to that of Africa. The entire destruc-
tion of its luxuriant native forests by the introduction of goats
which killed all the young trees (a destruction which was nearly
completed two centuries ago) must have led to the extermination
of most of the indigenous birds and insects. At present there is
no land bird that is believed to be really indigenous, and but one

270 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

wader, a small plover (gialitis sancte-helene) which is peculiar
to the island, but closely allied to African species. Numerous
imported birds, such as canaries, Java sparrows, some African
finches, guinea-fowls, and partridges, are now wild. There are
no native butterflies, but a few introduced species of almost
world-wide range. The only important remnant of the original
fauna consists of beetles and land shells. The beetles are the
more numerous and have been critically examined and described
by Mr. T. V. Wollaston, whose researches in the other Atlantic
islands are so well known.

Coleoptera of St. Helena—Omitting those beetles which get
introduced every where through man’s agency, there are 59 species
of Coleoptera known from St. Helena; and even of these there
are a few widely distributed species that may have been intro-
duced by man. It will be well, therefore, to confine ourselves
almost wholly to the species peculiar to the island, and, therefore,
almost certainly forming part of the endemic or original fauna.
Of these we find that 10 belong to genera which have a very
wide range, and thus afford no indication of geographical affinity ;
2 belong to genera which are characteristic of the Palearctic
fauna (Bembidiwm, Longitarsus) ; 3 to African genera (Adoretus,
Sciobius, Aspidomorpha) ; and two species of Calosoma are most
allied to African species. There are also 4 African species,
which may be indigenous in St. Helena. The peculiar genera,
7 in number, are, however, the most interesting. We have first
Haplothorazx, a large beetle allied to Carabus and Calosoma, though
of a peculiar type. This may be held to indicate a remote
Palearctic affinity. Jelissius, one of the Dynastidee, is allied to
South African forms. Jicroxylobius, one of the Cossonides (a
sub-family of Curculionide) is the most important genus, com-
prising as it does 13 species. It is, according to Mr. Wollaston,
an altogether peculiar type, most allied to Pentarthrum, a genus
found in St. Helena, Ascension, and the south of England, and
itself very isolated. Nesiotes, another genus of Curculionide,
belongs to a small group, the allied genera forming which inhabit
Europe, Madeira, and Australia. A third peculiar and isolated
genus is Zrachyphlwosoma. The Anthribide are represented by

CHAP. XI. ] THE ETHIOPIAN REGION. 271

2 genera, Notiowenus and Homeodera, which are altogether
peculiar and isolated, and contain 9 species. Thus no less than
27 species, or more than half of the undoubtedly indigenous
beetles, belong to 5 peculiar and very remarkable genera of
Rhyncophora.

It appears from this enumeration, that the peculiar species as
a whole, exhibit most affinity to the Ethiopian fauna; next to
the South European fauna; and lastly to that of the islands of
the North Atlantic ; while there is such a large amount of pecu-
liarity in the most characteristic forms, that no special geogra-
phical affinity can be pointed out.

Land Shells—These consist of about a dozen living species, and
about as many extinct found in the surface soil, and probably
exterminated by the destruction of the forests. The genera are
Succinea, Zonites, Helix, Bulimus, Pupa, and. Achatina. The
Bulimi (all now extinct but one) comprise one large, and,
several small species, of a peculiar type, most resembling forms
now inhabiting South America and the islands of the Pacific.
Zonites is chietly South European, but the other genera are of
wide range, and none are peculiar to the island.

The marine shells are mostly Mediterranean, or West Indian
species, with some found in the Indian Ocean ; only 4 or 5 species
being peculiar to the island.

Tristan d@ Acunha.—This small island is situated nearly mid-
way between the Cape of Good Hope and the mouth of the La
Plata, but it is rather nearer Africa than America, and a little
nearer still to St. Helena. An island so truly oceanic and of whose
productions so little is known, cannot be placed in any region,
and is only noticed here because it comes naturally after St. Helena.
It is known to possess three peculiar land birds. One is a thrush
(Nesocichla eremita) whose exact affinities are not determined ;
the other a small water-hen (Gallinula nesiotis) allied to our
native species, but with shorter and softer wings, which the bird
does not use for flight. A finch of the genus Crithagra shows
African affinities ; while another recently described as Nesospiza
acunhe (Journ. fiir Orn. 1873, p. 154) forms a new genus said to
resemble more nearly some American forms.

272 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART I1l.

The only known land-shells are 2 peculiar species of Balea, a
genus only found elsewhere in Europe and Brazil.

IV. Madagascar and the Mascarene Islands, or the Malagasy
Sub-region.

This insular sub-region is one of the most remarkable zoo-
logical districts on the globe, bearing a similar relation to Africa
as the Antilles to tropical America, or New Zealand to Australia,
but possessing a much richer fauna than either of these, and in
some respects a more remarkable one even than New Zealand.
It comprises, besides Madagascar, the islands of Mauritius,
Bourbon, and Rodriguez, the Seychelles and Comoro islands.
Madagascar itself is an island of the first class, being a thousand
miles long and about 250 miles in average width. It lies
parallel to the coast of Africa, near the southern tropic, and is
separated by 230 miles of sea from the nearest part of the con-
tinent, although a bank of soundings projecting from its western
coast reduces this distance to about 160 miles. Madagascar is
a mountainous island, and the greater part of the interior consists
of open elevated plateaus ; but between these and the coast there
intervene broad belts of luxuriant tropical forests. It is this
forest-district which has yielded most of those remarkable types
of animal life which we shall have to enumerate; and it is
probable that many more remain to be discovered. As all the
main features of this sub-region are developed in Madagascar,
we shall first endeavour to give a complete outline of the fauna
of that country, and afterwards show how far the surrounding
islands partake of its peculiarities.

Mammalia.—The fauna of Madagascar is tolerably rich in
genera and species of mammalia, although these belong to a very
limited number of families and orders. It is especially charac-
terized by its abundance of Lemurid and Insectivora ; it also
possesses a few peculiar Carnivora of small size; but most of
the other groups in which Africa is especially rich—apes and
monkeys, lions, leopards and hyenas, zebras, giraffes, antelopes,
elephants and rhinoceroses, and even porcupines and squirrels,
are wholly wanting. No less than 40 distinct families of land

CHAP. XI.] THE ETHIOPIAN REGION. 273

mammals are represented on the continent of Africa, only 11 ot
which occur in Madagascar, which also possesses 3 families
peculiar to itself. The following is a list of all the genera of
Mammalia as yet known to inhabit the island :—

PRIMATES. INSECTIVORA.
LEMURID#. CENTETIDA.
Indrisine. Species. Species.
Indris ... Jes Fed ee 6 Centetes 2
Lemurine. Hemicentetes 2
Lemur ... ae ees (15 Ericulus 2
Hapalemur ae th: 2 Oryzorretes 1
Microcebus ... oe ses 4 Echinops 3
Chirogaleus 5 SoRIcIDz.
Lepilemur 2° Sorex’ <3; ahs af a 1
CHIROMYID. CARNIVORA,
Chiromys oe, Wee oe CRYPTOPROCTID.
Cryptoprocta «+. ape 1
BATS—(Chiroptera). VIVERRIDE.
PTrEROPIDz. Z ee :
FALVAUa
Pteropus bee oe ove 2 Oa lidictis 9
Rae Be: Eupleres ree i
Rhinolophus ... < ee 1 UNGULATA.
SuID&.
VESPERTILIONID&. Potamochcerus ae 5 1
Vespertilio ... sae ie 1 RODENTIA.
Taphozous Ss ee ae 1
I Murip&.
Nesomys Shc an! ae 1
} NoctILton1p& Flypogeomys ... nS: ae 1
Nyctinomus ... eA Ase 1 = Brachytarsomys oe aT 1

We have here a total of 12 families, 27 genera, and 65 species
of Mammals ; 3 of the families and 20 of the genera (indicated
by italics) being peculiar. All the species are peculiar, except
perhaps one or two of the wandering bats. Remains of a Hip-
popotamus have been found in a sub-fossil condition, showing
that this animal probably inhabited the island at a not very
remote epoch.

The assemblage of animals above noted is remarkable, and
seems to indicate a very ancient connection with the southern por-
tion of Africa, before the apes, ungulates, and felines had entered
it. The lemurs, which are here so largely developed, are repre-

274 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III

sented by a single group in Africa, with two peculiar forms on
the West coast. They also re-appear under peculiar and isolated
forms in Southern India and Malaya, and are evidently but the
remains of a once wide-spread group, since in Eocene times they
inhabited North America and Europe, and very probably the
whole northern hemisphere. The Insectivora are another group
of high antiquity, widely scattered over the globe under a
number of peculiar forms; but in no equally limited area repre-
sented by so many peculiar types as in Madagascar. South and
West Africa are also rich in this order.

The Carnivora of Madagascar are mostly peculiar forms of
Viverridz, or civets, a family now almost confined to the
Ethiopian and Oriental regions, but which was abundant in
Europe during the Miocene period.

The Potamochwrus is a peculiar species only, which may be
perhaps explained by the unusual swimming powers of swine,
and the semi-aquatic habits of this genus, leading to an immi-
gration at a later period than in the case of the other Mammalia.
The same remark will apply to the small Hippopotamus, which
was coeval with the great Struthious bird A%piornis.

Rodents are only represented by three peculiar forms of
Murid, but it is probable that others remain to be discovered.

Birds.—Madagascar is exceedingly rich in birds, and espe-
cially in remarkable forms of Passeres. No less than 88 genera
and 111 species of land-birds have been discovered, and every
year some additions are being made to’ the list. The African
families of Passeres are almost all represented, only two being
absent—Paride and Fringillide, both very poorly represented in
Africa itself. Among the Picariz, however, the case is very
different, no less than 7 families being absent, viz.—Picide,
or woodpeckers; Indicatoridz, or honey-guides; Megalzmide,
or barbets ; Musophagide, or plantain-eaters ; Coliide, or colies;
Bucerotide, or hornbills; and Irrisoride, or mockers. Three of
these are peculiar to Africa, and all are well represented there,
so that their absence from Madagascar is avery remarkable fact.
The number of peculiar genera in Madagascar constitutes one of
the main features of its ornithology, and many of these are so

CHAP. XI.] THE ETHIOPIAN REGION. 275

isolated that it is very difficult to classify them, and they
remain to this day a puzzle to ornithologists. In order to
exhibit clearly the striking characteristics of the bird-fauna of
this island, we shall first give a list of all the peculiar genera ;
another, of the genera of which the species only are peculiar ;
and, lastly, a list of the species which Madagascar possesses
in common with the African continent.

GENERA OF BIRDS PECULIAR TO MADAGASCAR, OR FOUND ELSEWHERE
ONLY IN THE MASCARENE ISLANDS.

SYLVUD. Species. STURNIDZ. Species.
1. Bernieria 2 19. Euryceros (?) ais 1
2. Ellisia ar oui 1 20. Hartlaubia ... as 1
3. Mystacornis ... ane 1 21. Falculia eae ies 1
4. Eroessa 1
5. Gervasia 1 Parcripa.
an Mes
Marat iio 22. Philepitta ... ars 1
6. Oxylabes ves ae 2 Gucatipe:
CINncLip (?). 23. Coua ... NaS 9
7. Mesites So oe 1 24. Cochlothraustes 1
Sirtips. LEPTOSOMID.
8. Hypherpes ... ie 1 25. Leptosomus ... ae 1
PycnonoTiD (?) CoRACIID&.
9. Tylas ... oe vee 1 26. Atelornis.... a 2
27. Brachypteracias.... 1
ORIOLID#. : 28. Geobiastes ... a, 1
10. Artamia ae ae 3
le Cyanolanius siere eer 1 Psirracip”.
29. Coracopsis. ... aa 2
MuscIcaPID&.
12. Newtonia SG awe 1 CoLuMBID&.
13. Pseudobias ... as 1 SMA esiRTEN AG. oct e l
LANIID&. :
14. Calicalicus (?) et iy 3 ONT
15. Vanga a < 4 31. Margaroperdix rr 1
NECTARINIIDE. FALcontD&. —
16. Neodrepanis he 1 32. Nisoides_ ... ie ]
33. Eutriorchis ... uae il
HiRUNDINID, ; =
17. Phedina oe ki 1 Total species of peculiar genera 50
PLOCEID#. AEPYORNITHID» (extinct),

18. Nelicurvius ... ae 1 34. AApyornis... ae 1

276 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

ETHIOPIAN OR ORIENTAL GENERA WHICH ARE REPRESENTED IN
MADAGASCAR BY PECULIAR SPECIES,

TURDID&. Species. ALCEDINIDA. Species.
1. Bessonornis ... beet ae 21. Corythornis ... ae 1
22. Ispidina eee are 1
SYLVIID#.
2. Acrocephalus ... 565 1 Upvurips.
3. Copsychus (Or.) aes 1 23. Upuna (
4. Pratincola A Bic iL = Uppsies aae macs d
Pecronounem CAPRIMULGID.
5. Hypsipetes (Or.) 1 24. Caprimulgus ae :
6. Andropadus ... ees 1
CYPSELID.
CAMPEPHAGIDA. 25. Cypselus 2
7. Campephaga ... BCG ] 26. Cheture :
DIcRURID&. PsItTTaciD&,
8, Dicrurus rae ow 1 27. Poliopsitta ... 535 1
MUscICcAPID. CoLUMBID.
9. Tchitrea Ano aA 1 28. Treron ae se 1
29. Columba Ree Ss 1
LANIIDA. 30. Turtur He wee 1
10. Laniarius... Sor 1
PTEROCLIDA.
NECTARINIID#. 31. Pterocles{ ... ae 1
11. Nectarinia ... ae il
TETRAONIDA.
PLOCEMD#. 32. Francolinus ... wae 1
12. Foudia a 2
13. Hypargos 1 PHASIANIDA,
14, Spermestes 1 33. Numida wat B36 1
ENCINO TURNICIDE
15. Mirafre AG G00 1 mate
: ak: 34, Turnix ae a 1
MotTaAcILLip». ay
Lsostnec 35. Polyboroides 1
6 :. 36. Circus 1
wpe h ' 1 37. Astur... 3
Wie veut mochares eee 38. Accipiter 1
18. Centropus... ore 1 39. Buteo I
Cuculus es sen 1 : wee
19. Cu 40. Halizeetus 1
? 41. Pernis 1
CorAcHiD®. 42. Baza ... 1
20, Eurystomus ... 53 1 43, Cerchneis 1

CHAP. XI.] THE ETHIOPIAN REGION. 277

STRIGID &. Species. PLATALEIDA, Species.
re cee Sarat ; LOn bin Semen wate («
RALLID#. PopiciPIpz&.
rE oee T 50, Podiceps
ScoLOPAciDz. Total peculiar dean of Eth. 3) 5G
48. Gallinago... vee 1 or Or. genera J

SPECIES OF BIRDS COMMON TO MADAGASCAR AND AFRICA OR ASIA.

1. Cisticola cursitans. 7. Aplopelia tympanistria.
2. Corvus scapulatus. 8. Falco minor.

3. Crithagra canicollis, 9. Falco concolor.

4. Merops superciliosus. 10. Milvus egyptius.

5. Collocalia fuciphaga. 11. Milvus migrans.

6. CEna capensis. 12. Strix flammea.

These three tables show us an amount of speciality hardly to
be found in the birds of any other part of the globe. Out of
111 land-birds in Madagascar, only 12 are identical with species
inhabiting the adjacent continents, and most of these belong to
powerful-winged, or wide-ranging forms, which probably now
often pass from one country to the other. The peculiar species
—49 land-birds and 7 waders, or aquatics—are mostly well-
marked forms of African genera. There are, however, several
genera (marked by italics) which have Oriental or Palzearctic
affinities, but not African, viz.— Copsychus, Hypsipetes, Hypherpes,
Alectrenas, and Margaroperdix. These indicate a closer ap-
proximation to the Malay countries than now exists.

The table of 33 peculiar genera is of great interest. Most of
these are well-marked forms, belonging to families which are
fully developed in Africa; though it is singular that not
one of the exclusively African families is represented in
any way in Madagascar. Others, however, are of remote or
altogether doubtful affinities. Svttid@ is Oriental and Palearctic,
but not Ethiopian. Oxzylabes and Mystacornis are of doubtful
affinities. Artamia and Cyanolanius still more so, and it is
quite undecided what family they belong to. Calicalicus is
almost equally obscure. Neodrepanis, one of the most recent
discoveries, seems to connect the Nectariniide with the Pacific

278 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

Depanidide. Huryceros is a complete puzzle, having been
placed with the hornbills, the starlings, or as a distinct family.
Falculia is an exceedingly aberrant form of starling, long thought
to be allied to Jrrisor. Philepitta, forming a distinct family,
(Paictide), is most remarkable and isolated, perhaps with remote
South American affinities. Leptosoma is another extraordinary
form, connecting the cuckoos with the rollers. <Afelornis,
Brachypteracias, and Greobiastes, are terrestrial rollers, with the
form and colouring of Pitta. So many perfectly isolated and
remarkable groups are certainly nowhere else to be found; and
they fitly associate with the wonderful aye-aye (Chiromys),
the insectivorous Centetide, and carnivorous Cryptoprocta
among the Mammalia. They speak to us plainly of enormous
antiquity, of long-continued isolation ; and not less plainly of
a lost continent or continental island, in which so many, and
various, and peculiarly organized creatures, could have been
gradually developed in a connected fauna, of which we have
here but the fragmentary remains.

Plate VI—Illustrating the characteristic features of the
Zoology of Madagascar.

The lemurs, which form the most
prominent feature in the zoology of Madagascar, being com-
paratively well-known from the numerous specimens in our
zoological gardens ; and good figures of the Insectivorous genera
not being available, we have represented the nocturnal and
extraordinary aye-aye (Chiromys madagascariensis) to illustrate
its peculiar and probably very ancient mammalian fauna; while
the river-hogs in the distance (Potamochewrus edwardsii) allied to
African species, indicate a later immigration from the main-
land than in the case of most of the other Mammalia. The
pecuhar birds being far less generally known, we have figured
three of them. The largest is the Huryceros prevosti, here classed
with the starlings, although its remarkable bill and other pecu-
liarities render it probable that it should form a distinct family.
Its colours are velvety black and rich brown with the bill of a
pearly grey. The bird beneath (Vanga curvirostris) is one of the
peculiar Madagascar shrikes. whose plumage, variegated with
green-black and pure white is very conspicuous; while that in

E VI.

At

A

PL

ANIMALS,

ISTIC

>
t

SCENE IN MADAGASCAR, WITH CUARACTED

CHAP, XI. ] THE ETHIOPIAN REGION. 279

the right hand corner is the Leptosoma discoler, a bird which
appears to be intermediate between such very distinct families
as the cuckoos and the rollers, and is therefore considered to
form a family by itself. It is a coppery-green above and nearly
white beneath, with a black bill and red feet. The fan-shaped
plant on the left is the traveller's tree (Urania speciosa), one of
the peculiar forms of vegetation in this marvellous island.

Reptiles.—These present some very curious features, compara-
tively few of the African groups being represented, while there
are a considerable number of Eastern and even of American
forms. Beginning with the snakes, we find, in the enormous
family of Colubride, none of the African types; but instead of
them three genera—Herpetodryas, Philodryas, and Heterodon—
only found elsewhere in South and North America. The
Psammophide, which are both African and Indian, are repre-
sented by a peculiar genus, Mimophis. The Dendrophide are
represented by Ahetulla, a genus which is both African and
American. The Dryiophide, which inhabit all the tropics but
are most developed in the Oriental region, are represented by
a peculiar genus, Langaha. The tropical Pythonide are repre-
sented by another peculiar genus, Sanzinia. The Lycodontidee
and Viperide, so well developed in Africa, are entirely absent.

The lizards are no less remarkable. The Zonuride, abun-
dantly developed in Africa, are represented by one peculiar
genus, Cicigna. The wide-spread Scincidee by another peculiar
genus, Pygomeles. The African Sepside, are represented by three
genera, two of which are African, and one, Amphiglossus, peculiar.
The Acontiade are represented by a species of the African genus
Acontias. Of Scincide there is the wide-spread Huprepes. The
Sepidz are represented by the African genera Seps and Scelotes.
The Geckotide are not represented by any purely African
genera, but by Phyllodactylus, which is American and Aus-
tralian ; Hemidactylus, which is spread over all the tropics; by
two peculiar genera; and by Uvoplatis, Geckolepis, and Phelswma,
confined to Madagascar, Bourbon, and the Andaman Islands.
The Agamide, which are mostly Oriental and are represented in

280 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART UI.

Africa by the single genus Agama, have here three peculiar
genera, Z'racheloptychus, Chalarodon, and -Hoplurus. Lastly, the
American Iguanidé are said to be represented by a species of the
South American genus Oplurus. The classification of Reptiles
is in such an unsettled state that some of these determinations
of affinities are probably erroneous; but it is not likely that
any corrections which may be required will materially affect the
general bearing of the evidence, as indicating a remarkable
amount of Oriental and American relationship.

The other groups are of less interest. Tortoises are repre-
sented by two African or wide-spread genera of Testudinide,
Testudo and Chersina, and by one peculiar genus, Pyxis ; and
there are also two African genera of Chelydidie.

The Amphibia are not very well known. They appear to be
confined to species of the wide-spread Ethiopian and Oriental
genera—Hylarana, Polypedates, and Rappia (Polypedatide) ;
and Pyxicephalus (Ranide).

Fresh-water Fishes—These appear to be at present almost
unknown. When carefully collected they will no doubt furnish
some important facts.

The Mascarene Islands.

The various islands which surround Madagascar—Bourbon,
Mauritius, Rodriguez, the Seychelles, and the Comoro Islands
—all partake in a considerable degree of its peculiar fauna,
while having some special features of their own.

Indigenous Mammalia (except bats) are probably absent from
all these islands (except the Comoros), although Lemur and Cen-
tetes are given as natives of Bourbon and Mauritius. They have,
however, perhaps been introduced from Madagascar. Lemur
mayottensis, a peculiar species, is found in the Comoro Islands,
where a Madagascar species of Vaverra also occurs.

Bourbon and Mauritius may be taken together, as they much
resemble each other. They each possess species of a peculiar
genus of Campephagide, or caterpillar shrikes, Oxynotus ; while
the remarkable Fvregilupus, belonging to the starling family,
inhabits Bourbon, if it is not now extinct. They also have

CHAP, XI. ] THE ETHIOPIAN REGION, 281

peculiar species of Pratincola, Hypsipetes, Phedina, Tchitrea,
Zosterops, Foudia, Collocalia, and Coracopsis ; while Mauritius has
a very peculiar form of dove of the sub-genus Trocaza ; an Alec-
trenas, extinct within the last thirty years ; and a species of the
Oriental genus of parroquets, Palwornis. The small and remote
island of Rodriguez has another Palwornis, as well as a peculiar
Foudia, and a Drymeca of apparently Indian affinity.

Coming to the Seychelle Islands, far to the north, we find the
only mammal an Indian species of bat (Pteropus edwardsii). Of
the twelve land-birds all but one are peculiar species, but all belong
to genera found also in Madagascar, except one—a peculiar species
of Palewornis. This is an Oriental genus, but found also in several
Mascarene Islands and on the African continent. A species of
black parrot (Coracopsis barklayi) and a weaver bird of peculiar
type (Foudia seychellarum) show, however, a decided connection
with Madagascar. There are also two peculiar pigeons—a short-
winged Zurtur and an Alectrenas.

Most of the birds of the Comoro Islands are Madagascar spe-
cies, only two being African. Five are peculiar, belonging to the
genera Nectarinia, Zosterops, Dicrurus, Foudia, and Alectrenas.

Reptiles are scarce. There appear to be no snakes in Mauri-
tius and Bourbon, though some African species are said to be
found in the Seychelle Islands. Lizards are fairly represented.
Mauritius has Cryptoblepharus, an Australian genus of Gymno-
pthalmide ; Hemidactytus (a wide-spread genus); Perepus
(Oriental and Australian)—both belonging to the Geckotide.
Bourbon has Heteropus, a Moluccan and Australian genus of
Scincidee ; Phelsuma (Geckotide), and Chameleo, both found also
in Madagascar; as well as Pyxis, one of the tortoises. The
Seychelles have Theconyx, a peculiar genus of Geckotide, and
Chameleo. Gigantic land-tortoises, which formerly inhabited
most of the Mascarene Islands, now only survive in Aldabra, a
small island north of the Seychelles. These will be noticed
again further on, Amphibia seem only to be recorded from the
Seychelles, where two genera of tree-frogs of the family Poly-
pedatide are found; one (Megalixalus) peculiar, the other

(Rappia) found also in Madagascar and Africa,
Vou. I.—20

282 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

The few insect groups peculiar to these islands will be noted
when we deal with the entomology of Madagascar.

Extinct fauna of the Mascarene Islands and Madagascar—Before
quitting the vertebrate groups, we must notice the remarkable
birds which have become extinct in these islands little more
than a century ago. The most celebrated is the dodo of the
Mauritius (Didus ineptus), but an allied genus, Pezophaps, in-
habited Rodriguez, and of both of these almost perfect skeletons
have been recovered. Other species probably existed in Bourbon.
Remains of two genera of flightless rails have also been found,
Aphanapteryx and Krythromachus; and even a heron (Ardea
megacephala) which was short-winged and seldom flew; while
in Madagascar there lived a gigantic Struthious bird, the
Aipyornis. Some further details as to these extinct forms will
be found under the respective families, Didide, Rallide, and
Epyornithide, in the fourth part of this work; and their bear-
ing on the past history of the region will be adverted to in the
latter part of this chapter. Dr. Giinther has recently dis-
tinguished five species of fossil tortoises from Mauritius and
Rodriguez,—all of them quite different from the living species
of Aldabra.

Insects—The butterflies of Madagascar are not so remarkable
as some other orders of insects. There seems to be only one
peculiar genus, Heteropsis (Satyride). The other genera are
African, Leptoneuwra being confined to Madagascar and South
Africa. There are some fine Papilios of uncommon forms. The
most interesting lepidopterous insect, however, is the fine diurnal
moth (Urania), as all the other species of the genus inhabit
tropical America and the West Indian Islands.

The Coleoptera have been better collected, and exhibit some
very remarkable affinities. There is but one peculiar genus of
Cicindelidze, Pogonostoma, which is allied to the South American
genus, Ctenostoma. Another genus, Peridexia, is common to
Madagascar and South America. None of the important African
genera are represented, except Hurymorpha ; while Meglaomma
is common to Madagascar and the Oriental region.

In the Carabidz we have somewhat similar phenomena on a

CHAP. XI.] THE ETHIOPIAN REGION. 283
s

wider scale. Such large and important African genera as
Polyhirma and Anthia, are absent; but there are four genera
in common with South Africa, and two with West Africa; while
three others are as much Oriental as African. One genus,
Distrigus, is wholly Oriental; and another, Homalosoma, Aus-
tralian. Colpodes, well developed in Bourbon and Mauritius, is
Oriental and South American. Of the peculiar genera, Sphero-
stylis has South American affinities; Microchila, Oriental; the
others being related to widely distributed genera.

The Lucanidez are few in number, and all have African affini-
ties. Madagascar is very rich in Cetoniide, and possesses 20
peculiar genera. Bothrorhina, and three other genera belonging
to the Ichnostoma group, have wholly African relations. Dory-
scelis and Chromoptila are no less clearly allied to Oriental
genera, A series of eight peculiar genera belong to the Schizo-
rhinide, a family the bulk of which are Australian, while there are
only a few African forms. The remaining genera appear to have
African affinities, but few of the peculiarly African genera are
represented. Glyciphana is characteristic of the Oriental region.

The Buprestide of Madagascar consist mainly of one large
and peculiar genus, Polybothris, allied to the almost cosmopolite
Psiloptera. Most of the other genera are both Ethiopian and
Oriental; but Polycesta is mainly South American, and the
remarkable and isolated genus Sponsor is confined to the
Mauritius with a species in Celebes and New Guinea.

The Longicorns are numerous and interesting, there being no
less than 24 peculiar genera. Two of the genera of Prionide
are very isolated, while a third, Closterus, belongs to a group
which is Malayan and American.

Of the Cerambycidee, Philematiwm ranges to Africa and the
West Indies; Leptocera is only found eastward in Ceylon and
the New Hebrides; while Euporus is African. Of the peculiar
genera, 2 are of African type; 3 belong to the Leptura group,
which are mostly Palearctic and Oriental, with a few in
South Africa ; while Philocalocera is allied to a South American
genus.

Among the Lamiide there are several wide-ranging and 7

284 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PARTY 111.
.

=—

African genera; but Coptops is Oriental, and the Oriental
Praonetha occurs in the Comoro Islands. Among the peculiar
genera several have African affinities, but Tropidema belongs to
a group which is Oriental and Australian ; Oopsis is found also
in the Pacific Islands ; Mythergates, Sulemus, and Coedomca, are
allied to Malayan and American genera.

General Remarks on the Insect-fauna of Madagascar.—Taking
the insects as a whole, we find the remarkable result that their
affinities are largely Oriental, Australian, and South American:
while the African element is represented chiefly by special
South African or West African forms, rather than by such as
are widely spread over the Ethiopian region.’ In some
families—as Cetoniidee and Lamiide—the African element
appears to preponderate ; in others—as Cicindelide—the South
American affinity seems strongest; in Carabide, perhaps the
Oriental ; while in Buprestide and Cerambycide the African
and foreign elements seem nearly balanced. We must not im-
pute too much importance to these foreign alliances among
insects, because we find examples of them in every country on
the globe. The reason they are so much more pronounced in
Madagascar may be, that during long periods of time this island
has served as a refuge for groups that have been dying out on
the great continents; and that, owing to the numerous de-
ficiencies of a somewhat similar kind in the series of vertebrata
in Australia and South America, the same groups have often
been able to maintain themselves in all these countries as well
as in Madagascar. It must be remembered too, that these pecu-
liarities in the Malagasy and Mascarene insect-fauna are but ex-
aggerations of a like phenomenon on the mainland. Africa also
has numerous affinities with South America, with the Malay
countries, and with Australia; but they do not bear anything like
so large a proportion to the whole fauna, and do not, therefore,
attract so much attention. The special conditions of existence
and the long-continued isolation of Madagascar, will account for
much of this difference ; and it. will evidently not be necessary

1 There are also some special resemblances between the plants of Mada-
gascar and South Africa, according to Dr. Kirk.

CHAP. XI. THE ETHIOPIAN REGION. 285

to introduce, as some writers are disposed to do, a special land
connection or near approach between Madagascar and alk these
countries, independently of Africa; except perhaps in the case
of the Malay Islands, as will be discussed further on.
Land-shells— Madagascar and the adjacent islands are all
ricb in land-shells. The genera of Helicide are Vitrina, Helix,
Achatina, Columna (peculiar to Madagascar and West Africa),
Buliminus, Cionella (chiefly Oriental and South American, but
not African), Pupa, Streptaxis, and Succinea. Among the Oper-
culata we have T'’runcatella (widely scattered, but not African) ;
Cyclotus (South American, Oriental, and South African) ; Cyelo-
phorus (mostly Oriental, with a few South African) ; Leptopoma
(Oriental); Megalomastoma (Malayan and South American) ;
Lithidion (peculiar to Madagascar, Socotra, and South-West
Arabia); Otopoma (with the same range, but extending to West
India and New Iveland) ; Cyclostomus (widely spread but not
African) ; and Omphalotropis (wholly Oriental and Australian).
We thus find the same general features reproduced in the land-
shells as in the insects, and the same remarks will to a great
extent apply to both. The classification of the former is, how-
ever, by no means so satisfactory, and we have no extensive
and accurate general catalogues of shells, like those of Lepi-
doptera and Coleoptera, which have furnished us with such
valuable materials for the comparison of the several faunas.

On the probable Past History of the Ethiopian Region.

Perhaps none of the great zoological regions of the earth
present us with problems of greater difficulty or higher
interest than the Ethiopian. We find in it the evidence of
several distinct and successive faunas, now intermingled; and it
is very difficult, with our present imperfect knowledge, to form
an adequate conception of how and when the several changes
occurred. There are, however, a few points which seem suffi-
ciently clear, and these afford us a secure foundation in our
endeavour to comprehend the rest.

Let us then consider what are the main facts we have to
account for.—1. In Continental Africa, more especially in the south

286 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART. III.

and west, we find, along with much that is peculiar, a number of
genera showing a decided Oriental, and others with an equally
strong South American affinity ; this latter more particularly show- -
ing itself among reptiles and insects. 2. All over Africa, but more
especially in the east, we have abundance of large ungulates and
felines—antelopes, giraffes, buffaloes, elephants, and rhinoceroses,
with lions, leopards, and hyenas, all of types now or recently
found in India and Western Asia. 3. But we also have to note
the absence of a number of groups which abound in the above-
named countries, such as deer, bears, moles, and true pigs ; while
camels and goats—characteristic of the desert regions just to
the north of the Ethiopian—are equally wanting. 4. There is
a wonderful unity of type and want of speciality in the vast
area of our first sub-region extending from Senegal across to the
east coast, and southward to the Zambezi; while West Africa and
South Africa each abound in peculiar types. 5. We have the
extraordinary fauna of Madagascar to account for, with its
evident main derivation from Africa, yet wanting all the larger
and higher African forms; its resemblances to Malaya and to
South America; and its wonderful assemblage of altogether
peculiar types.

Here we find a secure starting-point, for we are sure that
Madagascar must have been separated from Africa before the
assemblage of large animals enumerated above, had entered
it. Now, it is a suggestive fact, that all these belong to types
which abounded in Europe and India about the Miocene period.
It is also known, from the prevalence of Tertiary deposits over
the Sahara and much of Arabia, Persia, and Northern India,
that during early Tertiary times a continuous sea from the Bay
of Bengal to the British Isles completely cut off all land com-
munication between Central and Southern Africa on the one
side, and the great continent of the Eastern hemisphere on the
other. When Africa was thus isolated, its fauna probably had a
character somewhat analogous to that of South America at the
same period. Most of the higher types of mammalian life were
absent, while lemurs, Edentates, and Insectivora took their place.
At this period Madagascar was no doubt united with Africa,

CHAP. XI. ] THE ETHIOPIAN REGION. 287

and helped to forma great southern continent which must at one
time have extended eastward as far as Southern India and
Ceylon; and over the whole of this the lemurine type no doubt
prevailed.

During some portion of this period, South Temperate Africa
must have had a much greater extension, perhaps indicated by
the numerous shoals and rocks to the south and east of the
Cape of Good Hope, and by the Crozets and Kerguelen Islands
further to the south-east. This would have afforded means for
that intercommunion with Western Australia which is so clearly
marked in the flora, and to some extent also in the insects of the
two countries ; and some such extension is absolutely required
for the development of that wonderfully rich and peculiar
temperate flora and fauna, which, now crowded into a narrow
territory, is one of the greatest marvels of the organic world.

During this early period, when the great southern continents
—South America, Africa, and Australia—were equally free from
the incursions of the destructive felines of the north, the
Struthious or ostrich type of birds was probably developed into
its existing forms. It is not at all necessary to suppose that
these three continents were at any time united, in order to
account for the distribution of these great terrestrial birds ; as
this may have arisen by at least two other easily conceiv-
able modes. The ancestral Struthious type may, like the
Marsupial, have once spread over the larger portion of the globe ;
but as higher forms, especially of Carnivora, became developed,
it would be exterminated everywhere but in those regions
where it was free from their attacks. In each of these it would
develope into special forms adapted to surrounding conditions; and
the large size, great strength, and excessive speed of the ostrich,
may have been a comparatively late development caused by its
exposure to the attacks of enemies which rendered such modi-
fication necessary. This seems the most probable explanation
of the distribution of Struthious birds, and it is rendered almost
certain by the discovery of remains of this order in Europe in
Eocene deposits, and by the occurrence of an ostrich among the
fossils of the Siwalik hills; but it is just possible, also, that the

288 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

ancestral type may have been a bird capable of flight, and that
it spread from one of the three southern continents to the others
at the period of their near approach, and more or less completely
lost the power of flight owing to the long continued absence
of enemies.

During the period we have been considering, the ancestors of
existing apes and monkeys flourished (as we have seen in
Chapter VI.) along the whole southern shores of the old Pala-
arctic continent; and it seems likely that they first entered
Africa by means of a land connection indicated by the extensive
and lofty plateaus of the Sahara, situated to the south-east of Tunis
and reaching to a little north-west of Lake Tchad; and at the same
time the elephant and rhinoceros type may have entered. This
will account for the curious similarity between the higher faunas
of West Africa and the Indo-Malay sub-region, for owing to the
present distribution of land and sea and the narrowing of the
tropical zone since Miocene times, these are now the only
lowland, equatorial, forest-clad countries, which were in connec-
tion with the southern shores of the old Palearctic continent at
the time of its greatest luxuriance and development. This
western connection did not probably last long, the junction that
led to the greatest incursion of new forms, and the complete
change in the character of the African fauna, having apparently
been effected by way of Syria and the shores of the Red Sea at
a somewhat Jater date. By this route the old South-Palzarctic
fauna, indicated by the fossils of Pikermi and the Siwalik Hills,
poured into Africa; and finding there a new and favourable
country, almost wholly unoccupied by large Mammalia, increased
to an enormous extent, developed into new forms, and finally
overran the whole continent.

Before this occurred, however, a great change had taken place
in the geography of Africa. It had gradually diminished on the
south and east; Madagascar had been left isolated; while a
number of small islands, banks, and coral reefs in the Indian
Ocean alone remained to indicate the position of a once extensive
equatorial land. The Mascarene Islands appear to represent
the portion which separated earliest, before any carnivora had

CHAP, XI. ] THE ETHIOPIAN REGION. 289

reached the country; and it was in consequence of this total
exemption from danger, that several groups of birds altogether
incapable of flight became developed here, culminating in the
huge and unwieldy Dodo, and the more active Aphanapteryx.
To the same cause may be attributed the development, in these
islands, of gigantic land-tortoises, far surpassing any others now
living on the globe. They appear to have formerly inhabited
Mauritius, Bourbon, and Rodriguez, and perhaps all the
other Mascarene islands, but having been recklessly destroyed,
now only survive in the small uninhabited Aldabra islands
north of the Seychelle group. The largest living specimen
(54 feet long) is now in our Zoological Gardens. The only
other place where equally large tortoises (of an allied species)
are found, is the Galapagos islands, where they were equally free
from enemies till civilized man came upon the scene ; who, partly
by using them for food, partly by the introduction of pigs, which
destroy the eggs, has greatly diminished their numbers ‘and
size, and will probably soon wholly exterminate them. It is a
curious fact, ascertained by Dr. Giinther, that the tortoises of
the Galapagos are more nearly related to the extinct tortoises of
Mauritius than is the living tortoise of Aldabra. This would
imply that several distinct groups or sub-genera of Testudo have
had a wide range over the globe, and that some of each have
survived in very distant localities. This is rendered quite con-
ceivable by the known antiquity of the genus Testudo, which
dates back to at least the Eocene formation (in North America)
with very little change of form. These sluggish reptiles, so
long-lived and so tenacious of life, may have remained un-
changed, while every higher animal type around them has
become extinct and been replaced by very different forms; as
in the case of the living Emys tectum, which is the sole survivor
of the strange Siwalik fauna of the Miocene epoch. The ascer-
tained history of the genus and the group, thus affords a satis-
factory explanation of the close affinity of the gigantic tortoises
of Mauritius and the Galapagos.

The great island of Madagascar seems to have remained longer
united with Africa, till some of the smaller and more active

290 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

carnivora had reached it; and we consequently find there, no
wholly terrestrial form of bird but the gigantic and powerful
Apyornis, well able to defend itself against such enemies. As
already intimated, we refer the South American element in
Madagascar, not to any special connection of the two countries
independently of Africa, but to the preservation there of a
number of forms, some derived from America through Africa,
others of once almost cosmopolitan range, but which, owing to the
severer competition, have become extinct on the African con-
tinent, while they have continued to exist under modified forms
in the two other countries.

The depths of all the great oceans are now known to be so
profound, that we cannot conceive the elevation of their beds
above the surface without some corresponding depression else-
where. And if, as is probable, these opposite motions of the
earth’s crust usually take place in parallel bands, and are to
some extent dependent on each other, an elevation of the sea
bed could hardly fail to lead to the submergence of large tracts
of existing continents; and this is the more likely to occur on
account of the great disproportion that we have seen exists
between the mean height of the land and the mean depth of the
ocean. Keeping this principle in view, we may, with some
probability, suggest the successive stages by which the Ethiopian
region assumed its present form, and acquired the striking
peculiarities that characterise its several sub-regions. During
the early period, when the rich and varied temperate flora of the
Cape, and its hardly less peculiar forms of insects and of low type
mammalia, were in process of development in an extensive
south temperate land, we may be pretty sure that the whole of
the east and much of the north of Africa was deep sea. At a
later period, when this continent sank towards the south and
east, the elevation may have occurred which connected Mada-
gascar with Ceylon; and only at a still later epoch, when the
Indian Ocean had again been formed, did central, eastern, and
northern Africa gradually rise above the ocean, and effect a
connection with the great northern continent by way of Abys-
sinia and Arabia. And if this last change took place with

CHAP. XI. ] THE ETHIOPIAN REGION. 291 *

tolerable rapidity, or if the elevatory force acted from the north
towards the south, there would be a new and unoccupied
territory to be taken possession of by immigrants from the
north, together with a few from the south and west. The more
highly-organized types from the great northern continent, how-
ever, would inevitably prevail; and we should thus have
explained the curious uniformity in the fauna of so large an
area, together with the absence from it of those peculiar
Ethiopian types which so abundantly characterise the other
three sub-regions.

We may now perhaps see the reason of the singular absence from
tropical Africa of deer and bears; for these are both groups
which live in fertile or well-wooded countries, whereas the line
of immigration from Europe to Africa was probably always, as
now, to a great extent a dry and desert tract, suited to antelopes
and large felines, but almost impassable to deer and bears. We
find, too, that whereas remains of antelopes and giraffes abound
in the Miocene deposits of Greece, there were no deer (which
are perhaps a somewhat later development); neither were there
any bears, but numerous forms of Felide, Viverridze, Mustelide,
and ancestral forms of Hyena, exactly suited to be the
progenitors of the most prevalent types of modern African
Zoology.

There appears to have been one other change in the geo-
graphy of Africa and the Atlantic Ocean that requires notice.
The rather numerous cases of close similarity in the insect
forms of tropical Africa and America, seem to indicate some
better means of transmission, at a not very remote epoch, than
now exists. The vast depth of the Atlantic, and the absence of
any corresponding likeness in the vertebrate fauna, entirely
negative the idea of any union between the two countries ;
but a moderate extension of their shores towards each other is
not improbable, and this, with large islands in the place of the
Cape Verd group, St. Paul’s Rocks, and Fernando Noronha, to
afford resting places in the Atlantic, would probably suffice to
explain the amount of similarity that actually exists.

Our knowledge of the geology and paleontology of Africa

292 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

being so scanty, it would be imprudent to attempt any more
detailed explanation of the peculiarities of its existing fauna.
The sketch now given is, it is believed, founded on a sufficient
basis of facts to render it not-only a possible but a probable
account of what took place ; and it is something gained to be
able to show, that a large portion of the peculiarities and
anomalies of so remarkable a fauna as that of the Ethiopian
region, can be accounted for by a series of changes of physical
geography during the tertiary epoch, which can hardly be con-
sidered extreme, or in any way unlikely to have occurred.

CIIAP. XI. ] THE ETHIOPIAN REGION. 293

TABLES OF DISTRIBUTION.

In drawing up these tables showing the distribution of various
classes of animals in the Ethiopian Region, the following sources
of information have been chiefly relied on, in addition to the
general treatises, monographs, and catalogues, used for the Fourth
Part of this work :—

Mammalia.—Blanford’s Abyssinia; Peters’s Mozambique ;
Heuglin and Schweinfurth for North East Africa ; Grandidier
Schlegel, &c., for Madagascar; the local lists given by Mr.
Andrew Murray; numerous papers by Fraser, Gray, Kirk,
Mivart, Peters, Sclater, and Speke; and a MS. list of Bovide
from Sir Victor Brooke.

Birds.—Finsch and Hartlaub for East Africa; Heuglin for
North-East Africa; Blanford for Abyssinia; Layard for South
Africa; Hartlaub for West Africa; Dohrn for Princes Island ;
Andersson for Damaraland; and papers by Gurney, Hartlaub,
Kirk, Newton, Peters, Sharpe, Sclater, Schlegel, and Pollen ;
and a MS. list of Madagascar Birds from Mr. Sharpe.

294 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART Ir

TABLE I.
FAMILIES OF ANIMALS INHABITING THE ETHIOPIAN REGION.

EXPLANATION.

Names in italics show families peculiar to the region.

Names inclosed thus (...... ) barely enter the region, and are not considered properly
to belong to it.

Numbers are not consecutive, but correspond to those in Part IV.

Sub-regions.
Order and Family. |e d|pcg|daela 4 Range beyond the Region.
Ma lPs les |* &
MAMMALIA.
PRIMATES.
1. Simiide ae — Oriental
2. Semnopithecide | — | — Oriental
3. Cynopithecide | — | — | — Oriental, Palearctic
6. Lemuride ... | — | — | —-| — | Oriental
8. Chiromyide ... =
CHEIROPTERA.
9. Pteropide ... | — | — | — | — | Oriental, Australian
11. Rhinolophide | — | — | — | — | The Eastern Hemisphere
12. Vespertilionide | — | — | — | — | Cosmopolite
13. Noctilionide... | — | — | — | — | All Tropical regions
INSECTIVORA.
15. Macroscelidide | — —_ South Palearctic
17. Erinaceide ... — Palearctic, Oriental
18. Centetide ... — | Greater Antilles
19. Potamogalide --
20. Chrysochloride | — =
22. Soricide... ... | — | — | — | — | All regions but Australian and Neotropical
CARNIVORA.
23. Felide ... ... | — | — | — | — | All regions but Australian
24. Cryptoproctide oa
25. Viverride ... | — | — |— | — | Oriental, S. Paleearctic
26. Protelide ... =
27. Hyxnide .f/—-]—|— S. Palearctic, India
28. Canide ... ... | —}|—|— Almost cosmopolite
20. Mustelidae 9) 2/1) a All regions but Australian
33. Otariide... ... — All temperate regions
CETACEA,.
SOMO Le ees pene Oceanic
SIRENIA.
42. Manatide ...| — | — Neotropical, Oriental, Australian
UNGULATA.

asp hquides sss cena | —— || | Palearctic

CHAP. XI. |

THE ETHIOPIAN REGION.

295

a
Sub-regions.

Order and Family.

45.
46.
47.
49,
51.
52.

Rhinocerotidz
Hippopotamide
Suidz ... ...
Tragulide ...
Camelopardide
Bovide ...

PROBOSCIDEA.
53. Elephantide ...

HYRACOIDEA.
54. Hyracidee

RopENTIA,

- Muride ...
Spalacidee

. Dipodidee

. Myoxidee

. Sciuride... ...
. Octodontidee ...
. Echimyide

. Hystricide

. Leporidze

EDENTATA.

72. Manidide
74. Orycteropodide

BIRDS.
PASSERES.

. Turdide...
. Sylviide...
. Timaliide
. Cinclide ?

. Sittide ...

Mee arid eu cse yo.
. Pyenonotide...
Oriolide... :
. Campephagide
. Dicruride F
. Muscicapide ...
Laniide ...

. Corvide ... :
. Nectariniide...
. Diceride '
. Hirundinide...
. Fringillide

. Ploceide

. Sturnide

. Alaudide

}

. Troglodytide ~ f

Range beyond the Region.

Oriental

Cosmopolite ; excl. Australia
Oriental

All regions but Neotrop. and Australian

Oriental
Syria

Cosmopolite ; excl. Oceania
Palearctic, Oriental
Palearctic, Nearctic
Palearctic

All regions but Australian
N. Africa, Neotropical
Neotropical

S. Palearctic, Oriental

All regions but Australian

Oriental

Almost Cosmopolite

Cosmopolite

Oriental, Australian

Widely scattered

Almost Cosmopolite

Palearctic, Oriental, Australian

All regions but Australian

Oriental

Oriental, Australian

Oriental, Australian

Oriental, Australian

The Eastern Hemisphere

The Eastern Hemisphere and North America
Cosmopolite

Oriental, Australian

Oriental, Australian

Cosmopolite

Cosmopolite, except Australian region
Oriental, Australian

Eastern Hemisphere

Eastern Hemisphere and North America

296

ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY.

Order and Family.

38. Motacillide ...

A emmbittidee ce.
48, Paictide

PICARLA,

51. Picide
52. Yungidee

53. Indicatoride ...
54. Megalemide...

56. Musophagide
57. Coliide ...
58. Cuculide

59. Leptosomide ..

62. Coraciide
63. Meropidee
66. Trogonide
67. Alcedinidee
68. Bucerotide
69. Upupidee

70. Irrisoride
73. Caprimulgide
74, Cypselidee

PSITTACI.

78. Paleornithidee
81. Psittacidee

CoLUMBA.

84. Columbide
85. Didide ...

GALLIN®.

86. Pteroclidse
87. Tetraonide
88. Phasianidee
89. Turnicide

ACCIPITRES.

94. Vulturide
95. Falconide
96. Serpentariide

97, Pandionide ...

98. Strigidze

GRALL&.
99. Rallide

100. Scolopacide.

103. Parride

104, Glareolide ...

105. Charadriidz

Sub-regions.

|
|

[PART lI

Range beyond the Region.

Slgials|

The Eastern Hemisphere
Oriental, Australian

Cosmopolite, excl. Australian region
Palearctic

Oriental

Oriental, Neotropical

Cosmopolite

Oriental, Australian
Oriental, Australian
Oriental, Neotropical
Cosmopolite

Oriental and to N. Guinea
Palearctic, Oriental

Cosmopolite
Almost Cosmopolite

Oriental
Neotropical

Cosmopolite
(Extinct)

Palearctic, Oriental

Eastern Hemisphere and N. America
Old World and N. America

Eastern Hemisphere.

All the continents but Australia
Cosmopolite

Cosmopolite
Cosmopolite

Cosmopolite
Cosmopolite
Tropical

Eastern Hemisphere
Cosmopolite

CHAP. XI.] THE ETHIOPIAN REGION:

Sub-regions.

i
a |

Order and Family. cpaitegt | eat ese | ediees: | es Range beyond the Region.
g2/32|s2|38
Ma lFS (44/28

106. Otididee Eastern Hemisphere
107. Gruide All regions but Neotropical
113. Ardeide Cosmopolite

114. Plataleide ... Almost Cosmopolite

115. Ciconiidee Almost Cosmopolite

117. Pheenicopterid Oriental and Neotropical
ANSERES.

118. Anatide Cosmopolite

119. Laride .. Cosmopolite

120. Procellariidie Cosmopolite

121. Pelecanide ... Cosmopolite

122. Spheniscidee South temperate regions
124, Podicipidee Cosmopolite
126. Struthionide Temperate S. America
131, pyornithide (Extinct)
REPTILIA.

OPHIDIA.

1. Typhlopide ... All regions but Nearctic

5. Calamariide ... Warms parts of all regions

7. Colubridee Almost Cosmopolite

8. Homalopsidee Oriental, and all other regions

9. Psammophide Oriental and 8. Palearctic

10. Rachiodontide

11. Dendrophidee Oriental, Australian, Neotropical
12. Dryiophide ... Oriental, Neotropical

13. Dipsadidee Oriental, Australian, Neotropical
15. Lycodontide... | Oriental

17. Pythonidee _ All tropical regions

18. Erycide ... ... Oriental, S. Palearctic

20. Elapide ... ... Tropical regions, S. U. States and Japan
21. Dendraspidide

22. Atractaspidide

23. Hydrophide ... Oriental, Australian, Panama

25. Viperidee Oriental, Palearctic
LACERTILIA.

28. Amphisbenide S. Europe, Neotropical

29. Lepidosternidee N. America

30. Varanidee Warm parts of E. Hemisphere
33. Lacertidee All continents but America

34, Zonuride All America, N. India, S. Europe
40, Chamesauride

ereGy eee nals Palearctic, Australian, Netropical
45. Scincidee Almost Cosmopolite

47. Sepide ... South Palearctic

48. Acontiade Ceylon and Moluccas,

49. Geckotide Almost cosmopolite

Vou. L—21 ;

298

Order and Family.

51. Agamidee

52. Chameleonide

CROCODILIA.

55. Crocodilide ...

CHELONIA.

57. Testudinide ...

58. Chelydidee

59. Trionychide ...

60. Cheloniidie

AMPHIBIA.
PSEUDOPHIDIA.
1. Ceciliade

ANOURA.

7. Phryniscide ...

9. Bufonidee

11. Engystomide..

14, Alytide ...

life Polypedatidze g

18. Ranide ...

19. Disvoglossidze
21. Dactylethride

FISHES (FRESH-

WATER).

ACANTHOPTERYGII.

3. Percide ...
12. Scienide

35. Labyrinthici f

38. Mugillide
52. Chromide

PHYSOSTOMI.
59. Siluride...

60. Characinide ...
68. Mormyride. ...
69. Gymnarchide

78. Cyprinodontide

75. Cyprinidee

78. Osteoglossidee
82. Notopteride ...

GANOIDEIL.
92. Sirenoidei

94. Polypteride ...

ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY, [PART 111.

Range beyond the Region.

Oriental, Australian, 8. Palearctic
Oriental, S. Palearctic

Oriental, Neotropical

All continents but Australia
Australia, S. America

Oriental, Japan, E. United States
Marine

Oriental, Neotropical

Neotropical, Australia, Java
All regions but Australian
All regions but Palearctic
All regions but Oriental

All the regions

Almost Cosmopolite

All regions but Nearctic

All regions but Australian
All regions but Australian
Oriental, Moluccas
Australian, Neotropical
Oriental, Neotropical

All warm regions
Neotropical

Palearctic, Oriental, American
Absent from Australia and S. America
All tropical regions

Oriental

Neotropical, Australian

CHAP. XI.]

INSECTS.
DOPTERA (PART).

DrurNI (BUTTER-

Order and Family.

FLIES).

. Danaide
. Satyride
. Elymniidee

Acreide...

. Nymphalide...
. Libytheide ...
. Nemeobiide ..

. Lycenide

« Pieride \.. ...
. Papilionide ...
. Hesperide

SPHINGIDEA.

afc
19%
20.
22.
23.

Zygenide
Agaristid
Uraniidee
Aigeriidee
Sphingidee

THE ETHIOPIAN REGION.

LEPI-

Range beyond the Region.

All warm countries and Canada
Cosmopolite

Oriental, Moluccas

All tropical regions

Cosmopolite

Absent from Australia only ;
Absent from Australia and Nearctic region
Cosmopolite

Cosmopolite

Cosmopolite

Cosmopolite —

Cosmopolite

Australian, Oriental

All tropical regions
Cosmopolite, excl. Australia
Cosmopolite

300

ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY.

[PART III.

TABLE II.

LIST OF GENERA OF TERRESTRIAL MAMMALIA AND BIRDS
INHABITING THE ETHIOPIAN REGION.

EXPLANATION.

Names in ?¢falics show genera peculiar to the region.

Names inclosed thus (...) show genera which just enter the region, but are not considered
properly to belong to it.

Genera which undoubtedly belong to the region are numbered consecutively.

MAMMALIA.

Order, Family, and
Genus.

PRIMATES.
SIMIIDA.
1. Troglodytes

SEMNOPITHECID.

2. Colobus

CYNOPITHECIDS.

. Cercocebus

STO OU C9

(Sub-Order)
LEMUROIDEA.,
LEMURIDZ.
8. Indris
9. Lemur :
10. Hapalemur
11. Microcebus
12. Chirogaleus
13. Lepilemur
14. Perodicticus
15. <Arctocebus
16. Galago

CHIROMYIDA.
17. Chiromys...

CHIROPTERA.
PTEROPIDZ.
18. Pteropus ...

19, Xantharpya

. Mytopithecus ...
. Cercopithecus ...

. Theropithecus ...
. Cynocephalus ...

No. of.
Species

|

=
mee bo Ore Do OVD

a

_

Range within the Region. Range beyond the Region.

W. Africa to Western Nile

Sources

Abyssinia to West Africa

West Africa

Tropical Africa

West Africa

North-east Africa, Arabia,

Nubia to Cape, W. Africa,
Arabia

Palestine

Madagascar
Madagascar
Madagascar
Madagascar
Madagascar
Madagascar

Sierra Leone

Old Calabar

Tropical and S. Africa

Madagascar

Africa and Madagascar Tropicsof Eastern Hemis-
phere

All Africa Oriental, Austro-Malayan

CHAP, XI.]

Order, Family, and
enw

Ss
iS}
Ss 4
4 pan
wn

20. Cynopterus 1
21. Epomophorus ... 6
22. Hypsignathus ... 1

RHAINOLOPHIDA.
23. Rhinolophus ...

24,
25.

Macronycterys ...
Phyllorhina

Pe OD

96 Asellia: ss. en 1

27.
28.

Megaderma al te
Nvcteris'... :e. | 28

VESPERTILIONIDA.

29. Vespertilio ... | 1
30. Kerivoula
31. Miniopteris
32. Nycticejus
33. Taphozous

[OS oe

NocriLioNIpD&é.
34. Nyctinomus ... | 1

35. Molossus... -- 3

INSECTIVORA.
MACROSCELIDIDA.

36. Macroscelides ...
37. Petrodromus
38. Rhynchocyon ...

me EE bo

ERINACEIDS.
39. Erinaceus... ... 2

CENTETIDA.

40. Centetes

41. Hemicentetes
42. Hriculus ...
43. Oryzorictes

44, Echinops ...

we bo bP

POTAMOGALID.
45. Potamogale ... 1

CHRYSOCHLORIDA.
46. Chrysochloris ... 3

SoRICIDA.
47. Sorex mr liseds el

THE ETHIOPIAN REGION.

Range within the Region.

Tropical Africa
Tropical Africa and Abyssinia
W. Africa

Africa and Madagascar

W. Africa
Tropical Africa

Nubia

Senegal, Upper Nile
All Africa

Africa and Madagascar
8. Africa

8. Africa

Tropical Africa

Africa and Madagascar

Madagascar

Africa, Bourbon

South and East Africa
Mozambique
Mozambique

Cen. and South Africa

Madagascar and Mauritius
Madagascar
Madagascar
Madagascar
Madagascar

Old Calabar

Cape to Mozambique

All Africa and Madagascar

301

Range beyond the Region.

Oriental

Warmer parts of Eastern
Hemisphere

Indo-Malaya, Austro-
Malaya
Indo-Malaya, Austro-
Malaya

Oriental, Moluccas

Java

Cosmopolite

Oriental

Indo-Malaya

India

Oriental, Austro-Malay-
an, Neotropical

Oriental, American, S.
Palearctic

Neotropical, 8, Paleare-
tic

N. Africa.

Palearctic, N. India

Palearc., Neare., Ori

302

SEE
Order, Family, and
e@

nus.

CARNIVORA.

FELIDs.

AS Kelis... (s
49, Lynx [?] ...
50. Cynelurus

CRYPTOPROCTIDA.
51. Cryptoprocta

VIVERRIDZ.
2. Viverra

. Genetta ...
. Fossa

. Poiana

5. Galidia

. Nandinia

. Galidictis

. Herpestes
. Athylax ...
. Caloyale ...
2. Galerella ...
. Ariela

. Ichneumia °
. Bdeogale ...
. Helogale ...
. Cynictis .
. Rhinogale
. Mungos

. Crossarchus
. Hupleres. ...
. Suricata ...

PROTELID2.
73. Proteles

HYANID&.
74. Hyena

CANIDZ.

75. Lycaon
76. Canis :
77. Megalotis ...

MUSTELIDA,
8. Mustela ...

9, Gymnopus [?] -

0. Aonyx
81. Hydrogale
82. Mellivora
83. Letonyx

OTARIID.
84, Arctocephalus

ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY.

No. of
Species.

tH CO

HH WH WH WRHHOWWNHWHN RH

Hon Ht

DOH H He

=

[PART Il.

Range within the Region.

All Africa
N. and S. Africa
Cape of Good Hope

Madagascar

Tropical Africa
Tropical and 8. Africa
Madagascar

W. Africa
Madagascar

W. Africa
Madagascar

All Africa

S. and E. Africa (?) Madagascar
Tropical and 8. Africa
E. Africa

S. Africa

E. Africa, Senegal, 8. Africa
Tropical Africa

E. and 8. Africa

S. Africa

E. Africa

Tropical and 8. Africa
Tropical Africa
Madagascar

S. Africa

S. Africa

All Africa

8., Central, and E. Africa
All Africa
S. Africa

Angola

8. Africa

S. and W. Africa

S. Africa

South and Tropical Africa,
Tropical and S. Africa

Cape of Good Hope

Range beyond the Region.

All reg. but Australian
Palearctic and Nearctiv
Persia, India

Oriental
S. Palearctic

S. Europe, Oriental

Oriental

S. Paleartic, India

Almost Cosmopolitan

Palearctic, Nearctic
Oriental
Oriental

| India

South Temperate Zone

CHAP. XI. |

Order, Family, and
Genus.

SIRENIA.
MANATID &.

85. Manatus
86. Halicore

UNGULATA.
EQuips.
87. Equus

RHINOCEROTIDA,
88. Rhinoceros

HIPPOPOTAMID.
89. Hippopotamus

SUID.
90. Potamocherus

91. Phacocherus...

TRAGULIDS.

92. Hyomoschus ..

CAMELOPARDALID.
93. Camelopardalis

Bovipa.

94. Bubalus...
95. Oreas

96.
97, Oryx. :..
98. Gazella ...

WE)
100.
101.
102.
103.
104.
105.
106.
107.
108.

Aipyceros
Cervicapra
Kobus
Pelea

Neotragus

Alcephalus
Catoblepas
(Capra ...

PROBOSCIDEA.
ELEPHANTIDS.
109. Elephas...

Tragelaphus Re

Nanotragus ..

Cephalophus a
Hippotraqus ...

He

bo

ik
mwoanww bo co

bo
mS DpoOoWL HOM Re

THE ETHIOPIAN REGION.

Range within the Region.

W. Africa
E. Africa

303

Range beyond the Region.

Tropical America
Oriental and Australian

Tropical and S. Africa

_ All Tropical and S. Africa

Great Rivers of Africa

Tropical Africa and Madg.
Abyssinia to Caffraria

W. Africa

All open country

Trop. and 8S. Africa
Africa 8. of Sahara
Africa 8. of Sahara
Arabian and African deserts

Africa N. of Equator and S.
Africa

S. E. Africa

All Tropical Africa

Pastures of all Africa

South Africa

Africa 8. of Sahara

Abyssinia and N. E. Africa

All tropical Africa

Gambia, Central Africa to Cape

All Africa

Africa S. of Equator

Abyssinia, high)

Tropical and S. Africa

Palearctic

Oriental

India

S. Palearctic
Palearctic Deserts

Palearctic genus

Oriental

[PART II.

304 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY.
Order, qo, and ae Range within the Region.
Be
HYRACOIDEA.
HYRACIDA.
110. Hyrax 10 | Tropical and 8. Africa
RODENTIA.
Movrip2&.
111. Mus 26 | All Africa
112. Lasiomys 1 |W. Africa
113. Acanthomys... | 4 | Tropical Africa
114. Cricetomys 1 | Tropical Africa
115. Saccostomus ... | 2 | Mozambique
116. Dendromys 2 |S. Africa
117. Nesomys... 1 | Madagascar
118. Steatomys 2 | East and S. Africa
119. Pelomys ... 1 | Mozambique
120. Otomys ... 6 |S. and E. Africa
121. Meriones 14 | Africa
122. Malacothriz ... | 2 |S. Africa
123. Mystromys 1 |S. Africa
124, Brachytarsomys| 1 | Madagascar
125. Hypogeomys ... 1 | Madagascar
126. Lophiomys 1 |S. Arabia and N. E. Africa
SPALACIDA.
127. Rhizomys 4 | Abyssinia
128. Bathyerges 1 |S. Africa
129. Georychus 6 | E. Central, and S. Africa
130. Heliophobius ... | 1 | Mozambique
Dipopiwm.
131. Dipus 7 | N. and Central Africa
132. Pedetes ... 1 |S. Af. to Mozambique and Angola
Myoxip#.
133. Myoxus 1 | Africa to Cape
SCUIRIDZ.
134. Sciurus ... ... | 18 | All woody districts of Africa
135. Anomalurus ... | 5 | W. Africa and Fernando Po.
OCTODONTIDA.
136. Pectinator 1 | Abyssinia
EcHIMYID&.
137. Petromys 1 |S. Africa
138. Aulacodes 1 |W., E., and S. Africa
HystTricip#.
139. Hystrix ... 1 | Africa to Cape
~ 140. Atherura 1 |W. Africa

Range beyond the Region.

Syria

E. Hemis. excl. Oceania

India

Palearctic, India

Oriental to Malacca

Central Palearctic

Palearctic

Allregions but Australia

S. Palearctic Oriental

| Paleearctic

CHAP. XI. ]

Order, Family, and
Genus.

LEPORIDA.
141. Lepus

EDENTATA.
MANIDID&.
142. Manis

ORYCTEROPODIDS.
143. Orycteropus ...

PASSERES.
TURDIDS.

1. Turdus
2. Monticola
3. Chetops
4, Bessonornis

SYLVIID2.

5. | Drymeca...
6.) Cisticola ...
tf pe eeeus
8.

Camaroptera ...
ead “88

10. | Bradyptetus
11.) Catriscus ...
12.) Bernieria...
1 | in

14, (Wystacornis

16. | Eremomela
17.) Eroessa
18. \Hypolais ...
19. J Aedon
20.) Sylvia

21. ‘\Curruca ...
22. J Ruticilla ...
23. \Cyanecula

24, (Copsychus
25. | Thamnobia
26. | Cercotrichas
27. | Peoptera...
28.< Gervasia ...
29. | Dromolea
830. |Saxicola ...
31. | Cercomela
32. | Pratincola

15. | Phylloscopus ...

No. of
Species.

nO

men

WONH ARKH RBH WOO MHwWwo

tH
NWO PRWNH pNP Dh DP

THE ETHIOPIAN REGION.

305

Range within the Region.

East and South Africa

Range beyond the Region.

Allregions but Australian

Sennaar to W. Africa and Cape | Oriental

N. E. Africa to Nile Sources, and
8. Africa

BIRDS.

The whole reg. (excl. Madagas.)
S. Africa

8. Africa

The whole region

The whole region

The whole region

S. Africa

Africa

The whole region

Abyssinia and 8. Africa

All Africa

Madagascar

Madagascar

Madagascar

S. Africa

All Africa

Madagascar

S. Africa

K. and 8. Africa

N. HK. Africa, Gambia, Cape
Verd Ids.

S. Africa

Abyssinia and Senegal

N. E. Africa

Madagascar and Seychelle Ids.

All Atrica

W.and N. E. Africa

W. Africa

Madagascar and Seychelle Ids.

All Africa

Central, E. and S. Africa

N. E. Africa

Africa and Madagascar

Almost Cosmopolite
Palearctic and Oriental

Palestine

Palestine
Palearc.,Orien., Austral.
Australian

Paleare.,Orien., Austral.
S. Europe, Palestine

Palearctic, Oriental

Palearctic, Oriental
Palearctic
Palearctic, Oriental

Palearctic
Palearctic, Oriental
Palearctic

Oriental

Oriental

S. Palearctie, India
Palearctic, India
Palestine, N. W. India
Palearctic, Oriental

306

ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY.

Order, Family, and
Genus,

TIMALIIDA.

33. Chatarrhea
34. Crateropus
35. Hypergerus
36. Cichladusa
37. Alethe

38. Oxylabes ...

CINCLID&. [7]
39. Mesites

TROGLODYTIDA.[?]
40. Sylvietta...

SITTIDA.
41. Hypherpes

PARIDZ.

42. Parus

43. Parisoma...
44, Meithalus
45. Parinia ...

PYCNONOTIDA.
46. Pycnonotus

47. Phyllastrephus

48. Hypsipetes
49. Tylas

50. Criniger ...
51. Izonotus ...
52. Andropadus
53. Lioptilus...

ORIOLIDA,

54. Oriolus. ...
55. Artamia | ?]

56. Cyanolanius [2]

CAMPEPHAGIDA.

57. Lanicterus
58. Oxynotus...
59. Campephaga

DIcrURID&
60. Dicrurus ...

MUSCICAPID.

61. Butalis

62. Muscicapa
63. Alseonax ...
64. Newtonia...

No. of
Species.

hom oe NTH

et Ee OT ON

eH
SOO Re & OO

Orbs Or

11

_
me hm © OO

Range within the Region.

Abyssinia

All Africa

W. Africa

W. and EK. Africa
W. Africa
Madagascar

Madagascar

Central, E. and 8S. Africa

Madagascar

All Africa
All Africa
W., Central, and S. Africa
W. Africa, Prince’s Island

All Africa
W. and 8S. Africa

Madagascar and Mascarene Ids.

Madagascar

W. and 8. Africa

W. Africa

Africa and Madagascar
S. Africa

All Africa
Madagascar
Madagascar

All Africa
Mauritius and Bourbon
The whole region

The whole region

All Africa

All tropical Africa
S. Africa
Madagascar

[PARY III.

Range beyond the Region.

Oriental, Palestine
N. Africa, Persia

Palearc., Orien., Neare.

Palearctic

S. Palearctic, Oriental
Oriental

Oriental

Palearctic, Oriental

Celebes to New Caledonia

Oriental, Australian

Palearctic, N. Oriental
Palearctic
Oriental

CHAP. XI.]

Order, Family, and

Genus.

65. Hyliota

66. EHrythrocercus ...

67. Artomyias
68. Pseudobias
69. Smithorius
70. Megabias ...
71. Cassinia ...
iizen (BLASS. =

73. Elminia ...
74. Platystira
75. Tebitrea ...
76. Pogonocichla
77. Bradyornis

LANIID&.

78. Parmoptila [?]...

79. Calicalicus
80. Lanius

81. Hypocolius
82. Corvinella
83. Urolestes ...
84. Fraseria ...
85. Hypodes ...
86. Cuphoterus
87. Nilaus

88. Prionops ...

89. Hurocephatus be
90. Chaunonotus ...

91. Vanga
92. Laniarius
93. Meristes
94. Nicator
95. Telephonus

CorvVID&.

96. Ptilostomus

97. Corvus

98. Corvultur...

99. Picathartes
(Fregilus ...

NECTARINIIDE.

100. Nectarinia
101. Promerops

102. Cinnyricinclus
103. Neodrepanis ...

DicHID2&.
104. Zosterops

105. Pholidornis ...

HIRUNDINIDS.
106. Hirundo...

No. of
Species.

eH
DNNwrwPprD bp wb

_
~1H 00

COM ee RD et et OR

om oo
OFM NW ORF bb

bo “Tb

_

on
ee oO

THE ETHIOPIAN REGION. 307

Range within the Region. Range beyond the Region

W. Africa
Tropical Africa
W. Africa
Madagascar

W. and 8. Africa
W. Africa

W. Africa
Tropical Africa
Tropical Africa
All Africa

The whole region
8. Africa

All Africa

Oriental

W. Africa

Madagascar

All Africa

Abyssinia

S. and W. Africa

S. Africa

W. Africa

W. Africa

Prince’s Island

All Africa

All Africa

N. E. and S. Africa

W. Africa

Madagascar
All Africa, Madagascar [?]
W. and S. E. Africa

E. Africa

All Africa

Paleare., Orien., Nearc.

N. Africa

W. and. Africa

All Africa and Madagascar
N. E. to S. Africa

W. Africa

Abyssinia)

Cosmop., excl. 8S. Amer.

Palearctic genus

The whole region
S. Africa

W. Africa
Madagascar

The whole region Oriental and Australian

W. Africa

\

The whole region Cosmopolite

308

Order, Family, and

Genus.

' ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY,

No. of
Species.

Range within the Region.

107. Psalidoprogne

108.
109.
110.
aay

112.

Phedina...
Petrochelidon
Chelidon
Cotyle
Waldenia

FRINGILLIDA.

113.

114.

115.

116.
lif

118.
119.

Dryospiza
Chlorospiza ...
Passer
Crithagra
Tigurnus a
(Erythrospiza
Pinicola [?]

Fringillaria ap

‘PLOCEIDA.

120.
121.
122.
123.
124.
125.
126,
127.
128.
129.
130.
131.
132.
133,
134.
138,
136.
137.
138.
139.
140.
141,
142.
143.

Textor

Hyphantornis
Symplectes ,..

Malimbus
Ploceus ...

Nelicurvius ...

Foudia
Sporopipes

Pyromelana ...

Phileterus
Nigrita ...
Plocepasser
Vidua
Colliuspasser...
Chera
Spermospiza ...
Pyrenestes
Estrilda ...
Pytelia ...
Hypargos
Amadina
Spermestes
Amauresthes ...
Hypochera

STURNID&.

144.
145.
146.
147.
148.
149.
150.
151.
152.
153.

Dilophus
Buphaga
Euryceros
Juida
Lamprocolius
Cinnyricinclus
Onychognathus
Spreo ... re
Amydrus
Hartlaubius ...

eH
HOHE PO

=a
CO HEE! bo ND CO OO

oo

=
WDNHNTANWOAANHUDPNH DH HH bd OOD oO

—

| St

HM Onn ds & Oe dS

i

The whole region
Madagascar and Mauritius
8. Africa

Bogos-land

All Africa

W. Africa

All Africa

Abyssinia to Cape

All Africa

All Africa

W. Africa

Nubia, Arabia)
Cameroons, W. Africa
All Africa ;

All Africa

Tropical and S. Africa
Tropical and 8. Africa
W. and E. Africa

W. and E. Africa
Madagascar

Tropical Africa, Madagascar, &c.
Tropical and S. Africa
Tropical and S Africa
8. Africa

W. and N. E. Africa
EK. and S. Africa
Tropical and S. Africa
Tropical and S. Africa
S. Africa

W. Africa

Tropical and 8. Africa
Tropical and 8. Africa
Tropical and 8. Africa
E. Africa, Madagascar
Tropical and 8. Africa
The whole region

E. and W. Africa
Tropical and 8. Africa

8. Africa, Loanda, Sennaar
Trop. and 8. Africa ([?] a family)
Madagascar ([?] a family)
Tropical and 8. Africa

Tropical and S. Africa

Tropical and S. Africa

W. Africa

Tropical and 8, Africa

N. E. Africa

Madagascar

[PART ill.

Range beyond the Region.

Neotropical
Palearctic, Oriental
Palearctic, Oriental

S. Palearctic
Palearctic
Palearctic, Oriental
N. Africa, Syria

{
S. Palearctic genus

N. Temperate genus
South Palearctic

Oriental

Orienta:

Palestine

CHAP, XI.]

Order, Family, and
Genus.

No. of
Species.

154. Falculia
155. Fregilupus

He

ALAUDIDA.

156. Alauda ...

157. Spizocorys

158. Galerida...

159. Calendula
(Melanocorypha

160. Certhilauda ...

161. Alaemon

162. Heterocorys ...

163 Mirairay. ss) cs5 “ot

164. Ammomanes ..

165. Megalophonus

166. Tephrocorys ...

167. Pyrrhulauda ..

ONnNUF Cr WWHNREH OO

MoracILLip&.
168. Budytes... ... | 8

169: Anthus)...%. %5..'|: 10
170. Macronyx ...| 4

PITTIDA.
eS Pitta <0. ce il

PAICTIDS.
172. Philepitta ...| 2

PICARI &.
PIcIDs.

173. Verreauxia ... 1
174. Dendropicus ... | 14
175. Campethera ... | 14
176. Geocolaptes ... | 1

YUNGIDA.
iti, NGibob:¢ Wn eRoeeeee 1

INDICATORIDA.
178. Indicator... 8

MEGALZMID&.

179. Pogonorhynchus | 1
180. Buccanodon ... |
181. Stactolena

182. Barbatula

183. Xylobucco

184. Gymnobucco ...
185. Trachyphonus

O09 09 tO te

MUSOPHAGID®.
186. Musophaga .

Lo

THE ETHIOPIAN REGION. 309

Range within the Region.

Madagascar
Bourbon

Abyssinia and S. W. Africa

South Africa

North of tropical Africa
Abyssinia, S. Africa
Abyssinia)

South Africa

South Africa

South Africa

South Africa, Madagascar
African deserts

Tropical and 8. Africa
S. Africa

Tropical and 8. Africa

The whole region

Tropical and 8. Africa
Tropical and 8. Africa

W. Africa

Madagascar

W. Africa

Tropical and S, Africa
Tropical and 8, Africa
South Africa

N. E. Africa, S. Africa

Tropical and S. Africa

Tropical and S. Africa
West Afriea

West Africa

West and South Africa
West and South Africa
West Africa

Tropical and South Africa

West Africa

Range beyond the Region.

Palearctic, Indian
Palearctic, Indian
Palearctic genus

S. Europe

S. Palzarctic
| Oriental, Australian
S. Palearctic, Indian

Oriental, Canary Islands

Palearctic, Oriental,

Australian
All regions, exc. Australia

Oriental, Australian

Palearctic

| Oriental

310

ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY.

[PART III.

Order, Family, and
Genus.

187. Turacus...
188. Schizorhis

CoLiIDaz.
189. Colius

CUCULIDA.

190. Ceuthmochares
TES Chia "S55 one
192. Cochlothraustes
193. Centropus
194. Cuculus ...
195. Chrysococcyx
196. Coccystes

LEPTOSOMIDA.
197. Leptosomus

CoORACIIDE.

198. Coracias...
199. Eurystomus ...
200. Atelornis
201. Brachypteracias
202. Geobiastes

MEROPID2.

203. Merops ... ...
204. Melittophagus

TROGONID.
205. Apaloderma ...

ALCEDINID&.

206; -Alcedo.... :-.
207. Corythornis ...
208. Ceryle

209, Myioceyx

210. Ispidina...
211. Halcyon...

BUCEROTIDZ.

212. Berenicornis ...
213. Tockus

214. Bycanistes
215. Bucorvus

UpuPIDz.
216. Upupa ...

IRRISORIDE.
917. Irrisor ...

No. of
Species.

Range within the Region.

ra
ao

re
DAIS OH Ob

_

Pe pw oO

11

Or

bo

oOFNEH Wb

12

Tropical and S. Africa
Tropical and 8. Africa

Tropical and S. Africa

Africa and Madagascar
Madagascar

Madagascar

Africa and Madagascar
Africa and Madagascar
Tropical and S. Africa
Tropical and 8. Africa

Madagascar

Africa and Madagascar
Africa and Madagascar
Madagascar
Madagascar
Madagascar

Africa and Madagascar
Tropical and 8, Africa

Tropical and S. Africa

Africa and Madagascar

West Africa
Africa and Madagascar

West Africa

Tropical and S. Africa
Tropical and S. Africa
Tropical and 8. Africa

Africa and Madagascar

Africa and Madagascar

W. Africa, Abyssinia, Natal
W. Africa, Abyssinia, Natal

Africa, Prince’s Is., St. Thomé

Range beyond the Region.

Oriental, Australian
Paleare., Orien., Austral.
Oriental, Australian

S. Palearctic, Oriental

S. Palearctic, Oriental
Oriental, Australian

S. Palear., Orien., Austral.

Palear., Orien., Austral.

American, Palearctic

S. Palear., Orien. Austral.

Malaya

S. Palearctic, Oriental

CHAP. XI. ]

THE ETHIOPIAN REGION.

311

Order, Family, and
Genus.

CAPRIMULGID.

218. Caprimulgus ...

219. Scortornis
220. Macrodipteryx
221. Cosmetornis

CYPSELID.

222. Cypselus ...
223. Collocalia
224. Chetura ...

PSITTACI.
PALZORNITHIDS.

225. Paleeornis
PSITTACIDA.

226. Coracopsis
227. Psittacus

228. Pceocephalus ...

229. Agapornis
230. Poliopsitta

COLUMB.
CoLUMBID.

231.
232.

Treron
Alectrveenas

233.
234.
235.

Columba
Ena.
Murtur= 5:

236. Aplopelia

237.

Dipip& (extinct)
238. Didus

GALLIN&.
PTEROCLID.

239. Pterocles

TETRAONIDS.
240.
241.
242.
243.
244,

Peliperdiz
Margaroperdix
Coturnix
(Caccabis

PHASIANID.
245. Phasidus

Chalcopelia ...

Ptilopachus ...
Francolinus ...

No. of
Species

_
bo Co CO

mr oO

bo Re 6 bo Or

12
10

a

Range within the Region.

Africa and Madagascar
Tropical Africa

W. Africa to Abyssinia
Tropical Africa to the Zambesi

The whole region
Mascarene Ids., Madagascar
Tropical Africa and Madagascar

W. Africa to Abys. & Mauritius

Madagascar and Seychelle Ids.
W. Africa

Tropical and 8S. Africa
Tropical and 8S. Africa

Trop. Africaand Madagascar

Africa and Madagascar

Madagascar and Mase. Ids. (extet

in Mauritius and Rodriguez)
Africa and Madagascar
Tropical and S. Africa
Africa, Madagascar, Comoro an
Seychelle Islands

Abyssinia, S. Africa and Wes

African Islands
Tropical and S. Africa

Mascarene Islands

Africa and Madagascar

West Africa
Africa and Madagascar

| West Africa

Madagascar
Tropical and S. Africa
Abyssinia)

West Africa

Range beyond the Region

Paleare., Orien., Austral.

Palearctic, Oriental
Oriental, Australian
Cosmop., exc. W. Pale-

arctic

| Oriental

Oriental

Palearctic, Oriental

Palearctic, Oriental

S. Palxarctic, Indian

S. Palearctic, Indian

Palear., Orient., Austral.
Palearctic genus

312

ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY.

ba eH 2

Order, Family, and | °-=
oo

enus. 28

[PART II.

Range within the Region.

246. <Agelastes
247. Acryllium ... 1
248. Numida es 9

TURNICIDA.

949) Turnix )...
250. Ortyxelos

ee

ACCIPITRES.
VULTURIDA.

251. Gyps Me
252. Pseudogyps
253. Otogyps...
254. Lophogyps
255. Neophron

Dee po

FALCONIDA.

256. Polyboroides ...
257. Circus toe
258. Urotriorchis ...
259. Melicrax

260. Astur

261. Nisoides ...
262. Hutriorchis
263. Accipiter

264. Buteo

265. Gypaétus

266. Aquila ...
267. Nisaétus...

Hore O11 ee Or or DO

268.

oo

Spizaétus

269.
270.
271.
272.
273.
274,
275.

Lophocetus
Asturinula
Dryotriorchis
Cireaétus
Butastur
Helotarsus
Halizetus

Dwr OH ee

276.
277.
278.
279.
280.
281.
282.
283.
284.
285.

Gypohierax ...
Elanoides
Milvus ...
Blanusi... eee
Macherhamphus
Pernis nf
Baza
Poliohierax
Falco
Cerchneis

CO eH te

SERPENTARIID®.
286. Serpentarius ...| 1

West Africa °
West Africa
Africa to Natal and Madagascar

S. Africa and Madagascar
Africa

Africa, except W. sub-region
N. E. Africa to Senegal
N. E. and S. Africa

N. E. and 8. Africa and Senegal

Africa, excl. west coast

Africa and Madagascar
Africa and Madagascar
W. Africa

Africa, excl. west coast
Africa and Madagascar
Madagascar
Madagascar

Africa and Madagascar
Africa and Madagascar
N. E. and 8. Africa
All Africa

W. Africa

All Africa

All Africa

Tropical Africa

W. Africa

All Africa

N. KE. Africa

Tropical and S. Africa
The whole region

West and Kast Africa

West and N.E. Africa

The whole region

Africa

S. W. Africa and Madagascar
S. Africa and Madagasear
Africa and Madagascar

East Africa

All Africa

The whole region

The greater part of Africa

Range beyond the Region.

Palearc.,Orient., Austrl.

Palearctic, Oriental
Oriental
Palearctic, Oriental

S. Palearctic, Oriental

Almost Cosmopolite
Almost Cosmopolite

Almost Cosmopolite

Cosmop., excl. Austral.

S. Palearctic

Nearc., Paleare., Indian

S. Palearctic, Oriental,
Australia

Neotropical, Oriental to
N. Guinea

Palearctic, Oriental
Oriental to New Guinea

Cosmopolite, excl. Neo-
tropical region

The Eastern Hemisphere
India to Australia
Malacca

Palearctic, Oriental
India to N. Australia
Burmah

Almost Cosmopolite
Almost Cosmopolite

CHAP. XI.]

THE ETHIOPIAN REGION.

Order, Family, and
Genus.

PANDIONIDA.
287. Pandion...

STRIGIDZ.
288. Athene ...
289. Bubo _...
290. Scotopelia
291. Scops
292. Syrnium

293. Asio
294. Strix

oS Range within the Region. Range beyond the Region.
Ae
1 | All Africa Cosmopolite
Africa and Madagascar, Rodri-| Palearctic, Oriental,
quez (extinct) Australian
Africa and Madagascar Cosmopolite

W. and S. Africa, Madagascar,| Almost Cosmopolite

5
8
2 | West and S. Africa to Zambesi
3
Comoro Islands

2

Africa Palearctic,
American
1 |N. KE. and S. Africa Cosmopolite
4 | Africa and Madagascar Cosmopolite

Peculiar or very Characteristic Genera of Wading or Swimming Birds.

GRALLA.
RALLID#.

Himantornis ...

Podica...

GLAREOLID2.
Cursorius

OTIDID#.
Eupodotis

GRUIDZ.
Balearica,

ARDEID&.
Baleniceps

PLATALEIDA.
Scopus

ANSERES.
ANATIDA.

Thalassornis ...

STRUTHIONES.
STRUTHIONIDA.
295. Struthio

JEPYORNITHIDS.
296. pyornis

VoL. I1.—22 .

1 | West Africa

3 | Africa Burmah

8 | All Africa S. Europe, India
16 | All Africa India, Australia
2 | Ail Africa

1 | Upper Nile

1 | Tropical and S. Africa

1 | South Africa

2 | All Africa

Syria
(Extinct)
3 [?]| Madagascar

Oriental,

CHAPTER XII.
THE ORIENTAL REGION.

THIS region is of comparatively small extent, but it has a very
diversified surface, and is proportionately very rich. The de-
serts on the north-west of India are the debatable land that
separates it from the Palearctic and Ethiopian regions. The
great triangular plateau which forms the peninsula of India is
the poorest portion of the region, owing in part to its arid climate
and in part to its isolated position ; for there can be little doubt
that in the later Tertiary period it was an island, separated by an
arm of the sea (now forming the valleys of the Ganges and
Indus) from the luxuriant Himalayan and Burmese countries.
Its southern extremity, with Ceylon, has a moister climate and
more luxuriant vegetation, and exhibits indications of a former
extension southwards, with a richer and more peculiar fauna,
partly Malayan and partly Mascarene in its character. The
whole southern slopes of the Himalayas, with Burmah, Siam and
Western China, as well as the Malay peninsula and the Indo-
Malay islands, are almost everywhere covered with tropical
forests of the most luxuriant character, which abound in varied
and peculiar forms of vegetable and animal life. The flora and
fauna of this extensive district are essentially of one type
throughout; yet it may be usefully divided into the Indo-
Chinese and the Malayan sub-regions, as each possesses a
number of peculiar or characteristic animals. The former sub-
region, besides having many tropical and sub-tropical types
of its own, also possesses a large number of peculiarly modi-
fied temperate forms on the mountain ranges of its northern

uopuoT ,qoiey yoordvubosy spaoni4s

Ovi

‘sdoqorg y todrepy, syaoX MON

Ol Yrausery fo OOT iseg aprgrsu0y OG

=

—
‘oy! Saepoy

°

\

\
__._ feo) =esee =

“pay uUuMaYs amo suorbat-qng ay JO

SHOQUINL ANUALAYAL PUD SALLPUNOG PUT,

JMO SHAT
. * 1sadOg
SY, UMGYS SpUuL] aAASDT

aun penop P Aq UAMaYs £1

F2 OOO'T JO AMMNUOD OULIBHY SYL
fennel PY 00002 eA0"gr |)
ez) ~~ «00007 ~*~ +O00%0T ~
ie] ~* ~+ooovor’ * 00's —~*
Eis Ss OOO'G * «OOS
C= 00g7T 01 RY O00T
ATUM 724 OOOT 9} PAB] DEG ULOsT

S100] 00.) Tetajsourey,

NOLVNV1dxXa

|
|

205M - 'SfearpeoveyT

SOTLUT OOO'T—GUul | 2TPIS

NOIOYUU

IVLNGAIYO

CHAP, X11.] THE ORIENTAL REGION. 315

boundary, which are wholly wanting in the Malayan sub-
region. The Philippine islands are best classed with the Indo;
Malay group, although they are strikingly deficient in many
Malayan types, and exhibit an approach to the Celebesian divi-
sion of the Austro-Malay sub-region.

Zoological Characteristics of the Oriental Region—The Oriental
Region possesses examples of 35 families of Mammalia, 71 of
Birds, 35 of Reptiles, 9 of Amphibia, and 13 of Fresh-water
Fishes. Of these 163 families, 12 are peculiar to the region ;
namely, Tarsiide, Galeopithecide, and Tupaiide among Mam-
malia, while A‘]uridz, though confined to the higher Himalayas,
may perhaps with more justice be claimed by the Palearctic re-
gion ; Liotrichide, Phyllornithidz, and Eurylemidz among birds;
Xenopeltidz (extending, however, to Celebes), Uropeltide, and
Acrochordidze among reptiles ; Luciocephalidee, Ophiocephalidz
and Mastacembelide among fresh-water fishes. A number of
other families are abundant, and characteristic of the region ; and
it possesses many peculiar and characteristic genera, which must
be referred to somewhat more in detail.

Mammalia—tThe Oriental region is rich in quadrumana, and
is especially remarkable for its orang-utans and long-armed apes
(Simia, Hylobutes, and Siamanga); its abundance of monkeys
of the genera Presbytes and Macacus ; its extraordinary long-nosed
monkey (Presbytes nasalis) ; its Lemuride (Nycticebus and Loris) ;
and its curious genus Zarsius, forming a distinct family of
lemurs. All these quadrumanous genera are confined to it,
except TZarsius which extends as far as Celebes. It pos-
sesses more than 30 genera of bats, which are enumerated in
the lists given at the end of this chapter. In Insectivora it is
very rich, and possesses several remarkable forms, such as the
flying lemur (Galeopitheeus) ; the squirrel-like Tupaiide consisting
of three genera; and the curious Gymnura allied to the hedge-
hogs. In Carnivora, it is especially rich in many forms of civets
(Viverridze), possessing 10 peculiar genera, among which Prio-
nodon and Cynogale are remarkable; numerous Mustelide, of
which Gymnopus, Mydaus, Aonyx and Helictis are the most con-
spicuous ; lwrus, a curious animal, cat-like in appearance but

316 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART IIL.

more allied to the bears, forming a distinct family of Carnivora,
and confined to the high forest-districts of the Eastern Hima-
layas and East Thibet ; Melwrsus and Helarctos, peculiar forms of
bears ; Platanista, a dolphin peculiar to the Ganges and Indus.
Among Ruminants it has the beautiful chevrotain, forming
the genus Tragulus in the family Tragulide; with one peculiar
genus and three peculiar sub-genera of true deer. The Antilo-
pine and Caprine are few, confined to limited districts and not
characteristic of the region ; but there are everywhere wild cattle
of the genera Bibos and Bubalus, which, with species of Rhinoceros
and Hlephas, form a prominent feature in the fauna. The Rodents
are less developed than in the Ethiopian region, but several forms
of squirrels everywhere abound, together with some species of
porcupine ; and the Edentata are represented by the scaly manis.

Birds——The families and genera of birds which give a cha-
racter to Oriental lands, are so numerous and varied, that we
can here only notice the more prominent and more remarkable.
The Timaliide, represented by the babblers (Garrulax, Pomator-
hinus, Timalia, &c.), are almost everywhere to be met with, and
no less than 21 genera are peculiar to the region; the elegant
fork-tailed Hnicurus and rich blue Myiophonus, though com-
paratively scarce, are characteristic of the Malayan and Indo-
Chinese faunas; the elegant little “hill-tits” (Liotrichide)
abound in the same part of the region; the green bulbuls (Phy/l-
lornis) are found everywhere ; as are various forms of Pycnono-
tide, the black and crimson “ minivets” (Pericrocotus), and the
glossy “king-crows ” (Dierurus) ; Urocissa, Platylophus and Den-
drocitta are some of the interesting and characteristic forms
of the crow family; sun-birds (Netariniidz) of at least three
genera are found throughout the region, as are the beautiful little
flower-peckers (Diczeide), and some peculiar forms of weaver-
birds (Ploceus and Munia). Of the starling family, the most
conspicuous are the glossy mynahs (Hulabes). The swallow-
shrikes (Artamus) are very peculiar, as are the exquisitely
coloured pittas (Pittide), and the gaudy broad-bills (Eury-
leemidze). Leaving the true Passeres, we find woodpeckers,
barbets, and cuckoos everywhere, often of peculiar and re-

CHAP. XII] THE ORIENTAL REGION. 317

markable forms; among the bee-eaters we have the exquisite
Nyctiornis with its pendent neck-plumes of blue or scarlet ;
brilliant kingfishers and strangely formed hornbills abound
everywhere ; while brown-backed trogons with red and orange
breasts, though far less frequent, are equally a feature of the
Ornithology. Next we have the frog-mouthed goatsuckers (Bat-
trachostomus), and the whiskered swifts (Dendrochelidon), both
wide-spread, remarkable, and characteristic groups of the Oriental
region. Coming to the parrot tribe, we have only the long-tailed
Paleornis and the exquisite little Zoriculus, as characteristic
genera. We now come to the pigeons, among which the fruit-
eating genera Z’7reron and Carpophaga are the most conspicuous.
The gallinaceous birds offer us some grand forms, such as
the peacocks (Pavo) ; the argus pheasants (Argusianus) ; the fire-
backed pheasants (Huplocamus) ; and the jungle-fowl (Gallus), all
strikingly characteristic ; and with these we may close our sketch,
since the birds of prey and the two Orders comprising the
waders and swimmers offer nothing sufficiently remarkable to
be worthy of enumeration here.

Reptiles—Only the more abundant and characteristic groups
will here be noticed. In the serpent tribe, the Oligodontide,
a small family of ground-snakes; the Homalopside, or fresh-
water snakes; the Dendrophide, or tree-snakes ; the Dryiophide,
or whip-snakes ; the Dipsadidz, or nocturnal tree-snakes ; the
Lycodontid or fanged ground-snakes ; the Pythonide, or rock-
snakes; the Elapidze, or venomous colubrine snakes (including
the “ cobras”) ; and the Crotalide, or pit-vipers, are all abundant
and characteristic, ranging over nearly the whole region, and pre-
senting a great variety of genera and species. Among lizards, the
Varanide or water-lizards ; the Scincide or “ scinks ;” the Gecko-
tide, or geckoes; and the Agamide, or eastern iguanas; are the
most universal and characteristic groups. Among crocodiles the
genus Crocodilus is widely spread, Gavialis being characteristic
of the Ganges. Among Chelonia, or shielded reptiles, forms of
fresh-water Testudinide and Trionychide (soft tortoises) are
tolerably abundant.

Amphibia—tThe only abundant and characteristic groups of

318 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART II.

this class are toads of the family Engystomide ; tree-frogs of
the family Polypedatidee; and several genera of true frogs,
Ranide.

Fresh-water Fishes—The more remarkable and characteristic
fishes inhabiting the fresh waters of the Oriental region belong
to the following families: Nandidee, Labyrinthici, Ophiocephalide,
Siluride, and Cyprinide ; the last being specially abundant.

The sketch here very briefly given, must be supplemented by
an examination of the tables of distribution of the genera of all
the Mammalia and Birds inhabiting the region. We will now
briefly summarize the results.

Summary of the Oriental Vertebrata.—The Oriental region
possesses examples of 163 families of Vertebrata of which 12
are peculiar, a proportion of a little more than one-fourteenth
of the whole.

Out of 118 genera of Mammalia 54 seem to be peculiar to
the region, equal to a proportion of 5%5 or a little less than half.
Of Land-Birds there are 342 genera of which 165 are peculiar,
bringing the proportion very close to a half.

In the Ethiopian region the proportion of peculiar forms
both of Mammalia and Birds is greater; a fact which is not
surprising when we consider the long continued isolation of the
latter region—an isolation which is even now very complete,
owing to the vast extent of deserts intervening between it and
the Palearctic region; while the Oriental and Paleearctic were.
during much of the Tertiary epoch, hardly separable.

Insects.

Lepidoptera—We can only glance hastily at the more pro-
minent features of the wonderfully rich and varied butterfly-
fauna of the Oriental region. In the first family Danaide, the
genera Danais and Euplwa are everywhere abundant, and the
latter especially forms a conspicuous feature in the entomo-
logical aspect of the country; the large “spectre-butterflies”
(Hestia) are equally characteristic of the Malayan sub-region.
Satyride, though abundant are not very remarkable, Dedvs,
Melanitis, Mycalesis, and Ypthima being the most characteristic

CHAP. XII.] THE ORIENTAL REGION. 319

genera. Morphide are well represented by the genera Ama-
thusia, Zeuxidia, Discophora, and Thaumantis, some of the
species of which almost equal the grand South American
Morphos. The Nymphalide furnish us with a host of charac-
teristic genera, among the most remarkable of which are,
Terinos, Adolias, Cethosia, Cyrestis, Limenitis, and Nymphalis,
all abounding in beautiful species. Among the Lycznide are
a number of fine groups, among which we may mention J/erda,
Myrina, Deudoryx, Aphneus, Iolaus, and Amblypodia, as charac-
teristic examples. The Pieridz furnish many fine forms, such
as Thyca, Iphias, Thestias, Eronia, Prioneris, and Dercas, the last
two being peculiar. The Papilionidze are unsurpassed in the
world, presenting such grand genera as Teinopalpus and Bhu-
tanwtis ; the yellow-marked Ornithoptere ; the superb “Brookiana;”
the elegant Leptocercus; and Papilios of the “Coon,” “ Philo-
xenus,” “Menfnon,” “ Protenor,” and especially the ‘ green-and-
gold-dusted’ “ Paris” groups.

The Moths call for no special observations, except to notice
the existence in Northern India of a number of forms which
resemble in a striking manner some of the most remarkable
of the above mentioned groups of the genus Papilio, espe-
cially the “ Protenor” group, which there is reason to believe is
protected by a peculiar smell or taste like the Heliconias and
Danaide.

Coleoptera.—The most characteristic Oriental form of the
Cicindelid or tiger beetles, is undoubtedly the elegant genus
Collyris, which is found over the whole region and is almost
confined to it. Less abundant, but equally characteristic, is the
wingless ant-like Zricondyla. Two small genera Apteroessa and
Dromicidia are confined to the Indian Peninsula, while 7herates
only occurs in the Malayan sub-region.

The Carabidee, or ground carnivorous beetles, are so numerous
that we can only notice a few of the more remarkable and
characteristic forms. The wonderful Mormolyce of the Indo-
Malay sub-region, stands pre-eminent for singularity in the
entire family. Thyreopterus, Orthogonius, Catascopus, and Peri-
callus are very characteristic forms, as well as Planetes and

320 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART Ill.

Distrigus, the latter having a single species in Madagascar.
There are 80 genera of this family peculiar to the region, 10
of which have only been found in Ceylon.

Among the Lucanide, or stag-beetles, Lucanus, Odontolabris,
and Cladognathus are the most characteristic forms. Sixteen
genera inhabit the region, of which 7 are altogether peculiar,
while three others only extend eastward to the Austro-Malayan
sub-region.

The beautiful Cetoniide, or rose-chafers, are well represented
by Rhomborhina, Heterorhina, Clinteria, Macronota, Agestrata,
Chalcothea and many fine species of Cetonia. There are 17
peculiar genera, of which Mycteristes, Phadimus, Plectrone, and
Rhagopteryx, are Malayan; while Narycius, Clerota, Bombodes,
and Chiloloba are Indian.

In Buprestidee—those elongate metallic-coloured beetles whose
elytra are used as ornaments in many parts of the world—this
region stands pre-eminent, in its gigantic Catoxantha, its fine
Chrysochroa, its Indian Sternocera, its Malayan Chalcophora
and Belionota, as well as many other beautiful forms. It
possesses 41 genera, of which 14 are peculiar to it, the rest
being generally of wide range or common to the Ethiopian and
Australian regions.

In the extensive and elegant group of Longicorns, the Oriental
region is only inferior to the Neotropical. It possesses 360
genera, 25 of which are Prionide, 117 Cerambicide, and 218
Lamiide ;—about 70 per cent. of the whole being peculiar.
The most characteristic genera are Rhaphidopodus and Afgosoma
among Prionide ; Neocerambyx, Euryarthrum, Pachyteria, Acro-
cyrta, Tetraommatus, Chloridolum, and Polyzonus among Ceram-
bycide ; and Celosterna, Rhytidophora, Batocera, Agelasta, and
Astathes among Lamiide.

Of remarkable forms in other families, we may mention the
gigantic horned Chalcosoma among Scarabeeide; the metallic
Campsosternus among Elateride ; the handsome but anomalous
Trictenotoma forming a distinct family; the gorgeous Pachy-
rhynchi of the Philippine Islands among Curculionide ; Diwrus

CHAP, XII. ] THE ORIENTAL REGION. 321

among Brenthide; with an immense number and variety of
Anthotribidee, Heteromera, Malacoderma, and Phytophaga.

THE ORIENTAL SUB-REGIONS,

The four sub-regions into which we have divided the Oriental
region, are very unequal in extent, and perhaps more so in
productiveness, but they each have well-marked special features,
and serve well to exhibit the main zoological characteristics of
the region. As they are all tolerably well defined and their
faunas comparatively well-known, their characteristics will be
given with rather more than usual detail.

I. Hindostan, or Indian Sub-region.

This includes the whole peninsula of India from the foot of the
Himalayas on the north to somewhere near Seringapatam on the
south, the boundary of the Ceylonese sub-region being unsettled.
The deltas of the Ganges and Brahmaputra mark its eastern
limits, and it probably reaches to about Cashmere in the north-
west, and perhaps to the valley of the Indus further south ; but
the great desert tract to the east of the Indus forms a transition
to the south Palearctic sub-region. Perhaps on the whole the
Indus may be taken as a convenient boundary. Many Indian
naturalists, especially Mr. Blyth and Mr. Blanford, are impressed
with the relations of the greater part of this sub-region to the
Ethiopian region, and have proposed to divide it into several
zoological districts dependent on differences of climate and vege-
tation, and characterized by possessing faunas more or less allied
either to the Himalayan or the Ethiopian type. But these sub-
divisions appear far too complex to be useful to the general stu-
dent, and even were they proved to be natural, would be beyond
the scope of this work. I agree, however, with Mr. Elwes in
thinking that they really belong to local rather than to geo-
graphical distribution, and confound “ station” with “ habitat.”
Wherever there is a marked diversity of surface and vegetation
the productions of a country will correspondingly differ; the
groups peculiar to forests, for example, will be absent from open

322 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART 111.

plains or arid deserts. It happens that the three great Old
World regions are separated from each other by a debatable land
which is chiefly of a desert character ; hence we must expect to
find a resemblance between the inhabitants of such districts in
each region. We also find a great resemblance between the aquatic
birds of the three regions ; and as we generally give little weight
to these in our estimate of the degree of affinity of the faunas of
different countries, so we should not count the desert fauna as of
equal weight with the more restricted and peculiar types which
are found in the fertile tracts—in the mountains and valleys, and
especially in the primeval forests. The supposed preponderance
of exclusively Ethiopian groups of Mammalia and Birds in this
sub-region, deserves however a close examination, in order to
ascertain how far the facts really warrant such an opinion.

Mammalia.—the following list of the more important genera
of Mammalia which range over the larger part of this sub-region
will enable naturalists to form an independent judgment as to
the preponderance of Ethiopian, or of Oriental and Palearctic
types, in this, the most important of all the classes of animals
for geographical distribution.

RANGE OF THE GENERA OF MAMMALIA WHICH INHABIT THE SUB-REGION
oF HINDOSTAN.

1. Presbytes ... Oriental only.
2. Macacus --- Oriental only.
3. Erinaceus --- Palearctic genus.
4. Sorex ... ... Widely distributed.
5. Felis... ... Almost Cosmopolitan.
6. Cynelurus ... Ethiopian and 8. Palearctic.
7. Viverra ... Ethiopian and Oriental to China and Malaya.
8. Viverricula ... Oriental only.
9. Paradoxurus ... Oriental only.
10. Herpestes ... Ethiopian, 8. Palearctic, and Oriental to Malaya.
11. Calogale ... Ethiopian, Oriental to Cambodja.
12. Teniogale ... Oriental.
13. Hyzena ... Palearctic and Ethiopian (a Palearctic species.)
14. Canis ... ... Palearctic and Oriental to Malaya.
15. Cuon ... ... Oriental to Malaya.
16. Vulpes ... Very wide range.
17. Lutra ... ... Oriental and Palearctic.
18. Mellivora ... Ethiopian.
19. Melursus ... Oriental only; family not Ethiopian.
20. Sus, ... ... Palearctic and Oriental, not Ethiopian.

21. Tragulus ... Oriental.

CHAP. XII. ] THE ORIENTAL REGION. 323

22. Cervus ... Oriental and Palearctic ; family not Ethiopian.
23. Cervulus ... Oriental ; family not Ethiopian.

24, Bibos ... ... Palearctic and Oriental.

25. Portax ... Oriental.

26. Gazella ... Palearctic and Ethiopian.

27. Antilope ... Oriental.

28. Tetraceros ... Oriental.

29. Elephas ... Oriental species.

30. Mus... ... Cosmopolite nearly.

31. Platacanthomys Oriental.

32. Meriones ... Very wide range.

33. Spalacomys ... Oriental.

34. Sciurus ..- Almost Cosmopolite.

35. Pteromys ... Palearctic and Oriental to China and Malaya.
36. Hystrix ... Wide range.

37. Lepus ... ... Wide range.

38. Manis ... ..- Ethiopian and Oriental to Malaya.

Out of the above 38 genera, 8 have so wide a distribution as
to give no special geographical indications. Of the remaining 30,
whose geographical position we have noted, 14 are Oriental only ;
5 have as much right to be considered Oriental as Ethiopian,
extending as they do over the greater part of the Oriental
region; 2 (the hyzena and gazelle) show Palearctic rather than
Ethiopian affinity ; 7 are Palearctic and Oriental but not Ethio-
pian ; and only 2 (Cynelurus and Mellivora) can be considered
as especially Ethiopian. We must also give due weight to the
fact that we have here Urside and Cervide, two families entirely
absent from the Ethiopian region, and we shall then be forced
to conclude that the affinities of the Indian peninsula are not
only clearly Oriental, but that the Ethiopian element is really
present in a far less degree than the Palearctic.

Birds—The naturalists who have adopted the “Ethiopian
theory” of the fauna of Hindostan, have always supported their
views by an appeal to the class of birds; maintaining, that not
only are almost all the characteristic Himalayan and Malayan
genera absent, but that their place is to a great extent supplied
by others which are characteristic of the Ethiopian region. After
a careful examination of the subject, Mr. Elwes, in a paper read
before the Zoological Society (June 1873) came to the conclu-
sion, that this view was an erroneous one, founded on the fact
that the birds of the plains are the more abundant and more

324 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART II],

open to observation; and that these are often of wide-spread
types, and some few almost exclusively African. The facts he
adduced do not, however, seem to have satisfied the objectors ;
and as the subject is an important one, I will here give lists
of all the genera of Passeres, Picariz, Psittaci, Columbe, and
Galline, which inhabit the sub-region, leaving out those which
only just enter within its boundaries from adjacent sub-regions.
These are arranged under four heads:—1. Oriental genera; which
are either wholly confined to, or strikingly prevalent in, the
Oriental region beyond the limits of the Indian peninsula. 2.
Genera of Wide Range; which are fully as much entitled to be
considered Oriental or Palearctic as Ethiopian, and cannot be
held to prove any Ethiopian affinity. 3. Palearctic genera;
which are altogether or almost absent from the Ethiopian region.
4, Ethiopian genera; which are confined to, or very prevalent
in, the Ethiopian region, whence they extend into the Indian
peninsula but not over the whole Oriental region. The last are
the only ones which can be fairly balanced against those of the
first list, in order to determine the character of the fauna.

1. ORIENTAL GENERA IN CENTRAL INDIA.

Geocichla, Orthotomus, Prinia, Megalurus, Abrornis, Larvi-
vora, Copsychus, Kittacincla, Pomatorhinus, Malacocercus, Chatar-
rhea, Layardia, Garrulax, Trochalopteron, Pellorneum, Dumetia,
Pyctoris, Alcippe, Myiophonus, Sitta, Dendrophila, Phyllornis,
Lora, Hypsipetes, Pericrocotus, Graucalus, Volvocivora, Chibia,
Chaptia, Irena, Erythrosterna, Hemipus, Hemichelidon, Niltava,
Cyornis, Humyias, Hypothymis, Myialestes, Tephrodornis, Dendro-
citta, Arachnechthra, Nectarophila, Arachnothera, Diceum, Pipri-
soma, Munia, Eulabes, Pastor, Acridotheres, Sturnia, Sturnopastor,
Artamus, Nemoricola, Pitta, Yungipicus, Chrysocolaptes, Hemi-
circus, Gecinus, Mulleripicus, Brachypternus, Tiga, Micropternus,
Megalema, Xantholema, Rhopodytes, Taccocoua, Surniculus,
Hierococcyx, Eudynamnis, Nyctiornis, Harpactes, Pelargopsis,
Ceyx, Hydrocissa, Meniceros, Batrachostomus, Dendrochelidon,
Collocalia, Palwornis, Treron, Carpophaga, Chalcophaps, Orty-
gornis, Perdix, Pavo, Gallus, Galloperdiz ;—87 genera; and

CHAP. XII. ] THE ORIENTAL REGION. 325

one peculiar genus, Sa/pornis, whose affinities are Palearctic or
Oriental.

2. GENERA OF WIDE RANGE OCCURRING IN CENTRAL INDIA.

Tardus, Monticola, Drymeca, Cisticola, Acrocephalus, Phyllo-
scopus, Pratincola, Parus, Pycnonotus, Criniger, Oriolus, Dicrurus,
Tchitrea, Lanius, Corvus, Zosterops, Hirundo, Cotyle, Passer,
Ploceus, Estrilda, Alauda, Calandrella, Mirafra, Ammomanes,
Motacilla, Anthus, Picus, Yunx, Centropus, Cuculus, Chrysoccocyzx,
Coccystes, Coracias, Eurystomus, Merops, Alcedo, Ceryle, Halcyon,
Upupa, Caprimulgus, Cypselus, Chetura, Columba, Turtur,Pterocles,
Coturnix, Turnix ;—48 genera.

3. PALZARCTIC GENERA OCCURRING IN CENTRAL INDIA.

Hypolais, Sylvia, Curruca, Cyanecula, Calliope, Chelidon, Eu-
spiza, Emberiza, Galerita, Calobates, Corydalla ;—11 genera.

4. ETHIOPIAN GENERA OCCURRING IN CENTRAL INDIA.

Thamnobia, Pyrrhulauda, Pterocles, Francolinus ;,—4 genera.

A consideration of the above lists shows us, that the Hindostan
sub-region is by no means so poor in forms of bird-life as is
generally supposed (and as I had myself anticipated, it would
prove to be), possessing, as it does, 151 genera of land-birds,
without counting the Accipitres. It must also set at rest the
question of the zoological affinities of the district, since a pre-
ponderance of 88 genera, against 4, cannot be held to be insuffi-
cient, and cannot be materially altered by any corrections in
details that may be proposed or substantiated. Even of these
four, only the first two are exclusively Ethiopian, Pterocles and
Francolinus both being Palearctic also. It is a question, indeed,
whether anywhere in the world an outlying sub-region can
be found, exhibiting less zoological affinity for the adjacent
regions ; and we have here a striking illustration of the necessity
of deciding all such cases, not by examples, which may be so
chosen as to support any view, but by carefully weighing and
contrasting the whole of the facts on which the solution of the

326 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART II.

problem admittedly depends. It will, perhaps, be said that a
great many of the 88 genera above given are very scarce and very
local; but this is certainly not the case with the majority of them ;
and even where it is so, that does not in any degree affect their
value as indicating zoo-geographical affinities. It is the pre-
sence of a type in a region, not its abundance or scarcity, that is
the important fact ; and when we have to do, as we have here,
with many groups whose habits and mode of life necessarily
seclude them from observation, their supposed scarcity may not
even be a fact.

Reptiles and Amphibia—Reptiles entirely agree with Mam-
malia and Birds in the main features of their distribution.
Out of 17 families of snakes inhabiting Hindostan, 16 range
over the greater part of the entire region, and only two can
be supposed to show any Ethiopian affinity. These are the
Psammophide and Erycide, both desert-haunting groups, and
almost as much South Palearctic as African. The genus 7’ro-
pidococcyx is peculiar to the sub-region, and Aspidura, Passerita
and Cynophis to the peninsula and Ceylon; while a large number
of the most characteristic genera, as Dipsas, Simotes, Bungarus,
Naja, Trimeresurus, Lycodon and Python, are characteristically
Oriental.

Of the six families of lizards all have a wide range The
genera Humeces, Pentadactylus, Gecko, Eublepharis, and Draco, are
characteristically or wholly Oriental; Ophiops and Uromastix
are Palearctic; while Chamelcon is the solitary case of decided
Ethiopian affinity.

Of the Amphibia not a single family exhibits special Ethiopian
affinities.

IT. Sub-region of Ceylon and South-India.

The Island of Ceylon is characterised by such striking pecu-
liarities in its animal productions, as to render necessary its
separation from the peninsula of India as a sub-region ; but it
is found that most of these special features extend to the Neil-
gherries and the whole southern mountainous portion of India,
and that the two must be united in any zoo-geographical pro-

CHAP. XII ] THE ORIENTAL REGION. 327

vince. The main features of this division are,—the appearance
of numerous animals allied to forms only found again in the
Himalayas or in the Malayan sub-region, the possession of
several peculiar generic types, and an unusual number of
peculiar species.

Manmalia.—Among Mammalia the most remarkable form
is Loris, a genus of Lemurs altogether peculiar to the sub-
region; several peculiar monkeys of the genus Presbytes; the
Malayan genus Tupaia ; and Platacanthomys, a peculiar genus
of Muride.

Birds—Among birds it has Ochromela, a peculiar genus of
flycatchers ; Phenicophaés (Cuculidee) and Drymocataphus (Tima-
liide), both Malayan forms; a species of Myiophonus whose
nearest ally is in Java; Tvochalopteron, Brachypteryx, Buceros
and Loriculus, which are only found elsewhere in the Himalayas
and Malayana. It also possesses about 80 peculiar species of
birds, including a large jungle fowl, one owl and two hornbills.

Reptiles—lIt is however by its Reptiles, even more than by its
higher vertebrates, that this sub-region is clearly characterised.
Among snakes it possesses an entire family, Uropeltide, consisting
of 5 genera and 18 species altogether confined to it,—Rhinophis
and Uropeltis in Ceylon, Silybura, Plecturus and Melanophidium
in Southern India. Four other genera of snakes, Haplocercus,
Cercaspis, Peltopelor, and Hypnale are also peculiar; Chersydrus
is only found elsewhere in Malaya; while Aspidura, Passerita,
and Cynophis, only extend to Hindostan; and species of Hryz,
Echis, and Psammophis show an affinity with Ethiopian and
Palearctic forms. Among lizards several genera of Agamidce
are peculiar, such as Otocryptis, Lyricoephalus, Ceratophora, Co-
photis, Salea, Sitana and Charasia. In the family Acontiade,
Nessia is peculiar to Ceylon, while a species of the African
genus Acontias shows an affinity for the Ethiopian region.

Amphibia.—The genera of Amphibians that occur here are
generally of wide range, but Nannophrys, Haplobatrachus,
and Cacopus are confined to the sub-region; while Megalo-
phrys is Malayan, and the species found in Ceylon also inhabit
Java.

328 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

Insects—The insects of Ceylon also furnish some curious
examples of its distinctness from Hindostan, and its affinity with
Malaya. Among its butterflies we find Papilio jophon, closely
allied to P. antiphus of Malaya. The remarkable genus Hestia, so
characteristic of the Malay archipelago, only occurs elsewhere on
the mountains of Ceylon; while its Cynthia and Parthenos are
closely allied to, if not identical with, Malayan species. Among
Coleoptera we have yet more striking examples. The highly cha-
racteristic Malayan genus Z'ricondyla is represented in Ceylon by
no less than 10 species ; and among Longicorns we find the genera
Tetraommatus, Thranius, Cacia, Praonetha, Ropica, and Serixia,
all exclusively Malayan or only just entering the Indo-Chinese
peninsula, yet all represented in Ceylon, while not a single
species occurs in any part of India or the Himalayas.

The Past History of Ceylon and South-India as indicated by ats
Fauna.—In our account of the Ethiopian region we have already
had occasion to refer to an ancient connection between this sub-
region and Madagascar, in order to explain the distribution of
the Lemurine type, and some other curious affinities between the
two countries. This view is supported by the geology of India,
which shows us Ceylon and South India consisting mainly of
granitic and old metamorphic rocks, while the greater part of the
peninsula, forming our first sub-region, is of tertiary formation,
with a few isolated patches of secondary rocks. It is evident
therefore, that during much of the tertiary period, Ceylon and
South India were bounded on the north by a considerable extent
of sea, and probably formed part of an extensive southern con-
tinent or great island. The very numerous and remarkable cases
of affinity with Malaya, require however some closer approxima-
tion to these islands, which probably occurred at a later period.

When, still later, the great plains and table-lands of Hindostan |

were formed, and a permanent land communication effected with
the rich and highly developed Himalo-Chinese fauna, a rapid im-
migration of new types took place, and many of the less specia-
lised forms of mammalia and birds (particularly those of ancient
Ethiopian type) became extinct. Among reptiles and insects the
competition was less severe, or the older forms were too well

CHAP. XII. ] THE ORIENTAL REGION. 329

adapted to local conditions to be expelled; so that it is among
these groups alone that we find any considerable number, of what
are probably the remains of the ancient fauna of a now sub-
merged southern continent.

III. Himalayan or Indo-Chinese Sub-region.

This, which is probably the richest of all the sub-regions, and
perhaps one of the richest of all tracts of equal extent on the
face of the globe, is essentially a forest-covered, mountainous
country, mostly within the tropics, but on its northern margin
extending some degrees beyond it, and rising in a continuous
mountain range till it meets and intercalates with the Man-
churian sub-division of the Palearctic region. The peculiar
mammalia, birds and insects of this sub-region begin to appear
at the very foot of the Himalayas, but Dr. Gunther has shown
that many of the reptiles characteristic of the plains of India
are found to a height of from 2,000 to 4,000 feet.

In Sikhim, which may be taken as a typical example of the
Himalayan portion of the sub-region, it seems to extend to an
altitude of little less than 10,000 feet, that being the limit of the
characteristic Timaliidz or babbling thrushes ; while the equally
characteristic Pycnonotide, or bulbuls, and Treronide, or thick-
billed fruit-pigeons, do not, according to Mr. Blanford, reach
quite so high. We may perhaps take 9,000 feet as a good
approximation over a large part of the Himalayan range; but
it is evidently not possible to define the line with any great
precision. Westward, the sub-region extends in diminishing
breadth, till it terminates in or near Cashmere, where the fauna
of the plains of India almost meets that of the Palearctic
region, at a moderate elevation. Eastward, it reaches into Kast
Thibet and North-west China, where Pére David has found a
large number of the peculiar types of the Eastern Himalayas. A
fauna, in general features identical, extends over Burmah and
Siam to South China; mingling with the Palearctic fauna in
the mountains south of the Yang-tse-kiang river, and with
that of Indo-Malaya in Tenasserim, and to a lesser extent in
Southern Siam and Cochin China.

Vout. 1.—238

330 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART 11.

Zoological Characteristics of the Himalayan Sub-region—
Taking this sub-region as a whole, we find it to be charac-
terised by 8 genera of mammalia (without counting bats), and
44 genera of land-birds, which are altogether peculiar to it ;
and by 13 genera of mammalia and 36 of birds, which it
possesses. in common with the Malayan sub-region; and
besides these it has almost all the genera before enumerated
as “Oriental,” and several others of wide range, more especially
a number of Palearctic genera which appear in the higher
Himalayas. The names of the more characteristic genera are
as follows :—

PECULIAR HIMALO-CHINESE GENERA.

Mammalia.—Urva, Arctonyx, Alurus.

Birds. — Suya, Horites, Chemarrhornis, Tarsiger, Oreicola,
Acanthoptila, Grammatoptila, Trochalopteron, Actinodura, Sibia,
Suthora, Paradoxornis, Chlenasicus, Tesia, Rimator, Aigithaliscus,
Cephalopyrus, Liothrixz, Siva, Minla, Proparus, Cutia, Yuhina,
Ixulus, Myzornis, Erpornis, Hemixus, Chibia, Niltava, Anthipes,
Chelidorhynx, Urocissa, Pachyglossa, Heterura, Hematospiza,
Ampeliceps, Saroglossa, Psarisomus, Serilophus, Vivia, Hyopicus,
Gecinulus, Aceros, Ceriornis. .

GENERA COMMON TO THE HIMALO-CHINESE AND MALAYAN
SUB-REGIONS.

Mammalia. — Hylobates, Nycticebus, Viverricula, Prionodon,
Arctitis, Paguma, Arctogale, Cuon, Gymnopus, Aonyx, Helictis,
Rhinoceros, Nemorhedus, Rhizomys.

Birds—— Oreocinela, Notodela, Janthocincla, Timalia, Stachyris,
Mixornis, Trichastoma, Enicurus, Puepyga, Melanochlora, Allo-
trius, Microscelis, Tole, Analcipus, Cochoa, Bhringa, Xanthopygia,
Hylocharis, Cissa, Temnurus, Crypsirhina, Chalcostetha, An-
threptes, Chalcoparia, Cymbirhynchus, Hydrornis, Sasia, Venilia,
Indicator, Carcineutes, Lyncornis, Macropygia, Argusianus Poly-
plectron, Euplocamus, Phodilus.

Plate VII. Scene in Nepal, with Characteristic Himalayan
Animals Our illustration contains figures of two mammals

-
.
. "
v Pe eS are ns or ‘oo c : “
~ oe * “ * » . 5 of - ‘ a :
rr a 7 x - , a: ; fn
- a < - 2 i ‘ ie . + ‘
i= i 2 F aos 1 5 S
. bs a - 7 i: a .
= s he zt 2 vow J
’ aed J “oh. : i “ ‘i
7 o = . 5 — , r .
a ee v= a ; ; ‘ , Se 12
aa , C a . «t 7 2 f
Frey . t 2 mrre
’ ¥ . A : - woo pax, " ee -
A Whe P . E : , ; _ os ; : g
Pe a : ‘ r ‘ . ‘ ; 5
: : ' °
‘ : ; : " 4 ;
wy . “, u 7
4 : A : . : ey
, Yas ‘ io j - ‘ '
tp ; > “ i wy 7 _
al age " J rfl - ' .
> x . ¥ ‘
. . j D a
= ; + F 7 = '
: L ge * > r i
i - n 1 :
. a " J
; f ‘ ‘ ‘ . f
, q 7
Y j rs r
‘ y . ‘ 4
Me w . ay - Ps o . =
‘ 7 “ - y
} ( - ; ' f . , -
5 iy as ot
r 5 ‘ : . ’
j 1s re 7 , . 4
: ont : | z,
7 Ae : ; : ‘
aie ne? Pr . “oF - ‘
- f \ ' .
, i ‘ ‘ 7 , ‘ . . 4
) ih | « i) , =)
f “ cH t * 4
. . ” ” Py 1 \e Se an 5
i : ‘
q ‘ ‘ i ;
é ' 7 - : 4 : ’
' ‘ . mo Caan
= 7M : ios ie , ne: ‘
7 : :
D ; : , ‘ hy
; ‘ 7 ' ‘ : *
: : J : ’ - ‘ D , é i tev eel ee 1 ic
\\ . J ‘
4 « = oa . aa - F .
i} ‘
i
y
‘
{
‘ '
, .
: ) <

PLATE VIL.

NEPAUL, WITH CHARACTERISTIC ANIMALS.

IN

SCENE

CHAP, XII. ] THE ORIENTAL REGION. 331

and two birds, characteristic of the higher woody region of the
Himalayas. The lower figure on the left is the Helictis nepalensis,
confined to the Eastern Himalayas, and belonging to a genus of
the weasel family which is exclusively Oriental. It is marked
with white on a grey-brown ground. Above it is the remark-
able Panda (4lurus fulgens), a beautiful animal with a glossy fur
of a reddish colour, darker feet, and a white somewhat cat-like
face. It is distantly allied to the bears, and more nearly to the
American racoons, yet with sufficient differences to constitute it
a, distinct family. The large bird on the tree, is the horned
Tragopan (Ceriornis satyra), one of the fine Himalayan pheasants,
magnificently spotted with red and white, and ornamented with
fleshy erectile wattles and horns, of vivid blue and red colours.
The bird in the foreground is the Jbidorhynchus struthersii, a
rare and curious wader, allied to the curlews and sandpipers but
having the bill and feet red. It frequents the river-beds in the
higher Himalayas, but has also been found in Thibet.

Reptiles—Very few genera of reptiles are peculiar to this
sub-region, all the more important ranging into the Malay
islands. Of snakes the following are the more characteristic
genera :—T'yphline, Cylindrophis, Xenopeltis, Calamaria, Xenela-
phis, Hypsirhina, Fordonia, several small genera of Homalop-
side (Herpeton and Hipistes being characteristic of Burmah and
Siam) Psammodynastes, Gonyosoma, Chrysopelea, Tragops, Dipsas,
Pareas, Python, Bungarus, Naja, Callophis, and Trimeresurus.
Naja reaches 8,000 feet elevation in the Himalayas, Tropidonotus
9,000 feet, Ablabes 10,000 feet, and Simotes 15,000 feet.

Of lizards, Pseudopus has one species in the Khasya hills
while the other inhabits South-east Europe; and there are two
small genera of Agamide peculiar to the Himalayas, while
Draco and Calotes have a wide range and Acanthosaura, Dilo-
phyrus, Physignathus, and Liolepis are found chiefly in the
Indo-Chinese peninsula. There are several genera of Scincide ;
and the extensive genus of wall-lizards, Gecko, ranges over the
whole region.

Of Amphibia, the peculiar forms are not numerous. Ichthyophis

So2 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART Ill.

a genus of Ceciliade, is peculiar to the Khasya Hills; Tylo-
tritron (Salamandridz) to Yunan in Western China, and perhaps
belongs to the Palearctic region.

Of the tail-less Batrachians, Glyphoglossus is found in Pegu;
Xenophys in the Eastern Himalayas; while Callula, Ixalus,
Rhacophorus, Hylurana, Oxyglossus, and. Phrynoglossus, are com-
mon to the Himalo-Chinese and Malayan sub-regions.

Of the lizards, Colotes, Barycephalus, and Hinulia,—and of
the Batrachia, Bufo—are found at above 11,000 feet elevation in
the Himalayas.

Insects—So little has been done in working out the insect
faunas of the separate sub-regions, that they cannot be treated
in detail, and the reader is referred to the chapter on the dis-
tribution of insects in the part of this work devoted to Geogra-
phical Zoology. . A few particulars may, however, be given as to
the butterflies, which have been more systematically collected in
tropical countries than any other order of insects. The Hima-
layan butterflies, especially in the eastern portions of the range—
in Assam and the Khasya Hills—are remarkably fine and very

‘abundant; yet all the larger groups extend into the Malayan
sub-region, many to Ceylon, and a considerable proportion even
to Africa and Austro-Malaya. There are a large number of
peculiar types, but most of them consist of few or single species.
Such are Neope, Orenoma, and Rhaphicera, genera of Satyride ;
Enispe (Morphide) ; Hestina, Penthema, and Abrota (Nympha-
lide) ; Dodona (Erycinide) ; Ilerda (Lyceenide) ; Calinaga, Teino-
palpus, and Bhutanitis (Papilionide). Its more prominent fea-
tures are, however, derived from what may be termed Malayan,
or even Old World types, such as Huplea, among Danaide ;
Amathusia, Clerome, and Thaumantis, among Morphide ; Euripus,
Diadema, Athyma, Limenitis, and Adolias, among Nymphalide,
Zemeros and Taxila among Erycinide; Amblypodia, Miletus,
Ilerda, and Myrina, among Lycenide ; Thyca, Prioneris, Dercas,
Iphias, and Thestias among Pieride; and Papilios of the
“ Amphrisius,” “ Coon,” “ Philoxenus,” “ Protenor,’ “ Paris,” and
“ Sarpedon” groups. In the Himalayas there is an unusual
abundance of large and gorgeous species of the genus Papilio,

CHAP. XII.] THE ORIENTAL REGION. 333

and of large and showy Nymphalide, Morphide, and Danaide,
which render it, in favoured localities, only second to South
America for a display of this form of beauty and variety in
insect life.

Among the other orders of insects in which the Himalayas
are remarkably rich, we may mention large and brilliant Ce-
toniide, chiefly of the genus Rhomborhima ; a magnificent Lamel-
licorn, Huchirus macleayii, allied to the gigantic long-armed
beetle (£. longimanus) of Amboyna; superb moths of the
families Agaristidee and Sesiide; elegant and remarkable Ful-
goride, and strange forms of the gigantic Phasmide ; most of
which appear to be of larger size or of more brilliant colours
than their Malayan allies.

Islands of the Indo-Chinese Sub-region—A few important
islands belong to this sub-region, the Andamans, Formosa, and
Hainan being the most interesting.

Andamans.—The only mammalia are a few rats and mice, a
Paradoxurus, and a pig supposed to be a hybrid race,—all of
which may have been introduced by man’s agency. The
birds of the Andaman Islands have been largely collected, no
less than 155 species having been obtained; and of these 17,
(all land-birds) are peculiar. The genera are all found on the
continent, and are mostly characteristic of the Indo-Chinese
fauna, to which most of the species belong. Reptiles are also
tolerably abundant; about 20 species are known, the majority
being found also on the continent, while a few are peculiar.
There are also a few Batrachia, and some fresh-water fishes, closely
resembling those of Burmah. The absence of such mammalia
as monkeys and squirrels, which abound on the mainland, and
which are easily carried over straits or narrow seas by floating
trees, is sufficient proof that these islands have not recently
formed part of the continent. The birds are mostly such as
may have reached the islands while in their present geographical
position ; and the occurrence of reptiles and fresh-water fishes,
said to be identical in species with those of Burmah, must be
due to the facilities, which some of these animals undoubtedly

334 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART Ii.

possess, for passing over a considerable width of sea. We must
conclude, therefore, that these islands do not owe their exist-
ing fauna to an actual union with the mainland; but it is pro-
bable that they may have been formerly more extensive, and
have then been less distant from the continent than at the
present time.

The Nicobar Islands, usually associated with the Andamans,
are less known, but present somewhat similar phenomena. They
are, however, more Malayan in their fauna, and seem properly
to belong to the Indo-Malay sub-region.

Formosa.—This island has been carefully examined by Mr.
Swinhoe, who found 144 species of birds, of which 34 are peculiar.
There is one peculiar genus, but the rest are all Indo-Chinese,
though some of the species are more allied to Malayan than to
Chinese or Himalayan forms. About 30 species of mammalia
were found in Formosa, of which 11 are peculiar species, the rest
being either Chinese or Himalayan. The peculiar species belong
to the genera Talpa, Helictis, Scivropterus, Pteromys, Mus, Sus,
Cervus, and Capricornis, A few lizards and snakes of conti-
nental species have also been found. These facts clearly indicate
the former connection of Formosa with China and Malaya, a
connection which is rendered the more probable by the shallow
sea which still connects all these countries.

Hainan.—The island of Hainan, on the south coast of China,
is not so well known in proportion, though Mr. Swinhoe col-
lected 172 species of birds, of which 130 were land-birds.. Of
these about 20 were peculiar species ; the remainder being either
Chinese, Himalayan, or Indo-Malayan. Mr. Swinhoe also ob-
tained 24 species of mammalia, all being Chinese, Himalayan,
or Indo-Malayan species except a hare, which is peculiar. This
assemblage of animals would imply that Hainan, as might be
anticipated from its position, has been more recently separated
from the continent than the more distant island of Formosa.

IV. Indo-Malaya, or the Malayan Sub-region.

This sub-region, which is almost wholly insular (including
only the Malayan peninsula on the continent of Asia), is equal, if

CHAP. XII.] THE ORIENTAL REGION. 335

SS —

not superior, in the variety and beauty of its productions, to that
which we have just been considering. Like Indo-China, it is a re-
gion of forests, but it is more exclusively tropical ; and it is there-
fore deficient in many of those curious forms of the temperate
zone of the Himalayas, which seem to have been developed from
Palearctic rather than from Oriental types. Here alone, in the
Oriental region, are found the most typical equatorial forms of
life organisms adapted to a climate characterised by uniform but
not excessive heat, abundant moisture, and no marked departure
from the average meteorological state, throughout the year. These
favourable conditions of life only occur in three widely separated
districts of the globe—the Malay archipelago, Western Africa,
and equatorial South America. Hence perhaps it is, that the
tapir and the trogons of Malacca should so closely resemble those
of South America ; and that the great anthropoid apes and erested
hornbills of Western Africa, should find their nearest allies in
Borneo and Sumatra. .

Although the islands which go to form this sub-region
are often separated from each other by a considerable ex-
panse of sea, yet their productions in general offer no greater
differences than those of portions of the Indo-Chinese sub-
region separated by an equal extent of dry land. The ex-
planation is easy, however, when we find that the sea which
separates them is a very shallow one, so shallow that an eleva-
tion of only 300 feet would unite Sumatra, Java, and Borneo into
one great South-eastern prolongation of the Asiatic continent:
As we know that our own country has been elevated and de-
pressed to a greater amount than this, at least twice in recent
geological times, we can have no difficulty in admitting similar
changes of level in the Malay archipelago, where the sub-
terranean forces which bring about such changes are still at
work, as manifested by the great chain of active volcanoes in
Sumatra and Java. Proofs of somewhat earlier changes of level
are to be seen in the Tertiary coal formations of Borneo, which
demonstrate a succession of elevations and subsidences, with as
much certainty as if we had historical record of them.

Jt is not necessary to suppose, nor is it probable, that all these

336 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. (rsRT III.

great islands were recently united to the continent, and that
their separation took place by one general subsidence of the
whole. It is more consonant with what we know of such mat-
ters, that the elevations and depressions were partial, varying
in their points of action and often recurring; sometimes ex-
tending one part of an island, sometimes another; now joining
an island to the main land, now bringing two islands into closer
proximity. There is reason to believe that sometimes an inter-
vening island has sunk or receded and allowed others which it
before separated to effect a partial union independently of it. If
we recognise the probability that such varied and often-renewed
changes of level have occurred, we shall be better able to under-
stand how certain anomalies of distribution in these islands may
have been brought about. We will now endeavour to sketch the
general features of the zoology of this interesting district, and
then proceed to discuss some of the relations of the islands to
each other.

Mammalia—We have seen that the Indo-Chinese sub-region
possesses 13 species of mammalia in common with the Indo-
Malay sub-region, and 4 others peculiar to itself, besides one
Ethiopian and several Oriental and Palearctic forms of wide
range, Of this latter class the Malay islands have compara-
tively few, but they possess no less than 14 peculiar genera, viz.
Simia, Siamanga, Tarsius, Galeopithecus, Hylomys, Ptilocerus,
Gymnura, Cynogale, Hemigalea, Arctogale, Barangia, Mydaus,
Hélarctos, and Tapirus. The islands also possess tigers, deer,
wild pigs, wild cattle, elephants, the scaly ant-eater, and most
of the usual Oriental genera; so that they are on the whole
fully as rich as, if not richer than, any part of Asia; a fact very
unusual in island faunas, and very suggestive of their really
continental nature.

Plate VIII. Scene in Borneo with Characteristic Malayan
Quadrupeds.—The Malayan fauna is so rich and peculiar that
we devote two plates to illustrate it. We have here a group of
mammalia, such as might be seen together in the vast forests of
Borneo. In the foreground we have the beautiful deer-like
Chevrotain (Zragulus javanicus). These are delicate little

PLATE VIII.

MAMMALIA,

ISTIC

ER.

CT

CHARA

BORNEO, WITH

A FOREST IN

CHAP. XII. ] THE ORIENTAL REGION. 337

animals whose body is not larger than a rabbit’s, thence often
called “mouse-deer.” They were formerly classed with the
“ musk-deer,” owing to their similar tusk-like upper canines ;
but their anatomy shows them to form quite a distinct family,
having more resemblance to the camels. On the branch above
is the curious feather-tailed Tree-Shrew (Ptilocerus lowit), a small
insectivorous animal altogether peculiar to Borneo. Above this
is the strange little Tarsier (Tarsius spectrum), one of the lemurs
confined to the Malay islands, but so distinct from all others as
to constitute a separate family. The other small animals are
the Flying Lemurs (Galeopithecus volans) formerly classed with
the lemurs, but now considered to belong to the Insectivora,
They have a very large expansion of the skin connecting the
fore and hind limbs and tail, and are able to take long flights
from one tree to another, and even to rise over obstacles in their
course by the elevatory power of the tail-membrane. They
feed chiefly on leaves, and have a very soft and beautifully
marbled fur.

In the distance is the Malayan tapir (Zapirus indicus), a
representative of a group of animals now confined to the larger
Malay islands and tropical America, but which once ranged
over the greater part of temperate Europe.

Birds—Owing to several of the families consisting of very
obscure and closely allied species, which have never been criti-
cally examined and compared by a competent ornithologist,
the number of birds inhabiting this sub-region is uncertain.
From the best available materials there appear to be somewhat
less than 630 species of land-birds actually known, or exclud-
ing the Philippine Islands somewhat less than 600. The
larger part of these are peculiar species, but mostly allied to
those of Indo-China; 36 of the genera, as already stated, being
common to these two sub-regions. There are, however, no less
than 46 genera which are peculiarly or wholly Indo Malayan
and, in many cases, have no close affinity with other Oriental
groups. These peculiar genera are as follows:—T7imalia, Mala-
copteron, Macronus, Napothera, Turdinus, and Trichixos—genera

338 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

of Timaliide ; Hupetes,a most remarkable form, perhaps allied
to Enicurus, and Cinelus ; Rhabdornis (Certhiide) found only in
the Philippines; Psaltria, a diminutive bird of doubtful affinities,
provisionally classed among the tits (Paride); Setornis (Pycnono-
tide) ; Lalage (Campephagidee) extending eastward to the Pacific
Islands ; Pycnosphrys, Philentoma (Muscicapide) ; Laniellus,
a beautiful bird doubtfully classed with the shrikes (Laniide) ;
Platylophus and Pityriasis, the latter a most anomalous form—
perhaps a distinct family, at present classed with the jays, in
Corvide ; Prionochilus, a curious form classed with Diczide ;
Erythrura (Ploceide), extending eastwards to the Fiji Islands ;
Gymnops, Calornis, (Sturnide); Hurylemus, Corydon, and Calyp-
tomena (Eurylemide) ; Hucichla, the longest tailed and most
elegantly marked of the Pittide ; Reinwardtipicus and Miglyptes
(Picidee) ; Pstlopogon and Calorhamphus, (Megalemide) ; Rhino-
coccyx, Dasylophus, Lepidogrammus, Carpococcyx, Zanclostomus,
Poliococeyx, Rhinortha, (Cuculidee) ; Berenicornis, Caldo, Cranor-
hinus, Penelopides, Rhinoplux, (Bucerotidee) ; Psittinus, (Psitta-
cide); Ptilopus, Phapitreron, (Columbide); Rollulus, (Trero-
nide); Macherhamphus, (Falconide). Many of these genera are
abundant and wide-spread, while some of the most characteristic
Himalayan genera, such as Larvivora, Garrulax, Hypsipetes,
Pomatorhinus, and Dendrocitta, are here represented by only
a few species.

Among the groups that are characteristic of the Malayan
sub-region, the Timalide and Pycnonotide stand pre-eminent; the
former represented chiefly by the genera 7imalia, Malacopteron,
Macronus, and Trichastoma, the latter by Criniger, Microscelis,
and many forms of Pycnonotus. The Muscicapide, Dicruride,
Campephagide, Ploceide, and Nectariniide are also well
developed ; as well as the Pittidse, and the Eurylemide, the
limited number of species of the latter being compensated by
a tolerable abundance of individuals. Among the Picariz are
many conspicuous groups; as, woodpeckers (Picide) ; barbets
(Megalemide); trogons (Trogonide); kingfishers (Alcedinide) ;
and hornbills (Bucerotide) ; five families which are perhaps the
most conspicuous in the whole fauna. Lastly come the pigeons

CHAP. XII. ]} THE ORIENTAL REGION, 339

(Columbidze), and the pheasants (Phasianide), which are fairly
represanted by such fine genera as 7reron, Ptilopus, Euplocamus,
and Argusianus. A few forms whose affinities are Australian
rather than Oriental, help to give a character to the ornithology,
though none of them are numerous. The swallow-shrikes
(Artamus); the wag-tail fly-catchers (Rhipidura); the green fruit-
doves (Ptilopus); and the mound-makers (Megapodius), are the
chief of these.

There are a few curious examples of remote geographical
alliances that may be noted. First, we have a direct African
connection in Macherhamphus, a genus of hawks, and Berenicornis,
a genus of hornbills; the only close allies being, in the former
case in South, and in the latter in West Africa. Then we have
a curious Neotropical affinity, indicated by Carpococcyx, a large
Bornean ground-cuckoo, whose nearest ally is the genus WNeo-
morphus of South America; and by the lovely green-coloured
Calyptomena which seems unmistakably allied to the orange-
coloured Lupicola, or “ Cock of the rock,” in general structure
and in the remarkable form of crest, a resemblance which has
been noticed by many writers.

In the preceding enumeration of Malayan genera several
are included which extend into the Austro-Malay Islands, our
object, at present, being to show the differences and relations of
the two chief Oriental sub-regions.

Plate IX. A Malayan Forest with some of its peculiar Birds.—
Our second illustration of the Malayan fauna is devoted to its
bird-life ; and for this purpose we place our scene in the Malay
peninsula, where birds are perhaps more abundant and more
interesting, than in any other part of the sub-region. Con-
spicuous in the foreground is the huge Rhinoceros Hornbill
(Buceros rhinoceros), one of the most characteristic birds of the
Malayan forests, the flapping of whose wings, as it violently
beats the air to support its heavy body, may be heard a mile
off. On the ground behind, is the Argus pheasant (Argus-
ianus giganteus) whose beautifully ocellated wings have been
the subject of a most interesting description in Mr. Darwin’s
Descent of Man. The wing-feathers are here so enormously

340 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PARY II.

developed for display (as shown in our figure) that they
become almost, if not quite, useless for their original purpose of
flight ; yet the colours are so sober, harmonizing completely
with the surrounding vegetation, and the bird is so wary, that
in the forests where it abounds an old hunter assured me he had
never been able to see a specimen till it was caught in his
snares. It is interesting to note, that during the display of the
plumage the bird’s head is concealed by the wings from a
spectator in front, and, contrary to what usually obtains among
pheasants, the head is entirely unadorned, having neither crest
nor a particle of vivid colour,—a remarkable confirmation of
Mr. Darwin’s views, that gayly coloured plumes are developed
in the male bird for the purpose of attractive display in
the breeding season. The long-tailed bird on the right is
one of the Drongo-shrikes (Bhringa remifer), whose long bare
tail-feathers, with an oar-like web at the end, and_ blue-
black glossy plumage, render it a very attractive object as it
flies after its insect prey. On the left is another singular bird
the great Broad-bill (Corydon swmatranus), with dull and sombre
plumage, but with a beak more like that of a boat-bill than of a
fruit-eating passerine bird. Over all, the white-handed Gibbon
(Hylobatcs lar) swings and gambols among the topmost branches
of the forest.

Reptiles and Amphibia.—These are not sufficiently known to
be of much use for our present purpose. Most of the genera
belong to the continental parts of the Oriental region, or have a
wide range. Of snakes Rhabdosoma, Typhlocalamus, Tetragono-
soma, Acrochordus, and Atropos, are the most peculiar, and there
are several peculiar genera of Homalopside. Of Oriental genera,
Cylindrophis, Xenopeltes, Calamaria, Hypsirhina, Psammody-
nastes, Gonyosoma, Tragops, Dipsas, Pareas, Python, Bungarus,
Naja, and Callophis are abundant; as well as Simotes, Ablabes,
Tropidonotus, and Dendrophis, which are widely distributed.
Among lizards Hydrosaurus and Gecko are common; there are
many isolated groups of Scincide; while Draco, Calotes, and
many forms of Agamide, some of which are peculiar, abound.

Among the Amphibia, toads and frogs of the genera Micrhyla,

AT Ee

PL

A MALAYAN FOREST, WITH SOME OF ITS PECULIAR BIRDS.

CHAP. XII. ] THE ORIENTAL REGION. 341

Kalophrynus, Ansonia, and Pseudobufo, are peculiar: while the
Oriental Megalophrys, Ixalus, Rhacophorus, and Hylorana are
abundant and characteristic. :

Fishes——The fresh-water fishes of the Malay archipelago
have been so well collected and examined by the Dutch
naturalists, that they offer valuable indications of zoo-geo-
graphical affinity ; and they particularly well exhibit the
sharply defined limits of the region, a large number of Oriental
and even Ethiopian genera extending eastward as far as Java
and Borneo, but very rarely indeed sending a single species
further east, to Celebes or the Moluccas. Thirteen families of
fresh-water fishes are found in the Indo-Malay sub-region. Of
these the Scienide and Symbranchide have mostly a wide
range in the tropics. Ophiocephalide are exclusively Oriental,
reaching Borneo and the Philippine islands. The Mastacem-
belide are also Oriental, but one species is found as far as Ceram.
Of the Nandidz, 3 genera range over the whole region. The
Labyrinthici extend from Africa through the Oriental region to
Amboyna. The single species constituting the family Lucio-
cephalide is confined to Borneo and the small islands of Biliton
and Banca. Of the extensive family Siluride 17 genera are
Oriental and Malayan, and 11 are Malayan exclusively; and
not one of these appears to pass beyond the limits of the sub-
region. The Cyprinide offer an equally striking example, 23
genera ranging eastward to Java and Borneo and not one
beyond; 14 of these being exclusively Malayan. It must be
remembered that this is not from any want of knowledge of the
countries farther east, as extensive collections have also been
made in Celebes, the Moluccas, and Timor; so that the facts of
distribution of fresh-water fishes come, most unexpectedly, to
fortify that division of the archipelago into two primary
regions, which was founded on a consideration of mammalia
and birds only.

Insects —Few countries in the world can present a richer and
more varied series of insects than the Indo-Malay islands, and
we can only here notice a few of their more striking peculiarities
and more salient features.

342 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. * “(PART dit:

The butterflies of this sub-region, according to the best esti-
mate that can be formed, amount to about 650 described species,
‘a number that will yet, no doubt, be very considerably increased.
The genera which appear to be peculiar to it are H7ites (Saty-
ride) ; Zeuxidia (Morphide) ; Amnosia, Xanthotenia, and
Tanecia (Nymphalide). The groups which are most charac-
teristic of the region, either from their abundance in individuals
or species, or from their size and beauty, are—the rich dark-
coloured Huplwa ; the large semi-transparent Hestia; the plain-
coloured Mycalesis, which replace our meadow-brown butterflies
(Hipparchia) ; the curious Hlymnias, which often closely resemble
Eupleas; the large and handsome Thamantis and Zeuxidia,
which take the place of the giant Morphos of South America ;
the Cethosia, of the brightest red, and marked with a curious
zigzag pattern ; the velvety and blue-glossed Terinos; the pale
and delicately-streaked Cyrestis; the thick-bodied and boldly
coloured Adolias ; the small wine-coloured Taxila ; the fine blue
Amblypodia; the beautiful Zhyca, elegantly marked under-
neath with red and yellow, which represent our common white
butterflies and are almost equally abundant; the pale blue
Eronia, and the large red-tipped Jphias. The genus Papilio
is represented by a variety of fine groups; the large Ornithop-
tera, with satiny yellow under-wings; the superb green-marked
“brookeana ;” the “paradoxa” group, often closely resembling
the Eupleas that abound in the same district; the “paris”
group richly dusted with golden-green specks; the “ helenus”
group with wide-spreading black and white wings; the black
and crimson “ polydorus” group; the “memnon” group, of the
largest size and richly-varied colours; and the “ eurypilus”
group, elegantly banded or spotted with blue or green: all these
are so abundant that some of them are met with in every walk,
and are a constant delight to the naturalist who has the privilege
of observing them in their native haunts.

The Coleoptera are far less prominent and require to be care-
fully sought after; but they then well repay the collector. As
affording some measure of the productiveness of the tropics in
insect life it will not be out of place to give a few notes of the

CHAP. XII. THE ORIENTAL REGION. 343

number of species collected by myself in some of the best
localities. At Singapore 300 species of Coleoptera were col-
lected in 15 days, and in a month the number had increased to
520; of which 100 were Longicorns and 140 Rhyncophora. At
Sarawak in Borneo I obtained 400 species in 15 days, and
600 ina month. In two months this number had increased to
about 850, and in three months to 1,000 species. This was the
most prolific spot I ever collected in, especially for Longicorns
which formed about one-fifth of all the species of beetles. In
the Aru Islands in one month, I obtained only 235 species of
Coleoptera, and about 600 species of insects of all orders; and
this may be taken as a fair average, in localities where no
specially favourable conditions existed. On the average 40 to
60 species of Coleoptera would be a good day’s collecting; 70
exceptionally good; while the largest number ever obtained in
one day was 95, and the majority of these would be very
minute insects. It must be remembered, however, that many
very common species were passed over, yet had every species met
with. been collected, not much more than i100 species would ever
have been obtained in one day’s collecting of four or five hours.
These details may afford an interesting standard of comparison
for collectors in other parts of the world.

Of Cicindelide the most peculiarly Malayan form is Therates,
found always on leaves in the forests in the same localities as
the more widely spread Collyris. Five genera of this family are
Indo-Malayan.

The Carabide, though sufficiently plentiful, are mostly of small
size, and not conspicuous in any way. But there is one striking
exception in the purely Malayan genus Mormolyce, the largest
and most remarkable of the whole family. It is nocturnal,
resting during the days on the under side of large boleti in the
virgin forest. Pericallus and Catascopus are among the few
genera which are at all brillantly coloured.

Buprestidee are abundant, and very gay; the genus Belionota
being perhaps one of the most conspicuous and characteristic.
The giant Catoxantha is, however, the most peculiar, though
comparatively scarce. Chrysochroa and Chalcophora are also

344 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

abundant and characteristic. Out of the 41 Oriental genera 21
are Malayan, and 10 of these are not found in the other sub-
regions.

In Lucanide the Malay islands are rich, 14 out of the 16
Oriental genera occurring there, and 3 being peculiar. There
are many fine species of Odontolabris, which may be considered
the characteristic genus of the sub-region.

The Cetoniide are well represented by 16 genera and about 120
species. The genera Mycteristes, Phaedimus, Plectrone, Huremina,
Rhagopteryz and Centrognathus are peculiar, while Agestrata,
Chalcothea, and Macronota are abundant and characteristic.

The Longicorns, as in all continental forest regions near the
equator, are very abundant and in endlessly varied forms. No
less than 55 genera containing about 200 species are peculiar to
this sub-region, the Cerambycidze being much the most numerous.
Euryarthrum, Celosterna, Agelasta, and Astathes may be consi-
dered as most characteristic ; but to name the curious and in-
teresting forms would be to give a list of half the genera. For
the relations of the Longicorns of the Indo-Malay, and those of
the Austro-Malay region, the reader is referred to the chapter on
the distribution of insects in the succeeding part of this work.

Terrestrial Mollusca——The Philippine islands are celebrated
as being one of the richest parts of the world for land shells,
about 400 species being known. The other islands of the sub-
region are far less rich, not more than about 100 species having
yet been described from the whole of them. Helix and Buli-
mus both abound in species in the Philippines, whereas the
latter genus is very scarce in Borneo and Java. Ten genera of
Helicide inhabit the sub-region; Pfeifferia is found in the
Philippines and Moluccas, while the large genus Cochlostyla is
almost peculiar to the Philippines. Of the Operculata there are
representatives of 20 genera, of which Dermatoma and Pupi-
nella are peculiar, while Registoma and Callia extend to the
Australian region. Cyclophorus, Leptopoma, and Pupina are
perhaps the most characteristic genera.

CHAP. XII. ] THE ORIENTAL REGION. 345

The Zoological Relations of the Several Islands of the Indo-Malay
Sub-region.

Although we have grouped the Philippine islands with the
Indo-Malay sub-region, to which, as we shall see, they un-
doubtedly belong, yet most of the zoological characteristics we
have just sketched out, apply more especially to the other groups
of islands and the Malay peninsula. The Philippine islands
stand, to Malaya proper, in the same relation that Madagascar
does to Africa or the Antilles to South America; that is, they
are remarkable for the absence of whole families and genera
which everywhere characterise the remainder of the district.
They are, in fact, truly insular, while the other islands are really
continental in all the essential features of their natural history.
Before, therefore, we can conveniently compare the separate
islands of Malaya! with each other, we must first deal with the
Philippine group, showing in what its speciality consists, and
why it must be considered apart from the sub-region to which
it belongs.

Mammals of the Philippine Islands—The only mammalia re-
corded as inhabiting the Philippine Islands are the following :—

QuapRUMANA. 1. Macacus cynomoigus.

2. Cynopithecus niger. Dr. Semper doubts this being
a Philippine species.
LEMUROIDEA, 3. Tarsius spectrum.
Insectivora. 4. Galeopithecus philippinensis.
5. Tupaia (species). On Dr. Semper’s authority.
CARNIVORA. 6. Viverra tangalunga.
7. Paradoxurus philippensis.
Uneuata. 8. Sus (species). On Dr. Semper’s authority.
9, Cervus mariannus.
10. Cervus philippensis.
11. Cervus alfredi.
12. Bos (species). Wild cattle ; perhaps intro-
duced.
RODENTIA. 13. Phleomys cummingii.

14. Scuirus philippinensis.
Also 24 species, belonging to 17 genera, of bats.

1 As so many typical Malay groups are absent only from the Philippines, I
have adopted the term “ Malaya,” to show the distribution of these, using
the term “ Indo-Malaya” when the range of the group includes the
Philippines. This must be remembered when consulting the tables of dis-
tribution at the end of this chapter.

VoL. I.—24

346 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

The foregoing list, although small, contains an assemblage of
species which are wholly Oriental in character, and several of
which (Zarsius, Galeopithecus, Tupaia) are characteristic and
highly peculiar Malayan forms. At the same time these islands
are completely separated from the rest of Malaya by the total
absence of Semnopithecus, Hylobates, Felis, Helarctos, Rhinoceros,
Manis, and other groups constantly found in the great Indo-
Malay islands and peninsula of Malacca. We find apparently
two sets of animals: a more ancient series, represented by the
deer, Galeopithecus, and squirrel, in which the species are distinct
from any others; and a more recent series, represented by
Macacus cynomolgus, and Viverra tangalunga, identical with
common Malayan animals. The former indicate the earliest
period when these volcanic islands were connected with some
part of the Malayan sub-region, and they show that this was
not geologically remote, since no peculiar generic types have
been preserved or differentiated. The latter may indicate either
the termination of the period of union, or merely the effects of
introduction by man. The reason why a larger number of
mammalian forms were not introduced and established, was
probably because the union was effected only with some small
islands, and from these communicated to other parts of the
archipelago ; or it may well be that later subsidences extin-
guished some of the forms that had established themselves.

Lirds of the Philippine Islands.—These have been carefully
investigated by Viscount Walden, in a paper read before the
Zoological Society of London in 1873, and we are thus furnished
with ample information on the relations of this important
portion of the fauna.

The total number of birds known to inhabit the Philippines
is 219, of which 106 are peculiar. If, however, following our
usual plan, we take only the land-birds, we find the numbers
to be 159 species, of which 100 are peculiar ; an unusually large
proportion for a group of islands so comparatively near to
various parts of the Oriental and Australian regions. The
families of birds which are more especially characteristic of the
Indo-Malay sub-region are about 28 in number, and examples

CHAP. XII. ] THE ORIENTAL REGION. 347

- of all these are found in the Philippines except four, viz., Cin-
clidee, Phyllornithidee, Eurylemidx, and Podargide. The only
Philippine families which are, otherwise, exclusively Austro-
Malayan are, Cacatuidee and Megapodiide. Yet although the
birds are unmistakably Malayan, as a whole, there are, as in
the mammalia (though in a less degree), marked deficiencies of
most characteristic Malayan forms. Lord Walden gives a list
of no less than 69 genera thus absent ; but it will be sufficient
here to mention such wide-spread and specially Indo-Malay
groups as,—Hurylemus, Nyctiornis, Arachnothera, Geocichla,
Malacopteron, Timalia, Pomatorhinus, Phyllornis, Lora, Criniger,
Enicurus, Chaptia, Techitrea, Dendrocitta, Eulabes, Paleornis,
Miglyptes, Tiga, and Euplocamus. These deficiencies plainly
show the isolated character of the Philippine group, and imply
that it has never formed a part of that Indo-Malayan extension
of the continent which almost certainly existed when the pecu-
liar Malayan fauna was developed ; or that, if it has been so
united, it has been subsequently submerged and broken up to
such an extent, as to cause the extinction of many of the absent
types.

It appears from Lord Walden’s careful analysis, that 31 of the
Philippine species occur in the Papuan sub-region, and 47 in
Celebes ; 69 occur also in India, and 75 in Java. This last fact
is curious, since Java is the most remote of the Malayan islands,
but it is found to arise almost wholly from the birds of that
island being better known, since only one species, Yantholema
rosea, is confined to the Philippine Islands and Java.

The wading and swimming birds are mostly of wide-spread
forms, only 6 out of the 60 species being peculiar to the Philippine
archipelago. Confining ourselves to the land-birds, and com-
bining several of the minutely subdivided genera of Lord Wal-
den’s paper so as to agree with the arrangement adopted in this
work, we find that there are 112 genera of land-birds repre-
sented in the islands. Of these, 50 are either cosmopolitan, of
wide range, or common to the Oriental and Australian regions,
and may be put aside as affording few indications of geographical
affinity. Of the remaining 62 no less than 40 are exclusively

348 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

or mainly Oriental, and most of them are genera which range
widely over the region, only two (Philentoma and Rollulus) being
exclusively Malayan, and two others (Megalurus and Malacocireus)
more especially Indian or continental. Five other genera, though
having a wide range, are typically Palearctic, and have reached
the islands through North China. They are, Monticola, Acro-
cephalus, Phylloscopus, Calliope, and Passer ; the two first having
extended their range southward into the Moluccas. The pecu-
liarly Australian genera are only 12, the majority being charac-
teristic Papuan and Moluccan forms; such as—Campephaga,
Alcyone, Cacatua, Tanygnathus, Ptilopus, Janthenas, Phlogenas,
and Megapodius. One is peculiar to Celebes (Prioniturus); one °
to the Papuan group (Cyclopsitta) ; and one is chiefly Australian
(Gerygone). The beautiful little parroquets forming the genus
Loriculus, are characteristic of the Philippines, which possess 5
species, a larger number than occurs in any other group of
islands, though they range from India to New Guinea. There re-
main six peculiar genera—fhabdornis, an isolated form of creep-
ers (Certhiidee): Gymmnops, a remarkable bareheaded bird belong-
ing to the starlings (Sturnidz); Dasylophus, and Lepidogrammus,
remarkable genera of cuckoos (Cuculidee); Penelopides, a pecul-
iar hornbill, and Phapitreron, a genus of pigeons. Besides these
there are four other types (here classed as sub-genera, but con-
sidered to be distinct by Lord Walden) which are peculiar to
the Philippines. These are Pseudoptynx, an owl of the genus
Athene ; Pseudolalage, a sub-genus of Lalage ; Zeocephus, a sub-
genus of Tchitrea ; and Ptilocolpa, included under Carpophaga.
When we look at the position of the Philippine group, con-
nected by the Bashee islands with Formosa, by Palawan and the
Sooloo archipelago with Borneo, and by the Tulour’ and other
islets with the Moluccas and Celebes, we have little difficulty in
accounting for the peculiarities of its bird fauna. The absence
of a large number of Malayan groups would indicate that the
actual connection with Borneo, which seems necessary for the
introduction of the Malay types of mammalia, was not of long
duration ; while the large proportion of wide-spread continental
genera of birds would seem to imply that greater facilities had

CHAP, XII. ] THE ORIENTAL REGION. 349

once existed for immigration from Southern China, perhaps by
a land connection through Formosa, at which time the ancestors
of the peculiar forms of deer entered the country. It may in-
deed be objected that our knowledge of these islands is far
too imperfect to arrive at any satisfactory conclusions as to their
former history; but although many more species no doubt
remain to be discovered, experience shows that the broad cha-
racters of a fauna are always determined by a series of collections
made by different persons, at various localities, and at different
times, even when more imperfect than those of the Philippine
birds really are. The isolated position, and the volcanic struc-
ture of the group, would lead us to expect them to be somewhat
less productive than the Moluccas, close to the rich and varied
Papuan district,—or than Celebes, with its numerous indications
of an extensive area and great antiquity; and taking into account
the excessive poverty of its mammalhan fauna, which is certain
to be pretty well known, I am inclined to believe that no future
discoveries will materially alter the character of Philippine
ornithology, as determined from the materials already at our
command.

Java.—Following the same plan as we have adopted in first
discussing the Philippine islands, and separating them from the
body of the sub-region on account of special peculiarities, we
must next take Java, as possessing marked individuality, and as
being to some extent more isolated in its productions than the
remaining great islands.

Java is well supplied with indigenous mammalia, possessing
as nearly as can be ascertained 55 genera and 90 species. None
of these genera are peculiar, and only about 5 of the species,
—3 quadrumana, a deer and a wild pig. So far then there is
nothing remarkable in its fauna, but on comparing it with that of
the other great islands, viz., Borneo and Sumatra, and the Malay
peninsula, we find an unmistakable deficiency of characteristic
forms, the same in kind as that we have just commented on in
the case of the Philippines, though much less in degree. First,
taking genera which are found in all three of the above-named

350 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

localities and which must therefore be held to be typical Ma-
layan groups, the following are absent from Java: Viverra,
Gymnopus, Lutra, Helarctos, Tapirus, Elephas, and Gymnura ;
while of those known to occur in two, and which, owing to our
imperfect knowledge, may very probably one day be discovered in
the third, the following are equally wanting : Simia, Siamanga,
Hemigalea, Paguma, Rhinosciwrus, and Rhizomys. It may be
said this is only negative evidence, but in the case of Java it is
much more, because this island is not only the best known of
any in the archipelago, but there is perhaps no portion of
British India of equal extent so well known. It is one of the
oldest of the Dutch possessions and the seat of their colonial
government ; good roads traverse it in every direction, and ex-
perienced naturalists have been resident im various parts of
it for years together, and have visited every mountain and every
forest, aided by bands of diligent native collectors. We
should be almost as likely to find new species of mammalia
in Central Europe as in Java; and therefore the absence of
such animals as the Malay bear, the elephant, tapir, gymnura,
and even less conspicuous forms, must be accepted as a
positive fact.

In the other islands there are still vast tracts of forest in the
hands of natives and utterly unexplored, and any similar absence
in their case will prove little; yet on making the same com-
parison in the case of Borneo, the most peculiar and the least
known of the other portions of the sub-region, we find only
2 genera absent which are found in the three other divisions,
and only 3 which are found in two others. <A fact to be noted
also is, that the only genus found in Java but not in other parts
of the sub-region (Helictis) occurs again in North India; and
that some Javan species, as Rhinoceros javanicus, and Lepus kur-
gosa occur again in the Indo-Chinese sub-region, but not in the
Malayan.

Among the birds we meet with facts of a similar import ;
and though the absence of certain types from Java is not quite
so certain as among the mammalia, this is more than balanced
by the increased number of such deficiencies, so that if a few

CHAP. XII. THE ORIENTAL REGION. 351

should be proved to be erroneous, the main result will remain
unaltered.

Java possesses about 270 species of land birds, of which about
40 are peculiar to it. There are, however, very few peculiar
genera, Laniellus, a beautiful spotted shrike, being the most
distinct, while Cochoa and Psaltria are perhaps not different from
their Indian allies. The island has however a marked indivi-
duality in two ways—in the absence of characteristic Malayan
types, and in the presence of a number of forms not yet found
in any of the other Malay islands, but having their nearest allies
in various parts of the Indo-Chinese sub-region. The following
16 genera are all found in Malacca, Sumatra, and Borneo,
but are absent from Java: WSetornis, Temnurus, Dendrocitta,
Corydon, Calyptomena, Venilia, Reinwardtipicus, Caloramphus,
Rhinortha, Nyctiornis, Cranorhinus, Psittinus, Polyplectron, Ar-
gusianus, Euplocamus, and Rollulus. The following 9 are known
from two of the above localities, and will very probably be
found in the third, but are absent from, and not likely to
occur in, Java: Trichizxos, Hupetes, Melanochlora, Chaptia, Pity-
riasis, Lyncornis, Carpococcyx, Poliococcyx, and Rhinoplax. We
have thus 25 typically Malayan genera which are not known
to occur in Java.

The following genera, on the other hand, do not occur in any
of the Malayan sub-divisions except Java, and they all oceur
again, or under closely allied forms, in the Indo-Chinese sub-
region: Brachypteryx (allied species in Himalayas) ; Zoothera
allied species in Aracan); Notodela (allied species in Pegu);
Pnoépyga (allied species in Himalayas) ; AJlotrius (allied species
in the Himalayas); Cochoa (allied species in the Himalayas) ;
Crypsirhina (allied species in Burmah); Lstri/da (allied species
in India) ; Psaltria (allied genus—Agithaliscws—in Himalayas) ;
Pavo muticus and Harpactes oreskios (same species in Siam
and Burmah); Cecropis striolata (same species in Java and
Formosa, and allied species in India).

Here we have 12 instances of very remarkable distribution,
and considering that there are nearly as many birds known from
Sumatra and Borneo as from Java, and considerably more from

352 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PARTY III.

the Malay peninsula, it is not likely that many of these well
marked forms will be discovered in these countries.

There are also a considerable number of species of birds
common to Malacca, Sumatra, and Borneo, but represented in
Java by distinct though closely allied species. Such are,—

Venilia malaccensis (represented in Java by) V. miniata.
Drymocataphus nigrocapitatus ,, 9 D. capistratus.
Malacopteron coronatum 3 x M. rufifrons.
Irena cyanea Be = I. turcosa.
Ploceus baya 9 3 P. hypoxantha.
Loriculus galgulus a s L. pusillus,
Ptilopus jambu . " P. porphyreus.

Now if we look at our map of the region, and consider the
position of Java with regard to Borneo, Sumatra, and the Indo-
Chinese peninsula, the facts just pointed out appear most
anomalous and perplexing. First, we have Java and Sumatra
forming one continuous line of volcanoes, separated by a very
narrow strait, and with all the appearance of having formed one
continuous land; yet their productions differ considerably, and
those of Sumatra show the closest resemblance to those of
Borneo, an island ten times further off than Java and differing
widely in the absence of volcanoes or any continuous range of
lofty mountains. Then again, not only does Java differ from
these two, but it agrees with a country beyond them both—
a country from which they seem to have a much better chance
to have been supplied by immigration than Java has, and to
have (almost necessarily) participated, even more largely, in the
benefits of any means of transmission capable of reaching the
latter island. Yet more; whatever changes have occurred to
bring about the anomalous state of things that exists must have
been, zoologically and geologically, recent ; for the strange cross-
affinities between Java and the Indo-Chinese continent (in
which Sumatra and Borneo have not participated), as well as
that between Malacca, Sumatra, and Borneo (in which Java has
not participated) are exhibited, in many cases by community of
species, in others by the presence of very closely allied forms
of the same genera, of mammalia and birds. Now we know that

CHAP, XII] THE ORIENTAL REGION. 353

these higher animals become replaced by allied species much
more rapidly than the mollusca; and it is also pretty certain
that the modification by which this replacement is effected
takes place more rapidly when the two sets of individuals are
isolated from each other, and especially when they are restricted
to islands, where they are necessarily subject to distinct and
pretty constant conditions, both physical and organic. It
becomes therefore almost a certainty, that Siam and Java on
the one hand, and Sumatra, Borneo, and Malacca on the other
must have been brought into some close connexion, not earlier
than the newer Plocene period; but while the one set of
countries were having their meeting, the other must have been
by some means got out of the way. Before attempting to
indicate the mode by which this might have been effected in
accordance with what we know of the physical geography,
geology, and vegetation of the several islands, it will be as well
to complete our sketch of their zoological relations to each
other, so as ascertain with,some precision, what are the facts
of distribution which we have to explain.

Malacca, Sumatra, and Borneo.—After having set apart the
Philippine Islands and Java, we have remaining two great
islands and a peninsula, which, though separated by con-
siderable arms of the sea, possess a fauna of wonderful uni-
formity having all the typical Malayan features in their full
development. Their unity is indeed so complete, that we can
find hardly any groups of sufficient importance by which to
differentiate them from each other; and we feel no confidence
that future discoveries may not take away what speciality they
possess. One after another, species or genera once peculiar to
Borneo or Sumatra have been found elsewhere; and this has
gone to such an extent in birds, that hardly a peculiar genus
and very few peculiar species are left in either island. Borneo
however is undoubtedly the most peculiar. It possesses three
genera of Mammalia not found elsewhere: Cynogale, a curious
carnivore allied to the otters; with Dendrogale and Ptilocerus,
small insectivora allied to Zupaia. It has Simia, the Orang-

354 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. (PARTY IIT,

utan, and Paguma, one of the Viverride, in common with
Sumatra ; as well as Rhinosciwrus, a peculiar form of squirrel, and
Hemigalea, one of the Viverride, in common with Malacca.
Sumatra has only one genus not found in any other Malayan
district—Nemorhedus, a form of antelope which occurs again
in North India. It also has Siamanga in common with Malacca,
Mydaus with Java, and khizomys with India. The Malay Penin-
sula seems to have no peculiar forms of Mammalia, though
it is rich in all the characteristic Malay types.

The bats of the various islands have been very unequally
collected, 36 species being recorded from Java, 23 from Sumatra,
but only 16 each from Borneo and Malacca, Leaving these out
of consideration, and taking into account the terrestrial mam-
mals only, we find that Java is the poorest in species, while
Borneo, Sumatra, and Malacca are tolerably equal; the numbers
being 55, 62, 66, and 65 respectively. Of these we find that
the species confined to each island or district are (in the same
order) 6, 16, 5, and 6. It thus appears that Borneo is, in its
mammalia, the most isolated and peculiar ; next comes Sumatra,
and then Malacca and Java, as shown by the following table.

Peculiar Peculiar

Genera. Species,
Borneo ... See ae 4 Aap eae ape 16
Sumatra ; Ba 1 a siete ae 5
Malacca Ae ee 0) cae Safe eee 6
Java 0) 6

This result differs from that which we have arrived at by the
more detailed consideration of the fauna of Java; and it serves
to show that the estimate of a country by the number of its
peculiar genera and species alone, may not always represent its
true zoological importance or its most marked features. Java,
as we have seen, is differentiated from the other three districts
by the absence of numerous types common to them all, and by
its independent continental relations. Borneo is also well dis-
tinguished by its peculiar genera and specific types, yet it is at
the same time more closely related to Sumatra and Malacca
than is Java. The two islands have evidently had a very
different history, which a detailed knowledge of their geology

CHAP. XII.] THE ORIENTAL REGION. 355
a
would alone enable us to trace. Should we ever arrive at a
fair knowledge of the physical changes that have resulted in
the present condition, we shall almost certainly find that many
of the differences and anomalies of their existing fauna and
flora will be accounted for.

In Birds we hardly find anything to differentiate Borneo and
Sumatra in any clear manner. Pityriasis and Carpococcyx, once
thought peculiar to the former, are now found also in the latter ;
and we have not a single genus left to characterize Borneo except
Schwaneria a peculiar fly-catcher, and Indicator, an African and
Indian group not known to occur elsewhere in the Malay
sub-region. Sumatra as yet alone possesses Psilopogon, a remark-
able form of barbet, but we may well expect that it will be soon
found in the interior of Borneo or Malacca; it also has Bereni-
cornis, an African form of hornbill. The Malay Peninsula
appears to have no genus peculiar to it, but it possesses
some Chinese and Indian forms which do not pass into the
islands. As to the species, our knowledge of them is at present
very imperfect. The Malay Peninsula is perhaps the best
known, but it is probable that both Sumatra and Borneo are
quite as rich in species. With the exception of the genera
noted above, and two or three others as yet found in two islands
only, the three districts we are now considering may be said to
have an almost identical bird-fauna, consisting largely of the
same species and almost wholly of these together with closely
allied species of the same genera. There are no well-marked
groups which especially characterise one of these islands rather
than the other, so that even the amount of speciality which
Borneo undoubtedly exhibits as regards mammalia, is only
faintly shown by its birds. The Pittidee may perhaps be named
as the most characteristic Bornean group, that island possessing
six species, three of which are peculiar to it and are among the
most beautiful birds of an unusually beautiful family. Yet Suma-
tra possesses two peculiar, and hardly less remarkable species.

In other classes of vertebrates, in insects, and in land-shells,
our knowledge is far too imperfect to allow of our making any
useful comparison between the faunas.

356 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART IIL

Banca.—We must, however note the fact of peculiar species
occurring in Banca, a small island close to Sumatra, and thus
offering another problem in distribution. A squirrel (Sciwrus
bangkanus) is allied to three species found in Malacca, Sumatra,
and Borneo respectively, but quite as distinct from them all as
they are from each other. More curious are the two species of
Pitta peculiar to Banca; one, Pitta megarhynchus, is allied to
the P. brachyurus, which inhabits the whole sub-region and ex-
tends to Siam and China, but differs from it in its very large bill
and differently coloured head; the other, P. bangkanus, is allied
to P. cucullatus, which extends from Nepal to Malacca, and to
P. sordidus, which inhabits both Borneo and Sumatra as well as
the Philippines.

We have here, on a small scale, a somewhat similar problem
to that of Java, and as this is comparatively easy of solution we
will consider it first. Although, on the map, Banca is so very
close to Sumatra, the observer on the spot at once sees that the
proximity has been receutly brought about. The whole south-
east coast of Sumatra is a great alluvial plain, hardly yet raised
above the sea level, and half flooded in the wet season. It is
plainly a recent formation, caused by the washing down into a
shallow sea of the débris from the grand range of volcanic
mountains 150 miles distant. Banca, on the other hand is,
though low, a rugged and hilly island, formed almost wholly of
ancient rocks of apparently volcanic origin, and closely resem-
bling parts of the Malay Peninsula and the intervening chain of
small islands. There is every appearance that Banca once
formed the extremity of the Peninsula, at which time it would
probably have been separated from Sumatra by 50 or 100 miles
of sea. Its productions should, therefore, most resemble those of
Singapore and Malacca, and the few peculiar species it possesses
will be due to their isolation in a small tract of country, sur-
rounded by a limited number of animal and vegetable forms, and
subject to the influence of a peculiar soil and climate. The
parent species existing in such large tracts as Borneo or Suma-
tra, subjected to more varied conditions of soil, climate,
vegetation, food, and enemies, would preserve, almost or quite

CHAP, XII. ] THE ORIENTAL REGION. 357

unchanged, the characteristics which had been developed under
nearly identical conditions when the great island formed part
of the continent. Geology teaches us that similar changes in
the forms of the higher vertebrates have taken place during the
Post-Tertiary epoch ; and there are other reasons for believing
that, under such conditions of isolation as in Banca, the
change may have required but a very moderate period, even
reckoned in years, We will now return to the more difficult
problem presented by the peculiar continental relations of Java,
as already detailed.

Probable Recent Geographical Changes in the Indo-Malay
Islands.—Although Borneo is by far the largest of the Indo-
Malay islands, yet its physical conformation is such that, were
a depression to occur of one or two thousand feet, it would be
reduced to a smaller continuous area than either Sumatra or
Java. Except in its northern portion it possesses no lofty
mountains, while alluvial valleys of great extent penetrate far
into its interior. A very moderate depression, of perhaps 500
feet, would convert it into an island shaped something like Cele-
bes ; and its mountains are of so small an average elevation, and
consist so much of isolated hills and detached ranges, that a
depression of 2,000 feet would almost certainly break it up into
a group of small islands, with a somewhat larger one to the
north. Sumatra (and to a less extent Java) consists of an almost
continuous range of lofty mountains, connected by plateaus from
3,000 to 4,000 feet high ; so that although a depression of 2,000
feet would greatly diminish their size, it would probably leave
the former a single island, while the latter would be separated
into two principal islands of still considerable extent. The en-
ormous amount of volcanic action in these two islands, and the
great number of conical mountains which must have been slowly
raised, chiefly by ejected matter, to the height of 10,000 and
12,000 feet, and whose shape indicates that they have been for-
med above water, renders it almost certain that for long periods
they have not undergone submersion to any considerable extent.
In Borneo, however, we have no such evidences. No volcano,

-

358 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

active or extinct, is known in its entire area; while extensive
beds of coal of tertiary age, in every part of it, prove that it has
been subject to repeated submersions, at no distant date geolo-
gically. An indication, if not a proof, of still more recent sub-
mersion is to be found in the great alluvial valleys which on
the south and south-west extend fully 200 miles inland, while
they are to a less degree a characteristic feature all round the
island. These swampy plains have been formed by the combined
action of rivers and tides; and they point clearly to an immedi-
ately preceding state of things, when that which is even now
barely raised above the ocean, was more or less sunk below it.

These various indications enable us to claim, as an admissible
and even probable supposition, that at some epoch during the
Pliocene period of geology, Borneo, as we now know it, did not
exist ; but was represented by a mountainous island at its present
northern extremity, with perhaps a few smaller islets to the
south. We thus have a clear opening from Java to the Siamese
Peninsula; and as the whole of that sea is less than 100 fathoms
deep, there is no difficulty in supposing an elevation of land
connecting the two together, quite independent of Borneo on the
one hand and Sumatra on the other. This union did not prob-
ably last long; but it was sufficient to allow of the introduction
into Java of the Rhinoceros javanicus, and that group of Indo-
Chinese and Himalayan species of mammalia and birds which
it alone possesses. When this ridge had disappeared by sub-
sidence, the next elevation occurred a little more to the east,
and produced the union of many islets which, aided by sub-
aerial denudation, formed the present island of Borneo. It is
probable that this elevation was sufficiently extensive to unite
Borneo for a time with the Malay Peninsula and Sumatra, thus
helping to produce that close resemblance of genera and even of
species, which these countries exhibit, and obliterating much
ot their former speciality, of which, however, we have still
some traces in the long-nosed monkey and Peilocerus of
Borneo, and the considerable number of genera both of mam-
malia and birds confined to two only out of the three divisions
of typical Malaya. The subsidence which again divided these

a

CHAP. XII.] THE ORIENTAL REGION. 359

countries by arms of the sea rather wider than at present,
might have left Banca isolated, as already referred to, with its
proportion of the common fauna to be, in a few instances,
subsequently modified.

Thus we are enabled to understand how the special relations
of the species of these islands to each other may have been
brought about. To account for their more deep-seated and
general zoological features, we must go farther back.

Probable Origin of the Malayan Fauna.—The typical Malayan
fauna is essentially an equatorial one, and must have been
elaborated in an extensive equatorial area. This ancient land
almost certainly extended northward over the shallow sea as far
as the island of Palawan, the Paracels shoals and even Hainan.
To the east, it may at one time have included the Philippines
and Celebes, but not the Moluccas. To the south it was limited
by the deep sea beyond Java. It included all Sumatra and the
Nicobar islands, and there is every reason to believe that it
stretched out also to the west so as to include the central peak
of Ceylon, the Maldive isles, and the Cocos islands west of
Sumatra. We should then have an area as extensive as South
America to 15° south latitude, and well calculated to develop
that luxuriant fauna and flora which has since spread to the
Himalayas. The submergence of the western half of this area
(leaving only a fragment in Ceylon) would greatly diminish the
number of animals and perhaps extinguish some peculiar types;
but the remaining portion would still form a compact and exten-
Sive district, twice as large as the peninsula of India, over the
whole of which a uniform Malayan fauna would prevail. The
first important change would be the separation of Celebes ; and
» his was probably effected by a great subsidence, forming the deep
strait that now divides that island from Borneo. During the
process Celebes itself was no doubt greatly submerged, leaving
only a few islands in which were preserved that remnant of the
ancient Malayan fauna that now constitutes one of its most
striking and anomalous features. The Philippine area would
next be separated, and perhaps be almost wholly submerged ; or

360 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART II,

broken up into many small voleanic islets in which a limited
number of Malayan types alone survived. Such a condition of
things will account for the very small variety of mammalia com-
pared with the tolerably numerous genera of birds, that now
characterise its fauna; while both here and in Celebes we find
some of the old Malayan types preserved, which, in the extended
area of the Sunda Isles have been replaced by more dominant
forms.

The next important change would be the separation of Java;
and here also no doubt a considerable submergence occurred,
rendering the island an unsuitable habitation for the various
Malay types whose absence forms one of its conspicuous features.
It has since remained permanently separated from the other
islands, and has no doubt developed some peculiar species, while
it may have preserved some ancient forms which in the larger
area have become changed. From the fact that a number of its
species are confined either to the western or the eastern half of -
the island, it is probable that it long continued as two islands,
which have become united at a comparatively recent period.
It has also been subjected to the immigration of Indo-Chinese
forms, as already referred to in the earlier par’ of this sketch.

We have thus shown how the main zoological features of the
several sub-divisions of the Malayan sub-region may be
accounted for, by means of a series of suppositions as to past
changes which, though for the most part purely hypothetical,
are always in accordance with what we know both of the
physical geography and the zoology of the districts in question
and those which surround them. It may also be remarked, that
we know, with a degree of certainty which may be called absolute,
that alternate elevation and subsidence is the normal state of
things all over the globe; that it was the rule in the earliest
geological epochs, and that it has continued down to the
historical era. We know too, that the amount of elevation and
subsidence that can be proved to have occurred again and again
in the same area, is often much greater than is required for the
changes here speculated on,—while the time required for such
changes is certainly less than that necessitated by the changes

CHAP. XII. } THE ORIENTAL REGION. 361

of specific and generic forms which have coincided with, and been
to a large extent dependent on them. We have, therefore, true
causes at work, and our only suppositions have been as to how
those causes could have brought about the results which we
see; and however complex and unlikely some of the supposed
changes may seem to the reader, the geologist who has made a
study of such changes, as recorded in the crust of the earth,
will not only admit them to be probable, but will be inclined
to believe that they have really been far more complex and
more unexpected than any supposition we can make about
them.

There is one other external relation of the Malayan fauna
about which it may be necessary to say a few words. I have
supposed the greatest westward extension of the Malayan area
to be indicated by the Maldive islands, but some naturalists
would extend it to include Madagascar in order to account for
the range of the Lemuride. Such an extension would, however,
render it difficult to explain the very small amount of corre-
spondence with a pervading diversity, between the Malayan and
Malagasy faunas. It seems more reasonable to suppose an
approximation of the two areas, without actual union having
ever occurred. This approximation would have allowed the
interchange of certain genera of birds, which are common to
the Oriental Region and the Mascarene islands, but it would
have been too recent to account for the diffusion of the lemurs
which belong to distinct genera and even distinct families. This
probably dates back to a much earlier period, when the lemurine
type had a wide range over the northern hemisphere. Sub-
jected to the competition of higher forms, these imperfectly
developed groups have mostly died out, except a few isolated
examples, chiefly found in islands, and a few groups in Africa.

In our discussion of the origin of the Ethiopian fauna, we
have supposed that a close connection once existed between
Madagascar and Ceylon. This was during a very early tertiary
epoch ; and if, long after it had ceased and the fauna of Ceylon
and South India had assumed somewhat more of their present
character, we suppose the approximation or union of Ceylon

Vou. I.—25

362 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

and Malaya to have taken place, we shall perhaps be able to
account for most of the special affinities they present, with the
Jeast amount of simultaneous elevation of the ocean bed; which
it must always be remembered, requires a corresponding de-
pression elsewhere to balance it.

Concluding Remarks on the Oriental Region.—We have already
so fully discussed the internal and external relations of the
several sub-regions, that little more need be said. The rich and
varied fauna which inhabited Europe at the dawn of the ter-
tiary period,—as shown by the abundant remains of mammalia
wherever suitable deposits of Eocene age have been discovered,—
proves, that an extensive Palearctic continent then existed ;
and the character of the flora and fauna of the Eocene deposits
is so completely tropical, that we may be sure there was then no
barrier of climate between it and the Oriental region. At that
early period the northern plains of Asia were probably under
water, while the great Thibetan plateau and the Himalayan range,
had not risen to more than a moderate height, and would have
supported a luxuriant sub-tropical flora and fauna. The Upper
Miocene deposits of northern and central India, and Burmah,
agree in their mammalian remains with those of central and
southern Europe, while closely allied forms of elephant, hyzena,
tapir, rhinoceros, and Chalicotherium have occurred in North
China; leading us to conclude that one great fauna then
extended over much of the Oriental and Palearctic regions.
Perim island at the mouth of the Red Sea, where similar
remains are found, probably shows the southern boundary of
this part of the old Palearctic region in the Miocene period.
Towards the equator there would, of course, be some peculiar
groups; but we can hardly doubt, that, in that wonderful time
when even the lands that stretched out furthest towards the
pole, supported a luxuriant forest vegetation, substantially one
fauna ranged over the whole of the great eastern continent of the
northern hemisphere. During the Pliocene period, however, a
progressive change went on which resulted in the complete
differentiation of the Oriental and Palearctic faunas. The

CHAP. XII. ] THE ORIENTAL REGION. 363

causes of this change were of two kinds. There was a great
geographical and physical revolution effected by the elevation
of the Himalayas and the Thibetan plateau, and, probably at
the same time, the northward extension of the great Siberian
plains. This alone would produce an enormous change of
climate in all the extra-tropical part of Asia, and inevitably
lead to a segregation of the old fauna into tropical and tem-
perate, and a modification of the latter so as to enable it to
support a climate far more severe than it had previously known.
But it is almost certain that, concurrently with this, there was
a change going on of a cosmical nature, leading to an alteration
of the climate of the northern hemisphere from equable to
extreme, and culminating in that period of excessive cold which
drove the last remnants of the old sub-tropical fauna beyond
the limits of the Palearctic region. From that time, the Oriental
and the Ethiopian regions alone contained the descendants of many
of the most remarkable types which had previously flourished
over all Europe and Asia; but the early history of these two
regions, and the peculiar equatorial types developed in each,
sufficiently separate them, as we have already shown. The
Malayan sub-region is that in which characteristic Oriental
types are now best developed, and where the fundamental con-
trast of the Oriental, as compared with the Ethiopian and
Palearctic regions, is most distinctly visible.

364 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

TABLES OF DISTRIBUTION.

In constructing these tables, showing the distribution of
various classes of animals in the Oriental region, the following
sources of information have been chiefly relied on, in addition
to the general treatises, monographs, catalogues, &c., used for
the compilation of the Fourth Part of this work.

Mammalia—dJerdon’s Indian Mammalia; Kelaart’s Fauna of
Ceylon; Horsfield and Moore’s Catalogue of the East India
Museum; Swinhoe’s Catalogue of Chinese Mammalia; S.
Miiller’s Zoology of the Indian Archipelago; Dr. J. E. Gray’s
list of Mammalia of the Malay Archipelago (Voyage of Sama-
rang) ; and papers. by Anderson, Blyth, Cantor, Gray, Peters,
Swinhoe, &c.

Lirds—Jerdon’s Birds. of India; Horsfield and Moore’s Cata-
logue ; Holdsworth’s list of Ceylon Birds ; Schlegel’s Catalogue
of the Leyden Museum ; Swinhoe on the Birds of China, For-
mosa, and Hainan; Salvadori on the Birds of Borneo; Lord
Walden on the Birds of the Philippine Islands; and papers
by Blyth, Blanford, Elwes, Elliot, Stoliczka, Sclater, Sharpe,
Swinhoe, Verreaux, and Lord Walden.

Reptiles—Giinther’s Reptiles of British India; papers by
same author, and by Dr. Stoliczka.

CHAP. XII.] THE ORIENTAL REGION. 365

TABLE I.
FAMILIES OF ANIMALS INHABITING THE ORIENTAL REGION.

EXPLANATION.

Names in italics show families peculiar to the region.

Numbers correspond with those in Part LV.

Names enclosed thus (...... ) barely enter the region, and are not considered really to
belong to it.

Sub-regions.
Order and Family. & S eI 3 3 ees é. | Range beyond the Region.
as rest Slee, | res S|
m*| § /5 |=3 |
MAMMALIA.

PRIMATES.

1. Simiide ... ... =o |p WeeAtrica

2. Semnopithecide | — | — | — | — | Tropical Africa

3. Cynopithecide | — | — | — | — All Africa, §, Palzarctic
6. Lemuride ... —= | — | — | Ethiopian.

7. Tarstide... ... — | Celebes

CHIROPTERA.

9. Pteropide ...| — | — | — |.— | Ethiopian, Australian
11. Rhinolophide | — | — | — | — | The Eastern Hemisphere
12. Vespertilionide | — .| — | — | -- | Cosmopolite
13. Noctilionide ...| — | — | — | — | Tropical regions
INSECTIVORA.
14. Galeopithecide —
16. Tupatide ... ===
7. Erinaceide ...| — | — — Palearctic, S. Africa
Zale, dll) GE eae = Palearctic, Nearctic
22. Soricide ... ...| — | — | — | — | Palearctic, Ethiopian, N. America
CARNIVORA. |
23. Felide ... ...| — | — |— | — | All regions but Australian
25. Viverride ...| — | — | — | — | Ethiopian, S. Palearctic
27. Hyenide Plbaane Ethiopian, 8. Palearctic
28. Canide ... ...) — | — | — | — | Allregions but Australian [?]
29. Mustelide ...| — | — | — | — | All regions but Australian
31. Aluride... ... aa Palearctic

S20 Uraide wee ee] —— || —"'| —) | Palearetic, Nearctic, Chili
CETACEA. | Oceanic

SIRENIA. _ ;

42. Manatide ...| — | — | — | — | Ethiopian, N. Pacific
UNGULATA.

43, (Equide)... ...| — Palearctic, Ethiopian

366 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY.

Sub-regions.

Order and Family.

44, Tapiride...
45. Rinocerotide ... a
47. Suide ... ...| —|—|—
49, Tragulide ...| — | — | —
50. Cervide ... ...| — | — | —
52. Bovide . ...| —|—|—
53. Elephantide ...|’°— | — | —

RODENTIA.

55. Muride ... ...) — | — | —
56. Spalacide ... —_—
Ol. Sciuride’..2° 25.) ==) = |) —
67. Hystricide ...) — | — | —
70. Leporide ww | — | —| —

EDENTATA.
72. Manidide ...)| —|— |—

BIRDS.

PASSERES.

1. Turdide.., ...| — | —}]—
2. Sylviide... ...| — | — | —
3. Timaliide ...| — | — | —
4. Panuridee oe as
5. Cinclide... ...| — | — | —
6. Troglodytide... —
8. Certhiide wee | — —
9. Sittide ... f—t—J}—
10. Paride ... ...) —|]—|—
11. Liotrichide ... —
12, Phyllornithide | — | — | —
13. Pycnonotide ...| — | — | —
14, Oriolide... ...| — |—|—
15. Campephagidee | — | — | —
16. Dicruride ...| — | — | —
17. Muscicapide ...| — | — | —
18. Pachycephalidie —
19. Laniide ... ...} — | — | —
20. Corvide ... «..| — |— | —
23. Nectariniide ...| — | — | —
24. Diceide... ...| — | —}|—
30. Hirundinide ...| — | — | —
33. Fringillide ...| — | — | —
34. Ploceidee —|—|]—
35. Sturnide | — | —f]—
86. Artamide ...} — | — | —
37. Alaudidee wel] —f|—flo
38. Motacillide ...] — | — | —
43. Eurylemide ... —
47, Pittide ... ...| — | —] —

[PART III.

Range beyond the Region.

Neotropical

Ethiopian

Palearctic, Ethiopian, Neotropical

W. Africa

All regions but Ethiopian and Australian
All regions but Australian and Neotropical
Ethiopian

Cosmopolite, excl. Oceania
Palearctic, Ethiopian

All regions but Australian
S. Palearctic, Ethiopian
All regions but Australian

Ethiopian

Almost Cosmopolite

Almost Cosmopolite

Ethiopian, Australian

Palearctic

Not Ethiopian or Australian

American and Palearctic

Palearctic, Nearctic, Australian

Palearctic, Nearctic, Australian, Madagascar
The Eastern Hemisphere and North America

Ethiopian, Moluccas

The Fastern Hemisphere
Ethiopian, Australian
Ethiopian, Australian

The Eastern Hemisphere
Australian

The Eastern Hemisphere and North America
Cosmopolite

Ethiopian, Australian
Ethiopian, Australian!
Cosmopolite

All regions but Australian
Ethiopian, Australian

The Eastern Hemisphere
Australian

All regions but Neotropical
Cosmopolite

Ethiopian, Australian

CHAP. XII. ]

THE ORIENTAL REGION.

Order and Family.

PICARIA.

se Piciden 2s:

. Yungide

. Indicatoridee
. Megalemidee
. Cuculidee

. Coraciidee

. Meropidee

. Trogonide ...
. Alcedinide ...
. Bucerotide ...
. Upupide

. Podargidee

. Caprimulgide
. Cypselidee

IPSITTACT.

76.
78.

(Cacatuide) ...
Paleornithide

CoLUMB.

84. Columbide ...

GALLINE.
86. Pteroclide

87. Tetraonide ...

88. Phasianidze
89. Turnicidee

90. Megapodiide

ACCIPITRES.

94. Vulturide
96. Falconide

97. Pandionide ...
98. Strigide ... ...

GRALLA.

99:
100.
103.
104.
105.
106.
107.
113.
114.
115.
ibe

Rallide
Scolopacide ...
Parridz... ...
Glareolide ...
Charadriide ...
Otidide...
Gruide ..
Ardeidee
Plataleidee
Ciconiide ..
Phenicopteride

Sub-regions.

367

Range beyond the Region.

All regions but Australian
Palearctic

Ethiopian

Ethiopian, Neotropical
Cosmopolite

Ethiopian, Australian
Ethiopian, Australian
Neotropical, Ethiopian
Cosmopolite

Ethiopian, Austro-Malayan
Ethiopian, 8. Palearctic
Australian

Cosmopolite

Cosmopolite

Australian
Ethiopian, Austro-Malayan

Cosmopolite

Ethiopian, Paizarctic

Eastern Hemisphere and North America
Ethiopian, Palearctic, North America
Ethiopian, Australian, 8. Palearctic
Australian

All regions but Australian
Cosmopolite
Cosmopolite
Cosmopolite

Cosmopolite

Cosmopolite

Tropical regions

Eastern Hemisphere
Cosmopolite

Eastern Hemisphere

All regions but Neotropica
Cosmopolite

Almost Cosmopolite
Almost Cosmopolite

Ethiopian, Neotropical, S. Palearctic

368 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

Sub-regions.

Order and Family. Range beyond the Region.

ANSERES.

118. Anatide
119. Laride ...

120. Procellariide
121. Pelecanide ...

124. Podicipide
REPTILIA.

OPHIDIA.

. Typhlopide

. Uropeltide

. Colubride

Oo oP Oh

. Psammophidee

11. Dendrophide...

12. Dryiophide
13. Dipsadidee
14. Scytalide

15. Lycodontidee a
16. Amblycephalide

17. Pythonidee
18. Erycide ...

19. Acrochordide 6

20. Elapide ...

23. Hydrophide ...

24. Crotalide
25. Viperide

LACERTILIA.

30. Varanide
33. Lacertide
34. Zonuride
45. Scincide ...
48. Acontiads
49. Geckotidee
51. Agamidee

52. Chameleonidee

CROCODILIA.

54. Gavialidee
55. Crocodilide

CHELONIA.

57. Testudinide ...
59. Trionychide ...

60. Cheloniidee

. Tortricide... .. 2
. Xenopeltide ...

. Calamariide ...
. Oligodontide ...

. Homalopside ...

Cosmopolite
Cosmopolite
Cosmopolite
Cosmopolite
Cosmopolite

All regions but Nearctic
Austro-Malaya, 8. America
Celebes

All the warmer regions
S. America, Japan
Almost Cosmopolite

All the regions
Ethiopian, S. Palearctic

Ethiopian, Australian, Neotropical
Ethiopian, Neotropical
| Ethiopian, Australian, Neotropical

Tropical America

Ethiopian

Neotropical

The tropical regions, and California
Ethiopian, 8. Palearctic

Tropical regions, Japan, S. Carolina
Australian, Panama, Madagascar
America, EK. Palearctic

Ethiopian, Palearctic

Africa, Australia

The Eastern Hemisphere
America, S. Europe, Ethiopian
Almost Cosmopolite
Ethiopian, Moluccas

Almost Cosmopolite

The Eastern Hemisphere
Ethiopian

N. Australia
Ethiopian, Neotropical, N. Australia

All continents but Australia:
Japan, E. of N. America, Africa
Marine

CHAP. XII.j

Order and Family.

AMPHIBIA.
PSEUDOPAIDIA.

ie

Ceciliade

URODELA.

5.

Salamandride

ANOURA.

. Phryniscide

. Bufonidee

. Engystomide...
. Hylid so
. Polypedatide...
. Ranide ...

. Discoglossidx

1ae ..

FISHES.
(FRESHWATER).
ACANTHOPTERYGIL.

. Percide ...
. Scienide

33. Nandide

. Labyrinthici ...
. Luciocephalide
. Ophiocephalide
. Mastacembelide
. Chromide

PHYSOSTOMI.

. Siluride... ...
. Cyprinodontide

Cyprinide

. Osteoglossidee...
. Notopteride ...
. Symbranchide

INSECTS.

LEPIDOPTERA
(PART).
Divrni

(BUTTERFLIES. )

. Danaide ...
. Satyride...
. Elymniide
Morphidez
Acreide ...

$0 Dm go BH

_ Nymphalide ...

Ceylon.

Indo-
China.

Sub-regions.

THE ORIENTAL REGION.

Indo-
Malaya.

369

Range beyond the Region.

Ethiopian, Neotropical

North temperate zone

Ethiopian, Australian, Neotropical
All continents but Australia

All regions but Palearctic

All regions but Ethiopian
Neotropical and all other regions
Almost Cosmopolite

All regions but Nearctic

All regions but Australian

All regions but Australian

Neotropical
S. Africa, Moluccas

Ethiopian, Neotropical

All warm regions

S. Palearctic, Ethiopian, American
Not in $. America and Australia
All tropical regions

W. Africa

Australian (? Marine) Neotropical

All warm regions and to Canada
Cosmopolite

Ethiopian, Moluccas

Neotropical, Moluccas, and Polynesia
All tropical regions

Cosmopolite

370 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. : [PART II.

Sub-regions.
Order and Family. SiN as |faeaes | ‘cS Range beyond the Region.
o8| & |gelge
au| & | aal aa
amy boi ites ha
9. Libytheide — | — | — | — | Absent from Australia
10. Nemeobeide .. — | — | Not in Australia or Nearctic regions
13. Lycenide ...| — | — | — | — | Cosmopolite
14. Pieride ... — | — | — | — | Cosmopolite
15. Papilionide — | — | — | — | Cosmopolite
16. Hesperidee — | — | — | — | Cosmopolite
SPHINGIDEA.
17. Zygenide ...| — | — | — | — | Cosmopolite
19. Agaristide ...| — | — | — | — | Australian, Ethiopian
20. Uraniide «| — | — | — | — | All tropical regions
22. Ageriide ...| — | — | — | — | Absent from Australia
23. Sphingide ...| — | — | — | — | Cosmopolite

CHAP, XII.]

THE ORIENTAL REGION. 371

TABLE Il.

GENERA OF TERRESTRIAL MAMMALIA AND BIRDS INHABITING

THE ORIENTAL REGION.

EXPLANATION.

Names in italics show genera peculiar to the region.
Names inclosed thus (...) show genera which just enter the region, but are not considered

properly to belong to it.

Genera truly belonging to the region are numbered consecutively.

MAMMALIA.
Order, anys aud 38 Range within the Region. Range beyond the Region.
: 52
PRIMATES.
SIMIID2.
WE SUNIG * 2.5 2s 2 | Borneo and Sumatra
2. Hylobates... ... | 7 | Sylhet to Java and S. Ghina
3. Siamanga ... 1 | Malacca and Sumatra
SEMNOPITHECIDS.
4. Presbytes...... | 28 | Simla to Aracan and E. Thibet,} Moupin, Palearctic [2]
Ceylon, and Java
CYNOPITHECIDA.
5. Macacus ... ... | 22 | The whole region S. Palearctic
6. Cynopithecus ... | 1 | Philippines Celebes
(Sub-Order)
LEMUROIDEA.
LEMURID2.
7. Nycticebus 3 | E. Bengal to Java, and S. China
8. Loris 1 | Ceylon and 8S. India
TARSIIDE.
QENLIGTSIUS! 2. ves 1 Sumatra, Borneo and Philip- | N. Celebes
pines
CHIROPTERA.
PTEROPIDA.
10. Pteropus ... | 6 | The whole region Tropics of E. Hemisp.
11. Xantharpyia ... | 1 | The whole region Austro-Malaya, Ethiop.,
8. Palearctic
12. Cynopterus 3 | The whole region Tropical Africa
13. Megerops... ... 1 | Sumatra
14, Macroglossus . 1 | Java, Borneo, Philippines Austro-Malaya
15. Harpyia . 1 | Philippines Austro-Malaya
RHINOLOPHID. | | |
16. Aquias 2 | Nepal to Java

372

ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY.

Order, Family, and
Genus.

lyfe
18.
19}
20.

Phyllotis ...

Phyllorhina

. Asellia
. Petalia
. Colops
. Rhinopoma
. Megaderma
. Niycteris) <:.

VESPERTILIONIDS.

. Seotophilus
. Vespertilio
. Keriovula...
. Trilatitus
. Noctulina
. Miniopteris

. Murina
. Nycticejus

. Taphozous

. Myotis

aelecotusijee.
. Barbastellus
. Nyctophilus

NocriLiIoNnIpsA.
41. Chiromeles
42. Nyctinomus
INSECTIVORA.
GALEOPITHECIDA,

43. Galeopithecus ...

TUPAIIDA.

44. Tupaia
45. Hylomys ...
46. Ptilocerus...

ERINACEID.
47. Erinaceus...
48. Gymnura...
TALPIDA.

49. Talpa

SorIcIDz.
50. Sorex

Rhinolophus ...
Hipposideros ...

E Harpiocephalus

eps bo

bo

20

Range within the Region.

Philippines

The whole region
The whole region
Indo-Malay subregion

Java, Sumatra
Java

India (Bengal)
All India

The whole region
Jaya

The whole region

The whole region

The whole region
Indo-Malaya

Nepal to Philippines

Java, Philippines, and China

Himalayas to Java
All India

Java and Philippines
The whole region

Himalayas
Darjeeling
Himalayas
Mussoorie

Indo-Malaya, Siam
The whole region

Indo-Malay and Philippines,
excl. Java

S. and E. of India to Borneo
Tenasserim to Java and Borneo
Borneo

Hindostan and Formosa
Malacca, Sumatra, Borneo

Himalayas to Assam, & Formosa

The whole region

[PART III.

Range beyond the Region.

Warmer parts of E. Hem.

Austro-Malaya

Austro-Malaya, Tropical
Africa

Amboyna, Egypt

Egypt, Palestine
Ternate, N. Ethiopian
Ethiopian

Austral., Nearc., Neotrop.
Cosmopolite
S. Africa, N. China
2
2
8. Africa, S. Palearctic,
Australian
2
Trop. Africa, Temp. Amer.

Ethiop., Austro-Malayan,
Neotropical

Timor, S. Palearctic
Europe
Australian

Madagascar, America

Palearctic, S. Africa

Palearctic

All regions but Austral.
and 8. America

CHAP. XII.]

Order, Family, and
Genus.

CARNIVORA.
FELIDA.

51. Felis... as
(lynxe (Ps een ot
52. Cynelurus ... | 1

VIVERRIDA.

. Viverra

. Viverricula
. Prionodon
. Hemigalea
. Arctitis

. Paradoxurus ...
. Paguna ...
. Arctogale ...
. Cynogale ...
. Herpestes...
. Calogale ...
. Calictis

. Urva :
. Teniogale
- Onychogale

be ep ee ST EE OD CO Ht DD DO DD OD

HyYA&NIDA.
68. Hyena

en

CANID.
69. Canis...

70. Cuon
71. Vulpes

me EE DO

(Nyctereutes ... 1

MUvuSsTELID&.

. Martes

. Mustela

. Gymnopus

. Barangia

. Lutra

. Aonyx

. Arctonyz ...
(Meles ;

. Mydaus ...

. Mellivora...

. Helictis

He et et et et OT bb GO DO

AELURIDE.
82. lurus

URSIDA.
83. Ursus

84. Helarctos...
85. Melursus ...

He bo

THE ORIENTAL REGION.

Range within the Region.

The whole region
Central India)
S. and W. India

The whole region

India to China and Java
Nepal to Borneo and Java
Malacca and Borneo

Nepal to Sumatra and Java
The whole region

Nepal to Malaya and China
Tenasserim and Malaya
Borneo

The whole reg., excl. Philippines
India to Cambodjia

Ceylon ?

N. India

Central India

Ceylon

Hindostan, open country

All India
India to Java
All India

China)

India, Ceylon, Java, and China
Himalayas to Bhotan and China
Nepal to Borneo

Sumatra .

The whole region

N. India, Malaya

Nepal to Aracan

8. China)

Sumatra, Java

Hindostan

Nepal, Formosa, China & Java

E. Himalayas to E. Thibet

Himalayas to China

Range beyond the Region.

All regions but Austral.
Palearctic, Ethiopian
S. Palearctic, Ethiopian

Ethiopian, Moluccas

Ke Islands (? introduced)

S. Palearctic, Ethiopian
Ethiopian

S. Palearctic, Ethiopian

Almost Cosmopolite
All Continents but S.

America and Australia
Japan and Amoorland

Palearctic, Nearctic
Paleare., Ethiop., Neare.

Palearctic
W. andS. Africa
Palearctic genus

Ethiopian

Palearctic ?

Palearctic, Nearctic

Indo-Malaya
Ganges to Ceylon

374

ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY.

[PART Ill.

Order, Family, and
Genus.

No. of
Species

CETACEA.
DELPHINID.
86. Platanista

SIRENTA.
MANATID&.
87. Halicore

UNGULATA.
TAPIRIDA.
88. Tapirus ...

RHINOCEROTID#.
89. Rhinoceros

SUID.
90. Sus...

TRAGULIDS.
91. Tragulus

CERVIDS.

92. Cervus ...
93. Cervulus...
(Moschus...

Bovipz.
94. Bibos

95. Bubalus...
96. Portax -...
97. Gazella ...
98. Antilope...
99. Tetraceros
100. Nemorhedus
101. Capra

PROBOSCIDEA.
ELEPHANTIDA.
102. Elephas ...

RODENTIA.
Murip2&.

103. Mus peo G0
104. Acanthomys ...
105. Phleomys

106. Platacanthomys
107. Meriones

108. Spalacomys ...
109. Arvicola

DepoHeHo

Range within the Region.

Ganges to India

Coasts of W. India, Ceylon, and

Indo-Malaya

Malay Pen., Sumatra, Borneo

Nepal to Bengal, Siam, & Java

The whole region

India and Ceylon to Cambodja

and Java

The whole region
The whole region

Himalayas above 8,000 feet)

India to Burmah, Formosa, and

Java

N. and N. Central India

Peninsula of India

Deserts and plains of India

Open. country of India

Hilly districts all over India
E. Himalayas and Sumatra

Neilgherries

India to Siam, Sumatra & Borneo

The whole region
India
Philippines

S. W. India
India and Ceylon
India

Himalayas

Range beyond the Region.

E. Africa, N. Australia

Neotropical
Ethiopian

Palearc., Austro-Malaya

Paleearc., Amer., Moluc.

Central Asia, Palearctic

Ethiopian, S. Palearctic

Palearctic deserts

N. China and Japan
Palearctic, Nearctic

Ethiopian

The E. Hemisphere
Ethiopian, Australian

Palearctic, Ethiopian

Palearctic, Nearctic

CHAP. XII. ]

Order, Family, and

Genus.
SPALACIDA.

110. Rhizomys

ScIURIDA.
111. Sciurus ...

112. Sciuropterus ...

113. Pteromys
(Arctomys

HystTRIcIpa&,
114. Hystrix ...
115. Atherura
116. <Acanthion
LEPORIDA.
117. Lepus
ENDENTATA.
MANIDID&A,
118. Manis

PASSERES.
TURDIDA,

. Brachypteryx ...

ib
2. Oreocincla

. Turdus
- Geocichla...

. Oroceetes ...

3
4
5. Monticola
6
7. Zoothera ...

SYLVIID.

8. , Orthotomus
OEP Tinian es.
10.) Drymeeca
11.) Cisticola ...
12. (Sia
13. | Megalurus

14. { Acrocephalus ns

| (Dumeticola .

lo ole 2)

ob (Js) Oo

THE ORIENTAL REGION. 375

Range within the Region. Range beyond the Region.

Nepal to Canton, Malacca and} Abyssinia
Sumatra

The whole region Cosmop., excl. Austral.
region

India, and Ceylon to Java,| N. and E. Palearctic
Formosa

India & Ceylon to Borneo, Java,
Formosa

W. Himalayas above 8,000 ft.)

Japan

Palearctic and Nearctic

India and Ceylon, to Malacca &| S. Palearctic, Ethiopian
8. China

India to Malaya

Nepal to Borneo and Java

West Africa

India and Ceylon to 8. China and} All regions but Austral.
Formosa

Nepal to Ceylon, S, China and} Ethiopian
Java

BIRDS.

Himalayas, Ceylon and Java

N. W. Himalayas to E. Thibet! Palearctic, Austrafian
Ceylon, Burmah, Malaya, For-
mosa

The whole region

Almost Cosmopolite
India & Ceylon to Java, Formosa

Celebes, Lombock, to N.
Australia
Palearctic,
Moluccas

The whole region Ethiopian,

N. W. Himalayas, and India
W. Himalayas to Aracan, Java

Lombock, Timor ?

The whole region

The whole reg., excl. Philippines

The whole reg., excl. Philippines) Ethiopian

The whole region Ethiopian Australian

Nepal to 8. China and Formosa

Centwal India, Java, Philippines

India to Ceylon, 8. China, and|Palearc.,Ethiop., Austral.
Philippines

Nepal and E. Thibet) A Palearctic genus

ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY.

[PART III.

Order, Family, and
Genus.

15.
16.
Mffe

een

{ Locustella
JalGyehKech aoa” eben
Phylloscopus ...

(Gerygone
(Hypolais
Abrornis ...
Reguloides
(Regulus ...
(Sylvia
(Curruca ...
(Cyanecula
Calliope ...

Ruticilla ...
Chemarrhornis
Larvivora

Notodela ...

Tarsiger ...
(Grandala
Copsychus
Kittacincla
Thamnobia

(Dromolea
(Saxicola

.| Oreicola ?

(Cercomela

.(Pratincola

(Accentor

TIMALIIDA.

31.

Pomatorhinus...

. Malacocercus ...
. Chatarrhea

. Layardia

. Acanthoptila ...
. Garrulax

. Janthocincla

. Gampsorhynchus
. Grammatoptila
. Lrochalopteron

. Actinodura
. Pellorneum
. Dumetia ...
. Timalia ...
. Stachyris ...

. Pyctoris .
. Mixornis ...
. Malacopteron ... _

es Range within the Region.
AR
4 | Nepal, Hindostan, 8. China
2 | Himalayas, Formosa
10 | All India and Ceylon, to Chin:

Philippines

Philippine Islands)

1 | All India, ? migrant)

The whole reg., excl. Philippines

Himalayas and Central India

N. W. Himalayas and E.Thibet)

India and Ceylon)

India)

India)

Himalayas and Central India,
Philippine Islands

Himalayas to China and Formosa

Himalayas to Burmah

W. Himalayas to Ceylon, Malacca
and China

Himalayas
Formosa

Nepal and W. Himalayas

Nepal and KE. Thibet, high)

The whole region

The whole region

N. W. India, Hindostan, and
Ceylon

N. W. India)

N. W. India)

Burmah

N. W. India, a desert genus)

The whole region

to Pegu, Java,

bo org eb ie) ore 0 DH bw

Oe eH be

bo

Himalayas, in winter)

The whole region

All India to Burmah, Philippines

India, Burmah, Philippines

India and Ceylon

Nepal

The whole region

Himalayasto E. Thibet, Sumatra,
Formosa

Nepal

N. India

N. W. Himalayas, India, China,
Formosa

E. Himalayas, 3,000 to 10,000

India, Ceylon, Tenasserim

India and Ceylon

Malacca to Java

bo me bo
aONnNrwUr oO

bo

_
(oo) Aonw we Dee

mosa, Sumatra
India, Ceylon, and Up. Burmah
Himalayas to Borneo and Java
Malacca to Java

3

N. W. Himalayas to China, For-|

Range beyond the Region.

Palearctic
High Himal., E. Thibet
Palearctic, Ethiopian

Australian genus
Palearctic genus
Cashmere, E. Thibet
Palearctic

Palearctic and Nearetic
Palearctic genus

| Palearctic genus
Palearctic genus
Palearctic

Palearctic, Ethiopian

Palearctic genus
Madagascar

Ethiopian

Ethiopian genus

Palearctic and Ethiopian

Timor

N.E. Africa, S. W. Asia

Palearctic, Ethiopian,
Celebes, and Timor

Palearctic genus

Australian
Arabia, Nubia
Palestine, Abyssinia

CHAP. XII.]

Order, Family, and

Genus,

49. Alcippe
. Macronus
51. Cacopitta...

52. Trichastoma ...

3. Napothera
55. Turdinus

56. Trichixos ...
57. Sibia

PANURIDA.

58. Paradoxornis ...

59. Suthora .
60. Chlenasicus

CINCLID&,

61. Cinclus
62. Eupetes
63. Enicurus ...

64. Myiophonus

TROGLODYTIDA.

65. Testa
66. Pnoepyga...

67. Troglodytes
68. Rimator ...

CERTHIIDA.

69. Certhia
70. Salpornis...
71. Rhabdornis

(Tichodroma ...

SITTIDS.

d2esitta.. ...
73. Dendrophila

PARIDA.
74. Parus

76. Psaltria ...

78. Sylviparus

79. Cephalopyrus ...

LIOTRICHIDA,
80. Liothrix . .

VOL. 26

. Drymocataphus

75. Melanochlora om

77. Agithaliscus

No. of
Species.

|

ar

Oo he O16 Ore

Rt He Do Noe oS bo lor) © bo bo eo

bo Or

_

THE ORIENTAL REGION.

377

AD

Range within the Region.

The whole region

Malacca to Java

Java, Borneo, Sumatra

Nepal, Malacca to Java

Malacca to Java

Malacca to Java, Ceylon

Tenasserim, Malacca

Malacca, Borneo

N. W. Himalayas to Tenasserim,
Formosa

Nepal to Aracan and E. Thibet,
3,000-6,000 ft.

Himalayas to E. Thibet, China,
Formosa

Sikhim

Himalayas, China, and Formosa

Malacca and Sumatra

N. W. Himalayas (to 11,000 ft.)
to Java and West China

All India (to 9,000 ft. in N. W.
Himalayas) S. China, Formosa,
Java, Sumatra

Eastern Himalayas

N. W Himilayas to E. Thibet,
Java

Himalayas to E. Thibet

Darjeeling

Himalayas

Central India
Philippine Islands
Himalayas in winter)

Himalayas to S. India, 8. China

All India and Ceylon to Pegu

and Java

The whole region

Nepal to Malacca and Sumatra

West Java

W. Himalayas to China

W. Himalayas to Centra India
and E. Thibet

N. W. Himalayas

Nepal to S. W. China

Range beyond the Region.

New Guinea

Celebes

Timor

N. W. China, E. Thibet

Palearctic and American
New Guinea

| Turkestan

|

Palearctic and American

Palearctic and Nearctic

Palearctic genus

| Palearctic and Nearctic

Palearctic and Nearctic

Afghanistan

378

ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY.

[PART III.

Order, Family, and
Genus

SI SGace ese
82. Minla

83. Proparus
84. Allotrius
85. Cutia

86. Yuhina...

87. Ivulus ...
88. Myzornis

PHYLLORNITHIDA.

89. Phyllornis

90. Lora
91. Erpornis

PYCNONOTIDA.

92. Microscelis
93. Pycnonotus .
94, Hemixus

95. Hypsipetes
96. Criniger...
97. Setornis ...
98. Tole...

ORIOLIDA.
99. Oriolus ...

100. Analcipus

CAMPEPHAGID®.
OIE

102. Graucalus
103.
104.
105.
106.

Lalage
Cochoa ...

DICRURIDA.

107. Dicrurus
108. Bhringa
109. Chibia
110. Chaptia ...
111. Lrena

MUSCICAPID&.

112. Muscicapula ...

113. Erythrosterna

Pericrocotus ...

Campephaga ...
Volvocivora ...

38 Range within the Region Range beyond the Region.
Am
3 | Himalayas :—3,000—7,000 ft.
4 | Nepal to E. Thibet ; moderate
heights
6 |N ee Himalayas to E. Thibet :) Perhaps also Palearctic
1g
7 | N. W. Himalayas to Tenasserim
E. Thibet and Java
2 | Nepal and Sikhim
4 | Himalayas to E. Thibet, high {Perhaps Palearctic
4 | Darjeeling to Tenasserim
1 | Nepal and Sikhim
10 | The whole region; excluding
China and Philippines
5 | The whole reg., excl. Philippines
2 | Nepal and Hainan
5 | Burmah, China, Malaya Japan
40 | The whole region Ethiopian
2 | Himalayas and Hainan
15 | The whole region Madagascar
11 | India, Ceylon, Malaya, Hainan | Africa, Moluccas
3 | Malacca, Sumatra, Borneo
4 | Aracan and Malaya
12 | The whole region Paleare. Ethiepian, Ce-
lebes, Flores
3 | Himalayas, Malaya, Formosa,
Hainan
22 | The whole region Lombock ; the Amoor,
migrant
7 | India, Ceylon, Malaya, Philip- | Australian
pines, Hainan and Formosa
1 | Philippine Islands Celebes to N. Guinea
7 | The whole reg., excl. Philippines
2 | Malaya and Philippines Celebes to Pacific Is.
3 | Himalayas and Java
17 | The whole region Ethiop. and Australian
2 | Himalayas to Burmah and Java
1 | India to China Pekin in summer
3 | India to Borneo and Formosa
3 |S. India and Ceylon, Assam to
Malaya and Philippines
6 | Cashmere to W. China, 8S. India
7 |The whole region, excluding | Palearctic and Mada-
Philippines gascar

CHAP, XII. ]

Order, Family, and
Genus.

No, of
Species.

114.
115.
116.
117.

Xanthpygia ...
Hemipus
Pycnophrys
Hemichelidon

118.
Talise
120.
121.
122.

Jiltava ...
Cyornis ...
Cyanoptila
Eumyias
Siphia

—_
Co CO CO CMe bo

123.
124.
125.
126.

Anthipes
Schwaneria ...
Hypothymis ...
Rhipidura

STH eH Rt

127.
128.

Chelidorhynz
Cryptolopha ...

et ee

129. Tchitrea...

~ OS

130.

PACHYCEPHALIDA.
131. Hylocharis

Philentoma ...

bo

LANIIDS.

132. Lanius ...
133. Laniellus
134. Tephrodornis...

em
OM Oo

CoRVID.

135.
136.
137.
138.
139,

Pityriasis
Platylophus ..
Garrulus

Cissa
Urocissa@...

“TCO eR Re

140,
141.

Temnurus j
Dendrocitta ...

142.
143.

Crypsirhina ...
Nucifraga

144.
145.

Pica
Corvus ...
(Fregilus

bo bp bo bp co ow

NECTARINIIDE.
146. thopaga

147. Chalcostetha... 1
148. Arachnothera

149. Arachnecthera a

THE ORIENTAL REGION.

Range within the Region.

Malacca to China
India and Ceylon
Java

N. India to Ceylon, and China ;

? Philippines
Himalayas to W. China
The whole region
Hainan to Japan

The whole reg., excl. Philippines

N. W. India, Ceylon, Formosa,
E. Thibet

Nepal

Borneo

The whole region

All India and Ceylon, Malaya,
Philippines

N. India

The whole region

The whole region

Malaya and Philippines

Aracan to Malaya & Philippines

The whole region
Java
India, Ceylon,

and Malaya ;
Hanian

Borneo, Sumatra

Malaya

Himalayas, 8. China, Formosa

Himalayas and Aracan to Java

N. W. Himalayas, Ceylon, Bur-
mah, China, Formosa

Malaya and Cochin China

All India to S. China, Formosa,
and Sumatra

Java and Burmah

Himalayas and E. Thibet ;-—
8,000-—10,000 feet

China and Himalayas of Beetan

The whole region

Himalayas, high)

Himalayas to W. China & Java,
Central India

Malaya and Siam

The whole reg., excl. Philippines

The whole region, excl. China

379

Range beyond the Region.

N. China and Japan
Eastern Asia

Celebes and Timor
Japan and N. China

Celebes
Australian
Celebes

N. China, and Japan,
Flores, Ethiopian

Celebes, Timor

Nearc., Palearc., Ethiop.

Palearctic

N. China and Japan

Palearctic genus

Palearctic and Nearctic
Cosmop., excl. S. Am.
Palearctic genus

Celebes

Celebes to New Guinea

Celebes, Lombock, New
Guinea

Celebes to New Iceland

Order, Family, and

Genus.

No. of
Species.

150. Nectarophila...
151. Anthreptes

DIcHIDm.
152:
158.
154.
155.
156.
V57.

HIRUNDINID&.

158. Hirundo ;
159. Cotyle ... °... | 5
160. Chelidon ae 3

FRINGILLID&.

(Fringilla
(Acanthis is
(Procarduelis. ae
(Chlorospiza ...
Passer
(Fringillauda
(Coccothraustes
(Mycerobas ...
Eophona
(Pyrrhula
(Carpodacus ...

Diceum Bee dt
Pachyglossa ...
Piprisoma
Prionochilus ...
Zosterops
Chalcoparia ...

HORE H SO

161.

162.

PRE EDD HOH eee

(Goxiay ..
(Propyrrhula ...
163. Hematospiza

oe

(S. Fam. EMBERIZIND)

164. Euspiza ...
165. Emberiza

PLOCEIDA.

166. Ploceus... ... 4
Ge Mumia. ee.
168. Estrilda see 2
169. Erythrura il

STURNIDA.

170. Eulabes ...
171. Ampeliceps
172. Gymnops

N73; easton fn0'- oe
174. <Acridotheres ...
175. Sturnia ...
176. Sturnus ...
177. Sturnopastor ...
178. Calornis...

Ne

es
NWWN AHHH sT

ily)

A

Saroglossa

ae

ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY.

[PART III.

Range within the Region.

Range beyond the Region.

India, Ceylon, Malaya, Philipp.
Malaya and Indo-China

The whole region
Nepal

India and Ceylon
Malaya

The whole region
Aracap to Malaya

The whole region
India to China
India, Borneo

Himalayas, in winter)

N. W. Himalayas, in winter)
High Himalayas)

China)

The whole region

High Himalayas)

High Himalayas)

High Himalayas)

China

Himalayas, winter)

winter)
Snowy Himalayas)
Darjeeling, in winter)
S. E. Himal., 5,000 to 10,000 ft.

N. W. India to Burmah, & China

All India and China, in winter

India & Ceylon, Burmah, Malaya

The whole region
India and Ceylon, Burmah, Java
Java, Sumatra

|

The whole reg., excl. Philippines

Tenasserim to Cochin-China |

Philippine Islands

All India to Burmah

The whole region

The whole region

India and China

Cen. Indiato Burmah & Malaya
Malaya and Philippines

W. and Central Himalayas

{
\

Celebes
Celebes

Australian
Celebes

Ethiopian, Australian

Cosmopolite
Palearc., Ethiop., Amer.
Palearctic

Palearctic genus
Palearctic genus
Palearctic genus
Palearctic and Ethiopian
Palearctic and Ethiopian
Palearctic genus
Palearctic and Nearctic
Palearctic genus
Palearctic

| Paleearctic
Himalayas and Central India, in

Palearctic and Nearctic

| Palearctic and Nearctic

[2] Paleearctic

Palearctic and Nearctic

. Palearctic genus

Ethiopian

| Austro-Malayan
Ethiopian, Australian

, Moluccas to Fiji Islands

Flores, Papua

| S. Palearctic
_ Celebes

N. China&Japan, Celebes

' Palearctic

[?] Celebes, Moluccas to
Samoan Islands

CHAP. XII] THE ORIENTAL REGION. 381

Order, aanlly, and ss Range within the Region. | Range beyond the Region.
mM
ARTAMID.
180. Artamus... 3 | The whole region Australian
ALAUDIDS.
(Otocorys 1 | N. India, in winter) Palearctic and Nearctic
181. Alauda ... 7 | India and China Palearctic and Ethiopian
182. Galerita ... 2 | Central India Palearctic
183. Calandrella 2 | India and Burmah Palearctic and Ethiopian
(Melanocorypha | 1 | N. W. India) ; Palearctic
184. Mirafra ... ... | 5 | India, Ceylon, and Java Ethiopian
185. Ammomanes... 1 | Central India Palearctic and Ethiopian
186. Pyrrhulauda... 1 | India and Ceylon Ethiopian
MoraAcILLIDé.
187. Motacilla ... | 6 | India and Ceylon to China and) Palearctic and Ethiopian
Philippines
188. Budytes... ... | 2 | China and Philippines Palearctic & Ethiopian,
Moluccas
189. Calobates 1 | The whole region Palearctic
190. Nemoricola 1 | India, Ceylon, and Malaya
19). Authus....... | 3 | India and China Cosmopolite
192. Corydalla 8 | The whole region Palearctic, Australian
193. Heterura 1 | Himalayas
EURYLH]MID&.
194. Eurylemus ... | 2 | Malaya
195. Serilophus 1 | Himalayas
196. Psarisomus 1 | Himalayas
197. Corydon.. 1 | Malacca, Sumatra, Borneo
198. Cymbirhynchus | 2 | Aracan, Siam, and Malaya
199. Calyptomens... 1 | Malacca, Sumatra, Borneo
PITTID&
200. Pitta... ... | 11 | The whole region Australi iopi
Di Wemicenan lt 8: | Malave 8 ustralian, Ethiopian
202. Hydrornis . 3 | Himalayas and Malaya
PICARLA.
PIcIDz.
203. Vivia ... ... | 1|N. W. Himalayas to E. Thibet,
3,000-6,000 ft.
204. Sasia ... ... 2 | Nepal to Malaya and Borneo
ZOD ss PICUS! | 2. sso) 14 The whole region, excl. Philip-| Palearctic, American
pines

206. Hyopicus 1 | Himalayas N. China

207. Yungipicus ... | 12 | The whole region N. China, Japan, Celebes
208. Reinwardtipicus 1 | Penang to Sumatra and Borneo

209. Venilia... .. 2 | Nepal to Sumatra and Borneo

210. Chrysocolaptes 8 | India, Ceylon, Malaya, Philip-

: pines
211. Hemicercus ... | 5 | Malabar, Pegu to Malaya
212. Gecinus... ... | 12 | All India and Ceylon to Pegu| Palaarctic

and Malaya

382

Order, Family, and
Genus.

213.

214.
215.
216.
217.
218.

Brachypternus
Gecinulus

Miglyptes

YUNGIDZ.
219. Yunx

INDICATORIDZ.
220. Indicator

MEGALEMID2.
221. Megalema

222. Xantholema...

223. Psilopogon

224. Caloramphus. .

CUCULID#.

225. Pheenicophaés
226.
227.
228.
229.
230.
231. Rhopodytes
232.
233.
234.
235.
236.
237.
238.
239,
240.

Taccocoua
Poliococcyx
Rhinortha
Centropus
Cuculus

Chrysococeyx
Surniculus

241. Coccystes

242. Eudynamis .

CoRACIIDA.
243. Coracias...

244. Eurystomus ...

MEROPID.
245. Nyctiornis

Mulleripicus ...
Tiga vee |

Micropternus.. ‘il

Rhinococeyx ...
Dasylophus ...
Lepidogrammus
Carpococcyx ...
Zanclostomus ..

Cacomantis ...

Hierococcyx ...

ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY.

[PART III.

1 | The whole region

8. India to Himalayas, Burmah,
Sumatra, and Borneo

38 | Range within the Region. Range beyond the Region.
Fe |
|
5 Malabar, Aracan to Malaya and Celebes
| Philippines
5 | India, Ceylon, and China
5 | India to Malaya
2 S. Himalayas to Burmah
3 Malaya
8 | India and Ceylon, to Borneo and
| S. China
1 | Central and S. China Palearctic, S Africa
2 Himalayas and Borneo Ethiopian
27 |The whole region, excl. Philip-
pines
4 | All India and Ceylon to Pegu
and Malaya
1 | Sumatra
2 , Malacca, Sumatra and Borneo
1 | Ceylon
1 | Java
1 | Philippine Islands
1 | Philippine Islands
1 | Borneo, Sumatra
1 | Malaya
7 | Nepal to Ceylon, Hainan and
Malaya
4 | All India, Ceylon, Malacca
1 | Malacca, Sumatra, Borneo
1 | Malacca, Sumatra, Borneo
14 | The whole region Ethiopian, Australian
10 | The whole region Palearc., Ethiop., Aust.
9 | The whole region Australian
5 | The whole region Ethiopian, Australian
2 | India, Ceylon and Malaya
6 | The whole region 'Celebes, N. China and
Amoorland
2 |The whole region, excl. Philip-) Ethiopian
pines
2 | The whole region | Australian
2 , India, Ceylon and Burmah Ethiopian, 8. Palearctic

Celebes
Ethiopian, Australian

CHAP. XII.]

Order, Family, and
Genus.

246. Merops ...

TROGONIDA.
247. Harpactes

ALCEDINIDA.
248. Halcyon...
249,

250.
251.

Pelargopsis
Carcineutes
Ceyx

252. Alcedo ...

253.
254.

Alcyone...
Ceryle

BUCEROTIDZ.
255. Buceros ...

256.
257.
258.
259.
260.

Hydrocissa ...
Berenicornis ...
Calao

Aceros sae
Cranorrhinus

261.

262.
263.
UPpurip2.

264. Upupa ... -

_ PODARGIDA.

265. Batrachostomus

CAPRIMULGID&.

266. Caprimulgus ...
267. Lyncornis

Penelopides .
Rhinoplaz
Meniceros

CYPSELID&.

268. Cypselus oS:
269. Dendrochelidon
270. Collocalia

271. Cheetura...

PSITTACI.

CACATUIDE.
(Cacatua

PALZORNITHIDS.
272, Palzornis

oe
°o
(-)
Z

10

10

bor On Qnn

(\) Ww 09 CO

THE ORIENTAL REGION.

Range within the Region.

The whole region

The whole region, excl. China

The whole region

The whole region, excl. China

Burmah, Siam, and Malaya

India and Ceylon, Malaya and
Philippines

The whole region

Philippines
India to 8. China

Nepal to Malaya, S.
Philippines

India, Ceylon and Malaya

Sumatra

Tenasserim, Malaya

8. E. Himalayas

Malacca to Borneo and Philip-
pines

Philippines

: The region, excl. Philippines
Ceylon, India, Malaya, Philipp. |

| Philippines)

Sumatra, Borneo
India and Ceylon to Tenasserim

India, Ceylon and Burmah
India, Ceylon and Malaya

The whole region
Burmah, Malaya, & Philippines

The whole region
Ceylon, India, Malaya, Hainan

N. W. India to Ceylon, Siam &

India,|

| Madagascar,

Malaya

383

Range beyond the Region.

S. Palearctic, Ethiopian,
Australian

S. Palearctic, Ethopian,
Australian
Celebes and Timor

Moluccas & New Guin.

Palearctic, Ethiopian,
Austro-Malayan

Australian genus

Ethiopian, S. Palearctic,
American

W. Africa
Austro-Malaya

Celebes

Ethiopian, S, Palearctic
Moluccas

The Eastern Hemisphere
Celebes

The Old World & S.Amer.
Austro-Malaya
Moluccas,
Pacific Islands
America, Africa

Australian genus

Ethiopian

384

ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY.

[PART III

Order, Family, and
Genus.

273.
274.
275.
276.
277.

Prioniturus ...

Cyclopsitta
Psittinus

Tanygnathus...

Loriculus

COLUMB&.
COLUMBIDZ.

278.
279.
280.

281.
282.

283.
284.
285.

286.
287.
288.
289.

Treron
Ptilopus...

Carpophaga .

Columba
Janthenas

Macropygia ...

Durtur es.

Chalcophaps er

Phapitreron ...

Caleenas...
Phlegcenas
Geopelia

GALLIN&A.
PTEROCLIDA.
290. Pterocles

TETRAONIDA.

291

292.

293
294

295.

Francolinus ...

Ortygornis

. Perdix

Coturnix
Rollulus...
(Caccabis

PHASIANIDZ.

296.

297.
298.

299.

300.
301.

302.

303

Pavo

Argusianus ...
Polyplectron ...

(Lophophorus
(Tetraophasis
Ceriornis
(Pucrasia

Phasianus

Euplocamus ...

Gallus ...

Galloperdia rt

ar
Coe wo oo Or 09

Species

On Hee

bo
—

a
ow

me bore bo iwee oor) wn

nH

ON

Philippine Islands, Java

; The whole region

l

Range within the Region. Range beyond the Region.

Philippine Islands

Philippine Islands

Malaya, excl. Java

Philippine Islands

Ceylon, India, Malaya, Philip-
pines

Celebes
Papuan Islands

Austro-Malaya
Celebes and Moluccas,
Flores

The whole region

Malaya and Philippines

India and Ceylon to Hainan and
Philippines

Ceylon and India to Tenasserim

Philippine, Andaman & Nicobar
Islands

Nepal, Java, Hainan, Philippines

Ethiopian, Moluccas
Australian
Australian

Paleare., Ethiop., Amer.
Japan, Moluccas to Sa-
moan Islands
Austro-Malaya, Australia
Old W orld, Austro-Malay.

India, Ceylon, Malaya, Hainan,} Austro-Malaya, Australia
Philippines, Formosa

Philippine Islands
Nicobar and Philippine Islands
Philippine and Sooloo Islands

Austro-Malaya
Austro-Mal. & Polynesia
; Austro-Malaya &Austral.

Central and 8. India S. Palearctic. Ethiopian

Ceylon and India to S. China

Ceylon to Himalayas, Sumatra &
Borneo

India, Malaya, Philippines, China| Palearctic

The whole region The Eastern Hemisphere

Malacca, Siam, Borneo, Philipp.

W. Himalayas)

S. Palearctic, Ethiopian

Palearctic genus

Ceylon to Himalayas,S.W. China
and Java

Siam, Malacca, Borneo

Upper Assam to S. W. China &

Sumatra
Cashmere and E. Thibet) Palearctic genus
E. Thibet) Palearctic genus

N. W. Himalayas to W. China |S. E. Palearctic

N. W. Himalayas to N. China| Palearctic genus
and Mongolia)

W. Himalayas,S. China, Formosa! 8. Palearctic

N. W. Himalayas to China
Sumatra and Borneo

The region, excl. China

Celebes and Timor
Central India to Ceylon

CHAP, XII. ]

Order, Family, and

Genus.

TURNICIDA.
3042 Turnix ~..

MEGAPODIID2.

305. Megapodius ..

ACCIPITRES.

VULTURIDS.
306. Vultur,...
307. Gyps

308. Pscudogyps

309. Neophron

FALCONID.

310.
311.
312.
313.
314.
315.
316.
317.
318.

Circus
Astur
Accipiter
Buteo
Aquila
Nisaétus

Spizaétus

319.
320.
321.

Circaétus
Spilornis
Butastur
322. Halieetus
ByBy
324.
325.
326.
327.

Haliastur
Milvus ...
Elanus ...

Pernis

328.
329.
330.
331.
332.

Baza
Hierax ...

Falco
Cerchneis

PANDIONIDA.

333. Pandion...
334. Polioaétus

STRIGIDA.

336.
336.
337.
338.
339.

Ninox
Bubo

Scops

THE ORIENTAL REGION,

Lophotriorchis
Neopus ...

Macherhamphus

Poliohierax ...

Athene ...

Ketupa x

No. of
Species.

et HE OD HE

be © CO eH wm CO me bo Oe bo eC Orr CY LO He DOD be

STOO He NTO

Range within the Region.

The whole region

Nicobar Is., Philippines, N. W.
Borneo

Himalayas

India and Siam
India and Burmah
All India

India and China

The whole region

The whole region

India to China

India to China

India and Ceylon
Indo-Malaya

India to Burmah and Malaya
India to Malaya and Formosa

Indian peninsula
The whole region
The whole region

The whole region

India to Malaya
The whole region
India, Malaya
Malacca

India

India to Malaya

N. India, Burmah, Malaya
Burmah

The whole region

The whole region

The whole region
India to Malaya

The whole region
The whole region
India, Ceylon, Malaya and Philip.
The whole region
The whole region

Go
[o 6)
Or

Range beyond the Region.

8. Palearce., Ethiopian,
Australian

Celebes to Samoan Is.,
N. Australia

S. Palearctic, Ethiopian
S. Palearctic, Ethiopian
N. Ethiopian

S. Palearctic, Ethiopian

Almost Cosmopolite
Almost Cosmopolite
Almost Cosmopolite
Cosmopolite ; excl. Austl.
Nearc, Palarc., Ethiop.
8. Palear., Ethiop., Aus.
Neotropical
Celebes and Moluccas
Neotropical, Ethiopian,
Austro-Malayan
Paleare., Ethiop., Timor
Celebes
N. E. Africa, Celebes,
New Guinea
Cosmopolite ; excl, Neo-
tropical region
Austro-Malaya, Austral.
The Eastern Hemisphere.
Africa, Australia
S. W. Africa & Madag.
Palearctic and Ethiopian,
Celebes
Moluccas and N. Austr.

E. Africa
Almost Cosmopolite
Almost Cosmopolite

Cosmopolite
Indo-Malaya & Polynesia

The Eastern Hemisphere
N. China and Japan
Cosmop. exc. Austr. reg.

Almost Cosmopolite

586 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PARTY III.

Order, any. - and 33 Range within the Region. Range beyond the Region.
Bah
340. Syrnium 6 |The whole region Cosmop. exc. Austr. reg.
(Asio 2 | India) Paleare., Ethiop. Amer.
341. Strix 4 | The whole region Cosmopolite
342. Phodilus 2 | Nepal, Malaya

Peculiar or very Characteristic Genera of Wading or Swimming Birds.

GRALLE.

RALLIDZ.
Rallina .... ... | 10 | The whole region Austro-Malaya

PARRIDE.
Hydrophasianus| 1 | The whole region

CHARADRIID.
Asacus ....../ 1 | The whole region Austro-Malayan, Austra

a

¥

AUSTRALIAN REGION
Seale 1 inch —1,000 miles

Tropic of | Cancer

Ralick.—.
Ss.

Chain“.
Valan oe

» Christmas I.

"Jarvis T

Mgidon I.
+ Starbuck I.

Ellice. Is. | .
Marquesas or\Mendana Ts.

Penkiryn L.
5 = Nukahiva,,
Is. : ~Kiraoa_

*, >
¥ Vanikoro > {
i et
{ / 3” =
| Espfrita Santofy der
| a fall nh A ides Saas Leeu |:

ve i,
__ Kandavu™ "|"

a
a

g SYDNEY

? > \\ ] ) EXPLANATION
Tasmania z uy S / f / Terrestrial Contours
Hblarton ‘ | } / / From Sea level to L000 teet White
vr \ pata a / F _ 1000 feet to 2,500 .

} 7 / _ 2500 . . 5000 .
5000 10,000 .
_ 10000 20,000

The Marine Contour of L000 feet
is shewn by a dotted line

Pasture lands shewn this 1
Forest
Desert
The boundaries and reference raumbers
of the Subregions are shewn in Red

eae —— :
50 Long 6O E. of 70Green.s80 : = = SS SSS

Stanfords Geographical Estab! London

New York: Hatper & Brothers.

CHAPTER XIII.
THE AUSTRALIAN REGION.

Tue Australian is the great insular region of the earth. Asa
whole it is one of the best marked, and has even been considered
to be equal in zoological value to all the rest of the globe; but
its separate portions are very heterogeneous, and their limits
sometimes ill-defined. Its central and most important masses
consist of Australia and New Guinea, in which the main features
of the region are fully developed. To the north-west it extends to
Celebes, in which a large proportion of the Australian characters
have disappeared, while Oriental types are mingled with them
to such an extent that it is rather difficult to determine where to
locate it. To the south-east it includes New Zealand, which is
in some respects so peculiar, that it has even been proposed to
constitute it a distinct region. On the east it embraces the
whole of Oceania to the Marquesas and Sandwich Islands, whose
very scanty and often peculiar fauna, must be affiliated to the
general Australian type.

Australia is the largest tract of land in the region, being
several times more extensive than all the other islands combined,
and it is here that the greatest variety of peculiar types have
been developed. This island-continent, being situated in the
track of the southern desert zone, and having no central moun-
tains to condense the vapours from the surrounding ocean, has a
large portion of its interior so parched up and barren as to be
almost destitute of animal life. The most extensive tract of
fertile and well-watered country is on the east and south-east,

388 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART U1,

where a fine range of mountains reaches, in the Colony of Vic-
toria, the limits of perpetual snow. The west coast also possesses
mountains of moderate height, but the climate is very dry and
hot. The northern portion is entirely tropical, yet it nowhere
presents the luxuriance of vegetation characteristic of the great
island of New Guinea immediately to the north of it. Taken as
a whole, Australia is characterized by an arid climate and a de-
ficiency of water ; conditions which have probably long prevailed,
and under which its very peculiar fauna and flora have been de-
veloped. This fact will account for some of the marked differ-
ences between it and the adjacent sub-regions of New Guinea
and the Moluccas, where the climate is moist, and the vegetation
luxuriant; and these divergent features must never be lost sight
of, in comparing the different portions of the Australian region.
In Tasmania alone, which is however, essentially a detached
portion of Australia, a more uniform and moister climate pre-
vails; but it is too small a tract of land, and has been too
recently severed from its parent mass to have developed a
special fauna.

The Austro-Malay sub-region (of which New Guinea is the
central and typical mass) is strikingly contrasted with Australia,
being subjected to purely equatorial conditions,—a high, but
uniform temperature, excessive moisture, and a luxuriant forest
vegetation, exactly similar in general features to that which
clothes the Indo-Malay Islands, and the other portions of the
ereat equatorial forest zone. Such a climate and vegetation, being
the necessary result of its geographical position, must have
existed from remote geological epochs with but little change, and
must therefore have profoundly affected all the forms of life
which have been developed under their influence. Around New
Guinea as a centre are grouped a number of important islands,
more or less closely agreeing with it in physical features, climate,
vegetation, and forms of life. In most immediate connection we
place the Aru Islands, Mysol and Waigiou, with Jobie and the
other Islands in Geelvinck Bay, all of which are connected with
it by shallow seas ; they possess one of its most characteristic
groups, the Birds of Paradise, and have no doubt only recently Gn

CHAP, XIII. ] THE AUSTRALIAN REGION. 389

a geological sense) been separated from it. In the next rank come
the large islands of the Moluccas on the west, and the range
terminating in the Solomon Islands on the east, both of which
groups possess a clearly Papuan fauna, although deficient in
many of the most remarkable Papuan types.

All these islands agree closely with New Guinea itself in
being very mountainous, and covered with a luxuriant forest
vegetation ; but to the south-west we find a set of islands ex-
tending from Timor to Lombock, which agree more nearly with
Australia, both in climate and vegetation; being arid and
abounding in eucalypti, acacias, and thickets of thorny shrubs.
These, like the Moluccas, are surrounded by deep sea, and it is
doubtful whether they have either of them been actually con-
nected with New Guinea or Australia in recent geological times;
but the general features of their zoology oblige us to unite all
these islands with New Guinea as forming the Austro-Malay
sub-division of the Australian region. Still further west how-
ever, we have the large island of Celebes, whose position is very
difficult to determine. It is mountainous, but has also extensive
plains and low lands. Its climate is somewhat arid in the south,
where the woods are often scattered and thorny, while in the
north it is moister, and the forests are luxuriant. It is surrounded
by deep seas, but also by coralline and volcanic islets, indicating
former elevations and subsidences. Its fauna presents the most
puzzling relations, showing affinities to Java, to the Philippines,
to the Moluccas, to New Guinea, to continental India, and even to
Africa; so that it is almost impossible to decide whether to place
it in the Oriental or the Australian region. On the whole the
preponderance of its relations appears to be with the latter,
though it is undoubtedly very anomalous, and may, with almost
as much propriety, be classed with the former. This will be
better understood when we come to discuss its zoological pecu-
harities.

The next sub-region consists of the extensive series of islands
scattered over the Pacific, the principal groups being the Sand-
wich Islands, the Marquesas and Society Islands, the Naviga-
tors’, Friendly, and Fiji Islands. New Caledonia and the New

390 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART 11.

Hebrides have rather an uncertain position, and it is difficult
to decide whether to class them with the Austro-Malay Islands,
the Pacific Islands, or Australia. The islands of the west Pacific,
north of the equator, also probably come into this region,
although the Ladrone Islands may belong to the Philippines ;
but as the fauna of all these small islets is very scanty, and
very little known, they are not at present of much importance.

There remains the islands of New Zealand, with the surround-
ing small islands, as far as the Auckland, Chatham, and Nor-
folk Islands. These are situated in the south temperate
forest-zone. They are mountainous, and have a moist, equable,
and temperate climate. They are true oceanic islands, and the
total absence of mammalia intimates that they have not been
connected with Australia or any other continent in recent geolo-
gical times. The general character of their zoology, no less
than their botany, affiliates them however, to Australia as por-
tions of the same zoological region.

General Zoological Characteristics of the Australian Region.—
For the purpose of giving an idea of the very peculiar and
striking features which characterise the Australian region, it
will be as well at first to confine ourselves to the great central
land masses of Australia and New Guinea, where those features
are manifested in their greatest force and purity, leaving the
various peculiarities and anomalies of the outlying islands to be
dealt with subsequently.

Mammalia—tThe Australian region is broadly distinguished
from all the rest of the globe by the entire absence of all the
orders of non-aquatic mammalia that abound in the Old
World, except two—the winged bats (Chiroptera), and the equally
cosmopolite rodents (Rodentia). Of these latter however, only
one family is represented—the Muridee—(comprising the rats
and mice), and the Australian representatives of these are all of
small or moderate size—a suggestive fact in appreciating the true
character of the Australian fauna. In place of the Quadrumana,
Carnivora, and Ungulates, which abound in endless variety
in all the other regions under equally favourable conditions,
Australia possesses two new orders (or perhaps sub-classes)—

CHAP, XIII. ] THE AUSTRALIAN REGION. 391

Marsupialia and Monotremata, found nowhere else on the globe
except a single family of the former in America. The Marsu-
pials are wonderfully developed in Australia, where they exist
in the most diversified forms, adapted to different modes of life.
Some are carnivorous, some herbivorous; some arboreal, others
terrestrial. There are insect-eaters, root-gnawers, fruit-eaters,
honey-eaters, leaf or grass-feeders. Some resemble wolves,
others marmots, weasels, squirrels, flying squirrels, dormice or
jerboas. They are classed in six distinct families, comprising
about thirty genera, and subserve most of the purposes in the
economy of nature, fulfilled in other parts of the world by very
different groups; yet they all possess common peculiarities of
structure and habits which show that they are members of
one stock, and have no real affinity with the Old-World forms
which they often outwardly resemble.

The other order, Monotremata, is only represented by two rare
and very remarkable forms, Ornithorhynchus and Echidna, pro-
bably the descendants of some of those earlier developments of
mammalian life which in every other part: of the globe have long
been extinct.

The bats of Australia all belong to Old-World genera and
possess no features of special interest, a result of the wandering
habits of these aerial mammals. The Rodents are more interest-
ing. They are all more or less modified forms of mice or rats.
Some belong to the widely distributed genus Jus, others to four
allied genera, which may be all modifications of some common
Old-World form. They spread all over Australia, and allied
species occur in Celebes and the Papuan Islands; so that al-
though not yet known from the Moluccas, there can be little
doubt that some of them exist there.

Birds.—The typical Australian region, as above defined, is
almost as well characterized by its birds, as by its mammalia;
but in this case the deficiencies are less conspicuous, while the
peculiar and characteristic families are numerous and important.
The most marked deficiency as regards wide-spread families, is
the total absence of Fringillide (true finches), Picidee (wood-
peckers), Vulturide (vultures), and Phasianide (pheasants)

392 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

and among prevalent Oriental groups, Pycnonotide (bulbuls),
Phyllornithide (green bulbuls), and Megalewmid (barbets) are
families whose absence is significant. Nine families are peculiar
to the region, or only just pass its limits in the case of single
species. These are Paridiseide (paradise-birds), Meliphagide
(honey-suckers), Menuride (lyre-birds), Atrichide (scrub-birds),
Cacatuidee (cockatoos), Platycercide (broad-tailed and grass-
paroquets), Trichoglosside (brush-tongued paroquets, Megapo-
diide (mound-makers), and Casuariide (cassowaries). There are
also eight very characteristic families, of which four——Pachy-
cephalide (thick-headed shrikes), Campephagide (caterpillar
shrikes), Diceeidee (flower-peckers), and Artamide (swallow-
shrikes)—are feebly represented elsewhere, while the other four
—Ploceidie (weaver-finches), Alczedinidee (kingfishers), Podargidee
(frog-mouths), and Columbide (pigeons)—although widely dis-
tributed, are here unusually abundant and varied, and (except
in the case of the Ploceide) better represented in the Australian
than in any other region. Of all these the Meliphagide (honey-
suckers) are the most peculiarly and characteristically Australian.
This family abounds in genera and species ; it extends into every
part of the region from Celebes and Lombock on the west, to
the Sandwich Islands, Marquesas, and New Zealand on the east,
while not a single species overpasses its Jimits, with the excep-
tion of one (Ptilotis limbata) which abounds in all the islands of
the Timorese group, and has crossed the narrow strait from
Lombock to Baly ; but this can hardly be considered to impugn
the otherwise striking fact of wide diffusion combined with
strict limitation, which characterizes it. This family is the more
important, because, like the Trichoglosside or brush-tongued
paroquets, it seems to have been developed in co-ordination with
that wealth of nectariferous flowering shrubs and trees which is
one of the marked features of Australian vegetation. It probably
originated in the extensive land-area of Australia itself, and
thence spread into all the tributary islands, where it has become
variously modified, yet always in such close adaptation to the
other great features of the Australian fauna, that it seems unable
to maintain itself when subject to the competition of the more

CHAP. XIII.] THE AUSTRALIAN REGION. 393

varied forms of life in the Oriental region ; to which, possessing
great powers of flight, some species must occasionally have emi-
grated. Its presence or absence serves therefore to define and
limit the Australian region with a precision hardly to be
equalled in the case of any other region or any other family of
birds.

The Trichoglossid, as already intimated, ave another of these
peculiarly organized Australian families,—parrots with an ex-
tensile brush-tipped tongue, adapted to extract the nectar and
pollen from flowers. These are also rigidly confined to this
region, but they do not range so completely over the whole of it,
being absent from New Zealand (where however they are repre-
sented by a closely allied form Nestor), and from the Sandwich
Islands. The Paradiseide (birds of paradise and allies) are
another remarkable family, confined to. the Papuan group of
Islands, and the trepical parts of Australia. The Megapodiide
(or mound-builders) are another most remarkable and anomalous
eroup of birds, no doubt specially adapted to Australian con-
ditions of existence. Their peculiarity consists in their laying
enormous eggs (at considerable intervals of time) and burying
them either in the loose hot sand of the beach above high-water
mark, or in enormous mounds of leaves, sticks, earth, and refuse
of all kinds, gathered together by the birds, whose feet and
claws are enlarged and strengthened for the work. The warmth
of this slightly fermenting mass hatches the eggs; when the
young birds work their way out, and thenceforth take care of
themselves, as they are able to run quickly, and even to fly short
distances, as soon as they are hatched. This may perhaps be an
adaptation to the peculiar condition of so large a portion of
Australia, in respect to prolonged droughts and scanty water-
supply, entailing a periodical scarcity of all kinds of food. In such
a country the confinement of the parents to one spot during the
long period of incubation would often lead to starvation, and the
consequent death of the offspring. But the same birds with free
power to roam about, might readily maintain themselves. This
peculiar constitution and habit, which enabled the Megapodii to
maintain an existence under the unfavourable conditions of their

Vou. L—27

394 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

original habitat gives them a great advantage in the luxuriant
islands of the Moluccas, to which they have spread. There
they abound to a remarkable extent, and their eggs furnish a
luxurious repast to the natives. They have also reached many
of the smallest islets, and have spread beyond the limits of the
region to the Philippines, and North-Western Borneo, as well
as to the remote Nicobar Islands.

The Platycercide, or broad-tailed paroquets, are another
wide-spread Australian group, of weak structure but gorgeously
coloured, ranging from the Moluccas to New Zealand and the
Society Islands, and very characteristic of the region, to which
they are strictly confined. The Cockatoos have not quite so
wide a range, being confined to the Austro-Malayan and Austra-
lian sub-regions, while one species extends into the Philippine
Islands. The other two peculiar families are more restricted in
their range, and will be noticed under the sub-regions to which
they respectively belong.

Of the characteristic families, the Pachycephalide, or thick-
headed shrikes, are especially Australian, ranging over all the
region, except New Zealand; while only a single species has
spread into the Oriental, and one of doubtful affinity to the
Ethiopian region. The Artamidée, or swallow-shrikes, are also
almost wholly confined to the region, one species only extending
to India. They range to the Fiji Islands on the east, but only
to Tasmania on the south. These two families must be con-
sidered as really peculiar to Australia. The Podargide, or frog-
mouths—large, thick-billed goat-suckers—are strange birds very
characteristic of the Australian region, although they have
representatives in the Oriental and Neotropical regions. Cam-
pephagide (caterpillar-shrikes) also abound, but they are fairly
represented both in India and Africa. The Ploceide, or weaver-
birds, are the finches of Australia, and present a variety of
interesting and beautiful forms.

We now come to the kingfishers, a cosmopolitan family of
birds, yet so largely developed in the Australian region as to
deserve special notice. Two-thirds of all the genera are found
here, and no less than 10 out of the 19 genera in the family are

CHAP. XUI.] THE AUSTRALIAN REGION. 395

peculiar to the Australian region. Another of the universally dis-
tributed families which have their metropolis here, is that of the
Columbidz or pigeons. Three-fourths of the genera have represen-
tatives inthe Australan region, while two-fifths of the whole are
confined to it; and it possesses as many species of pigeons as any
other two regions combined. It also possesses the most remark-
able forms, as exemplified in the great crowned pigeons (Goura)
and the hook-billed Didunculus, while the green fruit-pigeons
(Ptilopus) are sometimes adorned with colours vying with those
of the gayest parrots or chatterers. This enormous development
of a family of birds so defenceless as the pigeons, whose rude
nests expose their eggs and helpless young to continual danger,
may perhaps be correlated, as I have suggested elsewhere (Ibis,
1865, p. 366), with the entire absence of monkeys, cats, lemurs,
weasels, civets and other arboreal mammals, which prey on eggs
and young birds. The very prevalent green colour of the upper
part of their plumage, may be due to the need of concealment
from their only enemies,—birds of prey; and this is rendered
more probable by the fact that it is among the pigeons of the
small islands of the Pacific (where hawks and their allies are ex-
ceedingly scarce) that we alone meet with species whose entire
plumage is a rich and conspicuous yellow. Where the need of
concealment is least, the brilliancy of colour has attained its
maximum. We may therefore look upon the genus Ptilopus,
with its fifty species whose typical coloration is green, with
patches of bright blue, red, or yellow on the head and breast,
as a special development suited to the tropical portion of the
Australian region, to which it is almost wholly confined.

It will be seen from the sketch just given, that the ornitho-
logical features of the Australian region are almost as remark-
able as those presented by its Mammalian fauna; and from the
fuller development attained by the aérial class of birds, much
more varied and interesting. None of the other regions of the
earth can offer us so many families with special points of
interest in structure, or habits, or general relations. The
paradise-birds, the honeysuckers, the brush-tongued paroquets,
the mound-builders, and the cassowaries—all strictly peculiar

396 ZOOLOGICAL. GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.
to the region—with such remarkable developments as we have
indicated in the kingfishers and pigeons, place the Australian
region in the first rank for the variety, singularity, and interest
of its birds, and only second to South America as regards
numbers and beauty.

Reptiles—In Reptiles the peculiarity of the main Australian
region is less marked, although the fauna is sufficiently distinct.
There is no family of snakes confined to the region, but many
peculiar genera of the families Pythonide and Elapide. About
two-thirds of the Australian snakes belong to the latter family,
and are poisonous; so that although the Crotalide and Viperidee
are absent, there are perhaps a larger proportion of poisonous
to harmless snakes than in any other part of the world. Accord-
ing to Mr. Gerard Krefft the proportion varies considerably in the
different colonies. In Victoria, New South Wales, and Queens-
land the proportion is about two to one; in West Australia
three to one; and in South Australia six to one. In Tasmania
there are only 3 species and all are poisonous. The number
of species, as in other parts of the world, seems to increase
with temperature. The 3 in Tasmania have increased to 12
in Victoria, 15 in South Australia and the same in West
Australia; 31 in New South Wales, and 42 in sub-tropical
Queensland.

The lizards of Australia have lately been catalogued by Dr.
Giinther in the concluding part of the “Voyage of the Erebus
and Terror,” issued in 1875. They belong to 8 families, 3 of
which are peculiar; 57 genera of which 36 are peculiar; and
about 140 species, all but 2 or 3 of which are peculiar. The
scinks and geckoes form the great bulk of the Australian
lizards, with a few Agamide, Gymnopthalmide, and Varanide.
The three peculiar families are the Pygopodide, Aprasiide and
Lialide ; comprising only + genera and 7 species. The above
all belong to Australia proper. Those of the other sub-regions
ure few in number and will be noticed under their respective
localities. They will perhaps bring up the number of genera to
70. West and South Australia seem to offer much peculiarity
in their hzards; these districts possessing 12 peculiar genera,

CHAP. XIII. ] THE AUSTRALIAN REGION. 397

while a much smaller number are confined to the East and
South-East, or to the North.

Among the fresh-water turtles of the family Chelydide
there are three peculiar genera—Chelodina, Chelemys, and Elseya,
all from Australia.

Amphibia.—No tailed amphibians are known from the whole
region, but no less than eleven of the families of tail-less Batra-
chians (toads and frogs) are known to inhabit some part or

other of it. A peculiar family (Xenorhinide), consisting of

a single species, is found in New Guinea; the true toads
(Bufonide) are only represented by a single species of a pecu-
liar genus in Australia, and by a Bufo in Celebes. Nine of the
families are represented in Australia itself, and the following
genera are peculiar to it:—Pseudophryne (Phryniscidee), Pachy-
batrachus, and Chelydobatrachus (Engystomyde) ; Helioporus
(Alytidee) ; Pelodyras and Chirodyras (Pelodryade); Notaden
(Bufonidee).

Fresh-water Fish—There is only one peculiar family of fresh-
water fishes in this region—the Gadopsidee—represented by a
single genus and species. The other species of Australia belong
to the families Trachinide, Atherinide, Mugillide, Siluridee,
Homalopterz, Haplochitonidz, Galaxide, Osteoglosside, Sym-
branchide, and Sirenoidei; most of the genera being peculiar.
The large and widely-distributed families, Cyprinodontide and
Cyprinide, are absent. The most remarkable fish is the recently
discovered Ceratodus, allied to the Lepidosiren of Tropical
America, and Protopterus of Tropical Africa, the three species
constituting the Sub-class Dipnoi, remains of which have been
found fossil in the Triassic formation.

Summary of Australian Vertebrata.—In order to complete
our general sketch of Australian zoology, and to afford materials
for comparison with other regions, we will here summarize the
distribution of Vertebrata in the entire Australian region, as
given in detail in the tables at the end of this chapter. When
an undoubted Oriental family or genus extends to Celebes only
we do not count it as belonging to the Australian region, that
island being so very anomalous and intermediate in character.

398 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART Ill.

The Australian region, then, possesses examples of 18 families
of Mammalia, 8 of which are peculiar ; 71 of Birds, 16 being
peculiar; 31 of Reptiles, 4 being peculiar; 11 of Amphibia, with
1 peculiar ; and 11 of Fresh-water fish, with 1 peculiar. In all,
142 families of Vertebrates, 30 of which are almost or quite
confined to it, or between one-fourth and one-fifth of the whole
number.

The genera of Mammalia occurring within the limits of this
region are 70, of which 45 are almost, or quite, confined to it.

Of Land-Birds there are 296 genera, 196 of which are equally
limited. The proportion is in both cases very nearly five-
eighths.

This shows a considerable deficiency both in families of Ver-
tebrates and genera of Mammalia, as compared with the Oriental
and Ethiopian regions; while in genera of Birds it is a little
superior to the latter in total numbers, and considerably so in
the proportion of peculiar types.

Supposed Land Connection between Australia and South America.

We may now consider how far the different classes and orders
of vertebrates afford indications that during past ages there
has been some closer connection between Australia and South
America than that which now exists.

Among Mammalia we have the remarkable fact of a group
of marsupials inhabiting South America, and extending even
into the temperate regions of North America, while they are
found in no other part of the globe beyond the limits of the
Australian region ; and this has often been held to be evidence
of a former connection between the two countries. A prelimi-
nary objection to this view is, that the opossums seem to be
rather a tropical group, only one species reaching as far as 42°
south latitude on the west coast of South America; but what-
ever evidence we have which seems to require a former union
of these countries shows that it took place, if at all, towards their
cold southern limits, the tropical faunas on the whole showing
no similarity. This is not a very strong objection, since climates
may have changed in the south to as great an extent as we

CHAP. XIII. ] THE AUSTRALIAN REGION. 399:

know they have in the north. Perhaps a more important con-
sideration is, that Didelphys is a family type unknown in Aus-
tralia; aud this implies that the point of common origip is very
remote in geological time. But the most conclusive fact is that
in the Eocene and Miocene periods this very family, Didel-
phyide, existed in Europe, while it only appeared in America
in the Post-pliocene or perhaps the Pliocene period; so that it
is really an Old-World group, which, though long since extinct
in its birthplace, has survived in America, to which country it
is a comparatively recent emigrant. Primeval forms of marsu-
pials we know abounded in Europe during much of the Secondary
epoch, and no doubt supphed Australia with the ancestors of
the present fauna. It is clear, therefore, that in this case there
is not a particle of evidence for any former union between
Australia and South America; while it is almost demonstrated
that both derived their marsupials from a common source in the
northern hemisphere.

Birds offer us more numerous but less clearly defined cases of
this kind. Among Passeres, the wonderful lyre bird (Menwra)
is believed by some ornithologists to be decidedly allied to the
South American Pteroptochide, while others maintain that
it is altogether peculiar, and has no such affinity. The Aus-
tralian Pachycephalide have also been supposed to find their
nearest allies in the American Vireonide, but this is, perhaps,
equally problematical. That the mound-makers (Megapodiide)
‘of the Australian region are more nearly allied to the South
American curassows (Cracide) than to any other family, is per-
haps better established; but if proved, it is probably due, as in
the case of the marsupials, to the survival of an ancient and
once wide-spread type, and thus lends no support to the theory
of a land connection between the two regions. A recent author,
Professor Garrod, classes Phaps and other Australian genera of
pigeons along with Zenaida and allied South American forms ;
but here again the affinity, if it exists, is so remote that the ex-
planation already given will suffice to account for it. There
remain only the penguins of the genus Hudyptes; and these
have almost certainly passed from one region to the other, but

400 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

no actual land connection is required for birds which can cross
considerable arms of the sea.

Reptiles again seem to offer no more support to the view than
do mammalia or birds. Among snakes there are no families in
common that have not a very wide distribution. Among lizards
the Gymnopthalmide are the only family that favour the
notion, since they are feund in Australia and South America,
but not in the Oriental region. Yet they occur in both the
Palearctic and Ethiopian regions, and their distribution is alto-
gether too erratic to be of any value in a ease of this kind;
and the same remarks apply to the tortoises of the family
Chelydide.

The Amphibia, however, furnish us with some more decided
facts. We have first the family of tree-frogs, Pelodryade, con-
fined to the two regions , Zitoria, a genus of the family Hylidee
peculiar to Australia, but with one species in Paraguay ; and in
the family Discoglosside, the Australian genus Chiroleptes has
its nearest ally in the Chilian genus Calyptocephalus.

Fresh-water fishes give yet clearer evidence. Three groups are
exclusively found in these two regions; Ap/ritis, a fresh-water
genus of Trachinide, has one species in Tasmania and two
others in Patagonia; the Haplochitonide inhabit only Terra del
Fuego, the Falkland Islands and South Australia; while the
genus Galaxias (forming the family Galaxide) is confined to
South Temperate America, Australia, and New Zealand. We
have also the genus Osteoglossum confined to the tropical
rivers of Eastern South America, the Indo-Malay Islands and
Australia.

It is important here to notice that the heat-loving Reptilia
afford hardly any indications of close affinity between the two
regions, while the cold-enduring amphibia and_ fresh-water
fish, offer them in abundance. Taking this fact in con-
nection with the absence of all indications of close affinity
among the mammalia and terrestrial birds, the conclusion seems
inevitable that there has been no land-connection between the
two regions within the period of existing species, genera, or
families. Yet some interchange:of amphibia and fresh-water

CHAP. XII. | THE AUSTRALIAN REGION. 401

fishes, as of plants and insects, has undoubtedly occurred, but
this has been effected by other means. If we look at a globe
we see at once how this interchange may have taken place.
Immediately south of Cape Horn we have the South Shetland
Islands and Graham’s land, which is not improbably continuous,
or nearly so, with South Victoria land immediately to the south
of New Zealand. The intervening space is partly occupied
by the Auckland, Campbell, and Macquaries’ Islands, which,
there is reason to believe are the relics of a great southern ex-
tension of New Zealand. At all events they form points which
would aid the transmission of many organisms ; and the farthest
of the Macquaries’ group, Emerald Island, is only 600 miles from
the outlying islets of Victoria land. The ova of fish will survive
a considerable time in the air, and the successful transmission of
salmon ova to New Zealand packed in ice, shows how far they
might travel on icebergs. Now there is evidently some means
by which ova or young fishes are carried moderate distances, from
the fact that remote alpine lakes and distinct river systems often
have the same species. Glaciers and icebergs generally have pools
of fresh water on their surfaces ; and whatever cause transmits fish
to an isolated pond might occasionally stock these pools, and by
this means introduce the fishes of one southern island into
another. Batrachians, which are equally patient of cold, might
be transported by similar means; while, as Mr. Darwin has so
well shown, (Origin of Species, 6th Ed. p. 345) there are various
known modes by which plants might be transmitted, and we
need not therefore be surprised that botanists find a much
greater similarity between the production of the several Southern
lands and islands, than do zoologists. It is important to notice
that, however this intercommunication was effected, it has con-
tinued down to the epoch of existing species; for Dr. Giinther
finds the same species of fresh-water fish (Galaxias attenuatus)
inhabiting Tasmania, New Zealand, the Falkland Islands, and
Temperate South America ; while another species is common to
New Zealand and the Auckland Islands. We cannot believe
that a land connection has existed between all these remote
lands within the period of existence of this one species of fish,

402 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART ILI,

not only on account of what we know of the permanence of
continents and deep oceans, but because such a connection must
have led to much more numerous and important cases of simi-
larity of natural productions than we actually find. And if
within the life of species such interchange may have taken
place across seas of greater or less extent, still more easy is it
to understand, how, within the life of genera and families, a num-
ber of such interchanges may have occurred ; yet always limited
to those groups whose conditions of life render transmission
possible. Had an actual land connection existed within the
temperate zone, or during a period of warmth in the Antarctic
regions, there would have been no such strict limitations to the
inter-migration of animals. It may be held to support the view
that floating ice has had some share in the transmission of fish
and amphibia, when we find that in the case of the narrow
tropical sea dividing Borneo from Celebes and the Moluccas, no
proportionate amount of transmission has taken place, but
numerous species, genera, and whole families, terminate abruptly
at what wé have other reasons for believing to be the furthest
limits of an ancient continent. We can hardly suppose, how-
ever, that this mode of transmission would have sufficed for
such groups as tree-frogs, which are inhabitants of the more
temperate or even warm portions of the two southern lands.
Some of these cases may perhaps be explained by the supposi-
tion of a considerable extent of land in the South-Temperate and
Antarctic regions now submerged, and by a warm or temperate
climate analogous to that which prevailed in the Arctic regions
during some part of the Miocene epoch; while others may be
due to cases of survival in the two areas of once wide-spread
groups, a view supported in the case of the Amphibia by the
erratic manner in which many of the groups are spread over
the globe.

From an examination of the facts presented by the vari-
ous classes of vertebrates, we are, then, led to the conclusion,
that there is no evidence of a former land-connection be_
tween the Australian and Neotropical regions ; but that the
various scattered resemblances in their natural productions

CHAP. XIII. ] THE AUSTRALIAN REGION. 403

that undoubtedly occur, are probably due to three distinct
causes.

First, we have the American Didelphyide, among Mammals,
and the Cracide, among birds, allied respectively to the Marsu-
pials and the Megapodiid of Australia. This is probably more
a coincidence than an affinity, due to the preservation of ancient
wide-spread types in two remote areas, each cut off from the
ereat northern continental masses, in which higher forms were
evolved leading to the extinction of the lower types. In each
of these southern isolated lands the original type would undergo
a special development; in the one case suited to an arboreal
existence, in the other to a life among arid plains.

The second case is that of the tree-frogs, and the genus Ostco-
glossum among fishes; and is most likely due to the extension
and approximation of the two southern continents, and the exist-
ence of some intermediate lands, during a warm period when
facilities would be afforded for the transmission of a few or-
ganisms by the causes which have led to the exceptional diffusion
of fresh-water productions in all parts of the world. As however
Osteoglossum occurs also in the Sunda Islands, this may be a case
of survival of a once wide-spread group.

The third case is that of the same genera and even specics of
fish, and perhaps of frogs, in the two countries ; which may
be due to transmission from island to island by the aid of float-
ing ice, with or without the assistance of more intervening
lands than now exist.

Having arrived at these conclusions from a consideration of
the vertebrata, we shall be in a position to examine how far
the same causes will explain, or agree with, the distribution of the
invertebrate groups, or elucidate any special difficulties we may
meet with in the relations of the sub-regions.

Insects.

The insects of the Australian region are as varied, and in
some respects as peculiar as its higher forms of life. As we
have already indicated in our sketch of the Oriental region, a
vast number of forms inhabit the Austro-Malay sub-region

404 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

which are absent from Australia proper. Such of these as are
common to the Malay archipelago as a whole, have been already
noted; we shall here confine ourselves more especially to the
groups peculiar to the region, which are almost all either
Australian or <Austro-Malayan, the Pacific Islands and New
Zealand being very poor in insect life.

Lepidoptera.—Australa itself is poor in butterflies, except in
its northern and more tropical parts, where green Ornithoptera
and several other Malayan forms occur. In South Australia
there are less than thirty-five species, whereas in Queensland there
are probably over a hundred. The peculiar Australian forms
are few. In the family Satyride, Xenica and Heteronympha,
with Hypocista extending to New Guinea; among the Lyce-
nide, Ogyris and Utica are confined to Australia proper, and
Hypochrysops to the region; and in Papilionide, the remark-
able Hwrycus is confined to Australia, but is allied to Huryades,
a genus found in Temperate South America (La Plata), and to
the Parnassius of the North-Temperate zone.

The Austro-Malay sub-region has more peculiar forms. Hama-
dryas, a genus of Danaide, approximates to some South American
forms ; Hyades and Hyantis are remarkable groups of Morphide;
Mynes and Prothoé are fine Nymphalide, the former extending to
Queensland ; Dicallaneura, a genus of Erycinidee, and Elodina,
of Pieride, are also peculiar forms. The fine geus group of
Papilio, and Priamus group of Ornithoptera, also belong exclu-
sively to this region.

Xois is confined to the Fiji Islands, Bletogona to Celebes, and
Acropthalmia to New Zealand, all genera of Satyride. Seven-
teen genera in all are confined to the Australian region.

Among the Sphingina, Pollanisus, a genus of Zygzenide, is
Australian ; also four genera of Castniide—Synemon, Huschemon,
Damias, and Cocytia, the latter being confined to the Papuan
islands. The occurrence of this otherwise purely South American
family in the Australian region, as well as the affinity of Zurycus
and Huryades noticed above, is interesting ; but as we have seen
that the genera and families of insects are more permanent than
those of the higher animals, and as the groups in question are

CHAP, XIII.] THE AUSTRALIAN REGiON. 405

confined to the warmer parts of both countries, they may be best
explained as cases of survival of a once wide-spread type, and
may probably date back to the period when the ancestors of the
Marsupials and Megapodii were cut off from the rest of the world.

Coleoptera.—The same remark applies here as in the Lepidop-
tera, respecting the affinity of the Austro-Malay fauna to that of
Indo-Malay Islands; but Australia proper is much richer in
beetles than in butterflies, and exhibits much more speciality.
Although the other two parts of the Australian region (Polynesia
and New Zealand) are very poor in beetles, it will, nevertheless,
on the whole compare favourably with any of the regions except
the very richest.

Cicindelide are not very abundant. TZherates and Tricondyla
are the characteristic genera in Austro-Malaya, but are absent
from Australia, where we have Z'etracha as the most character-
istic genus, with one species of Megacephala and two of Distyp-
sidera, a genus which is found also in New Zealand and some
of the Pacific Islands. The occurrence of the South American
genus, Tetracha, may perhaps be due to a direct transfer by
means of intervening lands during the warm southern period ;
but considering the permanence of coleopterous forms (as shown
by the Miocene species belonging almost wholly to existing
genera), it seems more probable that it is a case of the survival
of a once wide-spread group.

Carabid are well represented, there being no less than 94
peculiar genera, of which 19 are confined to New Zealand. The
Australian genera of most importance are Carenum (68 species),
Promecoderus (27 species), Silphomorpha (32 species), Adelotopus
(27 species), Scaraphites (25 species), Motonomus (18 species),
Gnathoxys (12 species), Hutoma (9 species), Znigma (15 species),
Lacordairea (8 species), Pamborus (8 species), Catadromus (4 spe-
cies),—the latter found in Australia and Celebes. Common to
Australia and New Zealand are Mecodema (14 species), Homalo-
soma (32 species), Dicrochile (12 species), and Scopodes (5 species).
The larger genera, confined to New Zealand only, are Metaglymma
(8 species), and Demetrida (3 species). The curious genus
Pseudomorpha (10 species), is divided between California, Brazil,

406 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

and Australia; and the Australian genera, Adelotopus, Silpho-
morpha, and Sphallomorpha, form with it a distinct tribe of Cole-
optera. These being all confined to the warmer regions, and having
so scattered a distribution, are no doubt the relics of a wide-
spread group. The Australian genus, Proniecoderus, has, how-
ever, closely allied genera (Cascelius and its allies), in Chili and
Patagonia; while two small genera confined to the Auckland
Islands (Heterodactylus and Pristancyclus) are allied to a group
found only in Terra-del-Fuego and the Falkland Islands,
(Migadops) ; and in these cases we may well believe that a direct
transmission has taken place by some of the various means
already indicated.

In Lucanide, Australia is only moderately rich, having 7
peculiar genera. The most important are Ceratognathus and Rhys-
sonotus, confined to Australia; Zissotes to Australia and New
Zealand; Lamprima to Australia and Papua. Mitophyllus and
Dendroblax habit New Zealand only ; while Syndesus is found
in Australia, New Caledonia, and tropical South America.

The beautiful Cetoniidz are poorly represented, there being
only 3 peculiar genera ;—Schizorhina, mainly Australian, but
extending to Papua and the Moluccas ; Anacamptorhina, con-
fined to New Guinea, and Sternoplus to Celebes. Lomaptera is
very characteristic of the Austro-Malay Islands. This almost
tropical family shows no approximations between the Australian
and Neotropical faunas.

In Buprestide, the Australian region is the richest, possessing
no less than 47 genera, of which 20 are peculiar to it. Of these, 15
are peculiar to Australia itself, the most important being Stig-
modera (212 species), Hthon (13 species), and Nascio (3 species) ;
Cisseis (17 species), and the magnificent Cwlodema (3 species),
are common to Australia and Austro-Malaya; while Sambus
(10 species) and A nthaxomorpha (4 species), with some smaller
groups, are peculiarly Austro-Malayan. In this family occur
several points of contact with the Neotropical region. Stegmo-
dera is said to have a species in Chili, while there are undoubt-
edly several allied genera in Chili and South Temperate America.
The genus Curis has 5 Australian and 3 Chilian species, and

CHAP. X1II.] THE AUSTRALIAN REGION. 407

Acherusia has 2 species in Brazil, 1 in Australia. These re-
semblances may probably have arisen from intercommunication
during the warm southern period, when floating timber would
occasionally transmit a few larvee of this family from island to
island across the antarctic seas. When the cold period returned,
they would spread northward, and become more or less modified
under the new physical conditions and organic competition, to
which they were subjected.

We now come to the very important group of Longicorns, in
which the Australian region as a whole, is very rich, possessing
360 genera, of which 263 are peculiar to it. Of these about 50
are confined to the Austro-Malay Islands, 12 to New Zealand,
and the remainder to Australia proper with Tasmania. Of the
genera confined to, or highly characteristic of Australia, the
following are the most important :—Cnemoplites, belonging to
the Prionide; Phoracantha, to the Cerambycide ; Zygocera,
Hebecerus, Symphyletes, and Rhytidophora, to the Lamiide.
Confined to the Austro-Malay Islands are Tethionea (Ceramby-
cide): Zmesisternus, Arrhenotus, Micracantha, and Sybra
(Lamiide) ; but there are also such Malayan genera as Batocera
Gnoma, Praonetha, and Sphenura, which are very abundant in
the Austro-Malay sub-region. A species of each of the Austra-
lian genera, Zygocera, Syllitus, and Pseudocephalus, is said to
occur in Chih, and one of the tropical American genus, Hamma-
tocherus, in tropical Australia; an amount of resemblance
which, as in the case of the Buprestide, may be imputed
to trans-oceanic migration during the Southern warm period.
This concludes our illustrations of the distribution of some of
the more important groups of Australian insects ; and it will be
admitted that we have not met with any such an amount of
identity with the fauna of Temperate South America, as to
require us to modify the conclusions we arrived at from a con-
sideration of the vertebrate groups.

Land-Shells—The distribution of many of the larger genera
of land-shells is very erratic, while others are exceedingly re-
stricted, so that it requires an experienced conchologist to
investigate the affinities of the several groups, and thus work

408 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PARY III.

out the important facts of distribution. All that can be done
here is to note the characteristic and peculiar genera, and any
others presenting features of special interest.

In the great family of the snails (Helicide), the only genera
strictly confined to the region are, Partula, now containing above
100 species, and ranging over the Pacific from the Solomon Isles
on the west, to the Sandwich Islands and Tahiti on the east;
and Achatinella, now containing nearly 300 species, and wholly
confined to the Sandwich Islands. P/feifferia is confined to the
Philippine Islands and Moluccas ; Cochlostyla to the Indo-Malay
Islands and Australia ; Bulimus occurs in most of the insular
groups, including New Zealand, but is absent from Australia.

Among the Aciculide, the widely-scattered 7runcatella is the
only genus represented. Among Diplommatinide, Diplommatina
is the characteristic genus, ranging over the whole region,
and found elsewhere as far as India, with one species in
Trinidad. The extensive family Cyclostomide, is not well
represented. Seven genera reach the Austro-Malay Islands,
one of which, Registoma, is confined to the Philippines, Moluc-
cas, New Caledonia, and the Marshall Islands. Omphalotropis
is the most characteristic genus, ranging over the whole region ;
Callia is confined to the Philippines, Ceram, and Australia ;
Realia to New Zealand and the Marquesas. The genus Helicina
alone represents the Helicinide, and is found in the whole region
except New Zealand. The number of species known from
Australia is perhaps about 300; while the Polynesian sub-region,
according to Mr. Harper Pease, contains over 600; the Austro-
Malay Islands will furnish probably 200; and New Zealand
about 100; making a total of about 1,200 species for the whole
region.

AUSTRALIAN SUB-REGIONS.

Few of the great zoological regions comprise four divisions so
strongly contrasted as these, or which present so many interesting
problems. We have first the Austro-Malay Islands, an equatorial
forest-region teeming with varied and beautiful forms of life ;
next we have Australia itself, an island-continent with its satellite

CHAP, XIII. ] THE AUSTRALIAN REGION. 409

Tasmania, both tropical and temperate, but for the most part
arid, yet abounding in peculiar forms in all the classes of animals;
then come the Polynesian Islands, another luxuriant region of
tropical vegetation, yet excessively poor in most of the higher
groups of animals as well as in some of the lower;. and lastly,
we have New Zealand, a pair of temperate forest-clad islands
far in the southern ocean, with a very limited yet strange and
almost wholly peculiar fauna. We have now to consider the
general features and internal relations of the faunas of each of
these sub-regions, together with any external relations which —
have not been discussed while treating the region as a whole.

I, Austro-Malayan Sub-region.

The central mass on which almost every part of this sub-
region is clearly dependent, is the great island of New Guinea,
inhabited by the Papuan race of mankind; and this, with the
surrounding islands, which are separated from it by shallow seas
and possess its most marked zoological features, are termed Papua.
A little further away le the important groups of the Moluccas
on one side and the Eastern Papuan Islands on the other, which
possess a fauna mainly derivative from New Guinea, yet wanting
many of its distinctive types ; and, in the case of the Moluccas
possessing many groups which are not Australian, but derived
from the adjacent Oriental region. To the south of these we
have the Timor group, whose fauna is clearly derivative, from
Australia, from Java, and from the Moluccas. Lastly comes
Celebes, whose fauna is most complex and puzzling, and, so far
as we can judge, not fundamentally derivative from any of the
surrounding islands.

Papua, or the New Guinea Group—New Guinea is very
deficient in Mammalia as compared with Australia, though this ,
apparent poverty may, in part, depend on our very scanty know-
ledge. As yet only four of the Australian families of Marsupials
are known to inhabit it, with nine genera, several of which
are peculiar. It also possesses a peculiar form of wild pig;
but as yet no other non-marsupial terrestrial mammal has been
discovered, except a rat, described by Dr. Gray as Uromys

Von. 1.—=28

410 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

aruensis, but about the locality of which there seems some
doubt. Omitting bats, of which our knowledge is very imperfect,
the Papuan Mammals are as follows :—

Family. Genus. Species.
ULC gp waa) wen, USES 1 astern limit of the genus.
Muride ... ... Uromys 1 Aru Islands (?)
Dasyuridee ... Phascogale 1 Australian genus.

es ... Antechinus 1 55 55

of .» Dactylopsila 1 To North Australia only.

- .. Myoictis J Aru islands only.
Peramelide ... Perameles 1 New Guinea only.
Macropodid... Dendrolagus 2 New Guinea only.

“5 ... Dorcopsis 2 Papua only.
Phalangistide... Cuscus 7 Celebes to New Guinea.

5 ... Belrdeus 1 Australia and Moluccas.

We have here no sign of any approach to the Mammalian
fauna of the Oriental region, for though Sus has appeared, the
Muride (rats and mice) seem to be wanting.

In Birds the case is very different, since we at once meet
with important groups, either wholly, or almost peculiar to
the Papuan fauna. According to a careful estimate, embodying
the recent discoveries of Meyer and D’Albertis, there are
350 species of Papuan land-birds comprised in 136 genera.
About 300 of the species are absolutely peculiar to the dis-
trict, while 39 of the genera are exclusively Papuan or just
extend into the Moluceas, or into North Australia where it
closely approaches New Guinea. In analysing the genera we
may set aside 31 as having a wide range, and being of no signifi-
cance in distribution; such are most of the birds of prey, with
the genera Hirundo, Caprimulgus, Zosterops ; and others widely
spread in both the Oriental and Australian regions, as Dicwwm,
Munia, Eudynamis, &e. Of the remainder, as above stated,
about 39 are peculiar to the Papuan fauna, 50 are characteristic
Australian genera ; 9 are more especially Malayan, and as much
Australian as Oriental; while 7 only, appear to be typically
Oriental with a discontinuous distribution, none of them occurring
in the Moluccas.

1 See Ann. Nat. Hist., 1873, p. 418, where the species is said to inhabit

the Aru Islands and Celelves, which renders it not improbable that it may
have been carried to the former islands from the latter.

CHAP: XIII. ] THE AUSTRALIAN REGION. 411

This Papuan fauna is so interesting and remarkable, that it
seems advisable to give lists of these several classes of generic
types.

I. Genera occurring in the Papuan Islands which are charac-
teristic of the Australian region (89). Those marked with an
asterisk are exclusively Papuan.

Sylviide... Malurus, Gerygone, Petroica, Orthonyx.

Certhiide Climacteris.

Sittide ... Sittella.

Oriclide ... ... Mimeta.

Campephagide ... Graucalus, Lalage.

Dicruride ..- *Chetorhynchus.

Muscicapidee *Peltops, Monarcha, *Leucophantes, Micreca,
Sisura, Myiagra, *Macherirhynchus, Rhi-
pidura, *Todopsis.

Pachycephalide... Pachycephala.

Laniide ... aos | “dvectes.

Corvide ... Cracticus, *Gymnocorvus.

Paradiseidx * Paradisea, *Manucodia, * Astrapia, *Parotia,
*Lophorina, *Diphyllodes, *Xanthomelus,
*Cicinnurus, *Paradigalla, *Epimachus,
* Drepanornis, *Seleucides, Ptilorhis, Al lure-
dus, * Amblyornis.

Meliphagidee Myzomela, Entomophila, Glicyphila, Ptilotis,
*Melidectes, *Melipotes, *Melirrhophetes,
Anthochera, Philemon, *Euthyrhynchus,
Melithreptes.

Nectariniide Chalcostetha, *Cosmetira.

Artamidee Artamus.

Pittide ... * Melampitta.

Cuculide *Caliechthrus,

Alcedinidee Alcyone, *Syma, Dacelo, *Tanysiptera,
* Melidora.

Podargidee Podargus, A’ gotheles,

Caprimulgide Eurostopodus.

Cacatuidee Cacatua, *Microglossus, Liemetis, * Nasiterna.

Platycercide ... Aprosmictus

Paleornithide ... Tanygnathus, Eelectus, Geoffroyus, *Cyclopsitta.

Trichoglosside ...

Trichoglossus, *Charmosyna, Hos, Lorius.

Nestoride * Dasyptilus.

Columbide Ptilopus, Carpophaga, Ianthenas, Reinward-
tenas, *Trugon, *Henicophaps, Phlogenas,
*Otidiphaps, *Goura.

Megapodiide Talegallus, Megapodius.

Falconidee * Henicopernis.

Casuariidee Casuarius.

The chief points of interest here are the richness and speciali-
zation of the parrots, pigeons, and kingfishers; the wonderful para-
dise-birds ; the honeysuckers ; and some remarkable flycatchers.

412 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART IIL.

The most prominent deficiencies, as compared with Australia,
are in Sylviidee, Timaliide, Ploceide, Platycercide,and Falconide.

II. The genera which are characteristic of the whole Malay
Archipelago are the following (10) :—

1. Erythrura ... (Ploceide) 6. Loriculus ... (Psittacide)
De elias ... (Pittide) 7. Macropygia ... (Columbide)
3. Ceya ... ... (Alcedinide) 8. Chalcophaps ... a6
4, Calao ... (Bucerotide) 9. Calenas = -
5. Dendrochelidon (Cypselide) 10. Baza ... .. (Falconide)

III. The curious set of genera apparently of Indo-Malayan
origin, but unknown in the Moluccas, are as follows :—

1. Eupetes ... (Cinclide) 4, Arachnothera (Nectariniidz)
2. Alcippe ... (Timaliide) 5. Prionochilus... (Diceeidee)
3. Pomatorhinus : 6. Eulales ... (Sturnide)

The above six birds are very important as indicating past
changes in the Austro-Malay Islands, and we must say a few
words about each. (1) Hupetes is very remarkable, since the
New Guinea birds resemble in all important characters that
which is confined to Malacca and Sumatra. They are pro-
bably the survivors of a once wide-spread Malayan group.
(2) Alcippe or Drymocataphus (for in which genus the birds
should be placed is doubtful) seems another clear case of
a typical Indo-Malayan form occurring in New Guinea and
Java, but in no intervening island. (3) Pomatorhinus is a most
characteristic Himalayan and Indo-Malayan genus, occurring
again in New Guinea and also in Australia, but in no interme-
diate island. The New Guinea bird seems as nearly related to
Oriental as Australian species. (4) <Avrachnothera is exactly
parallel to. Alcippe, occurring nowhere east of Borneo except in
New Guinea. (5) Prionochilus, a small black bird, sometimes
classed as a distinct genus, but evidently allied to the Prionochili of
the Indo-Malay Islands. (6) Hulabes, the genus which contains
the well known Mynahs of India, extends east of Java as far as
Flores, but is not found in Celebes or the Moluccas. The two New
Guinea species are sometimes classed in different genera, but they
are undoubtedly allied to the Mynahs of India and Malaya.

We find then, that while the ornitholocy of New Guinea is

CHAP. XIII. ] THE AUSTRALIAN REGION. 413
preeminently Australian in character and possesses many peculiar
developments of Australian types, it has also—as might be ex-
pected from its geographical position, its climate, and its vege-
tation—received an infusion of Malayan forms. But while one
group of these is spread over the whole Archipelago, and occa-
sionally beyond it, there is another group which presents the
unusual and interesting feature of discontinuous distribution,
jumping over a thousand miles of island-studded sea from Java
and Borneo to New Guinea itself. It is a parallel case to that
of Java in the Oriental region, which we have already discussed,
but the suggested explanation in that case is more difficult to
apply here. The recent soundings by the Challenger show us,
that although the several islands of the Moluccas are surrounded
by water from 1,200 to 2,800 fathoms deep, yet these seas form
inclosed basins with rims not more than from 400 to 900
fathoms deep, suggesting the idea of great lakes or inland seas
which have sunk down bodily with the surrounding land, or that
enormous local and restricted elevations and subsidences have
here occurred. We have also the numerous small islands and coral
banks south of Celebes and eastward towards Timor-Laut and the
Aru Islands, indicating great subsidence; and it is possible that
there was an extension of Papua to the west, approaching suffi-
ciently near to Java to receive occasional straggling birds of Indo-
Malay type, altogether independent of the Moluccas to the north.

bright Colours and Ornamental Plumage of New Guinea Birds.
—One of the most striking features of Papuan ornithology is the
large proportion which the handsome and bright-coloured birds
bear to the more obscure species. That this is really the case
has been ascertained by going over my own collections, made at
Aru and New Guinea, and comparing them with my collection
made at Malacca—a district remarkable for the number of hand-
some birds it produces. Using, as nearly as possible, the same
standard of beauty, about one-third of the Malacca birds may be
classed as handsome,! while in Papua the proportion comes out
exactly one-half. This is due, in part to the great abundance of

? I also find about this proportion in my Amazonian collections, even
counting all the humming-birds, parrots, and toucans as handsome birds.

414 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART IIL,

parrots, cockatoos, and lories, almost all of which are beautiful ;
and of pigeons, more than half of which are very beautiful; as
well as to the numerous kinefishers, most of which are excessively
brilliant. Then we have the absence of thrushes, and the very
small numbers of the warblers, shrikes, and Timaliide, which are
dull-coloured groups ; and, lastly, the presence of numerous gay
pittas, flycatchers, and the unequalled family of paradise-birds.
A large number of birds adorned with metallic plumage is also a
marked feature of this fauna, more than a dozen genera being so
distinguished, Among the remarkable forms are Peltops, a fly-
catcher, long classed as one of the Indo-Malayan Eurylemide,
which it resembles both in bill and coloration ; Machwrirhynchus,
curious little boat-billed flycatchers ; and Yodopsis, a group of ter-
restrial flycatchers with the brilliant colours of Pitta or Malurus.
The paradise-birds present the most wonderful developments of
plumage and the most gorgeous varieties of colour, to be found
among passerine birds. The great whiskered-swift, the handsomest
bird in the entire family, has its head-quarters here. Among king-
fishers the elegant long-tailed Zanysiptera are preeminent, whether
for singularity or beauty. Among parrots, New Guinea possesses
the great black cockatoo, one of the largest and most singular birds
in the order; Nasiterna, the smallest of known parrots; and
Charmosyna, perhaps the most elegant. Lastly, among the
pigeons we have the fine crowned-pigeons, the largest and most
remarkable group of the order.

Plate X. Illustrating the Ornithology of New Guinea—The
wonderful ornithological fauna we have just sketched, could
only be properly represented in a series of elaborate coloured
plates. We are obliged here to confine oufselves to representing
a few of the more remarkable types of form, as samples of the
ereat number that adorn this teeming bird-land. The large
central figure is the fine twelve-wired paradise-bird (Seleucides
albus), one of the most beautiful and remarkable of the family.
Its general plumage appears, at first sight, to be velvety black;
but on closer examination, and by holding the bird in various
lights, it is found that every part af it glows with the most ex-
quisite metallic tints—rich bronze, intense violet, and, on the

PLATE X.

SCENE IN NEW GUINEA, WITH CHARACTERISTIC ANIMALS.

CHAP. XIII. ] THE AUSTRALIAN REGION. 415

edges of the breast-feathers, brilliant green. An immense tuft of
dense plumes of a fine orange-buff colour, springs from each side
of the body, and six of these on each side terminate in a black
curled rachis or shaft, which form a perfectly unique adornment
to this lovely bird. To appreciate this wonderful family (of
which no good mounted collection exists) the reader should
examine the series of plates in Mr. Elliot’s great work on the
Paradiseidee, where every species is figured of the size of life, and
with a perfection of colouring that leaves little to be desired.

Below the Seleucides is one of the elegant racquet-tailed
king-hunters (Tanystptera galatea) whose plumage of vivid blue
and white, and coral-red bill, combined with the long spatulate
tail, renders this bird one of the most attractive of the imterest-
ing family of kingfishers. On a high branch is seated the little
Papuan parroquet (Charmosyna papuensis), one of the Tricho-
clossidee, or brush-tongued parrots,—richly adorned in red and
yellow plumage, and with an unusually long and slender tail. On
the ground is the well-known crowned pigeon (Gowra coronata,)
a genus which is wholly confined to New Guinea and a few of
the adjacent islands. One of the very few Papuan mammals, a
tree-kangaroo (Dendrolagus inustus), is seated on a high branch.
It is interesting, as an arboreal modification of a family which in
Australia is purely terrestrial; and as showing how very little
alteration of form or structure is needed to adapt an animal to
such a different mode of life.

Reptiles and Amphibia —Of these classes comparatively little
is at present known, but there is evidence that the same inter-
mixture of Oriental and Australian forms that occurs in birds and
insects, isalso found here. Dr. A. B. Meyer, the translator of this
work into German, and well known for his valuable discoveries in
New Guinea, has kindly furnished me with a manuscript list of
Papuan reptiles, from which most of the information I am able
to give is*derived.

Of Snakes, 24 genera are known, belonging to 11 families. Six
of the genera are Oriental,—Calamaria, Cerberus, Chrysopelea,
Lycodon, Chersydrus, and Ophiophagus. Four are Australian,

416 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

—Morelia, Liasis, Diemenia, and Acanthophis ; while four others
are more especially Papuan,—Dibamus (Typhlopide), Brachy-
orros—a sub-genus of the wide-spread Rhabdosoma (Calamariide),
found also in Timor ; Nardoa and Enygrus (Pythonide), ranging
from the Moluccas to the Fiji Islands. The rest are either com-
mon to the Oriental and Australian regions or of wide range.

Of Lizards also, 24 genera are recorded, belonging to 5 families.
Three only are peculiarly Oriental,—Zwmeces, Tiaris, and Nycte-
ridium ; but another, Gonyocephalus, is Malayan, ranging from
Java and Borneo to the Pelew Islands. Three are Australian,—
Cyclodus, Heteropus, and Gehyra ; while six are especially Papuan,
—Keneuxia (extending to the Philippines), Hlania, Carlia (to
North Australia), Lipinia (to the Philippine Islands), and 7Z77-
bolonotus,—all belonging to the Scincide ; and Arua belonging
to the Agamidee. We must add Cryptoblepharus, which is con-
fined to the Australian region, except a species in Mauritius.
The other genera have a wider distribution.

The preponderant Oriental element in the snakes as compared
with the lizards, is suggestive of the dispersal of the former being
dependent on floating trees, or even on native canoes, which for
an unknown period have traversed these seas, and in which
various species of snakes often secrete themselves. This seems
the more probable, as snakes are usually more restricted in their
range than lizards, and exhibit less numerous examples of wide-
spread genera and species. The other orders of reptiles present
no features of interest.

Of Amphibia only 8 genera are known, belonging to 6 families.
Rana, Hylarana, and Hyla are wide-spread genera, the former
being, however, absent from Australia. Hyperolius, Pelodryas,
Intoria, and Asterophrys are Australian; while Platymantis is
Polynesian, with a species in the Philippine Islands. Hence
it appears that the amphibia, so far as yet known, exhibit
no Oriental affinity; and this is a very suggestive fact. We
have seen (p. 29) that salt water is almost a complete barrier
to the dispersal of these creatures; so that the wholly Aus-
tralian character of the Papuan batrachia is what we might
expect, if, as here advocated, no actual land connection between

CHAP. XIII. ] THE AUSTRALIAN REGION. 417

the Oriental and Australian regions, has probably occurred during
the entire Tertiary and Post-tertiary periods.

Insects—The general character of the Papuan insects has
been sufficiently indicated in our sketch of the Entomology of
the region. We will here only add, that the metallic lustre so
prevalent among the birds, is also apparent in such insects as
Sphingnotus mirabilis,a most brilliant metallic Longicorn; Lomap-
tera wallacei and Anacamptorhina fulgida, Cetonii of intense
lustre; Calodema wallacei among the Buprestide ; and the ele-
gant blue Hupholi among the weevils. Even among moths
we have Cocytia durvillii, remarkable for its brilliant metallic
colours.

The Moluccas—The islands of Gilolo, Bouru, and Ceram, with
several smaller islands adjacent, together with Saneuir, and
perhaps Tulour or Salibaboo to the north-west, and the islands
from Ke to Timor-Laut to the south-east, form the group of the
Moluccas or Spice-Islands, remarkable for the luxuriance of
their vegetation and the extreme beauty of their birds and
insects. Their Mammalia are of Papuan character, with some
foreign intermixture. Two genera of the New Guinea marsu-
pials, Belideus and Cuscus, abound ; and we have also the wide-
spread Sus. But besides these, we find no less than five genera
of placental Mammals quite foreign to the Papuan or Australian
faunas. These are 1. Cynopithecus nigrescens, found only in the
small island of Batchian, and probably introduced from Celebes,
where the same ape occurs, 2. Viverra tangalunga, a common
Indo-Malayan species of civet, probably introduced. 3. Cervus
hippelaphus, var. Moluccensis, a deer abundant in all the islands,
very close to a Javan species and almost certainly introduced
by man, perhaps very long ago. 4. Babirusa alfurus, the
babirusa, found only in the island of Bouru, and perhaps origi-
nally introduced from Celebes. 5. Sorex sp. small shrews.
With the exception of the last, a// these species are animals
habitually domesticated and kept in confinement by the Malays ;
and when we consider that none of the smaller Mammalia of Java
and Borneo, numbering at least fifty different species, are found

418 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART, III.

in any of the Moluccas, we can hardly suppose that such large
animals as the deer and ape, could have reached them by
natural means. There is every reason to believe, therefore, that
the indigenous Mammalia of the Moluccas are wholly of Papuan
stock, and very limited in number.

The birds are much more varied and interesting. About 200
species of land-birds are now known, belonging to 85 genera. Of
the species about 15 are Indo-Malayan, 32 Papuan, and about
140 peculiar. Of the genera only two are peculiar,—Semioptera,
a paradise bird, and Lycocorax, a singular form of Corvide ; but
there is also a peculiar rail-like wader, Habroptila. One genus,
Basilornis, is found only in Ceram and Celebes ; another, Seythrops,
is Australian, and perhaps a migrant. About 30 genera are
characteristic Papuan types, and 37 others, of more or less wide
range, are found in New Guinea and were therefore probably
derived thence. There remains a group of birds which are not
found. in New Guinea, and are either Palearctic or Oriental.
These are 13 in number as follows :—

1. Monticola. 8. Corydalla.

2. Acrocephalus. 9. Hydrornis.

3. Cisticola. 10, Batrachostomus.
4, Hypolais. 11. Loriculus.

5. Criniger. 12. Treron.

6. Butalis. 13. Neopus.

7. Budytes.

Of these the Monticola, found only in Gilolo, appears to be a
straggler or migrant from the Philippine islands. <Acrocephalus,
of which four species occur, is a wide-spread group; one of
the Moluccan birds is an Australian and another a North-Asian
species, which perhaps indicates that there has long been some
migration southward from island to island, across the Moluccas.
Cisticola is a genus of very wide range, extending to Australia.
Hypolais is probably a modified form of a Chinese or Java-
nese species. Criniger is a pure Indo-Malay form, represented
here by three fine species. Butalis is a Chinese species, no
doubt straggling southward. Budytes and Corydalla are wide-
spread Oriental and Palearctic species or slight modifications of
then. Hydrornis is a Malayan form of Pittidee. Batrachostomus
is a distinct representative of a purely Indo-Malay genus. Lori-

CHAD. X11. ] THE AUSTRALIAN REGION. 419

culus is Malayan, and especially Philippine, but it reaches as far
as Mysol. Tvreron is here at its eastern limit, and is represented
in Bouru and Ceram by one of the most beautiful species.
Neopus, a Malayan eagle, is said to occur in the Moluccas. We
find then only three characteristic Indo-Malay types in the
Moluceas,—Criniger, Batrachostomus, and Treron. Allare repre-
sented by distinct and well marked species, indicating a some-
what remote period since their ancestors entered the district
but all are birds of considerable powers of flight, so that a very
iittle extension of the islands in a south-westerly direction
would afford the means of transmission, but this could not well
have been by way of Celebes, because the two former genera are
unknown in that island.

It is evident, therefore, that the Moluccas are wholly Papuan
in their zoology ; yet they are no less clearly derivative, and must
have obtained their original immigrants under conditions that
rendered a full representation of the fauna impossible. Such
remarkable and dominant types as the eleven genera of Para-
diseidze, with Cracticus, Rectes, Todopsis, Machwrirhynchus, Gery-
gone, Dacelo, Podargus, Cyclopsitta, Microglossum, Nasiterna, Chal-
copsitta, and Gouwra,—all characteristic Papuan groups, found in
almost all the islands and most of them very abundant, are yet
totally absent from the Moluccas. Taking this, in conjunction
with the absence of the two genera of Papuan kangaroos and
the other smaller groups of marsupials, and we must be
convinced that the Moluccas cannot be mere fragments of the
old Papuan land, or they would certainly, in some one or other
of their large and fertile islands, have preserved a more com-
plete representation of the parent fauna. Most of the Moluccan
birds are very distinct from the allied species of New Guinea ;
and this would imply that the entrance of the original forms
took place at a remote period. The two peculiar genera with
clearly Papuan affinities, show the same thing. The cassowary,
found only in the large island of Ceram and distinct from any
Papuan species, would however seem to have required a land
connection for its introduction, almost as much as any of the
larger mammalia.

420 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. - [PART III.

Taking all the facts into consideration, I would suggest as the
. most probable explanation, that if the Moluccas ever formed part
of the main Papuan land, they were separated at an early date,
and subsequently so greatly submerged as to destroy a large
proportion of their fauna. They have since risen, and have
probably been larger than at present, and rather more closely
approximated to the parent land, whence they received’a con-
siderable immigration of such animals as were adapted to cross
narrow seas. This gave them several Papuan forms, but still
left them without a number of the types more especially con-
fined to the forest depths, or powerful enough to combat the
gales which often blow weaker flyers out to sea. Most of the
birds whose absence from the Moluccas is so conspicuous belong
to one or other of these classes.

Among the most characteristic birds of the Moluccas are the
handsome crimson lories of the genera Lorius and Kos. These
are found in every island (but not in Celebes or the Timor
group); and a fine species of Hos, peculiar to the small islands of
Siau and Sanguir, just north of Celebes, obliges us to place
these with the Moluccas instead of with the former island, to
which they seem most naturally to belong. The crimson parrots
of the genus Lclectus are almost equally characteristic of the
Moluccas, and add greatly to the brilliancy of the ornithology of
these favoured islands. ;

Reptiles—The Reptiles, so far as known, appear to agree in
their distribution with the other vertebrates. In some small
collections from Ceram there were no less than six of the genera
peculiar to the Australian region, and which were before only
known from Australia itself. These are, of snakes, Ziasis and
Enygrus, genera of Pythonide ; with Diemenia and Acanthophis
(Elapide) ; of lizards, Cyclodus, a genus of Scincide; and of
Amphibia, a tree-frog of the genus Pelodryas.

Insects—Peculiarities of the Moluccan Fauwna.—In insects the
Moluccas are hardly, if at all, inferior to New Guineaitself. The
islands abound in grand Papilios of the largest size and extreme
beauty ; and it is a very remarkable fact, that when the closely-
allied species of the Moluccas and New Guinea are compared,

CHAP. XIII.] THE AUSTRALIAN REGION. 421

the former are almost always the largest. As examples may be
mentioned, Ornithoptera priamus and O. helena of the Moluccas,
both larger than the varieties (or species) of Papua; Papiliw
ulysses and deiphobus of Amboyna, usually larger than their
allies in New Guinea; Hestia idea, the largest specizs of the
genus; Diadema pandarus and Charaxes euryalus, both larger
than any other species of the same genera in the whole archi-
pelago. Itis to be noted also, that in the Moluccas, the very
largest specimens or races seem always to come from the small
island of Amboyna; even those of Ceram, the much larger island
to which it is a satellite, being almost always of less dimensions.
Among Coleoptera, the Moluccas produce Luchirus longimanus,
one of the largest and most remarkable of the Lamellicornes ;
Sphingnotus dunningi, the largest of the Austro-Malayan Tme-
sisternine ; a Sphenura, the largest and handsomest of an exten-
sive genus; an unusually large Schizorhina (Cetoniide) ; and
some of the most remarkable and longest-horned Anthotribide.
Even in birds the same law may be seen at work,—in the Tany-
siptera nais of Ceram, which has a larger tail than any other in
the genus ; in Centropus goliath of Gilolo, being the largest and
longest-tailed species; in Hydrornis maximus of Gilolo, the
largest and perhaps the most elegantly and conspicuously
coloured of all the Pittide; in Platycercus amboinensis, being
pre-eminent in its ample blue tail ; inthe two Moluccan lories
and Hos rubra, being more conspicuously red than the allied New
Guinea species; and in Megapodius wallacei of Bouru, being the
only species of the genus conspicuously marked and banded.
All these examples, of larger size, of longer tails or other
appendages, and of more conspicuous colouring, are probably
indications of a less severe struggle for existence in these islands
than in the larger tract of New Guinea, with a more abundant
and more varied fauna; and this may apply even to the smaller
islands, as compared with the larger in the immediate vicinity.
The limited number of forms in the small islands compared
with a similar area in the parent land, implies, perhaps, less
competition and less danger; and thus allows, where all other
conditions are favourable, an unchecked and continuous de-

422 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

velopment in size, form, and colour, until they become positively
injurious. This law may not improbably apply to the New
Guinea fauna itself, as compared with that of Borneo or any
other similar country ; and some of its peculiarities (such as its
wonderful paradise-birds) may be due to long isolation, and con-
sequent freedom from the influence of any competing forms.
The difference between the very sober colours of the Coleoptera,
and in a less degree of the birds, of Borneo, as compared with
their brilliancy in New Guinea, always struck me most forcibly,
and was long without any, even conjectural, explanation. It is
not the place here to go further into this most curious and
interesting subject. The reader who wishes for additional facts
to aid him in forming an opinion, should consult Mr. Darwin’s
Descent of Man, chapters x. to xv.; and my own Contributions
to the Theory of Natural Selection, chapters ii. and iv.

Timor Group —Mammalia.—In the group of islands between
Java and Australia, from Lombok to Timor inclusive, we find a
set of mammals similar to those of the Moluccas, but some of
them different species. A wide-spread species of Cuseus repre-
sents the Papuan element. A Sorex and a peculiar species of
wild pig, we may also accept as indigenous. Three others have
almost certainly been introduced. These are, (1.) Macacus eyno-
molgus, the very commonest Malay monkey, which may have
crossed the narrow straits from island to island between Java
and Timor, though it seems much more probable that it was in-
troduced by Malays, who constantly capture and rear the young
of this species. (2.) Cervus timoriensis, a deer, said to be a dis-
tinct species, inhabits Timor, but it is probably only a variety of
the Cervus hippelaphus of Java. This animal is, however, much
more likely to have crossed the sea than the monkey. (3.) Para-
doxurus fasciatus, takes the place of Viverra tangalunga in the
Moluccas, both common and wide-spread civets which are often
kept in confinement by the Malays. The Felis megalotis, long
supposed to be a native of Timor, has been ascertained by Mr.
Elliot to belong to a different country altogether.

Birds.—The birds are much more interesting, since they are

CHAP, XIII. ] THE AUSTRALIAN REGION. 423

sufficiently numerous to allow us to determine their relations,
and trace their origin, with unusual precision. There are 96
genera and 160 species of land-birds known to inhabit this group
of islands ; and ona careful analysis, they are found to be almost
equally relatéd to the Australian and Oriental regions, 30 geuera
being distinctly traceable to the former, and the same number to
the latter. Their connection with the Moluccas is shown by the
presence of the genera Mimeta, Geoffroyus, Cacatua, Ptilopus, and
Ianthenas, together with Megapodius and Cerchneis represented
by Moluccan species. Zuracena shows a connection with
Celebes, and Scops is represented by a Celebesian species. The
connection with Australia is shown by the genera Sphecothera,
Gerygone, Myragra, Pardalotus, Gliciphila, Amadina, and Apros-
mictus ; while Milvus, Hypotriorchis, Eudynamis, and Eurysto-
mus, are represented by Australian species. Other genera con-
fined to or characteristic of the Australian region, are Rhipidura,
Monarcha, Artamus, Campephaga, Pachycephala, Philemon, Ptilo-
tis, and Myzomela.

We now come to the Indo-Malay or Javan element represented
by the following genera:

nod

1. Turdus (T.) 11. Oriolus. 21. Yungipicus.

2. Geocichla (T.) 12. Pericrocotus. 22. Merops.

3. Zoothera. 13. Cyornis (T.) 23. Pelargopsis.

4, Megalurus (T.) 14. Hypothymis. 24. Ceyx.

5. Orthotomus. 15, Tchitrea. 25. Loriculus.

6. Pratincola (T.) 16. Lanius (T.) 26. Treron (T.)

7. Oreicola (T.) 17. Anthreptes. 27. lotreron (s.g. of Ptilopus).
8. Drymocataphus (T.) 18. Eulabes. 28. Chalcophaps (T.)

9. Parus. 19. Estrilda (T.) 29, Gallus (T.)

10. Pycnonotus, 20. Erythrura (T.) 30. Strix.

Such genera as Merops and Striz, which are as much Austra-
lian as Oriental, are inserted here because they are represented by
Javan species. The list is considerably swelled by genera which
have reached Lombok across the narrow strait from Baly, but
have passed no further. Such are Zoothera, Orthotomus, Pycno-
notus, Pericrocotus and Strix. A much larger number (12) stop
short at Flores, leaving only 13, indicated in the list by (T) after
their names, which reach Timor. It is evident, therefore, that
these islands have been stocked from three chief sources,—the

424 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

Moluccas (with New Guinea and Celebes,) Australia, and Java.
The Moluccan forms may well have arrived as stragglers from
island to island, aided by whatever facilities have been afforded
by lands now submerged. Most of the remainder have been de-
rived either from Australia or from Java; and as their relations
to these islands are very interesting, they must be discussed
with some detail.

Origin of the Timorese Fauna.—We must first note, that 80
species, or exactly one-half of the land-birds of the islands, are
peculiar and mostly very distinct, intimating that the immigra-
tion commenced long enough back to allow of much specific
modification. There is also one peculiar genus of kinefishers,
Caridonax, found only in Lombok and Flores, and more allied
to Australian than to Oriental types. The fine white-banded
pigeons (s. g. Leucotreron) are also almost peculiar ; one other
less typical species only being known, a native of N. Celebes.
In order to compare the species with regard to their origin, we
must first take away those of wide distribution from which no
special indications can be obtained. In this case 49 of the land-
birds must be deducted, leaving 111 species which afford good
materials for comparison. These, when traced to their origin,
show that 62 came from some part of the Australian region, 49
from Java or the Oriental region. But if we divide them into
two groups, the one containing the species zdentical with those
of the Australian or Oriental regions, the other containing allied
or representative species peculiar to the islands, we have the fol-
lowing result :

Species common to the Timorese Islands and the Oriental Region 30
Peculiar Timorese species allied to those of the Oriental Region 19

Total Safe uF? ae AR £6. Bo? eg 9

Species common to the Timorese Islands and the Australian
Region soe ae ee nad ste se a ae
Peculiar Timorese species allied to those of the Australian Region 44
Total ae ae Ba ee ve sae se Gm

This table is very important, as indicating that the connection

CHAP, XIII. ] THE AUSTRALIAN REGION. 425

with Australia was probably earlier than that with Java; since
the majority of the Australian species have become modified,
while the majority of the Oriental species have remained un-
changed. This is due, no doubt, in part to the continued im-
migration of fresh individuals from Java, after that from Australia,
the Moluccas and New Guinea had almost wholly ceased. We
must also notice the very small proportion of the genera, either
of Australia or Java, that have found their way into these islands,
many of the largest and most wide-spread groups in both coun-
tries being altogether absent. Taking these facts into considera-
tion, it is pretty clear that there has been no close and long-
continued approximation of these islands to any part of the
Australian region ; and it is also probable that they were fairly
stocked with such Australian groups as they possess before the
immigration from Java commenced, or a larger number of cha-
racteristic Oriental forms would have been able to have estab-
lished themselves.

On looking at our map, we find that a shallow submerged bank
extends from Australia to within about twenty miles of the coast
of Timor; and this is probably an indication that the two
countries were once only so far apart. This would have allowed
the purely Australian types to enter, as they are not numerous;
there being about 6 Australian species, and 10 or 12 representa-
tives of Australian species, in Timor. All the rest may have been
derived from the Moluccas or New Guinea, being mostly wide-
spread genera of the Australian region; and the extension of
Papua in a south-west direction towards Java (which was sug-
gested as a means of providing New Guinea with peculiar Indo-
Malay types not found in any other part of the region) may
have probably served to supply Timor and Flores with the mass
of their Austro-Malayan genera across a narrow strait or arm of
the sea. Lombok, Baly, and Sumbawa were probably not then
in existence, or nothing more than small volcanic cones rising
out of the sea, thus leaving a distance of 300 miles between
Flores and Java. Subsequently they grew into islands, which
offered an easy passage for a number of Indo-Malay genera

into such scantily piocked territories as Flores and Timor. The
Vou. [.—29

426 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

north coast of Australia then sank, cutting off the supply from
that country ; and this left the Timorese group in the position it
now occupies.

The reptiles and fishes of this group are too little known to
enable us to make any useful comparison.

Insects—The insects, though not numerous, present many fine
species, some quite unlike any others in the Archipelago. Such
are—Papilio liris, Pieris lta, Cirrochroa lamarckii and C. lesche-
naultit among butterflies. The Coleoptera are comparatively little
known, but in the insects generally the Indo-Malay element pre-
dominates. This may have arisen from the peculiar vegetation
and arid climate not being suitable to the Papuan insects. Why
Australian forms did not establish themselves we cannot conjec-
ture ; but the field appears to have been open to immigrants from
Java, the climate and vegetation of which island at its eastern ex-
tremity approximates to that of the Timorese group. The insects
are, however, so peculiarly modified as to imply a very great anti-
quity, and this is also indicated by a group of Sylviine birds here
classed under Oretcola, but some of which probably form distinct
genera. There may, perhaps, have been an earlier and a later
approximation to Java, which, with the other changes indicated,
would account for most of the facts presented by the fauna of
these islands. One deduction is, at all events, clear: the ex-
treme paucity of indigenous mammals along with the absence of
so many groups of birds, renders it certain that the Timorese
islands did not derive their animal life by means of an actual
union with any of the large islands either of the Australian or
the Oriental regions.

Celebes Group—We now come to the Island of Celebes, in
many respects the most remarkable and interesting in the whole
region, or perhaps on the globe, since no other island seems to
present so many curious problems for solution. We shall there-
fore give a somewhat full account of its peculiar fauna, and
endeavour to elucidate some of the causes to which its zoological
isolation may be attributed.

Mammalia.—The following is the list of the mammalia of

CHAP, XIII. ] THE AUSTRALIAN REGION. 427

Celebes as far as at present known, though many small species
may yet be discovered.

1. Cynopithecus nigrescens. 7. Barbirusa alfurus.

2. Tarsius spectrum. 8. Sciurus (5 peculiar sp.)

3. Viverra tangalunga. 9. Mus (2 peculiar sp.)

4. Cervus hippelaphus. 10. Cuscus (2 peculiar sp.)

5. Anoa depressicornis. Also 7 species of bats, of
6. Sus celebensis. which 5 are peculiar.

The first—a large black ape—is itself an anomaly, since it is
not closely allied to any other form of quadrumana. Its flat
projecting muzzle, large superciliary crests and maxillary ridges,
with the form and appearance of its teeth, separate it altogether
from the genus Macacus, as represented in the Indo-Malay isl-
ands, and ally it closely to the baboons of Africa.’ We have al-
ready seen reason to suppose that it has been carried to Batchian,
and there is some doubt about the allied species or variety (C7.
niger) of the Philippines being really indigenous there; in which
case this interesting form will remain absolutely confined to Cel-
ebes. (2.) The tarsier is a truly Malayan species, but it is said to
occur in a small island at the northern extremity of Celebes and
on some of the Philippine islands. It might possibly have been
introduced there. (3) and (4)—a civet and a deer—are, almost cer-
tainly, as in the Moluccas, introduced species. (5.) Anoa depressicor-
nis, This is one of the peculiar Celebesian types; a small straight-
horned wild-bull, anatomically allied to the buffaloes, and some-
what resembling the bovine antelopes of Africa, but having no
near allies in the Oriental region. (6.) Sus Celebensis ; a peculiar
species of wild-pig. (7.) Babirusa alfurus ; another remarkable
type, having no near allies. It differs in its dentition from the
typical Suide, and seems to approach the African Phacocheeride.
The manner in which the canines of the upper jaw are reversed,
aud grow directly upwards in a spiral curve over the eyes, is
unique among mammalia. (8.) Five squirrels inhabit Celebes, and
all are peculiar species. (9.) These are forest rats of the sub-genus
Gymnomys, allied to Australian species. 10. Cuscus. This typical

1 The general form of the skull agrees best with that of Cynocephalus
mormon, the largest and most typical of the African baboons ; while the
position of the nostrils brings it nearer the macaques.

428 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. : [PART I.

Australian form is represented in Celebes by two peculiar
species.

Leaving out the Indo-Malay species, which may probably have
been introduced by man, and are at all events comparatively
recent immigrants; and the wild pig, a genus which ranges over
the whole archipelago and which has therefore little significance,
we find two genera which have come from the Australian side,
—Cuscus and Mus ; and four from the Oriental side,—Cynopi-
thecus, Anoa, Babirusa, and Sciurus. But Sciwrus alone corre-
sponds to Cuscus, as a genus still inhabiting the adjacent islands;
the other three being not only peculiar to Celebes, but incapable
of being affiliated to any specially Oriental group. We seem, then,
to have indications of two distinct periods; one very ancient,
when the ancestors of the three peculiar genera roamed over some
unknown.continent of which Celebes formed, perhaps, an outlying
portion ;—another more recent, when from one side there entered
Sciurus, and from the other Cuscus. But we must remember
that the Moluccas to the east, possess scarcely any indigenous
mammals exeept Cuscus; whereas Borneo and Java on the west,
have nearly 50 distinct genera. It is evident then, that the
facilities for immigration must have been much less with the
Oriental than with the Australian region, and we may be pretty
certain that at this later period there was no land connection
with the Indo-Malay islands, or some other animals than squirrels
would certainly have entered. Let us now see what light is
thrown upon the subject by the birds.

Birds.—The total number of birds known to inhabit Celebes
is 205, belonging to about 150 genera. We may leave out of
consideration the wading and aquatic birds, most of which are
wide-ranging species. There remain 123 genera and 152 species
of land-birds, of which 9 genera and 66 species are absolutely
confined to the island, while 20 more are found also in the Sula
or Sanguir Islands, so that we may take 86 to be the number of
peculiar Celebes species. Lord Walden, from whose excellent
paper on the birds of Celebes (Zrans. Zool. Soc. vol. viii. p. 23)
most of these figures are obtained, estimates, that of the species
which are not peculiar to Celebes, 55 are of Oriental and 22 of

CHAP, XIII.] THE AUSTRALIAN REGION. 429

Australian origin, the remainder being common to both regions.
This shows a preponderant recent immigration from the West
and North, which is not to be wondered at when we look at the
long coast line of Java, Borneo, and the Philippine islands, with
an abundant and varied bird population, on the one side, and
the small scattered islands of the Moluccas, with a compara-
tively scanty bird-fauna, on the other.

But, adopting the method here usually followed, let us look
at the relations of the genera found in Celebes, omitting for
the present those which are peculiar to it. I divide these genera
into two series :—those which are found in Borneo or Java but
not in the Moluccas, and those which inhabit the Moluccas and
not Borneo or Java; these being the respective sources from
which, primd facie, the species of these genera must have been
derived. Genera which range widely into both these districts
are rejected, as teaching us nothing of the origin of the Cele-
besian fauna. In a few cases, sub-genera which show a decided
eastern or western origin, are given.

GENERA DERIVED FROM BORNEO AND JAVA.

1. Geocichla. 9. Nectarophila. 17. Hydrocissa.
2. Pratincola (sp.) 10. Anthreptes (sp.) 18. Cranorrhinus.
3. Trichastoma. 11. Munia (sp.) 19. Lyncornis.
4. Oriolus (sp.) 12. Acridotheres, 20. Treron (sp.)
5. Cyornis 13. Yungipicus. 21. Gallus (sp.)
6. Hypothymis. 14. Mulleripicus. 22. Spilornis.
7. Hylocharis. 15, Rhamphococcyx. 23. Butastur.
8. Aithopyga. 16. Hierococcyx. 24. Pernis.
GENERA DERIVED FROM THE Motuccas or Timor.
1. Graucalus (sp.) 6. Tanygnathus. 11. Myristicivora (s. g.)
2. Chalcostetha. 7. Trichoglossus. 12. Ducula (s. g.)
3. Myzomela. 8. Sceythrops (sp.) 13. Zoncenas (s. g.)
4. Munia (sp.) 9. Turaccena. 14. Lamproteron (s. g.)
5. Cacatua (sp.) 10. Reinwardtcenas (sp.) 15. Megapodius.

These tables show a decided preponderance of Oriental
over Australian forms. But we must remember that the imme-
diately adjacent lands from whence the supply was derived, is

430 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART I11.

very much richer in the one case than in the other. The 24
genera derived from Borneo and Java are only about one fourth
of the characteristic genera of those islands; while the 15
Moluccan and Timorese genera are fully one third of their
characteristic types. The proportion derived from the Australian,
is greater than that derived from the Oriental side.

We shall exhibit this perhaps more clearly, by giving a list of
the important groups of each set of islands which are absent
from Celebes.

Important Families of Java and Borneo Important Families of the Moluccas
absent from Celebes. absent from Celebes.

1. Eurylemide. 5. Laniide.

2. Timaliide. 6. Megaleemide. 1. Meliphagide.

3. Phyllornithide. 7. Trogonide.

4. Pycnonotide 8. Phasianide.

Additional important genera of Java or Important genera of the Moluccas
Borneo absent from Celebes. absent from Celebes.

1. Orthotomus. 1. Mimeta.
2. Copsychus. ° 2. Monarcha.
3. Enicurus. 3. Rhipidura.
4, Tchitrea. 4, Pachycephala.
5. Pericrocotus. — 5. Lycocorax.
6. Irena. 6. Alcyone.
7. Platylophus. 7. Tanysiptera.
8. Dendrocitta. 8. Geoffroyus.
9. Eulabes. 9. Eclectus,
10. Hemicercus. 10. Platycercus.
11. Chrysocolaptes. 11. Eos.
12. Tiga. 12. Lorius.

13. Micropternus.
14, Batrachostomus.
15. Palzornis.

16. Rollulus.

If we reckon the absent families to be each represented by
only two important genera, we shall find the deficiency on the
Oriental side much the greatest; yet those on the side of the
Moluccas are sufficiently remarkable. The Meliphagide are not
indeed absolutely wanting, since a Myzomela has now been
found in Celebes; but all its larger and more powerful forms
which range over almost the entire region, are absent. This
may be balanced by the absence of the excessively abundant
Timaliide of the Indo-Malay islands, which are represented by

CHAP. XIII. ] THE AUSTRALIAN REGION. 431

only a single species; and by the powerful Phasianide, repre-
sented only by the common Malay jungle fowl, perhaps intro-
duced. The entire absence of Pycnonotide is a very anomalous
fact, since one of the largest genera, Criniger, is well represented
in several islands of the Moluccas, and one has even been found
in the Togian islands in the great northern inlet of Celebes ;
but yet it passes over Celebes itself. Ceyz, a genus of small
kinefishers, is a parallel case, since it is found everywhere from
India to New Guinea, leaving out only Celebes; but this comes
among those curiosities of the Celebesian fauna which we shall
notice further on. In the list of genera derived from Borneo or
Java, no less than 6 are represented by identical species (indi-
cated by sp. after the name); while in the Moluccan list 5
are thus identical. These must be taken to indicate, either that
the genus is a recent introduction, or that stragglers still occa-
sionally enter, crossing the breed, and thus preventing specific
modification. In either case they depend on the existing state
of things, and throw no light on the different distribution of
land and sea which aided or checked migration in former times ;
and they therefore to some extent diminish the weight of the
Indo-Malay affinity, as measured by the relations of the peculiar
species of Celebes.

From our examination of the evidence thus far—that is, taking
account firstly, of the species, and, secondly, of the genera, which
are common to Celebes and the groups of islands between which
it is situated, we must admit that the connexion seems rather
with the Oriental than with the Australian region; but when we
take into account the proportion of the genera and species pre-
sent, to those which are absent, and giving some weight to the
greater extent of coast line on the Indo-Malay side, we seem
justified in stating that the Austro-Malay element is rather the
most fully represented. This result applies both to birds and
mammals ; and it leads us to the belief, that during the epoch of
existing species and genera, Celebes has never been united with
any extensive tract of land either on the Indo-Malay or Austro-
Malay side, but has received immigrants from both during a very
long period, the facilities for immigration having been rather the

432 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

greatest on the Austro-Malay or Australian side. We have now
to consider what further light can be thrown on the subject by
the consideration of the peculiar genera of Celebes, and of those
curiosities or anomalies of distribution to which we have
referred.

Nine genera of birds are altogether peculiar to Celebes ; three
more are found only in one other island, and seem to be typi-
cally Celebesian ; while one is found in the Sula islands (which
belongs to the Celebes group) and probably exists in Celebes
also. The following is a list of these 13 genera:

1. Artamides... (Campephagide) 8. Monachalcyon (Alcedinide)
2. Streptocitta.. (Corvide) 9. Cittura ... .

3. Charitornis.. 5 10. Ceycopsis ... ‘

4, Gazzola, (s. g.) xy 11. Meropogon .. (Meropide)

5. Basilornis .. (Sturnide) 12. Prioniturus. (Psittacidz)

6. Enodes - 13. Megacephalon (Megapodiide)
7. Scissirostrum my

Of the above, Artamides, Monachalcyon, Cittwra, and Megace-
phalon, are modifications of types characteristic of the Australian
region. All are peculiar to Celebes except Cittwra, found also in
the Sanguir islands to the northward, but which seems to belong
to the Moluccan group. Streptocitta, Charitornis, and Gazzola,
are peculiar types of Corvide; the two former allied to the
magpies, the latter to the jackdaws. Charitornis is known only
from the Sula islands east of Celebes, and is closely related to
Streptocitta. There is nothing comparable to these three groups
in any of the Malay islands, and they seem to have relations
rather with the Corvide of the old-world northern continent.
Basilornis, Enodes, and Scissirostrum, are remarkable forms of
Sturnide. Basilornis has a beautiful compressed crest, which in
the allied species found in Ceram is elongated behind. nodes
has remarkable red superciliary streaks, but seems allied to
Calornis. Scissirostrum seems also allied to Calornis in general
structure, but has a very peculiarly formed bill and nostrils. We
can hardly say whether these three forms show more affinity to
Oriental or to Australian types, but they add to the weight of
evidence as to the great antiquity and isolation of the Celebesian
fauna. Scissirostrwm has been classed with Huryceros, a Mada-

CHAP, XIII. ] THE AUSTRALIAN REGION. 433

gascar bird, and with Buphaga, an African genus; but the pecu-
liar beak and nostrils approximate more to Cracticus and its
allies, of the Australian region, which should probably form a
distinct family. Ceycopsis is undoubtediy intermediate between
the Malayan Ceyx and the African Jspidina, and is therefore es-
pecially interesting. Meropogon is a remarkable form of bee-
eater, allied to the Indo-Malayan Nyctiornis. Prionitwrus (the
raquet-tailed parrots) of which two species inhabit Celebes, and
one the Philippines, appears to be allied to the Austro-Malayan
Geoffroyus.

We must finally notice a few genera found in Celebes, whose
nearest allies are not in the surrounding islands, and which thus
afford illustrations of discontinuous distribution. The most re-
markable, perhaps, is Coracias, of which a fine species inhabits
Celebes ; while the genus is quite unknown in the Indo-Malay
sub-region, and does not appear again till we reach Burmah and
India ; and the species has no closer affinity for Indian than for
African forms. Myialestes, a small yellow flycatcher, is another
exmple; its nearest ally (M. cinercocapilla) being a common Indian
bird, but unknown in the Malay islands. The Celebesian bird
described by me as Prionochilus aureolimbatus, is probably a
third case of discontinuous distribution, if (as a more careful
examination seems to show) it is not a Prionochilus, but con-
generic with Pachyglossa, a bird only found in the Himalayas.
The fine pigeon, Carpophaga forsteni, belongs to a group found in
the Philippines, Australia, and New Zealand; but the Celebes
species is very distinct from all the others, and seems, if any-
thing, more allied to that of New Zealand.

The Sula islands (Sula-mangola, Sula-taliabo, and Sula-besi)
lie midway between Celebes and the Moluccas, being 80 miles
from the nearest part of Celebes, with several intervening
islands, and 40 miles from Bouru, all open sea. Their birds
show, as might be expected, a blending of the two faunas, but
with a decided preponderance of that of Celebes. Out of 43
land birds which have been collected in these islands, we may
deduct 6 as of wide range and no significance. Of the 37 re-
maining, 21 are Celebesian species, and 4 are new species but

434 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. (PART I.

allied to those of Celebes; while there are 10 Moluccan species
and 2 new species allied to those of the Moluccas. It is curious
that no less than 3 Moluccan genera, quite unknown in Celebes
itself, occur here,—Monarcha, Pachycephala, and Criniger ; but all
these, as well as several other of the Moluccan birds, are rather
weak flyers, and such as are likely to have been carried across
by strong winds. Of the genera, 23 are from Celebes, 10 from
the Moluccas. These facts show, that the Sula islands form part
of the Celebes group, although they have received an infusion of
Molucecan forms, which will perhaps in time spread to the main
island, and diminish the remarkable individuality that now cha-
racterises its fauna.

Insects.—Of the reptiles and fishes of Celebes we have not
sufficient information to draw any satisfactory conclusions. I
therefore pass to the insects of which something more is
known.

The Butterflies of Celebes are not very numerous, less than
200 species in all having been collected ; but a very large pro-
portion of them, probably three-fourths of the whole, are peculiar.
There is only one peculiar genus, A mechania, allied to Zethera (a
eroup confined to the Philippine Islands), with which it should
perhaps be united. Most of the genera are of wide distribution
in the archipelago, or are especially Malayan, only two truly
Australian genera, Hlodina and Acropthalmia, reaching Celebes.
On the other hand, 7 peculiar Oriental genera are found in Celebes,
but not further east, viz., Clerome, Adolias, Kuripus, Apatura,
Limenitis, Tolaus, and Leptocircus. . There are also several indi-
cations of a direct affinity with the continent rather than with
Malaya, as in the cases already enumerated among birds. A
fine butterfly, yet unnamed, almost exactly resembles Dichorra-
gia nesimachus, a Himalayan species. Huwripus robustusis closely
allied to E. halitherses of N. India; there are no less than 5 species
of Limenitis, all quite unlike those found in other parts of the
archipelago. The butterflies of Celebes are remarkably distin-
euished from all others in the East, by peculiarities of form, size,
and colour, which run through groups of species belonging to
different genera. Many Papilionide and Pieride, and some

CHAP, XIII. ] THE AUSTRALIAN REGION. 435

Nymphalide, have the anterior wings elongated, with the apex
often acute, and, what is especially remarkable, an abrupt bend
or shoulder near the base of the wing. (See Malay Archipelago,
3rd Ed. p. 281, woodcut.) No less than 13 species of Papilio, 10
Pieride, and 4 or 5 Nymphalide, are thus distinguished from
their nearest allies in the surrounding islands or in India. In
size again, a large number of Celebesian butterflies stand pre-
eminent over their allies. The fine Papilios—adamantius, blumet,
and gigon—are perfect giants by the side of the closely-allied
forms of Java ; while P. androcles is the largest and longest-tailed,
of all the true swallow-tailed group of the Old World. Among
Nymphalide, the species of Rhinopalpa and Euripus, peculiar to
Celebes, are immensely larger than their nearest allies; and
several of the Pieride are also decidedly larger, though in a less
marked degree. In colour, many of the Celebesian butterflies differ
from the nearest allied species; so that they acquire a singu-
larity of aspect which marks them off from the rest of the group.
The most curious case is that of three buttertlies, belonging
to three distinct genera (Cethosia myrina, Messaras mceonides,
and Atella celebensis) all having a delicate violet or lilac gloss in
lines or patches, which is wholly wanting in every allied species
of the surrounding islands. These numerous peculiarities of
Celebesian butterflies are very extraordinary ; and imply isolation
from surrounding lands, almost as much as do the strange forms
of mammals and birds, which more prominently characterise this
interesting island.

Of the Coleoptera we know much less, but a few interesting
facts may be noted. There are a number of fine species of
Cicindela, some of peculiar forms; and one Odontochila, a South
American genus; while Collyris reaches Celebes from the
Oriental region. In Carabide it has one peculiar genus, Dicra-
speda ; and a species of the fine Australian genus Catadromus.
In Lucanidee it has the Oriental genus, Odontolabris. In Ceton-
iidee it has a peculiar genus, Sfernoplus, and several fine Cetonie ;
but the characteristic Malayan genus, Lomaptera, found in every
other island of the archipelago from Sumatra to New Guinea,
is absent—an. analogous fact to the case of Ceya among birds.

436 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

In Buprestide, the principal Austro-Malay genus, Sambus, is
found here; while Sponsor, a genus 8 species of which inhabit
Mauritius, has one species here and one in New Guinea. In
Longicorns there are four peculiar genera, Comusia, Pytholia,
Bityle, and Ombrosaga ; but the most important features are the
occurrence of the otherwise purely Indo-Malayan genera Age-
lasta, Nyctimene, and Astathes; and of the purely Austro-
Malayan <Arrhenotus, Trysimia, Xenolea, Amblymora, Diallus,
and gocidnus. The remaining genera range over both portions
of the archipelago. In the extensive family of Curculionide
we can only notice the elegant genus, Celebia, allied to Hupho-
lus, which, owing to its abundance and beauty, is a conspicuous
feature in the entomology of the island.

Origin of the fauna of Celebes—We have now to consider,
briefly, what past changes of physical geography are indicated
by the curious assemblage of facts here adduced. We have
evidently, in Celebes, a remnant of an exceedingly ancient land,
which has undergone many and varied revolutions; and the
stock of ancient forms which it contains must be taken account
of, when we speculate on the causes that have so curiously
limited more recent immigrations. Going back to the arrival
of those genera which are represented in Celebes by peculiar
species, and taking first the Austro-Malay genera, we find
among them such groups as Zonenas (s.g.), Phlogenas, Leuco-
treron (s.g.), and Turacwna, which are not found in the Moluccas
at all; and Myzomela, found in Timor and Banda, but not in
Ceram or Bouru, which are nearest to Celebes. This, combined
with the curious absence of so many of the commonest Moluccan
genera, leads to the conclusion that the Austro-Malay immigra-
tion took place by way of Timor and the southern part of New
Guinea. It will be remembered, that to account for the Indo-
Malayan forms in New Guinea, we suggested an extension of
that country in a westerly direction just north of Timor. Now
this is exactly what we require, to account for the stocking
of Celebes with the Australian forms it possesses. At this time
Borneo did not approach so near, and it was at a somewhat later
period that the last great Indo-Malay migration set in; but

CHAP. XIII. ] THE AUSTRALIAN REGION. 437

finding the country already fairly stocked, comparatively few
groups were able to establish themselves.

Going back a little farther, we come to the entrance of those
few birds and insects which belong to India or Indo-China; and
this probably occurred at the same time as that continental
extension southward, which we found was required to account for
a similar phenomenon in Java. Celebes, being more remote,
received only a few stragglers. We have now to go much
farther back, to the time when the ancestors of the peculiar
Celebesian genera entered the country, and here our conjectures
must necessarily be less defined.

On the Australian side we have to account for Megacephalon,
and the other genera of purely Papuan type. It may perhaps
be sufficient to say, that we do not yet know that these genera,
or some very close allies, do not still exist in New Guinea; in
which case they may well have entered at the same time with
the species, already referred to. If, on the other hand, they are
really as isolated as they appear to be, they represent an earlier
communication, either by an approximation of the two islands
over the space now occupied by the Moluccas; or, what is per-
haps more probable, through a former extension of the Moluccas,
which have since undergone so much subsidence, as to lead to
the extinction of a large proportion of their ancient fauna.
The wide-spread volcanic action, and especially the prevalence of
raised coral-reefs in almost all the islands, render this last
supposition very probable.

On the Oriental side the difficulty is greater; for here we find,
what seem to be clear indications of a connection with Africa, as
well as with Continental Asia, at some immensely remote epoch.
Cynopithecus, Babirusa, and Anoa ; Ceycopsis, Streptocitta, and Gaz-
zola (s. g.), and perhaps Scissirostrwm, may be well explained as
descendants of ancestral types in their respective groups, which
also gave rise to the special forms of Africa on the one hand, and of
Asia on the other. For this immigration we must suppose, that at
a period before the formation of the present Indo-Malay Islands,
a great tract of land extended in a north-westerly direction, till
it met the old Asiatic continent. This may have been before

438 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

the Himalayas had risen to any great height, and when a large
part of what are now the cold plateaus of Central Asia may
have teemed with life, some forms of which are preserved in
Africa, some in Malaya, and a few in Celebes. Here may
have lived the common ancestor of Sus, Babirwsa, and Phaco-
cherus ; as well as of Cynopithecus, Cynocephalus, and Macacus ;
of Anoa and Bubalus; of Scisstrostrwm and Euryceros ; of Ceyzx,
Ceycopsis, and Ispidina. Such an origin accounts, too, for the
presence of the North-Indian forms in Celebes ; and it offers less
difficulties than a direct connection with continental Africa, which
once appeared to be the only solution of the problem. If this
south-eastward extension of Asia occurred at the same time as
the north-eastward extension of South Africa and Madagascar,
the two early continents may have approached each other suffi-
ciently to have allowed of some interchange of forms: Tarsvus
may be the descendant of some Lemurine animal that then
entered the Malayan area, while the progenitors of Cryptoprocta
may then have passed from Asia to Madagascar.

It is true that we here reach the extremest limits of specula-
tion ; but when we have before us such singular phenomena as
are presented by the fauna of the island of Celebes, we can hardly
help endeavouring to picture to our imaginations by what past
changes of land and sea (in themselves not improbable) the actual
condition of things may have been brought about.

IT. Australia and Tasmania, or the Australian Sub-region.

A general sketch of Australian zoology having been given in the
earlier part of this chapter, it will not be necessary to occupy much
time on this sub-region, which is as remarkably homogeneous as
the one we have just left is heterogeneous. Although much of
the northern part of Australia is within the tropics, while Vic-
toria and Tasmania are situated from 36° to 43° south latitude,
there is no striking change in the character of the fauna
throughout the continent ; a number of important genera extend-
ing over the whole country, and giving a very uniform character
to its zoology. The eastern parts, including the colonies of New
South Wales and Queensland, are undoubtedly the richest, several

PATE. xo,

i
|

hy lh
vir

I

TH

i

ih

Nora
NEN mtn

TASMANIA, WITH CHARACTERISTIC MAMMALIA,

A SCENE IN

CHAP. XIII] THE AUSTRALIAN REGION. 439

peculiar types being found only here. The southern portion is
somewhat poorer, and has very tew peculiar forms; and Tasmania
being isolated is poorer still, yet its zoology has much resem-
blance to that of Victoria, from which country it has evidently
not been very long separated. The north, as far as yet known, is
characterised by hardly any peculiar forms, but by the occurrence
of a number of Papuan types, which have evidently been derived
from New Guinea.

Mammalia.—The Australian sub-region contains about 160
species of Mammalia, of which 3 are Monotremata, 102 Marsu-
pials, 23 Chiroptera, 1 Carnivora (the native dog, probably not
indigenous), and 31 Muride. The north is characterised by a
species of the Austro-Malayan genus Cuscus. Phascolarctos (the
koala, or native bear) is found only in the eastern districts ;
Phascolomys (the wombat) in the south-east and Tasmania;
Petaurista (a peculiar form of flying opossum) in the east. Thy-
lacinus (the zebra-wolf), and Sarcophilus (the “native devil”),
two carnivorous marsupials, are confined to Tasmania. West
Australia, the most isolated and peculiar region botanically,
alone possesses the curious little honey-eating Tarsipes, and the
Peragalea, or native rabbit. The remarkable Myrmecobius, a
small ant-eating marsupial, is found in the west and south;
and Onychogalea, a genus of kangaroos, in West and Central
Australia. All the other genera have a wider distribution, as
will be seen by a reference to the list at the end of this
chapter.

Plate XI. A Scene in Tasmania, with Characteristic Mammalia.
—As some of the most remarkable Mammalia of the Australian*
region are now found only in Tasmania, we have chosen this
island for the scene of our first illustration of the fauna of the
Australian sub-region. The pair of large striped animals are
zebra-wolves (Thylacinus cynocephalus), the largest and most de-
structive of the carnivorous marsupials. These creatures used to
be tolerably plentiful in Tasmania, where they are alone found.
They are also called “native tigers,” or “ native hyzenas;” and being
destructive to sheep, they have been destroyed by the farmers
and will doubtless soon be exterminated. In the foreground on

440 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

the left is a bandicoot (Perameles gunnii). These are delicate little
animals allied to the kangaroos ; and they are found in all parts of
Australia, and Tasmania, to which latter country this species
is confined. On the right is the wombat (Phascolomys wombat),
a root-eating marsupial, with large incisor teeth lke those of our
rodents. They inhabit south-east Australia and Tasmania. In
the foreground is the porcupine ant-eater (Echidna setosa), belong-
ing to a distinct order of mammalia, Monotremata, of which the
only other member is the duck-billed Ornithorhynchus. These
animals are, however, more nearly allied to the marsupials, than
to the insectivora or edentata of the rest of the world, which in
some respects they resemble. An allied species (Hehidna hystrix)
inhabits south-east Australia.

Birds.—Australia (with Tasmania) possesses about 630 species
of birds, of which 485 are land-birds. Not more than about one-
twentieth of these are found elsewhere, so that it has a larger
proportion of endemic species than any other sub-region on the
globe. These birds are divided among the several orders as
follows :

Passeres ... ... 306 ACCIPITES 2.2) e
Picarize ftawee 41 Grallee oR, owed ese
Psittaci A Dee (30) Amseres!’ ices ees GD
Columb ... ... 24 Struthiones ae 3
Galline ... ... 5

The Psittaci, we see, are very richly represented, while the
-Picarize are comparatively few ; and the Columbe are scarce
as compared with their abundance in the Austro-Malay sub-
region.

Birds seem to be very evenly distributed over all Australia ;
comparatively few genera of importance being locally re-
stricted. In the eastern districts alone, we find Origma,
and Orthonyz (Sylviidee) ; Sericulus and Ptilorhynchus (Para-
diseidee); Lewcosarcia (Columbide) ; and Talegalla (Megapodiide).
Nectarinia, Pitta, Ptilorhis, Chlamydodera, and Sphecotheres,
range from the north down the east coasts. Nanodes (Psittacide),
and Lipoa (Megapodiide), are southern forms, the first extending

CHAP. XIII. ] THE AUSTRALIAN REGION. 441

to Tasmania; which island appears to possess no peculiar
genus of birds except Hudyptes, one of the penguins. West
Australia has no wholly peculiar genus except Geopsittacus, a
curious form of ground parroquet; the singular Atrichia, first
found here, having been discovered in the east. In North
Australia, Hmblema (Ploceidz) is the only peculiar Australian
genus, but several Austro-Malayan and Papuan genera enter,—
as, Syma and Tanysiptera (Alcedinide) ; Macherihynchus
(Muscicapide) ; Calornis (Sturnidee) ; Manucodia, Ptilorhis, and
Hluredus (Paradiseide) ; Megapodius ; and Caswarius. The pre-
sence of a species of bustard (Hupodotis) in Australia. is very
curious, its nearest allies being in the plains of India and Africa.
Among waders the genus Zribonyx, a thick-legged bird some-
what resembling the Notornis of New Zealand, though not closely
allied to it, is the most remarkable. The district where the
typical Australian forms most abound is undoubtedly the eastern
side of the island. The north and south are both somewhat
poorer, the west much poorer, although it possesses a few very
peculiar forms, especially among Mammalia. Tasmania is the
poorest of all, a considerable number of genera being here want-
ing; but, except the two peculiar carnivorous marsupials, it
possesses nothing to mark it off zoologically from the adjacent
parts of the main land. It is probable that its insular climate,
more moist and less variable than that of Australia, may not be
suitable to some of the absent forms ; while others may require
more space and more varied conditions, than are offered by a
comparatively small island.

The remaining classes of animals have been already discussed
in our sketch of the region as a whole (p. 396).

Plate XII. Illustrating the Fauna of Australia—tn this
plate we take New South Wales as our locality, and represent
chiefly, the more remarkable Australian types of birds. The
most conspicuous figure is the wonderful lyre-bird (Menura su-
perba), the elegant plumage of whose tail is altogether unique in
the whole class of birds. The unadorned bird is the female. In
the centre is the emu (Dromeus nove-hollandie), the represen-
tative in Australia, of the ostrich in Africa and America, but be-

Vou. I.—30

442 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY, {PART III.

longing to a different family, the Casurariide. To the right are
a pair of crested pigeons (Ocyphaps lophotes), one of the many sin-
gular forms of the pigeon family to which the Australian re-
gion gives birth. In every other part of the globe pigeons are
smooth-headed birds, but here they have developed three dis-
tinct forms of crest, as seen in this bird, the crowned pigeon
figured in Plate X., and the double-crested pigeon, (Lopholeemus
antarcticus). The large bird on the tree is one of the Australian
frog-mouthed goat-suckers (Podargus strigoides), which are
called in the colony “ More-pork,” from their peculiar cry. They
do not capture their prey on the wing like true goat-suckers, but
hunt about the branches of trees at dusk, for large insects, and
also for unfledged birds. A large kangaroo (Macropus giganteus)
is seen in the distance ; and passing through the air, a flying
opossum (Petaurus sciwrews), a beautiful modification of a marsu-
pial, so as to resemble in form and habits the flying squirrels
of the northern hemisphere. .

ITI, The Pacifie Islands, or Polynesian Sub-region.

Although the area of this sub-region is so vast, and the
number of islands it contains almost innumerable, there is a
considerable amount of uniformity in its forms of animal life.
From the Ladrone islands on the west, to the Marquesas on the
east, a distance of more than 5,000 miles, the same characteristic
genera of birds prevail; and this is the only class of animals on
which we can depend, mammalia being quite absent, and reptiles
very scarce. The Sandwich Islands, however, form an exception
to this uniformity; and, as far as we yet know, they are so
peculiar that they ought, perhaps, to form a separate sub-region.
They are, however, geographically a part of Polynesia; and a
more careful investigation of their natural history may show
more points of agreement with the other islands. It is therefore
a matter of convenience, at present, to keep them in the Poly-
nesian sub-region, which may be divided into Polynesia proper
and the Sandwich Islands.

Polynesia proper consists of a number of groups of islands of
some importance, and a host of smaller intermediate islets,

‘STVNINY OLSIMGLOVYVHO HLIM ‘SATVM HLAOS MON dO SNIVTd FHL

eo SM a i

‘ ai

he

Hit

UX GLV Id

%a)

™. * - 4
& 7
: ' u a 5 > A .
ii ¢ . / oe
, P - ?
_
< a i ‘i pe.
A Nat 4 x. o
ne , 9 a =. f j
. . a -
; : . = 7 % >-
Z ‘ aps ;
5 3 : . :
: * « ' 4 r
| F i Pus
4 a ; ,
s +
i
- a
: ; hs F
; ” he — a
.
;
ra i 7 ’
a . + e :
‘ : . ' ae :
j : 2 *
= = i . ~
: ‘ ; : . 7 A “et. a
_ —.
; . : i: i] sy . -*
7 - = * = :
= r <= 5 :
: a ; 5 : J ;
| : : f ¥ . ul : > wa
’ “ 7 - m # i ;
: Jom * ‘. rd
: : y \ |
a a é "
‘ ; e : al ‘ «
“ haat i Es ;

CHAP. X111.] THE AUSTRALIAN REGION. 443

For the purpose of zoological comparison, we may class them in
four main divisions. 1. The Ladrone and Caroline Islands;
2. New Caledonia and the New Hebrides; 3. The Fiji, Tonga,
and Samoa Islands; 4. The Society, and Marquesas Islands.
The typical Polynesian fauna is most developed in the third
division ; and it will be well to describe this first, and then show
how the other islands diverge from it, and approximate other
sub-regions.

Fiji, Tonga, and Samoa Islands——The land-birds inhabiting
these islands belong to 41 genera, of which 17 are characteristic
of the Australian region, and 9 more peculiarly Polynesian.
The characteristic Australian genera are the following: Petroica
(Sylviide) ; Zalage (Campephagide) ; Monarcha, Myiagra, Rhipi-
dura (Muscicapide); Pachycephala (Pachycephalide) ; Rectes
(Laniide) ; Myzomela, Ptilotis, Anthochera (Meliphagide) ; Ama-
dina, Eythrura, (Ploceide) ; Artamus (Artamide) ; Lorivs (Tri-
choglosside) ; Ptilopus, Phlogenas (Columbide); Megapodius
(Megapodiide).

The peculiar Polynesian genera are :-—Tature, Lamprolia
(Sylviidee) ; Aplonis, Sturnodes (Sturnide); Todiramphus
(Alcedinide) ; Pyrhulopsis, Cyanoramphus, (Platycercide) ; Cori-
philus (Trichoglossidee) ; Diduneulus (Didunculide).

The wide-spread genera are Turdus, Zosterops, Hirundo, Hal-
cyon, Collocalia, Eudynamis Cuculus, Ianthenas, Carpophaga,
Turtur, Haliceetus, Astur, Circus, Strix, Asio. The aquatic birds
are fifteen in number, all wide-spread species except one—a form
of moor-hen (Gallinulide), which has been constituted a new
genus Pareudiastes.

Society, and Marquesas Islands—Here, the number of genera of
land-birds has considerably diminished, amounting only to 16
in all. The characteristic Australian genera are 5 ;—Monarcha,
Anthochera, Trichoglossus, Ptilopus, and Phlogenas. The Poly-
nesian genera are 4;—Tatare, Todiramphus, Cyanoramphus,
Coriphilus, and one recently described genus, Serresius, an ex-
traordinary form of large fruit pigeon, here classed under Car-
pophaga. These remote groups have thus all the character of
Oceanic islands, even as regards the rest of Polynesia, since they

444 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART II.

possess hardly anything, but what they might have received
by immigration over a wide extent of ocean.

Ladrone, and Caroline Islands—These extensive groups of
small islands are very imperfectly known, yet a considerable
number of birds have been obtained. They possess two
peculiar Polynesian genera, Zatare and Stwrnodes ; one peculiar
sub-genus, Psammathia (here included under Acrocephalus) ;
and ten of the typical Australian genera found in Polynesia,—
Lalage, Monarcha, Myiagra, Rhipidura, Myzomela, Erythrura,
Artamus, Phlogenas, Ptilopus, and Megapodius, as. well as the
Papuan genus Rectes, and the Malayan Calornis ;—so that they
can be certainly placed in the sub-region. Genera which do
not occur in the other Polynesian islands are, Acrocephalus, (s.g.
Psammathia) originally derived perhaps from the Philippines ;
and Caprimulgus, a peculiar species, allied to one from Japan.

New Caledonia, and the New Hebrides—Although these islands
seem best placed with Polynesia, yet they form a transition to
Australia proper, and to the Papuan group. They possess 30
genera of land-birds, 18 of which are typical of the Australian
region ; but while 13 are also Polynesian, there are 5 which do
not pass further east. These are Acanthiza, Hopsaltria, Gliet-
phila, Philemon, and Ianthenas. The peculiar Polynesian genus,
Aplonis, of which three species inhabit New Caledonia, link it to
the other portions of the sub-region. The following are the
genera at present known from New Caledonia :—TZurdus, Acan-
thiza, Campephaga, Lalage, Myiagra, Rhipidura, Pachycephala,
Eopsaltria, Corvus, Physocorax (s.g. of Corvus, allied to the jack-
daws), Glicphila, Anthochera, Philemon, Zosterops, Erythrura,
Aplonis, Artamus, Cuculus, Haleyon, Collocalia, Cyanoramphus,
Trichoglossus, Ptilopus, Carpophaga, Macropygia, Lanthanas,
Chalcophaps, Haliastur, Accipiter. The curious Rhinochetus
jubatus, forming the type of a distinct family of birds (Rhino-
chetidee), allied to the herons, is only known from New Cale-
donia.

It thus appears, that not more than about 50 genera and 150
species of land-birds, are known from the vast number of islands
that are scattered over the Central Pacific, and it is not probable

CHAP. XIII. THE AUSTRALIAN REGION. 445

that the number will be very largely increased. Some of the
species, as the Hudynamis taitensis and Tatare longirostris, range
over 40° of longitude, from the Fiji Islands to the Marquesas. In
other genera, as Cyanoramphus and Ptilopus, each important
island or group of islands, has its peculiar species. The connec-

tion of all these islands with each other, on the one hand, and
their close relation to the Australian region, on the other, are
equally apparent; but we have no sufficient materials for specu-
lating with any success, on the long series of changes that have
brought about their existing condition, as regards their peculiar
forms of animal life.

Sandwich Islands—This somewhat extensive group of large
islands, is only known to contain 11 genera and 18 species of
indigenous land-birds ; and even of this small number, two birds
of prey are wide ranging species, which may well have reached the
islands during their present isolated condition. These latter are,
Strix delicatula, an ow] spread over Australia and the Pacific ;
and Asio accipitrinus,a species which has reached the Galapagos
from S. America, and thence perhaps the Sandwich Islands. Of
the remaining 8 genera, one is a crow (Corvus hawaiensis), and
another a fishing eagle (Pandion solitarius), of peculiar species ;
leaving 7 genera, which are all (according to Mr. Sclater) peculiar.
First we have Chasiempis,a genus of Muscicapide, containing
two species (which may however belong to distinct genera) ; and
as the entire family is unknown on the American continent
these birds must almost certainly be allied to some of the
numerous Muscicapine forms of the Australian region. Next
we have the purely Australian family Meliphagide, represented
by two genera,—Moho, an isolated form, and Chetoptila, a genus
established by Mr. Sclater for a bird before classed in Entomyza,
an Australian group. The four remaining genera are believed
by Mr. Sclater to belong to one group, the Drepanidide, altogether
confined to the Sandwich Islands. Two of them, Drepanis and
Hemignathus, with three species each, are undoubtedly allied ;
the other two, Loxops and Psitlirostra, have usually been classed
as finches. The former seem to approach the Diczeide ; and all
resemble this group in their coloration.

446 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART HI.

The aquatic birds and waders all belong to wide-spread
genera, and only one or two are peculiar species.

The Sandwich Islands thus possess a larger proportion of
peculiar genera and species of land-birds than any other group
of islands, and they are even more strikingly characterised by
what seems to be a peculiar family. The only other class of
terrestrial animals at all adequately represented on these islands,
are the land shells; and here too we find a peculiar family, sub-
family, or genus (Achatinella or Achatinellidz) consisting of a
number of genera, or sub-genera,— according to the divergent views
of modern conchologists,—and nearly 300 species. The Rev. J.
T. Gulick, who has made a special study of these shells on the
spot, considers that there are 10 genera, some of which are con-
fined to single islands. The species are so restricted that their
average range is not more than five or six square miles, while
some are confined to a tract of only two square miles in extent,
and very few range over an entire island. Some species are
confined to the mountain ridges, others to the valleys; and each
ridge or valley possesses its peculiar species. Considerably
more than half the species occur in the island of Oahu, where
there is a good deal of forest. Very few shells belonging to
other groups occur, and they are all small and obscure; the
Achatinellz almost monopolising the entire archipelago.

Remarks on the probable past history of the Sandwich Islands.
—The existence of these peculiar groups of birds and land-
shells in so remote a group of volcanic islands, clearly indicates
that they are but the relics of a more extensive land; and the
reefs and islets that stretch for more than 1,000 miles in a west-
north-west direction, may be the remains of a country once
sufficiently extensive to develope these and many other, now
extinct, forms of life.

Some light may perhaps be thrown on the past history of the

1 A new genus of Beetles (Apterocyclus) of the family Lucanide, has
recently been described from the Sandwich Islands, and it is said to be most
nearly related to a group inhabiting Chili,—an indication either of the great
antiquity of the fauna, or of the varied accidental migrations from which it
has had its origin.

CHAP. XIII. ] THE AUSTRALIAN REGION. 447

Sandwich Islands, by the peculiar plants which are found on
their mountains. The peak of Teneriffe produces no Alpine
plants of European type, and this has been considered to prove
that it has been always isolated ; whereas the occurrence of North
Temperate forms on the mountains of Java, accords with other evi-
dence of this island having once formed part of the Asiatic con-
tinent. Now on the higher summits of the Sandwich Islands,
nearly 30 genera of Arctic and North Temperate flowering plants
have been found. Many of these occur also in the South Temperate
zone, in Australia or New Zealand; but there are others which
seem plainly to point to a former connection with some North
Temperate land, probably California, as a number of islets are
scattered in the ocean between the two countries. The most
interesting genera are the following :—Silene, which is wholly
North Temperate, except that it occurs in S, Africa; Vicza,
also North Temperate, and in South Temperate America;
Fragaria, with a similar distribution; Aster, widely spread
in America, otherwise North Temperate only ; Vaccinium,
wholly confined to the northern hemisphere, in cold and
temperate climates. None of these are found in Australia or
New Zealand ; and their presence in the Sandwich Islands
seems clearly to indicate a former approximation to North
Temperate America, although the absence of any American
forms of vertebrata renders it certain that no actual land con-
nection ever took place.

Recent soundings have shown, that the Sandwich Islands
rise from asea which is 3,000 fathoms or 18,000 feet deep ;
while there is a depth of at least 2,000 fathoms all across to
California on one side, and to Japan on the other. Between
the Fiji Islands, New Caledonia, the Solomon Islands, and
Australia, the depth is about 1,300 fathoms, and between Sydney
and New Zealand 2,600 fathoms; showing, in every case, a
general accordance between the depth of sea and the approxi-
mation of the several faunas. In a few more years, when it is
to be hoped we shall know the contour of the sea-bottom better
than that of the continents, we shall be able to arrive at more
definite and trustworthy conclusions as to the probable changes

448 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

of land and sea by which the phenomena of animal distribution
in the Pacific have been brought about.

Reptiles of the Polynesian Sub-region—The researches of
Mr. Darwin on Coral Islands, proved, that large areas in the
Pacific Ocean have been recently subsiding; but the peculiar
forms of life which they present, no less clearly indicate the
former existence of some extensive lands. The total absence of
Mammalia, however, shows either that these lands never formed
part of the Australian or Papuan continents, or if they did, that
they have been since subjected to such an amount of subsidence
as to exterminate most of their higher terrestrial forms of life.
It is a remarkable circumstance, that although Mammalia (except
bats) are wanting, there are a considerable number of reptiles
ranging over the whole sub-region. Lizards are the most
numerous, five families and fourteen genera being represented,
as follows :—

1. Cryptoblepharus (Gymnopthalmide) Fiji Islands.

2. Ablepharus ... All the islands.

3. Lygosoma__.... (Seincidee) ... Pelew Islands, New Caledonia.
4, Mabouya see 5 ... Samoa Islands.

5, Euprepes “Ae ¥ ... Pacific Islands.

6. Dactyloperus ... (Geckotid) ... Sandwich Islands.
7. Doryura ... (Geckotide) ... Pacific Islands.

8. Gehyra sae “6 ... Fiji Islands.

9. Amydosaurus ... Fs ... Tahiti.

10. Heteronota ... a ... Fiji Islands.

11. Correlophus ... 5 ... New Caledonia.
12. Brachylophus ... (Iguanide) ... Fiji Islands.

13. Lophura ... (Agamidee) ... Pelew Islands.
14. Chioroscartes ... 3 ... Fiji Islands.

The first five are wide-spread genera, represented mostly by
peculiar species; but sometimes the species themselves have a
wide range, as in the case of Ablepharus paciloplewrus, which |
(according to Dr. Giinther) is found in Timor, Australia, New
Caledonia, Savage Island (one of the Samoa group), and the
Sandwich Islands! Gehyra and Heteronota are Australian
genera; while Lophura has reached the Pelew Islands from the
Moluccas. The remainder (printed in italics), are peculiar genera ;
Brachylophus being especially interesting as an example of an _

CHAP. XIU. | THE AUSTRALIAN REGION. 449

otherwise peculiar American family,*occurring so far across the
Pacific.

Snakes are much less abundant, cnly four genera being repre-
sented, one of them marine. They are, Anoplodipsas, a peculiar
genus of Amblycephalide from New Caledonia; Enygrus, a
genus of Pythonide from the Fiji Islands; Ogmodon, a peculiar
genus of Elapide, also from the Fiji Islands, but ranging to
Papua and the Moluccas ; and Platurus, a wide-spread genus of
sea-snakes (Hydrophid). In the more remote Sandwich and
Society Islands there appear to be no snakes. This accords
with our conclusion that lizards have some special means of
‘dispersal over the ocean which detracts from their value as
indicating zoo-geographical affinities ; which is further proved
by the marvellous range of a single species (referred to above)
from Australia to the Sandwich Islands.

A species of Hyla is said to inhabit the New Hebrides, and
several species of Platymantis (tree-frogs) are found in the Fiji
Islands; but otherwise the Amphibians appear to be unrepre-
sented in the sub-region, though they will most likely be found
in so large an island as New Caledonia.

From the foregoing sketch, it appears, that although the
reptiles present some special features, they agree on the whole
with the birds, in showing, that the islands of Polynesia
all belong to the Australian region, and that in the Fiji Is-
lands is to be found the fullest development of their peculiar
fauna.

IV. New Zealand Sub-region.

The islands of New Zealand are more completely oceanic
than any other extensive tract of land, being about 1,200
miles from Australia and nearly the same distance from New
Caledonia and the Friendly Isles. There are, however, several
islets scattered around, whose productions show that they
belong to the same sub-region ;—the principal being, Norfolk
Island, Lord Howe’s Island, and the Kermadec Isles, on the
north ; Chatham Island on the east ; the Auckland and Mac-
quarie Isles on the south;—and if these were once joined to

450 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART IL.

New Zealand, there would have been formed an island-con-
tinent not much inferior in extent to Australia itself.

New Zealand is wholly situated in the warmer portion of
the Temperate zone, and enjoys an exceptionally mild and
equable climate. It has abundant moisture, and thus comes
within the limits of the South-Temperate forest zone; and this
leads to its productions often resembling those of the tropical,
but moist and wooded, islands of the Pacific, rather than those
of the temperate, but arid and scantily wooded plains of Aus-
tralia. The two islands of New Zealand are about the same
extent (approximately) as the British Isles, but the difference in
the general features of their natural history is very great. There
are, in the former, no mammalia, less than half as many birds,
very few reptiles and fresh-water fishes, and an excessive and
most unintelligible poverty of insects; yet, considering the
situation of the islands and their evidently long-continued
isolation, the wonder rather is that their fauna is so varied
and interesting as it is found to be. Our knowledge of this
fauna, though no doubt far from complete, is_ sufficiently
ample; and it will be well to give a pretty full account of
it, in order to see what conclusions may be drawn as te its
origin.

Mammalia—The only mammals positively known as indi-
genous to New Zealand are two bats, both peculiar to i1t,—/Scoto-
philus tuberculatus and Mystacina tuberculata. The former is
allied to Australian forms; the latter is more interesting, as
being a peculiar genus of the family Noctilionide, which does
not exist in Australia; and in having decided resemblances to
the Phyllostomide of South America, so that it may almost be
considered to be a connecting link between the two families. A
forest rat is said to have once abounded on the islands, and to
have been used for food by the natives ; but there is much doubt
as to what it really was, and whether it was not an introduced
species. The seals are wide-spread antarctic forms which have
no geographical significance.

Birds.—About 145 species of birds are natives of New Zealand,
of which 88 are waders or aquatics, leaving 57 land-birds belong-

CHAP. XIII. ] THE AUSTRALIAN REGION. 451

ing to 34 genera. Of this latter number, 16, or nearly half, are
peculiar; and there are also 5 peculiar genera of waders and
aquatic birds, making 21 in all. Of the remaining genera of
land-birds, four are cosmopolite or of very wide range, while the
remainder are characteristic of the Australian region. The
following is a list of the Australian genera found in New
Zealand: Spheneacus, Gerygone, Orthonyx (Sylviide); Graucalus
(Campephagidee) ; Rhipidura (Muscicapide) ; Anthochera (Meli-
phagide) ; Zosterops (Diceide); Cyanoramphus (Platycercide) ;
Carpophaga (Columbidx); Hieracidea (Falconide) ; Tribonya
(Rallide). Besides these there are several genera of wide
range, as follows:—Anthus (Motacillide); Hirundo (Hirun-
dinide) ; Chrysococcyx, Hudynamis (Cuculidee) ; Halcyon (Alce-
dinidz) ; Cotwrniz (Tetraonidee); Circus (Falconidee) ; Athene
(Strigidze).

Most of the above genera are represented by peculiar New
Zealand species, but in several cases the species are identical
with those of Australia, as in the following: Anthochera carun-
culata, Zosterops lateralis, Hirundo nigricans, and Chrysococcyx
lucidus ; also one—Hudyndmis taitensis—which is Polynesian.

We now come to the genera peculiar to New Zealand, which
are of especial interest :

.
List oF GENERA OF Birps Precutiar to NEw ZEALAND,
No. of
Family and Genus. Species. Remarks.
SYLVIID®.
1, Myiomoira... 60 3 Alliedto Petroica,an Australian genus
2. Miro ... ae ot 2 it i if ‘
TIMALIIDE (?)
3. Turnagra sae oe 2 Of doubtful affinities.
Sirrip#.
4. Xenicus Mic wes 8 Of doubtful affinities.
5. Acanthisitta ... sere 1 Of doubtful affinities.
PARID. m4
6. Certhiparus ... a 2 Of doubtful affinities.
MELIPHAGID.
7. Prosthemadera Ae 1 Peculiar genera of honeysuckers, a

—

8. Pogonornis Boe family which is confined to the
9. Anthornis... eee 3 Australian Region.

452 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. _ [part It,

No of
Family and Genus, Species, Remarks.
STURNIDE.
10. Creadion oe see 2 These three genera are probably
11. Heterolocha ... oak 1 allied, and perhaps form a dis-
12. Calleas aes ist 2 tinct family.
NESTORIDZ.
13. Nestor... She ens 3 A peculiar family of Parrots.
STRINGOPIDE.
14. Stringops _... ah 1 A peculiar family of Parrots.
STRIGID.
15. (Sceloglaux) ... ak 1 s.g. of Athene.
RALuip#.
16. Ocydromus ... Ae 6 Allied to Hulabeornis, an Australian
genus.
17. Notornis eA wn 1 Allied to Porphyrio, a genus of wide
range,
CHARADRIID&.
18. Thinornis ar as 1
19. Anarhynchus ... as Ih
ANATIDE.
20. Hymenolzemus ae 1 Allied to Malacorhynchus, an Aus-
tralian genus.
APTERYGIDE.
21. Apteryx oan eee 4 Forming a peculiar family.

We have thus a wonderful amount of speciality; yet the afti-
nities of the fauna, whenever they can be traced, are with Aus-
tralia or Polynesia. Nine genera of New Zealand birds are
characteristically Australian, and the eight genera of wide range
are Australian also. Of the peculiar genera, 7 or 8 are undoubtedly
allied to Australian groups. There are also four Australian and
one Polynesian species. Even the peculiar family, Nestoride, is
_ allied to the Australian Trichoglossidee. We have therefore every
gradation of similarity to the Australian fauna, from identical
species, through identical genera, and allied genera, to distinct
but allied families; clearly indicating very long continued yet
rare immigations from Australia or Polynesia; immigrations which
are continued down to our day. For resident ornithologists be-
lieve, that the Zosterops lateralis has found its way to New Zea-
land within the last few years, and that the two cuckoos now
migrate annually, the one from Australia, the other from some

CHAP. XIII.] THE AUSTRALIAN REGION. 453

part of Polynesia, distances of more than 1,000 miles! These
facts seem, however, to have been accepted on insufficient evidence
and to be in themselves extremely improbable. It is observed
that the cuckoos appear annually in certain districts and again
disappear ; but their course does not seem to have been traced,
still less have they ever been actually seen arriving or departing
across the ocean. In a country which has still such wide tracts
of unsettled land, it is very possible that the birds in question
may only move from one part of the islands to another.

Islets of the New Zealand Sub-region.

We will here notice the smaller islands belonging to the sub-
region, as it is chiefly their birds that possess any interest.

Norfolk Island.—The land-birds recorded from this island
amount to 15 species, of which 8 are Australian, viz.: Climac-
teris scandens, Symmorphus leucopygius, Zosterops tenuirostris and
Z. albogqularis, Haleyon sanctus, Platycercus pennanti, Carpophaga
spadicea, Phapspicata and P. chalcoptera. Of the peculiar
species three belong to Australian genera ; Petroica, Gerygone, and
Rhipidura ; one to a cosmopolitan genus, Turdus. So far the
affinity seems to be all Australian, and there remain only three
birds which ally this island to New Zealand,—Nestor productus,
Cyanoramphus rayneri, and Notornis alba. The former inhabited
the small Phillip Island (close to Norfolk Island) but is now extinct.
Being a typical New Zealand genus, quite incapable of flying
across the sea, its presence necessitates some former connexion
between the two islands, and it is therefore perhaps of more
weight than all the Australian genera and species, which are birds
capable of long flights. The Cyanoramphus is allied to a New
Zealand broad-tailed parroquet. The Notornis alba is extinct,
but two specimens exist in museums, and it is even a stronger
case than the Nestor, as showing a former approximation or union
of this island with New Zealand. A beautiful figure of this
bird is given in the Jbis for 1873.

Lord Howe's Island.—This small island, situated half-way
between Australia and Norfolk Island, is interesting, as contain-
ing a peculiar species of the New Zealand genus Ocydromus, or

454 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

wood-hen (0. sylvestris), There is also a peculiar thrush, Zurdus
vinitinctus. Its other birds are wholly of Australian types, and
most of them probably Australian species. The following have
been observed, and no doubt constitute nearly its whole indigen-
ous bird fauna. Acanthiza sp., Rhipidura sp., Pachycephala gut-
twralis, Zosterops strennuus and Z. tephropleurus, Strepera sp.,
Halcyon sp., and Chalcophaga chrysochlora. The two species of
Zosterops are peculiar. The Ocydromus is important enough to
ally this island to New Zealand rather than to Australia; and if
the white bird seen there is, as supposed, the Votornis alba which
is extinct in Norfolk Island, the connection will be rendered
still more clear.

Chatham Islands —These small islands, 450 miles east of New
Zealand, possess about 40 species of birds, of which 13 are land-
birds, All but one belong to New Zealand genera, and all but
five are New Zealand species. The following are the genera of
the land-birds: Spheneacus, Gerygone, Myiomoira, Rhipidura,
Zosterops, Anthus, Prosthemadera, Anthornis, Chrysococcyx, Cyano-
ramphus, Carpophaga, Cireus. The peculiar species are An-
thornis melanocephala, Myiomoira, diffenbachit and M. traversi,
Rhipidura flabellifera, and a peculiar rail incapable of flight,
named by Captain Hutton Cabalus modestus. It is stated that
the Zosterops differs from that of New Zealand, and is also a
migrant; and it is therefore believed to come every year from
Australia, passing over New Zealand, a distance of nearly 1,700 °
miles! Further investigation will perhaps discover some other
explanation of the facts. It is also stated, that the pigeon and
one of the small birds (? Gerygone or Zosterops) have arrived at
the islands within the last eight years.. The natives further de-
clare, that both the Stringops and Apteryx once inhabited the
islands, but were exterminated about the year 1835.

The Auckland Islands.—These are situated nearly 300 miles
south of New Zealand, and possess six land-birds, of which three
are peculiar— Anthus aucklandicus, Cyanoramphus aucklandicus,
and C. malherbii, the others being New Zealand species of
Myiomoira, Prosthemadera, and Anthornis. It is remarkable
that two peculiar parrots of the same genus should inhabit these

PLATE XIII.

li sf
Hi |

Wy
All

/

y

NEW ZEALAND, WITH SOME OF ITS REMARKABLE BIRDS,

SCENE IN

CHAP, XIII.] THE AUSTRALIAN REGION, 455

small islands; but such localities seem favourable to the Platy-
cercidee, for another peculiar species is found in the remote Mac-
quarie Islands, more than 400 miles farther south. A peculiar
species and genus of ducks, Nesonetta aucklandica,is also found
here, and as far as yet known, nowhere else. A species of
the northern genus Mergus is also found on these islands, and has
been recently obtained by Baron von Hiigel.

Plate XIII. Illustrating the peculiar Ornithology of New Zea-
land.—Our artist has here depicted a group of the most remark-
able and characteristic of the New Zealand birds. In the middle
foreground is the Owl-parrot or Kakapoe (Stringops habroptilus),
a nocturnal burrowing parrot, that feeds on fern-shoots, roots,
berries, and occasionally lizards; that climbs but does not fly ;
and that has an owl-like mottled plumage and facial disc.
The wings however are not rudimentary, but fully developed ;
and it seems to be only the muscles that have become useless
for want of -exercise. This would imply, that these birds have
not long been inhabitants of New Zealand only, but were deve-
loped in other countries (perhaps Australia) where their wings
were of use to them.

Beyond the Kakapoe are a pair of the large rails, Notornis
mantelli; heavy birds with short wings quite useless for
flight, and with massive feet and bill of a red colour. On
the right is a pair of Kiwis (Apteryx australis), one of the
queerest and most unbird-like of living birds. It has very small
and rudimentary wings, entirely concealed by the hair-like
plumage, and no tail. It is nocturnal, feeding chiefly on worms,
which it extracts from soft earth by means of its long bill. The
genus Apteryx forms a distinct family of birds, of which four
species are now known, besides some which are extinct. They
are allied to the Cassowary and to the gigantic extinct Dinornis.
On the wing are a pair of Crook-billed Plovers (Anarhynchus
frontalis), remarkable for being the only birds known which
have the bill bent sideways. This was at first thought to be a
malformation ; but it is now proved to be a constant character of
the species, as it exists even in the young chicks; yet the pur-
pose served by such an anomalous structure is not yet discovered.

456 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III,

No country on the globe can offer such an extraordinary set of
birds as are here depicted.

Reptiles.—These consist almost wholly of lizards, there being
no land-snakes and only one frog. Twelve species of lizards are
known, belonging to three genera, one of which is peculiar, as
are all the species. Hinulia, with two species, and Mocoa, with
four species (one of which extends to the Chatham Islands),
belong to the Scincide ; both are very wide-spread genera aud
occur in Australia. The peculiar genus Vauwltinus, with six species,
belongs to the Geckotide, a family spread over the whole world.

The most extraordinary and interesting reptile of New Zea-
land is, however, the Hatteria punctata, a lizard-like animal
living in holes, and found in small islands on the north-east
coast, and more rarely on the main land. It is somewhat inter-
mediate in structure between lizards and crocodiles, and also has
bird-like characters in the form of its ribs. It constitutes, not
only a distinct family, Rhyncocephalide, but a separate order of
reptiles, RHYNCOCEPHALINA. It is quite isolated from all other
members of the class; and is probably a slightly modified repre-
sentative of an ancient and generalised form, which has been
superseded in larger areas by the more specialized lizards and
saurians.

The only representatives of the Ophidia are two sea-snakes
of Australian and Polynesian species, and of no geographical
interest. .

Amphibia.—The solitary frog indigenous to New Zealand,
belongs to a peculiar genus, Liopelma, and to the family Bom-
buratoride, otherwise confined to Europe and temperate South
America.

Fresh-water Fishes—There are, according to Captain Hutton,
15 species of fresh-water fish in New Zealand, belonging to 7
genera; six species, and one genus (Retropinna), being peculiar.
Retropinna vichardsont belongs to the Salmonide, and is the
only example of that family occurring in the Southern hemi-
sphere, where it is confined to New Zealand and the Chatham
Islands. The wide distribution of Galaxias attenwatus—trom the

CHAP. XII. ] THE AUSTRALIAN REGION. 457

Chatham Islands to South America—has already been noticed ;
while another species, G. fasciatus, is found in the Chatham and
Auckland Isles as well as New Zealand. A second genus
peculiar to New Zealand, Neochanna, allied to Galaxias, has
recently been described. Prototroctes oxyrhynchus is allied to an
Australian species, but belongs to a family (Haplochitonide)
which is otherwise South American. An eel, Anguilla latirostris,
is found in Europe, China, and the West Indies, as well as in
New Zealand! while the genus Agonostoma ranges to Australia,
Celebes, Mauritius, and Central America.

Insects—The great poverty of this class is well shown by the
fact, that only eleven species of butterflies are known to inhabit
New Zealand. Of these, six are peculiar, and one, Argyrophenga
(Satyridz), is a peculiar genus allied to the Northern genus
Erebia. The rest are either of wide range, as Pyrameis cardut
and Diadema bolina ; or Australian, as Hamdyaas zoilus ; while
one, Danais erippus,is American, but has also occurred in Australia,
and is no doubt a recent introduction into both countries.
Only one Sphinax is recorded, and no other species of the Sphin-
gina except the British currant-moth, geria tipuliformis,
doubtless imported. Coleoptera are better represented, nearly
300 species having been described, all or nearly all being pecu-
liar. These belong to about 150 genera, of which more than 50
are peculiar. No less than 14 peculiar genera belong to the
Carabide, mostly consisting of one or two species, but Demetrida
has 3, and Metaglymma 8 species. Other important genera are
Dicrochile, Homalosoma, Mecodema, and Scopodes, all in common
with Australia. Mecodema and Metaglymma are the largest
genera. Even the Auckland Islands have two small genera
of Carabide found nowhere else.

Cicindelidz are represented in New Zealand by 6 species of
Cicindela, and 1 of Dystipsidera, a genus. peculiar to the Austra-
lian region.

The Lucanide are represented by two peculiar genera, Den-
droblax and Oxyomus; two Australian genera, issotes and
Ceratognathus ; and by the almost cosmopolite Dorecus.

The Scarabeide consist of ten species only, belonging to four
Vou. L—31

458 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. * [parr 111,

genera, two of which are peculiar (Odontria and Stethaspis) ; and
two Australian (Pericoptus and Calonota). There are no
Cetoniide.

There is only one Buprestid, belonging to the Australian genus
Cisseis. The Elateride, (about a dozen species,) belong mostly
to Australian genera, but two, Metablax and Ochosternus, are
peculiar.

There are 30 species of Curculionide, belonging to 22 genera.
Of the genera, 12 are peculiar; 1 is common to New Zealand
and New Caledonia; 5 belong to the Australian region, and the
rest are widely distributed.

Longicorns are, next to Carabide, the most numerous family,
there being, according to Mr. Bates (Ann. Nat. Hist., 1874), about
35 genera, of which 26 are peculiar or highly characteristic,
and 7 of the others Australian. The largest and most character-
istic genera are mona and Xyloteles, both being peculiar to
New Zealand; few of the remainder having more than one or
two species. Demonaz extends to the Moluccas and 8. E.
Asia. A dozen of the genera have no near relations with those
_ of any other country.

Phytophaga are remarkably scarce, only two species of
Colaspis being recorded; and there is only a single species of —
Coccinella.

The other orders of Insects appear to be equally deficient.
Hymenoptera are very poorly represented, only a score of species
being yet known; but two of the genera are peculiar, as are all
the species. The Neuroptera and Heteroptera are also very
scarce, and several of the species are wide-spread forms of the
Australian region. The few species of Homoptera are all
peculiar. The Myriapoda afford some interesting facts. There
are nine or ten species, all peculiar. One genus, Lithobius,
ranges over the northern hemisphere as far south as Singapore,
and probably through the Malay Archipelago, but is not found
in Australia. Henicops occurs elsewhere only in Tasmania
and Chili. Cryptops, only in the north temperate zone; while
two others, Cermatia and Cormocephalus, both occur in
Australia.

CHAP, XIII. ] THE AUSTRALIAN REGION. 459

Land-Shells—Of these, 114 species are known, 97. being
peculiar. Three species of Helix are also found in Australia,
_ and five more in various tropical islands of the Pacific. Manina,
Lymnea, and Assiminea, are found in Polynesia or Malaya,
but not in Australia. Amphibola is an Australian genus, as is
Janella. Testacella and Limax belong to the Palearctic region.

From the Chatham Islands, 82 species of shells are known,
all being New Zealand species, except nine, which are peculiar.

The Ancient Fauna of New Zealand—One of the most re-
markable features of the New Zealand fauna, is the existence,
till quite recent times, of an extensive group of wingless birds,
—called Moas by the natives—many of them of gigantic size,
and which evidently occupied the place which, in other countries,
is filled by the mammalia. The most recent account of these
singular remains, is that by Dr. Haast, who, from a study of
the extensive series of specimens in the Canterbury museum,
believes, that they belong to two families, distinguished by
important differences of structure, and constitute four genera,—
Dinornis and Miornis, forming the family Dinornithide ;
Palapteryx and Euryapteryx, forming the family Palapterygide.
These were mostly larger birds than the living Apteryx, and
some of them much larger even than the African ostrich, and
were more allied to the Casuariide and Struthionide than to
the Apterygide. No less than eleven species of these birds
have been discovered; all are of recent geological date, and
there are indications that some of them may have been in
existence less than a century ago, and were really exter-
minated by man. Remains have been found (of apparently
the same recent date) of species of Apteryx, Stringops, Ocydro-
mus, and many other living forms, as well as of Harpagornis,
a large bird of prey, and Cnemiornis, a gigantic goose. Bodies
of the Hatteria punctata have also been found along with those
of the Moa, showing that this remarkable reptile was once more
abundant on the main islands than it is now.

The Origin of the New Zealand Fauna.—Having now given

460 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

an outline sketch of the main features of the New Zealand
fauna and of its relations with other regions, we may consider
what conclusions are fairly deducible from the facts. As the
outlying Norfolk, Chatham, and Lord Howe's Islands, are all
inhabited (or have recently been so) by birds of New Zealand
type or even identical species, almost incapable of flight, we may
infer that these islands show us the former minimum extent of the
land-area in which the peculiar forms which characterise the
sub-region were developed. If we include the Auckland and
Macquarie Islands to the south, we shall have a territory of not
much less extent than Australia, and separated from it by per-
haps several hundred miles of ocean. Some such ancient land
must have existed to allow of the development and specialization
of so many peculiar forms of birds, and it probably remained
with but shght modifications for a considerable geological period.
During all this time it would interchange many of its forms of
life with Australia, and there would arise that amount of identity
of genera between the two countries which we find to exist. Its
extension southwards, perhaps considerably beyond the Mac-
- quaries, would bring it within the range of floating ice during
colder epochs, and within easy reach of the antarctic continent
during the warm periods ; and thus would arise that interchange
of genera and species with South America, which forms one of
the characteristic features of the natural history of New Zealand.

Captain F. W. Hutton (to whose interesting paper on the
Geographical relations of the New Zealand Fauna we are
indebted for some of our facts) insists upon the necessity of
former land-connections in various directions, and especially
of an early southern continental period, when New Zealand,
Australia, Southern Africa, and South America, were united.
Thus he would account for the existence of Struthious birds
in all these countries, and for the various other groups of
birds, reptiles, fishes, or insects which have no obvious means
of traversing the ocean,—and this union must have occurred
before mammalia existed in any of these countries. But
such a supposition is quite unnecessary, if we consider that
all wingless land-birds and some water-birds (as the Gare-fowl

CHAP. XIII. ] THE AUSTRALIAN REGION. 461

and Steamer Duck) are probably cases of abortion of use-
less organs, and that the common ancestors of the various
forms of Struthiones may have been capable of a moderate
degree of flight ; or they may have originated in the northern
hemisphere, as already explained in Chap. XI. p. 287. The exis-
tence of two, if not three, distinct families of these birds in New
Zealand, proves that the original type was here isolated at a
very early date, and being wholly free from the competition of
mammalia, became more differentiated than elsewhere. The
Hatteria is probably coeval with these early forms, and is the
only relic of a whole order of reptiles, which once perhaps
ranged tar over the globe.

Still less does any other form of animal inhabiting New Zea-
land, require a land connection with distant countries to account
for its presence. With the example before us of the Bermudas
and Azores, to which a great variety of birds fly annually over vast
distances, and even of the recent arrival of new birds in New
Zealand and Chatham Island, we may be sure that the ancestors
of every New Zealand bird could easily have reached its shores
during the countless ages which elapsed while the Dinornis and
Apteryxz were developing. The wonderful range of some of the
existing species of lizards and fresh-water fish, as already given,
proves that they too possess means of dispersal which have
sufficed to spread them, within a comparatively recent period,
over countries separated by thousands of miles of ocean; and the
fact that a group like the snakes, so widely distributed and for
which the climate of New Zealand is so well adapted, does not
exist there, is an additional proof that land connection had nothing
to do with the introduction of the existing fauna. We have
already (p. 398), discussed in some detail the various modes in
which the dispersal of animals in the southern hemisphere has
been effected ; and in accordance with the principles there estab-
lished, we conclude, that the New Zealand fauna, living and
extinct, demonstrates the existence of an extensive tract of land
in the vicinity of Australia, Polynesia, and the Antarctic con-
tinent, without having been once actually connected with either
of these countries, since the period when mammalia had peopled

462 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.

all the great continents, That event certainly dates back to
Secondary, if not to Paleozoic, times, because so dominant a
group must soon have spread over the whole continuous land-
area of the globe. We have no reason for believing that birds
were an earlier development; and certainly cannot, with any
probability, place the origin of the Struthiones before that of
Mammals.

Causes of the Poverty of Insect-life in New Zealand: its Influ-
ence on the Character of the Flora.—The extreme paucity of in-
sects in New Zealand, to which we have already alluded, seems
to call for some attempt at explanation. No other country in the
world, in which the conditions are equally favourable for insect-
life, and which has either been connected with, or is in proximity
to, any of the large masses of land, presents a similar pheno-
menon. The only approach to it is in the Galapagos, and in
some of the islands of the Pacific; and in each of these cases the
absence of mammals leads us to infer, that no connection with a
continent has ever taken place. Yet the fauna‘of New Zealand
evidently dates back to a remote geological epoch, and it seems
strange that an abundance of indigenous insects have not been
developed, especially when we consider the vast antiquity that
most of the orders and families, and many of the genera, of insects
possess (see p. 166), and that they must always have reached the
country in greater numbers and variety than any of the higher
animals. The undoubted fact that such an indigenous insect-
fauna has not arisen, would therefore lead us to conclude, that
insects find the conditions requisite for their development only in
the great continental masses of land, in strict adaptation to, and
dependance on, a varied fauna and flora of ever-increasing richness
and complexity. A small number of widely-separated forms, intro-
duced into a country where the fauna and flora are alike scanty
and. unrelated to them, seem to have little tendency to vary
and branch out into that vast network of insect-life which
enriches all the great continents and their once connected
islands,

Itis a striking confirmation on a large scale, of Mr. Darwin’s
beautiful theory—that the gay colours of flowers have mostly, or

CHAP, XIII. ] THE AUSTRALIAN REGION. 463

perhaps, wholly been produced, in order to attract insects which aid
in their fertilization—that in New Zealand, where insects are so
strikingly deficient in variety, the flora should be almost as strik-
ingly deficient in gaily-coloured blossoms. Of course there are some
exceptions, but as a whole, green, inconspicuous, and imperfect
flowers prevail, to an extent not to be equalled in any other part
of the globe ; and affording a marvellous contrast to the general
brilliancy of Australian flowers, combined with the abundance
and variety of its insect-life. We must remember, too, that the
few gay or conspicuous flowering-plants possessed by New Zea-
land, are almost all of Australian, South American, or European
genera ; the peculiar New Zealand or Antarctic genera being
almost wholly without conspicuous flowers. In the tropical
Galapagos the same thing occurs. Mr. Darwin notices the
wretched weedy appearance of the vegetation; and states that
it was some time before he discovered that most of the plants
were in flower at the time of his visit! And the insect-life was
correspondingly deficient, consisting mainly of a few terrestrial
beetles.

The poverty of insect-life in New Zealand must, therefore, be
a very ancient feature of the country ; and it furnishes an addi-
tional argument against the theory of land-connection with, or
even any near approach to, either Australia, South Africa, or
South America. For in that case numbers of winged insects
would certainly have entered, and the flowers would then, as in
every other part of the world, have been rendered attractive to
them by the development of coloured petals ; and this character
once acquired would long maintain itself, even if the insects had,
from some unknown cause, subsequently disappeared.

After the preceding paragraphs were written, it occurred to me,
that if this reasoning were correct, New Zealand plants ought to
be also deficient in scented flowers ; because it is a part of the
same theory, that the odours of flowers have, like their colours,
been developed to attract the insects required to aid in their fer-
tilization. I therefore at once applied to my friend Dr. Hooker,
as the highest authority on New Zealand botany ; simply asking
whether there was any such observed deficiency. His reply was:—

464 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART II

“ New Zealand plants are remarkably scentless, both in regard to
the rarity of scented flowers, of leaves with immersed glands
containing essential oils, and of glandular hairs.” There are a
few exceptional cases, but these seem even more rare than might
be expected, so that the confirmation of theory is very complete.
The circumstance that aromatic leaves are also very scarce, sug-
gests the idea that these, too, serve as an attraction to insects.
Aromatic plants abound most in arid countries, and on Alpine
heights ; both localities where winged insects are comparatively
scarce, and where it may be necessary to attract them in every
possible way. Dr. Hooker also informs, me that since his [ntro-
duction to the New Zealand Flora was written, many plants with
handsome flowers have been discovered, especially among the
Ranunculi, shrubby Veronicas, and herbaceous Composit. The
two former, however, are genera of wide range, which may have
originated in New Zealand by the introduction of plants with
handsome flowers, which the few indigenous insects would be
attracted by, and thus prevent the loss of their gay corollas; so
that these discoveries will not much affect the general character
of the flora, and its very curious bearing on the past history of
the islands through the relations of flowers and insects.

In judging of the relation here supposed to exist, it must be
remembered, that if the New Zealand insects have been intro-
duced from the surrounding countries by chance immigrations at
distant intervals, then, as we go back into the past the insect
fauna will become poorer and poorer, and still more inadequate
than at present to lead to the development of attractive flowers
and odours. This quite harmonizes with the fact of the ancient
indigenous flora being so remarkably scentless and inconspi-
cuous, while a few of the more recently introduced genera of
plants have retained their floral attractions.

Concluding Remarks on the Early History of the Australian
Region.

We have already discussed in some detail, the various relations

of the Australian sub-regions to the surrounding Regions, and the

geographical changes that appear to have taken place. A very

CHAP. XIIL. ] THE AUSTRALIAN REGION. 465

few observations will therefore suffice, on the supposed early
history of the Australian region as a whole.

It was probably far back in the Secondary period, that some
portion of the Australian region was in actual connection with
the northern continent, and became stocked with ancestral forms
of Marsupials; but from that time till now there seems to have
been no further land connection, and the Australian lands have
thenceforward gone on developing the Marsupial and Monotre-
mate types, into the various living and extinct races we now find
there. During some portion of the Tertiary epoch Australia pro-
bably comprised much of its existing area, together with Papua
and the Solomon Islands, and perhaps extended as far east as the
‘Fiji Islands ; while it might also have had a considerable exten-
sion to the south and west. Some light has recently been thrown
on this subject by Professor McCoy’s researches on the Pale-
ontology of Victoria. He finds abundant marine fossils of
Eocene and Miocene age, many of which are strikingly similar
to those of Europe at the same period. Among these are Ceta-
ceans of the genus Sgualodon ; European species of Plagiostom-
ous fishes; mollusea and corals closely resembling those of
Europe and North America of the same age,—such as numerous
Volutes closely allied to those of the Eocene beds of the Isle of
Wight, and the genus Dentaliwm in great abundance, almost or
quite identical with European tertiary species. Along with
these, are found some living species, but always such as now
live farther north in tropical seas. The Cretaceous and Meso-
zoic marine fossils are equally close to those of Europe.

The whole of these remains demonstrate that, as in the
northern so in the southern hemisphere, a much warmer climate
prevailed in the Eocene and Miocene periods than at the present
time. This is amost important result, and one which strongly
supports Mr. Belt’s view, before referred to, that the warmer
climates in past geological epochs, and especially that of the
Miocene as compared with our own, was caused by a diminution of
the obliquity of the ecliptic, leading to a much greater uniformity
of the seasons for a considerable distance from the equator, and
oreatly reducing the polar area within which the sun would ever

466 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART 11.

disappear during an entire rotation of the earth. During such
a period, tropical forms of marine animals would have been able
to spread north and south, into what are now cool latitudes; and
identical genera, and even species, might then have ranged along
the southern shores of the old Palearctic continent, from Britain
to the Bay of Bengal, and southward along the Malayan coasts
to Australia.

Numerous Miocene plant-beds have also been found in Vic-
toria, containing abundance of Dicotyledonous leaves, which are
said generally to resemble those of the Asiatic flora, and of the
Miocene plant-beds of the Rhine. Itis to be hoped these beds
will be more closely examined for remains of insects, land-shells,
and vertebrates, and that the plants will be carefully preserved and
critically studied ; for here probably lies hidden the key, that
will solve much of the mystery that attaches to the past history
of the Australian fauna.

CHAP, XII. ] THE AUSTRALIAN REGION. 467

TABLES OF DISTRIBUTION

In drawing up these tables, showing the distribution of the
various classes of animals in the Australian region, the following
sources of information have been relied on, in addition to the
general treatises, monographs, and catalogues used in compiling
the 4th Part of this work.

Mammalia.—Gouid, Mammals of Australia; Waterhouse on
Marsupials ; Dr. J. E. Gray’s List of Mammalia of New Guinea ;
Miiller, Temminck and Schlegel on Mammals of the Moluccas;
papers by Dr. Gray ; and personal observations by the Author.

Birds.—Gould’s Birds of Australia; Buller’s Birds of New
Zealand; G. R. Gray’s Lists of Birds of Moluccas, &c.; Hart-
laub and Finsch on Birds of Pacific Islands; Sclater on Birds
of Sandwich Islands ; papers by Haast, Hutton, Meyer, Salvin,
Schlegel, Sclater, Trav ers, Lord Walden and the Author.

Reptiles.—Krefft, Catalogue of Snakes; Gunther, List of
Lizards in Voyage of Erebus and Terror (1875); and numerous

papers.

468 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART III.
TABLE I.
FAMILIES OF ANIMALS INHABITING THE AUSTRALIAN REGION.
EXPLANATION.

Names in italics show families which are peculiar to the region.
Names inclosed thus ( ) show families which only just enter the region, and are
not considered properly to belong to it.

Numbers correspond to the series of numbers to the families in Part IV.

Sub-regions.
Order and Family. oe g 2 a Range beyond the Region.
BElasd| asl oS
sal sal/soaulas
Bela cte | a S
=|
MAMMALIA.
PRIMATES.

3. Cynopithecide

CHIROPTERA.

9. Pteropide

11. Rhinolophide
12. Vespertilionide
13. Noctilionide...

CARNIVORA.
25. (Viverride)
33. Otariide...
35. Phocide...

Oriental and Ethiopian

Oriental and Ethiopian
The Eastern Hemisphere
Cosmopolite

All tropical regions

Oriental
N. and 8. temperate zones
N. and S. temperate zones

CETACEA.
36 to 41. Oceanic
SIRENIA.
42. Manatide — Ethiopian, Oriental
UNGULATA.
47. Suide .. = All other regions but Nearcticz
50. (Cervide) = All other regions but Ethiopian
52. (Bovide) = All other regions but Neotropical
RODENTIA.
55. Muride ... —|— All other regions
61. (Scuiride) = All other regions

MARSUPIALIA.

77. Dasyuride

78. Myrmecobiide
79. Peramelide ...
80. Macropodide..

CHAP, XIII. ]

THE AUSTRALIAN REGION.

Sub-regions. |
ily. |oe|a | z
Order and Family £58 e .|e&E |
aa |u| ps) oS
sa) s4| oa |24’'s
<a |< Ay S

Range beyond the Region,

81. Phalangistide
82. Phascolomyide

|

MoNOTREMATA

83. Ornithorhyn-
chide...
84. Echidnide

BIRDS.
PASSERES.

Pe Durdidse... +2. ||| —
2. Sylviide... ... | —
3. Timaliide ... | —
5. Cinclide | —
§. Certhiide ... | —
OmiSittidseeec. est) | ——
OM Raridsen se) se

13. Pycnonotide... | —
14, Oriolide... ... | —
15. Campephagide | —
16. Dicruride ... | —
17. Muscicapide...
18. Pachycephalide
19. Laniide ...

20. Corvide... ... | —
21. Paradiseide ... | —
22. Meliphagide... | —
23. Nectariniide =
24. Diceride 56 |) =
25. Drepanidide..
30. Hirundinide... | —
34. Ploceide |
35. Sturnide we |
36. Artamide ... | —
87. Alaudide ... | —
38. Motacillide ... | —
47. Pittide ... ... | —
49. Menuride ...

50. Atrichiide

PICARIA.

Sil eiclds sc.) "ese) | ——
58. Cuculide ... | —
62. Coraciide ... | —
63. Meropide ... | —
67. Alcedinide ... | —
68. Bucerotide ... | —
71. Podargide ... | —
73. Caprimulgide —
74, Cypselide ... | —

469

Cosmopolite
Cosmopolite
Oriental family

Oriental family

Oriental and Ethiopian
Oriental and Ethiopian
Oriental and Ethiopian
The Old World

Almost peculiar to region
The Old World
Cosmopolite

Oriental and Ethiopian
Oriental and Ethiopian

Cosmcpolite =,

Orienta], Ethiopiax

The Old World

Oriental

The Old World and N. America
The Old World

Oriental, Ethiopian

Peculiar to Australia

Peculiar to Australia

All other regions
Cosmopolite

Oriental and Ethiopian
Oriental and Ethiopian
Cosmopolite

Oriental and Ethiopian
Oriental

Cosmopolite
Cosmopolite

ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY.

470 [PART III.

Sub-regions.

Orderand Family. |e2|¢ /2 /,% Range beyond the Region.
aS |u| es} os :
Bel so|oa2ly $ s
“A/a 1h S]

PSITTACI.

76. Cacatuide ...
77. Platycercidee
78. Paleornithide
79. Trichoglosside
82. Nestoride

83. Stringopide...

CoLUMB.

84. Columbide ...
84a. Didunculidee

GALLINZ. —

87. Tetraonide ...
88. (Phasianide)
89. Turnicide
90. Megapodiide

Philippine Islands

Oriental

Cosmopolite

Old World and N. America

Oriental
The Old World

ACCIPITRES.
96. Falconide ... | — | — | — | — | Cosmopolite
97. Pandionide... | — | — | — | — | Cosmopolite
98. Strigidze — | — | — | — | Cosmopolite
GRALLA.
99. Rallidee — | — | — | — | Cosmopolite
100. Scolopacide... | — | — | — | — | Cosmopolite
103. Parridee we | —]— Tropical
104.: Glareolide ... | — | — The Eastern Hemisphere
105. Charadriide — | — | — | — | Cosmopolite
106. Otididee — The Eastern Hemisphere
107. Gruide di — The Eastern Hemisphere
112. Rhinochetide =
113. Ardeide ... | — | — | — | — | Cosmopolite
114. Plataleide ... | — | — Almost cosmopolite
115. Ciconiidee —|— Widely distributed
ANSERES.
118. Anatide — | — | — | — | Cosmopolite
119. Warideersn se. — | — | Cosmopolite
120. Procellariidie — | — | Cosmopolite
121. Pelecanide ... — | — | Cosmopolite
122. Spheniscide — |S. temperate regions
124, Podicipidee — | — | — | — | Cosmopolite
STRUTHIONES.
127. Casuarude... | — "| =
128. Apterygide ... — :
129. Dinornithide — | Extinct
130. Palapterygide — | Extinct

CHAP, XIII. ]

Order and Family.

REPTILIA.

OPHIDIA.

1. Typhlopide ...

2. Tortricide

3. Xenopeltide ...

5. Calamariide ...

7. Colubride

8. Homalopside

11. Dendrophide

12. Dryiophide ...

13. Dipsadide ..

15. Lycodontidz...

16. Amblycepha- )
hd) 9 |

17. Pythonide

19. Acrochordide

20. Elapide ... ...

23. Hydrophide ...

LACERTILIA.

30. Varanide

33. Lacertide Hs

41, Gymnopthal- )
mide...

42. Pygopodide ...

43. Aprasiadce

44. Lialide ...

45. Scincide

48. Acontiade

49. Geckotide

50. Iguanide

51. Agamide

RHYNCOCEPHALINA.
53. Rhyncocephalide

CROCODILIA.
54. Gavialide
55. Crocodilide

CHELONIA.

57. Testudinide ...
58. Chelydide

60. Cheloniide

AMPHIBIA.

ANOURA.

7. Phryniscide ...
9. Bufonide

10. Xenorhinide...
11. Engystomide..
12. Bombinatoride

THE AUSTRALIAN REGION. 471

New

Zealand.

Range beyond the Region.

All regions but Nearctic
Oriental, S. America, California
Oriental

All warm countries

Almost cosmopolite

Oriental, and all other regions
Oriental, Ethiopian, Neotropical
Oriental, Ethiopian, Neotropical
Oriental, Ethiopian, Neotropical
Ethiopian and Oriental

Oriental, Neotropical
Tropical regions, California
Oriental

Tropical regions, Japan, S. Carolina
Oriental, Madagascar, Panama

Oriental, Africa
The Eastern Hemisphere

Neotropical, Ethiopian, Palearctic

Almost cosmopolite
Ethiopian, Oriental
Almost cosmopolite
N. and S. America
The Eastern Hemisphere

Oriental
Tropical regions

All other regions
Ethiopian, Neotropical
Marine

Ethiopian, Malayan, Neotropical
All other regions

All regions but Palearctic
Neotropical, Palearctic

472

ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY.

Order and Family.

Sub-regions.

Austro-
Malaya
Austra-
lia
Polyne-
sia
New
Zealand

FISHES (FRESH-

ACANTHOPTERYGII.
lik
35. Labyrinthici ...
37.

ee Ally tides sesumteee
. Pelodryade ...
5 JelAlO Dc, con
. Polypedatide
se Ranidecweem cee
. Discoglossidee

WATER).

Trachinide

Atherinids

38. Mugillidee

ANACANTHINIL

53. Gadopside

PHYSOSTOMI.
59. Siluride...

61. Haplochitonidee

65. Salmonidee
67. Galaxide

78. Ostegolosside
85. (Symbranchide)

DIPNoI.
92. Sirenoidei

INSECTS.
FLIES).

. Danaide
. Satyridee

. Elymniide

- Morphide
. Acreide...

1

2

3

4

6 =a
8. Nymphalide...
9. Libytheide
10. Nemeobeide ..
13

14

15

16

. Lycenide
. Pieride ...

. Papilionide oe

. Hesperidee

SPHINGIDEA.
17. Zygenide
18. Castniidee

19. Agaristide

20. Uraniidee
23. Sphingidee

LEPI-
DOPTERA (PART).

DURINI (BUTTER-

Range beyond the Region.

All regions but Oriental
Neotropical

All regions but Ethiopian
All the regions

Almost cosmopolite

All regions but Nearctic

Patagonia (? marine)
Oriental, S. Africa
Europe, America
Ethiopian, Neotropical

All warm regions
Temperate S. America
Palearctic, Nearctic
Temperate S. America
All tropical regions
Oriental, Neotropical

Ethiopian, Neotropical

All warm regions, and to Canada
Cosmopolite

Oriental, Ethiopian

Oriental, Neotropical

All tropical regions
Cosmopolite

All the other regions

All other regions but Nearctic
Cosmopolite

Cosmopolite

Cosmopolite

Cosmopolite

Cosmopolite
Neotropical
Oriental, Ethiopian
All tropical regions
Cosmopolite

[PART 111

CHAP. x11, ] THE AUSTRALIAN REGION. 473

TABLE II.
GENERA OF TERRESTRIAL MAMMALIA AND BIRDS INHABITING THE
% AUSTRALIAN REGION.
eee inone.

Names in italics show genera peculiar to the region .

Names enclosed thus (....\. ) show genera which just enter the region, but are not con-
sidered properly to belong to it.

Genera truly belonging to the region are numbered consecutively.

MAMMALIA.
aoe aniy, and : g Range within the Region. Range beyond the Region.
; ae
PRIMATES.
CYNOPITHECIDS.
(Macacus ..... | 1 | Lombok to Timor) ' | Oriental genus
1. Cynopitheeus ... | 1 | Celebes and Batchian _ Philippines ?
LEMURIDZ.
(Tarsius ... ... | 1 | Celebes) Indo-Malayan genus

CHIROPTERA. |

PTEROPIDH.

2. Pteropus... ... | 15 | The whole reg. except New Zeal.| Tropics of E, Hemisp.
3. Xantharpyia ....| 1 | Moluccas and Timor . Oriental, S, Palearctic
4. Cynopterus ... | 1 | Morty Island Oriental

5. Macroglossus ... | 1 | Celebes, Moluccas, Timor Indo-Malaya

6. Harpyia ... 1 | Celebes and Moluccas Philippines

7. Hypoderma 1 | Celebes, Moluccas, and Timor

8. Notopterts 1 | Fiji Islands

RHINOLOPHID.

9. Rhinolophus ... | 7 | Moluccas, Timor, Australia Warmer pts. of E. Hemis.
10. Hipposideros ... | 5 | Moluccas and Aru Islands Oriental

11. Phyllorhina ... | 2 | Moluccas and Timor » | Indo-Malaya

12. Asellia. ww:| 1 | Amboyna Indo-Malaya.

13. Megaderma 1 | Ternate Oriental, Ethiopian .
VESPERTILIONIDE.

14. Scotophilus 8 | Moluccas, Timor, Australia Oriental

15. Vespertilio 2 | Australia Cosmopolite

16. Miniopteris 8 | Moluccas, Timor, and Australia | Indo-Malaya, S. Africa
17. Taphozous 2 |Celebes, Moluccas, N. ae Orien., Ethiop., Neotrop.
18. *Rlecotus ... .,. | {J | Timor N. India, 8. Palearctic
19. Nyctophilus . 5 | Australia and Tasmania ~ India

Vou. L—32

[PART IIL,

Range beyond the Region.

Neotrop., Ethiop., S. Pal.

2

The E. Hemis.& N. Amer.

474 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY.
Cries eeu, and Se Range within the Region.
wm
NocrTILIoNnID&.
20. Molossus.. ... | 1 | Australia
21. Mystacina ... | 1 | New Zealand
INSECTIVORA.
SorRICIDA.
22. Sorex... ... | 2 | Moluccas and Timor
CARNIVORA.
VIVERRIDS.
(Viverra .... ... | 1 | Celebes and Moluccas) Oriental genus
(Paradoxurus ... | 1 | Timor, Ke Islands, ? introduced) Oriental genus
OTARIIDE.

23. Arctocephalus... | 1
24, Zalophus....... | 1

PHOCIDE.
25. Stenorhynchus 1

SIRENIA.
MANATIDA.

26. Halicore... ... 1

UNGULATA.
SuIDz.

OTe Susie ees
28. Babirusa ...

et

CERVIDE.
(Wervus a .-21 0 se 2

Bovip2.
29. Anoa moet feck 1
RODENTIA.
ScruRID&.

(Sciurusiv.-.) <.. 1
MurIp&.
SOse Maus! ay cle ertsul alts
31. Pseudomys is 1
32. Hapalotis... ... | 13
33. Hydromys se 5
34. Acanthomys ...| 1
35. Echiothrix a 1
MARSUPIALIA.
DASYURIDS.

36. Phascogale ...} 3

S. Australia, New Zealand
Australia

New Zealand

N. Australia

Celebes to New Guinea
Celebes, Bouru

Celebes, Moluccas, Timor),

Celebes

Celebes)

Australia, Celebes, Papua
Australia

Australia

Australia and Tasmania
N. Australia

Australia

New Guinea and Australia

S. Temperate shores
North Pacific
Antarctic shores
Oriental Ethiopian

Palearctic, Oriental

Oriental genus

All the other regions

The Western Hemisphere

CHAP, XIII.]

THE AUSTRALIAN REGION.

475

Orde) Family, and

enus

37. Antechinomys ...

38. Antechinus
39. Cheetocercus
40. Dactylopsila
41. Podabrus ...
42. Myoictis .s.
43. Sarcophilus
44, Dasyurus...
45. Thylacinus

MYRMECOBIID.
46. Myrmecobius ...

PERAMELIDS.
47. Perameles

48. Peragalea
49. Cheropus...

MACROPODIDS.

50. Macropus...
51. Osphranter
§2. Halmaturus
53. Petrogale ...

54. Dendrolagus =

55. Dorcopsis ...
56. Onychogalea
57. Lagorchestes
58. Bettongia...

59. Hypsiprymnus

PHALANIGISTIDA,

60. Phascolarctos ...

61. Phalangista
62. Cuscus

63. Petaurista
64. Belideus ...

65. Acrobata ...
66. Dromicia...
67. Tarsipes ...

PHASCOLOMYID.

68. Phascolomys

MONOTREMATA.

ORNITHORHYNCHID&.
69. Ornithorhynchus

rT

ht ee et

_
co or ~ Dow do wo NO Oe Pf

oF

1

Range within the Region. Range beyond the Region.

S. Australia (interior)

Arulds. Australia and Tasmania |
S. Australia

Aru Islands and N. Australia
Australia and Tasmania

Aru Islands

Tasmania

Australia

Tasmania

§. and W. Australia

N. Guinea, Aru Tae Saati
and Tasmania

W. Australia

S. E. and W. Australia

Australia and Tasmania

All Australia

Australia and Tasmania

All Australia

New Guinea

Aru, Mysol, and N. Guinea

Central Australia

N., W., and S. Australia

W., S., and E. Australia and
Tasmania

W. and E. Australia & Tasmania

E. Australia

E., S., and W. Australia and
‘Tasmania’

Celebes to N. ‘Guinea, Timor &
N. Australia

E. Australia

S., E., & N. Austral.,
and Moluccas

S. and E. Australia

W. & E. Australia & Tasmania

W. Australia

N. Guinea,

i
\
}

S. E. Australia and Tasmania

|S. and E. Australia & Tasmania |

476

Order, Family, and

Genus.

EcHIDNIDA.
70. Echidna ...

PASSERES.
TURDIDA.

16

co bo

Turdus

. Oreocincla
. Geocichla ..

(Monticola
(Zoothera...

SYLVIIDZ.

. Cisticola ...
. Sphenzacus

. Megalurus
. Poodytes ...
. Amytis

. Sphenura...
. Stipiturus
. Malurus ...
. Hylacola ... ..
. Calamanthus ...
. Acrocephalus ..

. Tatare

. Hypolais ...
. Sericornis

. Acanthiza

. Gerygone ...
. Drymodes...
. Oreicola ...

(Pratincola

. Lpthianura
. Petroica ...
. Myiomoira
. Lamprolia
= LUGO}, ceedece:
. Cinclorhamphus
. Origma

. Orthonyz ...

TIMALIID.

30.
31.
. Turnagra
. Psophodes...
. Alcippe

Pomatorhinus...

Cinclosoma

(Trichastoma.

ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY.

tt
mw ——_—— ee bo

pre
COH DWH WO CORR DR RATE bo STD WD PO De

—

Range within the Region.

[PART Ill.

Range beyond the Region.

S. & E. Australia, & Tasmania

BIRDS.

Timor, Austral., New Caledonia,
Norfolk Island, Lord Howe’s
and Samoan Jslands

S. E. Australia and Tasmania

Celebes, Lombok, Timor, Austral.

Gilolo, Celebes)

Lombok)

Celebes, Bouru, Timor, Australia
Australia, N. Zealand, Chatha
Islands

Timor

Australia

Australia

Australia

Australia, Tasmania

Australia, Tasmania, & N.Guinea

Australia

Australia and Tasmania

Celebes, Moluccas, Australia,
Caroline Islands

Samoan to Marquesas Islands

Moluccas

Australia and Tasmania

Austral., Tasmania, N.Caledonia

The whole region, excl. Moluccas

Australia

Lombok to Timor

Celebes to Timor)

Australia

Papua to Samoan Ids., Australia

N. Zealand

Fiji Islands

New Zealand

Australia

Australia

N. Guinea, Austral., New Zeald.| :

N. Guinea and Australia
Australia and Tasmania
New Zealand

S. E. and W. Australia

New Guinea
Celebes)

Cosmopolite

Palearctic, Oriental
Oriental

Palearctic and Oriental
Oriental genus

Palearctic, Oriental
Ethiopian
Oriental

Paleare., Orien., Ethiop.
Palearc., Orien., Ethiop.
Philippines

Burmah 2? —
Oriental, Palearctic

Oriental

Oriental
Oriental genus

CHAP, XIII.]

Order, Family, and
enu

nus.

35. Drymocataphus
36. Struthidea

CINCLIDA.
37. Eupetes: ...

CERTHIIDA.
38. Climacteris

SITTIDA.

39. Sittella

40. Acanthisitta
41. Xenicus
PARIDA.

42. Certhiparus

43. Sphenostoma ...

PYCNONOTIDZ.
44, Criniger ...

ORIOLIDA.

45. Sphecotheres
46. Oriolus

47. Mimeta

CAMPEPHAGIDA.

(Pericrocotus ...

48. Graucalus

. Artamides
. Pteropodocys

. Lalage :
. Symmorphus ..

DICRURIDA.
54. Dicrurus ...

Doe Cheetorhynchus -

MUSCICAPIDA.

56. Peltops
57. Monarcha

(Butalis ...
. Micreca ...
. Cyornis
. Siphia
. Seisura

. Campephaga 2

. Leucophantes ...

THE AUSTRALIAN REGION.

No. of
Species.

Range within the Region.

477

Range beyond the Region,

Oriental -

Malayan

Oriental.

Oriental genus
Oriental

Oriental, Ethiopian
Malayan

Oriental, Ethiopian

Paleare., Orien., Ethiop.

Oriental
Oriental

1 | Timor
1 | N. and KE. Australia
2 | New Guinea
8 | Australia and N. Guinea
5 | Australia and N. Guinea
1 | New Zealand
3 | New Zealand
2 | New Zealand
2|E. and S. Australia
5 | Moluccas, and small islands E.
of Celebes
3 | Timor and Australia
3 | Celebes, Sulla Ids., Lombok and} Orientat, Ethiopian
Flores
10 | Moluccas, N. Guinea, Timor, &
Australia
1 | Lombok)
20 | Celebes to New Hebrides and N.
Zealand
1 | Celebes
1 | Australia
12 | Celebes to Timor & New Guinea
15 | Celebes to Australia &Samoan Ids.
1 | E. Australia and Norfolk Id. ©
11 | Celebes to N. Ireland & Austral.
1 | New Guinea
1 | Papuan Islands
30 | The whole region (excl. Celebes
and N. Zealand)
1 | N. Guinea
1 | Moluccas and Celebes)
6 | Timor, N. Guinea, Australia
2 | Celebes and Timor
1 | Timor
5 | Moluceas to N. Ireland, Austral.

478

Order, Family, and
Genus.

63. Myiagra...
(Hypothymis

64. Macherirhynchus

65. Rhipidura

(Myialestes

(Tchitrea
66. Todopsis..
67. Chasiempis

-PACHYCEPHALID.

68. Oreeca ... ...
69. Falcunculus ...
70. Pachyeephala

71. Hylocharis
72. LHopsaltria

LANIID&.

73. Colluricincle...

74. Rectes ... ...
(aniusscsmces

CorvVID#.

75. Strepera...
76. Barita

77. Cracticus

78. Grallina

79. Streptocitta ...
80. Charitornis ...
Sie Convilsisess eee
82. Gymiocorvus...
83. Corcorax

84. Lycocorax

PARADISEIDE

85. Paradisea

86. Manucodia
87. Astrapia

88. Parotia ...

89. Lophorina :
90. Diphyllodes ...
91. Xanthomelus...
92. Cicinnurus ...
93. Paradigalla ...
94. Semtoptera
95. Epimachus ...
96. Drepanornis ...
97. Seleucides

98. Ptilorhis

99. Sericulus ,
100. Ptilorhynchus
101. Chlamydodera
102. Mluredus
103. Amblyornis ..

ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY.

COE DD OM DH CO Com

OD ee

Range within the Region. Range beyond the Region.

Moluccas to Samoan Ids. Austral.

Celebes) Oriental
Papuan Ids. and N. Australia

The region to Samoan Ids. and| Oriental

N. Zealand
Celebes) Oriental genus
Flores) Orien. & Ethiop. genus

Papuan Islands
Sandwich Islands

Temperate Australia

Temperate Australia

Moluccas to Tonga Ids. and
Tasmania

Celebes and Timor Oriental

Australia te New Hebrides

Australia and Tasmania
Papuan to Fiji Ids., N. Austral.
Lombok) Northern Hemisphere

Australia and Tasmania
Australia and Tasmania
Papuan Ids. to Tasmania
Australia

Celebes

Sulla Islands (Celebes group)
The whole region, excl. N. Zeal | Almost Cosmopolite
Papuan Islands
Australia
Moluccas

Papuan Islands

Papuan Ids. and N. Australia
New Guinea

New Guinea

New Guinea

Papuan Islands

New Guinea

Papuan Islands

New Guinea

Gilolo and Batchian

New Guinea

New Guinea

New Guinea

New Guinea and N. Australia
E. Australia

E. Australia +

N. and E. Australia

Papuan Islands and E. Australia
New Guinea

[PART IL.

CHAP, XIII. ]

Order, Family, and

Genus.

MELIPHAGID2.

104.
105.
106.

107.
108.
109.

110.

111.
112.
113.

114.
115.

116.

7.
118.
ia fs).
120.

121.
122.
123.
124.

Myzomela
Entomophila ...
Gliciphila

Acanthorhynchus
Meliphaga
Ptilotis ...

Meliornis
Prosthemadera
Anthornis
Anthochera ...

Pogonornis
Philemon

Entomiza
Manorhina
Melithreptus ...
Euthyrhynchus
Melirrhophetes
Melidectes
Melipotes

Moho
Cheetoptila

NECTARINIIDA.

125.

126.
127.

128.

Cosmetira
(Athopyga
Chaleostetha ...
Arachnecthra
(Nectarophila
Anthreptes
Arachnothera

DIcaHIDz.

129.
130.
131.
132.
133.
134.

Zosterops
Diceum... ...
Pachyglossa ?
Piprisoma
Pardalotus
Prionochilus ...

DREPANIDID&.

135.
136.
137.
138.

Drepanis
Hemignathus...
Loxops ...
Psittirostra

HIRUNDINIDZ.

139.
140,

Hirundo
Atticora

THE AUSTRALIAN REGION.

_
[0 oF al

HOD RL EE DD G9 CO OD

eo

28
12

mt CO OO

hin

Range within the Region.

The region ; excl. N. Zealand

Papuan Islands and Australia

Papuan Ids. Timor, Australia,
N. Caledonia

Australia and Tasmania

East and S. Australia

Lombok and Gilolo to Tasmania
and Samoan Ids.

Australia and Tasmania

New Zealand

New Zealand and Chatham Ids.

New Guinea to Tasmania and
Samoan Ids., N. Zealand

New Zealand

Lombok to N. Guinea, N. Cale-
donia, Australia

Australia

Australia and Tasmania

N. Guinea, Australia, Tasmania

N. Guinea

N. Guinea

N. Guinea

N. Guinea

Sandwich Islands

Sandwich Islands

Papuan Islands

N. Celebes)

Celebes, Moluccas, Papuan Ids.
Austro-Malaya and N. Australia
Celebes)

Celebes and Sulla Islands
Papaun Islands, Lombok

The region to Fiji Ids. & N. Zeal.
Celebes to SolomonIds.&Austral.
N. Celebes

Timor

Australia and Tasmania, Timor
Papuan Islands

Sandwich Islands
Sandwich Islands
Sandwich Islands
Sandwich Islands

The whole region
Australia

47g

Range beyond the Region.

(Baly)

Orienta genus
Malaya:
Oriental
Oriental genus
Maiayan genus
Oriental

Oriental, Ethiopian
Oriental
Himalayas

India, Ceylon
Malaya

Cosmopolite
Neotropical

480 ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY. [PART iz,
Orie Henly, and 3 Range within the Region. Range beyond the Region.
; oe
PLOCEIDS.
141, Estrilda... ». | 4 Flores, Timor, Australia : Oriental, Ethiopian
142. Emblema *.. | 1|N. W. Australia ©
143. Munia 6 | Celebes to N. Guinea and N.,} Oriental
Australia
144. Donacola 3 | Australia
145. Poephila 6 | Australia
146. Amadina 9 | Flores to Tasmania and Samoan| Ethiopian
Islands
147. Erythrura 7 | Moluccas to Caroline and Fiji) Java, Sumatra
Islands, Timor, N. Caledonia
STURMIDA.
148. Eulabes ... 4 |Sumbawa, Flores, Papuan and| Oriental
Solomon Islands
149. Basilornis 2 | Celebes and Ceram
(Acridotheres 1 | Celebes) Oriental genus
150. Creadion 2|N. Zealand
151. Heterolocha ... | 1 |N. Zealand
152. Calleas ... 2 |N. Zealand
153. Aplonis ... 8 | N. Caledonia to Tonga Islands
‘154. Calornis... 13 | Celebes to Solomon Islands and| Malaya
N. Australia
155. Enodes ... 1 | Celebes
156. Scissirostrum... | 1 | Celebes
ARTAMIDZ.
157. Artamus... 15 | Celebes to Fiji Ids. and Tasmania] Oriental
ALAUDIDA.
158. Mirafra ...- ... | 2 | Flores and Australia Oriental, Ethiopian
MOoraAcILuIpDa.
159. Budytes ... 11 | Moluccas, Timor, Australia Pale., Ethiopian, Orien.
160. Corydalla 5 | Lombok and Moluccas to N.| Palearctic, Oriental
Zealand
PITTIDZ.
161. Pitta 12 |Celebes and Lombok to N.| Oriental ‘
Guinea and Australia rae
162. Hydrornis 1 | Gilolo, Batchian , Himalayas to Java
163. Melampitta ... | 1|N. Guinea ~
MENURIDA.
164. Menura ... 2 |E, Australia
ATRICHIIDH.
165. Atrichia... 2 |W. Australia and Queensland
PICARLA.
PIcip#.
166. Yungipicus ... | 2 | Celebes, Lombok, and Flores Oriental
(Mulleripicus... | I | Celebes) Oriental genus

CHAP, XIII] THE AUSTRALIAN REGION. 481

Se enuly. and Se Range within the Region. ' | Range beyond the Region.
n

CUCULIDA.
167. Rhamphococcyx | 1 | Celebes
168. Centropus ... | 13 | Austro-Malaya and Australia Oriental, Ethiopian
169. Cuculus.... ....| 5 | Austro-Malaya and Australia Pale., Orien. , Ethiopian
170. Caliechthrus .. 1 | Papuan Islands
171. Cacomantis ... | 10 | Austro-Malaya and Australia Oriental

172. Chrysococeyx 5 | Austro-Malaya to Fiji Islands] Oriental, Ethiopian
and N. Zealand

(Hierococcyx... | 1 | Celebes) Oriental genus
173. Eudynamis ... | 6 |The whole region; excl. Sand-| Oriental
wich Islands
174. Scythrops ... | 1 | Celebes, Moluccas, and Australia
CoRACIIDE.
(Coracias de 1 | Celebes) Oriental and Ethiopian
175. Eurystomus ... | 4 | Austro-Malaya aud Australia Oriental and Ethiopian
MEROPID2. : :
176. Meropogon ... | 1 | Celebes
177. Merops. 2 | Austro-Malaya and Australia Palc., Orien., Ethiopian
ALCEDINIDE. | }
178. Alcedo ... 4 | Celebes to New Ireland Pale: , Orien., Cee
179. Alcyone ... 6 | Batchian to Tasmania Philippines
180. Pelargopsis 2 | Celebes, Flores Oriental
181. Ceyx 7 | Celebes to New Guinea Oriental
182. Ceycopsis 1 -}Celebes
183. Syma se | she t Papuan Islands and N. Australia
184, Halcyon... ... | 19 |The whole region ; excl. Sand-| Oriental, Ethiopian
wich Islands
185. Todirhamphus 3 | Central Pacific and Sandwich Ids.
186. Dacelo ... | 6 | Papuan Islands and Australia
187. Monachaleyon 1 | Celebes
188. Caridonax 1 | Lombok and Flores
189. Tanysiptera ... | 14 | Batchian to N. Guinea and N.
Australia
190. Cittura ... 2 | Celebes and Sanguir Islands
191. Melidora 1 | New Guinea
BUCEROTIDS. |
192. Hydrocissa? ... | 1 | Celebes Oriental
198. Calao_... 1 | Moluccas to Solomon Islands Malayan
194. Cranorrhinus? | 1 | Celebes io Malayan
PoDARGIDA.
195. Podargus ... | 10 | Papuan Islands to Tasmania
196. Batrachostomus |} 2 | Moluccas Oriental
197. gotheles ... | 5 | Papuan Islands to Tasmania ,
CAPRIMULGIDA.
198, Caprimulgus... | 4 | Lombok to Australia, N. Guinea] Pale., Ethiopian, Orien.

to Pelew Islands

482

ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY.

Order, Family, and
enu:

199. Euwrostopodus...

S.

(Lyncornis

CYPSELID&.

200. Dendrochelidon

201.
202.
203.

Collocalia
Cypselus
Chetura...

PSITTACI.
CACATUIDE.

204.

205.
206.
207.
208.
209.

Cacatua..

Calopsitta

Calyptorhynchus
Microglossus ...

LTicmetis ...
Nasiterna

PLATYCERCID&.

210.
211.
212.
213.
214.

215.
216.

217.
218.
219.
220.

Platucercus
Psephotus

Polytelis...
Nymphicus

Aprosmictus ...

Pyrrhulopsis ...
Cyanoramphus

Melopsittacus ..

Euphema
Pezoporus

Geopsittacus Ls

PALHORNITHIDA.

> 221,
222.
223.
224.
225.
226.
227.

228.
229,
230.

231.
232.

Prioniturus ...

Geoffroyus

Tanygnathus ..

Eclectus ..,
Cyclopsitta
Loriculus

Trichoglossus

Nanodes...

Charmosyna ie

Hos...

Lorius
Coriphilus

NEsTORIDE

233.
234.

Nestor
Dasyptilus

Range within the Region.

No. of
Species.

Aru Islands and Australia
Celebes)

He bo

Celebes to N. Guinea
Celebes to Pacific Islands
Australia

Celebes, Australia

be Pb

17 | Celebes and Lombok, to Solo-
mon Islands and Tasmania

Australia

Australia and Tasmania

Papuan Islands and: N. Austral.

Austr., Solmn. Ids., & N.Guin.?

Papuan and Solomon Islands

oo 09 bo CO

Austral., Tasmania, Norfolk Id.

Australia

Australia

Australia and N. Caledonia

Moluccas, Timor, Papuan Is-
lands, Australia

Tonga to Fiji Islands

N. Zealand, Norfolk. Island, N.
Caledonia, Society Islands

Australia

Australia :

Australia and Tasmania

W. Australia

He OO Set Oo OD

1

ee ee

Celebes

Borneo to Timor & Solomon Ids.

Celebes to New Guinea

Moluceas and Papuan Islands

Papuan Ids. and N.E. Austral.

Celebes to Mysol, Flores

The whole region, excl. Sandwich
Islands, and N. Zealand

1 | Australia and Tasmania

1 | New Guinea

y |Sanguir Ids. and Moluccas to
Solomon Ids.

Bouru and Gilolo to Solomon Ids.

4 | Samoan to Marquesas Islands

ONN OP Orb

5 | New Zealand and Norfolk Ids.
1 | New Guinea

[PART 111,

Range beyond the Region.

Oriental genus

Onental
Oriental

Pale., Orien., Ethiopian
Ethio., Orien., American

Philippines

Philippines
Philippines

Philippines
Oriental

CHAP.

XII. ]

THE AUSTRALIAN REGION.

Order, Family, and
Genus.

STRINGOPIDA.

235.

Stringops

COLUMB.
CoLUMBIDA,

236.
237.

238.
239.

240.
241.
242.
243.
244.
245.
246.
247.
248.
249.
250.
251.
252.
253.
254.
255.
256.
257.
258.
259.

Treron a
Ptilopus...

Carpophaga ...
lanthenas

Leucomelena...
Lopholemus ...
Geopelia...
Macropygia ...
Turacena
Reinwardtenas
Turtur :.
Ocyphaps
Petrophassa ...
Chalcophaps ...
Trugon ... ...
Henicophaps ...
Phaps
Leucosarcia ...
Geophaps ee
Lophophaps ...
Calenas ...
Otidiphaps
Phlogcenas
Goura

DIDUNCULID2.

260.

Diduneulus ...

GALLINA.
TETRAONID&.

261.

Coturnix

PHASIANIDA.

(Gallus ...

TURNICID.

262.

Turnip:

MEGAPODIIDA.

263.
264.
265.
266.

Talegallus
Megacephalon
Lipoa re
Megapodius ...

No. of
Species,

1

nr
mo ON

i
Qo

Od ST HEHE OO DD OD Ee DD OD OV

bee Cc)

1

Range within the Region.
N. Zealand, Chatham Islands ?

Celebes, Bouru, and Ceram, Flores
and Timor

The whole region; excl. N.
Zealand

The whole region

Gilolo, Timor, Papuan Ids. to
Samoan Islands

Australia

Australia

Lombok to Tasmania

Austro-Malaya, Australia

Celebes, Timor, Solomon Ids.

Celebes to New Guinea

Austro-Malaya

Australia

N. W. Australia

Austro-Malaya, Australia

N. Guinea

Papuan Islands

Australia and Tasmania

Australia

Australia

‘Australia

Austro-Malaya

N. Guinea

Celebes, N.Guinea to Madagascar

Papuan Islands

Samoan Islands

Celebes, Timor, Australia, N.
Zealand

Celebes to Timor)
Celebes & Moluccas to Tasmania

Papuan Islands and Australia
Celebes

S. Australia

Celebes to Austral. & Samoan Ids.

Range beyond the Region.

Oriental, Ethiopian
Indo-Malaya
Oriental

Japan, Philippines, An-
daman Islands

Malaya, China
Indo-Malaya

Palearc., Orien., Ethiop.

Oriental

Indo-Malaya
Philippine Islands

Palearc., Orien., Ethiop.

Oriental genus

Palearc., Orien., Ethiop.

Philippines, Nicobar Ids,

483

484

Order, Family, and

Genus.

ACCIPITRES.
FALCONIDA.

267.
268.
269.
270.
271.
272.

Circus
Astur
Accipiter
Urospiz
Uroaétus
Nisaétus...

273.
274.
275.

Neopus ...
Spizaétus
Circaetus
‘(Spilornis
Butastur
Halizetus

276.
277.

278.
279.
280.
281.
282.
283.

Haliastur
Milvus ...

Gypoictinia
Elanus ...

(Pernis ...

Baza
Harpa
Falco
Hieracidea
Cerchneis

284.
285.
286.
287.
288.

PANDIONIDA.

289. Pandion...
290. Polioaétus

STRIGIDA.

291. Athene ...
292. Scops
(Asio

293. Strix

Lophoictinia ...

Henicopernis ...

ZOOLOGICAL GEOGRAPHY.

No. of
Species.

bo

eS ee Oe ee Oe oll

tet NWNWaQH

O-

Range within the Region.

Celebes, S. and E. Austral
The region, to Fiji Islands

The whole region, to Fiji Islands

Australia
Australia and Tasmania
Australia

Celebes and Ternate
Celebes and N. Guinea
Timor and Flores

Celebes and Sulla Islands)
Celebes to New Guinea
The whole region

Australia and N. Caledonia
Celebes to Australia
Australia

Australia

Celebes and Australia
Papuan Islands

Celebes)

Moluccas and Australia

N. Zealand and Auckland Ids,
Austro-Malaya and Australia
Australia and Tasmania
Austro-Malaya and Australia

The whole region
Celebes and Sandwich Islands

The whole reg., excl. Pacific Ids.

Celebes, Moluccas, N. Zealand
Sandwich Islands)

The whole region

[PARY 111,

Range beyond the Region.

Almost Cosmopolite
Almost Cosmopolite
Almost Cosmopolite

S. Paleare., Ethiopian,
Oriental

Oriental

Neotrop., Ethiop., Orien.

Palearc., Ethiop., Orien.

Oriental genus

Oriental, N. E. Africa

Cosmop., excl. Neotrop.
region

Oriental

Palearc., Orien., Ethiop.

Oriental, Ethiopian

Palearctic, Oriental, and
Ethiopian

Oriental

Almost Cosmopolite

Almost Cosmopolite

Cosmopolite
Oriental

Paleare. , Orien., Ethiop.

Almost Cosmopolite

Almost Cosmopolite, excl.
Australian region

Cosmopolite

Peculiar or very Cheracteristic Genera of Wading and Swimming Birds.

GRALLA.
RALLIDA.
~ Ocydromus
Cabalus ...
Notornis...
Tribonyx

Habroptila

PDE or

: “ted

New Zealand
Chatham Islands

New Zealand, Norfolk and Lord

Howe’s Islands
Australia and N. Zealand
Moluccas

CHAP. XIII. ]

THE AUSTRALIAN REGION.

485

Order, Family, and
Genus.

Rallina ...
Pareudiastes ...

ScoLOPACID.
Cladorhynchus

CHARADRIIDS.

Esacus ... .«:.
Erythrogonys...
Thinornis

Anarhynchus
Pedionomus ...

RHINOCHETID.
Rhinochetus ...

ANATIDE.

Nesonetta -
Malacorhynchus
Hymenolemus
Biziura ...
Anseranas
Cercopsis

PROCELLARIIDS.
Prion

SPHENISCIDE.
Eudyptes

STRUTHIONES.
CASUARIIDA.

294. Dromeus
295. Casuaruis

APTERYGID&.
296. Apteryz ...

DINORNITHIDS.
297. Dinornis...
298. Mionornis

PALAPTERYGIDA.

299. Palapteryx
300. Huryapteryz ...

No. of
Species.

meebo et et on

a

bS bo

Range within the Region.

Austro-Malaya
Samoan Islands

Australia

Austro-Malaya, Australia
Australia

New Zealand

New Zealand

Australia

New Caledonia

Auckland Islands —

Australia

New Zealand
Australia:

Australia

Australia and Tasmania

New Zealand

Australia and N. Zealand

Australia

Ceram to New Britain, N.Austrl.

New Zealand

(Extinct)

N. Zealand
N. Zealand

(Extinct)

N. Zealand
N. Zealand

Range beyond the Region.

Oriental

Orietita.t

Antarctic Seas

Antarctic shores

H

ua eee
1 TUT Sent Re hip

rite a eff Pye

4 F © (boas ae

1 s
=

. UE
7 ; et, Dacteiic Ais | to < 1) eat
‘ “4 hs q ob

- -
oO Pe See es i

— i

a
’
cop (iat soayhe
"
Me
&
;
2 > th
F
‘
;
aoe
;
e ‘
t
2
1 r
F
:

INDEX TO VOL. I.

ae i <i we

~ - > a!
ris if aa :
7 ieee

te ion :

i n

1@° 7

.
e-:
a
a
é .
~—
.
.
.
:
; ‘
7
*
cy
. -
.

.
- a
ae
.

{

7 ‘

7 ig , aia Fa a a ver

| wOoOYy a 5 a epee 8 tii i ;
: le Baie 6 v aps Sa ieeer Gh SRR. 8 Fb dot rate 7
7 ——

INDEX TO VOL. I.

+

Norr.—In this Index the names in Italics all refer to fossil genera or families

mentioned in Part II.

The systematic names of genera and families occurring in

almost every page of Part III. are not given, as they would unnecessarily swell
the Index ; but they can be readily referred to by the Class or Order, or by the

Geographical Division (Region or Sub-region) under which they occur.

They

will, however, all be found in the General Index, with a reference to the page (in
Vol. Il., Part IV.) where a systematic account of their distribution is given.

AS

Aardvark of East Africa, figure of, 261
Accipitres, European Eocene, 163
Accipitres, classification of, 97
range of Palearctic genera of, 248
range of Ethiopian genera of, 312
range of Oriental genera of, 385
range of Australian genera of, 486
Acerotherium, European Miocene, 119
N. American Tertiary, 136
Achenodon, N. American Tertiary, 138
Acotherium, European Eocene, 126 :
Adapis, European Eocene, 125
A‘lurogale, European Eocene, 125
A pyornis, of Madagascar, 164
Aishna, from the Lias, 167
Agnopterus, European Eocene, 163
Agriocherus, N. American Tertiary, 138
Agrion, from the Lias, 167
Alcephalus, Indian Miocene, 122
Aldabra Islands, land-tortoises of, 289
Aletornis, N. American Eocene, 163
Algeria, Post-Pliocene deposits and caves of,
lll
Allen, Mr. J. A., on Zoological regions, 61
objections to his system of circumpolar
zones, 67
objections to his zoo-geographical nomen-
elature, 68
Altai mountains, fossils in caves, 111
Amblyrhiza, Pliocene of Antilles, 148
America, recent separation of North and
South, 40
extinct mammalia of, 129
North, Post-Pliocene fauna of, 129
Amomys, N. American Tertiary, 134
Amphechinus, European Miocene, 117
Amphibia, means of dispersal of, 28
classification of, 100
peculiar to Palearctic region, 186
of Central Eurape, 196
of the Mediterranean sub-region, 205
of Siberian sub-region, 220

Vou. L—33

Amphibia, of the Manchurian sub-region, 226

table of Palearctic families of, 237

of the Ethiopian region, 255

of West Africa, 264

South African, 268

of Madagascar, 280

table of Ethiopian families of, 298

of the Oriental region, 317

of the Indian sub-region, 326

of Ceylon, 327

of Indo-Chinese sub-region, 331

of Indo-Malay sub-region, 340

table of Oriental families of, 369

of the Australian region, 397

resemblances of Australian and South-

American, 400

of New Guinea, 416 .

of New Zealand, 457
Amphibos, Indian Miocene, 122
Amphicifon, European Miocene, 118

Indian Miocene, 121

N. American Tertiary, 134
Amphimericide, European Miocene, 119
Amphimoschus, European Miocene, 120
Amphisorex, European Miocene, 118
Amphitragulus, European Miocene, 120
Anastoma, European Tertiary, 169
Anchilophus, European Eocene, 125
Anchippodus, N. American Eocene, 139
Anchippus, N. American Tertiary, 135
Anchitheride, N. American Tertiary, 135
Anchitherium, European Miocene, 119

European Eocene, 125

N. American Tertiary, 135
Ancient fauna of New Zealand, 459
Ancylotherium, Miocene of Greece, 116

European Miocene, 121
Andaman Islands, zoology of, 333

probable past history of, 334
Andreas, European Miocene, 165
Animal kingdom, primary divisions of, 85
Animals, development of, affecting distribu-

tion, 7
dispersal and migration of, 10

490

Animals, rapid multiplication of, 10
Anisacodon, N. American Tertiary, 137
Anoa of Celebes, peculiarities of, 428
Anoplotheriidw, European Miocene, 119
Anoplotherium, European Miocene, 119
European Hocene, 126
S. American Eocene, 148
Anseres, arrangement of, 98
peculiar Palearctic genera, 250
peculiar Ethiopian genera of, 313
peculiar Australian genera of, 487
Antelopes in the Indian Miocene deposits, 122
birthplace and migrations of, 155
Palearctic, 182
Antelotherium, Indian Miocene, 122
Anthracotheride, N. American Tertiary, 137
Anthracotheriwm, European Miocene, 119
Antiucodon, N. American Tertiary, 133
Antilles, Pliocene Mainmalia of, 148
Antilope, Post-Pliocepe, 112
in Brazilian caves, 144
Antiquity of the genera of insects, 166
of the genera of land and freshwater
shells, 168
Aphanapteryx of Mauritius, 164
Aphelotheriwm, European Eocene, 125
Aquila, European Miocene, 161
Archeopteryx, Bavarian Oolite, 163
Arctic zone not a separate region, 68
Arctocyon, European Eocene, 125
Arctodus, N. American Post-Pliocene, 130
Arctomys, European Pliocene, 113
Arctotherium in Brazilian caves, 144
8. American Pliocene, 146
Argus pheasant, figure of, 339
peculiarity in display of plumage, and
confirmation of Mr. Darwin's views,
340
Artiodactyla, European Eocene, 126
N. American Tertiary, 137
S. American Pliocene, 146
Arvicola, European Pliocene, 113
in Brazilian caves, 145
S. American Pliocene, 147
S. American Eocene, 148
Auchena, N. American Post-Pliocene, 130
Auckland Islands, birds of, 455
Australia, physical features of, 387
Australia and 8. America, supposed land con-
nection between, 398
Australian region, description of, 387,
zoological characteristics of, 390
mammalia of, 390
birds of, 391
reptiles of, 396
amphibia of, 397
fresh-water fish of, 397
summary of vertebrata of, 297
supposed land-connection vf with 8. Ame-
Tica, 398
insects of, 403
lepidoptera of, 404
coleoptera of, 405
land shells of, 407
sub-regions of, 408
early history of, 465
Australian sub-region, mammalia of, 438
illustration of mammialia of, 439
birds of, 440 ;
illustration of fauna of, 441
Austro-Malayan sub-region, physical features
of, 388
zoology of, 409
Aye-aye, figure of, 278
Azores, visited by European birds, 17
birds of, 207
°

INDEX.

Azores, butterflies of, 207
beetles of, 207, 209
peculiarly modified birds of, 207
stragglers to, 208
how stocked with animal life, 208

B

Babirusa of Celebes, peculiarities of, 425
Badger, figure of, 195
Balena, European Pliocene, 112
Balwnodon, European Pliocene, 112
Baly, Mr., on Phytophaga of Japan, 230
Banca, its pecnliar species and solution of a
problem in distribution, 356
Barriers, as affecting distribution, 6
permanence of, as affecting distribution, 7
to the dispersal of birds, 17
Bates, Mr., on Carabide of Japan, 228
on Longicorns of Japan, 230
Bathmodon, N. American Tertiary, 13€
Bathrodon, N. American Tertiary, 133
Batrachia, Tertiary, 165
Bats, powers of flight of, 15
classification of, 87
of New Zealand, 450
Bears, probable cause of absence of, from
tropical Africa, 291
Beaver, N. American Tertiary, 140

~ Beetles, families selected for study, 103

from the Lias, 167
of Azores, 207
of Japan, 228
Belemnoziphius, European Pliocene, 112
Belt, Mr., his theory of a great Siberian lake
during the glacial epoch, 218
on change of climate caused by diminu-
tion of obliquity of ecliptic, 466
Birds, means of dispersal of, 15
dispersal of by winds, 16
American, found in Enrope, 16
reaching the Azores, 17
barriers to dispersal of, 17
limited by forests, 17
classification of, 93
Miocene of Greece, 116
extinct, 160
fossil of Palearctic region, 161
European of Miocene period, 161
Eocene of Europe, 162
relations of, 162
extinct of North America, 163
recently extinet in New Zealand, 164
Cretaceous of N. America, 164
remains of in Brazilian caves, 164
recently extinct in Madagascar and the
Mascarene Islands, 164
cosmopolitan groups of, 176
numerous genera, Palearctic, 183
of the European sub-region, 193
northern range of in Europe, 193
of the zone of pine forests, 194
of Iceland, 198
of the Mediterranean sub-region, 208
of Malta, 206 (note) oil
of Azores, 207
of the Cape Verd Islands, 215
of Siberian sub-region, 219
Oriental found in Siberia, 219
extreme northern Asiatic, 219
of northern Asiatic forests, 220
of the Manchurian sub-region, 223
Palearctic genera of, in the Manchurian
sub-region, 224

INDEX. 491

Birds, Oriental genera of, in the Manchurian
sub-region, 224
characteristic of N.W. China and Mon-
golia, 226
table of Palearctic families of, 235
of West Atrica, 243
list of Paleearctic genera of, 243
of the Ethiopian region, 253
of the East African sub-region, 260
8. African, 267
genera of, peculiar to Madagascar, 275
common to Madagascar and Oriental or
Ethiopian regions, 276
species common to Madagascar and Africa
or Asia, 277
table of Ethiopian families of, 295
table of Ethiopian genera of, 306
of the Oriental region, 316
of the Indian sub-region, 323
Oriental genera of in Central India, 324
Palearctic and Ethiopian genera in
Central India, 325
of Ceylon, 327
of Indo-Chinese subr egion, 330
of Indo-Malayan sub-region, 337
illustration of peculiar Malayan, 339
of the Philippine Islands, 346
table of Oriental families of, 366
table of Oriental genera of, 375
of Australian region, 391
specially organized Australian families of,
392
of the Papuan Islands, 410
peculiarities of, 413
brilliant colours of, 413
remarkable forms of, 414
of the Moluccas, 418
peculiarities of, 421
of Timor group, 423
of Celebes. 428
of Australia, 440
of New Zealand, 451
peculiar to New Zealand, 452
of Norfolk Island, 453
of Lord Howe’s Island, 453
of the Chatham Islands, 454
of the Auckland Islands, 455
table of families of Australian, 471
table of genera of Australian, 478
Black ape of Celebes, 427
Blanford, Mr. W. T., on the ‘“ Indian”
region, 60
on relations of Indian sub-region with
Africa, 321
Blapsidium, Oolitic insect, 167
Blyth, Mr., on zoological regions, 60
on the relations of Indian sub-region with
Africa, 221
Borneo, probable recent changes in, 357
Bos, Post-Pliocene, 112
Indian Miocene, 122
Bourbon, zoology of, 280
reptiles of, 281
Bovide, European Miocene, 120
Brachymys, European Miovene, 120
Bramatherium, Miocene of Perim Island, 122
Brazilian cave-fauna, 143
remarks on, 145
Breyeria borinensis, carboniferous insect, 168
Britain, peculiar species in, 197
British Isles, zoology of, 197
Broad-bill, Malayan, figure of, 340
Brontotheride, N. American Tertiary, 137
Brontotheriwm, N. American Tertiary, 137
Bubo, European Miocene, 162
Bulimus, Eocene, 169

Bunelurus, N. American Tertiary, 134
Buprestidium, Oolitic insect, 167
Buttertlies, arrangement of, 103
Palearctic, 187
of Central Europe, 196
of the Mediterranean sub-region, 205
of Azores, 207
peculiar to Siberian sub-region, 220
of Japan and North China, 227
of the tthiopian region, 255
nuinber of Ethiopian species, 256
ot Indo-Malay sub-region, 342
of the Australian region, 404
of the Austro-Malay sub-region, 404
of the Moluccas, 419
of Celebes, peculiarities of, 434
of New Zealand, 457

C.

Cadurcotherium, European Eocene, 125
Celodon, in Brazilian caves, 145
Ceelogenys, in Brazilian caves, 144
Cenopithecus, European Eocene, 124
Cainotherium, European Miocene, 120
European Eocene, 126
Calamodon, N, American Eocene, 139
Callithriz in Brazilian caves, 184
Canaries, birds of, 208
beetles of, 209
Canide, European Miocene, 118
European Eocene, 125
N. American Tertiary, 134
remarkable 8. African, 267
Canis, European Pliocene, 112
Post-Pliocene, 112
European Miocene, 118
Indian Miocene, 121
European Eocene, 125
N. American Post-Pliocene, 129
N. American Tertiary, 134, 135
in Brazilian caves, 144
S. American Pliocene, 146
Camel, fossil in Indian Miocene, 122
birth-place and migrations of, 155
Falexarctic, 182
Camelide, essentially extra-tropical, 112
N. American Tertiary, 158
Cumelopardalis, Miocene of Greece, 116
Indian Miocene, 122
Camelotherium, S. American Pliocene, 147
Cape of Good Hope, peculiar flora and fauna
of, 266
Cape Verd Islands, zoology of, 214
Cape-hare, 8. African, 267
Cardiodus, S. Americau Pliocene, 147
Cariama, Brazilian caves, 164
Carnivora of European Pliocene, 112
Miocene of Greece, 115
European Miocene, 118
Indian Miocene, 121
European Eocene, 125
N. American Post-Pliocene, 129
N. American Tertiary. 154
of Brazilian caves, 144
S. American Pliocene, 146
Carnivora, classification of, 88
antiquity of, 153
of the Palearctic region, 182
list of Palwarctic genera of, 240
list of Ethiopian genera of, 302
range of Oriental genera of, 273
list of Australian genera of, 476
Caroline Islands, bixds of, 444
Carterodon in Brazilian caves, 145

492 INDEX.

Carus, and Gerstaeker on classification of

animals, 85

Professor, on classification of the Cetacea,

Castor, European Pliocene, 113
European Miocene, 120
Casoryx, N. American Tertiary, 138
Cathartes, Brazilian caves, 164
Cave-fauna of Brazil, 143
Cavia, European Miocene, 121
in Brazilian caves, 144
8S. American Pliocene, 147
Cebocherus, European Eocene, 126
Cebus in Brazilian caves, 144
Celebes, physical features of, 389
mammalia of, 426
birds of, 428
insects of, 484
origin of fauna of, 436
Centetide, European Miocene, 118 °
Ceratodus, remarkable Australian fish, 397
Cercolabes in Brazilian caves, 145
Cercopithecus in European Pliocene, 112
Cervide, European Miocene, 120
birth-place and migrations of, 155
Cervus, European Pliocene, 113
Indian Pliocene and Miocene, 122
N. American Post-Pliocene, 130
N. American Tertiary, 138
in Brazilian caves, 144
S. American Pliocene, 147
Cetacea, European Pliocene, 112
European Miocene, 119
N. American Post-Pliocene, 130
N. American Tertiary, 140
Cetacea, classification of, 89
range of Oriental genus, 374

Ceylon and Malaya, resemblance of insects of,
327

Ceylonese sub-region, 326
mammalia of, 327
birds of, 327
reptiles of, 327
amphibia of, 327
insects of, 327

past history of, as indicated by its fauna,
328

Chalicomys, European Pliocene, 113
Chalicotherium, European Miocene, 119
Indian Miocene, 122
fossil in N. China, 123
Chameeleo, N. American Eocene, 165
Chamois, figure of, 195
Chatham Islands, birds of, 454
Chelonia, classification of, 100
Chelydra, European Pliocene, 165
Chevrotain of Malaya, figure of, 336
Chili should not be placed in the Palea
or Nearctic regions, 63

China, fossil mammals in, resembling those of

Indian and European Miocene, 362

North, mammalia of, 222
Chinchillide in Brazilian caves, 145

S. American Pliocene, 147

Pliocene of Antilles, 148
Chiroptera, classification of, 87

list of Palearctic genera of, 239

list of Ethiopian genera of, 300

range of Oriental genera of, 371

list of Australian genera of, 475
Chiroptera, European Eocene, 125

in Brazilian caves, 144
Chlamydotherium in Brazilian caves, 145
Cheromorus, European Miocene, 119
Cheropotumus, European*EKocene, 126
Cherotheriwm, Indian Miocene, 122

Choneziphius, European Pliocene, 112
Chough, Alpine, figure of, 195

Circumpolar zones, objections to system of, 67
Classification as affecting the study of distri-

bution, 83
Clausilia, Kocene, 169
Climate, as a limit to the range of mammalia,

ll

gradual change of, before the glacial epoch,

41
Coleoptera, families selected for study, 103
Palearctic, 188
number of Palearctic species, 189
of Central Europe, 196
of the Mediterranean sub-region, 205
of the Cape Verd Islands, 215
of the Ethiopian region, 256
8. African, 268
of Madagascar, 282, 283
of the Oriental region, 319
of Indo-Malay sub-region, 342
of the Australian region, 405

affinity of Australianand South Amerivan,

406, 407

of Celebes, 435

of New Zealand, 457
Collocalia, European Miocene, 161
Colobus, European Miocene, 117
Colonoceras, N. American Tertiary, 136
Colossochelys of Indian Miocene, 123,§165
Columbe, classification of, 96

range of Palearctic genera of, 248

range of Ethiopian genera of, 311

range of Oriental genera of, 384

range of Australian genera of, 485
Comoro islands, zoology of, 281
Continents, distribution of, 37

recent changes of, 38
Continental extension in Mesozoic times, 156
Corvus, Wuropean Miocene, 161
Coryphodon, European Eocene, 126
Cosmopolitan groups enumerated, 175
Cricetodon, European Miocene, 120
Cricetus, European Pliocene, 113
Crocodiles, Eocene, 165
Crocodilia, classification of, 100
Crook-billed plovers of New Zealand, 456
Crotch, Mr., on beetles of the Azores, 209
Crowned-pigeon, figure of, 415
Cryptornis, European Eocene, 163
Ctenomys, 8S. American Pliocene, 147
Cuba, extinct mammalia of, 148
Curculionidium, Oolitic insect, 167
Cyclostoma, Eocene, 169
Cyllo sepulta, European Cretaceous, 167
Cynelurus, in Brazilian caves, 144
Cynopithecus of Celebes, affinities of, 427
Cyotherium, European Eocene, 125

D.

Daptophilus, N. American Tertiary, 134

Darwin, Mr., his explanation of the cause of
the abundance of apterous insects in

Medeira, 211

on the relation of flowers and insects, 463

Dasyprocta, European Miocene, 121

in Brazilian caves, 144
Dasypus, in Brazilian caves, 145

S$. American Pliocene, 147
Dasyurus, Australian Post-Tertiary, 157

David, Pére, his researches in China and Thi-

het, 221, 222
on birds of N. China, 226

INDEX.

493

Deer, fossil in N. American Tertiary forma-
tions, 148
Palearctic, 182
probable cause of absence of from tropical
Africa, 291
Delphinus, European Pliocene, 112
Dendrocygna, European Miocene, 162
Desman of 8. Russia, figure of, 219
Diceratherium, N. American Tertiary, 137
Dichobune, European Eocene, 126
Dicotyles, N. American Post-Pliocene, 130
N. American Tertiary, 137
in Brazilian caves, 144
S. American Pliocene, 146
birthplace and migrations of, 155
Dicrocerus, Enropean Miocene, 120
Didelphys, European Eocene, 126
N. American Post-Pliocene, 130
in Brazilian caves, 145
Didide, 164
Dinocerata, N. American Tertiary, 139
Dinoceras, N. American Eocene, 139
Dinornis, allied form in European Eocene, 163
of New Zeaiand and Australia, 164
Dinornithide of New Zealand, 164
Dinotherium, Miocene of Greece, 116
European Miocene, 120
Miocene of Perim Island, 123
Dinyctis, N. American Tertiary, 134
Dinylus, European Miocene, 117
Diplacodon, N. American Tertiary, 136
Diprotodon, Australian Post-Tertiary, 157
Dispersal of animals, 10
of mammalia, 10
of reptiles and amphibia, 28
Distribution, attected by climate, 5
affected by physical features, 5
contrasts of, in similar climates, 5
similarities of, in diverse climates, 6
barriers as affecting, 6
study of, dependent on a good classifica-
tion, 83
of animals an adjunct to geology, 8
of animals requires certain preliminary
studies, S
of animals dependent on physical geo-
graphy, 35
of animals, as affected by the glacial epoch,
40
of animals, as affected by changes of
vegetation, 43
of animals, as affected by organic changes,

of animals, hypothetical illustration of,
46
of animals, complexity of the causes af-
fecting the, 49
of animals, problems in, 51
of plants, as affected by the glacial epoch,
42
Dodo of Mauritius, 282
Dolichopterus, European Miocene, 162
Dommina, N. American Tertiary, 134
Dorcatherium, European Miocene, 120
Dremotherium, Miocene of Greece, 116
European Miocene, 120
Dresser, Mr. H. E., on northern range of
European birds, 193
Dromatherium, N, American Triassic, 134
oldest American mammal, 160
Drongo-shrike, Malayan fignie of, 340
Dryopithecus European Miocene, 117

L

E.

East Africa, geographical features of, 258
wide range of genera and species over, 259
few special types in, 260

East African sub-region, description of, 258
genera and species ranging over the whole

of, 259
mammalia of, 260
birds of, 260
reptiles of, 260
amphibia and fishes of, 260
insects of, 260
few peculiar types in, 260
illustration of zoology of, 261

East Australia, peculiar birds of, 440

East Thibet, mammalia of, 222

Eaton, Rev. A. E., on insects of Kerguelen

Island, 211

Echimyide, in Brazilian caves, 145

Echinogale, European Miocene, 118

Ectognathus, N. American Eocene, 139

Edentata, Miocene of Greece, 116
European Miocene, 121
N. American Post-Pliocene, 130
N. American Pliocene, 140
of Brazilian caves, 145
S. American Pliocene, 147

Edentata, classification of, 90
probable birthplace of, 155
range of Ethiopian genera of, 305
range of Oriental genus of, 375

Elephants, fossil of Indian Miocene, 123
fossil in N. American Post-Pliocene for-

mations, 130
birthplace and migrations of, 155

Elephant shrews, 8. African, 267

Elephas, Post-Pliocene, 112
fossil in N. China, 123
N. American Tertiary, 138

Elliot, Mr., his great work on the birds 0

paradise, 415

Elornis, European Miocene, 162

Elotherium, N. American Tertiary, 137, 139

Elwes, Mr., on birds of Persia, 204
on true relations of the birds of Central

India, 323

Embasis, N. American Tertiary, 134

Emu, figure of, 441

Emys, Indian Miocene, 123
Miocene and Eocene, 165

Emydida, Indian Miocene, 123

Enhydrion, Indian Miocene, 121

Eobasileus, N. American Eocene, 139

Eocene period, 124

fauna of S. America, 148

Ephemera, from the Lias, 167

Eporeodon, N. American Tertiary, 138

Equide, European Pliocene, 112
Miocene of Greece, 115
European Eocene, 125

Equus, European Pliocene, 112
Post-Pliocene, 112
Indian Miocene, 121
N. American Post-Pliocene, 130
N. American Tertiary, 135
Brazilian caves, 144
S. American Pliocene, 146

Ereptodon, N. American Post-Pliocene, 130

Erinaceus, European Miocene, 117

Erythromachus of Rodriguez, 164

Esthonyx, N. American Eocene, 139

Ethiopian region should not include any part
of India, 63
defined, 73
subdivisions of, 73

494

INDEX.

Ethiopian region, general features of, 251
zoological characteristics of, 25”
manumalia of, 253
great speciality of, 253
birds of, 253
reptiles of, 254
amphibia of, 255
fresh-water fish of, 255
suminary of vertebrates of, 255
insects of, 255
coleoptera of, 256
terrestrial mollusea of, 257
sub-regions of, 258
Atlantic islands of, 269
the probable past history of, 285
tables of distribution of animals of, 293

Eumys, N. American Tertiary, 140

Euphractus, S. American Pliocene, 147

Europe, recent changes in physical geography

of, 39

Miocene fauna of Central, 117

Miocene fauna of, allied to existing fauna
of tropical Asia and Africa, 124

European sub-region, description of, 191
forests of, 192
mammalia of, 192
birds of, 193
reptiles and amphibia of, 195
fresh-water fish of, 196
insects of, 196
islands of, 197

Euryceros of Madagascar, figure of, 278

Eurydon, in Brazilian caves, 145

Eurytherium, European Eocene, 126

Eutatus, 8. American Pliocene, 147

Eutelodon, Kuropean Eocene, 126

Eutemnodus, 8. American Hocene, 148

Extinct mammalian fauna of Europe, general

considerations on, 126

mammalia of N. America and Europe,
comparison of, 140

mammalia of the Antilles, 148

mammalia of Old and New Worlds,
general remarks on, 148

fauna of New Zealand, 459

Extinction of large animals, causes of, 158

F.

Fauna of Japan, general character and affini-
ties of, 230
of Palearctic region, general conclusions
as to, 231
extinct, of Madagascar and Mascarene
Islands, 282
Malayan, probable origin of, 359
Molucean, peculiarities of, 419
Timorese, origin of, 422
of Celebes, origin of, 436
of New Zealand, origin of, 460
Felis spelcea, 110
Felis, Miocene of Greece, 115.
European Miocene, 118
Indian Miocene, 121
N. American Post-Pliocene, 129
in Brazilian caves, 144
Fernando Po, zoological features of, 265
Fiji, Tonga, and Samoa Islands, birds of, 443
Fishes, means of dispersal of, 29
classification of, 101
cosmopolitan groups of, 176
of the Palearctic region, 186
of the European sub-region, 196
of the Mediterranean sub-region, 205
of the Manchurian sub-region. 227

Fishes, fresh-water,table of Palearctic families
of, 227
of the Ethiopian region, 255
of South Africa, 268
fresh-water, table of Ethiopian families of,
298
fresh-water, of the Oriental region, 318
of the Indo-Malay sub-region, 341
fresh-water, table of Oriental families of,
369
fresh-water, of the Australian region, 397
fresh-water,resemblance of Australian and
8S. American, 400
how the transmission may have taken
place, 401
fresh-water, of New Zealand, 457
Flamingoes, European Miocene, 162
Flora, of New Zealand, as influenced by scar-
city of insects, 462
fossil of Australia, 467
Flower, Professor, on classification of mam-
malia, 85
classification of carnivora, 87
Flying Lemur, Malayan, figure of, 337
Flying Opossum, figure of, 442
Formosa, zoology of, 332
Forests, essential to existence of many Euro-
pean animals, 192
Siberian, greatest extent of, 216

G.

Galapagos, scarcity of insects in, 463
Galecynus, in European Pliocene, 112
Galera, N. American Post-Pliocene, 13
Galeospalax, European Miocene, 118
Galeotherium, Post-Pliocene, 111
Galethylax, European Eocene, 125
Galictis, in Brazilian caves, 144
Gallinz, classification of, 96
range of Palzarctic genera of, 248
range of Ethiopian genera of, 311
range of Oriental genera of, 384
range of Australian genera of, 485
Gallus, Miocene of Greece, 116
Gallus bravardi, European Pliocene, 161
Gastornis, European Eocene, 163
Genera common to Post-Pliocene and Pliocene
faunas of N. America, 132
Geological history of Oriental region, 362
Gibraltar, cave fauna of, 114
Glacial epoch, as affecting the distribution of
animals, 40
as a cause of the great change in the
fauna of the temperate zones, since
Pliocene times, 151
probably simultaneous in both hemi-
spheres, 151
causing a general subsidence of the
ocean, 152
Glandina, Eocene, 169
Glossotheriwm, in Brazilian eaves, 145
8S. American Pliocene, 147
Glyptodon, 8. American Pliocene, 147
Gnathopsis, 8. American Pliocene, 147
Goats, Palearctic, 182
Godman, Mr., on Natural History of the
Azores, 207
Golden Moles, 8. African, 267
Graculavus, N. American Cretaceous, 164
Grallie, arrangement of, 97
peculiar or characteristic Palearctic ge-
nera, 249
peculiar Ethiopian genera of, 313

INDEX.

495

Grallz, peculiar Oriental genera of, 386
peculiar Australian genera of, 486
Gray, Dr. J. E., on classification of Cetacea,88
Greece, Upper Miocene deposits of, 115
summary of Miocene fauna of, 116
Groups peculiar to a region, how defined, 184
Gulick, Rev. J. T., on Achatinellide of the
Sandwich Islands, 446
Giinther, Dr., his classification of reptiles, 98
his classification of fishes, 101
on gigantic tortoises of Galapagos and the
Mascarene Islands, 289
on range of Indian reptiles in the Hima-
layas, 329

H.

Haast, Dr., on extinct birds of New Zealand,
460
Habitat, definition of, 4
Hainan, zoology of, 334
Halcyornis, European Eocene, 103
Halitherium, European Pliocene, 112
European Miocene, 119
Helladotherium, Miocene of Greece, 116
European Miocene, 120
Hatteria of New Zealand, 456
Helictis, Himalayan, figure of, 331
Helix, Eocene, 169
Hemibos, Indian Miocene, 122
Hemicyon, European Miocene, 118
Herpetotherium, N. American Tertiary, 134
Hesperomys, N. American Tertiary, 140
in Brazilian caves, 145
S. American Pliocene, 147
Hesperornis, N. American Cretaceous, 164
Heterodon, in Brazilian caves, 145
Hexaprotodon, Indian Miocene, 122
Hickman, Mr. John, on a cause of the extinc-
tion of large animals, 158
Hjmalayas, altitude reached by various groups
in the, 329, 333
Hipparion, European Pliocene, 112
Miocene of Greece, 115
European Miocene, 119
N. American Post-Pliocene, 130
N. American Tertiary, 135
Hippopotamus, Post-Pliocene, 112
Europe in Pliocene, 113
Indian Pliocene, 122
Hipposyus, N. American Tertiary, 133
Hippotheriwm, European Miocene, 119
Indian Miocene, 122
Hippotragus, European Miocene, 120
Homalodontotherium, 8S. American Pliocene,
146
Homalophus, European Miocene, 161
Homocamelus, N. American Tertiary, 138
Honeysuckers, birds specially adapted to
Australia, 392
Hooker, Dr., on deficiency of odours in New
Zealand plants, 464
Hoplocetus, European Pliocene, 112
Hoplophoneus, N. American Tertiary, 134
Horses, fossil, in Indian Miocene, 121
perfect series of ancestral, in N. America,
136
probable birthplace of, 154
Hutton, Capt. F. W., on origin of New Zealand
fauna, 461
Huxley, Professor, on zoological regions, 59
division of aniinal kingdom by, $5
Hycena, Post-Pliocene, 112
Miocene of Greece, 115
European Miocene, 118

Hycena, Indian Miocene, 121

fossil in N. China, 123
Hyenarctos in European Pliocene, 112

European Mivcene, 118

Indian Miocene, 121

8S. American Pliocene, 146
Hyeenictis, Miocene of Greece, 115

European Miocene, 118
Hyenide, European Miocene, 118
Hycenodon, European Miocene, 118

European Eocene, 125

N. American Tertiary, 134
Hyenodontide, European Miocene, 118
Aydrocherus, N. American Post-Pliocene, 130
Hydrornis, European Miocene, 162
Hyohippus, N. American Tertiary, 135
Hyomoschus, European Miocene, 120
Hyopotumus, European Miocene, 119

N. American Tertiary, 137
Hyopsodus, N. American Tertiary, 133
Hyotherium, European Miocene, 119
Hypertragulus, N. American Tertiary, 138
Hypisodus, N. American Tertiary, 138
Hu psiprymnus, Australian Post-Tertiary, 157
Hyrachyus, N. American Tertiary, 136
Hyracodon, N. American Tertiary, 136
Hyracoidea, classification of, 90

Palearctic, 242

Ethiopian, 304
Hyracotherium, supposed, in European Eo-

cene, 125

European Eocene, 126
Hystrix, European Pliocene, 113

Miocene of Greece, 116

N. American Tertiary, 140

1h

Ibidipodia, European Miocene, 162
Ibidorhynchus, figure of, 331
Iceland, zoology of, 198
Icthyornis, N. American Cretaceous, 164
Icticyon in Brazilian caves, 144 .
Ictitherium, Miocene of Greece, 115
European Miocene, 118
Ictops, N. American Tertiary, 133
India, Miocene fauna of, allied to that of
Europe, 123
geological features of, 328
Indian, sub-region, description of, 321
supposed relation to Ethiopian region, 321
mammalia of, 322
birds of, 323
reptiles and amphibia of, 326
Indo-Chinese, sub-region, description of, 329
zoological characteristics of, 330
illustration of, 331
reptiles of, 331
amphibia of, 331
insects of, 332
islands belonging to, 333
Indo-Malayan sub-region, description of, 334
mammalia of, 336
illustrations of, 336, 339
birds of, 337
remote geographical relations of, 339
reptiles and amphibia of, 340
fishes of, 341
insects of, 341
coleoptera of, 342
terrestrial mo!lusea of, 343
zoological relations of islands of, 345
recent geographical changes in, 357
probable origin of fauna of, 359
Insects, means of dispersal of, 32

496

Insects, tenacity of life of, 33
adapted to special conditions, 33
groups selected for the study of their
geographical distribution, 102
antiquity of the genera of, 166
fossil of European Miocene, 166
European Cretaceous, 167
European Wealden, 167
Palozoic, 168
Palearctic, 187
of Central Europe, 196
of the Mediterranean sub-region, 205
of the Siberian sub-region, 220
of the Manchurian sub-region, 227
of the Ethiopian region, 255
of the East African sub-region, 260
of West Africa, 265
8. African, 268
of Madagascar, 282
general remarks on, 284
of tropical Africa and America, probable
eause of similarities in, 291
of Indo-Chinese sub-region, 332
of the Oriental region, 318
of Ceylon, 327
of Indo-Malay sub-region, 341
statistics of collecting in the various
islands of the Malay Archipelago, 343
of the Australian region, 403
of New Guinea, 417
of the Moluccas, 420
of Timor group, 426
of Celebes, 454
of New Zealand, 458
searcity of, in New Zealand, 462
influence of on the flora, 463
Insectivora, European Miocene, 117
N. American Post-Pliocene, 129
N. American Tertiary, 133
Insectivora, classification of, 87
of the Palearctic region, 181
of N. China and E. Thibet, 222
range of Palearctic genera of, 239
of Madagasear, 273
range of Ethiopian genera of, 301
of the Oriental region, 315 _
range of Oriental genera of, 372
range of Australian genera of, 476
Tsacis, N. American Tertiary, 133
Ischyromys, N. American Tertiary, 140
Islands, N. European, zoology of, 197
of the Mediterranean sub-region, 206
of the West African sub-region, 265
of Ethiopian region, 269
Mascarene, 280
of the Indo-Chinese sub-region, 333
of Indo-Malay sub-region, 345
Fiji, Tonga, and Samoa, 443
Society and Marquesas, 444
New Caledonia and New Hebrides, 445
Sandwich, 446
of New Zealand sub-region, 453
Norfolk, 453
Lord Howe’s, 454
Chatham, 454
Auckland, 455
Issiodromys, European Pliocene, 113

J.

Jacchus, in Brazilian eaves, 144
Japan and North China, physical features of,
221 a
southern extremity of perhaps belongs to
the Oriental region, 226

INDEX.

Japan, general character of the fauna of, 230
former land-connexions of, 231
Java, mammalia of, 349
productions of, well-known, 350
birds of, 351
representative species of birds in, 352
origin of the anomalous features of its
fauna, 352
Sumatra and Borneo, their geographical
contrasts and zoological peculiarities
explained, 357
Junonia, European Miocene, 167

K.

Kakapoe, of New Zealand, 455

Kangaroos, extinct in Australia, 157

Kerguelen sia ie apterous insects of, 211
(note

Kerodon, in Brazilian caves, 144

8S. American Pliocene, 147

King-fisher, racquet-tailed, of New Guinea,
figure of, 415

Kiwi of New Zealand, 455

Koodoo antelope, figure of, 261

L.

Lacertilia, classification of, 99
Ladrone Islands, birds of, 444
Lagomys, European Pliocene, 113

European Miocene, 120
Lagostomus, in Brazilian caves, 145

S. American Pliocene, 147
Lake Baikal, seals of, 218
Land and water, proportions of, 35
Land and fresh-water shells, antiquity of the

genera of, 168

Land-shells, Paleozoic, 169

Palearctic, 190

of Madeira, 209 _

of the Cape Verd Islands, 215

of the Ethiopian region, 257

of W. Africa, 265

of Madagascar and the Mascarene Islands,

285

of Indo-Malay sub-region, 344

of the Australian region, 407

of Sandwich Islands, 446

of New Zealand, 459
Lanius, European Miocene, 161
Laopithecus, N .American Tertiary, 133
Laornis, N. American Cretaceous, 164
Lemuria, a hypothetical land, 76
Lamuravide, N. American Tertiary, 133
Lemuravus, N. American Tertiary, 133
Lemuride, European Eocene, 124
Lemuroidea, range of Ethiopian genera of, 300

range of Oriental genera of, 371
Lepictis, N. American Tertiary, 133
Lepidoptera, cosmopolitan families of, 177

table of Palearctic families of, 238

S. African, 268

table of Ethiopian families of, 299

of the Oriental region, 318

table of Oriental families of, 369

of the Australian region, 404

table of Australian families of, 472
Leptarchus, N. American Tertiary, 135
Leptauchenia, N. American Tertiary, 138
Leptochwrus, N. American Tertiary, 137
Leptodon, Miocene of Greece, 116
Leptomeryx, N. American Tertiary, 138
Leptoptilus, European Miocene, 162

INDEX.

Leptosomus, allied form in European Eocene,168
Leptosomus of Madagascar, 278
figure of, 279
Leptotherium, in Brazilian caves, 144
Lepus, in Brazilian caves, 145
_$. American Pliocene, 147
Lestodon, 8. American Pliocene, 147
Lewis, Mr. George, his collection of Japan
insects, 228
Lebellula, from the Lias, 167
Lilljeborg, Professor, on classification of the
Rodentia, 90
Limnea, Eocene, 169
European Secondary, 169
Limnatornis, European Miocene, 161
Limnocyon, N. American Tertiary, 134
Limnohyus, N. American Tertiary, 136
Limnotheride, N. American Tertiary, 133
Limnotherium, N. American Tertiary, 133
Listriodon, European Miocene, 119
Lithomys, European Miocene, 120
Lithornis, European Eocene, 163
Lizards, classification of, 99
Tertiary, 165
wide range of a species in Polynesia, 448
Loncheres, in Brazilian caves, 145
Lonchophorus, in Brazilian caves, 145
Lophiodon, European Eocene, 125
N. American Tertiary, 136
Lophiotherium, N. American Tertiary, 136
Lord Howe’s Island, birds of, 453
Loxomylus, Pliocene of Antilles, 148
Lund, Dr., his researches in caves of Brazil, 143
Lutra, European Miocene, 118
Indian Miocene, 121
Iycena, Miocene of Greece, 115
Lyre-bird, figure of, 441
M.
Macacus, European Pliocene, 112
Miocene of Greece, 115
Indian Miocene, 121
supposed in European Eocene, 125
Machairodus, 110, 111
Miocene of Greece, 115
European Miocene, 118
Indian Miocene, 121
N. American Tertiary, 134
in Brazilian caves, 144
S. American Pliocene, 146
Macrauchenia, 8S. American Pliocene, 146
Macrotherium, Miocene of Greece, 116
European Miocene, 121
Madagascar, extinct birds of, 164
description of, 272
mammalia of, 272
birds of, 274
reptiles of, 279
amphibia of, 280
extinct fauna of, 282
general remarks on insect fauna of, 284
Madeira, birds of, 208
land shells of, 208
beetles of, 210
wingless insects numerous in, 21
how stocked with animals, 213
Malacca, Sumatra, and Borneo, zoological
unity of, 353
comparison of mammalia, 354
of birds, 355
Malagasy sub-region, description of, 272
mammalia of, 272
birds of, 274
illustration of zoology of, 278

497

Malagasy sub-region, reptiles of, 279
amphibia of, 280
extinct fauna of, 282, 289
insects of, 282
early history of, 286
Malaya ea Indo-Malaya, terms defined, 345
(note
Malavan forms of life reappearing in West
Africa, 263
fauna, probable origin of, 359
resemblances to that of Madagascar aud
Ceylon explained, 361
Malta, Post-Pliocene fauna of, 114
formerly joined to Africa, 201
fossil elephants of, 201
birds of, 206 (note)
Mammalia, means of dispersal of, 10
as limited by climate, 11
as limited by rivers, 12
how far limited by the sea, 13
dispersed by ice-floes and drift-wood, 14
means of dispersal of aquatic, 15
of most importance in determining zoo-
logical regions, 57
classification of, 85
birthplace and migrations of some families
of, 142, 153
cosmopolitan groups of, 176
of the Palearctic region, 181
of the European sub-region, 192
of the Mediterranean sub-region, 202
of the Siberian sub-region, 217
characteristic of Western Tartary, 218
of the Manchurian sub-region, 222
Palearctic genera of, in the Manchurian
sub-region, 222
Oriental genera of, on borders of same
sub-region, 223
peculiar to Japan, 223
characteristic of N. W. China and Mongolia,
226
table of Palearctic families of, 234
range of Palearctic genera of, 239
of the Ethiopian region, 253
absence of certain important groups, 253
of the East African sub-region, 260
of West Africa, 262
of S. Africa, 267
of Madagascar, 272
table of Ethiopian families of, 294
table of Ethiopian genera of, 300
of the Oriental region, 315
range of the genera inhabiting the Indian
sub-region, 322
of Ceylon, 327
of the Indo-Chinese sub-region, 330
of the Indo-Malayan sub-region, 336
illustration of characteristic Malayan,
336
of the Philippine Islands, 345
table of Oriental families of, 365
table of Oriental genera of, 371
of Australian region, 390
of the Papuan Islands, 410
of the Molueeas, 417
of Timor group, 422
of Celebes, 427
of Australia, 439
illustration of, 439
of New Zealand, 450
table of families of Australian, 470
table of genera of Australian, 475
Mammal, the most ancient American, 134
Mammalia, extinct, of Old World, 107
extinct, of historic period, 110
extinct, comparative age of in Europe, 127

498

INDEX.

Mammalia, extinct, of the New World, 129
extinct, of N. America and Europe, com-
pared, 141
original birth-place of some families and
genera, 142, 153
of the secondary period, 160
Manatus, N. American Post-Pliocene, 130
Manchurian sub-region, description of, 220
mammalia of, 222
birds of, 223
reptiles and amphibia of, 227
fresh-water fish of, 227
insects of, 227
coleoptera of, 228
Marquesas Islands, birds of, 443 .
Marsh, Mr., on improvability of Asiatic and
African deserts, 200
on camels and goats as destructive to
vegetation, 200
Marsupials, classification of, 91
N. American Post-Pliocene, 130
European Miocene, 121
first migration to America, 155
diversified forms of, 391
of America prove no connexion with
Australia, 399
list of Australian genera of, 476
Martes, N. American Tertiary, 135
Mascarene Islands, zoology of, 280
extinct fauna of, 282
gigantic land-tortoises of, 289
Mastodon, European Pliocene, 113
Miocene of Greece, 116
European Miocene, 120
in Brazilian caves, 144
S. American Pliocene, 147
Indian Miocene, 123
N American Post-Pliocene, 130
N. American Tertiary, 138
Mauritius, zoology of, 280
reptiles of, 281
McCoy, Professor, on
Victoria, 466
Mediterranean, recent changes in, 39
sub-region, description of, 199
mammalia of, 202
birds of, 203
reptiles and amphibia of, 204
fresh-water fish of, 205
insects of, 205
islands of, 206
sea not separating distinct faunas, 201
Megacerops, N. American Tertiary, 137
Megalomeryv, N. American Tertiary, 138
Megalocnus, fossil in Cuba, 148
Megalonyx, N. American Post-Pliocene, 130
in Brazilian eaves, 145
S. American Pliocene, 147
Megalostoma, Eocene, 169
Megamys, S. Ainerican Eocene, 148
Meguspira, European Tertiary, 169
Megatheride, in Brazilian caves, 145
Megatheriwm, N. American Post-Pliocene, 139
in Brazilian caves, 145
S. American Pliocene, 147
Melania, European secondary, 169
Meleagris, N. American Miocene, 163
Mellivora, Indian Miocene, 121 :
Melolonthidium, Oolitic insect, 167
Meniscotherium, N. American Tertiary, 138
Menotherium, N. American Tertiary, 133
Mephitis, in Brazilian eaves, 144
Merycnus, N. American Tertiary, 138
Merychippus, N. American Tertiary, 135
Merychocherus, N. American Tertiary, 138
Merycodus, N. American Tertiary, 138

Paleontology of

Merycopotamus, Indian Miocene, 122
Merycotherium of Siberian drift, 112
Mesacodon, N. American Tertiary, 133
Mesohippus. N. American Tertiary, 135
Mesonyzx, N. American Tertiary, 134
Mesopithecus, Miocene of Greece, 115
Meyer, Dr. A. B., on reptiles and amphibia ot
New Guinea, 415 ‘
Microlestes, oldest European mammal, 160
Micromeryzr, European Miocene, 120
Microsyops, N. American Tertiary, 133
Microtheriuwm, European Miocene, 120
Middendorf, on extreme northern birds, 219
Migrating birds, in which region to be placed,
185
Migration of animals, 10
general phenomena of, 18
of birds, 19
of birds in Europe, 19
probable origin of, 22
of birds in India and China, 23
of birds in N. America, 23
changes in extent of, 24
of birds in 8S. Temperate America, 25
general remarks on, 25
Milvus, European Miocene, 162
Miocene fauna of the Old World, 114
fauna of Greece, 115
fauna of Greece, summary of, 116
fauna of Central Europe, 117
deposits of Siwalik Hills, 121
faunas of Europe and Asia, general obser-
vations on, 123
Miohippus, N. American Tertiary, 135
Mivart, Professor, on classification of primates,
86
on classification of insectivora, 87
on classification of amphibia, 101
Moles almost wholly Palearctic, 181
Mole-rat, of W. Tartary, 218
Mollusea, means of dispersal of, 30
classification of, 104
groups selected for study, 104
Molnueeas, zoology of, 417
birds of, 419
reptiles of, 420
insects of, 420
peculiarities of fauna of, 421
Monkeys on the high Himalayas, 12
fossilin N. American Miocene
in E. Thibet, 222
abundance of in the Oriental region, 315
Monotremata, classification of, 91
list of Australian genera of, 477
‘‘More-pork” of Australia, figure of, 442
Morotherium, N. American Pliocene, 140
Motacilla, European Miocene, 161
Mound -builders, peculiar Australian birds,
393
Moupin, position and zoology of, 221
Muride, 8. American Pliocene, 147
Murray, Mr. Andrew, on zoolozical region, 6)
Mustela, Miocene of Greece, 115
European Miocene, 118
S. American Pliocene, 146
Mustelidmw, in Brazilian eaves, 144
Mylodon, N. American Post-Pliocene, 130
S. American Pliocene, 147
Myogale, European Miocene, 118
Myomorphus, fossil in Cuba
Myopotamus, in Brazilian caves, 145
Myoxus, European Miocene, 120
European Eocene, 126
Mysarachne, Buropean Miocene, 118
Mysops, N. American Eocene, 140
Myaophagus, N. American Post-Pliocene, 130

INDEX.

499

N.

Nanohyus, N. American Tertiary, 137
Nosua, in Brazilian caves, 144
Nearctic region, defined, 79
subdivisions of, 80
distinct from Palearctic, 79
Necrornis, European Miocene, 161
Neotropical region, defined, 78
subdivisions of, 78
relations of W. African sub-region with, 265
Nesodon, S. American Piiocene, 147
Newton, Professor, on position of Menuride
and Atrichiide, 95
on birds of Iceland, 198
New Caledonia, birds of, 444
New Guinea, zoology of, 409
mammalia of, 410
birds of, 411
peculiarities of its ornithology, 413
illustration of ornithology of, 414
reptiles and amphibia of, 415
insects of, 416
New Zealand, objections to making a primary
zoological region, 62
extinct birds of, 164
sub-region, description of, 449
compared with British Isles, 449
mammalia of, 451
islets of, 453
illustration of ornithology of, 455
reptiles of, 456
amphibia of, 457
fresh-water fish of, 457
insects of, 458
Longicorns of, 458
Myriapoda of, 458
land-shells of, 459
ancient fauna of, 460
origin of fauna of, 460
poverty of insects in, 462
relations of insect-fauna and flora, 472
Nicobar Islands, their zoological relations, 332
Nightingale, migration of the, 21
Norfolk Island, birds of, 453
North America, remarks on Post-Pliocene
fauna of, 130
Post-Pliocene fauna of, partly derived from
8S. America, 131
extinct birds of, 163
North Africa, zoological relations of, 202
Notharctos, N. American Tertiary, 133
Notornis of New Zealand, 455
Nototheriwm, Australian Post-Tertiary, 157

oO.

Ochotherium, in Brazilian caves, 145
Octodontide, S. American Pliocene, 147
Ophidia, classification of, 99
Opisthocomus, Brazilian caves, 164
Opossum, extinct, in European Miocene, 121
Oreodon, N. American Tertiary, 138
Oreodontide, N. American Tertiary, 138
Oriental region, defined, 75

subdivisions of, 75

description of, 314

zoological features of, 315

mammialia of, 315

birds of, 316

reptiles of, 317

amphibia of, 317

fresh-water fishes of, 318

summary of vertebrata, 318

insects of, 318

sub-regions of, 321

Oriental region, concluding remarks on, 362
tables of distribution of animals of, 364
Oriental relations of W. African sub-region, 265
Oriental and Palearctic faunas once identical,
362 .
Oriental and Ethiopian faunas, cause of their
resemblances, 363
Orohippus, N. American Tertiary, 136
Ostrich, Miocene of N. India, 162
Vtaria, Kuropean Miocene, 118
Ovibos, N. American’ Post-Pliocene, 130
Oxen, birthplace and migrations of, 155
Palearctic, 182
Oxyena, N. American Tertiary, 134
Oxygomphus, European Miocene, 118
Oxymycterus, in Brazilian caves, 145
S. American Pliocene, 147

Ps

Pachyena, N. American Tertiary, 134
Pachynolophus, European Eocene, 126
Pachytherium, in Brazilian caves, 145
Palearctic region, defined, 71
subdivisions of, 71
general features of, 180
zoological characteristics of, 181
has few peculias families, 181
mammalia of, 181
birds of, 182
high degree of speciality of, 184
reptiles and amphibia of, 186
fresh-water fish of, 186
summary of vertebrata of, 186
insects of, 186
coleoptera of, 187
number of coleoptera of, 189
land-shells of, 190
sub-regions of, 190
general conclusions on the fauna of, 231
tables of distribution of animals of, 233
Paleeucodcn, N. Arcerican Tertiary, 133
Palewetus, European Miocene, 162
Paleegithalus, European Eocene, 162
Palelodus, European Miovene, 162
Paleocastor, N. American Tertiary, 140
Paleocercus, European Miocene, 162
Paleochwrus, European Miocene, 119
Paicwohierax, European Miocene, 162
Palwolagus, N. American Tertiary, 140
Paleolama,S, American Pliocene, 147
Palewomephitis, European Miocene, 118
Paleomeryx, Europear Miocene, 120
Poleomys, European Miocene, 121
Paleontina oolitica, Oolitic insect, 167
Paleontology, 107
how best studied in its bearing on geo-
graphical distribution, 168
as an introduction to the study of geo-
graphical distribution, concluding re-
marks on, 169
Paleonyctis, European Eocene, 125
Paleoperdiz, European Miocene, 161
Paleophrynus, European Miocene, 166
Palworeas, Miocene of Greece, 116
Palwortyx, European Miocene, 161
Palworyx, Miocene of Greece, 116
Paleospalax, 111
European Miocene, 117
Paleosyops, N. American Tertiary, 136
Paleotheridw, European Eocene, 12£
Palewotherium, European Eocene, 125
S. American Eocene, 148
Palewotragus, Miocene of Greece, 116
Paleotringa, N. American Cretaceous, 164

500

Palapterygide of New Zealand, 164
Palestine, birds of, 203
Paloplotheriwm, European Miocene, 119
European Eocene, 125
Paludina, Eocene, 169
European Secondary, 169
Pampas, Pliocene deposits of, 146
Panda, of Nepaul and E. Thibet, 222
Himalayan, figure of, 331
Panolax, N. American Tertiary, 140
Papuan Islands, zoology of, 409
Paradise-bird, twelve-wired, figure of, 414
Parahippus, N. American Tertiary, 136
Paramys, N. American Eocene, 140
Parroquet, Papuan, figure of, 415
Parrots, classification of, 96
Passeres, arrangement of, 94
range of Palearctic genera of, 243
range of Ethiopian genera of, 306
range of Oriental genera of, 375
range of Australian genera of, 478
Patriofelis, N. American Tertiary, 134
Peculiar groups, geographically, how defined,
184
Pelagornis, European Miocene, 162
Pelonax, N. American Tertiary, 138
Peratherium, European Miocene, 121
European Eocene, 126
Percherus, N. American Tertiary, 137
Perim Island, extinct mammalia of, 122
probable southern limit of old Palearctic
land, 362
Perissodactyla, N. American Tertiary, 135
Persia, birds of, 204
Phascolomys, Australian Post-Tertiary, 157
Phasianus, Miocene of Greece, 116
European Post-Pliocene, 161
Pheasants, in European Miocene, 161
golden, of N. China, 226
eared, of Mongolia, 226
Phenacodus, N. American Tertiary, 138
Philippine Islands, mammals of, 345
birds of, 346
origin of peculiar fauna of, 348
Phocidew, N. American Tertiary, 140
Phyllomys, in Brazilian caves, 145
Phyllostomide, in Brazilian caves, 144
Physical changes affecting distribution, 7
Physeter, European Pliocene, 112
Picarie, arrangement of, 95
range of Palearctic genera of, 247
range of Ethiopian genera of, 309
range of Oriental genera of, 381
range of Australian genera of, 482
Picus, European Miocene, 161
Pigeons, classification of, 96
remarkable development of, in the Aus-
tralian region, 395
crested, of Australia, figure of, 441
Pigs, power of swimming, 13
Pikermi, Miocene fauna of, 115
Pittide, abundant in Borneo, 355
Plagivlophus, European Eocene, 126
Planorbis, Europeau Secondary, 169
Eocene, 169
Platycercidew, gorgeously-coloured Australian
parrots, 394
Platygonus, N. American Post-Pliocene, 130
Plesiarctomys, European Eocene, 126
Plesiomeryx, European Eocene, 126
Plesiosorex, European Miocene, 118
Pliocene period, Old World, mammalia of, 112
Pliocene and Post-Pliocene faunas, of Europe,
general conclusions from, 113
of N. America, 132
of S. America, 146

INDEX.

Pliocene and Post-Pliocene faunas of Aus-
tralia, 157

Pliohippus, N. American Tertiary, 135
Pliolophus, European Eocene, 126
Pliopithecus, European Miocene, 117
Pabrotheriwm, N. American Tertiary, 138
Polynesian sub-region, description of, 442

birds of, 443

reptiles of, 447
Post-Pliocene, mammalia of Europe, 110

remains imply changes of physical geo-

graphy in Europe, 111

fauna of N. America, 129

fauna of N. America, remarks on, 130
Potamogale of West Africa, figure of, 264
Potamotherium, European Miocene, 118
Potto of West Africa, figure of, 264
Praotherium, N. American Post-Pliovene, 130
Primates, classification of, 86

probable birthplace of, 153

range of Palearctic genera of, 239

range of Ethiopian genera of, 300

range of Oriental genera of, 371

range of Australian genera of, 475
Primates, European Pliocene, 112

Miocene of Greece, 115

European Miocene, 117

Indian Miocene, 121

European Eocene, 124

N. American Tertiary, 132

of Brazilian caves, 144
Prince’s Island, birds of, 266
Prionidium, Oolitic insects, 167
Pristiphoca, in European Pliocene, 112
Proboscidea, classification of, 90

range of Ethiopian genus, 303

range of Oriental genus, 374
Proboscidea, European Pliocene, 113

Miocene of Greece, 116

European Miocene, 120

Indian Miocene, 122

N. American Post-Pliocene, 130

N. American Tertiary, 138

of Brazilian caves, 144

8. American Pliocene, 147
Procamelus, N. American Post-Pliocene, 130

N. American Tertiary, 138
Procyon, N. American Post-Pliocene, 130
Procyonide, in Brazilian caves, 144
Promephitis, Miocene of Greece, 115

European Miocene, 118
Promerops of Hast Africa, figure of, 261
Propaleotherium, European Eocene, 126
Protemnodon, Australian Post-Tertiary, 157
Protohippus, N. American Tertiary, 135
Protomeryx, N. American Tertiary, 138
Protopithecus, in Brazilian caves, 144
Prototomus, N. American Tertiary, 134
Protornis, European Kocene, 162
Pseudelurus, Furopean Miocene, 118
Pseudocyon, European Miocene, 118
Psittaci, classification of, 96

range of Ethiopian genera of, 311

range of Oriental genera of, 383

range of Australian genera of, 484
Psittacus, European Miocene, 161
Pterocles, European Miocene, 161
Pterodon, European Eocene, 125
Pupa, Eocene, 169
Pupa vetusta, Paleozoic, 169
Pythonide, European Miocene, 165

%

R.

Racoon-dog of N. China, 226
Rana, European Miocene, 166

INDEX.

501

Region, the best term for the primary z0o-
logical divisions, 68
Arctic, why not adopted, 69
Palearctic, defined, 71
Palzarctic, subdivisions of, 71
Ethiopian, defined, 73
Ethiopian, subdivisions of, 73
Oriental, defined, 75
Oriental, subdivisions of, 75
Australian, defined, 77
Australian, subdivisions of, 77
Neotropical, defined, 78
Neotropical, subdivisions of, 78
Nearctic, defined, 79
Nearctic, distinct from Palearctic, 79
Nearctic, subdivisions of, 80
Regions, zoological, 50 és
zoological, how they should be formed, 53
zoological, may be defined by negative or
positive characters, 54
zoological, by what class of animals best
determined, 56
for each class of animals, not advisable,
58
zoological, proposed since 1857, 58
zoological, Mr. Sclater’s, 59
zoological, discussion of those proposed
by various authors, 61
zoological, proportionate richness of, 64
temperate and tropical, well marked in
northern hemisphere, 65
and zones, table of, 66
comparative richness of, 81
and sub-regions, table of, 81
order of succession of the, 173
Representative species, 4
Reptiles, means of dispersal of, 28
classification of, 98
Miocene of Greece, 116
of Indian Miocene deposits, 123
extinct Tertiary, 165
cosmopolitan groups of, 176
peculiar to Palearetic region, 186
of Central Europe, 195
of the Mediterranean sub-region, 204
of Siberian sub-region, 220
of the Manchurian sub-region, 227
table of Palearctic families of, 236
of the Ethiopian region, 254
of the East African sub-region, 260
of West Africa, 264
8. African, 268
of Madagascar, 279
table of Ethiopian families of, 297
of the Oriental region, 317
ofthe Indian sub-region, 326
of Ceylon, 327
of Indo-Chinese sub-region, 331
of Indo-Malay sub-region, 340
table of Oriental families of, 368
of the Australian region, 396
of New Guinea, 415
of the Moluceas, 420
of the Polynesian sub-region, 447
of New Zealand, 456
table of Australian families of, 472
Rhea, in Brazilian caves, 164
Rhinoceros, Post-Pliocene, 112
European Pliocene, 113
Miocene of Greece, 116
Indian Miocene, 122
fossil remains of, at 16,000 feet elevation
in Thibet, 122
fossil in N. China, 123
N. American Tertiary, 136
Rhinoceros-hornbill, figure of, 339

Rhinocerotide, N. American Tertiary, 136
River-hog, of West Africa, figure of, 264
of Madagascar, figure of, 278
Rivers, limiting the range of mammalia, 12
limiting the range of birds, 17
River-scene. in West Africa, 264
Rodentia, classification of, 90
range of Palearctic genera of, 242
range of Ethiopian genera of, 304
range of Oriental genera of, 374
range of Australian genera of, 476
Rodentia, European Pliocene, 113
Miocene of Greece, 116
European Miocene, 120
European Eocene, 126
N. American Post-Pliocene, 130
N. American Tertiary, 139

a of Brazilian caves, 144

S. American Pliocene, 147
of S. American Eocene, 148
Ruff, figure of, 195

8.

Sahara, a debatable land, 251
Saiga, antelope of W. Tartary, 218
Samoa Islands, birds of, 443
Sandwich Islands, birds of, 445
probable past history of, 446
mountain plants of, 446
depth of ocean around, 447
Sand grouse, Pallas, of Mongolia, 226
Sutyrites Reynesii, European Cretaceous In-
sect, 167
Saunders, Mr. Edward, on the Buprestide of
Japan, 229
Scelidotherium, in Brazilian caves, 145
S. American Pliocene, 147
Schistopleurwm, S. American Pliocene, 147
Schweinfurth, Dr., on natural history of Cen-
tra] Africa, 252
on limits of W. African sub-region, 262
(note)
Sciurus, European Miocene, 120
European Eocene, 126
Sciuravus, N. American Eocene, 140
Selater, Mr., on zoological regions, 59
why his six regions are adopted, 63
on birds of Sandwich Islands, 445
Sea, as a barrier to mammalia, 13
Seals, fossil in European Miocene, 118
of Lake Baikal, 218
Secondary formations, mammalian remains
in, 159
Secretary-bird of Africa, figure of, 261
Semnopithecus, European Pliocene, 112
Miocene of Greece, 115
European Miocene, 117
Indian Miocene, 121
Semper, Dr., on Philippine mammalia, 345
Serpentarius, European Miocene, 162
Seychelle Islands, zoology of, 281
amphibia of, 281
Sharp, Dr., on Japan beetles, 229
Sharpe, Mr. R. B., his arrangement of Accipi-
tres, 97
on birds of Cape Verd Islands, 215
Sheep, Palzarctic, 182
Siberia, climate of. 217
Siberian sub-region, description of, 216
mammalia of, 217
birds of, 219
reptiles and amphibia of, 220
insects of, 220
Simocyon, Miocene of Greece, 115

‘

502

Sinopa, N. American Tertiary, 134
Sirenia, classification of, 89
range of Ethiopian genera of, 303
range of Oriental genus, 374
range of Australian genus of, 476
Sirenia, European Pliocene, 112
European Miocene, 119
Sivatherium, Indian Miocene, 122
Siwalik Hills, Miocene deposits of, 121
Smith, Mr. Frederick, on Hymenoptera of
Japan, 230
Snake, at great elevation in Himalayas, 220
Snakes, classification of, 99
Eocene, 165
large proportion of venomous species in
Australia, 396
of New Zealand, 457
Society Islands, birds of, 443
Soricictis, European Miocene, 118
Soricide, European Miocene, 118
South African sub-region, description of, 266
mammialia of, 267
birds of, 267
reptiles of, 268
amphibia of, 268
fresh-water fish of, 268
butterflies of, 268
coleoptera of, 268
summary of its zoology, 269
South America, fossil fauna of, 143
Pliocene deposits of, 146
supposed land connection with Australia,
398
South Australia, peculiar birds of, 441
Species, representative, 4
Speothos, in Brazilian caves, 144
Spermophilus, European Miocene, 120
Sphenodon, in Brazilian caves, 145
Sphinx, in European Oolite, 167
St. Helena, zoological features of, 269
coleoptera of, 270
landshells of, 271
St. Thomas’ Island, birds of, 266
Stations, definition of, 4
Steneofiber, European Miocene, 120
Sthenurus, Australian Post-Tertiary, 157
Strix, European Miocene, 162
Struthiones, arrangement of, 98
range of Ethiopian genera of, 313
range of Australian genera of, 487
Struthious birds, probable origin of, 287
Stylinodontide, N. American Eocene, 139
Stylinodontia, N. American Eocene, 139
Sub-regions, on what principle formed, 80
Palearctic, 191
Ethiopian, 258
Oriental, 321
Australian, 408
Suide, European Miocene, 119
Sula Islands, fauna of, 433
Sus, European Pliocene, 113
Miocene of Greece, 116
European Miocene, 119
Indian Miocene, 122
Swinhoe, Mr, on zoology of Formosa and
Hainan, 332
Symborodon, N. American Tertiary, 137
Synaphodus, European Miocene, 119
Synoplotherium, N. American Tertiary, 134

uu

Tables of distribution of families and genera
explained, 177
Talpa, European Miocene, 117

INDEX.

Tupir, fossilin N. China, 123
Tapirs, birthplace and migrations of, 154
Tapir, Malayan, figure of, 337
Japiride, European Eocene, 125
Yapirus, European Pliocene, 113
Indian Miocene, 122
in Brazilian caves, 144
Tarsier, Malayan, tigure of, 337
Tasmania, comparative zoological poverty of,
441
Taxodon, European Miocene, 118
Telmatobius, N. American Cretaceous, 164
Telmatolestes, N. American Tertiary, 133
Testudo, Miocene of Greece, 116
Indian Miocene, 123
Testudo, great antiquity of the genus, 289
Tetrachus, European Miocene, 117
Tetrao albus, in Italian caverns, 161
Thalassictis, Miocene of Greece, 115
European Miocene, 118
Theridomys, European Miocene, 126
European Eocene, 126
S. American Eocene, 148
Thinohyus, N. American Tertiary, 137
Thinolestes, N. American Tertiary, 133
Thylacinus, Australian Post-Tertiary, 157
Thylacoleo, Australian Post-Tertiary, 157
Tillodontia, N. American Eocene, 159
Tillotheride, N. American Eocene, 139
Tillotherium, N. American Eocene, 139
Timor, physical features of, 389
group, mammialia of, 422
birds of, 422
origin of fauna of, 424
insects of, 426
Tinoceras, N. American Eocene, 139
Titanomys, European Miocene, 121
Titanotherium, N. American Tertiary, 137
Tomarctos, N. American ‘Tertiary, 135
Tonga Islands, birds of, 443
Tortoises, classification of, 100
of Mascarene Islands and Galapagos, 289
Touraco of W. Africa, figure of, 264
Toxodon, 8. American Pliocene, 137
Toxodontide, 8. American Pliocene, 147
Trachytherium, European Miocene, 119
Tragocerus, Miocene of Greece, 116
European Miocene, 120
Tragopan, Himalayan, figure of, 331
Tree-shrew of Borneo, figure of, 337
Tree-kangaroo, figure of, 415
Trichechus, N American Post-Pliocene, 130
Trichoglosside, birds specially adapted to
Australia, 393
Trionyx, Indian Miocene, 123
Miocene and Eocene, 165
Tristan d’Acunha, zoology of, 271
Tristram, Canon, summary of the birds of
Palestine, 203
Trogon, European Miocene, 161
Trogontherium, Post-Pliocene of Europe, 11]
Trucijelis, N. American Post-Pliocene, 129
Tundras of Siberia, greatest extent of, 216
Tupaiide, European Miocene, 118
Turner, Mr., on classification of Edentata, 90
Tylodon, European Eocene, 125
Typotherium, 8. American Pliocene, 147

U.

Uintacyon, N. American Tertiary, 134
Uintatherium, N. American Eocene, 139
Uintornis, N. American Eocene, 163
Unio, European Secondary, 169
Ungulata, classification of, 89

INDEX.

508

Ungulata, antiquity of, 15t

of the Palearctic region, 182

range of Palearctic genera of, 241

range of Ethiopian genera of, 303

range of Oriental genera of, 374

range of Australian genera of, 476
Ungulata, Kuropean Pliocene, 112

Miocene of Greece, 115

European Miocene, 119

Indian Miocene, 121

European Eocene, 125

N. American Post-Pliocene, 130

N. American Tertiary, 135

of Braziliau caves, 144

S. American Pliocene, 146
Urania of Madagascar, 282
Urside, N. American Tertiary, 135

in Brazilian caves, 144
Ursitaxus, Indian Miocene, 121
Ursus, Post-Pliocene, 112

Indian Miocene, 121

.

A

Vanga of Madagascar, figure of, 278
Varanus, Miocene of Greece, 116
Indian Miocene, 123
Vertebrata, summary of Palearctic, 186
summary of Ethiopian, 255
summary of Oriental, 318
summary of Australian, 397
Vespertilio, European Eocene, 125
Viperus, European Miocene, 165
Viverra, European Pliocene, 112
European Miocene, 118
Viverride, European Miocene, 118
European Eocene, 125

W.
Walden, Viscount, on birds of Philippine

Islands, 346
ou birds of Celebes, 428

Washakius, N. American Tertiary, 134
Waterhouse, Mr. G. R., on classification ot
rodentia, 90
on Classification of marsupials, 91
West African sub-region, description of, 262
mammalia of, 262
birds of, 262
Oriental or Malayan element in, 263
river scene with characteristic animals, 264
reptiles of, 264
amphibia of, 264
Oriental and Neotropical relations of, 265
insects of, 265
land-shells of, 265
islands of, 265
West Australia, peculiar birds of, 441
Whydah finch of W. Africa, tigure of, 264
Wollaston, Mr. T. V., on the coleoptera of the
Atlantic Islands, 209
on the wings of the Madeiran beetles, 211
on the origin of the insect fauna of the
Atlantie Islands, 214
on coleoptera of the Cape Verd Islands, 215
on beetles of St. Helena, 270

X.

Xenurus, in Brazilian caves, 145
Xiphodontide, European Miocene, 119

Z.

Zeuglodontide, N. American Tertiary, 140
Zonites priscus, Paleozoic, 169
Zoological characteristics of Palearctic region,
181
Ethiopian region, 252
Oriental region, 315
Australian region, 390
Zoological regions, discussion on, 50

END OF VOL. If,

via

9088 01348 8432